1. 波罗夷篇巴利
1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ
第一波罗夷巴利
1. Paṭhamapārājikaṃ
苏定那诵段的解释巴利
Sudinnabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā
24 从此之后,“那时,在离毗舍离不远的地方”等句子,大部分意思都很浅显。所以,这里不再逐词解释,只对需要说明的地方加以说明。所谓“迦兰陀村”:迦兰陀就是黑鸟,这个村子因为这种鸟而得名。所谓“迦兰陀子”,就是依村得名、被国王认可、拥有四亿财富的迦兰陀富商之子。不过,因为那个村子里还有别的也叫迦兰陀的人,所以先说了“迦兰陀子”,之后又说“富商之子”。所谓“与众多”,就是和许多人一起。所谓“朋友”,就是共同经历苦乐、彼此往来的人;朋友本身就是“朋友众”,即和那些朋友一起。所谓“一同”,就是一起。所谓“因为某件事”,就是因为货物买卖、债务清算、传递消息之类的事务;也有人说,是为了参加迦提迦星宿节的庆祝活动。因为世尊是在迦提迦月白分到达毗舍离的,而那里的迦提迦星宿节庆非常盛大,应当知道他就是为此而去的。巴利
24. Ito paraṃ tena kho pana samayena vesāliyā avidūretiādi yebhuyyena uttānatthaṃ. Tasmā anupadavaṇṇanaṃ pahāya yattha yattha vattabbaṃ atthi, taṃ tadeva vaṇṇayissāma. Kalandagāmoti kalandakā vuccanti kāḷakā, tesaṃ vasena laddhanāmo gāmo. Kalandaputtoti gāmavasena laddhanāmassa rājasammatassa cattālīsakoṭivibhavassa kalandaseṭṭhino putto. Yasmā pana tasmiṃ gāme aññepi kalandanāmakā manussā atthi, tasmā kalandaputtoti vatvā puna seṭṭhiputtoti vuttaṃ. Sambahulehīti bahukehi. Sahāyakehīti sukhadukkhāni saha āyanti upagacchantīti sahāyā, sahāyā eva sahāyakā, tehi sahāyakehi. Saddhinti ekato. Kenacideva karaṇīyenāti kenacideva bhaṇḍappayojanauddhārasāraṇādinā kiccena; kattikanakkhattakīḷākiccenātipi vadanti. Bhagavā hi kattikajuṇhapakkhe vesāliṃ sampāpuṇi. Kattikanakkhattakīḷā cettha uḷārā hoti. Tadatthaṃ gatoti veditabbo.
看见是如何看见的呢?据说,他看见一大群人从城里出来,他们已经吃过早饭,穿着干净的上衣,手里拿着花环、香和涂香,是为了去见佛和听法,就问他们:“你们去哪里?”他们回答:“为了去见佛和听法。”于是他想:“那我也去。”就跟着去了,看见世尊被四众弟子围绕着,用梵音在说法。因此说“看见了……在说法”。“看见后”:就是他看见之后。“他这样想”:这位善家子因为过去所造的福行而受到策励,生起了这样的念头。什么念头呢?就是“我何不也去听法呢?”这里的“我何不”是在表达他的思惟方式。据说,他这样思惟:“这群人一心专注地在听法,啊,但愿我也能听到!”巴利
Addasa khoti kathaṃ addasa? So kira nagarato bhuttapātarāsaṃ suddhuttarāsaṅgaṃ mālāgandhavilepanahatthaṃ buddhadassanatthaṃ dhammasavanatthañca nikkhamantaṃ mahājanaṃ disvā ‘‘kva gacchathā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Buddhadassanatthaṃ dhammasavanatthañcā’’ti. Tena hi ‘‘ahampi gacchāmī’’ti gantvā catubbidhāya parisāya parivutaṃ brahmassarena dhammaṃ desentaṃ bhagavantaṃ addasa. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasa kho…pe… desenta’’nti. Disvānassāti disvāna assa. Etadahosīti pubbe katapuññatāya codiyamānassa bhabbakulaputtassa etaṃ ahosi. Kiṃ ahosi? Yaṃnūnāhampi dhammaṃ suṇeyyanti . Tattha yannūnāti parivitakkadassanametaṃ. Evaṃ kirassa parivitakko uppanno ‘‘yamayaṃ parisā ekaggacittā dhammaṃ suṇāti, aho vatāhampi taṃ suṇeyya’’nti.
那时,迦兰陀子苏定那为什么这里不说“前往世尊那里”,而说“前往那大众那里”呢?因为当时围绕世尊坐着的是身份极为高贵的大众,他来得晚,没法走近世尊坐下,但在大众中的某个位置还能坐下,所以他就直接走向那大众。因此说:“那时,迦兰陀子苏定那前往那大众那里。”“退坐一面的迦兰陀子苏定那这样想”:并不是他刚一坐下就这样想,而是在听了世尊少许与涅槃相关的法谈之后才生起这个念头;不过,这个念头是在他退坐一面时生起的,所以说:“退坐一面的迦兰陀子苏定那这样想。”想了什么呢?就是“正如……”等。巴利
Athakho sudinno kalandaputto yena sā parisāti idha kasmā ‘‘yena bhagavā’’ti avatvā ‘‘yena sā parisā’’ti vuttanti ce. Bhagavantañhi parivāretvā uḷāruḷārajanā mahatī parisā nisinnā, tatra na sakkā iminā pacchā āgatena bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā nisīdituṃ. Parisāya pana ekasmiṃ padese sakkāti so taṃ parisaṃyeva upasaṅkamanto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinno kalandaputto yena sā parisā’’ti. Ekamantaṃ nisinnassa kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa etadahosīti na nisinnamattasseva ahosi, atha kho bhagavato sittayūpasaṃhitaṃ thokaṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā; taṃ panassa yasmā ekamantaṃ nisinnasseva ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisinnassa kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa etadahosī’’ti. Kiṃ ahosīti? Yathā yathā khotiādi.
关于这一点,简略地说:我凡是依照世尊宣说法的样子而了知法,当我这样反复观察时,心里就想:这清净的梵行生活,应当连一天也不让它破损,为了达到临终一念也保持圆满,所以要修得绝对圆满;也应当连一天也不被烦恼的污垢染污,为了达到临终一念也保持清净,所以要修得绝对清净。应当像打磨光亮的贝壳、洗净的贝壳那样,修得洁净无瑕。这对一个住在家里、生活在家庭中的人来说,不容易做到绝对圆满……绝对清净地修行。不如我剃掉头发和胡须,穿上染成黄褐色的、适合修梵行的人穿的衣服,从家里出来,出家过没有家的生活吧。这里,在家人的利益,比如农耕、经商等事业,叫作“在家的事”,而出家生活中没有这些;所以应当知道,出家就是“无家”。那种无家的状态,就是出家。“出家”:就是到处游行修行。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepakathā – ahaṃ kho yena yena ākārena bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, tena tena me upaparikkhato evaṃ hoti yadetaṃ sittayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ caritabbaṃ, ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ. Saṅkhalikhitaṃ likhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi; tasmā pabbajjā ‘‘anagāriyā’’ti ñātabbā. Taṃ anagāriyaṃ pabbajjaṃ. Pabbajeyyanti paribbajeyyaṃ.
25 苏定那没有在大众还没散去的时候就向世尊请求出家。为什么呢?因为那里有他很多亲属、血亲、朋友和熟人,他们可能会抓住他的胳膊把他拽走,说:“你是父母唯一的儿子,你不能出家。”那样就会成为他出家的障碍。所以,他等大众一起起身离开,走了一段路之后,再借某个身体上的需要折返回来,走到世尊面前请求出家。因此说:“那时,迦兰陀子苏定那在大众散去不久后……请世尊让我出家。”巴利
25.Aciravuṭṭhitāya parisāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti sudinno avuṭṭhitāya parisāya na bhagavantaṃ pabbajjaṃ yāci. Kasmā? Tatrassa bahū ñātisālohitā mittāmaccā santi, te ‘‘‘tvaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ ekaputtako, na labbhā tayā pabbajitu’nti bāhāyampi gahetvā ākaḍḍheyyuṃ, tato pabbajjāya antarāyo bhavissatī’’ti saheva parisāya uṭṭhahitvā thokaṃ gantvā puna kenaci sarīrakiccalesena nivattitvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamma pabbajjaṃ yāci. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinno kalandaputto aciravuṭṭhitāya parisāya…pe… pabbājetu maṃ bhagavā’’ti.
世尊则因为自从罗睺罗王子出家以后,就不让没有得到父母允许的儿子出家,所以问他:苏定那,你得到父母允许出家了吗?巴利
Bhagavā pana yasmā rāhulakumārassa pabbajitato pabhuti mātāpitūhi ananuññātaṃ puttaṃ na pabbājeti, tasmā naṃ pucchi – ‘‘anuññātosi pana tvaṃ sudinna mātāpitūhi…pe… pabbajjāyā’’ti.
26 从此以后,按照经文顺序继续讲下去,在“办完那件事”这里,应当这样理解它的意思:就是彻底放下担子,把那件事完成;因为一个真心想出家的人,心不会转向货物买卖、讨债、送信这类事情,也不会转向看星象、过节庆之类的事。在“阿妈、阿爹”里,“阿妈”是在叫母亲,“阿爹”是在叫父亲。“你就是”:意思就是你就是。“独子”:就是唯一的儿子,你没有别的哥哥或弟弟。这里本来该说“独子”,但出于怜爱,说成了“独子儿”。“可爱”:能令喜悦生起;“可意”:能令心意增长;“安乐长大”:安乐地被养育长大,意为安乐地成长;“安乐被抚育”:安乐地被抚育。从出生时起,就被乳母抱在怀中,抱在膝上抚养,坐着马车、象车等孩童玩具嬉戏,吃着上妙美食,安乐地被抚育。巴利
26. Ito paraṃ pāṭhānusāreneva gantvā taṃ karaṇīyaṃ tīretvāti ettha evamattho veditabbo – dhuranikkhepeneva taṃ karaṇīyaṃ niṭṭhāpetvāti; na hi pabbajjāya tibbacchandassa bhaṇḍappayojanauddhārasāraṇādīsu vā nakkhattakīḷāyaṃ vā cittaṃ namati. Amma tātāti ettha pana ammāti mātaraṃ ālapati; tātāti pitaraṃ. Tvaṃ khosīti tvaṃ kho asi. Ekaputtakoti ekova puttako; añño te jeṭṭho vā kaniṭṭho vā natthi. Ettha ca ‘‘ekaputto’’ti vattabbe anukampāvasena ‘‘ekaputtako’’ti vuttaṃ. Piyoti pītijananako. Manāpoti manavaḍḍhanako. Sukhedhitoti sukhena edhito; sukhasaṃvaḍḍhitoti attho. Sukhaparihatoti sukhena parihato; jātakālato pabhuti dhātīhi aṅkato aṅkaṃ haritvā dhāriyamāno assakarathakādīhi bālakīḷanakehi kīḷamāno sādurasabhojanaṃ bhojiyamāno sukhena parihato.
孩子苏定那,你根本不知道什么是苦。孩子苏定那,你对苦连一丁点儿、极微小的部分都不了解;或者说,你从来没有用苦来感受过任何东西。这里是用属格表达工具格的意思,而“知道”是在“感受”的意义上用的。另一种解释是:你从来没有忆念过任何苦。这里是用属格表达宾格的意思,而“知道”是在“忆念”的意义上用的。在这两种解释里,都应该看到前一个词和后一个词之间同格关系的省略。这一切都要依据语法学来理解。即使因为死亡,我们也会不情愿地和你分离——意思是:即使在我们还活着的时候你死了,因为那个死亡的缘故,我们也是不情愿的、不甘心的、不是出于自己意愿地和你分离;或者说,我们会不得不面对和你的别离。那么,我们凭什么——既然如此,那到底是什么理由,让我们会允许你活着去出家呢?或者说,我们到底凭什么理由,会准许你活着去出家呢?这里应该这样理解其含义。巴利
Na tvaṃ, tāta sudinna, kiñci dukkhassa jānāsīti tvaṃ tāta sudinna kiñci appamattakampi kalabhāgaṃ dukkhassa na jānāsi; atha vā kiñci dukkhena nānubhosīti attho. Karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, anubhavanatthe ca jānanā; atha vā kiñci dukkhaṃ nassarasīti attho. Upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, saraṇatthe ca jānanā. Vikappadvayepi purimapadassa uttarapadena samānavibhattilopo daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena ñātabbaṃ. Maraṇenapi mayaṃ te akāmakā vinā bhavissāmāti sacepi tava amhesu jīvamānesu maraṇaṃ bhaveyya, tena te maraṇenapi mayaṃ akāmakā anicchakā na attano ruciyā, vinā bhavissāma; tayā viyogaṃ vā pāpuṇissāmāti attho. Kiṃ pana mayaṃ tanti evaṃ sante kiṃ pana kiṃ nāma taṃ kāraṇaṃ yena mayaṃ taṃ jīvantaṃ anujānissāma; atha vā kiṃ pana mayaṃ tanti kena pana kāraṇena mayaṃ taṃ jīvantaṃ anujānissāmāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
27 就在那个地方,意思是:就在父母不允许他待的那个地方。没有间隔,意思是:没有被任何铺垫的东西隔开。巴利
27.Tatthevāti yattha naṃ ṭhitaṃ mātāpitaro nānujāniṃsu, tattheva ṭhāne. Anantarahitāyāti kenaci attharaṇena anatthatāya.
28 “去享受吧”的意思是:把歌舞、戏剧等安排好之后,在那里和同伴们一起随心所欲地让感官活动、游走,也就是“把这些那些快乐都带来”。另一种说法是,“去享受吧”的意思是:把歌舞、戏剧等安排好之后,在那里和同伴们一起嬉戏、游乐、欢娱、玩耍。“享受诸欲”的意思是:和自己的妻儿一起享用财富。“修造福德”的意思是:以佛、法、僧为对象,做布施、供养等能净化善趣之路的善业。“他沉默了”的意思是:为了打断谈话的延续,他陷入了无话可说的状态。那时,他的父母说了三遍都没得到回应,就叫来他的同伴们,说:“你们这位同伴想出家,去拦住他。”那些同伴也走到他跟前,同样劝了三遍,他对他们也依然沉默。因此说:“那时,苏定那·迦兰陀子的同伴们……他沉默了。”巴利
28.Paricārehīti gandhabbanaṭanāṭakādīni paccupaṭṭhāpetvā tattha sahāyakehi saddhiṃ yathāsukhaṃ indriyāni cārehi sañcārehi; ito cito ca upanehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā paricārehīti gandhabbanaṭanāṭakādīni paccupaṭṭhāpetvā tattha sahāyakehi saddhiṃ laḷa, upalaḷa, rama, kīḷassūtipi vuttaṃ hoti. Kāme paribhuñjantoti attano puttadārehi saddhiṃ bhoge bhuñjanto. Puññāni karontoti buddhañca dhammañca saṅghañca ārabbha dānappadānādīni sugatimaggasodhakāni kusalakammāni karonto. Tuṇhī ahosīti kathānuppabandhavicchedanatthaṃ nirālāpasallāpo ahosi. Athassa mātāpitaro tikkhattuṃ vatvā paṭivacanampi alabhamānā sahāyake pakkosāpetvā ‘‘esa vo sahāyako pabbajitukāmo, nivāretha na’’nti āhaṃsu. Tepi taṃ upasaṅkamitvā tikkhattuṃ avocuṃ, tesampi tuṇhī ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā…pe… tuṇhī ahosī’’ti.
29 那时,苏定那的同伴们这样想:如果这个人得不到出家许可就死了,那不会有什么好处。但他出家以后,父母还能时常看到他,我们也能看到他。再说,出家这件事本来就很辛苦,每天都要拿着陶钵去乞食,独坐一处、一日一食、修梵行,实在太难了。而这个人娇生惯养,出身城市人家,他要是受不了这种生活,一定会再回到这里来。走吧,我们去请他父母允许。他们就这样去做了。父母也允许了他。因此说:那时,苏定那·迦兰陀子的同伴们来到苏定那·迦兰陀子的父母那里……你已得到父母允许,可以从家出家,过无家的生活了。巴利
29. Athassa sahāyakānaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘sace ayaṃ pabbajjaṃ alabhamāno marissati na koci guṇo bhavissati. Pabbajitaṃ pana naṃ mātāpitaropi kālena kālaṃ passissanti. Mayampi passissāma. Pabbajjāpi ca nāmesā bhāriyā, divase divase mattikāpattaṃ gahetvā piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ. Ekaseyyaṃ ekabhattaṃ brahmacariyaṃ atidukkaraṃ. Ayañca sukhumālo nāgarikajātiyo, so taṃ carituṃ asakkonto puna idheva āgamissati. Handassa mātāpitaro anujānāpessāmā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Mātāpitaropi naṃ anujāniṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho sudinnassa kalandaputtassa sahāyakā yena sudinnassa kalandaputtassa mātāpitaro…pe… anuññātosi mātāpitūhi agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajjāyā’’ti.
30 “欢喜”就是喜悦。“昂扬”是指因为喜悦而身心振奋。“几天”就是若干天。“增强体力”的意思是:吃合适的食物,又用涂油、沐浴等方法来保养身体,让体力恢复之后,礼拜父母,离开满脸泪水的亲族眷属,前往世尊那里……“世尊,请让我出家。”世尊对站在旁边的一位乞食比丘说:“那么,比丘,你给苏定那出家并授具足戒吧。”“好的,世尊!”那位比丘答应世尊后,就收苏定那·迦兰陀子为弟子,给他出家并授具足戒。因此说:“苏定那·迦兰陀子确实在世尊面前得到了出家,得到了具足戒。”巴利
30.Haṭṭhoti tuṭṭho. Udaggoti pītivasena abbhunnatakāyacitto. Katipāhanti katipayāni divasāni. Balaṃ gāhetvāti sappāyabhojanāni bhuñjanto, ucchādananhāpanādīhi ca kāyaṃ pariharanto, kāyabalaṃ janetvā mātāpitaro vanditvā assumukhaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ pahāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami…pe… pabbājetu maṃ bhante bhagavāti. Bhagavā samīpe ṭhitaṃ aññataraṃ piṇḍacārikaṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tena hi bhikkhu sudinnaṃ pabbājehi ceva upasampādehi cā’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante’’ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā sudinnaṃ kalandaputtaṃ jinadattiyaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ laddhā pabbājesi ceva upasampādesi ca. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘alattha khosudinno kalandaputto bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ, alattha upasampada’’nti.
在这里先停一下。不过,所有的义注里都讲到了出家与具足戒,而我们则要完全按照现存巴利圣典的次第,在《犍度》中来讲说。而且不只是这些,凡是义注师们在《分别》中已经讲过的、又应当在《犍度》或《附随》中讲说的内容,我们都会在各自相应的地方一一讲说。这样讲说时,注释就是顺着圣典的次第来完成的。因此,那些想依据各种判定来了解的人,只要顺着圣典的次第阅读这部律藏注释,各种判定就会很容易明白。巴利
Ettha pana ṭhatvā sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca kathitā. Mayaṃ pana yathāṭhitapāḷivaseneva khandhake kathayissāma. Na kevalañcetaṃ, aññampi yaṃ khandhake vā parivāre vā kathetabbaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyehi vibhaṅgekathitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ tattha tattheva kathayissāma. Evañhi kathiyamāne pāḷikkameneva vaṇṇanā katā hoti. Tato tena tena vinicchayena atthikānaṃ pāḷikkameneva imaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ oloketvā so so vinicchayo suviññeyyo bhavissatīti.
“受具足戒不久”是指:受具足戒之后时间还不长;也就是说,从受具足戒那时起,还没过多久。“这样的”是指这种类型、这种性质的。“头陀功德”是指能抖落烦恼的功德。“受持而住”是指接受、持守之后,依之而行、而生活。“是林野住者”是指舍弃村落附近的住处,依林野头陀支而成为住在森林里的人。“是乞食者”是指拒绝额外的获得,舍弃十四种食,依乞食头陀支而成为乞食者。“是粪扫衣者”是指舍弃居士布施的衣服,依粪扫衣头陀支而成为粪扫衣者。“是次第乞食者”是指舍弃贪欲而行,依次第乞食头陀支而成为次第乞食者;他挨家挨户地入村乞食。“跋耆村”是指跋耆人的村庄,或跋耆地方的村庄。巴利
Acirūpasampannoti aciraṃ upasampanno hutvā; upasampadato nacirakāleyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evarūpeti evaṃvidhe evaṃjātike. Dhutaguṇeti kilesaniddhunanake guṇe. Samādāya vattatīti samādiyitvā gaṇhitvā vattati carati viharati. Āraññiko hotīti gāmantasenāsanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā āraññikadhutaṅgavasena araññavāsiko hoti. Piṇḍapātikoti atirekalābhapaṭikkhepena cuddasa bhattāni paṭikkhipitvā piṇḍapātikadhutaṅgavasena piṇḍapātiko hoti. Paṃsukūlikoti gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā paṃsukūlikadhutaṅgavasena paṃsukūliko hoti. Sapadānacārikoti loluppacāraṃ paṭikkhipitvā sapadānacārikadhutaṅgavasena sapadānacāriko hoti; gharapaṭipāṭiyā bhikkhāya pavisati. Vajjigāmanti vajjīnaṃ gāmaṃ vajjīsu vā gāmaṃ.
在“富裕、大富”等说法里,因为受用之物和资具广大,所以叫“富裕”;也就是说,他们受用的东西和受用的资具都广大、众多、质地优良。因为储存积攒的财富广大,所以叫“大富”。因为每天开销所算的受用广大,所以叫“大受用”。比起其他受用物,金和银本身更丰足,所以叫“金银丰足”。因为作为装饰、能让人生起喜悦的资财资具丰足,所以叫“资财充裕”。因为用来交易周转的财谷丰足,所以叫“财谷丰足”,应当这样理解。巴利
Aḍḍhā mahaddhanātiādīsu upabhogaparibhogūpakaraṇamahantatāya aḍḍhā; ye hi tesaṃ upabhogā yāni ca upabhogūpakaraṇāni, tāni mahantāni bahulāni sārakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nidhetvā ṭhapitadhanamahantatāya mahaddhanā. Mahābhogāti divasaparibbayasaṅkhātabhogamahantatāya mahābhogā. Aññehi upabhogehi jātarūparajatasseva pahūtatāya pahūtajātarūparajatā. Alaṅkārabhūtassa vittūpakaraṇassa pītipāmojjakaraṇassa pahūtatāya pahūtavittūpakaraṇā. Vohāravasena parivattentassa dhanadhaññassa pahūtatāya pahūtadhanadhaññāti veditabbā.
把住处收拾好,意思是把住处整理好;把它安放妥当,使它不会损坏。六十锅左右,是按数量来说,有六十锅。这里每一锅饭够十位比丘吃,那么全部加起来就是六百位比丘的饭。他们送来食物供养:这里“送来”就是“供养”。送来什么?食物。食物本身就是供养,所以叫食物供养,也就是那份食物供养。“送来”的意思是迎面送来,也就是拿着它来到他面前。这有多少呢?六十锅。所以说“他们送来六十锅左右的食物供养”。分给比丘们之后:因为他自己是严格只吃乞食的修行者,想按次第乞食,所以为了给比丘们享用而让出、布施给他们。这位尊者正是为了“比丘们能得到利养,我也不会因为乞食而劳累”这个目的才来的。因此,他做与自己来意相符的事,把食物分给比丘们后,自己就进村乞食了。巴利
Senāsanaṃsaṃsāmetvāti senāsanaṃ paṭisāmetvā; yathā na vinassati tathā naṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapetvāti attho. Saṭṭhimatte thālipāketi gaṇanaparicchedato saṭṭhithālipāke. Ekameko cettha thālipāko dasannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bhattaṃ gaṇhāti. Taṃ sabbampi channaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ bhattaṃ hoti. Bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsūti ettha abhiharīyatīti abhihāro. Kiṃ abhiharīyati? Bhattaṃ. Bhattameva abhihāro bhattābhihāro, taṃ bhattābhihāraṃ. Abhihariṃsūti abhimukhā hariṃsu. Tassa santikaṃ gahetvā āgamaṃsūti attho. Etassa kiṃ pamāṇanti? Saṭṭhi thālipākā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṭṭhimatte thālipāke bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsū’’ti. Bhikkhūnaṃ vissajjetvāti sayaṃ ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikattā sapadānacāraṃ caritukāmo bhikkhūnaṃ paribhogatthāya pariccajitvā datvā. Ayaṃ hi āyasmā ‘‘bhikkhū ca lābhaṃ lacchanti ahañca piṇḍakena na kilamissāmī’’ti etadatthameva āgato. Tasmā attano āgamanānurūpaṃ karonto bhikkhūnaṃ vissajjetvā sayaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
31 亲族婢女,就是亲属家的女仆。隔夜粥,是指放了一夜、超过一夜已经变质发臭的。这里的词义是:因为变质的过失而被压倒,就叫隔夜;隔夜本身就是隔夜的。或者说,这是对超过一夜之物的称呼,也就是隔夜的这个东西,那就是隔夜粥。粥,是指大麦粥。想要丢掉,是因为这东西连奴仆、佣人甚至牛都不值得受用,所以想像丢垃圾一样把它扔到外面去。如果,是指如果这个。姊妹,是用圣者的称呼方式叫那位亲族婢女。应舍弃之法,就是具有应当被丢弃的性质。这里说的是:姊妹,如果这个应当被舍弃、已经放弃执持的东西要丢到外面去,那就把它倒进我这里的钵里吧。巴利
31.Ñātidāsīti ñātakānaṃ dāsī. Ābhidosikanti pārivāsikaṃ ekarattātikkantaṃ pūtibhūtaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – pūtibhāvadosena abhibhūtoti abhidoso, abhidosova ābhidosiko, ekarattātikkantassa vā nāmasaññā esā, yadidaṃ ābhidosikoti, taṃ ābhidosikaṃ. Kummāsanti yavakummāsaṃ. Chaḍḍetukāmā hotīti yasmā antamaso dāsakammakarānampi gorūpānampi aparibhogāraho, tasmā taṃ kacavaraṃ viya bahi chaḍḍetukāmā hoti. Sacetanti sace etaṃ. Bhaginīti ariyavohārena ñātidāsiṃ ālapati. Chaḍḍanīyadhammanti chaḍḍetabbasabhāvaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘bhagini, etaṃ sace bahi chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ nissaṭṭhapariggahaṃ, taṃ idha me patte ākirā’’ti.
那么,能不能这样说呢?这算不算是一种表示或运用言语呢?不算。为什么?因为已经放弃了对它的执持。凡是应当丢弃、已经放弃执持、物主对它已无贪着的东西,对这一切说“给吧、拿来吧、倒在这里吧”,都是可以的。就像出身于圣者世家、地位崇高的护国尊者也曾说:“把这该丢弃的粥倒进我钵里来吧。”所以,像这样该丢弃的东西,或者其他没有被执持的,比如林中的果实、药材之类,全都可以随意让人拿来享用,不必心生疑虑。“手”:为了接取食物而把钵递出去时,从手腕开始算起的两只手。“脚”:从下衣边缘开始算起的两只脚。“音声”:说出“姊妹,如果这个……”这句话时的音声。“取了相”:认取了在家时曾经留意过的形貌特征,认出了、辨认出来了。因为须丁尊者在世尊成道第十二年出家,到第二十年时进入亲族家中乞食,那时他自己已经出家八年;所以那位亲族婢女一见到他并没有认出来,但她取了相。巴利
Kiṃ pana evaṃ vattuṃ labbhati, viññatti vā payuttavācā vā na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Nissaṭṭhapariggahattā. Yañhi chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ nissaṭṭhapariggahaṃ, yattha sāmikā anālayā honti, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘detha āharatha idha ākirathā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tathā hi aggaariyavaṃsiko āyasmā raṭṭhapālopi ‘‘chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ kummāsaṃ idha me patte ākirā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.299) avaca. Tasmā yaṃ evarūpaṃ chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ aññaṃ vā apariggahitaṃ vanamūlaphalabhesajjādikaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ yathāsukhaṃ āharāpetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ. Hatthānanti bhikkhāggahaṇatthaṃ pattaṃ upanāmayato maṇibandhato pabhuti dvinnampi hatthānaṃ. Pādānanti nivāsanantato paṭṭhāya dvinnampi pādānaṃ. Sarassāti ‘‘sacetaṃ bhaginī’’ti vācaṃ nicchārayato sarassa ca. Nimittaṃ aggahesīti gihikāle sallakkhitapubbaṃ ākāraṃ aggahesi sañjāni sallakkhesi. Sudinno hi bhagavato dvādasame vasse pabbajito vīsatime vasse ñātikulaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho sayaṃ pabbajjāya aṭṭhavassiko hutvā; tena naṃ sā ñātidāsī disvāva na sañjāni, nimittaṃ pana aggahesīti.
须丁的母亲那里,她这样说道:因为面对这位已经出家、身份极为尊贵的少主,她不敢直接说出“尊者,您是我的少主须丁吗?”这样的话,便急忙走进屋里,把这件事告诉了须丁的母亲。“喂”是表示告知意义的语气词。“姊妹,如果是真的”这里,“je”是用于称呼的语气词。因为那个地方的人习惯这样称呼女仆,所以这里应当理解为:“尊贵的女仆,如果你说的是真的。”巴利
Sudinnassa mātaraṃ etadavocāti atigarunā pabbajjūpagatena sāmiputtena saddhiṃ ‘‘tvaṃ nu kho me, bhante, ayyo sudinno’’tiādivacanaṃ vattuṃ avisahantī vegena gharaṃ pavisitvā sudinnassa mātaraṃ etaṃ avoca. Yaggheti ārocanatthe nipāto. Sace je saccanti ettha jeti ālapane nipāto. Evañhi tasmiṃ dese dāsijanaṃ ālapanti, tasmā ‘‘tvaṃ, bhoti dāsi, sace saccaṃ bhaṇasī’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
32 在某一个墙根:据说在那个地方,施主们的家里都有厅堂,里面摆好了座位,还备好了饮用水和酸粥。出家人乞食之后,就坐在那里吃。如果愿意,他们也会拿施主家的东西。因此,那个“某一个墙根”也应该理解为某个家族这样一间厅堂里的某一个墙根。因为出家人不会像可怜人那样,坐在不合适的地方吃东西。巴利
32.Aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti tasmiṃ kira dese dānapatīnaṃ gharesu sālā honti, āsanāni cettha paññattāni honti, upaṭṭhāpitaṃ udakakañjiyaṃ; tattha pabbajitā piṇḍāya caritvā nisīditvā bhuñjanti. Sace icchanti, dānapatīnampi santakaṃ gaṇhanti. Tasmā tampi aññatarassa kulassa īdisāya sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti veditabbaṃ. Na hi pabbajitā kapaṇamanussā viya asāruppe ṭhāne nisīditvā bhuñjantīti.
“父亲,难道真有吗?”这里,“有”是“存在”的意思;“难道”是表示疑问和揣度的虚词。这段话的意思是:“父亲苏定那,我们难道有财富吗?我们不该被人说成是穷光蛋,可你却坐在这种地方吃隔夜的凝乳食品。”同样:“父亲苏定那,我们难道有命在吗?我们不该被人说成是死人,可你却坐在这种地方吃隔夜的凝乳食品。”同样:“父亲苏定那,我想,你心里应该是依着教法得到了沙门的功德吧,所以你虽然是被美味滋养长大的,却能面不改色地把这令人恶心的隔夜凝乳食品当成甘露一样吃下去。”巴利
Atthi nāma tātāti ettha atthīti vijjamānatthe; nāmāti pucchanatthe maññanatthe ca nipāto. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘atthi nu kho, tāta sudinna, amhākaṃ dhanaṃ, na mayaṃ niddhanāti vattabbā, yesaṃ no tvaṃ īdise ṭhāne nisīditvā ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasi’’; tathā ‘‘atthi nu kho, tāta sudinna, amhākaṃ jīvitaṃ, na mayaṃ matāti vattabbā, yesaṃ no tvaṃ īdise ṭhāne nisīditvā ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasi’’; tathā ‘‘atthi maññe, tāta sudinna, tava abbhantare sāsanaṃ nissāya paṭiladdho samaṇaguṇo, yaṃ tvaṃ subhojanarasasaṃvaḍḍhitopi imaṃ jigucchaneyyaṃ ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ amatamiva nibbikāro paribhuñjissasī’’ti.
那位居士被痛苦逼得没法把话完整说清楚,只说了这么一句:“苏定那啊,你竟然要吃隔夜粥吗?”
文字分析家们指出这里的一个语法特点:因为“没法相信、没法接受”这个意思,在“atthi nāma”这个词前面搭配的情况下,“paribhuñjissasi(你将吃)”用了未来时态。这句话的意思是:“竟然有……你还要吃”,这种事我连亲眼见到都不敢相信,也没法接受。
其中“ābhidosika(隔夜的)”的意思是:这隔夜粥是从你家里拿来的。也有写成“tatoyan”的版本。还有人读作“tadāyan”,那就不对了。
“往自己父亲的住处”就是往自己父亲的住处去;长老因为对父亲有亲情,就变得顺从,于是去了。
“接受了”是说:长老虽然是只接受最上等食物的头陀行者,但他心想:“如果我连一顿饭都不接受,他们一定会非常难过”,于是出于对亲属的怜悯就接受了。巴利
So pana gahapati dukkhābhitunnatāya etamatthaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vattumasakkonto ‘‘atthi nāma, tāta sudinna, ābhidosikaṃ kummāsaṃ paribhuñjissasī’’ti ettakameva avoca. Akkharacintakā panettha imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vadanti – anokappanāmarisanatthavasena etaṃ atthināmasadde upapade ‘‘paribhuñjissasī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Tassāyamattho – atthi nāma…pe… paribhuñjissasi, idaṃ paccakkhampi ahaṃ na saddahāmi na marisayāmīti. Tatāyaṃ ābhidosikoti tato tava gehato ayaṃ ābhidosiko kummāso laddhoti attho. Tatoyantipi pāṭho. Tadāyantipi paṭhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Yena sakapitu nivesananti yena sakassa pitu attano pitu nivesananti attho; thero pitari pemeneva subbaco hutvā agamāsi. Adhivāsesīti thero ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikopi samāno ‘‘sace ekabhattampi na gahessāmi, ativiya nesaṃ domanassaṃ bhavissatī’’ti ñātīnaṃ anukampāya adhivāsesi.
33 把“涂抹”(opuñjāpetvā)理解为“让人涂上、让人抹上”。“一金币”(ekaṃ hiraññaṃ)里的“金币”,要理解为迦哈波那钱币。“人”(puriso)要理解为不高不矮、中等身材的人。“覆盖物”(tirokaraṇīyaṃ)是依处格,表示作用,意思是用布幔或围墙围起来;也可以解释为“用它来遮盖”,所以叫覆盖物,也就是把它围起来,意思是四周环绕。“那么”(tena hi)的意思是:因为今天须丁会来,就因为这个缘故。“hi”只是用来补足音节的虚词。“因此”(tena)也是一个表示催促的虚词。巴利
33.Opuñjāpetvāti upalimpāpetvā. Ekaṃ hiraññassāti ettha hiraññanti kahāpaṇo veditabbo. Purisoti nātidīgho nātirasso majjhimappamāṇo veditabbo. Tirokaraṇīyanti karaṇatthe bhummaṃ; sāṇipākārena parikkhipitvāti attho. Atha vā tiro karonti etenāti tirokaraṇīyaṃ, taṃ parikkhipitvā; samantato katvāti attho. Tena hīti yasmā ajja sudinno āgamissati tena kāraṇena. Hi iti padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Tenāti ayampi vā uyyojanatthe nipātoyeva.
34 “午前时分”:这里虽然经文没有提到告知时间,但应该理解为他正是在被告知的那个时间去的。“这是你的,孩子”:他指着两堆财物这样说。“母亲的”:指生母的。“母系财”:指从母亲那边来的;意思是,这是你外祖母——也就是你母亲的母亲——来这个家时给的财物。他用轻蔑的语气说“女人的,女人财”。意思是:所谓女人的财物,不过是为了女人自己用的沐浴粉之类的东西而得到的财物,能有多少呢?你倒看看那数量。或者也可以这样理解:孩子须丁那,这是你母亲的财物,而且是母系财,不是我给的,只属于你母亲。不过这财物不是靠耕种或经商得来的,而是女人的女人财。所谓女人财,就是女人从娘家嫁到夫家时,为了沐浴粉之类而得到的财物,那数量也就只有这么多。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
34.Pubbaṇhasamayanti ettha kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ kālārocanaṃ na vuttaṃ, atha kho ārociteyeva kāle agamāsīti veditabbo. Idaṃ te tātāti dve puñje dassento āha. Mātūti janettiyā. Mattikanti mātito āgataṃ; idaṃ te mātāmahiyā mātu imaṃ gehaṃ āgacchantiyā dinnadhananti attho. Itthikāya itthidhananti hīḷento āha . Itthikāya nāma itthiparibhogānaṃyeva nhānacuṇṇādīnaṃ atthāya laddhaṃ dhanaṃ kittakaṃ bhaveyya. Tassāpi tāva parimāṇaṃ passa. Atha vā idaṃ te tāta sudinna mātu dhanaṃ, tañca kho mattikaṃ, na mayā dinnaṃ, tava mātuyeva santakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ panetaṃ na kasiyā na vaṇijjāya sambhūtaṃ, apica kho itthikāya itthidhanaṃ. Yaṃ itthikāya ñātikulato sāmikakulaṃ gacchantiyā laddhabbaṃ nhānacuṇṇādīnaṃ atthāya itthidhanaṃ, taṃ tāva ettakanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
还有一份是父亲那边的,另一份是祖父那边的:凡是属于你父亲和祖父们所有的,那是另外一份。埋藏起来的和放出去生息的非常多;这里“祖父”应当理解为省略了派生词尾。也有“曾祖父”这种读法。孩子苏定那,还俗之后是可以得到的:孩子苏定那,舍弃了最上的圣者标志——出家相,回到低劣的在家人身份之后,是可以得到财富来受用的,并不是得不到受用。你出家不是因为害怕国王,也不是因为被债主逼着才出家的。孩子,我不能:这里称“孩子”,是出于对世俗亲情的爱,不是因为沙门的威德。“我不能”就是我做不到。“我没有能力”就是我不堪能,我没有那个本事。巴利
Aññaṃ pettikaṃ aññaṃ pitāmahanti yaṃ pana te pitu ca pitāmahānañca santakaṃ, taṃ aññaṃyeva. Nihitañca payuttañca ativiya bahu; ettha ca pitāmahanti taddhitalopaṃ katvā veditabbaṃ. Petāmahanti vā pāṭho. Labbhā tāta sudinna hīnāyāvattitvāti tāta, sudinna, uttamaṃ ariyaddhajaṃ pabbajitaliṅgaṃ pahāya hīnāya gihibhāvāya āvattitvā labbhā bhogā bhuñjituṃ, nālabbhā bhuñjituṃ, na tvaṃ rājabhīto pabbajito, na iṇāyikehi palibuddho hutvāti. Tāta na ussahāmīti ettha pana tātāti vacanaṃ gehasitapemena āha, na samaṇatejena. Na ussahāmīti na sakkomi. Na visahāmīti nappahomi, na samatthomhi.
“居士,我们想对您说。”这句话是凭着沙门的威德说的。“不要过分拉扯”:你对我所怀的那份亲情,不要因为愤怒而过分拉扯;意思就是说,希望你不要生气。于是长者心想“我儿子像是想给我一些照顾”,满心欢喜地说:“苏定那,我儿,你说吧。”“那么”:这是一个表示催促的虚词,形态上像是变格。“以此为缘”:就是以此为因、以此为缘;应当知道这里主格词用了“to”的语尾,而且在复合词中没有省略。“或恐惧”:就是前面所说的“但愿国王们不要夺走我的财富”之类对国王等的恐惧,意思是心里惊恐。“战栗”:指被国王或盗贼逼着“交出财物”而受刑时,身体的僵硬、颤抖、心脏的颤动。“身毛竖立”:恐惧生起时,汗毛竖立、向上直立的状态。“守护”:指对内对外、夜里白天都加以守护。巴利
‘‘Vadeyyāma kho taṃ gahapatī’’ti idaṃ pana vacanaṃ samaṇatejenāha. Nātikaḍḍheyyāsīti yaṃ te mayi pemaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ, taṃ kodhavasena na atikaḍḍheyyāsi; sace na kujjheyyāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato seṭṭhi ‘‘putto me saṅgahaṃ maññe kattukāmo’’ti udaggacitto āha – ‘‘vadehi tāta sudinnā’’ti. Tenahīti uyyojanatthe vibhattipatirūpako nipāto. Tatonidānanti taṃnidānaṃ taṃhetukanti paccattavacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo; samāse cassa lopābhāvo. Bhayaṃ vāti ‘‘kinti me bhoge neva rājāno hareyyu’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ rājādibhayaṃ; cittutrāsoti attho. Chambhitattanti rājūhi vā corehi vā ‘‘dhanaṃ dehī’’ti kammakāraṇaṃ kāriyamānassa kāyiñjanaṃ kāyakampo hadayamaṃsacalanaṃ. Lomahaṃsoti uppanne bhaye lomānaṃ haṃsanaṃ uddhaggabhāvo. Ārakkhoti anto ca bahi ca rattiñca divā ca ārakkhaṇaṃ.
35 于是长者居士把财富展示给儿子看,想用自己在家人的身份来引诱他还俗,却没能成功,就心想:“如今对男人来说,没有比女人更像束缚的了。”于是叫来他以前的妻子,说:“那么,媳妇啊。”所谓“以前的妻子”,就是过去的伴侣,从前在家时的妻子,曾经一起享受居家之乐与受用的伴侣,即过去的妻子,这是意思。“那么”是因为什么原因呢?因为对男人来说,没有比女人更像束缚的了。“抓住脚”就是抓住脚;这是依格表示宾格,或者就是抓住那人的脚。“是怎样的一些天女呢,尊者?”为什么这样说呢?据说那时,看见许多刹帝利少年、婆罗门少年、长者子舍弃大财富而出家,那些不知出家功德的人便发起这样的谈论:“这些人为什么出家呢?”另一些人说:“是为了天女、天乐的缘故。”这话便传扬开来。他抓住这话,就这样说了。长老驳斥那话,说道:“不,姐妹。”所谓“对待”,就是称呼、说。她就在那里昏迷倒地:看见他用“姐妹”的称呼来对待自己,便想:“如今他对我无所需了,他把我这个原本是妻子的人,看作和自己同母胎所生的女孩一样。”于是生起强烈的忧愁,就在那个地方昏迷倒地;倒下的意思。巴利
35.Tena hi vadhūti seṭṭhi gahapati dhanaṃ dassetvā puttaṃ attanā gihibhāvatthāya palobhetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘mātugāmasadisaṃ dāni purisānaṃ bandhanaṃ natthī’’ti maññitvā tassa purāṇadutiyikaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tena hi vadhū’’ti. Purāṇadutiyikanti purāṇaṃ dutiyikaṃ pubbe gihikāle dutiyikaṃ, gehasitasukhupabhogasahāyikaṃ bhūtapubbabhariyanti attho. Tena hīti yena kāraṇena mātugāmasadisaṃ bandhanaṃ natthi. Pādesu gahetvāti pāde gahetvā; upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ, pādesu vā taṃ gahetvā. ‘‘Kīdisā nāma tā ayyaputta accharāyo’’ti kasmā evamāha? Tadā kira sambahule khattiyakumārepi brāhmaṇakumārepi seṭṭhiputtepi mahāsampattiyo pahāya pabbajante disvā pabbajjāguṇaṃ ajānantā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpenti – ‘‘kasmā ete pabbajantī’’ti. Athaññe vadanti – ‘‘devaccharānaṃ devanāṭakānaṃ kāraṇā’’ti. Sā kathā vitthārikā ahosi. Taṃ gahetvā ayaṃ evamāhāti. Thero taṃ paṭikkhipanto na kho ahaṃ bhaginīti āha. Samudācaratīti voharati vadeti. Tattheva mucchitā papatāti naṃ bhaginivādena samudācarantaṃ disvā ‘‘anatthiko dāni mayā ayaṃ yo maṃ pajāpatiṃ samānaṃ attanā saddhiṃ ekamātukucchiyā sayitadārikaṃ viya maññatī’’ti samuppannabalavasokā hutvā tasmiṃyeva padese mucchitā papatā; patitāti attho.
别伤害我们——意思是:不要给我们看财物、把女人打发走之后又来伤害我们;因为这种伤害,是出家的人不该有的。所以,亲爱的苏定那,你就给个种子吧——这里的“所以”,是带着贪爱在催促他。如果你贪爱梵行、愿意修行,那就修吧,修完坐到空中般涅槃也行,但你要给我们一个延续家族血脉的儿子。别让离车族人在我们没有儿子的情况下把我们的财产没收走——因为我们住在离车族诸王统治的国土里,他们会在你父亲去世后,把我们这么大的家产、这么大的财富,因为没有儿子、没有守护家业的儿子,直接收进他们的王宫。愿他们别这么做,别让他们没收。巴利
Mā no viheṭhayitthāti mā amhe dhanaṃ dassetvā mātugāmañca uyyojetvā viheṭhayittha; vihesā hesā pabbajitānanti. Tena hi tāta sudinna bījakampi dehīti ettha tena hīti abhiratiyaṃ uyyojeti. Sace tvaṃ abhirato brahmacariyaṃ carasi, caritvā ākāse nisīditvā parinibbāyitā hohi, amhākaṃ pana kulavaṃsabījakaṃ ekaṃ puttaṃ dehi. Mā no aputtakaṃ sāpateyyaṃ licchavayo atiharāpesunti mayañhi licchavīnaṃ gaṇarājūnaṃ rajje vasāma, te te pituno accayena imaṃ sāpateyyaṃ evaṃ mahantaṃ amhākaṃ vibhavaṃ aputtakaṃ kuladhanarakkhakena puttena virahitaṃ attano rājantepuraṃ atiharāpeyyunti, taṃ te mā atiharāpesuṃ, mā atiharāpentūti.
“母亲,这件事我能做到。”他为什么这样说呢?据说他心里这样想:“这些财产只有我一个人是主人,没有别人。他们为了守护财产,一定会一直缠着我;这样一来,我就没法安安心心地去修沙门法了。但如果能有个儿子,他们就会放手,到那时我就能随心所欲地修沙门法了。”他看清了这个道理,所以才这样说。巴利
Etaṃ kho me, amma, sakkā kātunti kasmā evamāha? So kira cintesi – ‘‘etesaṃ sāpateyyassa ahameva sāmī, añño natthi. Te maṃ sāpateyyarakkhaṇatthāya niccaṃ anubandhissanti; tenāhaṃ na lacchāmi appossukko samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ, puttakaṃ pana labhitvā oramissanti, tato ahaṃ yathāsukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ karissāmī’’ti imaṃ nayaṃ passanto evamāhāti.
36 “花”是月经期间所流出的血的名称。女人到了经期,在胎儿着床的位置会生出红色的小疖子,长满七天后破裂,血就从那里流出来,这个血就叫作“花”。当这血还很旺盛、流得很多的时候,即使交合,结生也不会成立,会随着病患一起流出来;而当病患流出、子宫清净之后,交合所成的结生很快就会着床。“她的花已生起”,意思是她的花已经出现,这是省略了“a”音的连音。“抓住前妻的手臂”,意思是抓住前妻的那条手臂。巴利
36.Pupphanti utukāle uppannalohitassa nāmaṃ. Mātugāmassa hi utukāle gabbhapatiṭṭhānaṭṭhāne lohitavaṇṇā piḷakā saṇṭhahitvā satta divasāni vaḍḍhitvā bhijjanti, tato lohitaṃ paggharati, tassetaṃ nāmaṃ ‘‘puppha’’nti. Taṃ pana yāva balavaṃ hoti bahu paggharati, tāva dinnāpi paṭisandhi na tiṭṭhati, doseneva saddhiṃ paggharati; dose pana paggharite suddhe vatthumhi dinnā paṭisandhi khippaṃ patiṭṭhāti. Pupphaṃsā uppajjīti pupphaṃ assā uppajji; akāralopena sandhi purāṇadutiyikāya bāhāyaṃ gahetvāti purāṇadutiyikāya yā bāhā, tatra naṃ gahetvāti attho.
“在学处尚未制定时”,说的是第一条波罗夷学处还没有制定的时候。据说世尊初成道后的二十年里,比丘们一直让世尊的心感到满意,没有做出这类不净的行为。正是针对这件事,世尊才说了这部经:“诸比丘,确实有过那么一时,比丘们让我的心感到满意。”当时世尊没有看到不净的行为,所以既没有制定波罗夷,也没有制定僧残,只是在每一件具体事情发生时,制定了其余五种轻罪的类别。因此说“在学处尚未制定时”。巴利
Apaññatte sikkhāpadeti paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade aṭṭhapite. Bhagavato kira paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsati vassāni bhikkhū cittaṃ ārādhayiṃsu, na evarūpaṃ ajjhācāramakaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyeva idaṃ suttamāha – ‘‘ārādhayiṃsu vata me, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ekaṃ samayaṃ citta’’nti (ma. ni. 1.225). Atha bhagavā ajjhācāraṃ apassanto pārājikaṃ vā saṅghādisesaṃ vā na paññapesi. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ avasese pañca khuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘apaññatte sikkhāpade’’ti.
不见过患:世尊现在要制定学处时将会开示过患,而这个人没有看到那个过患,就生起了“没有过失”的想法。因为如果他当时知道“这件事不该做,或者会导致断头之罪”,那么即使是出于信心而出家的良家子,就算因此丧命也不会去做。但在这里,他没有看到过患,就生起了“没有过失”的想法。因此说“不见过患”。“前妻”:这是处格。“令知”:就是令她生起;因为生起也是通过身表来策动的,所以称为“令知”。应当知道,他三次令知,是为了让胎儿形成并确定下来。巴利
Anādīnavadassoti yaṃ bhagavā idāni sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ādīnavaṃ dassessati, taṃ apassanto anavajjasaññī hutvā. Sace hi ‘‘ayaṃ idaṃ na karaṇīyanti vā mūlacchejjāya vā saṃvattatī’’ti jāneyya, saddhāpabbajito kulaputto tatonidānaṃ jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇantopi na kareyya. Ettha pana ādīnavaṃ apassanto niddosasaññī ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anādīnavadasso’’ti. Purāṇadutiyikāyāti bhummavacanaṃ. Abhiviññāpesīti pavattesi; pavattanāpi hi kāyaviññatticopanato ‘‘viññāpanā’’ti vuccati. Tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpanañcesa gabbhasaṇṭhānasanniṭṭhānatthamakāsīti veditabbo.
她正是由那种性行为而怀胎,不是以别的方式。那么,是否还有别的方式也能怀胎呢?有的。怎么怀呢?通过身体接触、通过拿取沾有精液的布、通过喝下不净物、通过触摸肚脐、通过看见色相、通过声音、通过气味。因为有些女人在受孕期被欲贪所染,即使只是被男人抓手、抓发辫、触摸身体各部位,也会怀胎。像这样,通过身体接触也能怀胎。巴利
Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhīti sā ca teneva ajjhācārena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi, na aññathā. Kiṃ pana aññathāpi gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hotīti ? Hoti. Kathaṃ? Kāyasaṃsaggena , coḷaggahaṇena, asucipānena, nābhiparāmasanena, rūpadassanena, saddena, gandhena. Itthiyo hi ekaccā utusamaye chandarāgarattā purisānaṃ hatthaggāha-veṇiggāha-aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyantiyopi gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ kāyasaṃsaggena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
优陀夷长老的前妻比丘尼,用嘴接住了一部分精液,另一部分则连同布片一起塞进了女根。她因此怀了孕。这样,通过用布接取精液也能导致怀孕。巴利
Udāyittherassa pana purāṇadutiyikā bhikkhunī taṃ asuciṃ ekadesaṃ mukhena aggahesi, ekadesaṃ coḷakeneva saddhiṃ aṅgajāte pakkhipi. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Evaṃ coḷaggahaṇena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
鹿角的苦行者的母亲是一只母鹿。到了发情期,她来到苦行者小便的地方,喝下了混着精液的小便。她因此怀了胎,生下了鹿角。像这样,就是因为喝了不净之物而怀胎。巴利
Migasiṅgatāpasassa mātā migī utusamaye tāpasassa passāvaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā sasambhavaṃ passāvaṃ pivi. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā migasiṅgaṃ vijāyi. Evaṃ asucipānena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
沙摩菩萨的父母视力衰退了,帝释天知道后,想给他们一个儿子,就对苦行者杜库罗说:“你们还能行淫欲之事吗?”对方回答:“我们不需要这个,我们已经出家修仙人梵行了。”帝释天便说:“那就在她受孕期,用拇指去碰她的肚脐吧。”他就照做了。她因此怀了胎,生下了沙摩苦行者童子。像这样,通过碰触肚脐就能怀胎。按照同样的道理,曼达比亚和旃陀帕乔达的故事也应当这样理解。巴利
Sāmassa pana bodhisattassa mātāpitūnaṃ cakkhuparihāniṃ ñatvā sakko puttaṃ dātukāmo dukūlapaṇḍitaṃ āha – ‘‘vaṭṭati tumhākaṃ methunadhammo’’ti? ‘‘Anatthikā mayaṃ etena, isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitāmhā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi imissā utusamaye aṅguṭṭhena nābhiṃ parāmaseyyāthā’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā sāmaṃ tāpasadārakaṃ vijāyi. Evaṃ nābhiparāmasanena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Eteneva nayena maṇḍabyassa ca caṇḍapajjotassa ca vatthu veditabbaṃ.
怎样由看见男子而怀胎呢?这里,有些女人在受孕的时期没能和男子接触,因为贪欲的驱使,待在家里凝视男子,就像后宫里的嫔妃一样,她因此就怀了胎。这样,由看见男子而怀胎。巴利
Kathaṃ rūpadassanena hoti? Idhekaccā itthī utusamaye purisasaṃsaggaṃ alabhamānā chandarāgavasena antogehagatāva purisaṃ upanijjhāyati rājorodhā viya, sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti. Evaṃ rūpadassanena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
不过鹳鸟里根本没有雄性,它们在繁殖季节听到雷声就受孕。母鸡有时听到一只公鸡的叫声,许多只母鸡也会受孕。母牛听到公牛的声音也一样。像这样,就是通过声音而受孕。巴利
Balākāsu pana puriso nāma natthi, tā utusamaye meghasaddaṃ sutvā gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Kukkuṭiyopi kadāci ekassa kukkuṭassa saddaṃ sutvā bahukāpi gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Tathā gāvī usabhassa. Evaṃ saddena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
母牛有时也会因为闻到公牛的气味而怀胎。像这样,就是靠气味而怀胎。巴利
Gāvī eva ca kadāci usabhagandhena gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ gandhena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti.
在这里,她却是通过不正当的性行为而怀胎。针对这一点,经中这样说:父母交合在一起,母亲正值经期,甘塔拔已经现前,这样三者和合,才有胎儿的入胎。巴利
Idha panāyaṃ ajjhācārena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca paccupaṭṭhito hoti, evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sannipātā gabbhassāvakkanti hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.408).
地居天发出声音,是因为在世间,造恶业的人根本没有什么隐秘可言。那恶业首先是他自己知道,然后是守护神知道,再然后其他能知他心的天神也知道。所以,那些依止整片树林、能知他心的地居天看见了他的邪行之后,就发出了声音。他们那样发出声音,是为了让其他天神也能听到。是怎么发出的呢?就是说:诸位贤者啊,无间地狱的……中略……过患确实已经出现了。这段话的意思,应当依照《毗兰若品》中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Bhummādevā saddamanussāvesunti yasmā natthi loke raho nāma pāpakammaṃ pakubbato. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ hissa taṃ pāpaṃ attanā jānāti, tato ārakkhadevatā, athaññāpi paracittaviduniyo devatā. Tasmāssa paracittavidū sakalavanasaṇḍanissitā bhummā devā taṃ ajjhācāraṃ disvā saddaṃ anussāvesuṃ. Yathā aññepi devā suṇanti, tathā nicchāresuṃ. Kinti ? Nirabbudo vata, bho…pe… ādīnavo uppāditoti. Tassattho verañjakaṇḍe vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
地居天众的声音被听到之后,接着是四大天王天。这里应当知道这个次第:空居天听到了地居天众的声音,四大天王天听到了空居天的声音。梵身天:除了无想有情天和无色界天以外,所有的梵天都听到了;听了之后,他们也把声音传告出去,应当这样理解。如是,就在那个刹那——也就是苏定那行邪行的那个刹那;就在那个须臾——也就是行邪行的那个须臾;声音向上传升,一直到梵天界,也就是直到阿迦尼吒梵天界。向上传升的意思是向上生起、升腾,成为一片巨大的喧哗。巴利
Bhummānaṃ devānaṃ saddaṃ sutvā cātumahārājikāti ettha pana bhummānaṃ devānaṃ saddaṃ ākāsaṭṭhadevatā assosuṃ; ākāsaṭṭhānaṃ cātumahārājikāti ayamanukkamo veditabbo. Brahmakāyikāti asaññasatte ca arūpāvacare ca ṭhapetvā sabbepi brahmāno assosuṃ; sutvā ca saddamanussāvesunti veditabbo. Itiha tena khaṇenāti evaṃ tena sudinnassa ajjhācārakkhaṇena. Tena muhuttenāti ajjhācāramuhutteneva. Yāva brahmalokāti yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā. Abbhuggacchīti abhiuggacchi abbhuṭṭhāsi ekakolāhalamahosīti.
她生了一个儿子,生下的这个孩子像黄金铸成的像一样,是最后一生受生的众生。他们给他取名叫“种子”:他们没有再取别的名字。因为外祖母曾说过“再给一个种子吧”,这件事大家都知道,所以他们说“就让他叫种子吧”,于是给他取名为“种子”。而且,他们也就依着儿子的名字,给他的父母也这样取名。所谓“后来”,指的是种子和他的母亲。据说种子七八岁的时候,他母亲在比丘尼众中出家,他也在比丘众中出家,两人依靠善知识,证得了阿罗汉果。因此说:“两人从在家出家,过无家生活,证得了阿罗汉果。”巴利
Puttaṃ vijāyīti suvaṇṇabimbasadisaṃ pacchimabhavikasattaṃ janesi. Bījakoti nāmamakaṃsūti na aññaṃ nāmaṃ kātumadaṃsu, ‘‘bījakampi dehī’’ti mātāmahiyā vuttabhāvassa pākaṭattā ‘‘bījako tvevassa nāmaṃ hotū’’ti ‘‘bījako’’ti nāmamakaṃsu. Puttassa pana nāmavaseneva ca mātāpitūnampissa nāmamakaṃsu. Te aparena samayenāti bījakañca bījakamātarañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Bījakassa kira sattaṭṭhavassakāle tassa mātā bhikkhunīsu so ca bhikkhūsu pabbajitvā kalyāṇamitte upanissāya arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ubho agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitvā arahattaṃ sacchākaṃsū’’ti.
37 37. 这样,母子二人的出家都结出了果实。可是父亲却一直活在追悔之中。因此说:“那时,尊者苏定那确实生起了追悔”等等。其中,“确实生起了”就是“生起了”,“d”这个字母是连接词与词之间的连音。意思是“确实出现了”。所谓“追悔”,是指由邪行引起的后悔。“追悔”也是它的另一个名称。因为这是智者不该做的事,是可鄙的行为,所以叫“追悔”;又因为已经做下的邪行无法挽回,心对此产生扭曲的忆念,所以叫“后悔”。“我确实失利了”:意思是我确实失去了;凡是禅那等功德的丧失,那都是我的损失,不是别人的。“我确实没有得利”:即使我得到了出家、皈依、受持学处等功德,但由于被邪行染污,这些也算不上是我的得利。“我确实恶得”:我虽然得到了这教法,却是以恶行而得的。“我确实没有善得”:不像其他良家子弟那样,我并没有得到善得。为什么?因为我在如此善说的法与律中……修习梵行。“梵行”:指含摄三学的道梵行。“变得消瘦”:因为吃不下、咽不下,身体变得瘦弱,血肉减少。“肤色苍白”:肤色变得枯黄,像枯叶一样。“血管遍布身体”:因为血肉耗尽,身体上只显出血管的脉络。“内心”:因为不断忧思,心停留在内部。不过,一切心都依止心脏而活动,所以也可以说都是“内心”。“心消沉”:在诵习、问答、修禅、增上戒、增上心、增上慧以及履行义务等方面,放弃责任,不活跃,只是因懈怠而消沉、萎缩,所以叫“心消沉”。“痛苦”:因为心的痛苦而痛苦。“忧愁”:因为瞋恨而心败坏,或者因为被忧恼压倒而心变形。“沉思”:因为追悔,像被割了耳朵的驴一样,反复想着这件事。巴利
37. Evaṃ mātāputtānaṃ pabbajjā saphalā ahosi. Pitā pana vippaṭisārābhibhūto vihāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmato sudinnassaahudeva kukkucca’’ntiādi. Tattha ahudevāti ahu eva, dakāro padasandhikaro. Ahosiyevāti attho. Kukkuccanti ajjhācārahetuko pacchānutāpo. Vippaṭisārotipi tasseva nāmaṃ. So hi viññūhi akattabbatāya kucchitakiriyabhāvato kukkuccaṃ. Kataṃ ajjhācāraṃ nivattetuṃ asamatthatāya taṃ paṭicca virūpaṃ saraṇabhāvato vippaṭisāroti vuccati. Alābhā vata meti mayhaṃ vata alābhā; ye jhānādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ alābhā nāma, te mayhaṃ, na aññassāti adhippāyo. Na vata me lābhāti yepi me paṭiladdhā pabbajjasaraṇagamanasikkhāsamādānaguṇā, tepi neva mayhaṃ lābhā ajjhācāramalīnattā. Dulladdhaṃ vata meti idaṃ sāsanaṃ laddhampi me dulladdhaṃ. Na vata me suladdhanti yathā aññesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ, evaṃ na vata me suladdhaṃ. Kasmā? Yamahaṃ evaṃ svākkhātedhammavinaye…pe… brahmacariyaṃ caritunti. Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Kiso ahosīti khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā asakkonto tanuko ahosi appamaṃsalohito . Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātoti sañjātuppaṇḍuppaṇḍukabhāvo paṇḍupalāsappaṭibhāgo. Dhamanisanthatagattoti pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattā sirājāleneva santharitagatto. Antomanoti anusocanavasena abbhantareyeva ṭhitacitto. Hadayavatthuṃ nissāya pavattanavasena pana sabbepi antomanāyeva. Līnamanoti uddese paripucchāya kammaṭṭhāne adhisīle adhicitte adhipaññāya vattapaṭipattipūraṇe ca nikkhittadhuro avipphāriko aññadatthu kosajjavaseneva līno saṅkucito mano assāti līnamano. Dukkhīti cetodukkhena dukkhī. Dummanoti dosena duṭṭhamano, virūpamano vā domanassābhibhūtatāya. Pajjhāyīti vippaṭisāravasena vahacchinno viya gadrabho taṃ taṃ cintayi.
38 同伴比丘们:看到他这样把日子耗在聚众闲谈的戏论上,那些跟他相熟、说话投机的比丘们就对他说了这些话。“诸根明净”:因为净信所依之处圆满,所以眼等诸根都圆满具足。“你现在”:这里的“现在”是个语气词,意思就是“那么你”。“你是否”:就是“你是不是”。“不喜乐”:指厌倦,意思是想要还俗。因此,他否定那种不喜乐,说道:“贤友,我并非不喜乐。”而是乐于修习增上善法。“我作了恶业”:意思是我作了一件恶业,它存在、可得、现前,时常就像在我眼前一样。于是,他把这件事说明出来,说了“与前妻……”等等。巴利
38.Sahāyakā bhikkhūti taṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañcena vītināmentaṃ disvā yassa vissāsikā kathāphāsukā bhikkhū te naṃ etadavocuṃ. Pīṇindriyoti pasādapatiṭṭhānokāsassa sampuṇṇattā paripuṇṇacakkhuādiindriyo. So dāni tvanti ettha dānīti nipāto, so pana tvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kaccino tvanti kacci nu tvaṃ . Anabhiratoti ukkaṇṭhito; gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānoti attho. Tasmā tameva anabhiratiṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, anabhirato’’ti. Adhikusalānaṃ pana dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya abhiratova ahanti . Atthi me pāpakammaṃ katanti mayā kataṃ ekaṃ pāpakammaṃ atthi upalabbhati saṃvijjati, niccakālaṃ abhimukhaṃ viya me tiṭṭhati. Atha naṃ pakāsento ‘‘purāṇadutiyikāyā’’tiādimāha.
贤友苏定那,你的这个恶业足以让你生起追悔,也就是说,它有力量让你产生悔恨。“而那恶业”以下应当这样理解前后文的关联:由于那个恶业,你将无法修习梵行,那个恶业足以让你追悔。于是,他们教导他说:“贤友,世尊难道不是以种种方式……”等等。其中,“nanu”是表示认同的语气词。“以种种方式”就是通过各种原因。“为了离欲”就是为了达到离欲。“不是为了有欲”就是不是为了以贪欲去染着。世尊的意思是:有情听闻我所说的这个法之后,将会对一切生存状态和一切享乐离染,而不会贪染——他是为了这个目的而说法的。这个道理适用于所有词句。这些只是同一含义的不同表达方式。“为了离系”就是为了从烦恼中解脱。“不是为了系缚”就是不是为了被束缚。“为了无取”就是为了不执取。“不是为了有取”就是为了不执持。巴利
Alañhi te, āvuso sudinna, kukkuccāyāti āvuso sudinna, tuyhetaṃ pāpakammaṃ alaṃ samatthaṃ kukkuccāya; paṭibalaṃ kukkuccaṃ uppādetunti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃ tvanti ādimhi yena pāpena tvaṃ na sakkhissasi brahmacariyaṃ carituṃ, taṃ te pāpaṃ alaṃ kukkuccāyāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Atha naṃ anusāsantā ‘‘nanu āvuso bhagavatā’’tiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha nanūti anumatiggahaṇatthe nipāto. Anekapariyāyenāti anekakāraṇena. Virāgāyāti virāgatthāya. No sarāgāyāti no rāgena rajjanatthāya. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘imaṃ me dhammaṃ sutvā sattā sabbabhavabhogesu virajjissanti, no rajjissantī’’ etadatthāya dhammo desitoti adhippāyo. Esa nayo sabbapadesu. Idaṃ panettha pariyāyavacanamattaṃ. Visaṃyogāyāti kilesehi visaṃyujjanatthāya. No saṃyogāyāti na saṃyujjanatthāya. Anupādānāyāti aggahaṇatthāya. Nosaupādānāyāti na saṅgahaṇatthāya.
那时所谓的“你”,就是指在那个时候的你。对于有贪染的心作意,意思是:当淫欲法伴随着贪欲现行时,你会去思念、构画、反复筹划,并为此目的而努力,这就是它的含义。这个道理适用于所有地方。再者,“离染”等九句,都是针对所证得的出世间涅槃而说的。所以,即使说“为了离染”或“为了摧伏迷醉”,其含义也应当同样理解为“为了涅槃”。因为依靠涅槃、缘于涅槃、以涅槃为条件,贪欲才得以离染、不再存在,所以称为“离染”。又因为依靠它,慢、迷醉、人我迷醉等种种迷醉被摧伏、止息、消失,所以称为“摧伏迷醉”。又因为依靠它,一切欲渴都被调伏、灭尽,所以称为“调伏渴爱”。又因为依靠它,对五欲功德的执著被彻底摧毁,所以称为“断除执著”。又因为依靠它,三界的轮回被截断,所以称为“截断轮回”。又因为依靠它,一切渴爱彻底灭尽、离染、止息,所以称为“渴爱灭尽、离染、寂灭”。又因为它出离、脱离、不系属于那被称为“结缚”的渴爱——这渴爱编织、系缚、缝合四种生、五趣、七识住、九有情居,使生死不断相续——所以称为涅槃。巴利
Tatthanāma tvanti tasmiṃ nāma tvaṃ. Sarāgāya cetessasīti saha rāgena vattamānāya methunadhammāya cetessasi kappessasi pakappessasi; etadatthaṃ vāyamissasīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Puna rāgavirāgādīni nava padāni nibbattitalokuttaranibbānameva sandhāya vuttāni. Tasmā rāgavirāgāyāti vā madanimmadanāyāti vā vuttepi ‘‘nibbānatthāyā’’ti evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Nibbānañhi yasmā taṃ āgamma ārabbha paṭicca rāgo virajjati na hoti, tasmā rāgavirāgoti vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma mānamada-purisamadādayo madā nimmadā amadā honti vinassanti, tasmā madanimmadananti vuccati. Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma sabbāpi kāmapipāsā vinayaṃ abbhatthaṃ yāti, tasmā pipāsavinayoti vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma pañca kāmaguṇālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, tasmā ālayasamugghātoti vuccati. Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ upacchijjati, tasmā vaṭṭupacchedoti vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma sabbaso taṇhā khayaṃ gacchati virajjati nirujjhati ca, tasmā taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Yasmā panetaṃ catasso yoniyo, pañca gatiyo, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, nava ca sattāvāse, aparāparabhāvāya vinanato ābandhanato saṃsibbanato vānanti laddhavohārāya taṇhāya nikkhantaṃ nissaṭaṃ visaṃyuttaṃ, tasmā nibbānanti vuccatīti.
“宣说断除诸欲”,说的是断除事欲和烦恼欲。“遍知欲想”,是从知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三种遍知的角度,宣说对一切欲想的遍知。“欲渴”,是指对诸欲的渴求,或者想要饮啜诸欲。“欲寻”,是指与欲相应的寻思。“欲热恼”,是指由贪著五欲功德所生起的热恼与内烧。在这五处当中,所宣说的是能灭尽烦恼的出世间道。不过应当知道,在前三处中,所说的是世间道与出世间道相杂之道。巴利
Kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ akkhātanti vatthukāmānaṃ, kilesakāmānañca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmasaññānaṃ pariññāti sabbāsampi kāmasaññānaṃ ñātatīraṇapahānavasena tividhā pariññā akkhātā. Kāmapipāsānanti kāmesu pātabyatānaṃ kāme vā pātumicchānaṃ. Kāmavitakkānanti kāmupasañhitānaṃvitakkānaṃ. Kāmapariḷāhānanti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasena uppannapariḷāhānaṃ antodāhānaṃ. Imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu kilesakkhayakaro lokuttaramaggova kathito. Sabbapaṭhamesu pana tīsu ṭhānesu lokiyalokuttaramissako maggo kathitoti veditabbo.
贤友,这不是:贤友,事情不是这样,你的恶行不能使没有信心的人产生信心,也不能让已有这种信心的人增长信心。而是:就是这件事。也有“atha kho tanti”这种读法。为了变异:就是为了信心的变异,为了产生追悔。它让那些还没有通过道证得信心的人生起追悔:“我们竟然对这样的法和律生起了信心,而其中却有这样行为恶劣的比丘。”然而,对于那些已经通过道证得信心的人,他们的信心就像须弥山一样,不会被风吹动,即使遇到比这更粗暴的事缘也是如此。因此说“为了某些人的变异”。巴利
Netaṃ āvusoti na etaṃ āvuso, tava pāpakammaṃ appasannānañca pasādāya evarūpānaṃ pasādatthāya na hoti. Atha khvetanti atha kho etaṃ. Atha kho tantipi pāṭho. Aññathattāyāti pasādaññathābhāvāya vippaṭisārāya hoti. Ye maggena anāgatasaddhā, tesaṃ vippaṭisāraṃ karoti – ‘‘īdisepi nāma dhammavinaye mayaṃ pasannā, yatthevaṃ duppaṭipannā bhikkhū’’ti. Ye pana maggenāgatasaddhā, tesaṃ sineru viya vātehi acalo pasādo īdisehi vatthūhi ito vā dāruṇatarehi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekaccānaṃ aññathattāyā’’ti.
39 他们向世尊报告了这件事,也就是向世尊说明、禀报、告知了这件事。他们报告时,既不是为了讨好,也不是为了制造分裂,不是为了宣扬那位尊者的过失,不是为了把污蔑加到教法上,也不是想着:“世尊听了这件事,就不会让他在教法里站住脚,会把他赶出去。”而是想着:“世尊知道教法里出现了这个祸患后,会制定学处,确立界限、轨范和命令。”所以才报告。巴利
39.Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesunti bhagavato etaṃ atthaṃ ācikkhiṃsu paṭivedayiṃsu. Ārocayamānā ca neva piyakamyatāya na bhedapurekkhāratāya , na tassāyasmato avaṇṇapakāsanatthāya, na kalisāsanāropanatthāya, nāpi ‘‘idaṃ sutvā bhagavā imassa sāsane patiṭṭhaṃ na dassati, nikkaḍḍhāpessati na’’nti maññamānā ārocesuṃ. Atha kho ‘‘imaṃ sāsane uppannaṃ abbudaṃ ñatvā bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessati, velaṃ mariyādaṃ āṇaṃ ṭhapessatī’’ti ārocesuṃ.
在这条因缘、这件事由中,应当知道:这里所说的“因缘”和“事由”,是因为苏定那的违犯恶行是制定学处的缘由,所以称为因缘和事由。因为“因”能引生自己的果,就像指示“拿去吧”一样,使果生起;它也能促使造作,使人开始去做或直接去做那件事,因此称为因缘和事由。佛陀、世尊呵责,意思是佛陀、世尊加以呵责、谴责。就像在应当称赞和应当呵责的人面前,无论称赞还是呵责,最上之人都是如实而说。世尊看到违犯戒律的人,不会生起这样的心:“这个人是因出身、种族、家族、经教传承或头陀行而知名、有名声的,对这样的人应当加以顾念。”看到贤善有德的人,也不会生起隐藏他功德的心。他只是应当呵责的就呵责,应当称赞的就称赞。而这个人正是应当呵责的。因此,安住于这样的特质、心不动摇的佛陀、世尊,用“不适当”等话语呵责他。巴利
Etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇeti ettha sudinnassa ajjhācāravītikkamo sikkhāpadapaññattiyā kāraṇattā nidānañceva pakaraṇañcāti vuttoti veditabbo. Kāraṇañhi yasmā nideti attano phalaṃ ‘‘gaṇhātha na’’nti dassentaṃ viya appeti, pakaroti ca naṃ kattuṃ ārabhati, karotiyeva vā; tasmā nidānañceva pakaraṇañcāti vuccati. Vigarahi buddho bhagavāti buddho bhagavā vigarahi nindi; yathā taṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇārahānaṃ vaṇṇañca avaṇṇañca bhaṇantesu aggapuggalo. Na hi bhagavato sīlavītikkamakaraṃ puggalaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ jātiyā vā gottena vā kolaputtiyena vā ganthena vā dhutaṅgena vā ñāto yasassī īdisaṃ puggalaṃ rakkhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, nāpi pesalaṃ guṇavantaṃ disvā tassa guṇaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ cittaṃ uppajjati. Atha kho garahitabbaṃ garahati eva, pasaṃsitabbañca pasaṃsati eva, ayañca garahitabbo; tasmā taṃ tādilakkhaṇe ṭhito avikampamānena cittena vigarahi buddho bhagavā ‘‘ananucchavika’’ntiādīhi vacanehi.
在这里,这段义注的意思是:愚人!你所做的这种毫无意义、像空壳一样的行为,对于沙门所应具备的法——道、果、涅槃以及教法——来说,是不合适的。它既不随顺它们的表象、光彩和美好,也不跟随、不伴随它们,反而远离了那些法。正因为不合适,所以它就不随顺;它不随顺那些法,反而与之相逆,处在对立的状态。正因为不随顺,所以它就不相称;它不是相称的、相似的、对应的,而是不相似、完全不对应的。正因为不相称,所以它就不是沙门应有的;它不是沙门所做的事。正因为不是沙门应有的,所以它就不合宜。凡是沙门所不应做的事,对沙门来说就不合宜。正因为不合宜,所以就不该做。因为沙门不会去做不合宜的事。而这件事是你做的,所以,愚人!你所做的是不合适的……乃至是不该做的。“怎么会呢”是在问:到底以什么理由、看到什么原因才这样说。接着,为了显示根本没有理由,下文说“愚人!难道不是我……”。这些内容都和前面所说的一样。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā – yadidaṃ tayā, moghapurisa, tucchamanussa kammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ samaṇakaraṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ maggaphalanibbānasāsanānaṃ vā na anucchavikaṃ, tesaṃ chaviṃ chāyaṃ sundarabhāvaṃ na anveti nānugacchati, atha kho ārakāva tehi dhammehi. Ananucchavikattā eva ca ananulomikaṃ, tesaṃ na anulometi; atha kho vilomaṃ paccanīkabhāve ṭhitaṃ. Ananulomikattā eva ca appatirūpaṃ, patirūpaṃ sadisaṃ paṭibhāgaṃ na hoti, atha kho asadisaṃ appaṭibhāgameva. Appatirūpattā eva ca assāmaṇakaṃ, samaṇānaṃ kammaṃ na hoti. Assāmaṇakattā akappiyaṃ. Yañhi samaṇakammaṃ na hoti, taṃ tesaṃ na kappati. Akappiyattā akaraṇīyaṃ. Na hi samaṇā yaṃ na kappati, taṃ karonti. Tañcetaṃ tayā kataṃ, tasmā ananucchavikaṃ te, moghapurisa, kataṃ…pe… akaraṇīyanti. Kathañhi nāmāti kena nāma kāraṇena, kiṃ nāma kāraṇaṃ passantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato kāraṇābhāvaṃ dassento parato ‘‘nanu mayā moghapurisā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttatthameva.
现在,因为他所造的那恶业在成熟时会带来极其强烈的苦果,所以为了把这种果报显示出来,就像悲悯的父母用慈爱的心责备犯了错的儿子一样,世尊以责备的语气说了“愚人哪,宁可……”等话。其中,“āsīviso”是毒蛇,因为毒在它身上来得很快。“ghoraviso”是说它的毒猛烈凶暴,也就是那条毒蛇有猛烈凶暴的毒。“pakkhittaṃ”和“varaṃ”这两个词是关联的。意思是:宁可把男根放进这样一条毒猛烈凶暴的毒蛇口中;如果放进去的话,那还算是好的;是美好、善妙、极好的意思。“Na tvevā”则是指那并非好,并非美好,并非善妙,并非极好。这个道理在一切处都一样。“Kaṇhasappassā”是指黑蛇。“Aṅgārakāsuyā”是指装满炭火的坑,或者炭火堆。“Ādittāyā”是指燃烧着的、带有取来的火色的。“Sampajjalitāyā”是指全面燃烧着的、火焰四射的。“Sajotibhūtāyā”是指有光焰的。所谓从四面八方升起的火焰成为一团光聚,就是这个意思。巴利
Idāni yasmā yaṃ tena pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ vipaccamānaṃ ativiya dukkhavipākaṃ hoti, tasmāssa taṃ vipākaṃ dassetuṃ katāparādhaṃ viya puttaṃ anukampakā mātāpitaro dayālukena cittena sudinnaṃ paribhāsanto ‘‘varaṃ te moghapurisā’’tiādimāha. Tattha āsu sīghaṃ etassa visaṃ āgacchatīti āsīviso. Ghoraṃ caṇḍamassa visanti ghoraviso, tassa āsīvisassa ghoravisassa. ‘‘Pakkhitta’’nti etassa ‘‘vara’’nti iminā sambandho . Īdisassa āsīvisassa ghoravisassa mukhe aṅgajātaṃ varaṃ pakkhittaṃ; sace pakkhittaṃ bhaveyya, varaṃ siyā; sundaraṃ sādhu suṭṭhu siyāti attho. Na tvevāti na tu eva varaṃ na sundarameva na sādhumeva na suṭṭhumeva. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kaṇhasappassāti kāḷasappassa. Aṅgārakāsuyāti aṅgārapuṇṇakūpe, aṅgārarāsimhi vā. Ādittāyāti padittāya gahitaaggivaṇṇāya. Sampajjalitāyāti samantato pajjalitāya acciyo muccantiyā. Sajotibhūtāyāti sappabhāya. Samantato uṭṭhitāhi jālāhi ekappabhāsamudayabhūtāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“这是什么原因呢?”意思是:我说“宁可”是基于什么原因?是以什么理由呢?“他或许会遭受死亡”:如果有人把男根放进那里,他或许会死,或者遭受几乎要死的痛苦。“而且,以此为因……他将投生”:把男根放进女人的产道,以此为因,造作这件事的人将投生地狱。世尊正是看到这种业的极大过患才呵责他,并不是希望他遭受痛苦。“你竟然在那……中”:在那样一种如此大过患的恶业中,你竟然还……。“yaṃ tvaṃ”里的“yaṃ”是表示轻蔑的虚词。“tvaṃ”是“taṃ”一词的同义词;以这两个词,即“yaṃ”或“taṃ”,表示被轻蔑、被轻视。“asaddhammaṃ”是恶人之法,即下劣人之法;意思是应被他们所亲近。“gāmadhammaṃ”是村落之法,即村落居民的行法。“vasaladhammaṃ”是卑贱者之法,指那些安住于恶法、流漏于恶法的卑贱者、下劣之人所行之法,或者“vasalaṃ”是烦恼流漏之法。“duṭṭhullaṃ”是极其被烦恼染污,粗重、不微细,即不精妙的。“odakantikaṃ”是水事为终、为末,即具有水事为终结者,那即是“odakantikaṃ”。“rahassaṃ”是隐密处,即在隐蔽处所生起者。因为此法由于可厌恶,不能公开置于他人所见之处,所以说“rahassaṃ”。“dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ”是应以二二而交会,也有“dvayaṃ dvayaṃ samāpattiṃ”的读法。也有人读作“dayaṃ dayaṃ samāpattiṃ”,那是不妥当的。“samāpajjissasi”应与这里“tattha nāma tvaṃ”中所说的“nāma”一词连接,即“samāpajjissasi nāmā”ti。巴利
Taṃ kissa hetūti yaṃ mayā vuttaṃ ‘‘vara’’nti taṃ kissa hetu, katarena kāraṇenāti ce? Maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyyāti yo tattha aṅgajātaṃ pakkhipeyya, so maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Itonidānañca kho…pe… upapajjeyyāti yaṃ idaṃ mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātapakkhipanaṃ, itonidānaṃ tassa kārako puggalo nirayaṃ upapajjeyya; evaṃ kammassa mahāsāvajjataṃ passanto taṃ garahi, na tassa dukkhāgamaṃ icchamāno. Tattha nāma tvanti tasmiṃ nāma evarūpe kamme evaṃ mahāsāvajje samānepi tvaṃ. Yaṃ tvanti ettha yanti hīḷanatthe nipāto. Tvanti taṃ-saddassa vevacanaṃ; dvīhipi yaṃ vā taṃ vā hīḷitamavaññātanti vuttaṃ hoti. Asaddhammanti asataṃ nīcajanānaṃ dhammaṃ; tehi sevitabbanti attho. Gāmadhammanti gāmānaṃ dhammaṃ; gāmavāsikamanussānaṃ dhammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vasaladhammanti pāpadhamme vasanti paggharantīti vasalā, tesaṃ vasalānaṃ hīnapurisānaṃ dhammaṃ, vasalaṃ vā kilesapaggharaṇakaṃ dhammaṃ. Duṭṭhullanti duṭṭhu ca kilesadūsitaṃ thūlañca asukhumaṃ, anipuṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Odakantikanti udakakiccaṃ antikaṃ avasānaṃ assāti odakantiko, taṃ odakantikaṃ. Rahassanti rahobhavaṃ, paṭicchanne okāse uppajjanakaṃ. Ayañhi dhammo jigucchanīyattā na sakkā āvi aññesaṃ dassanavisaye kātuṃ, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘rahassa’’nti. Dvayaṃdvayasamāpattinti dvīhi dvīhi samāpajjitabbaṃ, dvayaṃ dvayaṃ samāpattintipi pāṭho. Dayaṃ dayaṃ samāpattintipi paṭhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Samāpajjissasīti etaṃ ‘‘tattha nāma tva’’nti ettha vuttanāmasaddena yojetabbaṃ ‘‘samāpajjissasi nāmā’’ti.
“对许多人来说……你是最初的造作者、是先行者”,这是针对教法而说的。在这个教法里,对于众多人的不善法,你是最初的造作者,因为你是第一个去做的;你是先行者,因为你是第一个走上这条路的;也就是说,你是开门的人、指出方法的人。这里的意思是:许多人得到这个借口后,会学你的样子,去造作各种不善法,比如像猕猴一样行淫之类的行为。巴利
Bahūnaṃkho…pe… ādikattā pubbaṅgamoti sāsanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Imasmiṃ sāsane tvaṃ bahūnaṃ puggalānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ādikattā, sabbapaṭhamaṃ karaṇato; pubbaṅgamo sabbapaṭhamaṃ etaṃ maggaṃ paṭipannattā; dvāraṃdado, upāyadassakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Imañhi lesaṃ laddhā tava anusikkhamānā bahū puggalā nānappakārake makkaṭiyā methunapaṭisevanādike akusaladhamme karissantīti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“以多种方式”是指:用这些“不适当”等说法所讲的方式,以许多理由。说“难养……懈怠的过患”,意思是:宣说作为难养等基础的不防护的过患、非难和责备。因为安住于不防护的人,自己会变得难养、难供,所以不防护被称为“难养、难供”。又因为安住于不防护的人,自己在四种资具上会生起多欲,即使得到像须弥山那么大的资具也不满足,所以不防护被称为“多欲、不满足”。又因为安住于不防护的人,自己会走向人群的聚集和烦恼的聚集,随顺懈怠,导致八种懈怠事圆满,所以不防护被称为“聚集和懈怠”。巴利
Anekapariyāyenāti imehi ‘‘ananucchavika’’ntiādinā nayena vuttehi, bahūhi kāraṇehi. Dubbharatāya…pe… kosajjassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvāti dubbharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa asaṃvarassa avaṇṇaṃ nindaṃ garahaṃ bhāsitvāti attho. Yasmā hi asaṃvare ṭhitassa puggalassa attā dubbharatañceva dupposatañca āpajjati, tasmā asaṃvaro ‘‘dubbharatā, dupposatā’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā pana asaṃvare ṭhitassa attā catūsu paccayesu mahicchataṃ sineruppamāṇepi ca paccaye laddhā asantuṭṭhitaṃ āpajjati, tasmā asaṃvaro ‘‘mahicchatā, asantuṭṭhitā’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā ca asaṃvare ṭhitassa attā gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ceva kilesasaṅgaṇikāya ca saṃvattati, kosajjānugato ca hoti aṭṭhakusītavatthupāripūriyā saṃvattati, tasmā asaṃvaro ‘‘saṅgaṇikā, ceva kosajjañcā’’ti vuccati.
“说易养……精进策励的功德”,意思是:宣说作为易养等基础的防护的功德。因为,舍弃不防护而安住于防护的人,自身易养、易供,在四种资具上成就少欲、无渴爱的状态,并且对每一种资具,都能依所得、依能力、依适宜而成就三种知足,所以防护被称为“易养、易供、少欲、知足”。巴利
Subharatāya…pe… vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvāti subharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa saṃvarassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvāti attho. Yasmā hi asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā subharo hoti suposo, catūsu ca paccayesu appicchataṃ nittaṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjati, ekamekasmiñca paccaye yathālābha-yathābala-yathāsāruppavasena tippabhedāya santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘subharatā ceva suposatā ca appiccho ca santuṭṭho cā’’ti vuccati.
因为,舍弃不守护而安住在守护中的人,自身能通过削减烦恼和抖落烦恼而得到成就,所以守护被称为“削减与抖落”。巴利
Yasmā pana asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā kilesasallekhanatāya ceva niddhunanatāya ca saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘sallekho ca dhuto cā’’ti vuccati.
因为,舍弃了不防护而安住在防护中的人,自身不接近那些不净信、不令人喜悦、不善、不适当的身语恶行,也不接近不净信、不令人喜悦、不善、不适当的三种不善寻;反过来,他能圆满成就与之相反的、净信的、令人喜悦的、善的、适当的身语善行以及三种善寻。所以,防护被称为“净信的”。巴利
Yasmā ca asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā kāyavācānaṃ appāsādikaṃ appasādanīyaṃ asantaṃ asāruppaṃ kāyavacīduccaritaṃ cittassa appāsādikaṃ appasādanīyaṃ asantaṃ asāruppaṃ akusalavitakkattayañca anupagamma tabbiparītassa kāyavacīsucaritassa ceva kusalavitakkattayassa ca pāsādikassa pasādanīyassa santassa sāruppassa pāripūriyā saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘pāsādiko’’ti vuccati.
既然舍弃不防护、安住于防护的人,自身能促成一切烦恼的损减、超脱,以及八种精进策励事的圆满,因此防护被称为“损减与精进策励”。巴利
Yasmā pana asaṃvaraṃ pahāya saṃvare ṭhitassa attā sabbakilesāpacayabhūtāya, vivaṭṭāya, aṭṭhavīriyārambhavatthupāripūriyā ca saṃvattati, tasmā saṃvaro ‘‘apacayo ceva vīriyārambho cā’’ti vuccatīti.
比丘们,这(法谈)是适合他们的、随顺他们的:对于当时聚集在那里的比丘们来说,世尊现在将要制定的这条学处,正是适合他们的、随顺他们的。或者也可以这样理解:针对前面用“易护持”等说法所讲的防护,他作了一场与那防护相适合、相随顺,与防护和断除相关联,不拘泥于经、不系属于圣典,而是随缘开演的法谈——这就是这段话的意思。据说,世尊在这样的场合里,就像在编织五色花鬘、在串宝珠项链一样:对那些抗拒学处、喜欢不防护的人,用未来轮回的怖畏来警吓他们,显示种种过患;对那些想要学处、安住在防护中的人,有的让他们安立在阿罗汉果,有的让他们安立在不来果、一来果、入流果;即使对缺乏亲依止缘的人,也让他们安立在天界之道上,所说的法谈篇幅可以长到像长部或中部那样。正是针对这个,才说“为比丘们作了适合、随顺的法谈之后”。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ tadanulomikanti tattha sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yaṃ idāni sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessati, tassa anucchavikañceva anulomikañca. Yo vā ayaṃ subharatādīhi saṃvaro vutto, tassa anucchavikañceva anulomikañca saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ asuttantavinibaddhaṃ pāḷivinimuttaṃ okkantikadhammadesanaṃ katvāti attho. Bhagavā kira īdisesu ṭhānesu pañcavaṇṇakusumamālaṃ karonto viya, ratanadāmaṃ sajjento viya, ca ye paṭikkhipanādhippāyā asaṃvarābhiratā te samparāyikena vaṭṭabhayena tajjento anekappakāraṃ ādīnavaṃ dassento, ye sikkhākāmā saṃvare ṭhitā te appekacce arahatte patiṭṭhapento appekacce anāgāmi-sakadāgāmi-sotāpattiphalesu upanissayavirahitepi saggamagge patiṭṭhapento dīghanikāyappamāṇampi majjhimanikāyappamāṇampi dhammadesanaṃ karoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ tadanulomikaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā’’ti.
“因此”是指以苏定那的那次错误行为作为原因。“学处”这个词里,“应当学”所以叫“学”,“依此而达到”所以叫“处”,学的处就是“学处”,意思是证得学的途径。或者也可以说,它被称为根本、依靠、立足处。这是对远离淫行、防护淫行的另一种说法。因为防护淫行相对于其他那些被称为“学”的法——戒、观、禅那、道等——按照前面所说的意义来说也是“处”,所以这里所指的是“学处”。这个含义应当依照《学处分别》里所说的方法来理解。另外,能够阐明这个含义的说法本身也应被理解为“学处”。这也是被说过的:“学处,就是这里的名身、句身、词身、文身。”或者,就像说“无贪是法句”时,意思是无贪是法的一个部分,同样地,这里“学处”也应理解为学的一部分、学的一个部分。巴利
Tena hīti tena sudinnassa ajjhācārena kāraṇabhūtena. Sikkhāpadanti ettha sikkhitabbāti sikkhā, pajjate imināti padaṃ, sikkhāya padaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ; sikkhāya adhigamupāyoti attho. Atha vā mūlaṃ nissayo patiṭṭhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Methunaviratiyā methunasaṃvarassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Methunasaṃvaro hi tadaññesaṃ sikkhāsaṅkhātānaṃ sīlavipassanājhānamaggadhammānaṃ vuttatthavasena padattā idha ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti adhippeto. Ayañca attho sikkhāpadavibhaṅge vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apica tassatthassa dīpakaṃ vacanampi ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘sikkhāpadanti yo tattha nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti. Atha vā yathā ‘‘anabhijjhā dhammapada’’nti vutte anabhijjhā eko dhammakoṭṭhāsoti attho hoti, evamidhāpi ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti sikkhākoṭṭhāso sikkhāya eko padesotipi attho veditabbo.
“依于十种利益”是指:以十种理由,为了制定学处所应达成的殊胜利益,依止、基于、着眼于这十种殊胜利益的达成,也就是观察到这十种殊胜利益能够圆满实现——这就是这句话的意思。现在,为了显示这十种利益,世尊说“为僧团优良”等。其中,“僧团优良”是指僧团处于良好状态,就像在“善哉,诸天”这句话出现的地方一样,是接受“善哉,尊者”这句话的状态。凡是接受如来言教的人,那对他长久以来都会带来利益和安乐。因此,为了让僧团以“善哉,尊者”来接受我的言教,我将制定学处——先说明不接受的过患和接受的功德,而不是用强力压制。为了阐明这个意思,世尊说:“为僧团优良。”“为僧团安乐”是指为了僧团的安适状态;意思是,为了共同生活时能安乐地安住。巴利
Dasaatthavase paṭiccāti dasa kāraṇavase sikkhāpadapaññattihetu adhigamanīye hitavisese paṭicca āgamma ārabbha, dasannaṃ hitavisesānaṃ nipphattiṃ sampassamānoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni te dasa atthavase dassento ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha saṅghasuṭṭhutā nāma saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvo, ‘‘suṭṭhu devā’’ti āgataṭṭhāne viya ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvo . Yo ca tathāgatassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchati , tassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hoti, tasmā saṅghassa ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti mama vacanasampaṭicchanatthaṃ paññapessāmi, asampaṭicchane ādīnavaṃ sampaṭicchane ca ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā, na balakkārena abhibhavitvāti etamatthaṃ āvikaronto āha – ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāyā’’ti. Saṅghaphāsutāyāti saṅghassa phāsubhāvāya; sahajīvitāya sukhavihāratthāyāti attho.
为了折伏那些倔强的人:所谓“倔强”,就是指破戒的人。这种人即使被质问,也很难生起羞愧;正在犯戒或已经犯戒之后,也不觉得羞耻。制定学处就是为了折伏他们。因为如果没有学处,他们就会去烦扰僧团,说:“你们看到了什么?听到了什么?我们做了什么?你们是根据哪件事、以什么罪来指控我们、折伏我们?”但有了学处之后,僧团就可以指出学处,依法、依律、依师教来折伏他们。因此说:“为了折伏那些倔强的人。”巴利
Dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyāti dummaṅkū nāma dussīlapuggalā; ye maṅkutaṃ āpādiyamānāpi dukkhena āpajjanti, vītikkamaṃ karontā vā katvā vā na lajjanti, tesaṃ niggahatthāya; te hi sikkhāpade asati ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi diṭṭhaṃ, kiṃ sutaṃ – kiṃ amhehi kataṃ; katarasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ katamaṃ āpattiṃ āropetvā amhe niggaṇhathā’’ti saṅghaṃ viheṭhessanti, sikkhāpade pana sati te saṅgho sikkhāpadaṃ dassetvā dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena niggahessati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti.
“为了让贤善的比丘们安乐而住”:这是为了那些性情可爱、持戒清净的比丘们能够安乐而住。因为性情可爱、持戒清净的比丘们,如果不知道什么是该做的、什么是不该做的,什么是有罪的、什么是无罪的,什么是时限、什么是界限,那么在努力圆满三学的时候就会疲惫不堪,遇到事情就会感到困扰压迫。但如果他们知道了什么是该做的、什么是不该做的,什么是有罪的、什么是无罪的,什么是时限、什么是界限,那么在努力圆满三学的时候就不会疲惫,遇到事情也不会感到困扰压迫。因此,为他们制定学处,就能带来安乐而住。或者说,对那些不知惭愧的人加以折伏,本身就是这些比丘的安乐而住。因为只要还有破戒的人存在,布萨就举行不了,自恣就举行不了,僧团羯磨就运作不起来,和合就达不成,比丘们也无法专心投入诵戒、问法、修习业处等事务。而当那些破戒的人被折伏之后,这一切麻烦就都不会有了。由此,贤善的比丘们就能安乐而住。这样,“为了让贤善的比丘们安乐而住”这句话,应当知道有两层含义。巴利
Pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāyāti pesalānaṃ piyasīlānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihāratthāya. Piyasīlā hi bhikkhū kattabbākattabbaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ velaṃ mariyādaṃ ajānantā sikkhattayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā kilamanti, sandiṭṭhamānā ubbāḷhā honti. Kattabbākattabbaṃ pana sāvajjānavajjaṃ velaṃ mariyādaṃ ñatvā sikkhattayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā na kilamanti, sandiṭṭhamānā na ubbāḷhā honti. Tena nesaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanā phāsuvihārāya saṃvattati. Yo vā dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggaho, sveva etesaṃ phāsuvihāro. Dussīlapuggale nissāya hi uposatho na tiṭṭhati , pavāraṇā na tiṭṭhati, saṅghakammāni nappavattanti, sāmaggī na hoti, bhikkhū anekaggā uddesaparipucchākammaṭṭhānādīni anuyuñjituṃ na sakkonti. Dussīlesu pana niggahitesu sabbopi ayaṃ upaddavo na hoti. Tato pesalā bhikkhū phāsu viharanti. Evaṃ ‘‘pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsu vihārāyā’’ti ettha dvidhā attho veditabbo.
“为了防护现世的漏”:所谓“现世的漏”,是指安住于不防护的状态时,就在这一生当中所会遭受的种种苦,比如被人用手打、用杖打、被砍手、被砍脚、恶名、恶声、追悔等。因此,为了防护、遮蔽、阻挡这些现世的漏而前来——这就是它的意思。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāyāti diṭṭhadhammikā āsavā nāma asaṃvare ṭhitena tasmiññeva attabhāve pattabbā pāṇippahāra-daṇḍappahāra-hatthaccheda-pādaccheda-akitti-ayasavippaṭisārādayo dukkhavisesā. Iti imesaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya pidhānāya āgamanamaggathakanāyāti attho.
为了断除来世的诸漏,这里说的是:所谓来世的诸漏,就是指一个人安住在不防护的状态下,以所造的恶业为根源,将来在后世的地狱等处必将遭受的各种苦。为了断除、止息、平息这些来世的诸漏——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyāti samparāyikā āsavā nāma asaṃvare ṭhitena katapāpakammamūlakā samparāye narakādīsu pattabbā dukkhavisesā, tesaṃ paṭighātatthāya paṭippassambhanatthāya vūpasamatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“为了让还没生起信心的人能生起信心”:因为制定了学处,当人了解了学处的制定,或者看到比丘们按照所制定的学处去实行时,那些还没生起信心的有智慧的人就会想:“世间大众所贪染、所嗔恨、所迷惑的那些事,这些沙门释子却远远地远离、舍离而住,他们确实在做难做的事,确实在做沉重的事。”于是他们就生起了信心,就像那位在律藏中看到书册而放弃邪见、通达三吠陀的婆罗门一样。因此说“为了让还没生起信心的人能生起信心”。巴利
Appasannānaṃ pasādāyāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi sati sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ ñatvā vā yathāpaññattaṃ paṭipajjamāne bhikkhū disvā vā yepi appasannā paṇḍitamanussā, te ‘‘yāni vata loke mahājanassa rajjana-dussana-muyhanaṭṭhānāni, tehi ime samaṇā sakyaputtiyā ārakā viratā viharanti, dukkaraṃ vata karonti, bhāriyaṃ vata karontī’’ti pasādaṃ āpajjanti, vinayapiṭake potthakaṃ disvā micchādiṭṭhika-tivedī brāhmaṇo viya. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘appasannānaṃ pasādāyā’’ti.
为了让已生信心的人信心不断增长:那些已经在教法中生起净信的善男子,一旦了解了学处的制定,或者看到比丘们按照所制定的学处去实践时,就会想:“啊,这些尊者真是做到了难做的事!他们一辈子只吃一顿饭、修梵行、守护律仪。”于是信心一次又一次地增长。因此说“为了让已生信心的人信心不断增长”。巴利
Pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyāti yepi sāsane pasannā kulaputtā tepi sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ ñatvā yathāpaññattaṃ paṭipajjamāne bhikkhū vā disvā ‘‘aho ayyā dukkarakārino, ye yāvajīvaṃ ekabhattaṃ brahmacariyaṃ vinayasaṃvaraṃ anupālentī’’ti bhiyyo bhiyyo pasīdanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyā’’ti.
为了让正法久住:正法有三种,就是教法正法、行道正法和证得正法。其中,收在三藏里的一切佛语,叫做教法正法。十三种头陀功德、十四种犍度行仪、八十二种大行仪,以及戒、定、慧,叫做行道正法。四圣道、四沙门果和涅槃,叫做证得正法。因为只要学处被制定出来,比丘们就会学习学处、学处的分别,以及为了说明这些学处含义的其他佛语;他们按照所制定的去实践,圆满行道之后,就能证得通过行道应当证得的出世间法。所以,学处的制定能让正法久住。因此说,为了让正法久住。巴利
Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāti tividho saddhammo – pariyattisaddhammo, paṭipattisaddhammo, adhigamasaddhammoti. Tattha piṭakattayasaṅgahitaṃ sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ ‘‘pariyattisaddhammo’’ nāma. Terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa khandhakavattāni, dveasīti mahāvattāni, sīlasamādhivipassanāti ayaṃ ‘‘paṭipattisaddhammo’’ nāma. Cattāro ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni nibbānañcāti ayaṃ ‘‘adhigamasaddhammo’’ nāma. So sabbopi yasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sati bhikkhū sikkhāpadañca tassa vibhaṅgañca tadatthajotanatthaṃ aññañca buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, yathāpaññattañca paṭipajjamānā paṭipattiṃ pūretvā paṭipattiyā adhigantabbaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ adhigacchanti, tasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā ciraṭṭhitiko hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saddhammaṭṭhitiyā’’ti.
为了护持律:因为有了学处的制定,防护律、断除律、止息律和制定律这四种律就都得到了护持、得到了支撑、得到了善巧的支撑。因此说“为了护持律”。巴利
Vinayānuggahāyāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi sati saṃvaravinayo ca pahānavinayo ca samathavinayo ca paññattivinayo cāti catubbidhopi vinayo anuggahito hoti upatthambhito sūpatthambhito. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vinayānuggahāyā’’ti.
所有这些词句,都应该和“我将制定学处”这句话连在一起理解。这里,第一句和最后一句的连接方式是:“为了僧团优良,我将制定学处……为了护持律,我将制定学处。”巴利
Sabbāneva cetāni padāni ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti iminā vacanena saddhiṃ yojetabbāni . Tatrāyaṃ paṭhamapacchimapadayojanā – ‘‘saṅghasuṭṭhutāya sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmi, vinayānuggahāya sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti.
在这里,如果按照连锁的方式来说:凡是能让僧团变好的,就是能让僧团安乐的;凡是能让僧团安乐的,就是能压制那些难以调伏的人的。如果以每一个词为根,做十次连接,就像《附随》中所说的那样:凡是能让僧团变好的,就是能让僧团安乐的;凡是能让僧团变好的,就是能压制那些难以调伏的人的。巴利
Api cettha yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyāti evaṃ saṅkhalikanayaṃ; yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyāti evañca ekekapadamūlikaṃ dasakkhattuṃ yojanaṃ katvā yaṃ vuttaṃ parivāre (pari. 334) –
一百个义,一百个法,还有二百个词释;
在《义之依据论》中,有四百种智。巴利
‘‘Atthasataṃ dhammasataṃ, dve ca niruttisatāni; Cattāri ñāṇasatāni, atthavase pakaraṇe’’ti.
这一切都应该知道。不过,因为它会在《附随》里清楚说明,所以这里就不解释了。巴利
Taṃ sabbaṃ veditabbaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ yasmā parivāreyeva āvi bhavissati, tasmā idha na vaṇṇitanti.
像这样显示了制定学处的功德之后,为了说明比丘们对这个学处应当做的事,世尊说:“诸比丘,你们应当这样诵这个学处。”这话说的是什么意思呢?诸比丘,对于我这样开示了功德的这个学处,你们应当这样在布萨诵戒时诵它、学习它、受持它,也教别人诵。这里“ca”这个词有“进一步引出”的意思,因此就引出了这样的含义。巴利
Evaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiyā ānisaṃsaṃ dassetvā tasmiṃ sikkhāpade bhikkhūhi kattabbakiccaṃ dīpento ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyāthā’’ti āha. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhikkhave, imaṃ pana mayā iti sandassitānisaṃsaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ pātimokkhuddese uddiseyyātha ca pariyāpuṇeyyātha ca dhāreyyātha ca aññesañca vāceyyāthāti. Atirekānayanattho hi ettha ca saddo, tenāyamattho ānīto hotīti.
现在,为了说明前面所说的“这条学处”,世尊说道:“若比丘行淫法,是波罗夷,不共住。”就这样,以断除根本的方式牢牢制定第一条波罗夷之后,为了补充制定后续规定,又发生了母猴这件事。为了说明这件事的发生,才说了这句:“就这样,世尊为诸比丘制定了这条学处。”这句话的意思是:世尊为诸比丘就这样制定了这条学处,而另外还有一件事发生了。巴利
Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘imaṃ sikkhāpada’’nti taṃ dassento ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyya, pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti āha. Evaṃ mūlacchejjavasena daḷhaṃ katvā paṭhamapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya makkaṭīvatthu udapādi. Tassuppattidīpanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – evañcidaṃ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ hotīti. Tassattho – bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ paññattaṃ hoti ca, idañca aññaṃ vatthu udapādīti.
母猴因缘故事巴利
Makkaṭīvatthukathā
40 40. 现在,为了说明另一件发生的事,说了“那时”等话。这里对难解词语的解释是:以食物诱引母猴——在大林中,由于比丘们忍辱、慈爱等功德的力量,许多鹿、孔雀、鸡、猴等畜生心里没有恐惧,在修行住处一带随意走动。其中,用粥、饭、嚼食等食物引诱、拉拢了一只母猴,这就是所说的意思。“对她”是处格。“行淫”是指反复行淫;这里用现在时,是表示习惯性动作。“那位比丘”是指那个行淫的比丘。“巡视房舍而游走”——那些客比丘为了见佛陀而来,清晨得到客食,吃完饭后就想着“我们去看看比丘们住的地方”,于是四处走动。因此说“巡视房舍而游走”。“往那些比丘那里去”——畜生一旦和某位比丘混熟了,对其他比丘也会生起同样的心。所以那只母猴就朝那些比丘走去;走过去之后,也像对那位跟它熟悉的比丘一样,对他们做出同样的动作。巴利
40. Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññaṃ vatthu uppannaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – makkaṭiṃ āmisenāti mahāvane bhikkhūnaṃ khantimettādiguṇānubhāvena nirāsaṅkacittā bahū migamorakukkuṭamakkaṭādayo tiracchānā padhānāgāraṭṭhānesu vicaranti. Tatra ekaṃ makkaṭiṃ āmisena yāgubhattakhajjakādinā upalāpetvā, saṅgaṇhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassāti bhummavacanaṃ. Paṭisevatīti pacurapaṭisevano hoti; pacuratthe hi vattamānavacanaṃ. So bhikkhūti so methunadhammapaṭisevanako bhikkhu. Senāsanacārikaṃ āhiṇḍantāti te bhikkhū āgantukā buddhadassanāya āgatā pātova āgantukabhattāni labhitvā katabhattakiccā bhikkhūnaṃ nivāsanaṭṭhānāni passissāmāti vicariṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘senāsanacārikaṃ āhiṇḍantā’’ti. Yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamīti tiracchānagatā nāma ekabhikkhunā saddhiṃ vissāsaṃ katvā aññesupi tādisaññeva cittaṃ uppādenti. Tasmā sā makkaṭī yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ca attano vissāsikabhikkhusseva tesampi taṃ vikāraṃ dassesi.
“尾”是指尾巴。“翘起”是指把它朝向面前立起来。“示现根相”的意思是:她以那样的方式、那样的动作,让他们知道她有行淫的意图。“彼比丘”是指这座精舍所属的比丘。“隐于一边”是指他们藏在一个地方。巴利
Cheppanti naṅguṭṭhaṃ. Oḍḍīti abhimukhaṃ ṭhapesi. Nimittampi akāsīti yena niyāmena yāya kiriyāya methunādhippāyaṃ te jānanti taṃ akāsīti attho . So bhikkhūti yassāyaṃ vihāro. Ekamantaṃ nilīyiṃsūti ekasmiṃ okāse paṭicchannā acchiṃsu.
41 “是真的,贤友。”就像盗贼被当场抓住一样,因为被当面看见并受到指责,没法说“我做了什么”之类的话,只好说:“是真的,贤友。”贤友,难道不正是那样吗?意思是:贤友,就像对人类女性那样,对畜生道女性,这条学处也同样适用。因为对人类女性来说,看见、抓住、触摸、碰触、接触,全都是粗恶的;对畜生道女性来说,那一切也同样全是粗恶的。这里有什么差别呢?你是在根本没有借口的地方硬找借口。巴利
41.Saccaṃ, āvusoti sahoḍḍhaggahito coro viya paccakkhaṃ disvā coditattā ‘‘kiṃ vā mayā kata’’ntiādīni vattuṃ asakkonto ‘‘saccaṃ, āvuso’’ti āha. Nanu, āvuso, tatheva taṃ hotīti āvuso yathā manussitthiyā, nanu tiracchānagatitthiyāpi taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tatheva hoti. Manussitthiyāpi hi dassanampi gahaṇampi āmasanampi phusanampi ghaṭṭanampi duṭṭhullameva. Tiracchānagatitthiyāpi taṃ sabbaṃ duṭṭhullameva. Ko ettha viseso? Alesaṭṭhāne tvaṃ lesaṃ oḍḍesīti.
42 “最低限度,即使对畜生道女众,也犯波罗夷,不共住。”也就是说,即使对畜生道女众行淫法,也仍然犯波罗夷。因此,世尊把这条学处制定得更严格。学处有两种:世间所呵责的,和制定所呵责的。其中,在有心识活动这一类情形里,心只是不善,这就叫世间所呵责;其余的则是制定所呵责。对于世间所呵责的,随制一旦生起,就会约束、关闭大门、截断水流,使它变得更严格。除了增上慢的情况、除了梦中的情况,这是因为没有违犯、也不构成犯戒,所以才这样说。对于制定所呵责的,在还没有违犯时,随制一旦生起,就会放松、解开、打开大门,并不断给出种种无犯的情形,就像在众食、次第食等中的随制那样。而像“乃至刹那顷”这样的说法,则是在已经违犯时生起的,所以只是属于随制性的。然而,这第一条学处因为是世间所呵责,不是制定所呵责,所以这个随制是作为约束、关闭大门、截断水流、使它更严格而出现的。巴利
42.Antamaso tiracchānagatāyapi pārājiko hoti asaṃvāsoti tiracchānagatāyapi methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā pārājiko yeva hotīti daḷhataraṃ sikkhāpadamakāsi. Duvidhañhi sikkhāpadaṃ – lokavajjaṃ, paṇṇattivajjañca. Tattha yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ nāma. Sesaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Tattha lokavajje anupaññatti uppajjamānā rundhantī dvāraṃ pidahantī sotaṃ pacchindamānā gāḷhataraṃ karontī uppajjati, aññatra adhimānā, aññatra supinantāti ayaṃ pana vītikkamābhāvā abbohārikattā ca vuttā. Paṇṇattivajje akate vītikkame uppajjamānā sithilaṃ karontī mocentī dvāraṃ dadamānā aparāparampi anāpattiṃ kurumānā uppajjati, gaṇabhojanaparamparabhojanādīsu anupaññattiyo viya. ‘‘Antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’ti evarūpā pana kate vītikkame uppannattā paññattigatikāva hoti. Idaṃ pana paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ yasmā lokavajjaṃ, na paṇṇattivajjaṃ; tasmā ayamanupaññatti rundhantī dvāraṃ pidahantī sotaṃ pacchindamānā gāḷhataraṃ karontī uppajji.
把这两件事合在一起,从根上切断,使它变得更严格之后,在第一波罗夷已经制定的情况下,又出现了瓦基子比丘们的事,为的是再作随制。为了说明这件事的出现,才说“就这样,世尊为诸比丘制定了这条学处”。这句话的意思是:世尊为比丘们制定了这条学处之后,又出现了另一件事。巴利
Evaṃ dvepi vatthūni sampiṇḍetvā mūlacchejjavasena daḷhataraṃ katvā paṭhamapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya vajjiputtakavatthu udapādi. Tassuppattidassanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘evañcidaṃ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti . Tassattho – bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ paññattaṃ hoti ca idañca aññampi vatthu udapādīti.
跋耆子事之注释巴利
Vajjiputtakavatthuvaṇṇanā
43-44 43-44. 现在,为了说明那另一件已经发生的事,说出了“那时”等话。这里也是对难解语句的注释:毗舍离人,就是住在毗舍离的人。跋耆子,就是跋耆国毗舍离城中各家之子。据说,在教法中出现的一切灾祸、过患和不幸,全都跟跋耆子们有关。提婆达多也是这样,在得到跋耆子们作为同党之后,分裂了僧团。而且,正是在世尊般涅槃一百年后,跋耆子们宣扬非法、非律、非师教。这些人中的一部分,即使学处已经这样制定,仍然尽情吃……乃至……行了淫欲法。巴利
43-44. Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññampi vatthu uppannaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāpi ayamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā – vesālikāti vesālivāsino. Vajjiputtakāti vajjiraṭṭhe vesāliyaṃ kulānaṃ puttā. Sāsane kira yo yo upaddavo ādīnavo abbudamuppajji, sabbaṃ taṃ vajjiputtake nissāya. Tathā hi devadattopi vajjiputtake pakkhe labhitvā saṅghaṃ bhindi. Vajjiputtakā eva ca vassasataparinibbute bhagavati uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ dīpesuṃ. Imepi tesaṃ yeva ekacce evaṃ paññattepi sikkhāpade yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjiṃsu…pe… methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseviṃsūti.
“以亲属灾祸”这里,灾祸、不幸、散乱、破坏、毁灭,这些全都是同一个意思。亲属的灾祸就是亲属灾祸,以那个亲属灾祸,也就是以王罚、疾病、死亡、离别为因的亲属毁灭,这就是它的意思。第二句也同样是这个道理。但在第三句里,破坏健康的疾病本身就是疾病灾祸。因为它破坏、扰乱、毁灭健康,所以是灾祸。疾病本身就是灾祸,就是疾病灾祸,以那个疾病灾祸。“所触”是被侵入、被压倒、被具足的意思。巴利
Ñātibyasanenapīti ettha asanaṃ byasanaṃ vikkhepo viddhaṃsanaṃ vināsoti sabbametaṃ ekatthaṃ. Ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ, tena ñātibyasanena, rājadaṇḍabyādhimaraṇavippavāsanimittena ñātivināsenāti attho. Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. Tatiyapade pana ārogyavināsako rogo eva rogabyasanaṃ. So hi ārogyaṃ byasati vikkhipati vināsetīti byasanaṃ. Rogova byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ, tena rogabyasanena. Phuṭṭhāti adhipannā abhibhūtā samannāgatāti attho.
尊者阿难,我们不是呵责佛陀的人。尊者阿难,我们不呵责佛陀,不把过失归给佛陀。我们不是呵责法的人,不是呵责僧的人。我们是呵责自己的人,我们只呵责自己,只把过失归给自己。无祥,就是没有光彩。少福,就是福报微薄。于善法修观者,就是对在三十八种所缘中分别出来的那些善法,是它们的修观者;意思是,从每一种所缘出定之后,再观照那些法。初夜后夜,就是夜的前一段是初夜,夜的后一段是后夜,说的就是初夜分和后夜分。菩提分,就是属于菩提的方面,是阿拉汉道智的助益者。我们应随行而住,就是舍弃在家障碍和住所障碍,在空闲的住处,专心一致,无其他事务而安住。菩提巴利
Na mayaṃ, bhante ānanda, buddhagarahinoti bhante ānanda, mayaṃ na buddhaṃ garahāma, na buddhassa dosaṃ dema. Na dhammagarahino, na saṅghagarahino. Attagarahino mayanti attānameva mayaṃ garahāma, attano dosaṃ dema. Alakkhikāti nissirikā. Appapuññāti parittapuññā. Vipassakā kusalānaṃ dhammānanti ye aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu vibhattā kusalā dhammā, tesaṃ vipassakā; tato tato ārammaṇato vuṭṭhāya teva dhamme vipassamānāti attho. Pubbarattāpararattanti rattiyā pubbaṃ pubbarattaṃ, rattiyā aparaṃ apararattaṃ, paṭhamayāmañca pacchimayāmañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bodhipakkhikānanti bodhissa pakkhe bhavānaṃ, arahattamaggañāṇassa upakārakānanti attho. Bhāvanānuyoganti vaḍḍhanānuyogaṃ. Anuyuttā vihareyyāmāti gihipalibodhaṃ āvāsapalibodhañca pahāya vivittesu senāsanesu yuttapayuttā anaññakiccā vihareyyāma.
“是的,贤友。”长老并不了解他们的心思,听了他们这番大话之后,心想:“如果这些人真能这样,那就好了。”于是便接受了,说:“是的,贤友。”“这是无此理、无机会的。”这两句都是否定理由的话。因为理由就是果依它而成立的东西,而机会也是依它而成立的东西,所以合起来说“理由与机会”。否定它时就说:“阿难,这是无此理,无机会。”意思是:这个理由或机会不存在。“如来……”,意思是:如来为了废除瓦基族等……的理由是不存在的。如果世尊对那些请求“请让我们得具足戒”的人授予具足戒,那么这样一来,就会废除已经制定的“是波罗夷,不共住”。然而,因为世尊并不废除它,所以才说“这是无此理”等话。巴利
Evamāvusoti thero etesaṃ āsayaṃ ajānanto idaṃ nesaṃ mahāgajjitaṃ sutvā ‘‘sace ime īdisā bhavissanti, sādhū’’ti maññamāno ‘‘evamāvuso’’ti sampaṭicchi. Aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāsoti ubhayampetaṃ kāraṇapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Kāraṇañhi yasmā tattha tadāyattavuttibhāvena phalaṃ tiṭṭhati. Yasmā cassa taṃ okāso hoti tadāyattavuttibhāvena, tasmā ‘‘ṭhānañca avakāso cā’’ti vuccati, taṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, ānanda , anavakāso’’ti. Etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vā okāso vā natthi. Yaṃ tathāgatoti yena tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā…pe… samūhaneyya, taṃ kāraṇaṃ natthīti attho. Yadi hi bhagavā etesaṃ ‘‘labheyyāma upasampada’’nti yācantānaṃ upasampadaṃ dadeyya, evaṃ sante ‘‘pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti paññattaṃ samūhaneyya. Yasmā panetaṃ na samūhanati, tasmā ‘‘aṭṭhānameta’’ntiādimāha.
像这样来的人不应被授予具足戒——世尊以悲悯之心,如实了知:“如果这样的人受了具足戒,他便会在这教法中没有恭敬心;但如果他仍停留在沙弥的阶段,就会怀有恭敬心,也能成办自己的利益。”所以才说:“像这样来的人不应被授予具足戒。”像这样来的人应被授予具足戒——世尊如实了知:“像这样来的人,安住在比丘的身份之后,因为戒行没有缺损,便会在这教法中有恭敬心;一旦具备了近因条件,不久就能证得最上的利益。”所以才说应被授予具足戒。巴利
So āgato na upasampādetabboti ‘‘yadi hi evaṃ āgato upasampadaṃ labheyya, sāsane agāravo bhaveyya. Sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ pana ṭhito sagāravo ca bhavissati, attatthañca karissatī’’ti ñatvā anukampamāno bhagavā āha – ‘‘so āgato na upasampādetabbo’’ti. So āgato upasampādetabboti evaṃ āgato bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā avipannasīlatāya sāsane sagāravo bhavissati, so sati upanissaye nacirasseva uttamatthaṃ pāpuṇissatīti ñatvā upasampādetabboti āha.
世尊这样说明了:对曾行淫欲法之后来求戒的人,有的情况不应授予具足戒,有的情况则应授予具足戒。然后,他把三种情况综合起来,使之完整,想要制定学处,便说:“诸比丘,你们应当这样诵此学处。”接着便制定了完整的学处:“若比丘……中略……不共住。”巴利
Evaṃ methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā āgatesu anupasampādetabbañca upasampādetabbañca dassetvā tīṇipi vatthūni samodhānetvā paripuṇṇaṃ katvā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetukāmo ‘‘evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyāthā’’ti vatvā ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu…pe… asaṃvāso’’ti paripuṇṇaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi.
四种律的讨论巴利
Catubbidhavinayakathā
45 45. 现在,为了分别说明它的含义,他说了“yo pana,即无论哪一种”等话。然而,想要精通这条学处、学处分别以及整个律的判定的人,应当了解四种律——巴利
45. Idānissa atthaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘yo panāti, yo yādiso’’tiādimāha. Tasmiṃ pana sikkhāpade ca sikkhāpadavibhaṅge ca sakale ca vinayavinicchaye kosallaṃ patthayantena catubbidho vinayo jānitabbo –
因为,具大神力的大长老们将律分为四种;
过去,结集法藏的人们把它提取出来并加以宣说。巴利
Catubbidhañhi vinayaṃ, mahātherā mahiddhikā; Nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ, dhammasaṅgāhakā purā.
哪四种呢?就是经、随顺经、师说、自己的见解。针对这个,有人说:“以亲证之句、以意味、以师承、以己见。”这里,“亲证之句”指的是经,“意味”指的是随顺经,“师承”指的是师说,“己见”指的是自己的见解。巴利
Katamaṃ catubbidhaṃ? Suttaṃ, suttānulomaṃ, ācariyavādaṃ, attanomatinti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘āhaccapadena rasena ācariyavaṃsena adhippāyā’’ti, ettha hi āhaccapadanti suttaṃ adhippetaṃ, rasoti suttānulomaṃ, ācariyavaṃsoti ācariyavādo, adhippāyoti attanomati.
在这里,“经”指的就是整个律藏中的巴利原文。巴利
Tattha suttaṃnāma sakale vinayapiṭake pāḷi.
所谓“随顺经”就是四大教法,也就是世尊这样说的:比丘们,如果我没有以“这是不允许的”来否定某件事,而它却随顺不允许的、排斥允许的,那对你们来说就是不允许的。比丘们,如果我没有以“这是不允许的”来否定某件事,而它却随顺允许的、排斥不允许的,那对你们来说就是允许的。比丘们,如果我没有以“这是允许的”来认可某件事,而它却随顺不允许的、排斥允许的,那对你们来说就是不允许的。比丘们,如果我没有以“这是允许的”来认可某件事,而它却随顺允许的、排斥不允许的,那对你们来说就是允许的。巴利
Suttānulomaṃ nāma cattāro mahāpadesā; ye bhagavatā evaṃ vuttā – ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave , mayā ‘idaṃ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce akappiyaṃ anulometi; kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo na kappati. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṃ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce kappiyaṃ anulometi; akappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo kappati. Yaṃ, bhikkhave , mayā ‘idaṃ kappatī’ti ananuññātaṃ, taṃ ce akappiyaṃ anulometi, kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati; taṃ vo na kappati. Yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṃ kappatī’ti ananuññātaṃ, taṃ ce kappiyaṃ anulometi, akappiyaṃ paṭibāhati; taṃ vo kappatī’’ti (mahāva. 305).
所谓“师说”,就是由结集法的五百位阿拉汉所确立、不依赖巴利原文、以判别决断的方式展开的注释书。巴利
Ācariyavādo nāma dhammasaṅgāhakehi pañcahi arahantasatehi ṭhapitā pāḷivinimuttā okkantavinicchayappavattā aṭṭhakathātanti.
所谓“自意”,就是抛开经、随顺经和师说,靠推理、凭自己的觉慧、以理趣把握而提出的说法。巴利
Attanomati nāma sutta-suttānuloma-ācariyavāde muñcitvā anumānena attano anubuddhiyā nayaggāhena upaṭṭhitākārakathanaṃ.
另外,凡是出现在经、论、律的注释书里的上座部观点,都叫作“自意”。但是,讲说时如果采用这种自意,就不应该死死抓住不放。应当先审察理由,把义理和巴利文互相对照,然后再讲。自意应当放进师说里去衡量。如果它能放进去而且相合,就可以采用;如果既放不进去也不相合,就不能采用。因为这自意其实是最没有力量的。师说比自意更有力量。巴利
Apica suttantābhidhammavinayaṭṭhakathāsu āgato sabbopi theravādo ‘‘attanomati’’ nāma. Taṃ pana attanomatiṃ gahetvā kathentena na daḷhaggāhaṃ gahetvā voharitabbaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ sallakkhetvā atthena pāḷiṃ, pāḷiyā ca atthaṃ saṃsanditvā kathetabbaṃ. Attanomati ācariyavāde otāretabbā. Sace tattha otarati ceva sameti ca, gahetabbā. Sace neva otarati na sameti, na gahetabbā. Ayañhi attanomati nāma sabbadubbalā. Attanomatito ācariyavādo balavataro.
老师说的话,也要与随顺经对照。在这个过程中,只有能顺入而且和随顺经相合的,才可以采用;不能顺入的,就不该采用。因为比起老师说的话,随顺经才是更有力的。巴利
Ācariyavādopi suttānulome otāretabbo. Tattha otaranto samentoyeva gahetabbo, itaro na gahetabbo. Ācariyavādato hi suttānulomaṃ balavataraṃ.
与经相顺的内容,也应该拿来对照经。对照时,只有真正契合经的才采纳,不契合的就不采纳。因为与经相顺的内容,力量比不上经本身。经是不可违逆的,就像僧团作羯磨一样,也像诸佛住世时一样。所以,当两位比丘讨论时,主张自己观点的一方引经来说,主张对方观点的一方则依据与经相顺的内容来说。他们不应该互相贬斥或指责,而应该把与经相顺的内容拿来对照经。如果能契合、相符,就采纳;如果不能,就不采纳,只应该站在经的立场上。再者,如果这个人引经来说,另一个人依据阿阇梨之说,他们也不应该互相贬斥或指责,而应该把阿阇梨之说拿来对照经。如果能契合、相符,就采纳;如果不能契合、不符,这种应受呵责的阿阇梨之说就不该采纳,只应该站在经的立场上。巴利
Suttānulomampi sutte otāretabbaṃ. Tattha otarantaṃ samentameva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Suttānulomato hi suttameva balavataraṃ. Suttañhi appaṭivattiyaṃ kārakasaṅghasadisaṃ buddhānaṃ ṭhitakālasadisaṃ. Tasmā yadā dve bhikkhū sākacchanti, sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paravādī suttānulomaṃ. Tehi aññamaññaṃ khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvā suttānulomaṃ sutte otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbaṃ. No ce, na gahetabbaṃ; suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Athāyaṃ suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro ācariyavādaṃ. Tehipi aññamaññaṃ khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvā ācariyavādo sutte otāretabbo. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbo. Anotaranto asamento ca gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo; suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果有人拿经出来说法,另一个人却凭自己的见解。他们也不应该互相攻击或指责,而应该把自己的见解放进经里去检验。如果能放进去、能吻合,就可以接受;如果不能,就不该接受。应当只站在经的立场上。巴利
Athāyaṃ suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro attanomatiṃ. Tehipi aññamaññaṃ khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvā attanomati sutte otāretabbā. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbā. No ce, na gahetabbā. Suttasmiṃ yeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果有人依据随顺于经来说,另一个人则依据经文。经文应当被纳入随顺于经之中来考察。如果能纳入并且相契合,又能看出它是三次结集所收录、巴利语传承下来的,那就应当采信。如果看不出是这样,既不能纳入也不契合,那它就是外道的经,或者是偈颂,或者是其他应当受到呵责的典籍,比如从《密护方》《密律》《毗陀罗》等某一类中来的,那就不应当采信。应当只安住在随顺于经之中。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttaṃ. Suttaṃ suttānulome otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, tisso saṅgītiyo ārūḷhaṃ pāḷiāgataṃ paññāyati, gahetabbaṃ. No ce tathā paññāyati na otarati na sameti, bāhirakasuttaṃ vā hoti siloko vā aññaṃ vā gārayhasuttaṃ guḷhavessantaraguḷhavinayavedallādīnaṃ aññatarato āgataṃ, na gahetabbaṃ. Suttānulomasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,有人抓住与经相顺的内容来说,另一个人则依据诸师之说。诸师之说应当放进与经相顺的标准里衡量。如果能放进去、能吻合,就可以采纳;如果不能,就不该采纳。只应当立足于与经相顺本身。巴利
Athāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro ācariyavādaṃ. Ācariyavādo suttānulome otāretabbo. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbo. No ce, na gahetabbo. Suttānulomeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,他拿随顺经来作依据而说,对方则凭自己的见解。自己的见解应当放到随顺经的标准里去检验。如果能吻合、相符,就可以接受;如果不能,就不该接受。应当只立足于随顺经。巴利
Athāyaṃ suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro attanomatiṃ. Attanomati suttānulome otāretabbā. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbā. No ce, na gahetabbā. Suttānulomeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时候,如果有人执取师说来讲,对方就举出经文。应该把经文拿来跟师说对照。如果能对得上、相契合,就可以接受。其他那些该受呵责的经文,就不该接受。应当只依止师说。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ ācariyavādaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttaṃ. Suttaṃ ācariyavāde otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbaṃ. Itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Ācariyavādeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,这个人执取师说而进行讲述,对方则举出随顺经教。应当把随顺经教放进师说中对照。对照时,若相符一致,就应当接受;其他的则不应当接受。应当只依止于师说。巴利
Athāyaṃ ācariyavādaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttānulomaṃ. Suttānulomaṃ ācariyavāde otāretabbaṃ. Otarantaṃ samentameva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Ācariyavādeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,他拿师父的说法来讲,对方则提出自己的见解。自己的见解应当放进师父的说法里对照。如果能对得上、相契合,就可以接受;如果对不上,就不该接受。应当只安住在师父的说法上。巴利
Athāyaṃ ācariyavādaṃ gahetvā katheti, paro attanomatiṃ. Attanomati ācariyavāde otāretabbā. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbā. No ce, na gahetabbā. Ācariyavādeyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时候,有人抓住自己的见解来讲说,对方则引经。应该把经放进自己的见解里对照。如果能对得上、相契合,就可以接受;那部该受指责的经就不该接受。只应该站在自己的见解上。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ attanomatiṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttaṃ. Suttaṃ attanomatiyaṃ otāretabbaṃ. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbaṃ. Itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,他拿自己的见解来说法,对方则引随顺经教的内容。应该把随顺经教的内容放进自己的见解里对照。放进去对照时,如果吻合,就采纳;不吻合,就不采纳。只应依止自己的见解。巴利
Athāyaṃ attanomatiṃ gahetvā katheti, paro suttānulomaṃ. Suttānulomaṃ attanomatiyaṃ otāretabbaṃ. Otarantaṃ samentameva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,这个人拿自己的主张来说,对方则搬出阿阇梨的说法。阿阇梨的说法应当拿来跟自己的主张对照会通。如果能会通、相契合,就可以接受;否则,那种应受呵责的阿阇梨说法就不该接受。只应当安住于自己的主张,只应当把自己的执取看得更有分量。而且在一切情况下,都不应当轻视或呵责。巴利
Athāyaṃ attanomatiṃ gahetvā katheti, paro ācariyavādaṃ. Ācariyavādo attanomatiyaṃ otāretabbo. Sace otarati sameti, gahetabbo; itaro gārayhācariyavādo na gahetabbo. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbaṃ. Attano gahaṇameva baliyaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sabbaṭṭhānesu ca khepo vā garahā vā na kātabbāti.
这时候,如果这个人拿了“如法”的说法来讲,对方却说“不如法”,那就应该对照经和随顺经教来判断。如果它是如法的,就该站在如法这一边;如果它是不如法的,就该站在不如法这一边。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ ‘‘kappiya’’nti gahetvā katheti, paro ‘‘akappiya’’nti. Sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbaṃ. Sace kappiyaṃ hoti, kappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Sace akappiyaṃ, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果这个人依据经教给出很多理由和判断来证明那件事是如法的,而对方找不到理由,那就应该依止为如法。如果对方依据经教给出很多理由和判断来证明那件事是不如法的,那就不应该想“这是我的执取”而固执坚持,应该接受说“善哉”,然后依止为不如法。如果双方都看到理由的影子,那就以被否决的那一方为准,应该依止为不如法。因为一旦涉及律,在思择如法与不如法时,应该加以制止,应该严格,应该截断流向,应该安住在重大处。巴利
Athāyaṃ tassa kappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dasseti, paro kāraṇaṃ na vindati. Kappiyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha paro tassa akappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dasseti, anena attano gahaṇanti katvā daḷhaṃ ādāya na ṭhātabbaṃ. ‘‘Sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā akappiyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissati, paṭikkhittabhāvoyeva sādhu, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Vinayañhi patvā kappiyākappiyavicāraṇamāgamma rundhitabbaṃ, gāḷhaṃ kattabbaṃ, sotaṃ pacchinditabbaṃ, garukabhāveyeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时候,如果这个人认定“这是不如法的”而这样说,对方却说是“如法的”,那就应该对照经和随顺经教来判断。如果确实是如法的,就应该站在如法这一边;如果确实是不如法的,就应该站在不如法这一边。巴利
Atha panāyaṃ ‘‘akappiya’’nti gahetvā katheti, paro ‘‘kappiya’’nti. Sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbaṃ. Sace kappiyaṃ hoti, kappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Sace akappiyaṃ, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ.
这时,如果这个人用许多经教和抉择的依据,说明那是不许可的,而对方找不到依据,那就应当依止不许可。如果对方用许多经教和抉择的依据,说明那是许可的,而这个人找不到依据,那就应当依止许可。如果双方都只看到一点依据的影子,那就不应放弃自己的立场。正如在许可与不许可、不许可与许可的抉择中所说的那样,在无犯与有犯、有犯与无犯,以及轻犯与重犯、重犯与轻犯的说法中,也应当同样了知这个抉择。这里确实只是名称不同,在联系的方式上并没有差别,所以不再详细展开。巴利
Athāyaṃ bahūhi suttavinicchayakāraṇehi akappiyabhāvaṃ dasseti, paro kāraṇaṃ na vindati, akappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha paro bahūhi suttavinicchayakāraṇehi kappiyabhāvaṃ dasseti, ayaṃ kāraṇaṃ na vindati, kappiye ṭhātabbaṃ. Atha dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissati, attano gahaṇaṃ na vissajjetabbaṃ. Yathā cāyaṃ kappiyākappiye akappiyakappiye ca vinicchayo vutto; evaṃ anāpattiāpattivāde āpattānāpattivāde ca, lahukagarukāpattivāde garukalahukāpattivāde cāpi vinicchayo veditabbo. Nāmamattaṃyeva hi ettha nānaṃ, yojanānaye nānaṃ natthi, tasmā na vitthāritaṃ.
当关于许可与不许可等的判定出现时,如果在经、随经说、师说和自己的见解这几者之中,某一方能得到更多的理由支持,就应该依止那一方的说法。但是,如果完全找不到任何理由来做出判定,就不应该舍弃经,只应该依止经。这样,想要在这些学处、学处分别以及整个律的判定中获得善巧的人,就应该了解这四种律。巴利
Evaṃ kappiyākappiyādivinicchaye uppanne yo sutta-suttānulomaācariyavādaattanomatīsu atirekakāraṇaṃ labhati, tassa vāde ṭhātabbaṃ. Sabbaso pana kāraṇaṃ vinicchayaṃ alabhantena suttaṃ na jahitabbaṃ, suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbanti. Evaṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade ca sikkhāpadavibhaṅge ca sakale ca vinayavinicchaye kosallaṃ patthayantena ayaṃ catubbidho vinayo jānitabbo.
即使已经了解了这四种律,持律者仍然应当具备三相。因为持律者应当具有三种特征。哪三种呢?第一,他对经是善通达的、善运转的、从经与随文都善加抉择的,这是一种特征。第二,他在律中确实安住而不动摇,这是第二种。第三,他善巧地继承师师相传的传统,善加作意、善加持守,这是第三种。巴利
Imañca pana catubbidhaṃ vinayaṃ ñatvāpi vinayadharena puggalena tilakkhaṇasamannāgatena bhavitabbaṃ. Tīṇi hi vinayadharassa lakkhaṇāni icchitabbāni. Katamāni tīṇi? ‘‘Suttañcassa svāgataṃ hoti suppavatti suvinicchitaṃ suttato anubyañjanato’’ti idamekaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Vinaye kho pana ṭhito hoti asaṃhīro’’ti idaṃ dutiyaṃ. ‘‘Ācariyaparamparā kho panassa suggahitā hoti sumanasikatā sūpadhāritā’’ti idaṃ tatiyaṃ.
在这里,“经”指的是整个律藏。“经是善来”的意思是它被很好地掌握。“善转”的意思是它被善巧地运转、熟练、背诵、善加抉择。“从经与随文”的意思是从巴利圣典、从问难、从注释中善加抉择,断除疑惑而受持。巴利
Tattha suttaṃ nāma sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ. Tañcassa svāgataṃ hotīti suṭṭhu āgataṃ. Suppavattīti suṭṭhu pavattaṃ paguṇaṃ vācuggataṃ suvinicchitaṃ. Suttato anubyañjanatoti pāḷito ca paripucchato ca aṭṭhakathāto ca suvinicchitaṃ hoti, kaṅkhacchedaṃ katvā uggahitaṃ.
在律中立足,是指因为有惭耻心而在律中站稳。无惭的人即使多闻,也会因为看重利养而歪曲法脉,宣扬非法非律、背离师教,给教法带来巨大祸害,甚至造成僧团分裂和僧团纷争。有惭耻心的人则常怀愧悔,乐于学戒,即使为了活命也不歪曲法脉,只阐明法和律,把师教看得很重而安住其中。过去的大长老们就曾三次说出这样的话:未来,有惭耻心的人会守护,有惭耻心的人会守护,有惭耻心的人会守护。所以,凡是有惭耻心的人,不舍离律、不逾越律,因为有惭耻心而在律中立足,就是善安住。不可动摇:所谓可动摇的人,就是当被问及巴利或注释、上文或下文、词句次第时,他支支吾吾、闪躲摇摆,站不稳;对方说什么他就认可什么,丢掉自己的主张而接受别人的主张。反之,当被问及巴利或注释、上文或下文、词句次第时,他不支吾、不闪躲,就像用镊子一根一根夹毛那样回答:我们这样说,我们的阿阇梨这样说;他的巴利和巴利的决断,就像放在金器里的狮子脂,不损耗、不枯竭而安住,这就叫做不可动摇。巴利
Vinaye kho pana ṭhito hotīti vinaye lajjībhāvena patiṭṭhito hoti. Alajjī hi bahussutopi samāno lābhagarutāya tantiṃ visaṃvādetvā uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ dīpetvā sāsane mahantaṃ upaddavaṃ karoti. Saṅghabhedampi saṅgharājimpi uppādeti. Lajjī pana kukkuccako sikkhākāmo jīvitahetupi tantiṃ avisaṃvādetvā dhammameva vinayameva ca dīpeti, satthusāsanaṃ garuṃ katvā ṭhapeti. Tathā hi pubbe mahātherā tikkhattuṃ vācaṃ nicchāresuṃ – ‘‘anāgate lajjī rakkhissati, lajjī rakkhissati, lajjī rakkhissatī’’ti. Evaṃ yo lajjī, so vinayaṃ avijahanto avokkamanto lajjībhāvena vinaye ṭhito hoti suppatiṭṭhitoti. Asaṃhīroti saṃhīro nāma yo pāḷiyaṃ vā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vā heṭṭhato vā uparito vā padapaṭipāṭiyā vā pucchiyamāno vitthunati vipphandati santiṭṭhituṃ na sakkoti; yaṃ yaṃ parena vuccati taṃ taṃ anujānāti; sakavādaṃ chaḍḍetvā paravādaṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana pāḷiyaṃ vā aṭṭhakathāya vā heṭṭhupariyena vā padapaṭipāṭiyā vā pucchiyamāno na vitthunati na vipphandati, ekekalomaṃ saṇḍāsena gaṇhanto viya ‘‘evaṃ mayaṃ vadāma; evaṃ no ācariyā vadantī’’ti vissajjeti; yamhi pāḷi ca pāḷivinicchayo ca suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittasīhavasā viya parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ agacchanto tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘asaṃhīro’’ti.
“师承传承善持”是说,他善持长老传承和世系传承。“善作意”就是好好作意,刚一作意就像点亮的灯一样明亮。“善受持”就是好好受持,从前后关联、义理和理由两方面都好好受持;他舍弃自己的见解,依阿阇梨的清净而说:“我的阿阇梨在某位阿阇梨跟前学得,那位又在某位跟前学得”,这样把整个师承、上座部教说都引出来,一直追溯到优波离长老从正自觉者跟前学得为止。再从那里引出来:优波离长老从正自觉者跟前学得,达萨卡长老从自己的戒师优波离长老处学得,索那迦长老从自己的戒师达萨卡长老处学得,私伽婆长老从自己的戒师索那迦长老处学得,目犍连子帝须长老从自己的戒师私伽婆长老和旃陀跋耆族长老处学得。这样把整个师承、上座部教说都引出来,追溯到自己阿阇梨为止。这样学得的师承,就是善持。如果做不到这样,至少也要学得两三轮。按最简略的方式,应当知道阿阇梨和阿阇梨的阿阇梨是怎么说巴利和问难的。巴利
Ācariyaparamparā kho panassa suggahitā hotīti theraparamparā vaṃsaparamparā cassa suu gahitā hoti. Sumanasikatāti suṭṭhu manasikatā; āvajjitamatte ujjalitapadīpo viya hoti. Sūpadhāritāti suṭṭhu upadhāritā pubbāparānusandhito atthato kāraṇato ca upadhāritā; attano matiṃ pahāya ācariyasuddhiyā vattā hoti ‘‘mayhaṃ ācariyo asukācariyassa santike uggaṇhi, so asukassā’’ti evaṃ sabbaṃ ācariyaparamparaṃ theravādaṅgaṃ āharitvā yāva upālitthero sammāsambuddhassa santike uggaṇhīti pāpetvā ṭhapeti. Tatopi āharitvā upālitthero sammāsambuddhassa santike uggaṇhi, dāsakatthero attano upajjhāyassa upālittherassa, soṇakatthero attano upajjhāyassa dāsakattherassa, siggavatthero attano upajjhāyassa soṇakattherassa, moggaliputtatissatthero attano upajjhāyassa siggavattherassa caṇḍavajjittherassa cāti. Evaṃ sabbaṃ ācariyaparamparaṃ theravādaṅgaṃ āharitvā attano ācariyaṃ pāpetvā ṭhapeti. Evaṃ uggahitā hi ācariyaparamparā suggahitā hoti. Evaṃ asakkontena pana avassaṃ dve tayo parivaṭṭā uggahetabbā. Sabbapacchimena hi nayena yathā ācariyo ca ācariyācariyo ca pāḷiñca paripucchañca vadanti, tathā ñātuṃ vaṭṭati.
具备这三种特相的持律者,在僧团为了裁决事案而集合、事案已经提交、举罪者和被举罪者都已经陈述、该说话的时候,不应该仓促地不加裁决,而应当先观察六个方面。哪六个?要观察事案,要观察论母,要观察句分别,要观察三法分类,要观察中间罪,要观察无犯。巴利
Imehi ca pana tīhi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatena vinayadharena vatthuvinicchayatthaṃ sannipatite saṅghe otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe sahasā avinicchinitvāva cha ṭhānāni oloketabbāni. Katamāni cha? Vatthu oloketabbaṃ, mātikā oloketabbā, padabhājanīyaṃ oloketabbaṃ, tikaparicchedo oloketabbo, antarāpatti oloketabbā, anāpatti oloketabbāti.
他在审查事案时,确实会看到某一种罪,就像戒律中说的:“应该用草或树叶遮身而来,绝不可以裸身而来;如果有人裸身而来,就犯恶作罪。”于是他就引用这段经文,来平息那件诤事。巴利
Vatthuṃ olokentopi hi ‘‘tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā paṭicchādetvā āgantabbaṃ, na tveva naggena āgantabbaṃ; yo āgaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 517) evaṃ ekaccaṃ āpattiṃ passati. So taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使是在查看论母时,他依照“故意说妄语,波逸提”这样的方式,看到五种罪中的某一种罪,他就会引出那部经,来平息这个诤事。巴利
Mātikaṃ olokentopi ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde pācittiya’’ntiādinā (pāci. 2) nayena pañcannaṃ āpattīnaṃ aññataraṃ āpattiṃ passati, so taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
他查看《句分别》时,依照“身体未坏而行淫法,犯波罗夷;身体大部分已坏而行淫法,犯偷兰遮”这一类方式(其含义相同),见到七种罪中的某一种罪,就从《句分别》中引出经文,以此来平息那件诤事。巴利
Padabhājanīyaṃ olokentopi ‘‘akkhayite sarīre methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, āpatti pārājikassa. Yebhuyyena khayite sarīre methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’tiādinā (pārā. 59 ādayo, atthato samānaṃ) nayena sattannaṃ āpattīnaṃ aññataraṃ āpattiṃ passati, so padabhājanīyato suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使在查看三法分别时,他在三法分别中看到三法僧残、三法波逸提、三法恶作,或者别的某种罪,他就从那里引出经文,来平息这个诤事。巴利
Tikaparicchedaṃ olokentopi tikasaṅghādisesaṃ vā tikapācittiyaṃ vā tikadukkaṭaṃ vā aññataraṃ vā āpattiṃ tikaparicchede passati, so tato suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使是在查看中间罪时,他见到像“举起已接受之物,是恶作罪”这样存在于各学处之间的中间罪,也会引出那段经文,来平息这个诤事。巴利
Antarāpattiṃ olokentopi ‘‘paṭilātaṃ ukkhipati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 355) evaṃ yā sikkhāpadantaresu antarāpatti hoti taṃ passati, so taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
即使他在查看“无犯”时,看到各个学处中分别开示的无犯情形,比如“比丘不贪著、没有盗心、没有杀意、没有诱骗出房之意、没有释放之意、不是故意、失念、不知情,就无犯”,他便引用这段经文来平息那件诤事。巴利
Anāpattiṃ olokentopi ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu asādiyantassa, atheyyacittassa, na maraṇādhippāyassa, anullapanādhippāyassa, na mocanādhippāyassa, asañcicca, assatiyā, ajānantassā’’ti (pārā. 72 ādayo) evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sikkhāpade niddiṭṭhaṃ anāpattiṃ passati, so taṃ suttaṃ ānetvā taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati.
如果有比丘精通四种律法、具备三相,观察这六种情况之后平息诤事,他的判决就不可推翻,等同于佛陀亲自坐着作出的判决。假如有人违犯了某条学处,来到这位善于判决的比丘面前,问起自己心里的不安,这位比丘应当仔细审察:如果是无犯,就说“无犯”;如果是有犯,就说“有犯”;如果这罪可以通过发露来灭除,就说“可依发露灭除”;如果可以通过出罪来灭除,就说“可依出罪灭除”。但如果看到有波罗夷罪的影子,就不能马上说“波罗夷罪”。为什么?因为淫欲法的违犯和上人法的违犯是粗重的,而偷盗和杀人的违犯则是微细的、心念上很轻的。他以微细的方式违犯,也以微细的方式守护,所以当有人特别就这件事来问心里的不安时,不应当说“有罪”。如果他的亲教师还在,就应该派这个比丘去,对他说:“去问我们的亲教师。”如果他回来说:“你们的亲教师依经依理观察之后,对我说‘这还可以救治’”,那就应该对他说:“好,很好,亲教师怎么说,你就怎么做。”如果他没有亲教师,但有一起学习的上座,就应该派他到那位上座那里,说:“和我们一起学习的上座是大众之首,去问他吧。”如果那位上座也判定为“可以救治”,就应该对他说:“好,很好,照他说的去做。”如果连一起学习的上座也没有,但有聪明的弟子,就应该派他到那位弟子那里,说:“去某处问他。”如果那位弟子也判定为“可以救治”,就应该对他说:“好,很好,照他说的去做。”如果连那位年轻弟子也觉得有波罗夷罪的影子,也不应该对他说“你是波罗夷罪人”。因为佛陀出世难得,出家与受具足戒比这更难得到。这时应该这样说:“找一个僻静的地方,打扫干净,白天在那里坐禅,把戒清净了,先专注思维三十二身分。”如果他的戒没有破损,业处就能顺利运作,诸行会清晰地显现,心也会像接近安止定那样专一,连白天过去了都不知道。等他过了白天回来时,应该这样问:“你的心念状态怎么样?”等他报告了心念状态之后,应该对他说:“出家就是为了让心清净,不要放逸,好好修行沙门法。”巴利
Yo hi bhikkhu catubbidhavinayakovido tilakkhaṇasampanno imāni cha ṭhānāni oloketvā adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamessati, tassa vinicchayo appaṭivattiyo, buddhena sayaṃ nisīditvā vinicchitasadiso hoti. Taṃ cevaṃ vinicchayakusalaṃ bhikkhuṃ koci katasikkhāpadavītikkamo bhikkhu upasaṅkamitvā attano kukkuccaṃ puccheyya; tena sādhukaṃ sallakkhetvā sace anāpatti hoti, ‘‘anāpattī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace pana āpatti hoti, ‘‘āpattī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sā desanāgāminī ce, ‘‘desanāgāminī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Vuṭṭhānagāminī ce, ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Athassa pārājikacchāyā dissati, ‘‘pārājikāpattī’’ti na tāva vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Methunadhammavītikkamo hi uttarimanussadhammavītikkamo ca oḷāriko. Adinnādānamanussaviggahavītikkamā pana sukhumā cittalahukā. Te sukhumeneva āpajjati , sukhumena rakkhati, tasmā visesena taṃvatthukaṃ kukkuccaṃ pucchiyamāno ‘‘āpattī’’ti avatvā sacassa ācariyo dharati, tato tena so bhikkhu ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyaṃ pucchā’’ti pesetabbo. Sace so puna āgantvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ ācariyo suttato nayato oloketvā ‘satekiccho’ti maṃ āhā’’ti vadati, tato anena so ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu yaṃ ācariyo bhaṇati taṃ karohī’’ti vattabbo. Atha panassa ācariyo natthi, saddhiṃ uggahitatthero pana atthi, tassa santikaṃ pesetabbo – ‘‘amhehi saha uggahitatthero gaṇapāmokkho, taṃ gantvā pucchā’’ti. Tenāpi ‘‘satekiccho’’ti vinicchite ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu tassa vacanaṃ karohī’’ti vattabbo. Atha saddhiṃ uggahitattheropi natthi, antevāsiko paṇḍito atthi, tassa santikaṃ pesetabbo – ‘‘asukadaharaṃ gantvā pucchā’’ti. Tenāpi ‘‘satekiccho’’ti vinicchite ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu tassa vacanaṃ karohī’’ti vattabbo. Atha daharassāpi pārājikacchāyāva upaṭṭhāti, tenāpi ‘‘pārājikosī’’ti na vattabbo. Dullabho hi buddhuppādo, tato dullabhatarā pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca. Evaṃ pana vattabbo – ‘‘vivittaṃ okāsaṃ sammajjitvā divāvihāraṃ nisīditvā sīlāni sodhetvā dvattiṃsākāraṃ tāva manasi karohī’’ti. Sace tassa arogaṃ sīlaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ghaṭayati, saṅkhārā pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, upacārappanāppattaṃ viya cittampi ekaggaṃ hoti, divasaṃ atikkantampi na jānāti. So divasātikkame upaṭṭhānaṃ āgato evaṃ vattabbo – ‘‘kīdisā te cittappavattī’’ti. Ārocitāya cittappavattiyā vattabbo – ‘‘pabbajjā nāma cittavisuddhatthāya, appamatto samaṇadhammaṃ karohī’’ti.
如果一个人的戒已经破了,他的业处就修不起来,心就像被刺棒戳了一样摇来晃去,被悔恨之火烧灼,好比坐在烧烫的石头上,当下就想起身离开。他回来之后,应该问他:“你的心念是怎么活动的?”等他说了心念活动的情况,就应该对他说:“在这个世间,造恶业的人没有什么藏得住的。因为一个人最初造恶的时候,自己就知道;然后守护神、能看透他人心念的沙门婆罗门,以及其他天神也都知道。现在,你该自己去寻求你的安稳了。”巴利
Yassa pana sīlaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ na ghaṭayati, patodābhitunnaṃ viya cittaṃ vikampati, vippaṭisāragginā ḍayhati, tattapāsāṇe nisinno viya taṅkhaṇaññeva vuṭṭhāti. So āgato ‘‘kā te cittappavattī’’ti pucchitabbo. Ārocitāya cittappavattiyā ‘‘natthi loke raho nāma pāpakammaṃ pakubbato. Sabbapaṭhamañhi pāpaṃ karonto attanā jānāti, athassa ārakkhadevatā paracittavidū samaṇabrāhmaṇā aññā ca devatā jānanti, tvaṃyeva dāni tava sotthiṃ pariyesāhī’’ti vattabbo.
比丘词分别的注解巴利
Bhikkhupadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
现在我们要解释学处分别的含义。所谓“若有”等等,就是“若何等人”这一类的话。在这里,“若有”是要分别的词语;“若何等人”等则是分别它的词语。而在这里,“然”只是语气助词,“若”才是实义词;它不限定地指人,所以为了显示它的含义,就直接用“若”这个词来表示不限定的人。因此,这里的含义应当这样理解:“若有”就是“无论何人”。既然无论何人,必然依性别、结合、出身、名字、族姓、戒行、住处、行境、年龄这些方面,以某种方式被认知,那么为了让人这样了解,就展示这些类别,说出了“若何等人”等话。其中,“若何等人”是依性别来说,不论他是这样的或那样的;或高或矮,或黑或白,或黄褐肤色,或瘦或胖,这就是它的含义。“随其结合”是依事务来说,不论与什么结合;或与新作事务结合,或与诵习结合,或与住持职责结合,这就是它的含义。“随其出身”是依出身来说,不论何种出身;或刹帝利,或婆罗门,或吠舍,或首陀罗,这就是它的含义。“随其名字”是依名字来说,不论叫什么名字;或名佛护,或名法护,或名僧护,这就是它的含义。“随其族姓”是依族姓来说,不论什么族姓,或以任何族姓;或迦旃延,或婆私吒,或憍尸迦,这就是它的含义。“随其戒行”是在戒行方面,不论戒行如何;或新作戒行,或诵习戒行,或住持戒行,这就是它的含义。“随其住处”是在住处方面,不论住处如何;或新作住处,或诵习住处,或住持住处,这就是它的含义。“随其行境”是在行境方面,不论行境如何;或新作行境,或诵习行境,或住持行境,这就是它的含义。“长老”等话中,不论他是哪种年龄等;因满十岁为长老,或因不足五岁为新学,或因超过五岁为中间,这就是它的含义。这样一来,在这个含义中,这一切都叫做“若有”。巴利
Idāni sikkhāpadavibhaṅgassa atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Yaṃ vuttaṃ yo panāti yo yādisotiādi. Ettha yo panāti vibhajitabbapadaṃ; yo yādisotiādīni tassa vibhajanapadāni. Ettha ca yasmā panāti nipātamattaṃ; yoti atthapadaṃ; tañca aniyamena puggalaṃ dīpeti, tasmā tassa atthaṃ dassento aniyamena puggaladīpakaṃ yo saddameva āha. Tasmā ettha evamattho veditabbo – yo panāti yo yokocīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana yo yokoci nāma, so avassaṃ liṅga-yutta-jāti-nāma-gotta-sīla-vihāra-gocaravayesu ekenākārena paññāyati, tasmā taṃ tathā ñāpetuṃ taṃ pabhedaṃ pakāsento ‘‘yādiso’’tiādimāha. Tattha yādisoti liṅgavasena yādiso vā tādiso vā hotu; dīgho vā rasso vā kāḷo vā odāto vā maṅguracchavi vā kiso vā thūlo vāti attho. Yathāyuttoti yogavasena yena vā tena vā yutto hotu; navakammayutto vā uddesayutto vā vāsadhurayutto vāti attho. Yathājaccoti jātivasena yaṃjacco vā taṃjacco vā hotu; khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vāti attho. Yathānāmoti nāmavasena yathānāmo vā tathānāmo vā hotu; buddharakkhito vā dhammarakkhito vā saṅgharakkhito vāti attho. Yathāgottoti gottavasena yathāgotto vā tathāgotto vā yena vā tena vā gottena hotu; kaccāyano vā vāsiṭṭho vā kosiyo vāti attho. Yathāsīloti sīlesu yathāsīlo vā tathāsīlo vā hotu; navakammasīlo vā uddesasīlo vā vāsadhurasīlo vāti attho. Yathāvihārīti vihāresupi yathāvihārī vā tathāvihārī vā hotu; navakammavihārī vā uddesavihārī vā vāsadhuravihārī vāti attho. Yathāgocaroti gocaresupi yathāgocaro vā tathāgocaro vā hotu; navakammagocaro vā uddesagocaro vā vāsadhuragocaro vāti attho. Thero vāti ādīsu vayovuḍḍhādīsu yo vā so vā hotu; paripuṇṇadasavassatāya thero vā ūnapañcavassatāya navo vā atirekapañcavassatāya majjhimo vāti attho. Atha kho sabbova imasmiṃ atthe eso vuccati ‘‘yo panā’’ti.
在对比丘的解释中,“比丘”就是乞求的人;意思是说,无论得到还是得不到,都以圣洁的乞求方式来乞求。因为已经接受了佛等圣者所行的乞食生活,所以叫“已接受乞食生活的人”。任何人,不管舍弃的是小财富还是大财富,从在家出家成为无家者,他放下农耕、牧牛等谋生方式,仅仅因为接受了出家人的身份标志,就已经接受了乞食生活,所以叫比丘。或者,因为生活依靠他人,即使在寺院中吃集体供养的饭,也是已经接受了乞食生活,所以叫比丘;又或者,因为依止团食而出家,生起了精进心,也是已经接受了乞食生活,所以叫比丘。由于价值、触感、颜色而被破坏的布,他穿着这样的布,所以叫“穿破布的人”。其中,因为刀剪裁割而造成的价值破坏应当知道。即使价值千金的布,被刀剪成一块一块,它的价值就被破坏了,连原来价值的一半都不值。因为线缝合而造成的触感破坏应当知道。即使触感舒适的布,被线缝合后,触感就被破坏了,变得粗糙。因为针、污垢等造成的颜色破坏应当知道。即使非常洁净的布,从做针线活开始,因针垢、手上的汗渍尘垢,到最后染色等工序,颜色就被破坏了,失去了原本的色泽。像这样,因为三种方式穿着被破坏的布,所以叫“穿破布的人”。或者,仅仅因为穿着与在家人的衣服不同的袈裟,就叫“穿破布的人”。巴利
Bhikkhuniddese bhikkhatīti bhikkhako; labhanto vā alabhanto vā ariyāya yācanāya yācatīti attho. Buddhādīhi ajjhupagataṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatattā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagato nāma. Yo hi koci appaṃ vā mahantaṃ vā bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito, so kasigorakkhādīhi jīvikakappanaṃ hitvā liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu. Parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā vā vihāramajjhe kājabhattaṃ bhuñjamānopi bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu; piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāya pabbajjāya ussāhajātattā vā bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagatoti bhikkhu. Agghaphassavaṇṇabhedena bhinnaṃ paṭaṃ dhāretīti bhinnapaṭadharo. Tattha satthakacchedanena agghabhedo veditabbo. Sahassagghanakopi hi paṭo satthakena khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chinno bhinnaggho hoti. Purimagghato upaḍḍhampi na agghati. Suttasaṃsibbanena phassabhedo veditabbo. Sukhasamphassopi hi paṭo suttehi saṃsibbito bhinnaphasso hoti. Kharasamphassataṃ pāpuṇāti. Sūcimalādīhi vaṇṇabhedo veditabbo. Suparisuddhopi hi paṭo sūcikammato paṭṭhāya sūcimalena, hatthasedamalajallikāhi, avasāne rajanakappakaraṇehi ca bhinnavaṇṇo hoti; pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahati. Evaṃ tīhākārehi bhinnapaṭadhāraṇato bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu. Gihivatthavisabhāgānaṃ vā kāsāvānaṃ dhāraṇamatteneva bhinnapaṭadharoti bhikkhu.
“依通称”是指依施设、依惯用语的意思。确实,有些人仅仅因为通称就被认作“比丘”。比如在邀请等场合清点比丘人数时,连沙弥也算进去,说“一百个比丘、一千个比丘”。
“依自称”是指依自己声称。确实,有些人也凭自称而被认作“比丘”。这种情况可以在“谁在这里?”“贤友,我是比丘”这类说法中看到,这是阿难长老所说的如法自称。但在夜间,破戒的人迎面走来,被问“谁在这里?”时,他们也会以不如法、虚假的自称说“我们是比丘”。巴利
Samaññāyāti paññattiyā vohārenāti attho. Samaññāya eva hi ekacco ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti paññāyati. Tathā hi nimantanādimhi bhikkhūsu gaṇiyamānesu sāmaṇerepi gahetvā ‘‘sataṃ bhikkhū sahassaṃ bhikkhū’’ti vadanti. Paṭiññāyāti attano paṭijānanena paṭiññāyapi hi ekacco ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti paññāyati. Tassa ‘‘ko etthāti? Ahaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhū’’ti (a. ni. 10.96) evamādīsu sambhavo daṭṭhabbo . Ayaṃ pana ānandattherena vuttā dhammikā paṭiññā. Rattibhāge pana dussīlāpi paṭipathaṃ āgacchantā ‘‘ko etthā’’ti vutte adhammikāya paṭiññāya abhūtāya ‘‘mayaṃ bhikkhū’’ti vadanti.
“来吧,比丘!”所谓“善来比丘”,就是只凭世尊说一句“来吧,比丘”这句话,就获得了比丘的身份,成就了善来比丘具足戒。因为世尊看到一个人已经具备了成为善来比丘的因缘条件,就从粪扫衣中伸出像黄金一样颜色的右手,发出梵音说:“来吧,比丘!修梵行,为了彻底终结苦。”就在世尊说这话的同时,那个人的在家形象消失了,出家与具足戒同时成立。他成了剃除须发、身穿袈裟的人。一件衣穿在下身,一件衣披在上身,一件衣搭在肩上,左肩角上挂着颜色像青莲花的陶钵——巴利
Ehi bhikkhūti ehi bhikkhu nāma bhagavato ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti vacanamattena bhikkhubhāvaṃ ehibhikkhūpasampadaṃ patto. Bhagavā hi ehibhikkhubhāvāya upanissayasampannaṃ puggalaṃ disvā rattapaṃsukūlantarato suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ dakkhiṇahatthaṃ nīharitvā brahmaghosaṃ nicchārento ‘‘ehi, bhikkhu, cara brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyā’’ti vadati. Tassa saheva bhagavato vacanena gihiliṅgaṃ antaradhāyati, pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca ruhati. Bhaṇḍu kāsāyavasano hoti. Ekaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ pārupitvā ekaṃ aṃse ṭhapetvā vāmaṃsakūṭe āsattanīluppalavaṇṇamattikāpatto –
三衣和钵,还有剃刀、针和腰带,
这八样连同滤水囊,是精勤修行的比丘的资具。巴利
‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ; Parissāvanena aṭṭhete, yuttayogassa bhikkhuno’’ti.
听完这番话,那位长老身上就佩戴着这八种资具,威仪具足,像一位六十戒腊的长老一样。他既以佛陀为阿阇梨,又以佛陀为戒师,就那样一边礼敬正自觉者一边站着。世尊在初成道时,有一个时期只用“善来比丘”的方式授予具足戒。这样受具足戒的比丘共有一千三百四十一人,分别是:五位五群长老、良家子耶舍和他的五十四位同伴、三十位贤善群比丘、一千位旧结发外道,连同两位上首弟子在内的二百五十位游方僧,以及央掘魔罗长老。注释书中确实这样记载:巴利
Evaṃ vuttehi aṭṭhahi parikkhārehi sarīre paṭimukkehiyeva saṭṭhivassikatthero viya iriyāpathasampanno buddhācariyako buddhupajjhāyako sammāsambuddhaṃ vandamānoyeva tiṭṭhati. Bhagavā hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kāle ehibhikkhūpasampadāya eva upasampādeti. Evaṃ upasampannāni ca sahassupari ekacattālīsuttarāni tīṇi bhikkhusatāni ahesuṃ; seyyathidaṃ – pañca pañcavaggiyattherā, yaso kulaputto, tassa parivārā catupaṇṇāsa sahāyakā, tiṃsa bhaddavaggiyā, sahassapurāṇajaṭilā, saddhiṃ dvīhi aggasāvakehi aḍḍhateyyasatā paribbājakā, eko aṅgulimālattheroti. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
一千三百,另外又有四十。
还有一位具慧的长老,他们全都是善来比丘。巴利
‘‘Tīṇi sataṃ sahassañca, cattālīsaṃ punāpare; Eko ca thero sappañño, sabbe te ehibhikkhukā’’ti.
不只是这些,还有很多其他的。比如:带着三百随从的塞拉婆罗门、带着一千随从的摩诃劫宾那、一万名住在迦毗罗卫城的善家子弟、一万六千名彼岸道婆罗门等等。不过,这些人因为在律藏的巴利正文里没有被明确提到,所以这里没有说;前面那些人因为在那里被明确提到了,所以这里说了。巴利
Na kevalañca ete eva, aññepi bahū santi. Seyyathidaṃ – tisataparivāro selo brāhmaṇo, sahassaparivāro mahākappino, dasasahassā kapilavatthuvāsino kulaputtā, soḷasasahassā pārāyanikabrāhmaṇāti evamādayo. Te pana vinayapiṭake pāḷiyaṃ na niddiṭṭhattā na vuttā. Ime tattha niddiṭṭhattā vuttāti.
两万七千三百人,
这些人也都算在内,他们全都是善来比丘。巴利
‘‘Sattavīsa sahassāni, tīṇiyeva satāni ca; Etepi sabbe saṅkhātā, sabbe te ehibhikkhukā’’ti.
以三皈依受具足戒,就是按照“我皈依佛”这样的方式,三次开口说出三皈依,由此受具足戒。这具足戒一共有八种:善来比丘具足戒、皈依具足戒、受教诫具足戒、答问具足戒、受八敬法具足戒、遣使具足戒、八言具足戒、白四羯磨具足戒。其中,善来比丘具足戒和皈依具足戒,前面已经说过了。巴利
Tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampannoti ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’tiādinā nayena tikkhattuṃ vācaṃ bhinditvā vuttehi tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampanno. Ayañhi upasampadā nāma aṭṭhavidhā – ehibhikkhūpasampadā, saraṇagamanūpasampadā, ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā, garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā, dūtenūpasampadā, aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā, ñatticatutthakammūpasampadāti. Tattha ehibhikkhūpasampadā, saraṇagamanūpasampadā ca vuttā eva.
“受教诫具足戒”是指:通过接受这样的教诫而得到具足戒——
“因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:‘我要对上座、新学、中座比丘,保持强烈的惭与愧。’迦叶,你确实应当这样学。
因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:‘凡是我听到的、与善相应的法,我都要把它当作核心,放在心上,用全部的心去关注,倾耳谛听法。’迦叶,你确实应当这样学。
因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:‘与喜乐相伴的身至念,我绝不放弃。’迦叶,你确实应当这样学。”
(《相应部》2.154)
这就是依这条受教诫,对大迦叶长老开许的具足戒。巴利
Ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā nāma ‘‘tasmātiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ – ‘tibbaṃ me hirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati theresu navesu majjhimesu cā’ti. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabbaṃ. Tasmātiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ – ‘yaṃ kiñci dhammaṃ sossāmi kusalūpasaṃhitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbacetasā samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṃ sossāmī’ti. Evaṃ hi te, kassapa, sikkhitabbaṃ. Tasmātiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ – ‘sātasahagatā ca me kāyagatāsati na vijahissatī’ti. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) iminā ovādapaṭiggahaṇena mahākassapattherassa anuññātaupasampadā.
“答问具足戒”是指对索巴咖开许的具足戒。据说,世尊在东园经行时,问沙弥索巴咖十个与不净观相关的问题:“索巴咖,所谓‘膨胀想’,或者‘色想’,这些法是义不同、文不同,还是义相同、只是文不同?”索巴咖回答了这些问题。世尊认可他说得好,接着问:“索巴咖,你几岁了?”他说:“世尊,我七岁。”世尊说:“索巴咖,你是与我的一切知智相契合而回答问题的。”世尊心生欢喜,就允许他受具足戒。这就是答问具足戒。巴利
Pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā nāma sopākassa anuññātaupasampadā. Bhagavā kira pubbārāme anucaṅkamantaṃ sopākasāmaṇeraṃ ‘‘‘uddhumātakasaññā’ti vā, sopāka, ‘rūpasaññā’ti vā ime dhammā nānatthā nānābyañjanā , udāhu ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti dasa asubhanissite pañhe pucchi. So te byākāsi. Bhagavā tassa sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘kativassosi tvaṃ, sopākā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Sattavassohaṃ, bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Sopāka, tvaṃ mama sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā pañhe byākāsī’’ti āraddhacitto upasampadaṃ anujāni. Ayaṃ pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā.
受持重法而受具足戒,是指摩诃波阇波提因为接受了八条重法而被允许受具足戒。巴利
Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā nāma mahāpajāpatiyā aṭṭhagarudhammassa paṭiggahaṇena anuññātaupasampadā.
名为遣使具足戒的,是对妓女半迦尸开许的具足戒。巴利
Dūtenūpasampadā nāma aḍḍhakāsiyā gaṇikāya anuññātaupasampadā.
所谓“八语具足戒”,就是比丘尼先从比丘尼僧团以白四羯磨受具足戒,再从比丘僧团以白四羯磨受具足戒——通过这两种羯磨完成受具足戒。巴利
Aṭṭhavācikūpasampadā nāma bhikkhuniyā bhikkhunisaṅghato ñatticatutthena bhikkhusaṅghato ñatticatutthenāti imehi dvīhi kammehi upasampadā.
所谓“白四羯磨具足戒”,就是如今比丘受具足戒的方式。在这八种具足戒当中,世尊这样开许过:“诸比丘,我先前允许用三皈依受具足戒,从今天起废止这一做法。诸比丘,我允许用白四羯磨来受具足戒。”(《大品》69)这里说的就是:依照这一开许,以这种具足戒而受具足戒的人,便称为得受具足戒。巴利
Ñatticatutthakammūpasampadā nāma bhikkhūnaṃ etarahi upasampadā. Imāsu aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ‘‘yā sā, bhikkhave, mayā tīhi saraṇagamanehi upasampadā anuññātā, taṃ ajjatagge paṭikkhipāmi. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ñatticatutthena kammena upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 69) evaṃ anuññātāya imāya upasampadāya upasampannoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“贤善”,就是没有恶行。从善凡夫一直到阿罗汉,因为具足贤善的戒、定、慧、解脱和解脱知见,所以被称为“贤善比丘”。“坚实”,是因为具足戒等坚实之法,就像用靛蓝染成的蓝布一样,应当知道是“坚实比丘”;或者因为已经远离烦恼的浮渣状态,只有漏尽者才应当知道是“坚实”。“有学”,就是善凡夫加上七位圣者,因为还在修学三种修学,所以叫有学。他们当中任何一位,都应当知道是“有学比丘”。“不学”,就是无学。超越了有学法,安住于最高果位,因为再也没有需要进一步修学的东西,所以漏尽者被称为“无学”。“以和合僧团”,最简略地说,在五众作法的羯磨中,凡是参与作法的比丘,因为已经到来,因为已把欲比丘的欲带来,因为现前的比丘不反对,所以在同一个羯磨中达到和合。“以白四羯磨”,就是由三次宣告和一次白文来完成的。“以业”,就是以如法的律业。“以不动”,因为具足了事、白、宣告、界和众的成就,所以达到不可动摇、不可反对。“以应处”,就是合乎理由、合乎大师的教法。“具足戒”,就是达到了上位、已获得的意思。比丘的身份就是上位,因为通过前面所说的业而达到,所以称为“具足戒”。在这里,白四羯磨业只出现一种。不过,在这个地方,举出四种僧伽业来详细解说。这四种业就是“告白羯磨、白羯磨、白二羯磨、白四羯磨”,按顺序列出后,从犍度到《附随》结尾的业分别中引经文详细解说。我们将在《附随》结尾的业分别中解释它们。这样,初篇波罗夷的注释就不会繁重;依照经文本身的注释也容易理解。那些地方也不会空着;因此我们只作逐词注释。巴利
Bhadroti apāpako. Kalyāṇaputhujjanādayo hi yāva arahā, tāva bhadrena sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena ca samannāgatattā ‘‘bhadro bhikkhū’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Sāroti tehiyeva sīlasārādīhi samannāgatattā nīlasamannāgamena nīlo paṭo viya ‘‘sāro bhikkhū’’ti veditabbo. Vigatakilesapheggubhāvato vā khīṇāsavova ‘‘sāro’’ti veditabbo. Sekhoti puthujjanakalyāṇakena saddhiṃ satta ariyā tisso sikkhā sikkhantīti sekhā. Tesu yo koci ‘‘sekho bhikkhū’’ti veditabbo. Na sikkhatīti asekho. Sekkhadhamme atikkamma aggaphale ṭhito, tato uttari sikkhitabbābhāvato khīṇāsavo ‘‘asekho’’ti vuccati. Samaggena saṅghenāti sabbantimena pariyāyena pañcavaggakaraṇīye kamme yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ āgatattā chandārahānaṃ chandassa āhaṭattā, sammukhībhūtānañca appaṭikkosanato ekasmiṃ kamme samaggabhāvaṃ upagatena. Ñatticatutthenāti tīhi anussāvanāhi ekāya ca ñattiyā kātabbena. Kammenāti dhammikena vinayakammena. Akuppenāti vatthu-ñatti-anussāvana-sīmā-parisasampattisampannattā akopetabbataṃ appaṭikkositabbatañca upagatena. Ṭhānārahenāti kāraṇārahena satthusāsanārahena. Upasampanno nāma uparibhāvaṃ samāpanno, pattoti attho. Bhikkhubhāvo hi uparibhāvo, tañcesa yathāvuttena kammena samāpannattā ‘‘upasampanno’’ti vuccati. Ettha ca ñatticatutthakammaṃ ekameva āgataṃ. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā cattāri saṅghakammāni nīharitvā vitthārato kathetabbānīti sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Tāni ca ‘‘apalokanakammaṃ ñattikammaṃ ñattidutiyakammaṃ ñatticatutthakamma’’nti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapetvā vitthārena khandhakato parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgato ca pāḷiṃ āharitvā kathitāni. Tāni mayaṃ parivārāvasāne kammavibhaṅgeyeva vaṇṇayissāma. Evañhi sati paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā ca na bhāriyā bhavissati; yathāṭhitāya ca pāḷiyā vaṇṇanā suviññeyyā bhavissati. Tāni ca ṭhānāni asuññāni bhavissanti; tasmā anupadavaṇṇanameva karoma.
这里,“其中”是指在那些按照“乞食者”等方式所说的比丘当中。“凡这位比丘”是指这位比丘。“以和合僧团……具足戒”是指在八种具足戒中,只通过白四羯磨这一种业而受具足戒。“此”是指在这个“行淫法就成为波罗夷”的含义里所说的“比丘”。至于其他“乞食者”等说法,则是按照提取词义的方式来说的。其中,“乞食者”等是按照词源来说的;“以称呼而称比丘”“以自称而称比丘”这两种是按照言说方式来说的;“来,比丘”是按照以佛陀为和尚而获得具足戒来说的;皈依比丘是按照羯磨语尚未制定时的具足戒来说的;“贤善”等则是按照功德来说的,应当这样理解。巴利
Tatrāti tesu ‘‘bhikkhako’’tiādinā nayena vuttesu bhikkhūsu. Yvāyaṃ bhikkhūti yo ayaṃ bhikkhu. Samaggena saṅghena…pe… upasampannoti aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampanno. Ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto bhikkhūti ayaṃ imasmiṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā pārājiko hotī’’ti atthe ‘‘bhikkhū’’ti adhippeto. Itare pana ‘‘bhikkhako’’ti ādayo atthuddhāravasena vuttā. Tesu ca ‘‘bhikkhako’’ti ādayo niruttivasena vuttā, ‘‘samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bhikkhū’’ti ime dve abhilāpavasena vuttā, ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti buddhena upajjhāyena paṭiladdhaupasampadāvasena vutto. Saraṇagamanabhikkhu anuppannāya kammavācāya upasampadāvasena vutto, ‘‘bhadro’’tiādayo guṇavasena vuttāti veditabbā.
学与生活方式的词分别释义的注释巴利
Sikkhāsājīvapadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
现在,“比丘们”这个词因为没有特别的含义,所以不加以分别,直接说明:由于具备修学与共住的身份,就成为比丘的修学与共住具足者,为了显示这一点,所以说“修学”等语。其中,“应当修学的”就是修学。“三”是数量的限定。“增上戒学”:增上就是最上的戒,即增上戒;那增上戒又是应当修学的,所以叫增上戒学。增上心学、增上慧学也是同样的道理。巴利
Idāni ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti idaṃ padaṃ visesatthābhāvato avibhajitvāva yaṃ sikkhañca sājīvañca samāpannattā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno hoti, taṃ dassento sikkhātiādimāha. Tattha sikkhitabbāti sikkhā. Tissoti gaṇanaparicchedo . Adhisīlasikkhāti adhikaṃ uttamaṃ sīlanti adhisīlaṃ; adhisīlañca taṃ sikkhitabbato sikkhā cāti adhisīlasikkhā. Esa nayo adhicitta-adhipaññāsikkhāsu.
那么,这里什么是戒?什么是增上戒?什么是心?什么是增上心?什么是慧?什么是增上慧?回答是:首先,五戒和十戒只是戒而已。因为无论佛陀出世还是不出世,这种戒都存在于世间。佛陀出世时,佛陀和弟子们都劝导大众受持这种戒;佛陀没有出世时,独觉佛、相信业论的人、如法的沙门婆罗门、转轮王、大国王以及大菩萨们也劝导大众受持。有智慧的沙门婆罗门自己也会受持。他们圆满这种善法之后,就在天界和人间享受福报。而巴帝摩卡防护戒则被称为增上戒,因为它就像太阳之于众光、须弥山之于群山一样,是一切世间戒中最殊胜、最上的,而且只在佛陀出世时才出现,没有佛陀出世就不会有。因为除了佛陀之外,没有其他众生能够制定这些学处;只有佛陀才能彻底断除身门和语门的一切恶行之流,并为每一种违犯制定相应的律仪。比巴帝摩卡防护戒更殊胜的,是与道果相应的戒,那才是增上戒,但这里指的不是那个。因为证得那种戒的比丘,绝不会去做淫欲之事。巴利
Katamaṃ panettha sīlaṃ, katamaṃ adhisīlaṃ, katamaṃ cittaṃ, katamaṃ adhicittaṃ, katamā paññā, katamā adhipaññāti? Vuccate – pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīlaṃ tāva sīlameva. Tañhi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati. Uppanne buddhe tasmiṃ sīle buddhāpi sāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti. Anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti. Sāmampi paṇḍitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā samādiyanti. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhonti. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pana ‘‘adhisīla’’nti vuccati, tañhi sūriyo viya pajjotānaṃ sineru viya pabbatānaṃ sabbalokiyasīlānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca pavattati, na vinā buddhuppādā. Na hi taṃ paññattiṃ uddharitvā añño satto ṭhapetuṃ sakkoti, buddhāyeva pana sabbaso kāyavacīdvāraajjhācārasotaṃ chinditvā tassa tassa vītikkamassa anucchavikaṃ taṃ sīlasaṃvaraṃ paññapenti. Pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, taṃ pana idha anadhippetaṃ. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati.
不过,应当知道:八种欲界善心,以及世间八等至心,把它们合在一起,就只是“心”而已。它的生起,不论佛陀出世还是不出世,都应依照戒的部分所说的方式来理解劝导和受持。然而,以观智为前导的八等至心,被称为“增上心”。因为它就像增上戒相对于一切世间戒那样,相对于一切世间心也是更殊胜、更上等的,而且只在佛陀出世时才有,离不开佛陀出世。比这更殊胜的,是与道果相应的心,那才是增上心,但这里指的不是它。因为已经证得那种心的比丘,绝不会去行淫欲之事。巴利
Kāmāvacarāni pana aṭṭha kusalacittāni, lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpatticittāni ca ekajjhaṃ katvā cittamevāti veditabbāni. Buddhuppādānuppāde cassa pavatti, samādapanaṃ samādānañca sīle vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ pana ‘‘adhicitta’’nti vuccati. Tañhi adhisīlaṃ viya sīlānaṃ sabbalokiyacittānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca, buddhuppādeyeva ca hoti, na vinā buddhuppādā. Tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ, taṃ pana idha anadhippetaṃ. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati.
“有布施,有供养”等说法所引出的业自受智,就是慧。因为无论佛陀有没有出现在世间,这种慧都在世间运作。佛陀出现时,佛陀和佛弟子们都劝导大众修这种慧;佛陀没有出现时,独觉佛、主张业论的人、如法的沙门婆罗门、转轮王、大国王和大菩萨们也劝导大众修。有智慧的众生自己也会受持。比如安古罗曾连续一万年做大布施,维拉摩、须大拏以及其他许多有智慧的人也做了大布施。他们圆满这种善法后,享受了天界和人间的福报。而能决断三相行相的观智,则称为增上慧。它就像增上戒、增上心相对于戒和心那样,是一切世间慧中最殊胜、最上等的,而且不离佛陀出世而存在于世间。比这更殊胜的是与道果相应的慧,那才是真正的增上慧,但这里指的不是它。因为证得那种慧的比丘,不会去行淫欲之法。巴利
‘‘Atthi dinnaṃ, atthi yiṭṭha’’nti (dha. sa. 1371; vibha. 793; ma. ni. 3.92) -ādinayappavattaṃ pana kammassakatañāṇaṃ paññā, sā hi buddhe uppannepi anuppannepi loke pavattati. Uppanne buddhe tassā paññāya buddhāpi buddhasāvakāpi mahājanaṃ samādapenti. Anuppanne buddhe paccekabuddhā ca kammavādino ca dhammikā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cakkavattī ca mahārājāno mahābodhisattā ca samādapenti. Sāmampi paṇḍitā sattā samādiyanti. Tathā hi aṅkuro dasavassasahassāni mahādānaṃ adāsi. Velāmo, vessantaro, aññe ca bahū paṇḍitamanussā mahādānāni adaṃsu. Te taṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paripūretvā devesu ca manussesu ca sampattiṃ anubhaviṃsu. Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakaṃ pana vipassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘adhipaññā’’ti vuccati. Sā hi adhisīla-adhicittāni viya sīlacittānaṃ sabbalokiyapaññānaṃ adhikā ceva uttamā ca, na ca vinā buddhuppādā loke pavattati. Tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā, sā pana idha anadhippetā. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatīti.
这里说的“于此”,是指那三种学处。“什么是增上戒学”:就是这被称为巴帝摩卡戒的增上戒学。“这叫做共住”:因为来自不同地区、种姓、家族等的比丘们一起生活,有共同的生活方式、同分的生活方式、同分的行为,所以世尊在律中制定的这整个学处,就称为“共住”。“于此学”:把那个学处作为心的所缘,用心的观察“我是否按照学处而学、是否没有学”来修学。而且,他不只是在称为共住的这个学处上修学,也在学处上修学;不过,这里是依据紧接着的“这叫做共住”这句话,才说“于此学”。虽然这样说,但这里的含义应当这样理解:他圆满那个学处的修学而学,并且不违犯那个学处而学。因此说“共住成就者”,这也是依据紧接着的“共住”一词而说的。然而,因为他也是学处成就者,所以从义理上应当知道他也是“学处成就者”。这样,“学处共住成就者”这个词的释义就圆满了。巴利
Tatrāti tāsu tīsu sikkhāsu. Yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhāti yā ayaṃ pātimokkhasīlasaṅkhātā adhisīlasikkhā. Etaṃ sājīvaṃ nāmāti etaṃ sabbampi bhagavatā vinaye ṭhapitaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ, yasmā ettha nānādesajātigottādibhedabhinnā bhikkhū saha jīvanti ekajīvikā sabhāgajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, tasmā ‘‘sājīva’’nti vuccati. Tasmiṃ sikkhatīti taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ cittassa adhikaraṇaṃ katvā ‘‘yathāsikkhāpadaṃ nu kho sikkhāmi na sikkhāmī’’ti cittena olokento sikkhati. Na kevalañcāyametasmiṃ sājīvasaṅkhāte sikkhāpadeyeva sikkhati, sikkhāyapi sikkhati, ‘‘etaṃ sājīvaṃ nāmā’’ti imassa pana anantarassa padassa vasena ‘‘tasmiṃ sikkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi taṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho ayamettha attho daṭṭhabbo – tassā ca sikkhāya sikkhaṃ paripūrento sikkhati, tasmiñca sikkhāpade avītikkamanto sikkhatīti. Tena vuccati sājīvasamāpannoti idampi anantarassa sājīvapadasseva vasena vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana so sikkhampi samāpanno, tasmā sikkhāsamāpannotipi atthato veditabbo. Evañhi sati ‘‘sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti etassa padassa padabhājanampi paripuṇṇaṃ hoti.
舍弃学处的分别解释巴利
Sikkhāpaccakkhānavibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
“不舍弃修学,也不表明自己软弱”:意思是既不放弃修学,也不公开表示自己软弱。因为即使把软弱说出来了,修学也仍然没有被舍弃;但一旦舍弃了修学,软弱就必定已经暴露出来了。所以“不表明自己软弱”这个说法,并没有什么特别的含义。就像说“可以两夜三夜同住一处”时,“两夜”这个词并没有什么特别含义,只是按照世间习惯说法,为了让语句顺畅、说起来顺口才这么说的。同样,这里也应该理解为:只是按照习惯说法,为了让语句顺畅、说起来顺口才这么说的。巴利
Sikkhaṃappaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti sikkhañca appaṭikkhipitvā dubbalabhāvañca appakāsetvā. Yasmā ca dubbalye āvikatepi sikkhā appaccakkhātāva hoti, sikkhāya pana paccakkhātāya dubbalyaṃ āvikatameva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti iminā padena na koci visesattho labbhati. Yathā pana ‘‘dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeyyā’’ti vutte dirattavacanena na koci visesattho labbhati, kevalaṃ lokavohāravasena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya mukhārūḷhatāya etaṃ vuttaṃ. Evamidampi vohāravasena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya mukhārūḷhatāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
世尊说法时,义理和文句都是圆满的,所以用“不舍学处”来成立义理,用“不显露羸弱”来成立文句。因为单独一个表达义理的词,如果没有辅助的词,就像没有侍从的国王,或者没有衣服装饰的人一样,不好看;但如果配上与义理相顺、起辅助作用的词,它就显得好看了。巴利
Yasmā vā bhagavā sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā ‘‘sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāyā’’ti iminā atthaṃ sampādetvā ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti iminā byañjanaṃ sampādeti. Parivārakapadavirahitañhi ekameva atthapadaṃ vuccamānaṃ parivāravirahito rājā viya, vatthālaṅkāravirahito viya ca puriso na sobhati; parivārakena pana atthānulomena sahāyapadena saddhiṃ taṃ sobhatīti.
或者,因为显露羸弱在某些情况下就是舍学处的意思,所以针对这一点,在解释“不舍学处”这个词的含义时,就说了“不显露羸弱”。巴利
Yasmā vā sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ekaccaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ attho hoti, tasmā taṃ sandhāya ‘‘sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāyā’’tipadassa atthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti āha.
这里可能会有人想:既然并不是所有表现出软弱的行为都算是舍弃学处,那就应该先说“没有表现出软弱”,然后为了限定它的含义,再说“没有舍弃学处”。但这种想法不对。为什么?因为这样不符合义理的次第。既然已经说了“具足学处与共住”,那么说“没有舍弃那学处”时,意思正是顺着这个次第表达出来的,而不是别的样子。所以,正是这一句被先说。巴利
Tattha siyā yasmā na sabbaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā’’ti paṭhamaṃ vatvā tassa atthaniyamanatthaṃ ‘‘sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāyā’’ti vattabbanti, tañca na; kasmā? Atthānukkamābhāvato. ‘‘Sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti hi vuttattā yaṃ sikkhaṃ samāpanno, taṃ appaccakkhāyāti vuccamāno anukkameneva attho vutto hoti, na aññathā. Tasmā idameva paṭhamaṃ vuttanti.
另外,这里也应该按照次第来理解它的含义。怎么理解呢?在“具足学处与共住”这句话里,对于所具足的学处,不舍弃;对于所具足的共住,不表现出软弱。巴利
Apica anupaṭipāṭiyāpi ettha attho veditabbo. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti ettha yaṃ sikkhaṃ samāpanno taṃ appaccakkhāya yañca sājīvaṃ samāpanno tattha dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvāti.
现在,为了说明舍戒和示弱行为这两者的区别与共同点,以及舍戒的特征,世尊说“诸比丘,有……”等话。其中,“诸比丘,有……”等是两句论母;分别解释它们时,又说“诸比丘,如何……”。这里对不明显词句的注释如下:“如何”是指以什么方式。“及示弱行为”是指表露软弱。“此处”是指在佛陀的教法中。“厌离者”是指因为对教法不欢喜而陷入困苦生活的人。或者也可以说,他心里一直想着“今天要走,明天要走,从这里走,到那里去”,心高举而散乱、不能专注。“不喜乐者”是指对教法缺乏喜乐。巴利
Idāni sikkhāpaccakkhānadubbalyāvikammānaṃ visesāvisesaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānalakkhaṇañca dassento ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha atthi bhikkhavetiādīni dve mātikāpadāni; tāni vibhajanto ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – kathanti kena ākārena. Dubbalyāvikammañcāti dubbalyassa āvikammañca. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ukkaṇṭhitoti anabhiratiyā imasmiṃ sāsane kicchajīvikappatto. Atha vā ajja yāmi, sve yāmi, ito yāmi, ettha yāmīti uddhaṃ kaṇṭhaṃ katvā viharamāno, vikkhitto anekaggoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anabhiratoti sāsane abhirativirahito.
想从沙门状态退下来,就是想要离开沙门的身份。以比丘的身份,这里用的是业格,表示工具格的意义。而在“因缠在脖子上而苦恼”等说法里,则是按照这个词本身的特征,用工具格来表达。“苦恼”是指像被折磨、被压迫、受苦那样对待自己;或者也可以理解为,被比丘身份所折磨、所逼迫。“羞惭”就是感到羞愧。“厌嫌”就是像厌恶不净物那样厌嫌它。“希求在家身份”等说法,意思都很浅显明白。“我何不弃舍佛呢”这里的“何不”是表示思虑的虚词。这句话的意思是:“如果我弃舍佛,那对我来说就好了。”他用这些或其他语句发出言语来说,并且让听他说的人知道、明白。“如是亦”的“亦”字是用来总结上面所说的意思。这样一来,既是示弱的表现,而戒也还没有舍弃;以其他方式也是如此。巴利
Sāmaññā cavitukāmoti samaṇabhāvato apagantukāmo. Bhikkhubhāvanti bhikkhubhāvena. Karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Kaṇṭhe āsattena aṭṭīyeyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 162) pana yathālakkhaṇaṃ karaṇavacaneneva vuttaṃ. Aṭṭīyamānoti aṭṭaṃ pīḷitaṃ dukkhitaṃ viya attānaṃ ācaramāno; tena vā bhikkhubhāvena aṭṭo kariyamāno pīḷiyamānoti attho. Harāyamānoti lajjamāno. Jigucchamānoti asuciṃ viya taṃ jigucchanto. Gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānotiādīni uttānatthāniyeva. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyyanti ettha yaṃnūnāti parivitakkadassane nipāto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘sacāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyyaṃ, sādhu vata me siyā’’ti. Vadati viññāpetīti imamatthaṃ etehi vā aññehi vā byañjanehi vacībhedaṃ katvā vadati ceva, yassa ca vadati, taṃ viññāpeti jānāpeti. Evampīti uparimatthasampiṇḍanatto pikāro. Evampi dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca appaccakkhātā, aññathāpi.
现在,为了说明那也是另一种形式的示弱行为,并且没有舍弃学处,而说了“或者又……”等话。这些内容从意义上来说都很浅显易懂。不过从字句上来看,这里从一开始,“弃舍佛、弃舍法、弃舍僧、弃舍学、弃舍律、弃舍巴帝摩卡、弃舍诵、弃舍和尚、弃舍阿阇梨、弃舍弟子、弃舍门徒、弃舍同和尚者、弃舍同阿阇梨者、弃舍同梵行者”,这十四句是以弃舍的方式说出来的。巴利
Idāni taṃ aññathāpi dubbalyāvikammaṃ sikkhāya ca appaccakkhānaṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā panā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ atthato uttānameva. Padato panettha ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkheyyaṃ, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkheyya’’nti imāni cuddasa padāni paccakkhānākārena vuttāni.
“愿我是居士”等——“愿我是居士、优婆塞、园民、沙弥、外道、外道弟子、非沙门、非释迦子”,这八句是用“愿我是”这种状态变化的方式来说的。同样,与“我何不”相关联的有二十二句。巴利
Gihī assantiādīni ‘‘gihī, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, assamaṇo, asakyaputtiyo assa’’nti imāni aṭṭha padāni ‘‘assa’’nti iminā bhāvavikappākārena vuttāni. Evaṃ ‘‘yaṃnūnāha’’nti iminā paṭisaṃyuttāni dvāvīsati padāni.
46 就像这些一样,与“如果我……”“如果我不……”“不如我……”“对我来说有……”中的每一个相关联的,各有二十二句,总共就是一百一十句。巴利
46. Yathā ca etāni, evaṃ ‘‘yadi panāhaṃ, apāhaṃ, handāhaṃ, hoti me’’ti imesu ekamekena paṭisaṃyuttāni dvāvīsatīti sabbāneva satañca dasa ca padāni honti.
47 接着,按照应当忆念之事的显示方式而展开的,是“我忆念母亲”等十七句。其中,田指稻田等;地指草、叶、蔬菜、瓜果等生长之处;手艺指陶匠、织工等手艺。巴利
47. Tato paraṃ saritabbavatthudassananayena pavattāni ‘‘mātaraṃ sarāmī’’tiādīni sattarasa padāni. Tattha khettanti sālikhettādiṃ. Vatthunti tiṇapaṇṇasākaphalāphalasamuṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ. Sippanti kumbhakārapesakārasippādikaṃ.
48 接下来,为了显示有牵挂、有障碍的状态而展开的,是“我有母亲,她应该由我来养活”等九句。巴利
48. Tato paraṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhabhāvadassanavasena pavattāni ‘‘mātā me atthi, sā mayā posetabbā’’tiādīni nava padāni.
49 接下来,为了显示有依靠、有立足处的状态而出现的,是“我有母亲,她会养活我”等十六句。巴利
49. Tato paraṃ sanissayasappatiṭṭhabhāvadassanavasena pavattāni ‘‘mātā me atthi, sā maṃ posessatī’’tiādīni soḷasa padāni.
50 此后,为了显示一食、一卧、梵行的难行性,而说出的“难行”等八句。巴利
50. Tato paraṃ ekabhattaekaseyyabrahmacariyānaṃ dukkarabhāvadassanavasena pavattāni ‘‘dukkara’’ntiādīni aṭṭha padāni.
在这里,“难行”显示了一食等做法上的难行。“非易行”否定了易行性。同样,这里的“难行”和“非易行”也是如此。“我不能努力”显示了对那件事缺乏努力、做不到。“我不能堪忍”显示了不堪忍受。“我不喜乐”显示了没有喜乐。“我不欣乐”显示了没有欣乐。应当知道,这五十句加上前面的一百一十句,一共一百六十句,是在示弱行部分中所说的。巴利
Tattha dukkaranti ekabhattādīnaṃ karaṇe dukkarataṃ dasseti. Na sukaranti sukarabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Evaṃ duccaraṃ na sucaranti ettha. Na ussahāmīti tattha ussāhābhāvaṃ asakkuṇeyyataṃ dasseti. Na visahāmīti asayhataṃ dasseti. Na ramāmīti ratiyā abhāvaṃ dasseti. Nābhiramāmīti abhiratiyā abhāvaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ imāni ca paññāsa, purimāni ca dasuttarasatanti saṭṭhisataṃ padāni dubbalyāvikammavāre vuttānīti veditabbāni.
51 51. 在“舍弃学处”这一节里,“诸比丘,如何……”等开头的内容,从意义上来说都是很浅显易懂的。不过从词句上来看,这里也有“我舍弃佛、我舍弃法、我舍弃僧、我舍弃学、我舍弃律、我舍弃巴帝摩卡、我舍弃诵戒、我舍弃和尚、我舍弃阿阇梨、我舍弃共住弟子、我舍弃门徒、我舍弃同和尚者、我舍弃同阿阇梨者、我舍弃同梵行者”这十四个词,它们是和舍弃学处的话语联系在一起的。在所有这些词里,“说、令知”这个说法的意思是:发出言语而说,并且对所说的对象,通过这言语让他知道、让他听到、让他明白:“这个人想舍弃教法、想从教法中脱离、想放弃比丘身份,所以作出这样的语句表达。”巴利
51. Sikkhāpaccakkhānavārepi ‘‘kathañca bhikkhave’’ti ādi sabbaṃ atthato uttānameva. Padato panetthāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti imāni cuddasa padāni sikkhāpaccakkhānavacanasambandhena pavattāni. Sabbapadesu ca ‘‘vadati viññāpetī’’ti vacanassa ayamattho – vacībhedaṃ katvā vadati, yassa ca vadati taṃ teneva vacībhedena ‘‘ayaṃ sāsanaṃ jahitukāmo sāsanato muccitukāmo bhikkhubhāvaṃ cajitukāmo imaṃ vākyabhedaṃ karotī’’ti viññāpeti sāveti jānāpeti.
如果他想说“我舍弃佛陀”,却把词序颠倒,说成“我舍弃佛”之类;或者用某种蛮族语言、或其他某种语言表达这个意思;或者本来想说“我舍弃佛陀”,却顺序错乱,说成“我舍弃法”或“我舍弃同梵行者”——就像在《上人法分别》中,本来想说“我进入初禅”,却说成“第二禅”——只要他对之说话的那个人,哪怕只知道这么一点:“这个比丘想舍弃比丘身份,正在表达这个意思”,那就不算失败;已经落入这个范畴,学处就已经被舍弃了。就像从帝释天或梵天死后投生的众生一样,从教法中死去。巴利
Sace panāyaṃ ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattukāmo padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ katvā ‘‘paccakkhāmi buddha’’nti vā vadeyya. Milakkhabhāsāsu vā aññatarabhāsāya tamatthaṃ vadeyya. ‘‘Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattukāmo uppaṭipāṭiyā ‘‘dhammaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vā ‘‘sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vā vadeyya, seyyathāpi uttarimanussadhammavibhaṅge ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjāmī’’ti vattukāmo ‘‘dutiyaṃ jhāna’’nti vadati, sace yassa vadati so ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ cajitukāmo etamatthaṃ vadatī’’ti ettakamattampi jānāti, viraddhaṃ nāma natthi; khettameva otiṇṇaṃ, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Sakkattā vā brahmattā vā cutasatto viya cutova hoti sāsanā.
如果他用过去式、未来式或假设式的说法,说“我舍了佛”“我将舍佛”或“我应当舍佛”,或者派使者去,或者传递消息,或者刻写文字,或者用手势表达这个意思,那么修学还没有被舍弃。但如果是宣说上人法,即使只是用手势,也能成立。舍弃修学,只有在面对人类众生、内心相应而发出言语的时候,才能成立。即使发出言语让对方知道了,如果他指定一个人说“只让他知道”,而只有那个人知道,修学就被舍弃了。如果那个人不知道,旁边站着的另一个人知道,修学就没有被舍弃。如果两个人在场,他指定两个人说“我告诉他们”,那么无论其中一个人知道,还是两个人都知道,修学都被舍弃了。人更多的情况,也应当这样理解。巴利
Sace pana ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhi’’nti vā, ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhissāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vāti atītānāgataparikappavacanehi vadati, dūtaṃ vā pahiṇāti, sāsanaṃ vā peseti, akkharaṃ vā chindati, hatthamuddāya vā tamatthaṃ āroceti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Uttarimanussadhammārocanaṃ pana hatthamuddāyapi sīsaṃ eti. Sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ manussajātikasattassa santike cittasampayuttaṃ vacībhedaṃ karontasseva sīsaṃ eti. Vacībhedaṃ katvā viññāpentopi ca yadi ‘‘ayameva jānātū’’ti ekaṃ niyametvā āroceti, tañca soyeva jānāti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha so na jānāti, añño samīpe ṭhito jānāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha dvinnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne dvinnampi niyametvā ‘‘etesaṃ ārocemī’’ti vadati, tesu ekasmiṃ jānantepi dvīsu jānantesupi paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ sambahulesupi veditabbaṃ.
如果比丘被不满的情绪折磨,走到同辈比丘们中间,大声说“我舍佛”,想让“随便谁知道了就行”,而不远处站着的新做工的人或其他懂得这个意思的人听到后,知道“这个沙门已经厌烦了,想要过在家的生活,已经从教法里退失了”,那么学处就被舍了。不过就在那一刹那,不早不晚,很难判断。如果他在动念的那一刻就知道,就像世间人平常听到一句话就能明白意思那样,学处就被舍了。如果事后才怀疑“他这话是什么意思”,过了很久才知道,学处就没有被舍。因为舍学处这件事,和后面的妄说上人法、粗恶语、为了自己的欲望而说恶秽罪过等学处,是同一类判定。只有在动念的那一刻就知道,才算成立;如果怀疑“他在说什么”,过了很久才知道,就不算成立。就像在“我舍佛”这个词的判定里说的那样,一切词句都应这样理解。巴利
Sace pana anabhiratiyā pīḷito sabhāge bhikkhū parisaṅkamāno ‘‘yo koci jānātū’’ti uccasaddaṃ karonto ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vadati, tañca avidūre ṭhito navakammiko vā añño vā samayaññū puriso sutvā ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito ayaṃ samaṇo gihibhāvaṃ pattheti, sāsanato cuto’’ti jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Taṅkhaṇaññeva pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ dujjānaṃ, sace āvajjanasamaye jānāti; yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā jānanti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti kaṅkhanto cirena jānāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Idañhi sikkhāpaccakkhānañca upari abhūtārocanaduṭṭhullavācā-attakāmaduṭṭhadosabhūtā-rocanasikkhāpadāni ca ekaparicchedāni. Āvajjanasamaye ñāte eva sīsaṃ enti, ‘‘kiṃ ayaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti kaṅkhatā cirena ñāte sīsaṃ na enti. Yathā cāyaṃ ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti pade vinicchaye vutto; evaṃ sabbapadesu veditabbo.
因为,当修学被舍弃的时候,即使没有说出“我干脆舍弃佛陀”这类话,他的软弱就已经显露出来了;所以,在所有这些词句的末尾说:比丘们,这样既是软弱的显露,修学也已经被舍弃了。巴利
Yasmā ca yadā sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti, tadā ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’ntiādīni avadatāpi dubbalyaṃ āvikatameva hoti; tasmā sabbesaṃ padānaṃ avasāne vuttaṃ – ‘‘evampi, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā’’ti.
从此之后,在“请持我为居士”这句话里,即使他说“我将成为居士”,或者说“我是居士”,或者说“我已生为居士”,或者说“我即是居士”,戒学也还没有被舍弃。但如果他说“从今天起,请持我为居士”,或者说“请知道”,或者说“请认清”,或者说“请留意”,不论是用雅语说还是用蛮语说,当这个意思表达出来,而听他说的人又听懂了,戒学就被舍弃了。这个规则也适用于其余“近事男”等七个词。这样一来,这八个词加上前面的十四个词,一共就是二十二个词。巴利
Tato paraṃ gihīti maṃ dhārehīti ettha sacepi ‘‘gihī bhavissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘gihī homī’’ti vā ‘‘gihī jātomhī’’ti vā ‘‘gihimhī’’ti vā vadati, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Sace pana ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya gihīti maṃ dhārehī’’ti vā ‘‘jānāhī’’ti vā ‘‘sañjānāhī’’ti vā ‘‘manasi karohī’’ti vā vadati, ariyakena vā vadati milakkhakena vā; evametasmiṃ atthe vutte yassa vadati, sace so jānāti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Esa nayo sesesupi ‘‘upāsako’’tiādīsu sattasu padesu. Evaṃ imāni ca aṭṭha, purimāni ca cuddasāti dvāvīsati padāni honti.
52 从这之后,把前面那十四个词分别和“我已足够”“我为何”“于我无益”“我善解脱”这四句组合起来说,就成了五十六句。其中,“我已足够”意思是:够了,已经足够了。“我为何”意思是:我还有什么该做的、该办的、该成就的?“于我无益”意思是:对我没有利益。“我善解脱”意思是:我很好地解脱了。其余的按前面说的方式理解。这样,这五十六句加上前面的二十二句,一共七十八句,都是按它们本来的样子说出来的。巴利
52. Ito paraṃ purimāneva cuddasa padāni ‘‘alaṃ me, kinnu me, na mamattho, sumuttāha’’nti imehi catūhi yojetvā vuttāni chappaññāsa honti. Tattha alanti hotu, pariyattanti attho. Kiṃnu meti kiṃ mayhaṃ kiccaṃ, kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ, kiṃ sādhetabbanti attho. Na mamatthoti natthi mama attho. Sumuttāhanti sumutto ahaṃ. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Evaṃ imāni ca chappaññāsa purimāni ca dvāvīsatīti aṭṭhasattati padāni sarūpeneva vuttāni.
53 53. 不过,因为用那些同义词也能达成舍学,所以说了“或者其他任何”等话。其中,“或者其他任何”是指在巴利经典中除了“佛陀”等已经出现的词之外,还有其他哪些词。或者佛陀的同义词,也就是佛陀的别名……乃至非释迦子者的别名。其中,《功德庄严》里出现的千名、《优波离偈》里的百名,以及其他依功德而得的名称,应当知道是“佛陀的同义词”。一切法的名称,应当知道是“法的同义词”。这个道理适用于一切处。巴利
53. Yasmā pana tesaṃ vevacanehipi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘yāni vā panaññānipī’’tiādimāha. Tattha yāni vā panaññānipīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘buddha’’ntiādīni āgatapadāni ṭhapetvā yāni aññāni atthi. Buddhavevacanāni vāti buddhassa vā pariyāyanāmāni…pe… asakyaputtiyassa vā. Tattha vaṇṇapaṭṭhāne āgataṃ nāmasahassaṃ upāligāthāsu (ma. ni. 2.76) nāmasataṃ aññāni ca guṇato labbhamānāni nāmāni ‘‘buddhavevacanānī’’ti veditabbāni. Sabbānipi dhammassa nāmāni dhammavevacanānīti veditabbāni. Esa nayo sabbattha.
这里应当这样理解:“我舍弃佛”并不是用同义词来舍弃,而是按照字面本身的意思来舍弃。“我舍弃正自觉者,舍弃具有无量智慧者,舍弃具有无上智慧者,舍弃菩提智慧,舍弃坚毅者,舍弃已离痴者,舍弃已摧破障碍者,舍弃已战胜一切胜利者”——像这样,通过佛陀的同义词来舍弃学处。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevavacanena paccakkhānaṃ yathārutameva. ‘‘Sammāsambuddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, anantabuddhiṃ, anomabuddhiṃ, bodhipaññāṇaṃ, dhīraṃ, vigatamohaṃ, pabhinnakhīlaṃ, vijitavijayaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evamādibuddhavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ.
“我舍弃法”并不是用同义词来舍弃,而是按照文句本身的意思来舍弃。“我舍弃善说之法,舍弃可现见之法,舍弃无时之法,舍弃来见之法,舍弃导向之法,舍弃智者各自应证知之法。我舍弃无为法;我舍弃离欲之法、灭之法、不死之法。我舍弃长部、梵网经、中部、根本法门经、相应部、渡瀑流经、增支部、心遍取经、小部、本生、阿毗达摩、善法、不善法、无记法、念处、正勤、神足、根、力、觉支、道、果、涅槃。”在八万四千法蕴中,哪怕只是一个法蕴的名称,也是法的同义词。这样,以法的同义词来舍弃学处。巴利
Dhammaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ, yathārutameva. ‘‘Svākkhātaṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, sandiṭṭhikaṃ, akālikaṃ, ehipassikaṃ, opaneyyikaṃ, paccattaṃ veditabbaṃ viññūhi dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi. Asaṅkhataṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi; virāgaṃ, nirodhaṃ, amataṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, dīghanikāyaṃ paccakkhāmi, brahmajālaṃ majjhimanikāyaṃ, mūlapariyāyaṃ, saṃyuttanikāyaṃ, oghataraṇaṃ, aṅguttaranikāyaṃ, cittapariyādānaṃ, khuddakanikāyaṃ, jātakaṃ, abhidhammaṃ, kusalaṃ dhammaṃ, akusalaṃ dhammaṃ, abyākataṃ dhammaṃ, satipaṭṭhānaṃ, sammappadhānaṃ, iddhipādaṃ, indriyaṃ, balaṃ, bojjhaṅgaṃ, maggaṃ, phalaṃ, nibbānaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassesu ekadhammakkhandhassapi nāmaṃ dhammavevacanameva. Evaṃ dhammavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
只说“我舍僧”,并不算是以同义词的方式舍僧。要这样说:“我舍善行道的僧团、正直行道的僧团、如理行道的僧团、正当行道的僧团、四双八辈的僧团、应受供养的僧团、应受款待的僧团、应受布施的僧团、应受合掌礼敬的僧团、世间无上福田的僧团。”像这样,通过僧团的同义词来表述,才构成舍学。巴利
Saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Suppaṭipannaṃ saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, ujuppaṭipannaṃ, ñāyappaṭipannaṃ, sāmīcippaṭipannaṃ saṅghaṃ, catupurisayugaṃ saṅghaṃ, aṭṭhapurisapuggalaṃ saṅghaṃ, āhuneyyaṃ saṅghaṃ, pāhuneyyaṃ, dakkhiṇeyyaṃ, añjalikaraṇīyaṃ, anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ saṅghavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃学处”,并不是用同义词来表达舍弃。像这样说:“我舍弃比丘学处,舍弃比丘尼学处,舍弃增上戒学,舍弃增上心学,舍弃增上慧学”——这样通过学处的同义词来表达,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusikkhaṃ paccakkhāmi, bhikkhunīsikkhaṃ, adhisīlasikkhaṃ, adhicittasikkhaṃ, adhipaññāsikkhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ sikkhāvevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃律”并不是用近义词来表达舍弃。要这样说:“我舍弃比丘律、舍弃比丘尼律、舍弃第一波罗夷、第二波罗夷、第三波罗夷、第四波罗夷、舍弃僧残、偷兰遮、波逸提、提舍尼、恶作、恶说”——像这样用律的近义词来表达,才构成舍弃学处。巴利
Vinayaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhuvinayaṃ paccakkhāmi, bhikkhunīvinayaṃ, paṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ, dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ catutthaṃ pārājikaṃ, saṅghādisesaṃ, thullaccayaṃ, pācittiyaṃ, pāṭidesanīyaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ, dubbhāsitaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evamādivinayavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃巴帝摩卡”,并不是用同义词来表达舍弃。只有像“我舍弃比丘巴帝摩卡、我舍弃比丘尼巴帝摩卡”这样,用巴帝摩卡的同义词来说,才构成舍弃学处。巴利
Pātimokkhaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ bhikkhunīpātimokkhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ pātimokkhavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃诵”,并不是用同义词来表达舍弃。像这样说:“我舍弃比丘波罗提木叉诵、比丘尼波罗提木叉诵、第一波罗提木叉诵、第二、第三、第四、第五波罗提木叉诵、正等觉者诵、无量智者诵、无上智者诵、菩提智慧诵、坚毅者诵、离痴者诵、断除障碍者诵、战胜与胜利者诵”——以这样用“诵”的同义词来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Uddesaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhupātimokkhuddesaṃ, bhikkhunīpātimokkhuddesaṃ , paṭhamaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ, dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ pātimokkhuddesaṃ, sammāsambuddhuddesaṃ, anantabuddhiuddesaṃ, anomabuddhiuddesaṃ, bodhipaññāṇuddesaṃ, dhīruddesaṃ, vigatamohuddesaṃ, pabhinnakhīluddesaṃ, vijitavijayuddesaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evamādiuddesavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃和尚”,并不是用别的说法就算舍弃。要这样说:“那位让我出家的人,那位让我受具足戒的人,我依靠他而出家,我依靠他而受具足戒,我的出家以他为根本,我的具足戒以他为根本——我舍弃他。”像这样,用和尚的另一种称呼来说,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Upajjhāyaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yo maṃ pabbājesi, yo maṃ upasampādesi, yassa mūlenāhaṃ pabbajito, yassa mūlenāhaṃ upasampanno, yassamūlikā mayhaṃ pabbajjā, yassamūlikā mayhaṃ upasampadā tāhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ upajjhāyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃老师”这句话,并不是只靠这个说法就算舍弃了(学处)。而要这样说:“那位让我出家的人,那位教导我的人,我依靠他而住的人,我请他教诫的人,我向他请教的人,那位教导我的人,那位让我去请教的人——我舍弃他。”像这样,用老师的同义说法来表达,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Ācariyaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yo maṃ pabbājesi, yo maṃ anussāvesi, yāhaṃ nissāya vasāmi, yāhaṃ uddisāpemi, yāhaṃ paripucchāmi, yo maṃ uddisati, yo maṃ paripucchāpeti tāhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ ācariyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃共住弟子”,并不是只靠这句话就算舍弃戒学。而要这样说:“我让他出家、我让他受具足戒的那位;以我为根本而出家的那位、以我为根本而受具足戒的那位;他的出家以我为根本、他的受具足戒以我为根本——我舍弃他。”这样用共住弟子的同义说法来表达,才算舍弃戒学。巴利
Saddhivihārikaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yāhaṃ pabbājesiṃ, yāhaṃ upasampādesiṃ, mayhaṃ mūlena yo pabbajito, mayhaṃ mūlena yo upasampanno, mayhaṃmūlikā yassa pabbajjā, mayhaṃ mūlikā yassa upasampadā tāhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ saddhivihārikavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃近住弟子”,并不是只靠这个说法就算舍弃。要这样说:“我让他出家的那位、我教他诵习的那位、依止我而住的那位、请我教示的那位、向我提问的那位、我为他教示的那位、我让他提问的那位——我舍弃他。”像这样,用近住弟子的同义说法来表达,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Antevāsikaṃpaccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yāhaṃ pabbājesiṃ, yāhaṃ anussāvesiṃ, yo maṃ nissāya vasati, yo maṃ uddisāpeti, yo maṃ paripucchati, yassāhaṃ uddisāmi, yāhaṃ paripucchāpemi taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ antevāsikavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃同和尚的人”,并不是用这种代称就算舍弃。要这样说:“我的和尚让他出家、让他受具足戒,依我的和尚为根本而出家、依我的和尚为根本而受具足戒,他的出家以我的和尚为根本、他的受具足戒以我的和尚为根本——我舍弃这个人。”像这样用同和尚者的代称来陈述,才算是舍弃学处。巴利
Samānupajjhāyakaṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Mayhaṃ upajjhāyo yaṃ pabbājesi, yaṃ upasampādesi, yo tassa mūlena pabbajito, yo tassa mūlena upasampanno, yassa tammūlikā pabbajjā, yassa tammūlikā upasampadā taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ samānupajjhāyakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃同师者”,并不是用这个说法本身就算舍弃。而是像这样说:“我的老师剃度了谁、教导了谁,谁依靠他而住,谁请他教诫、请他审问,我的老师为谁教诫、让谁审问——我舍弃那个人”,这样用同师者的说法来表达,才算舍弃学处。巴利
Samānācariyakaṃpaccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Mayhaṃ ācariyo yaṃ pabbājesi, yaṃ anussāvesi, yo taṃ nissāya vasati, yo taṃ uddisāpeti paripucchati, yassa me ācariyo uddisati, yaṃ paripucchāpeti taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ samānācariyakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“我舍弃同梵行者”,并不是用近义词来表达舍弃。如果说“那个和我一起修学增上戒、增上心、增上慧的人,我舍弃他”,像这样用同梵行者的近义词来说,就是舍弃学处。巴利
Sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Yenāhaṃ saddhiṃ adhisīlaṃ sikkhāmi, adhicittaṃ adhipaññaṃ sikkhāmi taṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ sabrahmacārivevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作在家人吧”,这样并不算用同义词来舍弃。如果说“你把我当作住家者、农夫、商人、牧牛者、工匠、束髻者、享受欲乐者吧”,像这样用在家人的同义词来说,就是对学处的舍弃。巴利
Gihīti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Āgārikoti maṃ dhārehi, kassako, vāṇijo, gorakkho, okallako, moḷibaddho, kāmaguṇikoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ gihivevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
你把我当作近事男吧——这样说并不是用近义词来舍弃。如果说“你把我当作二语近事男、三语近事男,皈依佛者、皈依法者、皈依僧者,持五学处者、持十学处者吧”,这样用近事男的近义词来说,就成了对学处的舍弃。巴利
Upāsakoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Dvevāciko upāsakoti maṃ dhārehi, tevāciko upāsako, buddhaṃ saraṇagamaniko, dhammaṃ saṅghaṃ saraṇagamaniko, pañcasikkhāpadiko dasasikkhāpadiko upāsakoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ upāsakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作净人吧”,这并不算用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作如法行事者、服务者、处理非青草事务者、分粥者、分果者、分硬食者吧”,这样用净人的同义词来说,就构成对学处的舍弃。巴利
Ārāmikoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyakārakoti maṃ dhārehi, veyyāvaccakaro, appaharitakārako, yāgubhājako, phalabhājako, khajjakabhājakoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ ārāmikavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作沙弥吧”,这并不算用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作童子吧、你把我当作穿布衣者吧、你把我当作侍童吧、你把我当作髻童吧、你把我当作沙门弟子吧”,这样用沙弥的同义词来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Sāmaṇeroti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Kumārakoti maṃ dhārehi, cellako, ceṭako, moḷigallo, samaṇuddeso’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ sāmaṇeravecanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作外道吧”,这并不是用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作尼乾陀吧”“邪命外道”“苦行者”“游行者”“白衣者吧”,这样用外道的同义词来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Titthiyoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Nigaṇṭhoti maṃ dhārehi, ājīvako, tāpaso, paribbājako, paṇḍaraṅgoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ titthiyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作外道弟子吧”,这并不是用同义说法来舍弃学处。如果说“你把我当作尼乾陀弟子吧”“邪命外道弟子”“苦行者弟子”“游方者弟子”“白衣者弟子吧”,这样用外道弟子的同义说法来说,就构成舍弃学处。巴利
Titthiyasāvakotimaṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Nigaṇṭhasāvakoti maṃ dhārehi’’ ājīvaka tāpasa paribbājaka paṇḍaraṅgasāvakoti maṃ dhārehīti evaṃ titthiyasāvakavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“你把我当作非沙门吧”——这并不是用同义词来舍弃学处。如果说:“你把我当作破戒者吧,恶法者,行为不清净、令人怀疑者,暗中造作恶业者,不是沙门却自称沙门者,不是梵行者却自称梵行者,内里腐烂者,漏泄烦恼者,秽物所生者,废物吧”——像这样,用“非沙门”的同义词来说,就构成对学处的舍弃。巴利
Assamaṇoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Dussīloti maṃ dhārehi, pāpadhammo, asucisaṅkassarasamācāro, paṭicchannakammanto, assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiñño, abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiñño, antopūti, avassuto, kasambujāto, koṇṭho’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ assamaṇavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
说“把我当作非释迦子”——这并不是用同义词来舍弃。如果说:“把我当作不是正自觉者之子,不是无量智者之子,不是无上智者之子,不是菩提智者之子,不是坚忍者之子,不是离痴者之子,不是已断除悭吝之桩者之子,不是已战胜、已征服者之子”——用这类“非释迦子”的同义词来说,就构成对学处的舍弃。巴利
Asakyaputtiyoti maṃ dhārehīti na vevacanena paccakkhānaṃ. ‘‘Na sammāsambuddhaputtoti maṃ dhārehi, na anantabuddhiputto, na anomabuddhiputto, na bodhipaññāṇaputto, na dhīraputto, na vigatamohaputto, na pabhinnakhīlaputto , na vijitavijayaputtoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evamādiasakyaputtiyavevacanena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti.
以那些行相、那些表相、那些征相——这是指以“佛陀的异名”等前面所说的方式讲出来的佛陀等的异名。这些异名,因为是舍弃学处的因,所以叫行相;因为能表明佛陀等的形态,或者本身就是舍弃学处的形态,所以叫表相;又因为它们是让人认出舍弃学处的因缘,就像人身上的痣等一样,所以叫征相。诸比丘,如是——从这以后,因为再没有别的舍弃学处的因,所以这样说,是为了确定。这里的意思就是:正是这样,既是表现软弱的行为,也正是舍弃学处,除此之外再没有别的因了。巴利
Tehi ākārehi tehi liṅgehi tehi nimittehīti tehi ‘‘buddhavevacanāni vā’’tiādinā nayena vuttehi buddhādīnaṃ vevacanehi. Vevacanāni hi sikkhāpaccakkhānassa kāraṇattā ākārāni, buddhādīnaṃ saṇṭhānadīpanattā sikkhāpaccakkhānasaṇṭhānattā eva vā liṅgāni, sikkhāpaccakkhānassa sañjānanahetuto manussānaṃ tilakādīni viya nimittānīti vuccanti. Evaṃ kho bhikkhaveti ito paraṃ aññassa sikkhāpaccakkhānakāraṇassa abhāvato niyamento āha. Ayañhettha attho, evameva dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhāpaccakkhānañca, na ito paraṃ kāraṇamatthīti.
54 54. 这样说明了舍弃学处的特征之后,为了在未舍弃的情况下不致迷惑,也为了显示这个舍弃学处的特征依人等的不同而失败的情形,说了“诸比丘,怎样是未舍弃”等话。其中,“以那些行相”等,和前面所说的一样。疯狂者:就是被鬼弄疯的,或者因胆汁失调而发疯的,凡是认知颠倒的人,如果他舍弃学处,学处就是未舍弃。在疯狂者面前:就是在这样的疯狂者面前;如果在这样的疯狂者面前,一个正常人舍弃学处,而那个疯狂者不知道,学处也还是未舍弃。心散乱者:说的就是被鬼弄疯的人。前面那句里则是按疯狂者的通称,说“被鬼弄疯的,或者因胆汁失调而发疯的”。这两者的差别,在无犯那一节里会清楚说明。像这样,心散乱者舍弃学处,学处就是未舍弃。在他面前舍弃,而他不知道,也还是未舍弃。巴利
54. Evaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā appaccakkhāne asammohatthaṃ tasseva ca sikkhāpaccakkhānalakkhaṇassa puggalādivasena vipattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, appaccakkhātā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yehi ākārehītiādi vuttanayameva. Ummattakoti yakkhummattako vā pittummattako vā yo koci viparītasañño, so sace paccakkhāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Ummattakassāti tādisasseva ummattakassa; tādisassa hi santike sace pakatatto sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, ummattako na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Khittacittoti yakkhummattako vuccati. Purimapade pana ummattakasāmaññena vuttaṃ ‘‘yakkhummattako vā pittummattako vā’’ti. Ubhinnampi viseso anāpattivāre āvi bhavissati . Evaṃ khittacitto sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti. Tassa santike paccakkhātāpi tamhi ajānante appaccakkhātāva hoti.
被强烈苦受触碰而陷入昏迷、失去理智的人,叫做“受剧苦者”。这种人在哀嚎哭喊的时候,即使做了舍弃,也等于没有舍弃。在他面前做了舍弃,但他并不知道,那也等于没有舍弃。巴利
Vedanāṭṭoti balavatiyā dukkhavedanāya phuṭṭho mucchāpareto; tena vilapantena paccakkhātāpi appaccakkhātāva hoti. Tassa santike paccakkhātāpi tamhi ajānante appaccakkhātā hoti.
在天神面前舍弃,从地居天开始直到色究竟天,即使在那些天神面前舍弃了,也等于没有舍弃。在畜生面前舍弃,比如在龙童子、金翅鸟童子,或者紧那罗、象、猴等任何畜生面前舍弃,也等于没有舍弃。其中,在疯子等人面前舍弃,因为他们无法理解,所以说不算舍弃。在天神面前舍弃不算,是因为他们理解得极快。天神有大智慧,是三因结生的,理解得非常快,而心又是快速转变的。所以,对于心念轻快的人,正因为心念轻快,才禁止在天神面前舍弃学处,以免“因为太快而毁掉了”。巴利
Devatāya santiketi bhummadevataṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva akaniṭṭhadevatāya santike paccakkhātāpi appaccakkhātāva hoti. Tiracchānagatassāti nāgamāṇavakassa vā supaṇṇamāṇavakassa vā kinnara-hatthi-makkaṭādīnaṃ vā yassa kassaci santike paccakkhātāpi appaccakkhātāva hoti . Tatra ummattakādīnaṃ santike ajānanabhāvena appaccakkhātāti āha. Devatāya santike atikhippaṃ jānanabhāvena. Devatā nāma mahāpaññā tihetukapaṭisandhikā atikhippaṃ jānanti, cittañca nāmetaṃ lahuparivattaṃ. Tasmā cittalahukassa puggalassa cittavaseneva ‘‘mā atikhippaṃ vināso ahosī’’ti devatāya santike sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ paṭikkhipi.
但在人类当中并没有定规。不论是在同类还是异类、在家众还是出家众、有智慧的人面前舍弃,都是真的舍弃了。但如果对方听不懂,那就还是没有舍弃。为了说明这个道理,就说了“以圣者语”等话。其中,“圣者语”就是圣者的用语,也就是摩揭陀语。“蛮族语”就是指任何非圣者的语言,比如安达罗人、达弥罗人等的语言。而“他听不懂”是说,因为不懂别的语言,或者因为在佛陀时代对法义不通达,所以不明白“他说的就是这个意思”。“出于戏弄”,就是忽然想说别的话,却突然说出“我舍佛”;“出于喧嚷”,就是在喧乱之中,本来想说这个,却说成了那个。若问:前者有什么差别呢?前者是即使智者也会由于突然性而说成别的话。而后者则是由于愚钝、迷惑、忘恩负义而失言,本来想说“我要说别的”,却说成了别的话。巴利
Manussesu pana niyamo natthi. Yassa kassaci sabhāgassa vā visabhāgassa vā gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā viññussa santike paccakkhātā paccakkhātāva hoti. Sace pana so na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hotīti etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘ariyakenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ariyakaṃ nāma ariyavohāro, māgadhabhāsā. Milakkhakaṃ nāma yo koci anariyako andhadamiḷādi. So ca na paṭivijānātīti bhāsantare vā anabhiññatāya, buddhasamaye vā akovidatāya ‘‘idaṃ nāma atthaṃ esa bhaṇatī’’ti nappaṭivijānāti. Davāyāti sahasā aññaṃ bhaṇitukāmo sahasā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti bhaṇati. Ravāyāti ravābhaññena, ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññaṃ bhaṇanto. Purimena ko visesoti ce? Purimaṃ paṇḍitassāpi sahasāvasena aññabhaṇanaṃ. Idaṃ pana mandattā momūhattā apakataññuttā pakkhalantassa ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññabhaṇanaṃ.
不想告知却告知:他教人读诵这条学处的巴利文,提问、学习、读诵、称赞,这称为“不想告知却告知”。想告知而不告知:在表明自己软弱后,舍弃学处,却不发之于言语,这称为“想告知而不告知”。向无知者告知:对年老如书模的人,或对教法不通、愚钝的人,或对已达到无知程度的村童告知。向有智者不告知:对有能力了知的智者不告知。或者以任何方式完全不告知:在“我舍佛”等说法中,无论以哪种方式舍了学处,他连一句言语的表白都不作。如此,便确定了不告知的特征。这里的意思是:像这样,学处就是未舍,不是由于其他原因。巴利
Asāvetukāmo sāvetīti imassa sikkhāpadassa pāḷiṃ vāceti paripucchati uggaṇhāti sajjhāyaṃ karoti vaṇṇeti, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘asāvetukāmo sāvetī’’ti. Sāvetukāmo na sāvetīti dubbalabhāvaṃ āvikatvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhanto vacībhedaṃ na karoti, ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘sāvetukāmo na sāvetī’’ti. Aviññussa sāvetīti mahallakassa vā potthakarūpasadisassa, garumedhassa vā samaye akovidassa, gāmadārakānaṃ vā aviññutaṃ pattānaṃ sāveti. Viññussa na sāvetīti paṇḍitassa ñātuṃ samatthassa na sāveti. Sabbaso vā panāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādīsu yena yena pariyāyena sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti, tato ekampi vacībhedaṃ katvā na sāveti. Evaṃ khoti appaccakkhānalakkhaṇaṃ niyameti. Ayaṃ hettha attho – ‘‘evameva sikkhā appaccakkhātā hoti, na aññena kāraṇenā’’ti.
根本制戒的注释巴利
Mūlapaññattivaṇṇanā
55 现在,为了说明“应当行淫欲之法”等语句的含义,所以说了“所谓淫欲法”等话。其中,“所谓淫欲法”是所要说明的淫欲法的标目词。“非法”是指不善者、卑劣之人的法。“村法”是指住在村里的人所行之法。“贱民法”是指贱民的法;或者因为烦恼流注,其本身就是贱法,所以叫“贱民法”。“粗恶”是指,因为被烦恼严重染污,又粗重而不精细,所以叫“粗恶”。从这里开始,在三个地方要把“那种”改成“那种”来连接——“那种粗恶,那种水边,那种秘密”。在这里,由于那种行为的伴随部分——看、拿、摸、触、碰都是粗恶的,所以那种行为也是粗恶的。那种粗恶,就是淫欲法。在它结束时,为了求清净而取水,所以叫“水边”,“水边”就是“水边法”;那种水边法,就是淫欲法。因为必须在隐秘、遮蔽的地方做,所以叫“秘密”。那种秘密,就是淫欲法。应当这样理解它们的连接。巴利
55. Idāni ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘methunadhammo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha methunadhammo nāmāti idaṃ niddisitabbassa methunadhammassa uddesapadaṃ. Asaddhammoti asataṃ nīcajanānaṃ dhammo. Gāmadhammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ sevanadhammo. Vasaladhammoti vasalānaṃ dhammo; kilesavassanato vā sayameva vasalo dhammoti vasaladhammo. Duṭṭhullanti duṭṭhuñca kilesehi duṭṭhattā, thūlañca anipuṇabhāvatoti duṭṭhullaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya ca tīsu padesu ‘‘yo so’’ti idaṃ parivattetvā ‘‘yaṃ ta’’nti katvā yojetabbaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ taṃ duṭṭhullaṃ, yaṃ taṃ odakantikaṃ, yaṃ taṃ rahassa’’nti. Ettha ca yasmā tassa kammassa parivārabhūtaṃ dassanampi gahaṇampi āmasanampi phusanampi ghaṭṭanampi duṭṭhullaṃ, tasmāpi taṃ kammaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ duṭṭhullaṃ so methunadhammo. Udakaṃ assa ante suddhatthaṃ ādīyatīti udakantaṃ, udakantameva odakantikaṃ; yaṃ taṃ odakantikaṃ , so methunadhammo. Raho paṭicchanne okāse kattabbatāya rahassaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ rahassaṃ, so methunadhammoti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
因为要透过两者、两者(的方式)来成就,所以叫“双双成就”。其中的连接是:“那种双双成就,就是所谓的淫法。”这里则把这一切总合起来说:“这就是所谓的淫法。”为什么称为淫法呢?因为这是双方都染着、贪恋、漏泄、被缠缚、双方相同之法,因此称为淫法。巴利
Dvayena dvayena samāpajjitabbato dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti. Tattha yojanā – ‘‘yā sā dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti so methunadhammo nāmā’’ti. Idha pana taṃ sabbaṃ ekajjhaṃ nigamento āha ‘‘eso methunadhammo nāmā’’ti. Kiṃ kāraṇā vuccati methunadhammoti? Ubhinnaṃ rattānaṃ sārattānaṃ avassutānaṃ pariyuṭṭhitānaṃ ubhinnaṃ sadisānaṃ dhammoti, taṃ kāraṇā vuccati methunadhammoti.
“行”这个说法,是为了说明在“应行”这个词里,是以什么方式而说“应行”,所举出的论母句。在“以自根入他根”等句中,如果有比丘以自己的根进入女人的根,以自己的生殖器进入女人的生殖器,乃至以最微小的程度,哪怕只有一粒芝麻那么大,在不为风所触的湿润处进入,这就叫作“行”;仅凭这一点就达到破戒,成为波罗夷。巴利
Paṭisevati nāmāti idaṃ ‘‘paṭiseveyyā’’ti ettha yenākārena paṭiseveyyāti vuccati, tassākārassa dassanatthaṃ mātikāpadaṃ. Yo nittena nimittantiādīsu yo bhikkhu itthiyā nimittena attano nimittaṃ, itthiyā aṅgajātena attano aṅgajātaṃ sabbantimena pamāṇena ekatilabījamattampi vātena asamphuṭṭhe allokāse paveseti, eso paṭisevati nāma; ettakena sīlabhedaṃ pāpuṇāti, pārājiko hoti.
在这里,女性根有四个侧面和中间,一共五个位置。男性根有四个侧面、中间和上方,一共六个。因此,从女性根的下方进入,就是波罗夷;从上方进入,从两侧进入,或者避开那四个位置只从中间进入,也是波罗夷。至于男性根,碰触下方而进入的,是波罗夷;碰触上方而进入的,碰触两侧而进入的,只碰触中间而进入的,以及像把手指收拢起来那样,收拢后以中节背面碰触上方而进入的,也是波罗夷。其中,像天平横梁那样进入的,也有四个侧面和中间,共五个位置;收拢后进入的,也有四个侧面和上方中间,共五个位置。这样一来,男性根总共就有十个位置。巴利
Ettha ca itthinimitte cattāri passāni, vemajjhañcāti pañca ṭhānāni labbhanti. Purisanimitte cattāri passāni, majjhaṃ, uparicāti cha. Tasmā itthinimitte heṭṭhā pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Uparito pavesentopi, ubhohi passehi pavesentopi cattāri ṭhānāni muñcitvā majjhena pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Purisanimittaṃ pana heṭṭhābhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Uparibhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi, ubhohi passehi chupantaṃ pavesentopi, majjheneva chupantaṃ pavesentopi samañchitaṅguliṃ viya majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā saṅkocetvā uparibhāgena chupantaṃ pavesentopi pārājiko hoti. Tattha tulādaṇḍasadisaṃ pavesentassāpi cattāri passāni, majjhañcāti pañca ṭhānāni; saṅkocetvā pavesentassāpi cattāri passāni, uparibhāgamajjhañcāti pañca ṭhānāni – evaṃ sabbānipi purisanimitte dasa ṭhānāni honti.
把生支插入有生命的女根、皮瘤或疮肿,犯波罗夷罪。把生支插入无生命的女根、死皮或干疮肿,犯恶作罪。带着淫欲的乐受,把阴毛、手指、拇指、种子等插入的,也同样是恶作罪。而这类淫欲话题,因为是粗恶的话题、不是圣者的话题,所以在讲说这一段或律中其他类似内容时,应当先现起不净想、沙门想和惭愧心,生起对正自觉者的恭敬,忆念那位对众生无与伦比地悲悯的世间怙主的悲德,然后才讲。那位世尊虽然已经完全远离诸欲,但为了怜愍众生、悲悯世间,出于对众生的悲心,为了制定学处,才讲了这样的话。应当这样忆念世间怙主的悲德:“啊,大师的悲德!”然后才讲。巴利
Nimitte jātaṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ cammakhīlaṃ vā piḷakaṃ vā paveseti, āpatti pārājikassa. Naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ matacammaṃ vā sukkhapiḷakaṃ vā paveseti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Methunassādena lomaṃ vā aṅguli-aṅguṭṭhabījādīni vā pavesentassāpi dukkaṭameva. Ayañca methunakathā nāma yasmā duṭṭhullā kathā asabbhikathā, tasmā etaṃ vā aññaṃ vā vinaye īdisaṃ ṭhānaṃ kathentena paṭikkūlamanasikārañca samaṇasaññañca hirottappañca paccupaṭṭhapetvā sammāsambuddhe gāravaṃ uppādetvā asamakāruṇikassa lokanāthassa karuṇāguṇaṃ āvajjetvā kathetabbaṃ. So hi nāma bhagavā sabbaso kāmehi vinivattamānasopi sattānuddayāya lokānukampāya sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāya īdisaṃ kathaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Aho satthu karuṇāguṇo’’ti evaṃ lokanāthassa karuṇāguṇaṃ āvajjetvā kathetabbaṃ.
再说,如果世尊不以各种方式讲述这样的法,谁会知道:“在这么多……巴利
Apica yadi bhagavā sabbākārena īdisaṃ kathaṃ na katheyya, ko jāneyya ‘‘ettakesu
在哪些情形犯波罗夷,在哪些情形犯土喇咤亚,在哪些情形犯恶作。因此,无论是听的人还是说的人,都不该捂着嘴、露着牙齿笑着坐。应当这样思量:“即使是正自觉的佛陀也讲过这样的法。”于是心怀庄重,具足惭与愧,以与大师相称的态度来说。巴利
Ṭhānesu pārājikaṃ, ettakesu thullaccayaṃ, ettakesu dukkaṭa’’nti. Tasmā suṇantenapi kathentenapi bījakena mukhaṃ apidhāya dantavidaṃsakaṃ hasamānena na nisīditabbaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsambuddhenāpi īdisaṃ kathita’’nti paccavekkhitvā gabbhitena hirottappasampannena satthupaṭibhāgena hutvā kathetabbanti.
在随制分中——“乃至”是指最低限度的界限。“对畜生女也一样”是指依结生而投生为畜生道的雌性。“更何况人类女人”是指首先是人类种族的女人。而在这里,作为波罗夷事由的畜生女,应当取为畜生女,不是指所有的畜生女。这里的界定是——巴利
Anupaññattivāre – antamasoti sabbantimena paricchedena. Tiracchānagatāyapīti paṭisandhivasena tiracchānesu gatāyapi. Pageva manussitthiyāti paṭhamataraṃ manussajātikāya itthiyā. Pārājikavatthubhūtā eva cettha tiracchānagatitthī tiracchānagatāti gahetabbā, na sabbā. Tatrāyaṃ paricchedo –
无足的类:蛇和鱼;二足的类:母鸡;
四足类之中,猫,这是波罗夷的事由。巴利
Apadānaṃ ahi macchā, dvipadānañca kukkuṭī; Catuppadānaṃ majjārī, vatthu pārājikassimāti.
这里,“蛇”这个词把蟒蛇、黑蛇等所有长条形的种类全都包括了。所以,在长条形类里,只要在三个道口(入口)中的任何一个,能塞进哪怕一粒芝麻那么大的东西,这就是波罗夷事由;其余的情况应当知道是恶作事由。“鱼”这个词把鱼、龟、蛙等所有水生的种类全都包括了。在这里也一样,应当依照长条形类所说的方式,了知波罗夷事由和恶作事由。不过这里有一个差别:有一种叫“飞蝗口蛙”的,它们的嘴形很大,孔却很小,塞不进去;但嘴形可以归入疮口一类,所以应当知道这是土喇咤亚事由。“鸡”这个词把鸦、鸽等所有鸟类的种类全都包括了。在这里也一样,应当依照所说的方式,了知波罗夷事由和恶作事由。“猫”这个词把树狗、獴、蜥蜴等所有四足的种类全都包括了。在这里也一样,应当依照所说的方式,了知波罗夷事由和恶作事由。巴利
Tattha ahiggahaṇena sabbāpi ajagaragonasādibhedā dīghajāti saṅgahitā. Tasmā dīghajātīsu yattha tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ sakkā tilaphalamattampi pavesetuṃ, sā pārājikavatthu. Avasesā dukkaṭavatthūti veditabbā. Macchaggahaṇena sabbāpi macchakacchapamaṇḍūkādibhedā odakajāti saṅgahitā. Tatrāpi dīghajātiyaṃ vuttanayeneva pārājikavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – pataṅgamukhamaṇḍūkā nāma honti tesaṃ mukhasaṇṭhānaṃ mahantaṃ, chiddaṃ appakaṃ, tattha pavesanaṃ nappahoti; mukhasaṇṭhānaṃ pana vaṇasaṅkhepaṃ gacchati, tasmā taṃ thullaccayavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Kukkuṭiggahaṇena sabbāpi kākakapotādibhedā pakkhijāti saṅgahitā. Tatrāpi vuttanayeneva pārājikavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca veditabbaṃ. Majjāriggahaṇena sabbāpi rukkhasunakha-muṅgusa-godhādibhedā catuppadajāti saṅgahitā. Tatrāpi vuttanayeneva pārājikavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca veditabbaṃ.
“波罗夷”就是已经被打败、已经落入失败的意思。这个“波罗夷”一词,用在学处、犯戒和个人这三种情况上。其中,用在学处上,就像这样说:“阿难,如来不可能因为跋耆人或跋耆子的缘故,就废除已经为弟子们制定的波罗夷学处,这是没有道理的,绝无可能。”(波罗夷43)应当这样理解。用在犯戒上,就像这样说:“比丘,你犯了波罗夷罪。”(波罗夷67)用在个人上,就像这样说:“我们不是波罗夷,那个偷盗的人才是波罗夷。”(波罗夷155)应当这样理解。而在“应以波罗夷法举罪”等说法中(波罗夷384),则是用在法上。不过,那里所说的“法”,有时指犯戒,有时只指学处本身,所以不应把它单独另列出来。其中,学处会击败违越它的人,所以称为“波罗夷”;犯戒会击败犯它的人,所以称为“波罗夷”;个人因为已经被打败、已经落入失败,所以称为“波罗夷”。正是为了说明这个意思,《附随》中也说:巴利
Pārājikoti parājito, parājayaṃ āpanno. Ayañhi pārājikasaddo sikkhāpadāpattipuggalesu vattati. Tattha ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, ānanda, anavakāso yaṃ tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā vajjiputtakānaṃ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṃ pārājikaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’ti (pārā. 43) evaṃ sikkhāpade vattamāno veditabbo. ‘‘Āpattiṃ tvaṃ, bhikkhu, āpanno pārājika’’nti (pārā. 67) evaṃ āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Na mayaṃ pārājikā, yo avahaṭo so pārājiko’’ti (pārā. 155) evaṃ puggale vattamāno veditabbo. ‘‘Pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 384) pana dhamme vattatīti vadanti. Yasmā pana tattha dhammoti katthaci āpatti , katthaci sikkhāpadameva adhippetaṃ, tasmā so visuṃ na vattabbo. Tattha sikkhāpadaṃ yo taṃ atikkamati, taṃ parājeti, tasmā ‘‘pārājika’’nti vuccati. Āpatti pana yo naṃ ajjhāpajjati, taṃ parājeti, tasmā ‘‘pārājikā’’ti vuccati. Puggalo yasmā parājito parājayamāpanno, tasmā ‘‘pārājiko’’ti vuccati. Etameva hi atthaṃ sandhāya parivārepi –
关于“波罗夷”这个说法,你要如实听清楚:
他已经堕落、败亡、被摧毁,确实从正法中被排除掉了。
在那里也没有共住,因此才这样说。巴利
‘‘Pārājikanti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ; Cuto paraddho bhaṭṭho ca, saddhammā hi niraṅkato; Saṃvāsopi tahiṃ natthi, tenetaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. (pari. 339);
这里的意思是:“违犯那条学处、犯了罪的人,就是已经堕落的人”,应当这样整体理解。所谓“因此称为”,是说:由于什么原因他成了非沙门、非释迦子、被排除、被切断、从教法中败亡,就因此称为。怎么称呢?称为“是波罗夷”。巴利
Ayañhettha attho – ‘‘taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamanto āpattiñca āpanno puggalo cuto hotīti sabbaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuccatīti yena kāraṇena assamaṇo hoti asakyaputtiyo paribhaṭṭho chinno parājito sāsanato, tena vuccati. Kinti? ‘‘Pārājiko hotī’’ti.
“共住”的意思是:他们一起住在这里。为了说明这一点,先说了“所谓共住”,然后又说“同一羯磨”等。
这里结合起来的解释是这样的:四种僧羯磨,因为都要由同一界内、未被剥夺资格的比丘们一起来做,所以叫“同一羯磨”。同样,五种巴帝摩卡诵,因为都要一起诵出,所以叫“同一诵”。而制定的学处,因为所有有惭耻心的人都应当平等地修学,所以叫“平等学”。
在这里,因为所有有惭耻心的人都共同参与这些羯磨等事,没有一个人被排除在外,所以把这一切合起来说“这就叫共住”。而这样的共住,与那个人并不存在,因此,那个波罗夷之人就被称为“不共住”。巴利
Saha vasanti etthāti saṃvāso, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃvāso nāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ekakamma’’ntiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saddhiṃ yojanāya vaṇṇanā – catubbidhampi saṅghakammaṃ sīmāparicchinnehi pakatattehi bhikkhūhi ekato kattabbattā ekakammaṃ nāma. Tathā pañcavidhopi pātimokkhuddeso ekato uddisitabbattā ekuddeso nāma. Paññattaṃ pana sikkhāpadaṃ sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi samaṃ sikkhitabbabhāvato samasikkhatā nāma. Ettha yasmā sabbepi lajjino etesu kammādīsu saha vasanti, na ekopi tato bahiddhā sandissati, tasmā tāni sabbānipi gahetvā ‘‘eso saṃvāso nāmā’’ti āha. So ca vuttappakāro saṃvāso tena puggalena saddhiṃ natthi, tena kāraṇena so pārājiko puggalo asaṃvāsoti vuccatīti.
56 56. 像这样,按条目顺序分别解释了已经宣说的学处之后,现在为了说明“若行淫”这句话里,是以什么样的方式被称为“行淫”,先安立“名为行淫”这个论母句,然后说“以相入相,以生殖器入生殖器”。在这里,因为并不是只有女性的相才是波罗夷事,也不是只有人类女性才是,而且金、银等所造的女性相也并不是事;所以,为了显示哪些是事、哪些不是,先以“三种女性”等方式指出那些有相、有事的有情,然后以“于人类女性的三道”等方式宣说了那些事。巴利
56. Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni yaṃ taṃ ‘‘paṭiseveyyā’’ti ettha yenākārena paṭiseveyyāti vuccati, tassākārassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭisevati nāmā’’ti idaṃ mātikāpadaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘nimittena nimittaṃ aṅgajātena aṅgajāta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā na kevalaṃ itthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu, na ca manussitthiyā eva, suvaṇṇarajatādimayānañca itthīnampi nimittaṃ vatthumeva na hoti; tasmā yaṃ yaṃ vatthu hoti, taṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tisso itthiyo’’tiādinā nayena yesaṃ nimittāni vatthūni honti, te satte vatvā ‘‘manussitthiyā tayo magge’’tiādinā nayena tāni vatthūni āha.
在这里,女性有三类、双性人有三类、黄门有三类、男性有三类,作为波罗夷事的诸相所依,共有十二种众生。其中,女性和男性是显而易见的。黄门和双性人的分类,将在《出家犍度》的注释中说明。巴利
Tattha tisso itthiyo, tayo ubhatobyañjanakā, tayo paṇḍakā, tayo purisāti pārājikavatthūnaṃ nimittānaṃ nissayā dvādasa sattā honti. Tesu itthipurisā pākaṭā eva . Paṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakabhedo pabbajjākhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ pākaṭo bhavissati.
“对女人,在三道中行淫法”这一句里,应当理解为“在女人的三道中”。一切地方都这样理解。所有这些,就是:女人的三道、非人女人的三道、畜生女人的三道,共九种;人类双性人的三道等,也是九种;人类黄门等的,各算两道,共六种;人类男性等的也一样,总共就有三十种道。在这些叫作“相”的道当中,无论在哪一处,把自己的男根哪怕只像芝麻粒那么大地插入而行淫法,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Manussitthiyā tayo magge methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassāti ettha ca manussitthiyā tīsu maggesūti attho veditabbo. Evaṃ sabbattha. Sabbe eva cete manussitthiyā tayo maggā, amanussitthiyā tayo, tiracchānagatitthiyā tayoti nava; manussaubhatobyañjanakādīnaṃ nava; manussapaṇḍakādīnaṃ dve dve katvā cha; tathā manussapurisādīnanti samatiṃsa maggā honti. Etesu nimittasaṅkhātesu yattha katthaci attano aṅgajātaṃ tilaphalamattampi pavesetvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanto pārājikaṃ āpajjati.
第一组四项的解说巴利
Paṭhamacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
57 57. 不过,正在犯戒的人,是因为以淫心才犯戒,并不是没有淫心也能犯。所以,世尊为了指出这个特征,才说“比丘生起淫心时……”等等。其中,“比丘”指行淫的比丘。“生起淫心时”是位格代替主格用,意思是“当淫心现前时”。“将生支导入粪道者”,是指把自己的生支——也就是男性器官——哪怕只有芝麻粒那么大,导入排泄粪便的那条通道。“犯波罗夷罪”的意思是,他犯下波罗夷罪;或者,“犯”指违犯的行为,“波罗夷”指波罗夷法。这个原则适用于一切情况。巴利
57. Āpajjanto pana yasmā sevanacitteneva āpajjati, na vinā tena; tasmā taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘bhikkhussa sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhite’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhikkhussāti methunasevanakassa bhikkhussa. Sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhiteti bhummatthe paccattavacanaṃ, sevanacitte paccupaṭṭhiteti attho. Vaccamaggaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassāti yena maggena vaccaṃ nikkhamati taṃ maggaṃ attano aṅgajātaṃ purisanimittaṃ tilaphalamattampi pavesentassa. Āpatti pārājikassāti āpatti pārājikā assa hotīti attho. Atha vā āpattīti āpajjanaṃ hoti. Pārājikassāti pārājikadhammassa. Esa nayo sabbattha.
58 58. 这样,先指出了仅以淫心导入者所犯的罪,现在,因为那种导入并不只是靠自己主动努力而发生,也会因他人主动努力而发生。而在那种情况下,也只有对此欢喜、具备淫心的人才有罪,不是其他人。因此,为了保护那些以信心出家、行于正道的善男子——即使是在他人主动导入时也不欢喜——世尊才说了“比丘的怨敌、人类女性……”等话。巴利
58. Evaṃ sevanacitteneva pavesentassa āpattiṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā taṃ pavesanaṃ nāma na kevalaṃ attūpakkameneva, parūpakkamenāpi hoti . Tatrāpi ca sādiyantasseva āpatti paṭisevanacittasamaṅgissa, na itarassa. Tasmā ye saddhāpabbajitā kulaputtā sammāpaṭipannakā parūpakkamena pavesanepi sati na sādiyanti, tesaṃ rakkhaṇatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthi’’ntiādimāha.
这里,“怨敌”是指希望对方受害的人。比丘本身就是怨敌,所以叫“比丘怨敌”;这是对那些不友善、有仇怨的比丘的称呼。“把人类女性带到比丘面前”是说:那些出于嫉妒、想毁掉那位比丘的怨敌,或者用财物引诱,或者借着朋友交情说“请帮我们做这件事”,然后在夜里把某个女性带到那位比丘住的地方。“以粪道将生支坐入”是说:他们紧紧抓住那位比丘的手、脚、头等部位,让他动弹不得,然后把那位比丘的生支坐入女性的粪道;意思是进行交合。巴利
Tattha paṭipakkhaṃ atthayanti icchantīti paccatthikā, bhikkhū eva paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā; visabhāgānaṃ veribhikkhūnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvāti issāpakatā taṃ bhikkhuṃ nāsetukāmā āmisena vā upalāpetvā mittasanthavavasena vā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ kiccaṃ karohī’’ti vatvā kañci manussitthiṃ rattibhāge tassa bhikkhussa vasanokāsaṃ ānetvā. Vaccamaggena aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdentīti taṃ bhikkhuṃ hatthapādasīsādīsu suggahitaṃ nipparipphandaṃ gahetvā itthiyā vaccamaggena tassa bhikkhuno aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdenti; sampayojentīti attho.
在“如果那位……”这些句子里,如果那位比丘对自己男根进入粪道内部感到欢喜、接受,就在那一刻生起淫欲心;对已经进入感到欢喜、接受,就在进入的时候生起淫欲心;对已经停住感到欢喜、接受,就在停住、泄精的时候生起淫欲心;对抽出感到欢喜、接受,就在抽出的时候生起淫欲心。这样在四种情况下都欢喜的人,不能说是“仇敌沙门对我做了这个”,他犯的就是波罗夷罪。就像对这四种情况都欢喜就犯戒一样,前一种不欢喜而后三种欢喜,或前两种不欢喜而后两种欢喜,或前三种不欢喜而后一种欢喜,也一样犯戒。但如果完全不欢喜,把进入的男根看成毒蛇口、看成火坑,就不犯戒。因此说:“对进入不欢喜……对抽出不欢喜,无犯。”世尊为了护持这样的修行人——已经开始修观、对身体和性命都不贪恋、把一切感官对象看成被十一种火燃烧着、把五种欲乐看成拿刀要杀人的凶手——同时也为了挫败怨敌的企图,才提出这“对进入不欢喜”等四项分类。巴利
So cetiādīsu so ce bhikkhu vaccamaggabbhantaraṃ attano aṅgajātassa pavesanaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti tasmiṃ khaṇe sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Paviṭṭhaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, paviṭṭhakāle sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Ṭhitaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, ṭhānappattakāle sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Uddharaṇaṃ sādiyati adhivāseti, nīharaṇakāle paṭisevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ catūsu ṭhānesu sādiyanto ‘‘mama verisamaṇehi idaṃ kata’’nti vattuṃ na labhati, pārājikāpattimeva āpajjati. Yathā ca imāni cattāri sādiyanto āpajjati; evaṃ purimaṃ ekaṃ asādiyitvā tīṇi sādiyantopi, dve asādiyitvā dve sādiyantopi, tīṇi asādiyitvā ekaṃ sādiyantopi āpajjatiyeva. Sabbaso pana asādiyanto āsīvisamukhaṃ viya aṅgārakāsuṃ viya ca paviṭṭhaṃ aṅgajātaṃ maññamāno nāpajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pavesanaṃ na sādiyati…pe… uddharaṇaṃ na sādiyati, anāpattī’’ti. Imañhi evarūpaṃ āraddhavipassakaṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi sampajjalitāni ca sabbāyatanāni ukkhittāsike viya ca vadhake pañca kāmaguṇe passantaṃ puggalaṃ rakkhanto bhagavā paccatthikānañcassa manorathavighātaṃ karonto imaṃ ‘‘pavesanaṃ na sādiyatī’’tiādikaṃ catukkaṃ nīharitvā ṭhapesīti.
二百六十九个四法组论说巴利
Ekūnasattatidvisatacatukkakathā
59-60 59-60. 像这样开示了第一组四法之后,现在,因为与比丘为敌的人把女人带来后,不只是从大便道插入,也会从小便道和口插入。而且,把女人带来时,有些人带来的是清醒的,有些是睡着的,有些是醉酒的,有些是疯癫的,有些是放逸的、心在别处、心散乱的——这是意思。有些是死了但还没被啃食的,意思是没有被狗、豺等啃食过特征部位的。有些是死了但大部分还没被啃食的;所谓大部分还没被啃食,就是她的大便道、小便道或口等特征部位大部分还没被啃食。有些是死了但大部分已被啃食的;所谓大部分已被啃食,就是她的大便道等特征部位大部分已被啃食,只有少量还没被啃食。而且,他们不只是带来人类女人,也会带来非人女人和畜生女人。也不只是带来上面所说的那种女人,还会带来双性人、黄门和男人。因此,针对这些人,为了开示其余的四法组,经文说“与比丘为敌的人带来清醒的人类女人”等等。巴利
59-60. Evaṃ paṭhamacatukkaṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā bhikkhupaccatthikā itthiṃ ānetvā na kevalaṃ vaccamaggeneva abhinisīdenti, atha kho passāvamaggenapi mukhenapi. Itthiṃ ānetvāpi ca keci jāgarantiṃ ānenti, keci suttaṃ, keci mattaṃ, keci ummattaṃ, keci pamattaṃ aññavihitaṃ vikkhittacittanti attho. Keci mataṃ akkhāyitaṃ, soṇasiṅgālādīhi akkhāyitanimittanti attho. Keci mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṃ, yebhuyyena akkhāyitā nāma yassā nimitte vaccamagge passāvamagge mukhe vā bahutaro okāso akkhāyito hoti. Keci mataṃ yebhuyyena khāyitaṃ, yebhuyyena khāyitā nāma yassā vaccamaggādike nimitte bahuṃ khāyitaṃ hoti, appaṃ akkhāyitaṃ. Na kevalañca manussitthimeva ānenti, atha kho amanussitthimpi tiracchānagatitthimpi. Na kevalañca vuttappakāraṃ itthimeva, ubhatobyañjanakampi paṇḍakampi purisampi ānenti. Tasmā tesaṃ vasena aññānipi catukkāni dassento ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ jāgaranti’’ntiādimāha.
在这里,为了让巴利原文的意思不混乱,应当知道前面所说的那些四组,数目是这样计算的:针对人类女人,按三道来算,有三组清净四组、三组清醒四组、三组睡眠四组、三组醉酒四组、三组疯狂四组、三组放逸四组、三组已死被啃食四组、三组大多数被啃食四组、三组大多数被啃食四组,一共二十七组四组。非人女人也一样,畜生女人也一样,这样在女人这一类里就有八十一组四组。双性人这一类也和女人这一类一样。至于黄门和男人这两类,按两道来算,各有五十四组四组。这样一来,全部加起来就是二百七十组四组,这些的意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
Tattha pāḷiyā asammohatthaṃ vuttacatukkāni evaṃ saṅkhyāto veditabbāni – manussitthiyā tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ vasena tīṇi suddhikacatukkāni, tīṇi jāgarantīcatukkāni, tīṇi suttacatukkāni, tīṇi mattacatukkāni, tīṇi ummattacatukkāni, tīṇi pamattacatukkāni, tīṇi mataakkhāyitacatukkāni, tīṇi yebhuyyena akkhāyitacatukkāni, tīṇi yebhuyyena khāyitacatukkānīti sattavīsati catukkāni. Tathā amanussitthiyā; tathā tiracchānagatitthiyāti itthivāre ekāsīti catukkāni. Yathā ca itthivāre evaṃ ubhatobyañjanakavāre. Paṇḍakapurisavāresu pana dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vasena catupaṇṇāsa catupaṇṇāsa honti. Evaṃ sabbānipi dvesatāni, sattati ca catukkāni honti, tāni uttānatthāniyeva.
不过,在所有情形中,关于“已死、大多数没被啃食、已被啃食”这个地方,有这样的判定:认为在铜掌岛,曾有两位同一位老师门下的持律长老——优波提舍长老和普沙提婆长老。大怖畏发生时,他们护持并保存了律藏。其中,优波提舍长老更为精通。他也有两位弟子—巴利
Sabbavāresu panettha ‘‘mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyitaṃ khāyita’’nti etasmiṃ ṭhāne ayaṃ vinicchayo – tambapaṇṇidīpe kira dve vinayadharā samānācariyakā therā ahesuṃ – upatissatthero ca, phussadevatthero ca. Te mahābhaye uppanne vinayapiṭakaṃ pariharantā rakkhiṃsu. Tesu upatissatthero byattataro. Tassāpi dve antevāsikā ahesuṃ – mahāpadumatthero ca mahāsumatthero ca. Tesu mahāsumatthero nakkhattuṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ assosi, mahāpadumatthero tena saddhiṃ navakkhattuṃ, visuñca ekakova navakkhattunti aṭṭhārasakkhattuṃ assosi; ayameva tesu byattataro . Tesu mahāsumatthero navakkhattuṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ sutvā ācariyaṃ muñcitvā aparagaṅgaṃ agamāsi. Tato mahāpadumatthero āha – ‘‘sūro vata, re, esa vinayadharo yo dharamānakaṃyeva ācariyaṃ muñcitvā aññattha vasitabbaṃ maññati. Nanu ācariye dharamāne vinayapiṭakañca aṭṭhakathā ca anekakkhattuṃ gahetvāpi na vissajjetabbaṃ, niccakālaṃ sotabbaṃ, anusaṃvaccharaṃ sajjhāyitabba’’nti.
有一次,在那些以律藏为重的比丘们所处的时代,优波提舍长老正坐着,为以大莲华长老为首的五百位弟子讲解第一波罗夷学处中的这一段。弟子们问他:“尊者,在大部分没被啃食的情况下是波罗夷,在大部分已被啃食的情况下是偷兰遮,那么一半被啃食的情况应该算什么呢?”长老说:“贤友们,诸佛制定波罗夷时,不会有所保留地制定,而是毫无保留、彻底涵盖、断绝后路,在波罗夷事上就只制定波罗夷。因为这条学处属于世间共许的过犯,不是因制定才成为过犯的。所以,如果一半被啃食的情况应该是波罗夷,正自觉者一定会制定。然而在这里看不到波罗夷的影子,只看到偷兰遮的影子。”巴利
Evaṃ vinayagarukānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kāle ekadivasaṃ upatissatthero mahāpadumattherappamukhānaṃ pañcannaṃ antevāsikasatānaṃ paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade imaṃ padesaṃ vaṇṇento nisinno hoti. Taṃ antevāsikā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘bhante, yebhuyyena akkhāyite pārājikaṃ, yebhuyyena khāyite thullaccayaṃ, upaḍḍhakkhāyite kena bhavitabba’’nti? Thero āha – ‘‘āvuso, buddhā nāma pārājikaṃ paññapentā na sāvasesaṃ katvā paññapenti, anavasesaṃyeva katvā sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvā sotaṃ chinditvā pārājikavatthusmiṃ pārājikameva paññapenti. Idañhi sikkhāpadaṃ lokavajjaṃ, na paṇṇattivajjaṃ. Tasmā yadi upaḍḍhakkhāyite pārājikaṃ bhaveyya, paññapeyya sammāsambuddho. Pārājikacchāyā panettha na dissati, thullaccayameva dissatī’’ti.
另外要明白:世尊制定“死尸上的波罗夷”时,大多把界限放在“大部分还没被啃食”的情况,是为了说明“超过这个范围就不再是波罗夷”。制定“土喇咤亚”时,大多把界限放在“大部分已被啃食”的情况,也是为了说明“超过这个范围就不再是土喇咤亚”。所谓“已被啃食、未被啃食”,只适用于死尸,不适用于活人。因为活人身上,哪怕只剩指甲盖大小的皮、肉或筋,也仍然是波罗夷。即使特征部位完全被啃掉、皮肉都没有了,但只要特征部位的形状还能辨认,还能插入,也仍然是波罗夷。如果把特征部位的形状彻底破坏,整个特征部位被切断、四周削平、拔除,那就按伤口缩小来判,是土喇咤亚。对从特征部位掉下来的肉块行淫,是恶作。至于死尸,不管整个身体已被啃食还是未被啃食,只要三道还没被啃食,对那里行淫就是波罗夷;大部分未被啃食时,是波罗夷;一半被啃食以及大部分已被啃食时,是土喇咤亚。巴利
Apica matasarīre pārājikaṃ paññapento bhagavā yebhuyyena akkhāyite ṭhapesi ‘‘tato paraṃ pārājikaṃ natthī’’ti dassetuṃ. Thullaccayaṃ paññapento yebhuyyena khāyite ṭhapesi ‘‘tato paraṃ thullaccayaṃ natthī’’ti dassetuntipi veditabbaṃ. Khāyitākhāyitañca nāmetaṃ matasarīrasmiṃyeva veditabbaṃ, na jīvamāne. Jīvamāne hi nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇepi chavimaṃse vā nhārumhi vā sati pārājikameva hoti. Yadipi nimittaṃ sabbaso khāyitaṃ chavicammaṃ natthi, nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyati, pavesanaṃ jāyati, pārājikameva. Nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ pana anavasesetvā sabbasmiṃ nimitte chinditvā samantato tacchetvā uppāṭite vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccayaṃ. Nimittato patitāya maṃsapesiyā upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Matasarīre pana yadipi sabbaṃ sarīraṃ khāyitaṃ hoti, yadipi akkhāyitaṃ, tayo pana maggā akkhāyitā, tesu upakkamantassa pārājikaṃ. Yebhuyyena akkhāyite pārājikameva. Upaḍḍhakkhāyite ca yebhuyyena khāyite ca thullaccayaṃ.
对活人的身体,在眼睛、鼻子、耳朵的孔口、膀胱口这些地方,用刀等器具割伤,或者因为淫欲把男根插进去,哪怕只插进芝麻粒那么一点点,都是偷兰遮。在身体其他部位,比如腋窝等处,是突吉罗。对已经死了但还没腐烂的尸体,在波罗夷的范围内就犯波罗夷,在偷兰遮的范围内就犯偷兰遮,在突吉罗的范围内就犯突吉罗。可是,当尸体膨胀、腐烂、发青、布满苍蝇、爬满蛆虫,从九个疮口流着脓,因为腐尸的样子让人根本没法靠近时,那就谈不上波罗夷的事,也谈不上偷兰遮的事;在这样的尸体上,不管从哪里下手,都只是突吉罗。对畜生,比如象、马、牛、驴、骆驼、水牛等,插进鼻子的,是偷兰遮;插进膀胱口的,也是偷兰遮。对一切畜生,在眼睛、耳朵、伤口等处,是突吉罗;在身体其他部位,也是突吉罗。对死了的畜生,如果尸体还没腐烂,在波罗夷的范围内就犯波罗夷,在偷兰遮的范围内就犯偷兰遮,在突吉罗的范围内就犯突吉罗。巴利
Manussānaṃ jīvamānakasarīre akkhināsakaṇṇacchiddavatthikosesu satthakādīhi katavaṇe vā methunarāgena tilaphalamattampi aṅgajātaṃ pavesentassa thullaccayameva. Avasesasarīre upakacchakādīsu dukkaṭaṃ. Mate allasarīre pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ, thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭaṃ. Yadā pana sarīraṃ uddhumātakaṃ hoti kuthitaṃ nīlamakkhikasamākiṇṇaṃ kimikulasamākulaṃ navahi vaṇamukhehi paggaḷitapubbakuṇapabhāvena upagantumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ, tadā pārājikavatthuñca thullaccayavatthuñca vijahati; tādise sarīre yattha katthaci upakkamato dukkaṭameva. Tiracchānagatānaṃ hatthi-assa-goṇa-gadrabha-oṭṭhamahiṃsādīnaṃ nāsāya thullaccayaṃ. Vatthikose thullaccayameva. Sabbesampi tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ, avasesasarīrepi dukkaṭameva. Matānaṃ allasarīre pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ, thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭaṃ.
对于腐烂的尸骸,则如前所说,一切处都是恶作。如果以身体接触的贪欲或淫欲,对活着的男子,没有插入其膀胱口,而用生殖器碰触生殖器,是恶作。如果以淫欲,对女人,没有插入而用生殖器碰触生殖器,是土喇咤亚。不过《大注》中说:“以淫欲用口碰触女人生殖器,是土喇咤亚。”在《皮革犍度》中,因为“六群比丘在阿致罗筏底河中,对渡河的母牛,抓角、抓耳、抓颈、抓尾,甚至骑上牛背,还有以染心碰触生殖器”(《大品》252)这一事缘,而笼统地说:“诸比丘,不应以染心碰触生殖器,谁碰触,犯土喇咤亚。”(《大品》252)这一切都应综合对照,使它们不相矛盾,然后来理解。怎样才不相矛盾呢?首先,《大注》所说“以淫欲用口碰触”,那里“口”指的是生殖器口。而且因为说了“以淫欲”,就应知道这里的意思正是如此。因为对女人生殖器,用普通的嘴不可能构成淫欲的行为。在《犍度》中,那些骑上牛背的人,如果是以淫欲用生殖器碰触生殖器,应知道是针对他们而说土喇咤亚。否则就应是恶作。有些人说:“在《犍度》中,也是针对用口碰触,因为业粗重而说土喇咤亚。《注》中也是取这个意思而说‘以淫欲用口碰触,是土喇咤亚’。”因此,应当好好考察,在两种判断中,取更合理的那一种。不过通达律的人称赞前一种。若以身体接触的贪欲,用普通的嘴或生殖器口碰触女人生殖器,是僧残。对雌性畜生,用生殖器口碰触其尿道,依照前面所说的方式,是土喇咤亚。若以身体接触的贪欲,是恶作。巴利
Kuthitakuṇape pana pubbe vuttanayeneva sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena vā methunarāgena vā jīvamānakapurisassa vatthikosaṃ appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, dukkaṭaṃ. Methunarāgena itthiyā appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, thullaccayaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘itthinimittaṃ methunarāgena mukhena chupati thullaccaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Cammakkhandhake ‘‘chabbaggiyā bhikkhū aciravatiyā nadiyā gāvīnaṃ tarantīnaṃ visāṇesupi gaṇhanti, kaṇṇesupi gaṇhanti, gīvāyapi gaṇhanti, cheppāyapi gaṇhanti, piṭṭhimpi abhiruhanti, rattacittāpi aṅgajātaṃ chupantī’’ti (mahāva. 252) imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā avisesena vuttaṃ – ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252). Taṃ sabbampi saṃsanditvā yathā na virujjhati tathā gahetabbaṃ. Kathañca na virujjhati? Yaṃ tāva mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘methunarāgena mukhena chupatī’’ti. Tatra kira nimittamukhaṃ mukhanti adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Methunarāgenā’’ti ca vuttattāpi ayameva tattha adhippāyoti veditabbo. Na hi itthinimitte pakatimukhena methunupakkamo hoti. Khandhakepi ye piṭṭhiṃ abhiruhantā methunarāgena aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṃ chupiṃsu, te sandhāya thullaccayaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Itarathā hi dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Keci panāhu ‘‘khandhakepi mukheneva chupanaṃ sandhāya oḷārikattā kammassa thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyampi taṃ sandhāyabhāsitaṃ gahetvāva methunarāgena mukhena chupati thullaccayanti vutta’’nti. Tasmā suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā ubhosu vinicchayesu yo yuttataro so gahetabbo. Vinayaññū pana purimaṃ pasaṃsanti. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena pana pakatimukhena vā nimittamukhena vā itthinimittaṃ chupantassa saṅghādiseso. Tiracchānagatitthiyā passāvamaggaṃ nimittamukhena chupantassa vuttanayeneva thullaccayaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena dukkaṭanti.
铺展四法的分类讨论巴利
Santhatacatukkabhedakathā
61-62 世尊这样为保护依法修行的比丘,先举出二百七十种四法,然后观察到:将来会有恶比丘,故意找借口说“这铺盖物没有属于任何人的执受,用有执受的东西去碰它,哪有什么过错?”他们因此根本无法在教法上站稳脚跟。为了说明这一点,世尊把二百七十种四法中的每一个四法,各按四种铺盖等分类拆开来讲,于是说出“比丘的冤家把女人带到比丘跟前,用大便道、小便道、口,让比丘的男根坐进去,以有盖的碰无盖的”等话。巴利
61-62. Evaṃ bhagavā paṭipannakassa bhikkhuno rakkhaṇatthaṃ sattatidvisatacatukkāni nīharitvā ‘‘idāni ye anāgate pāpabhikkhū ‘santhataṃ imaṃ na kiñci upādinnakaṃ upādinnakena phusati, ko ettha doso’ti sañcicca lesaṃ oḍḍessanti, tesaṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā eva na bhavissatī’’ti disvā tesu sattatidvisatacatukkesu ekamekaṃ catukkaṃ catūhi santhatādibhedehi bhinditvā dassento bhikkhupaccatthikā manussitthiṃ bhikkhussa santike ānetvā vaccamaggena passāvamaggena mukhena aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdenti santhatāya asanthatassātiādimāha.
在这里,“以有盖对无盖”等说法中,应当这样理解其搭配:所谓“有盖的女人”,就是她的三条道——大便道、小便道、口中——无论哪一条,用布、树叶、树皮条、皮革、铅片等任何东西缠裹起来,或者塞进去遮住。所谓“有盖的”,就是他的男根被同样的布等任何东西遮住。以有盖女人的道,让无盖比丘的男根坐入。对此,不论是有执受的触无执受的、无执受的触有执受的、无执受的触无执受的,还是有执受的触有执受的,只要进入的深度达到了所说的“进入这么多就犯波罗夷”的程度,那么在所有情况下,如果是有乐受的,在波罗夷的范围内就犯波罗夷,在偷兰遮的范围内就犯偷兰遮,在突吉罗的范围内就只犯突吉罗。如果把女人女根做成木桩状再遮盖上,触碰木桩的,犯突吉罗。如果把男人男根做成木桩状再遮盖上,把木桩插入的,犯突吉罗。如果把两者都做成木桩状再遮盖上,用木桩碰木桩的,犯突吉罗。如果在女人女根中放入竹管、芦苇节等任何东西,触碰它的下部,哪怕只进入芝麻粒那么大,也犯波罗夷。触碰上部,或者从两侧中任何一侧进入,也犯波罗夷。四面都不触碰,进入后碰到它的底部,也犯波罗夷。但如果侧面和底部都不触碰,只是悬空进入再抽出,犯突吉罗。在外面触碰木桩,也只是突吉罗。正如对女人女根所说的那样,应当知道在一切处都是这个标准。巴利
Tattha santhatāya asanthatassātiādīsu santhatāya itthiyā vaccamaggena passāvamaggena mukhena asanthatassa bhikkhussa aṅgajātaṃ abhinisīdentīti iminā nayena yojanā veditabbā. Tattha santhatā nāma yassā tīsu maggesu yo koci maggo paliveṭhetvā vā anto vā pavesetvā yena kenaci vatthena vā paṇṇena vā vākapaṭṭena vā cammena vā tipusīsādīnaṃ paṭṭena vā paṭicchanno. Santhato nāma yassa aṅgajātaṃ tesaṃyeva vatthādīnaṃ yena kenaci paṭicchannaṃ. Tattha upādinnakena vā anupādinnakaṃ ghaṭṭiyatu, anupādinnakena vā upādinnakaṃ, anupādinnakena vā anupādinnakaṃ, upādinnakena vā upādinnakaṃ, sace yattake paviṭṭhe pārājikaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ, tattakaṃ pavisati, sabbattha sādiyantassa pārājikakkhette pārājikaṃ; thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭameva hoti. Sace itthinimittaṃ khāṇuṃ katvā santhataṃ, khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace purisanimittaṃ khāṇuṃ katvā santhataṃ, khāṇuṃ pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace ubhayaṃ khāṇuṃ katvā santhataṃ, khāṇunā khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace itthinimitte veḷunaḷapabbādīnaṃ kiñci pakkhittaṃ, tassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ cepi phusanto tilaphalamattaṃ paveseti, pārājikaṃ. Uparibhāgaṃ cepi ubhosu passesu ekapassaṃ cepi phusanto paveseti, pārājikaṃ. Cattāripi passāni aphusanto pavesetvā tassa talaṃ cepi phusati, pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana passesu vā tale vā aphusanto ākāsagatameva katvā pavesetvā nīharati, dukkaṭaṃ. Bahiddhā khāṇuke phusati dukkaṭameva. Yathā ca itthinimitte vuttaṃ, evaṃ sabbattha lakkhaṇaṃ veditabbanti.
比丘的敌对者四种分类的解释巴利
Bhikkhupaccatthikacatukkabhedavaṇṇanā
63-64 讲完有盖物的四种分类之后,现在要说:因为不只是把人类女人等带到比丘面前,也会把比丘带到她们面前。所以,为了显示这种分类,又以“比丘的仇敌把比丘带到人类女人面前”等方式,把所有这些四法分类再次提取出来加以显示。其中,判断的方法应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
63-64. Evaṃ santhatacatukkabhedaṃ vatvā idāni yasmā na kevalaṃ manussitthiādike bhikkhussa eva santike ānenti. Atha kho bhikkhumpi tāsaṃ santike ānenti, tasmā tappabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhupaccatthikā bhikkhuṃ manussitthiyā santike’’ti ādinā nayena sabbāni tāni catukkāni punapi nīharitvā dassesi. Tesu vinicchayo vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
以比丘的敌对者为角度所作的四类分别的解释,到此结束。巴利
Bhikkhupaccatthikavasena catukkabhedavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
关于国王的仇敌等四种类别的分别论述巴利
Rājapaccatthikādicatukkabhedakathā
65 65. 不过,并不是只有比丘的敌人会这样做,国王的敌人等也会这样做。因此,为了说明那种分类,就说了“国王的敌人”等。其中,国王本身就是敌人,所以叫“国王的敌人”。要知道,他们无论是亲自带来,还是命令别人带来,都是带来。盗贼本身就是敌人,所以叫“盗贼的敌人”。所谓“恶徒”,是指沉迷于淫欲之乐的城市流氓男子,或者好色之徒、好酒之徒等;恶徒本身就是敌人,所以叫“恶徒的敌人”。所谓“香”,指的是心脏;拔取心脏的,就叫“取香者”;取香者本身就是敌人,所以叫“取香者的敌人”。据说这些人不靠农耕、经商等谋生,而是通过拦路抢劫、屠杀村庄等来养活妻儿。他们为了事业成功,向天神祈求,为了给天神献祭,就拔取人的心脏。可是人什么时候都很难找到,而在林中居住的比丘却很容易找到。他们抓住持戒的比丘,心想“杀害持戒者是很重的罪”,为了毁掉他的戒行,就把女人等带来他那里,或者把他带到那里去。这就是这里的差别。其余部分应按照前面所说的方法来理解。在这四种情况中,四种分类都应按照比丘的敌人那一部分所说的方法来理解。不过在圣典中,这些是简要说的。巴利
65. Yasmā pana na bhikkhupaccatthikā eva evaṃ karonti, rājapaccatthikādayopi karonti. Tasmā tampi pabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘rājapaccatthikā’’tiādimāha. Tattha rājāno eva paccatthikā rājapaccatthikā. Te ca sayaṃ ānentāpi aññehi āṇāpentāpi ānentiyevāti veditabbā. Corā eva paccatthikā corapaccatthikā. Dhuttāti methunupasaṃhitakhiḍḍāpasutā nāgarikakerāṭiyapurisā, itthidhuttasurādhuttādayo vā; dhuttā eva paccatthikā dhuttapaccatthikā. Gandhanti hadayaṃ vuccati, taṃ uppāṭentīti uppalagandhā, uppalagandhā eva paccatthikā uppalagandhapaccatthikā. Ete kira na kasivaṇijjādīhi jīvanti, panthaghātagāmaghātādīni katvā puttadāraṃ posenti. Te kammasiddhiṃ patthayamānā devatānaṃ āyācetvā tāsaṃ balikammatthaṃ manussānaṃ hadayaṃ uppāṭenti. Sabbakāle ca manussā dullabhā. Bhikkhū pana araññe viharantā sulabhā honti. Te sīlavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā ‘‘sīlavato vadho nāma bhāriyo hotī’’ti maññamānā tassa sīlavināsanatthaṃ manussitthiādike vā ānenti; taṃ vā tattha nenti. Ayamettha viseso. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Bhikkhupaccatthikavāre vuttanayeneva ca imesu catūsupi vāresu catukkāni veditabbāni. Pāḷiyaṃ pana saṃkhittena vuttāni.
犯与不犯分别的解说巴利
Āpattānāpattivāravaṇṇanā
66 现在,对于前面所说的“与女人在三道中行淫法”等,为了避免混淆,这里说“以道入道”等。其中,“以道入道”是指用女人的三道中的某一道,把自己的生殖器插入;或者当两道已经破裂连通时,用尿道插入粪道,或者用粪道插入尿道。“以道入非道”是指从尿道等道插入后,从它旁边的伤口抽出来。“以非道入道”是指从道旁边的伤口插入,然后从道抽出来。“以非道入非道”是指当两个伤口已经破裂连通时,从一个伤口插入,从另一个伤口抽出来。按照这部经的次第,在一切伤口的情况下,概要来说,应当知道这是偷兰遮。巴利
66. Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘manussitthiyā tayo magge methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevantassā’’tiādi, ettha asammohatthaṃ ‘‘maggena magga’’ntiādimāha. Tattha maggena magganti itthiyā tīsu maggesu aññatarena maggena attano aṅgajātaṃ paveseti atha vā sambhinnesu dvīsu maggesu passāvamaggena vaccamaggaṃ vaccamaggena vā passāvamaggaṃ paveseti. Maggena amagganti passāvādimaggena pavesetvā tassa sāmantā vaṇena nīharati. Amaggena magganti maggasāmantena vaṇena pavesetvā maggena nīharati. Amaggena amagganti dvīsu sambhinnavaṇesu ekena vaṇena pavesetvā dutiyena nīharati. Imassa suttassa anulomavasena sabbattha vaṇasaṅkhepe thullaccayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
现在,对于后面将要说的“不知者、不欢喜者无犯”,为了避免混淆,这里说了“比丘对熟睡的比丘”等话。这里的用意是:醒来后如果生起欢喜心,那么即使他说“他在我熟睡时对我做了非礼的事,我不知情”,也脱不了罪。两者都应当灭摈,也就是说两个人都要以灭摈的方式摈出。其中,侵犯者不需要自己承认;被侵犯者则要先询问,承认之后才灭摈。如果不欢喜,就不应灭摈。这个规则也适用于沙弥品。巴利
Idāni yaṃ parato vakkhati ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassā’’ti, tattha asammohatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu suttabhikkhumhī’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – yo paṭibuddho sādiyati so ‘‘suttamhi mayi eso vippaṭipajji, nāhaṃ jānāmī’’ti na muccati. Ubho nāsetabbāti cettha dvepi liṅganāsanena nāsetabbā. Tatra dūsakassa paṭiññākaraṇaṃ natthi, dūsito pucchitvā paṭiññāya nāsetabbo. Sace na sādiyati, na nāsetabbo. Esa nayo sāmaṇeravārepi.
像这样,在各处说明了犯戒和无犯之后,现在专门说明无犯的情况,所以说“不知者无犯”等。其中,所谓“不知者”,是指陷入深睡、完全不知道别人对自己做了什么的人,就像在毗舍离大林中白天休息的比丘那样。对这样的人无犯。这也是经中说过的:“世尊,我不知道。”“比丘,不知者无犯。”所谓“不欢喜者”,是指虽然知道但不喜欢、不接受的人,就像当场立刻起身的比丘那样。这也是经中说过的:“世尊,我不欢喜。”“比丘,不欢喜者无犯。”巴利
Evaṃ tattha tattha taṃ taṃ āpattiñca anāpattiñca dassetvā idāni anāpattimeva dassento ‘‘anāpatti ajānantassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ajānanto nāma yo mahāniddaṃ okkanto parena kataṃ upakkamampi na jānāti vesāliyaṃ mahāvane divāvihāragato bhikkhu viya. Evarūpassa anāpatti. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘‘nāhaṃ bhagavā jānāmī’ti; ‘anāpatti, bhikkhu, ajānantassā’’’ti (pārā. 75). Asādiyanto nāma yo jānitvāpi na sādiyati, tattheva sahasā vuṭṭhitabhikkhu viya. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘‘nāhaṃ bhagavā sādiyi’nti. ‘Anāpatti, bhikkhu, asādiyantassā’’ti.
所谓疯人,就是因胆汁而发疯的人。胆汁有两种:固定胆汁和非固定胆汁。其中,非固定胆汁像血液一样遍布全身,当它失调时,众生就会出现瘙痒、疥疮、身体颤抖等症状,这些可以通过医药治疗来平息。而固定胆汁则位于胆囊中,当它失调时,众生就会发疯,产生颠倒的认知,抛弃惭愧心,做出不合宜的行为。即使践踏了轻戒或重戒,他们也毫无知觉;医药治疗也治不好。对这样的疯人,不算犯戒。巴利
Ummattako nāma pittummattako. Duvidhañhi pittaṃ – baddhapittaṃ, abaddhapittañcāti. Tattha abaddhapittaṃ lohitaṃ viya sabbaṅgagataṃ, tamhi kupite sattānaṃ kaṇḍukacchusarīrakampādīni honti. Tāni bhesajjakiriyāya vūpasamanti. Baddhapittaṃ pana pittakosake ṭhitaṃ. Tamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti vipallatthasaññā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā asāruppācāraṃ caranti. Lahukagarukāni sikkhāpadāni maddantāpi na jānanti. Bhesajjakiriyāyapi atekicchā honti. Evarūpassa ummattakassa anāpatti.
所谓“心散乱者”,是指心放逸、被夜叉弄得发疯的人。据说,夜叉会显现恐怖的所缘,或者把手从嘴巴伸进去,按压心脏的物质,让众生心散乱、产生颠倒的认知。对这样的心散乱者,无犯。不过,这两者有这样的差别:因胆汁而发疯的人,一直处于疯狂状态,得不到正常的认知;被夜叉弄得发疯的人,则时不时能恢复正常的认知。但在这里,不管是因胆汁而发疯,还是被夜叉弄得发疯,只要完全失念、什么都不知道,把火、金子、粪便、檀香都看成一样而行事,对这样的人无犯。但如果时不时恢复认知、知道自己在做什么还去做,那就有犯。巴利
Khittacitto nāma vissaṭṭhacitto yakkhummattako vuccati. Yakkhā kira bheravāni vā ārammaṇāni dassetvā mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetvā hadayarūpaṃ vā maddantā satte vikkhittacitte vipallatthasaññe karonti. Evarūpassa khittacittassa anāpatti. Tesaṃ pana ubhinnaṃ ayaṃ viseso – pittummattako niccameva ummattako hoti, pakatisaññaṃ na labhati. Yakkhummattako antarantarā pakatisaññaṃ paṭilabhatīti. Idha pana pittummattako vā hotu yakkhummattako vā, yo sabbaso muṭṭhassati kiñci na jānāti, aggimpi suvaṇṇampi gūthampi candanampi ekasadisaṃ maddantova vicarati, evarūpassa anāpatti. Antarantarā saññaṃ paṭilabhitvā ñatvā karontassa pana āpattiyeva.
所谓“受痛苦逼迫者”,是指被极强烈的苦受折磨,以至于什么都不知道的人。对这样的人,无犯。巴利
Vedanāṭṭo nāma yo adhimattāya dukkhavedanāya āturo kiñci na jānāti, evarūpassa anāpatti.
所谓“最初造作者”,是指在每一种行为中最先做的那个人。但在这里,苏定长老就是最初造作者,所以他没有犯戒。其余的人,比如犯母猴戒的比丘、跋耆子比丘等人,则确实有犯。巴利
Ādikammiko nāma yo tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kamme ādibhūto. Idha pana sudinnatthero ādikammiko, tassa anāpatti. Avasesānaṃ makkaṭīsamaṇavajjiputtakādīnaṃ āpattiyevāti.
不过,在这个学处里,为了精通它,应当了解这些杂项内容:巴利
Imasmiṃ pana sikkhāpade kosallatthaṃ idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃveditabbaṃ –
生起与唯作,还有想与有心;
世间罪业、业,以及善与受。巴利
‘‘Samuṭṭhānañca kiriyā, atho saññā sacittakaṃ; Lokavajjañca kammañca, kusalaṃ vedanāya cā’’ti.
在这里,“生起”是指从总摄一切的角度说的六种学处生起。这些会在《附随》中说明。简略地说,所谓学处——有六种生起,有四种生起,有三种生起,有咖提那生起,有羊毛生起,有弃舍责任等生起。巴利
Tattha ‘‘samuṭṭhāna’’nti sabbasaṅgāhakavasena cha sikkhāpadasamuṭṭhānāni. Tāni parivāre āvi bhavissanti. Samāsato pana sikkhāpadaṃ nāma – atthi chasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthi dhuranikkhepādisamuṭṭhānanti.
在这里,有些是依造作而生起,有些是依非造作而生起,有些是依造作与非造作而生起;有些则可能依造作而生起,也可能依非造作而生起;有些则可能依造作而生起,也可能依造作与非造作而生起。巴利
Tatrāpi kiñci kiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci akiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci siyā kiriyato, siyā akiriyato samuṭṭhāti, kiñci siyā kiriyato siyā kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti.
在这里也有想解脱,也有非想解脱。其中,凡是能获得心支的,就是想解脱;另一种则是非想解脱。巴利
Tatrāpi atthi saññāvimokkhaṃ, atthi nosaññāvimokkhaṃ. Tattha yaṃ cittaṅgaṃ labhatiyeva, taṃ saññāvimokkhaṃ; itaraṃ nosaññāvimokkhaṃ.
另外,有些是有心的,有些是无心的。凡是与心一起生起的,就是有心的;凡是不依靠心也能生起的,就是无心的。这一切又分为两种:世间罪和施设罪。它们的特征前面已经说过了。巴利
Puna atthi sacittakaṃ, atthi acittakaṃ. Yaṃ saheva cittena āpajjati, taṃ sacittakaṃ; yaṃ vināpi cittena āpajjati, taṃ acittakaṃ . Taṃ sabbampi lokavajjaṃ paṇṇattivajjanti duvidhaṃ. Tesaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vuttameva.
从业、善和受的角度来看,这里也有学处属于身业,也有属于语业的。其中应当知道:通过身门犯的,是身业;通过语门犯的,是语业。还有些学处是善的,有些是不善的,有些是无记的。能生起犯戒的心一共有三十二种——八种欲界善心、十二种不善心、十种欲界唯作心,以及属于善和唯作的两种神通心。其中,以善心犯的,就是善;以其余那些心犯的,就是其余。还有些学处具备三种受,有些具备两种受,有些具备一种受。其中,犯戒时带着三种受中某一种受而犯的,是具备三种受;犯戒时带着乐受或舍受而犯的,是具备两种受;犯戒时只带着苦受而犯的,应当知道是具备一种受。就是这样。巴利
Kammakusalavedanāvasenāpi cettha atthi sikkhāpadaṃ kāyakammaṃ, atthi vacīkammaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kāyadvārikaṃ, taṃ kāyakammaṃ; yaṃ vacīdvārikaṃ, taṃ vacīkammanti veditabbaṃ. Atthi pana sikkhāpadaṃ kusalaṃ, atthi akusalaṃ, atthi abyākataṃ. Dvattiṃseva hi āpattisamauṭṭhāpakacittāni – aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalāni, dvādasa akusalāni, dasa kāmāvacarakiriyacittāni, kusalato ca kiriyato ca dve abhiññācittānīti. Tesu yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjati, taṃ kusalaṃ; itarehi itaraṃ. Atthi ca sikkhāpadaṃ tivedanaṃ, atthi dvivedanaṃ, atthi ekavedanaṃ. Tattha yaṃ āpajjanto tīsu vedanāsu aññataravedanāsamaṅgī hutvā āpajjati, taṃ tivedanaṃ; yaṃ āpajjanto sukhasamaṅgī vā upekkhāsamaṅgī vā āpajjati, taṃ dvivedanaṃ; yaṃ āpajjanto dukkhavedanāsamaṅgīyeva āpajjati, taṃ ekavedananti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ –
生起、唯作、想,以及有心。
世间罪、业、善,以及受。巴利
‘‘Samuṭṭhānañca kiriyā, atho saññā sacittakaṃ; Lokavajjañca kammañca, kusalaṃ vedanāya cā’’ti.
了解了这些杂项之后,关于它们的生起等各方面,这条学处从生起来说是一种生起;从支分来说则是两种生起,由身和心而生起。它也是作业生起,因为只有在正在造作的时候才犯这条戒。由于没有与淫欲相应的欲想而得以脱离,所以是想解脱。“不知者、不乐者无犯”——这是已经说过的。只有以淫欲心才犯它,不是离开心而犯,所以是有心。只有由贪欲才应当犯,所以是世间罪。只从身门生起,所以是身业。不过在这里心只是支分,不能依据心而成立业性。由贪心而应当犯,所以是不善心。犯它的时候或者具备乐受,或者具备舍受,因此应当知道是两种受。这一切在犯戒中都适用。然而依照学处的标题,一切注释书中的解说都已载入,所以才这样说。巴利
Imaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ viditvā tesu samuṭṭhānādīsu idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samuṭṭhānato ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Aṅgavasena dukasamuṭṭhānaṃ, kāyacittato samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyasamuṭṭhānañca karontoyeva hi etaṃ āpajjati. Methunapaṭisaṃyuttāya kāmasaññāya abhāvena muccanato saññāvimokkhaṃ. ‘‘Anāpatti ajānantassa asādiyantassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Methunacitteneva naṃ āpajjati, na vinā cittenāti sacittakaṃ. Rāgavaseneva āpajjitabbato lokavajjaṃ. Kāyadvāreneva samuṭṭhānato kāyakammaṃ. Cittaṃ panettha aṅgamattaṃ hoti, na tassa vasena kammabhāvo labbhati. Lobhacittena āpajjitabbato akusalacittaṃ. Sukhasamaṅgī vā upekkhāsamaṅgī vā taṃ āpajjatīti dvivedananti veditabbaṃ. Sabbañcetaṃ āpattiyaṃ yujjati. Sikkhāpadasīsena pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsudesanā ārūḷhā, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
制伏事注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
“猴子、跋耆子……中间省略……老年出家者、鹿”——这是什么?这些是世尊亲自裁断的各个制伏事的摄颂。那些制伏事,是结集法的长老们为了让持律者容易学习而安立的。而事偈,则是优波离长老在佛陀还在世时就立下的,目的是让未来的持律者依据这个特征在律中作出裁断。所以在这里,应当好好把握所说的特征,据此裁断第一学处。第二学处等,则依据制伏事中所说的特征来裁断。因为制伏事对持律者来说,就像贝壳对工匠那样,是隐藏的样板。巴利
Makkaṭīvajjiputtā ca…pe… vuḍḍhapabbajito migoti idaṃ kiṃ? Imā vinītavatthūnaṃ bhagavatā sayaṃ vinicchitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ uddānagāthā nāma. Tāni vatthūni ‘‘sukhaṃ vinayadharā uggaṇhissantī’’ti dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitāni. Vatthugāthā pana dharamāneyeva bhagavati upālittherena ṭhapitā ‘‘iminā lakkhaṇena āyatiṃ vinayadharā vinayaṃ vinicchinissantī’’ti. Tasmā ettha vuttalakkhaṇaṃ sādhukaṃ sallakkhetvā paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ vinicchinitabbaṃ. Dutiyādīnañca vinītavatthūsu vuttalakkhaṇena dutiyādīni. Vinītavatthūni hi sippikānaṃ paṭicchannakarūpāni viya vinayadharānaṃ paṭicchannakavatthūni hontīti.
67 67. 其中,前两件事的含义在“随制”部分已经说过。第三件事中,“以在家相”是指以在家人的样子,穿着白衣。第四件事没有什么可说的。从这之后的七件事中,“茅衣”是用茅草编结而成的衣。“树皮衣”是指苦行者的树皮衣。“木板衣”是把木板缝成衣的形状做成的衣。“发毯”是用头发搓成线织成的毯。“尾毛毯”是用牦牛尾毛织成的毯。“枭羽衣”是用猫头鹰的羽毛做成的下衣。“兽皮”是带毛带蹄的鹿皮。第十二件事中,“贪染”是指以身体接触而产生的贪爱,并因此染着。巴利
67. Tattha purimāni dve vatthūni anupaññattiyaṃyeva vuttatthāni. Tatiye vatthumhi gihiliṅgenāti gihivesena odātavattho hutvā. Catutthe natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ. Tato paresu sattasu vatthūsu kusacīranti kuse ganthetvā katacīraṃ. Vākacīraṃ nāma tāpasānaṃ vakkalaṃ. Phalakacīraṃ nāma phalakasaṇṭhānāni phalakāni sibbitvā katacīraṃ. Kesakambaloti kesehi tante vāyitvā katakambalo. Vālakambaloti camaravālehi vāyitvā katakambalo. Ulūkapakkhikanti ulūkasakuṇassa pakkhehi katanivāsanaṃ. Ajinakkhipanti salomaṃ sakhuraṃ ajinamigacammaṃ. Dvādasame vatthumhi sārattoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena sāratto; taṃ rāgaṃ ñatvā bhagavā ‘‘āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti āha.
68 第十三事中,“莲华色”是指那位长老尼,她是舍卫城一位富豪的女儿,在十万劫前就已圆满誓愿。她天生肤色极其好看,呈青莲花色,而内在因为没有烦恼热恼,所以更加光彩照人。她就是因为那肤色的美妙,得到了“莲华色”这个名字。“心被系缚”是指从在家时起就心生爱染;据说他是她的亲戚童子。“那时”是一个表示紧接着的接续词,意思是就在她坐在床榻上之后立刻。因为白天从外面回来、关上门坐下的人,起初会有一片黑暗。他就在那片黑暗还没有从她那里消失的时候,做了这件事,这就是其含义。“玷污”就是侵犯。然而长老尼并无过失,她提起自己的沙门想,不怀悦纳地坐着,对于以非正法意图的触碰,就像一堆火、一根石柱、一段坚硬的木桩。他满足了自己的欲愿后离去。就在他离开那位长老尼视线范围的时候,这大地虽然能承载须弥山,却仿佛无法承受那个恶人仅一臂长的身躯,裂开而现出缝隙。他刹那之间便成了无间地狱火焰的薪柴。世尊听闻此事后说:“诸比丘,不怀悦纳者无罪”,并针对长老尼在《法句经》中说了这首偈——巴利
68. Terasame vatthumhi uppalavaṇṇāti sā therī sāvatthiyaṃ seṭṭhidhītā satasahassakappe abhinīhārasampannā. Tassā pakatiyāpi atidassanīyā nīluppalavaṇṇā kāyacchavi, abbhantare pana kilesasantāpassa abhāvena ativiya virocati. Sā tāyeva vaṇṇapokkharatāya ‘‘uppalavaṇṇā’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Paṭibaddhacittoti gihikālato paṭṭhāya rattacitto; so kira tassā ñātidārako hoti. Atha khoti anantaratthe nipāto; mañcake nisinnānantaramevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Divā bāhirato āgantvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnānañhi paṭhamaṃ andhakāraṃ hoti. So yāvassā taṃ andhakāraṃ na nassati, tāvadeva evamakāsīti attho. Dūsesīti padhaṃsesi. Therī pana anavajjā attano samaṇasaññaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā asādiyantī nisīdi asaddhammādhippāyena parāmaṭṭhā aggikkhandha-silāthambha-khadirasārakhāṇukā viya. Sopi attano manorathaṃ pūretvā gato. Tassā theriyā dassanapathaṃ vijahantasseva ayaṃ mahāpathavī sinerupabbataṃ dhāretuṃ samatthāpi taṃ pāpapurisaṃ byāmamattakaḷevaraṃ dhāretuṃ asakkontī viya bhijjitvā vivaramadāsi. So taṅkhaṇaññeva avīcijālānaṃ indhanabhāvaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā taṃ sutvā ‘‘anāpatti, bhikkhave, asādiyantiyā’’ti vatvā theriṃ sandhāya dhammapade imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
就像水珠不沾在莲叶上,就像芥子不落在锥尖上;
对诸欲不沾染的人,我称他为婆罗门。巴利
‘‘Vāri pokkharapatteva, āraggeriva sāsapo; Yo na limpati kāmesu, tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇa’’nti. (dha. pa. 401);
69 在第十四个事例中,“女性相显现”的意思是:有人在夜里入睡时,原本的男性身形——胡须、牙齿等一切特征——全都消失,女性身形随之出现。所谓“同一位戒师、同一次具足戒”,是说:我允许他仍以先前所受的戒师为戒师,仍以先前所受的具足戒为具足戒。不必再另请戒师,也不必再受一次具足戒,这就是这段话的意思。所谓“同样的戒腊”,是说:从比丘受具足戒那时起,一直到计算戒腊为止,我允许就以那个戒腊计算。不必从这时起重新计算戒腊,这就是这段话的意思。所谓“与比丘尼共处”,是说:我允许他与比丘尼们交往、共住、相伴,这就是这段话的意思。这里要表达的是:她已经不适合住在比丘众中间了,应当前往比丘尼的住处,和比丘尼们一起住。所谓“那些比丘与比丘尼共通的犯行”,是指那些需要对人说罪或需要出罪的犯行,是比丘和比丘尼共通的。对于这些犯行,“应在比丘尼面前出罪”,意思是:对所有这些犯行,都应先由比丘尼们作完律仪程序,然后我允许她在比丘尼面前出罪。所谓“于那些犯行无犯”,是指那些比丘与比丘尼不共通的犯行,比如故意出精之类,对这些犯行无犯。因为性别转变,那些犯行就已经出罪了。即使后来原本的性别再次出现,他对那些犯行仍然是无犯的。以上是这里依律文所作的判定。巴利
69. Cuddasame vatthumhi itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhūtanti rattibhāge niddaṃ okkantassa purisasaṇṭhānaṃ massudāṭhikādi sabbaṃ antarahitaṃ itthisaṇṭhānaṃ uppannaṃ. Tameva upajjhaṃ tameva upasampadanti pubbe gahitaupajjhāyameva pubbe kataupasampadameva anujānāmi. Puna upajjhā na gahetabbā; upasampadā na kātabbāti attho. Tāniyevavassānīti bhikkhuupasampadato pabhuti yāva vassagaṇanā, taṃyeva vassagaṇanaṃ anujānāmi. Na ito paṭṭhāya vassagaṇanā kātabbāti attho. Bhikkhunīhi saṅgamitunti bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ saṅgamituṃ saṅgantuṃ samaṅgī bhavituṃ anujānāmīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – appatirūpaṃ dānissā bhikkhūnaṃ majjhe vasituṃ, bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ vasatūti. Yā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi sādhāraṇāti yā desanāgāminiyo vā vuṭṭhānagāminiyo vā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi saddhiṃ sādhāraṇā. Tā āpattiyo bhikkhunīnaṃ santike vuṭṭhātunti tā sabbāpi bhikkhunīhi kātabbaṃ vinayakammaṃ katvā bhikkhunīnaṃ santike vuṭṭhātuṃ anujānāmīti attho. Tāhi āpattīhi anāpattīti yā pana bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇā sukkavissaṭṭhi-ādikā āpattiyo, tāhi anāpatti. Liṅgaparivattanena tā āpattiyo vuṭṭhitāva honti. Puna pakatiliṅge uppannepi tāhi āpattīhi tassa anāpattiyevāti ayaṃ tāvettha pāḷivinicchayo.
不过,这是律文之外对性别转变的判定:在这两种性别特征当中,男性特征更胜,女性特征较劣。因此,男性特征会被强力的不善业所灭除,女性特征则会因微弱的善业而留存。而女性特征消失时,是被微弱的不善业所灭除;男性特征留存时,则是因强力的善业而留存。如此,两者都因不善业而消失,因善业而获得。巴利
Ayaṃ pana pāḷimutto okkantikavinicchayo – imesu tāva dvīsu liṅgesu purisaliṅgaṃ uttamaṃ, itthiliṅgaṃ hīnaṃ; tasmā purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakusalena antaradhāyati. Itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalakusalena patiṭṭhāti. Itthiliṅgaṃ pana antaradhāyantaṃ dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyati. Purisaliṅgaṃ balavakusalena patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ubhayampi akusalena antaradhāyati, kusalena paṭilabbhati.
在这种情况下,如果两位比丘一起诵经或讨论法义,然后在同一个房间里躺下入睡,其中一人出现了女性特征,那么两人都犯共宿罪。如果他醒来后看到自己发生了这种变化,心里痛苦、郁闷,就在夜里告诉另一位比丘,另一位应当安慰他说:“算了,别担心。这是轮回的过患。正自觉者已经开了门,不管是比丘还是比丘尼,法门没有关闭,通往天界的路没有障碍。”安慰之后,应当这样对他说:“你应该去比丘尼住处。你有没有认识的比丘尼?”如果他有这样的比丘尼,就说有;如果没有,就说没有。然后应当对那位比丘说:“请你照顾我;现在先带我去比丘尼住处。”那位比丘应当带上他,去他所认识的比丘尼那里,或者去自己认识的比丘尼那里。去的时候不应该一个人去,要和四五位比丘一起,带上火把和手杖,把原先的安排处理好,说“我们去某个地方”,然后出发。如果寺院在村外很远的地方,途中因为经过别的村子、渡河、夜间离开住处、脱离僧团等,都不算犯戒。到了比丘尼住处后,应当对那些比丘尼说:“你们认识某位比丘吗?”她们说:“认识,尊者。”就说:“他出现了女性特征,请你们照顾他。”如果她们说:“好的,尊者,现在我们也诵经、听法,你们回去吧。”然后给予照顾,而且她们是令人满意、善于照顾、有惭耻心的,那就不能惹恼她们再到别处去。如果去了,就摆脱不了经过别的村子、渡河、夜间离开住处、脱离僧团等罪。但如果她们虽然有惭耻心,却不善于照顾,那就可以到别处去。即使她们没有惭耻心,但愿意照顾,也可以舍弃她们到别处去。如果她们既有惭耻心又善于照顾,但不是亲戚,而在附近的村子里另有亲戚能照顾他,据说也可以去她们那里。去了之后,如果他在比丘身份时是依止而住的,就应该在合适的比丘尼面前重新受依止。如果论母或律已经学得很熟、学得很好,就没有再学的理由。如果他在比丘身份时是僧团中的常随众,那就在她面前已受具足戒、善受具足戒。否则应当在别人面前受依止。以前依止那位而住的人,也应当在别人面前受依止。即使是已满戒腊的沙弥,也应当在别人面前重新受戒和尚。巴利
Tattha sace dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ekato sajjhāyaṃ vā dhammasākacchaṃ vā katvā ekāgāre nipajjitvā niddaṃ okkantānaṃ ekassa itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhavati, ubhinnampi sahaseyyāpatti hoti. So ce paṭibujjhitvā attano taṃ vippakāraṃ disvā dukkhī dummano rattibhāgeyeva itarassa āroceyya, tena samassāsetabbo – ‘‘hotu, mā cintayittha. Vaṭṭasseveso doso. Sammāsambuddhena dvāraṃ dinnaṃ, bhikkhu vā hotu bhikkhunī vā, anāvaṭo dhammo avārito saggamaggo’’ti. Samassāsetvā ca evaṃ vattabbaṃ – ‘‘tumhehi bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Atthi vo kāci sandiṭṭhā bhikkhuniyo’’ti. Sacassā honti tādisā bhikkhuniyo atthīti, no ce honti natthīti vatvā so bhikkhu vattabbo – ‘‘mama saṅgahaṃ karotha; idāni maṃ paṭhamaṃ bhikkhunupassayaṃ nethā’’ti. Tena bhikkhunā taṃ gahetvā tassā vā sandiṭṭhānaṃ attano vā sandiṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ santikaṃ gantabbaṃ. Gacchantena ca na ekakena gantabbaṃ. Catūhi pañcahi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ jotikañca kattaradaṇḍañca gahetvā saṃvidahanaṃ parimocetvā ‘‘mayaṃ asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gacchāmā’’ti gantabbaṃ. Sace bahigāme dūre vihāro hoti, antarāmagge gāmantara-nadīpāra-rattivippavāsa-gaṇaohīyanāpattīhi anāpatti. Bhikkhunupassayaṃ gantvā tā bhikkhuniyo vattabbā – ‘‘asukaṃ nāma bhikkhuṃ jānāthā’’ti? ‘‘Āma, ayyā’’ti. ‘‘Tassa itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, saṅgahaṃ dānissa karothā’’ti. Tā ce ‘‘sādhu, ayyā, idāni mayampi sajjhāyissāma, dhammaṃ sossāma, gacchatha tumhe’’ti vatvā saṅgahaṃ karonti, ārādhikā ca honti saṅgāhikā lajjiniyo, tā kopetvā aññattha na gantabbaṃ. Gacchati ce, gāmantara-nadīpāra-rattivippavāsa-gaṇaohīyanāpattīhi na muccati. Sace pana lajjiniyo honti, na saṅgāhikāyo; aññattha gantuṃ labbhati. Sacepi alajjiniyo honti, saṅgahaṃ pana karonti; tāpi pariccajitvā aññattha gantuṃ labbhati. Sace lajjiniyo ca saṅgāhikā ca, ñātikā na honti, āsannagāme pana aññā ñātikāyo honti paṭijagganikā, tāsampi santikaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Gantvā sace bhikkhubhāvepi nissayapaṭipanno, patirūpāya bhikkhuniyā santike nissayo gahetabbo. Mātikā vā vinayo vā uggahito suggahito, puna uggaṇhanakāraṇaṃ natthi. Sace bhikkhubhāve parisāvacaro, tassa santikeyeva upasampannā sūpasampannā. Aññassa santike nissayo gahetabbo. Pubbe taṃ nissāya vasantehipi aññassa santikeyeva nissayo gahetabbo. Paripuṇṇavassasāmaṇerenāpi aññassa santikeyeva upajjhā gahetabbā.
他在比丘身份时所决意的三衣和钵,那些决意就失效了,需要重新决意。覆肩衣和浴衣应当受持。如果有多余的衣或多出来的钵,经过戒律程序处理后存放着,那些戒律程序全部失效,需要重新办理。已受持的油、蜂蜜、糖浆等,受持也失效了。如果在受持后的第七天性别特征发生转变,重新受持后七天内仍然可以使用。不过,在比丘时期受持的属于别的比丘的东西,那个受持不失效。两人共有而没有分配存放的,由保持原状的人保管。已经分配、专属于这个人的,那个受持就失效了。这在《附随》中也有说到——巴利
Yaṃ panassa bhikkhubhāve adhiṭṭhitaṃ ticīvarañca patto ca, taṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahati, puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Saṅkaccikā ca udakasāṭikā ca gahetabbā. Yaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ vā atirekapatto vā vinayakammaṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, taṃ sabbampi vinayakammaṃ vijahati, puna kātabbaṃ. Paṭiggahitatelamadhuphāṇitādīnipi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahanti. Sace paṭiggahaṇato sattame divase liṅgaṃ parivattati, puna paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana bhikkhukāle aññassa bhikkhuno santakaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ, taṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahati. Yaṃ ubhinnaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ avibhajitvā ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ pakatatto rakkhati. Yaṃ pana vibhattaṃ etasseva santakaṃ, taṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Vuttampi cetaṃ parivāre –
油、蜂蜜、糖浆,还有酥油;
自己接过来之后,就先放好;
在七日未过之时;
若有因缘而受用时,就犯戒。
这些问题是由善巧者们思考出来的。巴利
‘‘Telaṃ madhuṃ phāṇitañcāpi sappiṃ; Sāmaṃ gahetvāna nikkhipeyya; Avītivatte sattāhe; Sati paccaye paribhuñjantassa āpatti; Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitā’’ti. (pari. 480);
这段话是针对性别特征转变的情况而说的。所谓“受持”,会因为性别特征转变、死亡、舍戒、还俗、把物品给予未受具足戒的人、无所顾惜地舍弃、以及被强行夺走而失效。所以,即使只是受持了一小块诃子放在那里,她所有的受持也都失效了。但在比丘的住处,凡是属于她的东西,不管已经受持还是没受持而放在那里,全都归她所有,可以让人拿来使用。不过其中属于她的固定物品,比如住所或楼阁,她想给谁就可以给谁。在十三种僧团许可中,凡是她在还是比丘时得到的许可,全部失效。先前分得的住所也失效。如果在后来分得住所时性别特征发生转变,比丘尼僧团想把她得到的利养给她,应当先征得同意再给。如果比丘尼因为共通的覆藏罪正在接受别住时性别特征发生转变,只应给她半月敬悦。如果在正行敬悦时发生转变,也只应再给她半月敬悦。如果在敬悦已经行完之后发生转变,应由比丘尼僧团为她作出罪羯磨。如果恶作果报已尽、正在行半月敬悦时性别特征再次发生转变,只应给她六夜敬悦。如果在半月敬悦已经行完之后发生转变,则应由比丘僧团为她作出罪羯磨。巴利
Idañhi liṅgaparivattanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma liṅgaparivattanena, kālaṃkiriyāya, sikkhāpaccakkhānena, hīnāyāvattanena, anupasampannassa dānena, anapekkhavissajjanena, acchinditvā gahaṇena ca vijahati. Tasmā sacepi harītakakhaṇḍampi paṭiggahetvā ṭhapitamatthi, sabbamassa paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati. Bhikkhuvihāre pana yaṃkiñcissā santakaṃ paṭiggahetvā vā appaṭiggahetvā vā ṭhapitaṃ, sabbassa sāva issarā, āharāpetvā gahetabbaṃ. Yaṃ panettha thāvaraṃ tassā santakaṃ senāsanaṃ vā uparopakā vā, te yassicchati tassa dātabbā. Terasasu sammutīsu yā bhikkhukāle laddhā sammuti, sabbā sā paṭippassambhati. Purimikāya senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhati. Sace pacchimikāya senāsane gahite liṅgaṃ parivattati, bhikkhunisaṅgho cassā uppannaṃ lābhaṃ dātukāmo hoti, apaloketvā dātabbo. Sace bhikkhunīhi sādhāraṇāya paṭicchannāya āpattiyā parivasantassa liṅgaṃ parivattati, pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace mānattaṃ carantassa parivattati, puna pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace ciṇṇamānattassa parivattati, bhikkhunīhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace akusalavipāke parikkhīṇe pakkhamānattakāle punadeva liṅgaṃ parivattati, chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace ciṇṇe pakkhamānatte parivattati, bhikkhūhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbanti.
在紧接着的比丘尼变性事例中,一切判定都应依照这里所说的方法来了知。不过,这里有一个差别:即使她是在比丘尼期间犯了作媒罪,而且这罪是覆藏的,也不给别住,只应给六夜敬悦。如果她在行半月敬悦时变性,这不算障碍,仍然只应给六夜敬悦。如果她在敬悦已经行完之后变性,比丘们不必再给敬悦,直接为她出罪。如果比丘们还没给敬悦,她又变性了,那就应由比丘尼们只给半月敬悦。如果她在行六夜敬悦时又变性,也只应给半月敬悦。如果她在敬悦已行完之后发生变性,应由比丘尼作出罪羯磨。如果再次变性,即使她仍安住在比丘尼身份中,那些先前已经止息的罪,仍然是妥善止息的。巴利
Anantare bhikkhuniyā liṅgaparivattanavatthumhi idha vuttanayeneva sabbo vinicchayo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sacepi bhikkhunikāle āpannā sañcarittāpatti paṭicchannā hoti, parivāsadānaṃ natthi, chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace pakkhamānattaṃ carantiyā liṅgaṃ parivattati, na tenattho, chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Sace ciṇṇamānattāya parivattati, puna mānattaṃ adatvā bhikkhūhi abbhetabbo. Atha bhikkhūhi mānatte adinne puna liṅgaṃ parivattati, bhikkhunīhi pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Atha chārattaṃ mānattaṃ carantassa puna parivattati, pakkhamānattameva dātabbaṃ. Ciṇṇamānattassa pana liṅgaparivatte jāte bhikkhunīhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbaṃ . Puna parivatte ca liṅge bhikkhunibhāve ṭhitāyapi yā āpattiyo pubbe paṭippassaddhā, tā suppaṭippassaddhā evāti.
70 从这以下,“与母亲行淫法”等四件事,其含义本身就很清楚。巴利
70. Ito parāni ‘‘mātuyā methunaṃ dhamma’’ntiādīni cattāri vatthūni uttānatthāniyeva.
71 71. 在“软背”这件事里,据说那位比丘以前是跳舞的。他为了练熟技艺而反复练习,所以背变得柔软。因此他才能那样做。巴利
71. Mudupiṭṭhikavatthumhi so kira bhikkhu naṭapubbako. Tassa sippakosallatthaṃ parikammakatā piṭṭhi mudukā ahosi. Tasmā evaṃ kātuṃ asakkhi.
在“垂者”这件事里,那位比丘的男根很长,往下垂,因此被称为“垂者”。巴利
Lambīvatthumhi tassa bhikkhussa aṅgajātaṃ dīghaṃ hoti lambati, tasmā lambīti vutto.
从这里往下,两个“伤口事”本身就很清楚了。在“彩画事”里,所谓“彩画”,就是指彩绘的图像。巴利
Ito parāni dve vaṇavatthūni uttānāneva. Lepacittavatthumhi lepacittaṃ nāma cittakammarūpaṃ.
在“木偶事”里,所谓“木偶”,就是木制的人像。就像在这两件事里一样,在其他诸如象牙像、布像、铜像等没有执受的女性像上,以淫欲心对密处行事,不管精液有没有泄出,都只是恶作。以身体接触的贪欲心行事,也同样只是恶作。但如果是以泄精的贪欲心行事,泄了精就犯僧残,没泄精就犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Dārudhītalikavatthumhi dārudhītalikā nāma kaṭṭharūpaṃ. Yathā ca imesu dvīsu evaṃ aññesupi dantarūpa-potthakarūpa-loharūpādīsu anupādinnakesu itthirūpesu nimitte methunarāgena upakkamantassa asuci muccatu vā mā vā, dukkaṭameva. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena upakkamantassāpi tatheva dukkaṭaṃ. Mocanarāgena pana upakkamantassa mutte saṅghādiseso, amutte thullaccayanti.
72 72. 在孙陀罗这件事里,这个叫孙陀罗的人是王舍城一户良家子弟,因为信心而出家;他因为相貌端正,得到了“孙陀罗”这个名字。有个女人看见他在街上走,生起了爱欲,就对他做出这种种非礼的举动。但那位长老是阿那含,所以他没有接受。这种事对其他人来说,则不是他们能做到的。巴利
72. Sundaravatthumhi ayaṃ sundaro nāma rājagahe kuladārako saddhāya pabbajito; attabhāvassa abhirūpatāya ‘‘sundaro’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Taṃ rathikāya gacchantaṃ disvā samuppannachandarāgā sā itthī imaṃ vippakāraṃ akāsi. Thero pana anāgāmī. Tasmā so na sādiyi. Aññesaṃ pana avisayo eso.
从这以下的四种事例中,那些比丘愚钝无智,听信了女人的话,照那样做了之后,后来心生悔恨。巴利
Ito paresu catūsu vatthūsu te bhikkhū jaḷā dummedhā mātugāmassa vacanaṃ gahetvā tathā katvā pacchā kukkuccāyiṃsu.
73 73. “所宣说”等三事本身含义清楚。关于两种断头的情况,判定如下:在张开的圆口中,把男根放进去时,如果碰到下方、上方或两侧任何一侧,就是波罗夷。即使不碰四个侧面,放进去后在内部碰到上颚,也还是波罗夷。如果不碰四个侧面和上颚,只是悬在空处放进去又拿出来,就是恶作。但如果牙齿紧紧闭合,口中没有空隙,而且牙齿外面被嘴唇的肉盖住,那么在那种不被风吹到的湿润处,即使只放进像芝麻果那么一点,也还是波罗夷。如果嘴唇的肉被割掉,只在牙齿上动作,就是土喇咤亚。如果牙齿向外突出,无法用嘴唇盖住,在那里动作,或者用伸到外面的舌头动作,也只是土喇咤亚。对活人的身体,用伸到外面的舌头动作,也只是土喇咤亚。但如果用外面的舌头卷住后放进嘴里,就是波罗夷。对于脖子以上被砍断的头,从下方把男根放进去并碰到上颚,也是波罗夷。巴利
73. Akkhāyitādīni tīṇi vatthūni uttānatthāneva. Dvīsu chinnasīsavatthūsu ayaṃ vinicchayo – vaṭṭakate mukhe vivaṭe aṅgajātaṃ pavesento sace heṭṭhā vā upari vā ubhayapassehi vā chupantaṃ paveseti, pārājikaṃ. Catūhipi passehi achupantaṃ pavesetvā abbhantare tālukaṃ chupati, pārājikameva. Cattāri passāni tālukañca achupanto ākāsagatameva katvā paveseti ca nīharati ca, dukkaṭaṃ. Yadi pana dantā suphusitā, antomukhe okāso natthi, dantā ca bahi oṭṭhamaṃsena paṭicchannā, tattha vātena asamphuṭṭhaṃ allokāsaṃ tilaphalamattampi pavesentassa pārājikameva. Uppāṭite pana oṭṭhamaṃse dantesuyeva upakkamantassa thullaccayaṃ. Yopi danto bahi nikkhamitvā tiṭṭhati , na sakkā oṭṭhehi pidahituṃ. Tattha upakkamantepi bahi nikkhantajivhāya upakkamantepi thullaccayameva. Jīvamānakasarīrepi bahi nikkhantajivhāya thullaccayameva. Yadi pana bahijivhāya paliveṭhetvā antomukhaṃ paveseti, pārājikameva. Uparigīvāya chinnasīsassapi adhobhāgena aṅgajātaṃ pavesetvā tālukaṃ chupantassa pārājikameva.
在骨堆这件事上,即使只是前往坟场,也犯恶作。收集骨头也一样;以淫欲心对准女根部位而行动,以及以身触淫欲心而行动,不论泄不泄出,都只是恶作。但如果是以泄欲心而行动,泄出了就犯僧残,没泄出就只是土喇咤亚。巴利
Aṭṭhikavatthumhi susānaṃ gacchantassāpi dukkaṭaṃ. Aṭṭhikāni saṅkaḍḍhantassāpi, nimitte methunarāgena upakkamantassāpi, kāyasaṃsaggarāgena upakkamantassāpi, muccatu vā mā vā, dukkaṭameva. Mocanarāgena pana upakkamantassa muccante saṅghādiseso, amuccante thullaccayameva.
在雌龙这件事里,不管是雌龙少女,还是紧那罗女等其他任何一种,在所有情况下都犯波罗夷。巴利
Nāgīvatthumhi nāgamāṇavikā vā hotu kinnarīādīnaṃ vā aññatarā, sabbattha pārājikaṃ.
在夜叉女的故事中,所有的天神也都是夜叉女。巴利
Yakkhīvatthumhi sabbāpi devatā yakkhīyeva.
在《饿鬼事》里,那些被焦渴等苦折磨的雌饿鬼,根本没法靠近人。不过也有住在宫殿里的雌饿鬼:她们在黑分月时恶业成熟受报,到了白分月就像天神一样享受福乐。对这样的雌饿鬼或雌夜叉,如果出现被看见、被抓住、被抚摸、被触碰、被碰触的情况,就犯波罗夷。即使没被看见,但出现了其他几种情况,也还是犯波罗夷。如果没被看见、没被抓住,只是被抚摸、触碰、碰触,让那个人失去知觉,满足了自己的欲望就走了,这叫作“非境界”。所以在这种非境界的情况下不犯戒。黄门的事已经很清楚了。巴利
Petīvatthumhi nijjhāmataṇhikādipetiyo allīyitumpi na sakkā. Vimānapetiyo pana atthi; yāsaṃ kāḷapakkhe akusalaṃ vipaccati, juṇhapakkhe devatā viya sampattiṃ anubhonti. Evarūpāya petiyā vā yakkhiyā vā sace dassana-gahaṇa-āmasana-phusana-ghaṭṭanāni paññāyanti, pārājikaṃ. Athāpi dassanaṃ natthi, itarāni paññāyanti, pārājikameva. Atha dassanagahaṇāni na paññāyanti, āmasanaphusanaghaṭṭanehi paññāyamānehi taṃ puggalaṃ visaññaṃ katvā attano manorathaṃ pūretvā gacchati, ayaṃ avisayo nāma. Tasmā ettha avisayattā anāpatti. Paṇḍakavatthu pākaṭameva.
在根已损坏的情况下,所谓“根坏”,就是指身体的净色已经损坏,像枯木桩或荆棘一样,感受不到乐,也感受不到苦。即使他感受不到,只要是以享受的心去使用,仍然构成罪。巴利
Upahatindriyavatthumhi upahatindriyoti upahatakāyappasādo khāṇukaṇṭakamiva sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā na vedayati. Avedayantassāpi sevanacittavasena āpatti.
在只是碰触的情形里,如果有人心想“我要行淫法”而抓住女人,之后对行淫心生厌离并后悔,那就只是犯恶作。因为行淫的前方便,比如抓手等,在还没到头部之前,都停留在恶作。到了头部时就是波罗夷。因为第一波罗夷的近方便就只是恶作,其余三种的近方便是偷兰遮。不过这个比丘应当理解为:虽然对行淫法心生厌离,却接受了身体接触。因此世尊说:“犯僧残罪。”巴利
Chupitamattavatthusmiṃ yo ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmī’’ti mātugāmaṃ gaṇhitvā methune virajjitvā vippaṭisārī hoti, dukkaṭamevassa hoti. Methunadhammassa hi pubbapayogā hatthaggāhādayo yāva sīsaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva dukkaṭe tiṭṭhanti. Sīse patte pārājikaṃ hoti. Paṭhamapārājikassa hi dukkaṭameva sāmantaṃ. Itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ thullaccayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu methunadhamme virajjitvā kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyīti veditabbo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti.
74 74. 在跋提亚这件事里,跋提亚是那座城的名字。迦提耶园因为盛产迦提花丛,所以得到了这个名字;那座园林位于该城的近郊。他躺在那里的地上,靠着风吹来的支撑力,沉沉睡去。那时只有单一滋味的有分心在持续运转。见到被弄脏,意思是见到被不净所污染。巴利
74. Bhaddiyavatthusmiṃ bhaddiyaṃ nāma taṃ nagaraṃ. Jātiyāvanaṃ nāma jātipupphagumbānaṃ ussannatāya evaṃ laddhanāmaṃ; taṃ tassa nagarassa upacāre vanaṃ hoti. So tattha nipanno tena vātupatthambhena mahāniddaṃ okkami. Ekarasaṃ bhavaṅgameva vattati. Kilinnaṃ passitvāti asucikiliṭṭhaṃ passitvā.
75 从这之后,与贪著接受相关的四个事例,以及一个不知(不见)事例,这五个在这里意思都很浅显明了。巴利
75. Ito parāni sādiyanapaṭisaṃyuttāni cattāri vatthūni, ajānanavatthu cāti pañca uttānatthāneva.
76 76. 在两种不可接受的因缘中,“突然起身”,意思是像被毒蛇咬了、像被火烧了一样,急速地起身。“踩踏后使之滚动”,是说一个不放逸、已开始修观、具足正念的比丘,在迅速起身的同时,就踩踏上去,让它在地上翻滚、转侧、碾压而倒下。因为在这种场合,善凡夫必须守护自己的心;而这位比丘,正是他们当中一位像战场前锋勇士一样的人。巴利
76. Dvīsu asādiyanavatthūsu sahasā vuṭṭhāsīti āsīvisena daṭṭho viya agginā daḍḍho viya ca turitaṃ vuṭṭhāsi. Akkamitvā pavattesīti appamatto bhikkhu āraddhavipassako upaṭṭhitassati khippaṃ vuṭṭhahantova akkamitvā bhūmiyaṃ vaṭṭento parivaṭṭento viheṭhento pātesi. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi evarūpesu ṭhānesu cittaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ. Ayañca tesaṃ aññataro saṅgāmasīsayodho bhikkhu.
77 77. 在开着门躺卧的这件事上,“白天独处”是指白天躺着。“关门独处”是指关上门躺着。在这里,虽然律藏里并没有说“这是某某罪”,但因为不关门躺卧的过失而引生的事例中,世尊说“诸比丘,我允许白天独处的人关上门独处”,所以不关门而独处就说是犯恶作。因为优波离长老等人了知世尊的意趣之后,才写下了义注。由此,“白天犯此罪,不是夜里”(《附随》323)这句话也得以成立。巴利
77. Dvāraṃ vivaritvā nipannavatthumhi divā paṭisallīyantenāti divā nipajjantena. Dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā paṭisallīyitunti dvāraṃ pidahitvā nipajjituṃ. Ettha ca kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ nāma āpattī’’ti na vuttā. Vivaritvā nipannadosena pana uppanne vatthusmiṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, divā paṭisallīyantena dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā paṭisallīyitu’’nti vuttattā asaṃvaritvā paṭisallīyantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhagavato hi adhippāyaṃ ñatvā upālittherādīhi aṭṭhakathā ṭhapitā. ‘‘Atthāpatti divā āpajjati no ratti’’nti (pari. 323) imināpi cetaṃ siddhaṃ.
那么,什么样的门应该关,什么样的门不该关呢?用木片、竹片、草席、树叶等随便什么材料做成门扇,下面插进下门臼、上面插进上门槽,这样装成的旋转门,才应该关。其他的门,比如像牛栏里那种木栓门、荆棘门,像村口大门那样装了轮子的门,在木板或草席上装两三个轮子做成的滑动草席门,像店铺里那种往上翻的草席门,在草叶屋里用两三处竹条绑成的插销门,还有布幔门、麻布门——这类门不该关。不过,手里拿着钵去推开旋转门扇时,只有布幔门和麻布门推开不算犯戒,推开其余那些门就犯戒。白天独自静处时,只有旋转门是犯戒的所在,其余的门,不管关没关,躺下都不犯戒。但还是应该关好门再躺下,这是应守的规矩。巴利
Kīdisaṃ pana dvāraṃ saṃvaritabbaṃ, kīdisaṃ na saṃvaritabbaṃ? Rukkhapadaraveḷupadarakilañjapaṇṇādīnaṃ yena kenaci kavāṭaṃ katvā heṭṭhā udukkhale upari uttarapāsake ca pavesetvā kataṃ parivattakadvārameva saṃvaritabbaṃ. Aññaṃ gorūpānaṃ vajesu viya rukkhasūcikaṇṭakadvāraṃ, gāmathakanakaṃ cakkalakayuttadvāraṃ, phalakesu vā kiṭikāsu vā dve tīṇi cakkalakāni yojetvā kataṃ saṃsaraṇakiṭikadvāraṃ, āpaṇesu viya kataṃ ugghāṭanakiṭikadvāraṃ, dvīsu tīsu ṭhānesu veṇusalākā gopphetvā paṇṇakuṭīsu kataṃ salākahatthakadvāraṃ, dussasāṇidvāranti evarūpaṃ dvāraṃ na saṃvaritabbaṃ. Pattahatthassa kavāṭappaṇāmane pana ekaṃ dussasāṇidvārameva anāpattikaraṃ, avasesāni paṇāmentassa āpatti. Divā paṭisallīyantassa pana parivattakadvārameva āpattikaraṃ, sesāni saṃvaritvā vā asaṃvaritvā vā nipannassa āpatti natthi. Saṃvaritvā pana nipajjitabbaṃ, etaṃ vattaṃ.
那么,旋转门要关到什么程度才算关好呢?插上针闩之类的东西,就算关好了。不过,只插一根针状的东西也行,只扣上搭扣也行,门扇碰到门框而掩上就行,稍微没碰到也行。按最宽松的标准,只要头伸不进去,即使没碰到门框也算行。如果是有很多人进出的地方,可以对比丘或沙弥说“贤友,帮忙看着门”,然后躺下。如果比丘们正坐着做衣服或忙别的事,心里想着“他们会看着门”,然后躺下也行。《库伦达注释》里说:“就算跟近事男打个招呼,或者心里想着‘他会看着’,然后躺下也行。只是不能跟比丘尼或女人打招呼。”如果门臼或上门楣坏了、没装好,关不上;或者因为要施工,砖堆、泥土什么的堆在门里面;或者搭了架子,导致关不了门——有这类情况时,不关门躺下也行。如果没有门扇,那就跟已经得到许可一样。睡在上层的人,要把梯子收起来再躺下。如果梯子顶端有盖板,盖上再躺下。在内室躺下的人,把内室门或前门随便关上一扇,就可以躺下。如果是一间屋子两侧都开了门、有人进出,那两扇门都得看着。巴利
Parivattakadvāraṃ pana kittakena saṃvutaṃ hoti? Sūcighaṭikādīsu dinnāsu saṃvutameva hoti. Apica kho sūcimattepi dinne vaṭṭati. Ghaṭikamattepi dinne vaṭṭati. Dvārabāhaṃ phusitvā pihitamattepi vaṭṭati. Īsakaṃ aphusitepi vaṭṭati. Sabbantimena vidhinā yāvatā sīsaṃ nappavisati tāvatā aphusitepi vaṭṭatīti. Sace bahūnaṃ vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā ‘‘dvāraṃ, āvuso, jaggāhī’’ti vatvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Atha bhikkhū cīvarakammaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci karontā nisinnā honti, ‘‘ete dvāraṃ jaggissantī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘upāsakampi āpucchitvā vā, ‘esa jaggissatī’ti ābhogaṃ katvā vā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kevalaṃ bhikkhuniṃ vā mātugāmaṃ vā āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha dvārassa udukkhalaṃ vā uttarapāsako vā bhinno vā hoti aṭṭhapito vā, saṃvarituṃ na sakkoti, navakammatthaṃ vā pana iṭṭhakapuñjo vā mattikādīnaṃ vā rāsi antodvāre kato hoti, aṭṭaṃ vā bandhanti, yathā saṃvarituṃ na sakkoti; evarūpe antarāye sati asaṃvaritvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Yadi pana kavāṭaṃ natthi, laddhakappameva. Upari sayantena nisseṇiṃ āropetvā nipajjitabbaṃ. Sace nisseṇimatthake thakanakaṃ hoti, thaketvāpi nipajjitabbaṃ. Gabbhe nipajjantena gabbhadvāraṃ vā pamukhadvāraṃ vā yaṃkiñci saṃvaritvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace ekakuṭṭake gehe dvīsu passesu dvārāni katvā vaḷañjanti, dvepi dvārāni jaggitabbāni.
即使是在三层的殿堂里,门也一定要有人看守。如果比丘们托钵回来,进入像铁殿那样的殿堂作日间住处,僧团上座应该对守门人说“请看好门”,或者心里认定“看门是他的责任”,然后再进去躺下。直到僧团中最下座的比丘,也应当这样做。对于先进入的人,心里认定“看门是后面进来的人的责任”,这样也是可以的。如果不告知,也不作意,就在室内门没关好的情况下,或者在室外躺下,那就犯戒。在室内或室外躺下的时候,心里作意“看门是大门处守门人的责任”,然后躺下,这样才是可以的。在铁殿等地方的露台上躺下时,也一定要把门关好。巴利
Tibhūmakepi pāsāde dvāraṃ jaggitabbameva. Sace bhikkhācārā paṭikkamma lohapāsādasadisaṃ pāsādaṃ bahū bhikkhū divāvihāratthaṃ pavisanti, saṅghattherena dvārapālassa ‘‘dvāraṃ jaggāhī’’ti vatvā vā ‘‘dvārajagganaṃ etassa bhāro’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā vā pavisitvā nipajjitabbaṃ . Yāva saṅghanavakena evameva kattabbaṃ. Pure pavisantānaṃ ‘‘dvārajagganaṃ nāma pacchimānaṃ bhāro’’ti evaṃ ābhogaṃ kātumpi vaṭṭati. Anāpucchā vā ābhogaṃ vā akatvā antogabbhe vā asaṃvutadvāre bahi vā nipajjantānaṃ āpatti. Gabbhe vā bahi vā nipajjanakālepi ‘‘dvārajagganaṃ nāma mahādvāre dvārapālassa bhāro’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Lohapāsādādīsu ākāsatale nipajjantenāpi dvāraṃ saṃvaritabbameva.
这里简要说明一下:这条日间独处的规定,是针对任何有围墙围起、门能关上的地方说的。所以不管是在露天、树下还是凉亭,只要是有门能关上的地方躺下,就必须先把门关好再躺。如果是个大寺院,像大菩提广场、铁殿广场那样很多人进出的地方,门就算关上也没法保持关着,人们找不到门就会爬墙进出,那种地方就不需要关门。晚上开着门躺下,到天亮时起身,没有犯。如果醒了之后又接着睡,就犯了。如果有人事先决定“我要在天亮时起身”,但晚上没关门就躺下,到了自己定的时间又没起来,那他还是犯。不过《大筏注》里说:“这样躺着的人,连不恭敬的恶作罪也逃不掉。”巴利
Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – idaṃ divāpaṭisallīyanaṃ yena kenaci parikkhitte sadvārabandhe ṭhāne kathitaṃ. Tasmā abbhokāse vā rukkhamūle vā maṇḍape vā yattha katthaci sadvārabandhe nipajjantena dvāraṃ saṃvaritvāva nipajjitabbaṃ. Sace mahāpariveṇaṃ hoti, mahābodhiyaṅgaṇalohapāsādaṅgaṇasadisaṃ bahūnaṃ osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha dvāraṃ saṃvutampi saṃvutaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati, dvāraṃ alabhantā pākāraṃ āruhitvāpi vicaranti, tattha saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ natthi. Rattiṃ dvāraṃ vivaritvā nipanno aruṇe uggate uṭṭhahati, anāpatti. Sace pabujjhitvā puna supati, āpatti. Yo pana ‘‘aruṇe uggate vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti paricchinditvāva dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā rattiṃ nipajjati, yathāparicchedameva ca na vuṭṭhāti, tassa āpattiyeva. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ nipajjanto anādariyadukkaṭāpi na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
如果有人整夜不睡,或者走了很远的路,白天疲惫不堪,坐在床上,脚还没从地上抬起来,就因为困得撑不住而躺下,那不算犯戒。但如果已经睡着了,甚至在不知不觉中把脚抬到床上,那就犯戒了。坐着靠躺着睡,不算犯戒。如果有人为了驱除睡意而在经行时摔倒,马上又站起来,那也不算犯戒。但如果摔倒后就躺在那里,不起来,那就犯戒了。巴利
Yo pana bahudeva rattiṃ jaggitvā addhānaṃ vā gantvā divā kilantarūpo mañce nisinno pāde bhūmito amocetvāva niddāvasena nipajjati, tassa anāpatti. Sace okkantaniddo ajānantopi pāde mañcakaṃ āropeti, āpattiyeva. Nisīditvā apassāya supantassa anāpatti. Yopi ca ‘‘niddaṃ vinodessāmī’’ti caṅkamanto patitvā sahasāva vuṭṭhāti, tassāpi anāpatti. Yo pana patitvā tattheva sayati, na vuṭṭhāti, tassa āpatti.
谁会被免除罪,谁不会被免除?《大巴利注》里先说:“只有以单次折断的姿势躺下的人,才得免除。但如果把双脚从地面抬起来躺着,即使是被夜叉附身或失去意识的人,也不得免除。”《库伦达注》则说:“被捆绑后让人放倒躺下的,才得免除。”《大注》里说:“有人在经行时昏倒后跌倒,就地躺下睡着,因为他没有自主能力,所以看不出有罪。但老师们不这么说。因此大莲花长老说:仍然有罪。不过有两种人确实能从罪中免除:一种是被夜叉附身的人,一种是被捆绑后让人放倒躺下的人。”巴利
Ko muccati, ko na muccatīti? Mahāpaccariyaṃ tāva ‘‘ekabhaṅgena nipannakoyeva muccati. Pāde pana bhūmito mocetvā nipanno yakkhagahitakopi visaññībhūtopi na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘bandhitvā nipajjāpitova muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yo caṅkamanto muccitvā patito tattheva supati, tassāpi avisayattā āpatti na dissati. Ācariyā pana evaṃ na kathayanti. Tasmā āpattiyevāti mahāpadumattherena vuttaṃ. Dve pana janā āpattito muccantiyeva, yo ca yakkhagahitako, yo ca bandhitvā nipajjāpito’’ti.
78 78. 在关于巴拉卡恰卡(Bhārukaccha)这件事上,“梦中遗精者无犯”——因为梦中遗精根本不在可自主的范围内,所以才有这样的判定。因此,优波离长老用推理的方式,对这件世尊先前未曾裁决过的事做出了裁决。世尊听后说:“说得好,诸比丘,优波离说得好!优波离解说这个问题,就像在无路之处开出道路,在虚空中示现足迹。”随后将这位长老列为第一:“诸比丘,在我的比丘弟子中,持律第一的,就是优波离。”从此以后,关于苏拔巴(Supabba)等事,其含义本身就已经很清楚了。巴利
78. Bhārukacchakavatthumhi anāpatti supinantenāti yasmā supinante avisayattā evaṃ hoti, tasmā upālitthero bhagavatā avinicchitapubbampi imaṃ vatthuṃ nayaggāhena vinicchini. Bhagavāpi ca sutvā ‘‘sukathitaṃ, bhikkhave, upālinā; apade padaṃ karonto viya, ākāse padaṃ dassento viya upāli imaṃ pañhaṃ kathesī’’ti vatvā theraṃ etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānaṃ yadidaṃ upālī’’ti (a. ni. 1.219, 228). Ito parāni supabbādīni vatthūni uttānatthāneva.
80 在与比丘尼往来等事中,那些离车族少年沉迷于嬉戏,就因为自己的行为不检点,做出了这样的事。从那时起,离车族就开始走向衰亡了。巴利
80. Bhikkhunīsampayojanādīsu te licchavikumārakā khiḍḍāpasutā attano anācārena evaṃ akaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya ca licchavīnaṃ vināso eva udapādi.
82 82. 在年老出家者的事例中,出于悲悯,心想“我去看看他”,就去了他家。那女人便向他百般诉说,自己和孩子们如何孤苦无依。他对此毫无留恋,她看出这一点后很生气,强行抓住他说:“来,还俗吧!”他为了挣脱而后退,因为年老体弱,仰面摔倒了。她于是遂了自己的心愿。但那位比丘是不来者,已断尽欲贪,因此没有接受。巴利
82. Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthumhi dassanaṃ agamāsīti anukampāya ‘‘taṃ dakkhissāmī’’ti gehaṃ agamāsi. Athassa sā attano ca dārakānañca nānappakārehi anāthabhāvaṃ saṃvaṇṇesi. Anapekkhañca naṃ ñatvā kupitā ‘‘ehi vibbhamāhī’’ti balakkārena aggahesi. So attānaṃ mocetuṃ paṭikkamanto jarādubbalatāya uttāno paripati. Tato sā attano manaṃ akāsi. So pana bhikkhu anāgāmī samucchinnakāmarāgo tasmā na sādiyīti.
83 鹿崽的故事本身意思很清楚。巴利
83. Migapotakavatthu uttānatthamevāti.
关于这一点,在《普端严》的普端严性中——巴利
Tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasmiṃ –
从师资代代相传来说,从阐明缘起和事由的种种差别来说;
既因为远离他人的宗派主张,也因为自宗清净。
从厘清字词、把握词义,到按巴利文的连缀顺序来理解。
从学处的判定,以及从分别理趣之差别来看,
在观察者看来,这里看不到任何不清净的地方。
因此,这是智者所认可的,正因它完全清净可信。
这部律藏的注释,是由善于调伏应受调伏者的世尊所宣说的而展开的。
这是由悲悯世间的世间怙主所宣说的。巴利
Ācariyaparamparato, nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanato; Parasamayavivajjanato, sakasamayavisuddhito ceva. Byañjanaparisodhanato, padatthato pāḷiyojanakkamato; Sikkhāpadanicchayato, vibhaṅganayabhedadassanato. Sampassataṃ na dissati, kiñci apāsādikaṃ yato ettha; Viññūnamayaṃ tasmā, samantapāsādikātveva. Saṃvaṇṇanā pavattā, vinayassa vineyyadamanakusalena; Vuttassa lokanāthena, lokamanukampamānenāti.
第二波罗夷巴利
2. Dutiyapārājikaṃ
第二,由无与伦比的胜者所宣说;
现在,波罗夷的注释次第已经到了他这里。
因此,凡是先前已经说明过的,都应该很容易理解。
把这一切都排除之后,就有了这段注释。巴利
Dutiyaṃ adutiyena, yaṃ jinena pakāsitaṃ; Pārājikaṃ tassa dāni, patto saṃvaṇṇanākkamo. Yasmā tasmā suviññeyyaṃ, yaṃ pubbe ca pakāsitaṃ; Taṃ sabbaṃ vajjayitvāna, hoti saṃvaṇṇanā ayaṃ.
达尼亚故事的注释巴利
Dhaniyavatthuvaṇṇanā
84 那时,世尊住在王舍城的鹫峰山。其中“在王舍城”是指在一座名叫王舍城的城市。因为这座城曾被曼陀多王、大瞿文提等占有,所以称为“王舍城”。关于这个名字,这里还有别的解释,但何必管那些呢?这只是那座城市的名字罢了。不过,这座城在佛陀时代和转轮王时代是城市,其他时候则是空的,被夜叉占据,成了他们的住处。这样说明了行境村落之后,接着说明住处:“在鹫峰山”。应当知道,因为秃鹫曾住在它的山峰上,或者它的山峰形状像秃鹫,所以称为鹫峰。巴利
84.Tena samayena buddho bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbateti tattha rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare, tañhi mandhātu-mahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā ‘‘rājagaha’’nti vuccati. Aññepettha pakāre vaṇṇayanti. Kiṃ tehi! Nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti. Sesakāle suññaṃ hoti yakkhapariggahitaṃ, tesaṃ vasantavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ gocaragāmaṃ dassetvā nivāsanaṭṭhānamāha – gijjhakūṭe pabbateti. So ca gijjhā tassa kūṭesu vasiṃsu, gijjhasadisāni vā tassa kūṭāni; tasmā gijjhakūṭoti vuccatīti veditabbo.
“众多”这个词,按律藏的用法,三个人就叫“众多”,超过三个人就叫“僧团”。按经藏的用法,三个人就是三个人,从三个人以上才开始叫“众多”。这里应当按经藏的理解,把它理解为“众多”。“现见”是指不太可信、交情不深的朋友;因为他们只是到处碰巧遇到才认识的,所以叫“现见”。“熟伴”是指非常可信、交情深厚的朋友;因为他们彼此真心交往、亲密相处,共享受用,所以叫“熟伴”。“在伊西吉利山侧”,伊西吉利是一座山的名字,山侧就是山脚。据说从前大约有五百位独觉佛,在迦尸、憍萨罗等地方托钵乞食,吃完饭后聚集到那座山上,以等至安住。人们只看见他们进去,没看见他们出来,就说:“这座山把这些仙人吞掉了。”从此,这座山就得到了“伊西吉利”这个名字。巴利
Sambahulāti vinayapariyāyena tayo janā sambahulāti vuccanti, tato paraṃ saṅgho. Suttantapariyāyena tayo tayo eva, tato paṭṭhāya sambahulā. Idha pana te suttantapariyāyena sambahulāti veditabbā. Sandiṭṭhāti nātivissāsikā na daḷhamittā; tattha tattha saṅgamma diṭṭhattā hi te sandiṭṭhāti vuccanti. Sambhattāti ativissāsikā daḷhamittā; te hi suṭṭhu bhattā bhajamānā ekasambhogaparibhogāti katvā ‘‘sambhattā’’ti vuccanti. Isigilipasseti isigili nāma pabbato, tassa passe. Pubbe kira pañcasatamattā paccekabuddhā kāsikosalādīsu janapadesu piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ tasmiṃ pabbate sannipatitvā samāpattiyā vītināmenti. Manussā te pavisanteva passanti na nikkhamante. Tato āhaṃsu – ‘‘ayaṃ pabbato ime isayo gilatī’’ti. Tadupādāya tassa ‘‘isigili’’tveva samaññā udapādi, tassa passe pabbatapāde.
搭了草屋之后:用草盖顶、门闩齐全的屋子建好以后。入雨安居的人,即使修的是头陀行,也必须住进五种覆盖物之一所盖、门闩齐全的住处。经里确实这样说:“诸比丘,不能没有住处就入雨安居。谁入了,就犯恶作罪。”所以在雨安居期间,如果得到住处,那很好;如果得不到,就该去找人帮忙做,也要做出来。找不到人帮忙的,就自己动手做。但绝不能没有住处就入雨安居。这是随顺法。因此,那些比丘搭了草屋,划定了夜间住处和白天住处等,定下共住规约和犍度所规定的义务,在三学中修学,入了雨安居。巴利
Tiṇakuṭiyo karitvāti tiṇacchadanā sadvārabandhā kuṭiyo katvā. Vassaṃ upagacchantena hi nālakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannenāpi pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ aññatarena channeyeva sadvārabandhe senāsane upagantabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabbaṃ. Yo upagaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 204). Tasmā vassakāle sace senāsanaṃ labhati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ; no ce labhati, hatthakammaṃ pariyesitvāpi kātabbaṃ. Hatthakammaṃ alabhantena sāmampi kātabbaṃ. Na tveva asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabbaṃ. Ayamanudhammatā. Tasmā te bhikkhū tiṇakuṭiyo karitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādīni paricchinditvā katikavattāni ca khandhakavattāni ca adhiṭṭhāya tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhamānā vassaṃ upagacchiṃsu.
具寿达尼耶也是:并不只是那些长老,具寿达尼耶也是这条学戒的最初违犯者。陶匠之子:就是陶匠的儿子;他的名字叫达尼耶,父亲是陶匠,所以说“达尼耶是陶匠之子”。入雨安居:他和那些长老在同一处搭了草屋,然后入雨安居。已住雨安居:在前雨安居入居的人,在大自恣时自恣之后,从初一日起,就称为“已住雨安居者”。他这样成为已住雨安居者之后。巴利
Āyasmāpi dhaniyoti na kevalaṃ te therāva imassa sikkhāpadassa ādikammiko āyasmā dhaniyopi. Kumbhakāraputtoti kumbhakārassa putto; tassa hi nāmaṃ dhaniyo, pitā kumbhakāro, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dhaniyo kumbhakāraputto’’ti. Vassaṃ upagacchīti tehi therehi saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhāneyeva tiṇakuṭikaṃ karitvā vassaṃ upagacchi. Vassaṃvutthāti purimikāya upagatā mahāpavāraṇāya pavāritā pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya ‘‘vutthavassā’’ti vuccanti. Evaṃ vassaṃvutthā hutvā.
把草屋拆掉,并不是用棍棒、锤子等把它砸成粉末,而是按照义务把草和木藤等取下来,这就是这句话的意思。如果草屋建在寺院边上,而那里有常住的比丘,就应该先告诉他们。说了“如果有人愿意照料这间草屋并住下来,就把它给他”,然后才能离开。如果草屋建在森林里,或者找不到人照料,就应该把它收拾好,心想“别人也能用得上”,然后离开。那些比丘在森林里建了草屋,却找不到人照料,就把草和木料收拾、存放起来。意思是说,要存放得不让白蚁啃食,也不会漏雨,放好之后心想“这个地方,对来到这里想住的梵行同伴会有帮助”,这样就完成了离开时的义务。巴利
Tiṇakuṭiyo bhinditvāti na daṇḍamuggarādīhi cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ katvā, vattasīsena pana tiṇañca dāruvalli-ādīni ca oropetvāti attho. Yena hi vihārapaccante kuṭi katā hoti, tena sace āvāsikā bhikkhū honti, te āpucchitabbā. ‘‘Sace imaṃ kuṭiṃ paṭijaggitvā koci vasituṃ ussahati, tassa dethā’’ti vatvā pakkamitabbaṃ. Yena araññe vā katā hoti , paṭijagganakaṃ vā na labhati, tena ‘‘aññesampi paribhogaṃ bhavissatī’’ti paṭisāmetvā gantabbaṃ. Te pana bhikkhū araññe kuṭiyo katvā paṭijagganakaṃ alabhantā tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca paṭisāmetvā saṅgopetvāti attho. Yathā ca ṭhapitaṃ taṃ upacikāhi na khajjati , anovassakañca hoti, tathā ṭhapetvā ‘‘idaṃ ṭhānaṃ āgantvā vasitukāmānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti gamiyavattaṃ pūretvā.
他们出发去各地游行,也就是各自前往自己觉得合意的地方。至于具寿达尼耶,那个陶匠的儿子,就留在当地结夏安居——这些意思都很浅显明白。“乃至第三次”就是到第三回。“无缺”就是 anuavayo,因为连读的关系省略了 u 音。意思是随顺的各个部分,凡是陶匠该做的活儿,在各方面都没有欠缺,技艺圆满。“自己的”是指属于他自己的。“师传的”是指师传的技艺。“陶匠业”是指陶匠们的工作,也就是陶匠该做的活儿。由此显示出他自己师传技艺的具体样子。“技艺纯熟”就是技艺清净。这里是说,即使没有欠缺,他的技艺也跟别人的不一样。巴利
Janapadacārikaṃ pakkamiṃsūti attano attano cittānukūlaṃ janapadaṃ agamaṃsu. Āyasmā pana dhaniyo kumbhakāraputto tattheva vassaṃ vasītiādi uttānatthameva. Yāvatatiyakanti yāvatatiyavāraṃ. Anavayoti anuavayo, sandhivasena ukāralopo. Anu anu avayo, yaṃ yaṃ kumbhakārehi kattabbaṃ nāma atthi, sabbattha anūno paripuṇṇasippoti attho. Saketi attano santake. Ācariyaketi ācariyakamme. Kumbhakārakammeti kumbhakārānaṃ kamme; kumbhakārehi kattabbakammeti attho. Etena sakaṃ ācariyakaṃ sarūpato dassitaṃ hoti. Pariyodātasippoti parisuddhasippo. Anavayattepi sati aññehi asadisasippoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“全部以泥制成”的意思是:除了门闩、门板、门锁、窗板之外,其余像墙壁、屋顶、砖、柱子等一切房屋构件,全都用泥做成。把草、木、牛粪收集起来,烧制那座小屋:就是把那座全泥做成的小屋,用手抹平,晒干,涂上油铜泥,内外都塞满草等,烧到熟透。就这样烧成了那座小屋。这样烧成之后,那座小屋美丽,就是外形好看;令人愉悦,就是能让人生起净信;红色,就是红颜色。发出叮当声,就是叮当网的声音。据说,就像各种宝石做成的叮当网发出的声音那样,风吹进那座小屋的窗缝等处,撞击小屋,就发出了这样的声音。由此显示它内外都烧得熟透。不过《大注疏》里说:“‘叮当’是指铜器,所以,就像敲击铜器发出的声音那样,风吹小屋时也发出了这样的声音。”巴利
Sabbamattikāmayanti piṭṭhasaṅghāṭakakavāṭasūcighaṭikavātapānakavāṭamattaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ bhittichadaniṭṭhakathambhādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ gehasambhāraṃ mattikāmayameva katvāti attho. Tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca gomayañca saṅkaḍḍhitvā taṃ kuṭikaṃ pacīti taṃ sabbamattikāmayaṃ katvā pāṇikāya ghaṃsitvā sukkhāpetvā telatambamattikāya parimajjitvā anto ca bahi ca tiṇādīhi pūretvā yathā pakkā supakkā hoti, evaṃ paci. Evaṃ pakkā ca pana sā ahosi kuṭikā . Abhirūpāti surūpā. Pāsādikāti pasādajanikā. Lohitikāti lohitavaṇṇā. Kiṅkaṇikasaddoti kiṅkaṇikajālassa saddo. Yathā kira nānāratanehi katassa kiṅkaṇikajālassa saddo hoti, evaṃ tassā kuṭikāya vātapānantarikādīhi paviṭṭhena vātena samāhatāya saddo ahosi. Etenassā anto ca bahi ca supakkabhāvo dassito hoti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kiṅkaṇikā’’ti kaṃsabhājanaṃ, tasmā yathā abhihatassa kaṃsabhājanassa saddo, evamassā vātappahatāya saddo ahosī’’ti vuttaṃ.
85 “这是什么,诸比丘?”在这里,世尊其实已经知道,但为了引出话题才发问。比丘们把这件事禀告世尊:他们从一开始就把整间纯泥小屋的建造经过都禀告了。“诸比丘,他怎么会……造小屋呢?”这是用将来时表达过去的意思,也就是说“他造了”。它的语法特征要从语法书里去查。
“诸比丘,那个愚人对众生确实不会有呵护、慈悯、不害。”这里,“呵护”是保护的意思,以此显示慈心的前行;“慈悯”是因为他人的痛苦而内心颤动;“不害”是不伤害,以此显示悲心的前行。这段话的意思是:“诸比丘,那个愚人在挖地、踩泥、烧火时,伤害并毁灭了许多大大小小的众生。对这些众生,他确实连慈和悲的前行都不会有,连一丝一毫的呵护、慈悯、不害都不会有。”
“愿后世之人不要对众生犯下杀害。”就是说,愿后来的众人不要对众生犯下杀害之事。这段话的意思是:不要以为“佛陀时代比丘们也这样做,在这些地方杀生没有过失”,从而跟着学;愿后世之人不要这样想:“对于该被杀害、该被杀戮的众生,这样做没有过失。”巴利
85.Kiṃ etaṃ, bhikkhaveti ettha jānantova bhagavā kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ pucchi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesunti sabbamattikāmayāya kuṭikāya karaṇabhāvaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Kathañhi nāma so, bhikkhave…pe… kuṭikaṃ karissatīti idaṃ atītatthe anāgatavacanaṃ; akāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ saddasatthato pariyesitabbaṃ. Na hi nāma, bhikkhave, tassa moghapurisassa pāṇesu anuddayā anukampā avihesā bhavissatīti ettha anuddayāti anurakkhaṇā; etena mettāpubbabhāgaṃ dasseti. Anukampāti paradukkhena cittakampanā. Avihesāti avihiṃsanā; etehi karuṇāpubbabhāgaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘bhikkhave , tassa moghapurisassa pathavīkhaṇanacikkhallamaddanaaggidānesu bahū khuddānukhuddake pāṇe byābādhentassa vināsentassa tesu pāṇesu mettākaruṇānaṃ pubbabhāgamattāpi anuddayā anukampā avihesā na hi nāma bhavissati appamattakāpi nāma na bhavissatī’’ti. Mā pacchimā janatā pāṇesu pātabyataṃ āpajjīti pacchimo janasamūho pāṇesu pātabyabhāvaṃ mā āpajji. ‘‘Buddhakālepi bhikkhūhi evaṃ kataṃ, īdisesu ṭhānesu pāṇātipātaṃ karontānaṃ natthi doso’’ti maññitvā imassa diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjamānā pacchimā janatā mā pāṇesu pātabye ghaṃsitabbe evaṃ maññīti vuttaṃ hoti.
世尊这样呵责了达尼耶之后,为了将来不再发生同样的事,就禁止建造那种纯泥做的小屋:“诸比丘,不应该建造纯泥做的小屋。”禁止之后,又规定说:“如果有人建造,就犯恶作罪。”因此,即使有人建造那种小屋时没有通过挖地等行为伤害众生,也一样犯恶作罪。但如果通过挖地等行为伤害了众生,那么他每违犯一件事,就按各自对应的规定得罪。达尼耶长老因为是初犯,所以无犯。其余的人如果违越学处去建造,或者接受已经建好的小屋住在里面,都同样犯恶作罪。不过,如果混入木材等材料,不管怎么混合,都可以。唯独纯泥做的才不允许。那种纯泥小屋如果以砖块砌成,算作砖瓦房,就可以允许。“是的,世尊!”……他们拆毁了那间小屋:也就是接受了世尊的教示后,用木棍和石块把那间小屋砸碎拆毁了。巴利
Evaṃ dhaniyaṃ garahitvā na ca, bhikkhave, sabbamattikāmayā kuṭikā kātabbāti āyatiṃ tādisāya kuṭikāya karaṇaṃ paṭikkhipi; paṭikkhipitvā ca ‘‘yo kareyya āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti sabbamattikāmayakuṭikākaraṇe āpattiṃ ṭhapesi. Tasmā yopi pathavīkhaṇanādinā pāṇesu pātabyataṃ anāpajjanto tādisaṃ kuṭikaṃ karoti, sopi dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Pathavīkhaṇanādīhi pana pāṇesu pātabyataṃ āpajjanto yaṃ yaṃ vatthuṃ vītikkamati, tattha tattha vuttameva āpattiṃ āpajjati. Dhaniyattherassa ādikammikattā anāpatti. Sesānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ atikkamitvā karontānampi kataṃ labhitvā tattha vasantānampi dukkaṭameva. Dabbasambhāramissakā pana yathā vā tathā vā missā hotu, vaṭṭati. Suddhamattikāmayāva na vaṭṭati. Sāpi iṭṭhakāhi giñjakāvasathasaṅkhepena katā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ bhanteti kho…pe… taṃ kuṭiṃ bhindiṃsūti bhagavato vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā kaṭṭhehi ca pāsāṇehi ca taṃ kuṭikaṃ vikirantā bhindiṃsu.
那时,具寿达尼耶这段话的简要意思是:达尼耶在一边坐着白昼休息,听到那个声音后,就来到那些比丘那里,问他们:“贤友们,你们为什么拆我的小屋?”听说“是世尊让人拆的”之后,他因为性情柔顺,就接受了。巴利
Atha kho āyasmā dhaniyotiādimhi ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – dhaniyo ekapasse divāvihāraṃ nisinno tena saddena āgantvā te bhikkhū ‘‘kissa me tumhe, āvuso, kuṭiṃ bhindathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘bhagavā bhedāpetī’’ti sutvā subbacatāya sampaṭicchi.
那么,世尊为什么要费那么大力气,让人拆掉专门为自己住而搭的小屋呢?难道这里面没有花费过工夫吗?虽然确实花过工夫,但世尊还是让人拆掉了,因为那是不如法的;因为那是外道的标志,所以让人拆掉了。这是这里的判定。不过,注释书里还提到了其他一些原因:为了怜悯众生、为了保护钵和衣、为了制止对住所的贪多等等。所以,即使是现在,如果有博学多闻、通达律藏的比丘,看到别的比丘拿着不如法的资具到处走,就把它砍断或拆毁,他也没有过错,既不应该被举罪,也不应该被提醒;不能说“我的资具被你毁了,把它还给我”。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā iminā atimahantena ussāhena attano vasanatthaṃ kataṃ kuṭikaṃ bhedāpesi, nanu etassettha vayakammampi atthīti? Kiñcāpi atthi, atha kho naṃ bhagavā akappiyāti bhindāpesi, titthiyadhajoti bhindāpesi. Ayamettha vinicchayo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana aññānipi kāraṇāni vuttāni – sattānuddayāya, pattacīvaraguttatthāya, senāsanabāhullapaasedhanāyātiādīni. Tasmā idānipi yo bhikkhu bahussuto vinayaññū aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ akappiyaṃ parikkhāraṃ gahetvā vicarantaṃ disvā taṃ chindāpeyya vā bhindāpeyya vā anupavajjo , so neva codetabbo na sāretabbo; na taṃ labbhā vattuṃ ‘‘mama parikkhāro tayā nāsito, taṃ me dehī’’ti.
律藏之外的判定巴利
Pāḷimuttakavinicchayo
这里讲的是律藏之外对如法、不如法资具的判断:有些人用五色线缝制贝叶伞的内侧或外侧,做成彩饰,这不允许。如果用一种颜色的线——青色、黄色或任何一种颜色的线——缝制伞的内侧或外侧,或者绑缚伞柄的握把、伞骨的框架,则允许。但那只是为了加固,不是为了彩饰。在伞叶上,切成鳄齿形或半月形,不允许。在伞柄上,像在家屋柱子那样做成瓶状或猛兽形像,不允许。即使到处用针尖刻出线条,也不允许。瓶状和猛兽形像要打碎后才能持用。线条也要磨掉或去掉,或者用线把伞柄缠起来。在伞柄顶端,做成蘑菇形状则允许。为了防止被风吹动,人们用绳子系住伞轮,绑在伞柄上,并在绑缚的地方旋刻出环状线条,这是允许的。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ pāḷimuttako kappiyākappiyaparikkhāravinicchayo – keci tālapaṇṇacchattaṃ anto vā bahi vā pañcavaṇṇena suttena sibbantā vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ karonti, taṃ na vaṭṭati. Ekavaṇṇena pana nīlena vā pītakena vā yena kenaci suttena anto vā bahi vā sibbituṃ chattadaṇḍaggāhakaṃ salākapañjaraṃ vā vinandhituṃ vaṭṭati. Tañca kho thirakaraṇatthaṃ, na vaṇṇamaṭṭhatthāya. Chattapaṇṇakesu makaradantakaṃ vā aḍḍhacandakaṃ vā chindituṃ na vaṭṭati. Chattadaṇḍe gehathambhesu viya ghaṭako vā vāḷarūpakaṃ vā na vaṭṭati. Sacepi sabbattha āraggena lekhā dinnā hoti, sāpi na vaṭṭati. Ghaṭakampi vāḷarūpampi bhinditvā dhāretabbaṃ. Lekhāpi ghaṃsitvā vā apanetabbā, suttakena vā daṇḍo veṭhetabbo. Daṇḍabunde pana ahicchattakasaṇṭhānaṃ vaṭṭati. Vātappahārena acalanatthaṃ chattamaṇḍalikaṃ rajjukehi gāhetvā daṇḍe bandhanti, tasmiṃ bandhanaṭṭhāne valayamiva ukkiritvā lekhaṃ ṭhapenti, sā vaṭṭati.
为了装饰衣袍,用各种线缝成像蜈蚣一样的东西,安上客条,或者做其他任何针线活的变形——比如在布头或边缘做辫子、链子之类的——这一切都不允许,只有平常的针线活才可以。做纽扣条和纽扣孔条时,做成八角形或十六角形,在上面做出门柱形、杵形等图案,或者刻出蟹眼,这一切都不允许,只有四角形才可以。衣角上的线结,在染过色的衣上如果难以辨认,是可以的。不可以把衣浸到酸粥水、米粉糊之类的东西里。但在做衣的时候,为了洗掉手上的污垢、针上的锈垢等,以及衣脏了要洗的时候,是可以的。不可以把香料、虫漆或油放进染料里。巴利
Cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya nānāsuttakehi satapadīsadisaṃ sibbantā āgantukapaṭṭaṃ ṭhapenti, aññampi yaṃkiñci sūcikammavikāraṃ karonti, paṭṭamukhe vā pariyante vā veṇiṃ vā saṅkhalikaṃ vā, evamādi sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati, pakatisūcikammameva vaṭṭati. Gaṇṭhikapaṭṭakañca pāsakapaṭṭañca aṭṭhakoṇampi soḷasakoṇampi karonti, tattha agghiyagayamuggarādīni dassenti, kakkaṭakkhīni ukkiranti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati, catukoṇameva vaṭṭati. Koṇasuttapiḷakā ca cīvare ratte duviññeyyarūpā vaṭṭanti. Kañjikapiṭṭhakhaliādīsu cīvaraṃ pakkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati. Cīvarakammakāle pana hatthamalasūcimalādīnaṃ dhovanatthaṃ kiliṭṭhakāle ca dhovanatthaṃ vaṭṭati. Gandhaṃ vā lākhaṃ vā telaṃ vā rajane pakkhipituṃ na vaṭṭati.
染好衣之后,不能用贝壳、宝石或任何东西去摩擦它。不能跪在地上,用双手抓住衣在槽里搓揉。但把衣放在槽里或木板上,让人抓住两端,用手拍打,这是可以的;不过也不能用拳头捶。古代的长老们甚至不把衣放进槽里。一个人拿着站着,另一个人把衣放在手上,用手拍打。衣的耳线是不允许的,染色的时候应该剪掉。不过世尊曾经开许说“诸比丘,我允许耳线”,那是为了染色时悬挂用的,应该在顺风处做成环扣系上。在纽扣上为了好看而刻线条或做凸粒,也是不允许的,要去掉之后才能用。巴利
Cīvaraṃ rajitvā saṅkhena vā maṇinā vā yena kenaci na ghaṭṭetabbaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ jāṇukāni nihantvā hatthehi gahetvā doṇiyampi na ghaṃsitabbaṃ. Doṇiyaṃ vā phalake vā ṭhapetvā ante gāhāpetvā hatthehi paharituṃ pana vaṭṭati; tampi muṭṭhinā na kātabbaṃ. Porāṇakattherā pana doṇiyampi na ṭhapesuṃ. Eko gahetvā tiṭṭhati; aparo hatthe katvā hatthena paharati. Cīvarassa kaṇṇasuttakaṃ na vaṭṭati, rajitakāle chinditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṇṇasuttaka’’nti (mahāva. 344) evaṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ anuvāte pāsakaṃ katvā bandhitabbaṃ rajanakāle lagganatthāya. Gaṇṭhikepi sobhākaraṇatthaṃ lekhā vā piḷakā vā na vaṭṭati, nāsetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
在钵或盘子上用尖针刺划线,不管是在里面还是外面,都不允许。把钵装上转轮,磨光后再烧制,如果想着“我要做成宝石色”,不允许;但做成油色,则允许。在钵的圆形表面上做壁画式的装饰纹样,不允许;但刻上摩羯鱼齿纹,则允许。巴利
Patte vā thālake vā āraggena lekhaṃ karonti, anto vā bahi vā na vaṭṭati. Pattaṃ bhamaṃ āropetvā majjitvā pacanti – ‘‘maṇivaṇṇaṃ karissāmā’’ti, na vaṭṭati; telavaṇṇo pana vaṭṭati. Pattamaṇḍale bhittikammaṃ na vaṭṭati, makaradantakaṃ pana vaṭṭati.
在扇风伞盖的上面、下面,或者在扇风箱的内部,都不允许刻画图案;但在伞盖口沿处,则允许刻画。巴利
Dhamakaraṇachattakassa upari vā heṭṭhā vā dhamakaraṇakucchiyaṃ vā lekhā na vaṭṭati, chattamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ panassa lekhā vaṭṭati.
为了腰带好看,人们在各处把线编成双股,做出蟹眼一样的凸起,这是不允许的。不过,在两端为了带端牢固而编成双股,是允许的。但在带端做成罐形、鳄鱼嘴形或水蛇头形之类的任何变形,都不允许。在各处露出线眼,做成花环纹、藤蔓纹等再编成腰带,也不允许。只有做成笔直的鱼骨形、棕榈叶形或光滑的板条形来编,才允许。腰带的带端,一条允许,两条、三条、四条也允许;超过这个数就不允许了。绳子做的腰带,只有一条是允许的。环钏形状的腰带,哪怕一条也不允许。不过,带端做成环钏形是允许的。把多条绳子合在一起,再用一条绳子不间断地缠绕做成的,不能叫“多股绳”,这种是允许的。巴利
Kāyabandhanassa sobhanatthaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ diguṇaṃ suttaṃ koṭṭenti, kakkaṭacchīni uṭṭhapenti, na vaṭṭati. Ubhosu pana antesu dasāmukhassa thirabhāvāya diguṇaṃ koṭṭetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dasāmukhe pana ghaṭakaṃ vā makaramukhaṃ vā deḍḍubhasīsaṃ vā yaṃkiñci vikārarūpaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tattha tattha acchīni dassetvā mālākammalatākammādīni vā katvā koṭṭitakāyabandhanampi na vaṭṭati. Ujukameva pana macchakaṇṭakaṃ vā khajjuripattakaṃ vā maṭṭhapaṭṭikaṃ vā katvā koṭṭituṃ vaṭṭati. Kāyabandhanassa dasā ekā vaṭṭati, dve tīṇi cattāripi vaṭṭanti; tato paraṃ na vaṭṭanti. Rajjukakāyabandhanaṃ ekameva vaṭṭati. Pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ pana ekampi na vaṭṭati. Dasā pana pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānāpi vaṭṭati. Bahurajjuke ekato katvā ekena nirantaraṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ bahurajjukanti na vattabbaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭati.
在腰带扣上,不允许有任何八吉祥等变形图案,只允许划一条分界线。在带扣两端,为了让它更牢固而做成小罐形,这也是允许的。巴利
Kāyabandhanavidhe aṭṭhamaṅgalādikaṃ yaṃkiñci vikārarūpaṃ na vaṭṭati, paricchedalekhāmattaṃ vaṭṭati. Vidhakassa ubhosu antesu thirakaraṇatthāya ghaṭakaṃ karonti, ayampi vaṭṭati.
眼药管上不能有女人、男人、四足兽、鸟等形象,也不能有花环纹、藤蔓纹、摩羯牙纹、牛尿纹、半月纹之类的变形图案。要把它磨掉或削掉,或者用线缠到看不出原来的纹样,才能使用。眼药管只允许是笔直的四角形、八角形或十六角形。管的下端可以有两三道环形线。管颈处为了系住盖子,可以有一道环形线。巴利
Añjaniyaṃ itthipurisacatuppadasakuṇarūpaṃ vā mālākamma-latākammamakaradantaka-gomuttakaaḍḍhacandakādibhedaṃ vā vikārarūpaṃ na vaṭṭati. Ghaṃsitvā vā chinditvā vā yathā vā na paññāyati, tathā suttena veṭhetvā vaḷañjetabbā. Ujukameva pana caturaṃsā vā aṭṭhaṃsā vā soḷasaṃsā vā añjanī vaṭṭati. Heṭṭhato pissā dve vā tisso vā vaṭṭalekhāyo vaṭṭanti. Gīvāyampissā pidhānakabandhanatthaṃ ekā vaṭṭalekhā vaṭṭati.
眼药棒上也不允许有彩色装饰。眼药袋上也不允许用任何杂色线做彩色装饰。钥匙袋也是同样的原则。钥匙上不允许有彩色装饰,钥匙盒也一样。不过,在这里用单色线随便怎么缝都是允许的。巴利
Añjanisalākāyapi vaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ na vaṭṭati. Añjanitthavikāyampi yaṃkiñci nānāvaṇṇena suttena vaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ na vaṭṭati. Eseva nayo kuñcikākosakepi. Kuñcikāya vaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ na vaṭṭati, tathā sipāṭikāyaṃ. Ekavaṇṇasuttena panettha yena kenaci sibbituṃ vaṭṭati.
在锥子上,环形宝珠或者其他彩绘装饰都不允许。但在颈部,刻一条分界线是允许的。在小刀上,不管做宝珠还是凸粒,任何凸起的东西都不允许。但在刀柄上,刻一条分界线是允许的。他们做指甲剪只做成带纹路的,所以那个是允许的。在上火钻木、下火钻木、火钻弓或者上压棒上,花鬘纹之类的任何彩绘装饰都不允许;不过压棒中间有一个圆面,在那里只刻一条分界线是允许的。他们做夹针器,用来夹住针磨擦,在那上面,摩羯鱼口形之类的任何彩绘装饰都不允许;但为了夹针只做一个口形,那是允许的。巴利
Ārakaṇṭakepi vaṭṭamaṇikaṃ vā aññaṃ vā vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭati. Gīvāyaṃ pana paricchedalekhā vaṭṭati. Pipphalikepi maṇikaṃ vā piḷakaṃ vā yaṃkiñci uṭṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Daṇḍake pana paricchedalekhā vaṭṭati. Nakhacchedanaṃ valitakaṃyeva karonti, tasmā taṃ vaṭṭati. Uttarāraṇiyaṃ vā adharāraṇiyaṃ vā araṇidhanuke vā uparipellanadaṇḍake vā mālākammādikaṃ yaṃkiñci vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭati, pellanadaṇḍakassa pana vemajjhe maṇḍalaṃ hoti, tattha paricchedalekhāmattaṃ vaṭṭati. Sūcisaṇḍāsaṃ karonti, yena sūciṃ ḍaṃsāpetvā ghaṃsanti, tattha makaramukhādikaṃ yaṃkiñci vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭati, sūciḍaṃsanatthaṃ pana mukhamattaṃ hoti, taṃ vaṭṭati.
在截齿木刀上,任何彩绘装饰都不允许;只能用如法的金属,在两侧做成笔直的四角形或八角形,这样才允许。在剪刀柄上,任何彩绘装饰也不允许;下面一条或两条环形刻线,上面一个蛇伞形或花蕾大小的装饰,这样才允许。巴利
Dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsiyampi yaṃkiñci vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭati, ujukameva kappiyalohena ubhosu vā passesu caturaṃsaṃ vā aṭṭhaṃsaṃ vā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati. Kattaradaṇḍepi yaṃkiñci vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭati, heṭṭhā ekā vā dve vā vaṭṭalekhā upari ahicchattakamakuḷamattañca vaṭṭati.
在油罐、角器、管器、葫芦器或木果器上,除了不能画女人像和男人像以外,其余一切彩绘装饰都可以。巴利
Telabhājanesu visāṇe vā nāḷiyaṃ vā alābuke vā āmaṇḍasārake vā ṭhapetvā itthirūpaṃ purisarūpañca avasesaṃ sabbampi vaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ vaṭṭati.
在床、椅、褥垫、枕头、铺地物、擦脚布、经行垫、扫帚、垃圾簸箕、染衣槽、饮水瓢、饮水罐、足凳、板座、环架、杖架、钵盖、扇子、拂尘这些物品上,做各种花鬘图案之类的彩绘装饰,都是允许的。至于住处,在门板、窗板等上面,即使做全部由宝石制成的彩绘装饰,也是允许的。巴利
Mañcapīṭhe bhisibimbohane bhūmattharaṇe pādapuñchane caṅkamanabhisiyā sammuñjaniyaṃ kacavarachaḍḍanake rajanadoṇikāya pānīyauḷuṅke pānīyaghaṭe pādakathalikāya phalakapīṭhake valayādhārake daṇḍādhārakepattapidhāne tālavaṇṭe vījaneti – etesu sabbaṃ mālākammādivaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ vaṭṭati. Senāsane pana dvārakavāṭavātapānakavāṭādīsu sabbaratanamayampi vaṇṇamaṭṭhakammaṃ vaṭṭati.
关于住处,除了有争议的住处之外,没有什么需要禁止的。所谓有争议的住处,是指别人界内由国王宠臣建造的住处。所以,对那些建造这种住处的人,应当说:“不要在我们的界内建造住处。”如果他们不听,照样建造,就应当再说:“不要这样做,不要对我们的布萨和自恣造成障碍,不要破坏和合。就算你们把住处建成了,它也不会留在建成的那个地方。”如果他们仍然强行建造,等到他们那边有惭有愧的僧众增多,而且能够获得如法的裁决时,就应当派人去对他们说:“把你们的住处搬走。”如果派去说了三次,他们搬走了,那很好;如果不搬走,那么除了菩提树和塔庙以外,其余的住处都应当拆除。但不应该使它们变成无法使用,而应当按顺序把屋顶、椽子、砖瓦等取下来,然后派人送还给他们,说:“把你们的建筑材料搬走。”如果他们搬走,那很好;如果不搬走,后来那些建筑材料被雪、雨、风、日晒等弄坏,或者被贼偷走,或者被火烧掉,界内的比丘没有过失,不能指责说“你们毁坏了我们的建筑材料”,也不能说“这是你们的责任”。而由界内比丘自己建造的,那才是真正建好了。巴利
Senāsane kiñci paṭisedhetabbaṃ natthi, aññatra viruddhasenāsanā. Viruddhasenāsanaṃ nāma aññesaṃ sīmāya rājavallabhehi katasenāsanaṃ vuccati, tasmā ye tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ karonti, te vattabbā – ‘‘mā amhākaṃ sīmāya senāsanaṃ karothā’’ti. Anādiyitvā karontiyeva, punapi vattabbā – ‘‘mā evaṃ akattha, mā amhākaṃ uposathapavāraṇānaṃ antarāyamakattha, mā sāmaggiṃ bhindittha, tumhākaṃ senāsanaṃ katampi kataṭṭhāne na ṭhassatī’’ti. Sace balakkārena karontiyeva, yadā tesaṃ lajjiparisā ussannā hoti, sakkā ca hoti laddhuṃ dhammiko vinicchayo, tadā tesaṃ pesetabbaṃ – ‘‘tumhākaṃ āvāsaṃ harathā’’ti. Sace yāva tatiyaṃ pesite haranti, sādhu; no ce haranti, ṭhapetvā bodhiñca cetiyañca avasesasenāsanāni bhinditabbāni, no ca kho aparibhogaṃ karontehi, paṭipāṭiyā pana chadana-gopānasī-iṭṭhakādīni apanetvā tesaṃ pesetabbaṃ – ‘‘tumhākaṃ dabbasambhāre harathā’’ti. Sace haranti, sādhu; no ce haranti, atha tesu dabbasambhāresu himavassavātātapādīhi pūtibhūtesu vā corehi vā haṭesu agginā vā daḍḍhesu sīmasāmikā bhikkhū anupavajjā, na labbhā codetuṃ ‘‘tumhehi amhākaṃ dabbasambhārā nāsitā’’ti vā ‘‘tumhākaṃ gīvā’’ti vā. Yaṃ pana sīmasāmikehi bhikkhūhi kataṃ, taṃ sukatameva hotīti.
86 86. 不过,为了说明小屋被拆毁后达尼耶的思虑,以及他为了重新建小屋而付出的努力,所以说了“那时,尊者……”等话。其中,“木材库的看守”是指国王木材仓库里管木材的人。“国王所取之木”是指被国王取走的木材,意思是已经被国王接收的木材。“城镇修缮用材”是指用来修缮城镇的材料。“为灾难而存放的”是指因为火灾、或者因为年久老旧、或者因为被敌国围攻等原因,城门、瞭望塔、王宫、象厩等遭到毁坏,这就叫灾难。为了这个目的而存放的,就是这个意思。“令人切割成一段一段”是指他按照自己小屋的尺寸,把木材在顶端、中部、根部各自截断成一段一段。巴利
86. Evaṃ bhinnāya pana kuṭikāya dhaniyassa parivitakkañca puna kuṭikaraṇatthāya ussāhañca dassetuṃ ‘‘atha kho āyasmato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dārugahe gaṇakoti rañño dārubhaṇḍāgāre dārugopako. Devagahadārūnīti devena gahitadārūni. Rājapaṭiggahitabhūtāni dārūnīti attho. Nagarapaṭisaṅkhārikānīti nagarassa paṭisaṅkhārūpakaraṇāni. Āpadatthāya nikkhittānīti aggidāhena vā purāṇabhāvena vā paṭirājūparundhanādinā vā gopuraṭṭālakarājantepurahatthisālādīnaṃ vipatti āpadāti vuccati. Tadatthaṃ nikkhittānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chedāpetvāti attano kuṭiyā pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā kiñci agge kiñci majjhe kiñci mūle khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ karonto chedāpesi.
87 “瓦萨卡罗”是那个婆罗门的名字。“摩揭陀大臣”是指在摩揭陀国担任大臣的人,拥有很大的权势,或者是摩揭陀国王的大臣,意思就是大官。“正在巡察”是指到各处走动、观察。“说”是对有权势者的下属人员的一种称呼。“命令捆绑”:那个婆罗门本来就对他心怀嫉妒。他听到国王只说“命令吧”,而没有说“召来”,于是心想:“我要先绑住他的手和脚,再下令。”于是就命令人捆绑。具寿达尼耶是怎么看见的呢?据说他通过自己的某种方巴利
87.Vassakāroti tassa brāhmaṇassa nāmaṃ. Magadhamahāmattoti magadharaṭṭhe mahāmatto, mahatiyā issariyamattāya samannāgato, magadharañño vā mahāmatto; mahāamaccoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anusaññāyamānoti tattha tattha gantvā paccavekkhamāno. Bhaṇeti issarānaṃ nīcaṭṭhānikapurisālapanaṃ. Bandhaṃ āṇāpesīti brāhmaṇo pakatiyāpi tasmiṃ issāpakatova. So rañño ‘‘āṇāpehī’’ti vacanaṃ sutvā yasmā ‘‘pakkosāpehī’’ti rañño na vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘naṃ hatthesu ca pādesu ca bandhaṃ katvā āṇāpessāmī’’ti bandhaṃ āṇāpesi. Addasa kho āyasmā dhaniyoti kathaṃ addasa? So kira attanā lesena dārūnaṃ haṭabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘nissaṃsayaṃ esa dārūnaṃ kāraṇā rājakulato vadhaṃ vā bandhaṃ vā pāpuṇissati, tadā naṃ ahameva mocessāmī’’ti niccakālaṃ tassa pavattiṃ suṇantoyeva vicarati. Tasmā takhaṇaññeva gantvā addasa. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasa kho āyasmā dhaniyo’’ti. Dārūnaṃ kiccāti dārūnaṃ kāraṇā. Purāhaṃ haññāmīti ahaṃ purā haññāmi; yāva ahaṃ na haññāmi, tāva tvaṃ eyyāsīti attho.
88 “来吧,尊者,请回忆一下。”这里“来吧”是个表示催促的虚词。“初次灌顶后”意思是灌顶之后最初的时候。“说了这样的话”是指“沙门婆罗门们应当享用已经布施给他们的草、木、水”这样的话。你灌顶之后最初就说过了这样的话,现在你自己说出来,是记得还是不记得呢?据说国王们刚灌顶完就会让人敲着法鼓巡行宣告:“沙门婆罗门们应当享用已经布施给他们的草、木、水。”他就是针对这个说的。“我是针对他们说的”意思是:我这话是针对那些即使对极小的事也会心生懊悔、已经止息了恶行的沙门婆罗门取用草、木、水而说的,不是针对像你这样的人——这是他的意思。“而且那是在森林里没有归属的”意思是那些草、木、水在森林中是没有主的;他表明自己就是针对这个说的。巴利
88.Iṅgha, bhante, sarāpehīti ettha iṅghāti codanatthe nipāto. Paṭhamābhisittoti abhisitto hutvā paṭhamaṃ. Evarūpiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti ‘‘dinnaññeva samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṃ paribhuñjantū’’ti imaṃ evarūpiṃ vācaṃ abhisitto hutvā paṭhamameva yaṃ tvaṃ abhāsi, taṃ sayameva bhāsitvā idāni sarasi, na sarasīti vuttaṃ hoti. Rājāno kira abhisittamattāyeva dhammabheriṃ carāpenti – ‘‘dinnaññeva samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṃ paribhuñjantū’’ti taṃ sandhāya esa vadati. Tesaṃ mayā sandhāya bhāsitanti tesaṃ appamattakepi kukkuccāyantānaṃ samitabāhitapāpānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhodakaharaṇaṃ sandhāya mayā etaṃ bhāsitaṃ; na tumhādisānanti adhippāyo. Tañca kho araññe apariggahitanti tañca tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṃ yaṃ araññe apariggahitaṃ hoti; etaṃ sandhāya mayā bhāsitanti dīpeti.
“你因毛而得以脱身”这句话里,毛好比什么呢?就是出家的标志。这话说的是什么意思呢?譬如有些骗子说“我们要吃肉”,就抓来一只毛很值钱的羊。另一个明白人看见了,心想:“这只羊的肉大概只值一个钱,可它的毛每次剪下来都值好多钱。”于是拿两只没这种好毛的羊把那只羊换过来。这样,那只羊因为遇到明白人,就靠它的毛脱了身。同样,你因为造了那个业,本该被处死或捆绑。可是,阿拉汉的旗帜在善士们看来是不可加害的形象,而你又因为在教法里出家,身上带着这个作为出家标志的阿拉汉旗帜。所以你靠着这出家标志的毛,就像那只羊遇到明白人一样,得以脱身。巴利
Lomena tvaṃ muttosīti ettha lomamiva lomaṃ, kiṃ pana taṃ? Pabbajjāliṅgaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā nāma dhuttā ‘‘maṃsaṃ khādissāmā’’ti mahagghalomaṃ eḷakaṃ gaṇheyyuṃ. Tamenaṃ añño viññupuriso disvā ‘‘imassa eḷakassa maṃsaṃ kahāpaṇamattaṃ agghati. Lomāni pana lomavāre lomavāre aneke kahāpaṇe agghantī’’ti dve alomake eḷake datvā gaṇheyya. Evaṃ so eḷako viññupurisamāgamma lomena mucceyya. Evameva tvaṃ imassa kammassa katattā vadhabandhanāraho. Yasmā pana arahaddhajo sabbhi avajjharūpo, tvañca sāsane pabbajitattā yaṃ pabbajjāliṅgabhūtaṃ arahaddhajaṃ dhāresi. Tasmā tvaṃ iminā pabbajjāliṅgalomena eḷako viya viññupurisamāgamma muttosīti.
人们会讥嫌:在国王的集会中,当他讲说时,人们当面和背后听到后,就在各处讥嫌、不满、轻视,他们思量、观察,或者从低劣的角度去想——这就是其含义。所谓“khiyyanti”,就是他们宣说、揭露他的过失。所谓“vipācenti”,就是加以详细阐述、到处散布;这个含义应当依据语言学来理解。这里的具体连接是——心里想着“这些释迦子沙门是无惭无愧的”等等,就是讥嫌;说着“他们没有沙门性”等等,就是揭露过失;将“这些沙门已远离沙门性”等等在各处详细阐述、散布,就是vipācenti。按照这种方式,这些词句在后文各处出现时,也应当依照那里所出现的词句来理解其连接。“梵行者”指行最胜之行。“沙门性”即沙门的状态。“梵性”即最胜的状态。其余内容含义浅显易懂。巴利
Manussā ujjhāyantīti rañño parisati bhāsamānassa sammukhā ca parammukhā ca sutvā tattha tattha manussā ujjhāyanti, avajjhāyanti, avajānantā taṃ jhāyanti olokenti lāmakato vā cintentīti attho. Khiyyantīti tassa avaṇṇaṃ kathenti pakāsenti. Vipācentīti vitthārikaṃ karonti, sabbattha pattharanti; ayañca attho saddasatthānusārena veditabbo. Ayaṃ panettha yojanā – ‘‘alajjino ime samaṇā sakyaputtiyā’’tiādīni cintentā ujjhāyanti. ‘‘Natthi imesaṃ sāmañña’’ntiādīni bhaṇantā khiyyanti. ‘‘Apagatā ime sāmaññā’’tiādīni tattha tattha vitthārentā vipācentīti. Etena nayena imesaṃ padānaṃ ito parampi tattha tattha āgatapadānurūpena yojanā veditabbā. Brahmacārinoti seṭṭhacārino. Sāmaññanti samaṇabhāvo. Brahmaññanti seṭṭhabhāvo. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
在“国王的木材”等语句中,“他将拿取未给予之物”这一句是起指责念头的意思。而为了指出他所拿的正是那未给予之物,才说“国王的木材”。如此,当言辞表达有所不同时,应当由能辨别而不混淆的人了知其中的含义。“古时的司法官大臣”:因为他在出家成为比丘之前,在家时曾从事审判断案的事务,所以被称为“司法官”,是一位大官。巴利
Rañño dārūnītiādimhi ‘‘adinnaṃ ādiyissatī’’ti ayaṃ ujjhāyanattho. Yaṃ panetaṃ adinnaṃ ādiyi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rañño dārūnī’’ti vuttaṃ. Iti vacanabhede asammuyhantehi attho veditabbo. Purāṇavohāriko mahāmattoti bhikkhubhāvato purāṇe gihikāle vinicchayavohāre niyuttattā ‘‘vohāriko’’ti saṅkhaṃ gato mahāamacco.
那时,世尊对那位比丘这样说道。世尊自己本来就了知世间惯例,也了知过去诸佛的制定——过去的诸佛以这个限度制定波罗夷,以这个限度制定偷兰遮,以这个限度制定恶作。即便如此,如果世尊不先与其它了知世间惯例的人商量,只凭四分之一钱就制定波罗夷,就会有人指责说:所谓的戒律防护,哪怕对一位比丘来说也是不可估量、不可计算的,像大地、大海、虚空一样极其广大,世尊怎么能只凭四分之一钱就把它毁掉呢?这样一来,那些不了知如来智慧之力的人就会扰乱学处,已经制定的学处也无法在恰当的位置上站住。反之,与了知世间惯例的人商量之后再制定,就不会有这种指责。人们反而会这样说:连在家人都能因为四分之一钱就处死盗贼、捆绑盗贼、驱逐盗贼,世尊为什么不应驱逐这个连别人所有的一根草、一片叶都不该拿的出家人呢?而且他们也会了知如来的智慧之力。所制定的学处也将不可动摇,稳稳地安立在恰当的位置上。因此,世尊想要与了知世间惯例的人商量之后再制定,便环视整个大众。那时,世尊看见那位比丘坐在不远处,就对他说:比丘,摩揭陀国的频婆娑罗王捉到盗贼后,是以多少来处死、捆绑或驱逐的呢?巴利
Atha kho bhagavā taṃ bhikkhuṃ etadavocāti bhagavā sāmaṃyeva lokavohārampi jānāti, atītabuddhānaṃ paññattimpi jānāti – ‘‘pubbepi buddhā ettakena pārājikaṃ paññapenti, ettakena thullaccayaṃ, ettakena dukkaṭa’’nti. Evaṃ santepi sace aññehi lokavohāraviññūhi saddhiṃ asaṃsanditvā pādamattena pārājikaṃ paññapeyya, tenassa siyuṃ vattāro ‘‘sīlasaṃvaro nāma ekabhikkhussapi appameyyo asaṅkhyeyyo mahāpathavī-samudda-ākāsāni viya ativitthiṇṇo, kathañhi nāma bhagavā pādamattakena nāsesī’’ti! Tato tathāgatassa ñāṇabalaṃ ajānantā sikkhāpadaṃ kopeyyuṃ, paññattampi sikkhāpadaṃ yathāṭhāne na tiṭṭheyya. Lokavohāraviññūhi pana saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā paññatte so upavādo na hoti. Aññadatthu evaṃ vattāro honti – ‘‘imehi nāma agārikāpi pādamattena coraṃ hanantipi bandhantipi pabbājentipi. Kasmā bhagavā pabbajitaṃ na nāsessati; yena parasantakaṃ tiṇasalākamattampi na gahetabba’’nti! Tathāgatassa ca ñāṇabalaṃ jānissanti. Paññattampi ca sikkhāpadaṃ akuppaṃ bhavissati, yathāṭhāne ṭhassati. Tasmā lokavohāraviññūhi saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā paññapetukāmo sabbāvantaṃ parisaṃ anuvilokento atha kho bhagavā avidūre nisinnaṃ disvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ etadavoca ‘‘kittakena kho bhikkhu rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro coraṃ gahetvā hanati vā bandhati vā pabbājeti vā’’ti.
这里,“摩揭陀人”指摩揭陀国的君主。“有军队者”指拥有军队。“频婆娑罗”是他的名字。“或驱逐”指逐出国境。这里其余的内容意思都很清楚。“五摩沙迦为四分之一”:当时在王舍城,一迦诃波那等于二十摩沙迦,所以五摩沙迦就是四分之一。按照这个标准,在一切国土中,迦诃波那的四分之一就应理解为“四分之一”。而且这是按古代的蓝色迦诃波那来算,不是按其他如鲁陀罗达摩迦等钱币来算。因为以这四分之一,过去诸佛也制定了波罗夷,未来诸佛也将制定。对一切诸佛来说,波罗夷事或波罗夷并没有差别。就是这四种波罗夷事,就是这四种波罗夷,不会比这更少或更多。因此,世尊呵责檀尼耶之后,正是以四分之一来制定第二波罗夷,而说:“若比丘,以盗心取未给予之物……”等。巴利
Tattha māgadhoti magadhānaṃ issaro. Seniyoti senāya sampanno. Bimbisāroti tassa nāmaṃ. Pabbājeti vāti raṭṭhato nikkhāmeti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Pañcamāsako pādoti tadā rājagahe vīsatimāsako kahāpaṇo hoti, tasmā pañcamāsako pādo. Etena lakkhaṇena sabbajanapadesu kahāpaṇassa catuttho bhāgo ‘‘pādo’’ti veditabbo. So ca kho porāṇassa nīlakahāpaṇassa vasena, na itaresaṃ rudradāmakādīnaṃ. Tena hi pādena atītabuddhāpi pārājikaṃ paññapesuṃ, anāgatāpi paññapessanti. Sabbabuddhānañhi pārājikavatthumhi vā pārājike vā nānattaṃ natthi. Imāneva cattāri pārājikavatthūni . Imāneva cattāri pārājikāni. Ito ūnaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā natthi. Tasmā bhagavāpi dhaniyaṃ vigarahitvā pādeneva dutiyapārājikaṃ paññapento ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu adinnaṃ theyyasaṅkhāta’’ntiādimāha.
就这样,世尊以断除根本的方式牢牢制定第二波罗夷之后,为了后来另外的随制,又发生了染衣布料这件事。为了说明它的发生,才说了这句话:“就这样,世尊为诸比丘制定了这条学处。”它的含义以及与随制的关联,应当依照第一波罗夷注释中所说的方式来了知。就像这里一样,从这以后的一切学处也都是如此。凡是先前已经说过的,就全部省略,只对后面越来越新的、之前没讲过的内容加以注释。因为如果对已经说过的方式再再注释,那注释什么时候才能到头呢!所以,凡是先前已经说过的,都应当好好留意,在各处了知其含义和文脉关联。至于任何之前没讲过、含义又不明显的内容,那就全部由我们来注释。巴利
Evaṃ mūlacchejjavasena daḷhaṃ katvā dutiyapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya rajakabhaṇḍikavatthu udapādi, tassuppattidīpanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘evañcidaṃ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti. Tassattho ca anupaññattisambandho ca paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ ito paresu sabbasikkhāpadesu. Yaṃ yaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ vajjetvā uparūpari apubbameva vaṇṇayissāma. Yadi hi yaṃ yaṃ vuttanayaṃ, taṃ taṃ punapi vaṇṇayissāma, kadā vaṇṇanāya antaṃ gamissāma! Tasmā yaṃ yaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ sādhukaṃ upasallakkhetvā tattha tattha attho ca yojanā ca veditabbā. Apubbaṃ pana yaṃkiñci anuttānatthaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ mayameva vaṇṇayissāma.
90 前往染衣处:就是去染衣的渡口。因为染工们在那里铺晒衣物,所以叫做染衣处。染衣物品:就是染工们的一捆东西。染工们傍晚进城时,把许多衣物各自捆成一捆。于是,在他们因为疏忽而没有看见的时候,拿走其中一捆偷走,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
90.Rajakattharaṇaṃ gantvāti rajakatitthaṃ gantvā; tañhi yasmā tattha rajakā vatthāni attharanti, tasmā rajakattharaṇanti vuccati. Rajakabhaṇḍikanti rajakānaṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ; rajakā sāyanhasamaye nagaraṃ pavisantā bahūni vatthāni ekekaṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhanti. Tato ekaṃ bhaṇḍikaṃ tesaṃ pamādena apassantānaṃ avaharitvā thenetvāti attho.
词句分别的注释巴利
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
92 “村庄名”等这样的说法,是为了说明前面“或村或林”这句话里所说的村和林有哪些种类。其中,如果某个村庄里只有一间小屋、一所房子,比如摩罗耶地区那样,这就叫单屋村。按照这个方式,其他几种也应该这样理解。所谓“非人”,是指因为完全没有人,而被夜叉占据的地方;或者人们因为某种原因离开之后,还打算再回来的地方。所谓“被围绕”,是指用砖墙等围起来,乃至至少用荆棘枝条等围起来。所谓“如牛卧般建立”,是指不按街道布局等来建,而是像牛在那里那里两三头卧下一样,在那里那里建起两三间房子而住。所谓“商队”,是指徒步商队、车乘商队等当中的任何一种。在这个学处里,应当知道聚落和城镇也都包括在“村”这个说法里了。巴利
92.Gāmonāmāti evamādi ‘‘gāmā vā araññā vā’’ti ettha vuttassa gāmassa ca araññassa ca pabhedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmiṃ gāme ekā eva kuṭi, ekaṃ gehaṃ seyyathāpi malayajanapade; ayaṃ ekakuṭiko gāmo nāma. Etena nayena aparepi veditabbā. Amanussonāma yo sabbaso vā manussānaṃ abhāvena yakkhapariggahabhūto; yato vā manussā kenaci kāraṇena punapi āgantukāmā eva apakkantā. Parikkhittonāma iṭṭhakapākāraṃ ādiṃ katvā antamaso kaṇṭakasākhāhipi parikkhitto. Gonisādiniviṭṭhonāma vīthisannivesādivasena anivisitvā yathā gāvo tattha tattha dve tayo nisīdanti, evaṃ tattha tattha dve tīṇi gharāni katvā niviṭṭho. Satthoti jaṅghasatthasakaṭasatthādīsu yo koci. Imasmiñca sikkhāpade nigamopi nagarampi gāmaggahaṇeneva gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
“村近边”等语,是为了说明林的界限。“站在门槛柱处”,是指像阿努拉德普勒城那样有两根门槛柱的村庄,站在它靠里的那根门槛柱处;因为按阿毗达摩的判定方式,它外面那根门槛柱算作林的范围。如果只有一根门槛柱,就指站在村门两侧臂膀之间的中间位置。即使没有门槛柱的地方,村门两侧臂膀之间的中间位置也就叫作“门槛柱”。因此说“站在村门两侧臂膀的中间”。“中等”是指力气中等,不是体型中等;既不是力气小,也不是力气大,意思是具有中等的力气。“土块所落处”,是指不像女人赶乌鸦那样直直举起手把土块扔出去,也不像泼水时那样把水泼出去,而是像年轻人为了展示自己的力量,伸出手臂把土块扔出去那样,土块落下的地方。至于落地后滚动所到之处,则不应算入。巴利
Gāmūpacārotiādi araññaparicchedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Indakhīle ṭhitassāti yassa gāmassa anurādhapurasseva dve indakhīlā, tassa abbhantarime indakhīle ṭhitassa; tassa hi bāhiro indakhīlo ābhidhammikanayena araññasaṅkhepaṃ gacchati. Yassa pana eko, tassa gāmadvārabāhānaṃ vemajjhe ṭhitassa. Yatrāpi hi indakhīlo natthi, tatra gāmadvārabāhānaṃ vemajjhameva ‘‘indakhīlo’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘gāmadvārabāhānaṃ vemajjhe ṭhitassā’’ti. Majjhimassāti thāmamajjhimassa, no pamāṇamajjhimassa, neva appathāmassa, na mahāthāmassa; majjhimathāmassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Leḍḍupātoti yathā mātugāmo kāke uḍḍāpento ujukameva hatthaṃ ukkhipitvā leḍḍuṃ khipati, yathā ca udakukkhepe udakaṃ khipanti, evaṃ akhipitvā yathā taruṇamanussā attano balaṃ dassentā bāhaṃ pasāretvā leḍḍuṃ khipanti, evaṃ khittassa leḍḍussa patanaṭṭhānaṃ. Patito pana luṭhitvā yattha gacchati, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
对于没有围墙的村庄,站在房屋周边范围内的中等力气男子扔出的土块落在哪里,这里进一步说:站在屋檐排水处的中等力气男子,他扬簸箕落下的地方或者杵落下的地方,就叫作房屋周边范围。库伦达注释中说:站在那个房屋周边范围内的人,他扔出的土块落在哪里,那就是村庄周边范围。大帕查利注释也是这样说的。大注释则先立了一个纲目:“什么叫房屋,什么叫房屋周边范围,什么叫村庄,什么叫村庄周边范围”,然后说:屋檐排水处以内,叫作房屋。而站在门口的女人倒掉洗器皿的水,水落下的地方;女人在屋内以平常方式向外扔出的簸箕或扫帚落下的地方;以及在房屋前面连接两个角落、中间留一个木针门、为了防止牛进去而做的围栏——这一切都叫作房屋周边范围。站在那个房屋周边范围内的中等力气男子,他扔出的土块落在哪里,哪里以内就叫作村庄。从那里再往外,另一个土块落下的地方以内,就叫作村庄周边范围。这就是这里的标准。就像在这里一样,在一切地方,凡是后来所说的注释说法或长老说法,都应当以这个标准来看待。巴利
Aparikkhittassa gāmassa gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātoti ettha pana nibbakosassa udakapātaṭṭhāne ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa suppapāto vā musalapāto vā gharūpacāro nāma. Tasmiṃ gharūpacāre ṭhitassa leḍḍupāto gāmūpacāroti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyampi tādisameva. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘gharaṃ nāma, gharūpacāro nāma, gāmo nāma, gāmūpacāro nāmā’’ti mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā nibbakosassa udakapātaṭṭhānabbhantaraṃ gharaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana dvāre ṭhito mātugāmo bhājanadhovanaudakaṃ chaḍḍeti, tassa patanaṭṭhānañca mātugāmeneva antogehe ṭhitena pakatiyā bahi khittassa suppassa vā sammuñjaniyā vā patanaṭṭhānañca, gharassa purato dvīsu koṇesu sambandhitvā majjhe rukkhasūcidvāraṃ ṭhapetvā gorūpānaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthaṃ kataparikkhepo ca ayaṃ sabbopi gharūpacāro nāma. Tasmiṃ gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātabbhantaraṃ gāmo nāma. Tato aññassa leḍḍupātassa abbhantaraṃ gāmūpacāro nāmāti vuttaṃ. Idamettha pamāṇaṃ. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbattha yo yo aṭṭhakathāvādo vā theravādo vā pacchā vuccati so pamāṇato daṭṭhabbo.
大注释里所说的这一点,看起来跟巴利文相矛盾。因为巴利文里只说了“站在屋界处的中等男子投掷土块”,就这么多。但注释里却把那个土块落下的地方当作村的界限,然后说从那以外就是村界,这是怎么回事?回答是:巴利文里说的确实是事实,但这里还要理解它的意图。而这个意图只有注释师们才清楚。所以,就像“站在屋界处”这句话里,屋界的特征虽然在巴利文中没有说,却按照注释所说的来采纳;同样,其余的部分也应该这样来采纳。巴利
Yañcetaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pāḷiyā viruddhamiva dissati. Pāḷiyañhi – ‘‘gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana taṃ leḍḍupātaṃ gāmasaṅkhepaṃ katvā tato paraṃ gāmūpacāro vuttoti? Vuccate – saccameva pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ , adhippāyo panettha veditabbo. So ca aṭṭhakathācariyānameva vidito. Tasmā yathā ‘‘gharūpacāre ṭhitassā’’ti ettha gharūpacāralakkhaṇaṃ pāḷiyaṃ avuttampi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavasena gahitaṃ. Evaṃ sesampi gahetabbaṃ.
这里的方法是:村有两种,有围栏的和没有围栏的。对有围栏的村来说,围栏本身就是界限。所以不必另外说它的界限,巴利文里就直接说:“所谓村界,就是站在有围栏村的界柱处的中等身材男子扔土块所落的地方。”但对没有围栏的村,就得说明村的界限。因此,为了显示这种村的界限,就说:“没有围栏的村,村界是站在屋界处的中等身材男子扔土块所落的地方。”村的界限一旦显示出来,村界的特征按前面所说的方式就能知道,所以不再重复说“站在那里中等身材男子扔土块所落的地方”。如果有人把站在屋界处扔土块所落的地方本身说成是“村界”,那他的屋界就成了村。这样一来,屋、屋界、村、村界这四种区分就混在一起了。而在非时入村等情况中,应当知道这里的判定是不混淆的。所以,要把巴利文和注释对照起来,按上面所说的方式来理解这里的村和村界。另外,如果一个村以前很大,后来家族衰败了,变得很小,那就应当以屋界处扔土块所落的地方来划定界限。而它先前的界限,不管是有围栏的还是没围栏的,都一概无效。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ nayo – idha gāmo nāma duvidho hoti – parikkhitto ca aparikkhitto ca. Tatra parikkhittassa parikkhepoyeva paricchedo. Tasmā tassa visuṃ paricchedaṃ avatvā ‘‘gāmūpacāro nāma parikkhittassa gāmassa indakhīle ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Aparikkhittassa pana gāmassa gāmaparicchedo vattabbo. Tasmā tassa gāmaparicchedadassanatthaṃ ‘‘aparikkhittassa gāmassa gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’’ti vuttaṃ. Gāmaparicchede ca dassite gāmūpacāralakkhaṇaṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva sakkā ñātunti puna ‘‘tattha ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’’ti na vuttaṃ. Yo pana gharūpacāre ṭhitassa leḍḍupātaṃyeva ‘‘gāmūpacāro’’ti vadati, tassa gharūpacāro gāmoti āpajjati. Tato gharaṃ, gharūpacāro, gāmo , gāmūpacāroti esa vibhāgo saṅkarīyati. Asaṅkarato cettha vinicchayo veditabbo vikāle gāmappavesanādīsu. Tasmā pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca saṃsanditvā vuttanayenevettha gāmo ca gāmūpacāro ca veditabbo. Yopi ca gāmo pubbe mahā hutvā pacchā kulesu naṭṭhesu appako hoti, so gharūpacārato leḍḍupāteneva paricchinditabbo. Purimaparicchedo panassa parikkhittassāpi aparikkhittassāpi appamāṇamevāti.
这里所说的“林野”,是指除了村庄和村庄周边区域之外——也就是除了上面所说的具有那种特征的村庄和村庄周边区域之外——在这个不偷盗学处里,剩下的部分应当知道就是“林野”。不过在阿毗达摩里说:“所谓林野,就是走出(村庄)之后,在界标以外的一切都叫林野。”(《分别论》529)在阿兰若学处里说:“所谓阿兰若住所,最少是五百弓。”(《波罗夷》654)应当知道,那是从界标开始,用架起的师匠之弓来量,有五百弓那么长。世尊这样分别“或从村庄、或从林野”这句话的含义时,为了堵住恶比丘狡辩的余地,开示了五种区分:家、家周边、村、村周边、林野。因此应当知道,不论是在家里、家周边、村里、村周边还是林野中,从价值一足价(五摩沙迦)的东西开始,偷取有主人的物品,就是波罗夷。巴利
Araññaṃ nāma ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañcāti imaṃ yathāvuttalakkhaṇaṃ gāmañca gāmūpacārañca ṭhapetvā imasmiṃ adinnādānasikkhāpade avasesaṃ ‘‘araññaṃ’’ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Abhidhamme pana ‘‘araññanti nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) vuttaṃ. Āraññakasikkhāpade ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) vuttaṃ. Taṃ indakhīlato paṭṭhāya āropitena ācariyadhanunā pañcadhanusatappamāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘gāmā vā araññā vā’’ti etassa atthaṃ vibhajantena ‘‘gharaṃ, gharūpacāro, gāmo, gāmūpacāro arañña’’nti pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsanisedhanatthaṃ pañca koṭṭhāsā dassitā. Tasmā ghare vā gharūpacāre vā gāme vā gāmūpacāre vā araññe vā pādagghanakato paṭṭhāya sassāmikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharantassa pārājikamevāti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明“不与取、称为偷盗、取用”等说法的含义,而说了“所谓不与取”等。其中,不与取:在嚼齿木学处里,即使是自己的东西,只要还没接受过来、属于允许食用而可吞下的,也叫不与取。但在这里,凡是别人所拥有、有主人的任何物品,只要那些主人没有通过身体或言语给出来,这就是“不与”;没有从自己手里或原来放置的地方放出去,这就是“未舍”;虽然还在原来的地方,但因为不放在心上而没有放弃,这就是“未弃”;由于安排了守护而被保护,这就是“被护”;放进箱子等里面保管起来,这就是“被守”;因为“这是我的”这种贪爱而执为己有,这就是“所执为己有”。由于主人以不舍弃、保护、守护这些方式持有那些物品,所以这些物品就是“他人所持有”。这就叫作不与取。巴利
Idāni ‘‘adinnaṃ theyyasaṅkhātaṃ ādiyeyyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthadassanatthaṃ ‘‘adinnaṃ nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha adinnanti dantaponasikkhāpade attano santakampi appaṭiggahitakaṃ kappiyaṃ ajjhoharaṇīyaṃ vuccati. Idha pana yaṃkiñci parapariggahitaṃ sassāmikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, tadetaṃ tehi sāmikehi kāyena vā vācāya vā na dinnanti adinnaṃ. Attano hatthato vā yathāṭhitaṭṭhānato vā na nissaṭṭhanti anissaṭṭhaṃ. Yathāṭhāne ṭhitampi anapekkhatāya na pariccattanti apariccattaṃ. Ārakkhasaṃvidhānena rakkhitattā rakkhitaṃ. Mañjūsādīsu pakkhipitvā gopitattā gopitaṃ. ‘‘Mama ida’’nti taṇhāmamattena mamāyitattā mamāyitaṃ. Tāhi apariccāgarakkhaṇagopanāhi tehi bhaṇḍasāmikehi parehi pariggahitanti parapariggahitaṃ. Etaṃ adinnaṃ nāma.
“称为偷盗”在这里是说:thena 就是盗贼,thenassa bhāvo 是盗贼的状态,也就是偷盗;这是偷取心的别名。“saṅkhā”和“saṅkhāta”在意义上是一回事,这是分类的别名,就像《经集》880 里说“因为想为缘而有戏论的分类”等地方那样。偷盗并且是分类,所以叫“偷盗分类”,意思就是被称为偷盗心的一个心的分类。这里是用主格来表达具格的意义,所以应当从意义上理解为“以偷盗分类(之心)”。而凡是以偷盗分类之心去取用的人,因为他有偷盗心,所以为了不拘泥于字面而显示其意义,就说成“有偷盗心、有偷取心”,应当知道这就是对他的词句分别。巴利
Theyyasaṅkhātanti ettha thenoti coro, thenassa bhāvo theyyaṃ; avaharaṇacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. ‘‘Saṅkhā, saṅkhāta’’nti atthato ekaṃ; koṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 880) viya. Theyyañca taṃ saṅkhātañcāti theyyasaṅkhātaṃ, theyyacittasaṅkhāto eko cittakoṭṭhāsoti attho. Karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, tasmā theyyasaṅkhātenāti atthato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yo ca theyyasaṅkhātena ādiyati, so yasmā theyyacitto hoti, tasmā byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā atthameva dassetuṃ theyyacitto avaharaṇacittoti evamassa padabhājanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,“取用、拿走、偷取、破坏威仪、使其离开原处、越过约定标记”这几句中,应当知道:第一句是就强行侵占而说的;第二句是就带走他人财物的人正在行走而说的;第三句是就寄存的财物而说的;第四句是就有知觉的东西而说的;第五句是就放在地上等处而说的;第六句是就约定或偷税而说的。这里的组合方式,有按单一物品和按多种物品两种。按单一物品,只能由有知觉的东西成立;按多种物品,则可由有知觉和无知觉混合的东西成立。巴利
Ādiyeyya, hareyya, avahareyya, iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyya, ṭhānā cāveyya, saṅketaṃ vītināmeyyāti ettha pana paṭhamapadaṃ abhiyogavasena vuttaṃ, dutiyapadaṃ aññesaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ harantassa gacchato vasena, tatiyapadaṃ upanikkhittabhaṇḍavasena, catutthaṃ saviññāṇakavasena, pañcamaṃ thale nikkhittādivasena, chaṭṭhaṃ parikappavasena vā suṅkaghātavasena vā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yojanā panettha ekabhaṇḍavasenapi nānābhaṇḍavasenapi hoti. Ekabhaṇḍavasena ca saviññāṇakeneva labbhati, nānābhaṇḍavasena saviññāṇakāviññāṇakamissakena.
在这里,先按多种物品的情况,应该这样理解:所谓“取用”,就是侵占园地,犯恶作罪;让物主心生疑惑,犯偷兰遮罪;物主放弃责任,想“这不再是我的了”,犯波罗夷罪。巴利
Tattha nānābhaṇḍavasena tāva evaṃ veditabbaṃ – ādiyeyyāti ārāmaṃ abhiyuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, āpatti pārājikassa.
“拿走”是指:以盗心触摸别人头上所背的货物时,犯恶作罪;使它晃动时,犯偷兰遮罪;把它从肩上卸下来时,犯波罗夷罪。巴利
Hareyyāti aññassa bhaṇḍaṃ haranto sīse bhāraṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Khandhaṃ oropeti, āpatti pārājikassa.
偷取:当有人把财物寄放在他那里,物主来讨要时说“还我财物”,他回答“我没拿”,就犯恶作罪。如果让物主产生怀疑,就犯偷兰遮罪。如果物主心想“他不会还我了”而放弃追讨,就犯波罗夷罪。巴利
Avahareyyāti upanikkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti vuccamāno ‘‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti bhaṇati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ dassatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, āpatti pārājikassa .
移动威仪:以“我要连物品带人一起带走”的盗心,先迈出第一只脚,犯偷兰遮罪;迈出第二只脚,犯波罗夷罪。巴利
Iriyāpathaṃvikopeyyāti ‘‘sahabhaṇḍahārakaṃ nessāmī’’ti paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ saṅkāmeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ saṅkāmeti, āpatti pārājikassa.
从原处移动:以盗心触摸放在地上的物品,犯轻罪。令它晃动,犯重罪。将它移离原处,犯波罗夷罪。巴利
Ṭhānā cāveyyāti thalaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassa.
“越过约定标记”:他越过事先约定的地点,先跨过第一只脚,就犯偷兰遮罪;跨过第二只脚,就犯波罗夷罪。或者,越过关税关卡时,先跨过第一只脚,就犯偷兰遮罪;跨过第二只脚,就犯波罗夷罪。这就是这里按不同物品所作的关联说明。巴利
Saṅketaṃ vītināmeyyāti parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti pārājikassa. Atha vā paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ suṅkaghātaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, āpatti pārājikassāti – ayamettha nānābhaṇḍavasena yojanā.
另外,就单一物品来说,按照前面所说的侵占等方式,对属于主人的奴隶或畜生,无论是取走、拿走、偷走,还是破坏它的威仪路,或把它从原处赶走,或越过界限——这就是这里依单一物品所作的搭配说明。巴利
Ekabhaṇḍavasena pana sassāmikaṃ dāsaṃ vā tiracchānaṃ vā yathāvuttena abhiyogādinā nayena ādiyati vā harati vā avaharati vā iriyāpathaṃ vā vikopeti, ṭhānā vā cāveti, paricchedaṃ vā atikkāmeti – ayamettha ekabhaṇḍavasena yojanā.
二十五种不与取的分类讨论巴利
Pañcavīsatiavahārakathā
另外,在解释这六个词时,要把它们归纳成五组五分,显示二十五种不与取。只有这样解说,这条不与取波罗夷才算真正讲清楚了。可是在这个地方,所有注释书都混乱、杂乱,判定难以理解。就像在一切注释书里,那些依据巴利圣典所说“以五种方式取未给之物……”等的不与取支,也被拿来用,有的地方显示一组五分,有的地方则和“以六种方式”所说的一起,显示两组五分。但这些并不是真正的五分。因为,凡是只靠单个词就能成立的不与取,才叫作一组五分。但在这里,靠所有这些词,不与取只有一种。而且那些注释书里所显示的、只是碰巧能找到的一些五分,也并没有把它们的全部意义讲清楚。所以在这个地方,所有注释书都混乱、杂乱,判定难以理解。因此,把五组五分归纳后所显示的这二十五种不与取,应当好好留意。巴利
Apica imāni cha padāni vaṇṇentena pañca pañcake samodhānetvā pañcavīsati avahārā dassetabbā. Evaṃ vaṇṇayatā hi idaṃ adinnādānapārājikaṃ suvaṇṇitaṃ hoti. Imasmiñca ṭhāne sabbaaṭṭhakathā ākulā luḷitā duviññeyyavinicchayā. Tathā hi sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu yāni tāni pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pañcahākārehi adinnaṃ ādiyantassa āpatti pārājikassa, parapariggahitañca hotī’’tiādinā nayena avahāraṅgāni vuttāni, tānipi gahetvā katthaci ekaṃ pañcakaṃ dassitaṃ, katthaci ‘‘chahākārehī’’ti āgatehi saddhiṃ dve pañcakāni dassitāni. Etāni ca pañcakāni na honti. Yattha hi ekekena padena avahāro sijjhati, taṃ pañcakaṃ nāma vuccati. Ettha pana sabbehipi padehi ekoyeva avahāro. Yāni ca tattha labbhamānāniyeva pañcakāni dassitāni, tesampi na sabbesaṃ attho pakāsito. Evamimasmiṃ ṭhāne sabbaaṭṭhakathā ākulā luḷitā duviññeyyavinicchayā. Tasmā pañca pañcakesamodhānetvā dassiyamānā ime pañcavīsati avahārā sādhukaṃ sallakkhetabbā.
所谓五类五分,就是:不同物品的五分、同一物品的五分、亲手取的五分、事前行动的五分、盗窃取的五分。其中,不同物品的五分和同一物品的五分,是依据“取走、拿走、偷走、破坏威仪、从原处移开”这些词而成立的。它们应当按前面已经组合展示的方式来了知。至于“越过约定”这第六个词,则是意想取和放舍取共通的。因此,它应当依照第三和第五这两类五分中出现的词来组合。以上说的就是不同物品的五分和同一物品的五分。巴利
Pañca pañcakāni nāma – nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ, ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ, sāhatthikapañcakaṃ, pubbapayogapañcakaṃ , theyyāvahārapañcakanti. Tattha nānābhaṇḍapañcakañca ekabhaṇḍapañcakañca ‘‘ādiyeyya, hareyya, avahareyya, iriyāpathaṃ vikopeyya, ṭhānā cāveyyā’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ vasena labbhanti. Tāni pubbe yojetvā dassitanayeneva veditabbāni. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘saṅketaṃ vītināmeyyā’’ti chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ, taṃ parikappāvahārassa ca nissaggiyāvahārassa ca sādhāraṇaṃ. Tasmā taṃ tatiyapañcamesu pañcakesu labbhamānapadavasena yojetabbaṃ. Vuttaṃ nānābhaṇḍapañcakañca ekabhaṇḍapañcakañca.
什么是亲手五分?有五种不与取:亲手取、命令取、放舍取、成事取、弃责取。其中,亲手取,是指亲手偷取别人的物品。命令取,是指命令别人说:“你去偷某人的物品。”放舍取,是指站在税关内侧,把物品扔到税关外侧,就犯波罗夷;这里配合“逾越约定”这句话来理解。成事取,是指命令说:“当你有能力的时候,就去偷某人的物品。”如果那人没有障碍地去偷了,下命令的人在发出命令的那一刻就成了波罗夷,偷的人则在偷走的时候成为。这就是成事取。弃责取,则要依寄存物品的情况来理解。这就是亲手五分。巴利
Katamaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ? Pañca avahārā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, atthasādhako, dhuranikkhepoti. Tattha sāhatthiko nāma parassa bhaṇḍaṃ sahatthā avaharati. Āṇattiko nāma ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpeti. Nissaggiyo nāma antosuṅkaghāte ṭhito bahisuṅkaghātaṃ pāteti, āpatti pārājikassāti, iminā ca saddhiṃ ‘‘saṅketaṃ vītināmeyyā’’ti idaṃ padayojanaṃ labhati. Atthasādhako nāma ‘‘asukaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkosi, tadā avaharā’’ti āṇāpeti. Tattha sace paro anantarāyiko hutvā taṃ avaharati, āṇāpako āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājiko hoti, avahārako pana avahaṭakāle. Ayaṃ atthasādhako. Dhuranikkhepo pana upanikkhittabhaṇḍavasena veditabbo. Idaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ.
什么是前行努力五分?还有另外五种不与取:前行努力、俱行努力、共谋不与取、约定行为、标记行为。其中,前行努力应当依命令来理解;俱行努力应当依令物从原处移离来理解。其余三种,则应当依圣典中所说的方法来理解。这就是前行努力五分。巴利
Katamaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ? Aparepi pañca avahārā – pubbapayogo, sahapayogo, saṃvidāvahāro, saṅketakammaṃ, nimittakammanti. Tattha āṇattivasena pubbapayogo veditabbo. Ṭhānā cāvanavasena sahapayogo. Itare pana tayo pāḷiyaṃ (pārā. 118-120) āgatanayeneva veditabbāti. Idaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ.
什么是偷盗不与取五分?另外还有五种不与取:偷盗不与取、强迫不与取、意想不与取、隐藏不与取、草标不与取。这五种,我们将在“某位比丘在僧团分配衣服时,以盗心移动草标而取走衣服”这个移动草标的事例中加以解说。这就是偷盗不与取五分。这样,把这五类五分综合起来,就应当知道共有二十五种不与取。巴利
Katamaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakaṃ? Aparepi pañca avahārā – theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, parikappāvahāro , paṭicchannāvahāro, kusāvahāroti. Te pañcapi ‘‘aññataro bhikkhu saṅghassa cīvare bhājiyamāne theyyacitto kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā cīvaraṃ aggahesī’’ti (pārā. 138) etasmiṃ kusasaṅkāmanavatthusmiṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Idaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakaṃ. Evamimāni pañca pañcakāni samodhānetvā ime pañcavīsati avahārā veditabbā.
对于这五种五类,善巧的持律者不能仓促地对所发生的事作出裁断,而应先观察五个要点。古德正是针对这些而说:巴利
Imesu ca pana pañcasu pañcakesu kusalena vinayadharena otiṇṇaṃ vatthuṃ sahasā avinicchinitvāva pañca ṭhānāni oloketabbāni. Yāni sandhāya porāṇā āhu –
所依处、时间、地点、价值,以及第五项——受用。
智者把五个方面都衡量清楚后,就应当记住其中的含义。巴利
‘‘Vatthuṃ kālañca desañca, agghaṃ paribhogapañcamaṃ; Tulayitvā pañca ṭhānāni, dhāreyyatthaṃ vicakkhaṇo’’ti.
这里,“物品”指的是货物。就算偷的人说“我偷了某某东西”,也不能马上就给他定罪,而要先查清楚这件货物是有主的还是无主的。如果是有主的,还要看物主对它还有没有执著。如果在物主还执著的时候被偷走,就要对货物估价之后再定罪。如果在物主已不执著的时候被偷走,就不能以波罗夷罪来处置。不过,如果物主要求归还,就应该把货物还回去。这就是这里正确的做法。巴利
Tattha vatthunti bhaṇḍaṃ; avahārakena hi ‘‘mayā idaṃ nāma avahaṭa’’nti vuttepi āpattiṃ anāropetvāva taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sassāmikaṃ vā assāmikaṃ vāti upaparikkhitabbaṃ. Sassāmikepi sāmikānaṃ sālayabhāvo vā nirālayabhāvo vā upaparikkhitabbo. Sace tesaṃ sālayakāle avahaṭaṃ, bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā āpatti kātabbā. Sace nirālayakāle , na pārājikena kāretabbo. Bhaṇḍasāmikesu pana bhaṇḍaṃ āharāpentesu bhaṇḍaṃ dātabbaṃ. Ayamettha sāmīci.
为了说明这个道理,有这样一个事例:据说在婆提耶王时期,有一次大塔供养法会,从南方来了一位比丘,把一件七肘长的黄褐色袈裟搭在肩上,走进了塔院。就在那时,国王也来礼塔。当时大家正在疏散人群,人多得挤成一团。那位比丘被人群挤得受不了,根本没发觉袈裟从肩上掉了,就走了出去。出去以后找不到袈裟,心想:“在这么拥挤的人群里,谁还能找到那件袈裟?它现在已经不是我的了。”于是彻底放弃,走了。后来另一位比丘随后走来,看见那件袈裟,起了偷心就拿走了,随后又后悔了,心里想:“我现在已经不是沙门了,我要还俗。”虽然生起了这个念头,但他又想:“我还是先问过持律的人再说吧。”巴利
Imassa panatthassa dīpanatthamidaṃ vatthu – bhātiyarājakāle kira mahācetiyapūjāya dakkhiṇadisato eko bhikkhu sattahatthaṃ paṇḍukāsāvaṃ aṃse karitvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ pāvisi; taṅkhaṇameva ca rājāpi cetiyavandanatthaṃ āgato. Tattha ussāraṇāya vattamānāya mahājanasammaddo ahosi. Atha so bhikkhu janasammaddapīḷito aṃsato patantaṃ kāsāvaṃ adisvāva nikkhanto; nikkhamitvā ca kāsāvaṃ apassanto ‘‘ko īdise janasammadde kāsāvaṃ lacchati, na dāni taṃ mayha’’nti dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā gato. Athañño bhikkhu pacchā āgacchanto taṃ kāsāvaṃ disvā theyyacittena gahetvā puna vippaṭisārī hutvā ‘‘assamaṇo dānimhi, vibbhamissāmī’’ti citte uppannepi ‘‘vinayadhare pucchitvā ñassāmī’’ti cintesi.
那时候,有一位名叫小须曼那的长老,他精通全部教典,是持律方面的上首,住在大寺里。那位比丘走到长老面前,顶礼、请求许可后,问了自己心中的悔疑。长老得知那件袈裟是在他之后来的人拿走的,心想“现在还有机会”,就说:“如果你能把那件袈裟的主人——那位比丘带来,也许就能让你得以安立。”比丘问:“尊者,我怎样才能见到他呢?”长老说:“你到各处去找找看。”他找遍了五座大寺,也没见到。于是长老问他:“比丘们大多从哪个方向来?”他答:“从南方来,尊者。”长老说:“那你把那件袈裟的长和宽量好,放在一边。放好后,沿着南方各寺院依次打听,把那位比丘带来。”他照办后,见到了那位比丘,就把他带到长老面前。长老问:“这件袈裟是你的吗?”答:“是的,尊者。”长老问:“你在哪里丢的?”他就把经过全说了。长老听了那人丢弃袈裟的经过后,又问另一个比丘:“你是在哪里看见并拿取这件袈裟的?”他也全部说了。于是长老对他说:“如果你是以清净心拿的,本来就没有犯。但因为你是以盗心拿的,所以犯了恶作罪。忏悔这个罪后,你就没有犯了。而这件袈裟,你先把它归为自己所有,然后布施给这位比丘。”那位比丘就像被不死甘露灌顶一样,得到了极大的安慰。应当这样来看待这个事例。巴利
Tena ca samayena cūḷasumanatthero nāma sabbapariyattidharo vinayācariyapāmokkho mahāvihāre paṭivasati. So bhikkhu theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā okāsaṃ kāretvā attano kukkuccaṃ pucchi. Thero tena bhaṭṭhe janakāye pacchā āgantvā gahitabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘atthi dāni ettha okāso’’ti cintetvā āha – ‘‘sace kāsāvasāmikaṃ bhikkhuṃ āneyyāsi, sakkā bhaveyya tava patiṭṭhā kātu’’nti. ‘‘Kathāhaṃ, bhante, taṃ dakkhissāmī’’ti? ‘‘Tahiṃ tahiṃ gantvā olokehī’’ti. So pañcapi mahāvihāre oloketvā neva addakkhi. Tato naṃ thero pucchi – ‘‘katarāya disāya bahū bhikkhū āgacchantī’’ti? ‘‘Dakkhiṇadisāya, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi kāsāvaṃ dīghato ca tiriyañca minitvā ṭhapehi. Ṭhapetvā dakkhiṇadisāya vihārapaṭipāṭiyā vicinitvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ ānehī’’ti. So tathā katvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā therassa santikaṃ ānesi. Thero pucchi – ‘‘tavedaṃ kāsāva’’nti? ‘‘Āma, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Kuhiṃ te pātita’’nti? So sabbaṃ ācikkhi. Thero pana tena kataṃ dhuranikkhepaṃ sutvā itaraṃ pucchi – ‘‘tayā idaṃ kuhiṃ disvā gahita’’nti? Sopi sabbaṃ ārocesi. Tato naṃ thero āha – ‘‘sace te suddhacittena gahitaṃ abhavissa, anāpattiyeva te assa. Theyyacittena pana gahitattā dukkaṭaṃ āpannosi. Taṃ desetvā anāpattiko hohi. Idañca kāsāvaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā etasseva bhikkhuno dehī’’ti. So bhikkhu amateneva abhisitto paramassāsappatto ahosīti. Evaṃ vatthu oloketabbaṃ.
“时”是指偷取的时间。同一件物品,有时价格一般,有时价格很高。因此,那件物品在什么时候被偷取,就应当按那个时候它值多少价,依那个价格来判定罪。应当这样审察“时”。巴利
Kāloti avahārakālo. Tadeva hi bhaṇḍaṃ kadāci samagghaṃ hoti, kadāci mahagghaṃ. Tasmā taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ yasmiṃ kāle avahaṭaṃ, tasmiṃyeva kāle yo tassa aggho hoti, tena agghena āpatti kāretabbā. Evaṃ kālo oloketabbo.
“处”是指偷取的地点。那件物品在哪里被偷走,就要按照它在那个地方的价值来判罪。因为物品在它所在的地方是一个价,在别的地方可能就很贵。巴利
Desoti avahāradeso. Tañhi bhaṇḍaṃ yasmiṃ dese avahaṭaṃ, tasmiṃyeva dese yo tassa aggho hoti, tena agghena āpatti kāretabbā. Bhaṇḍuṭṭhānadese hi bhaṇḍaṃ samagghaṃ hoti, aññattha mahagghaṃ.
为了说明这个道理,还有这样一个事例:据说,在大海中间,有一位比丘得到一个形状好看的椰子,装上提环,做成一个像螺贝钵那样令人喜欢的饮水钵,就放在那里,然后去了支提山。后来另一位比丘到了大海中间,住在那个精舍里,看见那个钵,以偷盗的心拿走,也来到了支提山。他在那里喝粥时,钵的主人比丘看见那个钵,问道:“你从哪里得到这个的?”他说:“我从大海中间带来的。”那位比丘说:“这不是你的东西,你是偷拿的。”就把他拉到僧团中间。在那里没能得到裁决,他们就去了大寺。到了那里,让人击鼓,在大塔附近集合,开始裁决。持律的长老们说明了偷取的情形。巴利
Imassāpi ca atthassa dīpanatthamidaṃ vatthu – antarasamudde kira eko bhikkhu susaṇṭhānaṃ nāḷikeraṃ labhitvā bhamaṃ āropetvā saṅkhathālakasadisaṃ manoramaṃ pānīyathālakaṃ katvā tattheva ṭhapetvā cetiyagiriṃ agamāsi. Athañño bhikkhu antarasamuddaṃ gantvā tasmiṃ vihāre paṭivasanto taṃ thālakaṃ disvā theyyacittena gahetvā cetiyagirimeva āgato. Tassa tattha yāguṃ pivantassa taṃ thālakaṃ disvā thālakasāmiko bhikkhu āha – ‘‘kuto te idaṃ laddha’’nti? ‘‘Antarasamuddato me ānīta’’nti. So taṃ ‘‘netaṃ tava santakaṃ, theyyāya te gahita’’nti saṅghamajjhaṃ ākaḍḍhi. Tattha ca vinicchayaṃ alabhitvā mahāvihāraṃ agamiṃsu. Tattha bheriṃ paharāpetvā mahācetiyasamīpe sannipātaṃ katvā vinicchayaṃ ārabhiṃsu. Vinayadharattherā avahāraṃ saññāpesuṃ.
在那次集会中,有一位名叫阿毗达摩论师瞿达陀的长老,精通戒律。他这样问道:“这个钵是他从哪里偷走的?”回答说:“是从大海中间偷走的。”又问:“在那里,这个钵值多少?”回答说:“什么都不值。因为那里的人把椰子打破,吃了椰肉,就把椰壳扔掉,只拿来当柴烧。”又问:“这位比丘在上面花的手工值多少?”回答说:“一摩沙迦或不到一摩沙迦。”又问:“正自觉者可曾在任何地方,因为一摩沙迦或不到一摩沙迦而制定过波罗夷吗?”这样说后,大众发出一次赞叹:“善哉!善哉!说得好!裁决得好!”那时,巴提耶王也正为礼敬支提而从城里出来,听到那个声音,问:“这是怎么回事?”他依次听完一切后,命人在城中击鼓宣告:“有我在,比丘、比丘尼和在家众的诤事,由阿毗达摩论师瞿达陀长老作出的裁决,是善裁决。凡不遵从这个裁决的人,我以王令处置。”应当这样审察地方。巴利
Tasmiñca sannipāte ābhidhammikagodattatthero nāma vinayakusalo hoti. So evamāha – ‘‘iminā idaṃ thālakaṃ kuhiṃ avahaṭa’’nti? ‘‘Antarasamudde avahaṭa’’nti. ‘‘Tatridaṃ kiṃ agghatī’’ti? ‘‘Na kiñci agghati. Tatra hi nāḷikeraṃ bhinditvā miñjaṃ khāditvā kapālaṃ chaḍḍenti, dāruatthaṃ pana pharatī’’ti. ‘‘Imassa bhikkhuno ettha hatthakammaṃ kiṃ agghatī’’ti? ‘‘Māsakaṃ vā ūnamāsakaṃ vā’’ti. ‘‘Atthi pana katthaci sammāsambuddhena māsakena vā ūnamāsakena vā pārājikaṃ paññatta’’nti. Evaṃ vutte ‘‘sādhu! Sādhu! Sukathitaṃ suvinicchita’’nti ekasādhukāro ahosi. Tena ca samayena bhātiyarājāpi cetiyavandanatthaṃ nagarato nikkhamanto taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti pucchitvā sabbaṃ paṭipāṭiyā sutvā nagare bheriṃ carāpesi – ‘‘mayi sante bhikkhūnampi bhikkhūnīnampi gihīnampi adhikaraṇaṃ ābhidhammikagodattattherena vinicchitaṃ suvinicchitaṃ, tassa vinicchaye atiṭṭhamānaṃ rājāṇāya ṭhapemī’’ti. Evaṃ deso oloketabbo.
“价”是指物品的价值。因为新物品的价值,后来会减损。比如一个刚打磨好的钵,值八个或十个摩沙迦,后来如果破了、有洞,或者被铆钉修补过,就不值钱了。所以,不能任何时候都按物品原来的价值来判定。应当这样审察“价”。巴利
Agghoti bhaṇḍaggho. Navabhaṇḍassa hi yo aggho hoti, so pacchā parihāyati; yathā navadhoto patto aṭṭha vā dasa vā agghati, so pacchā bhinno vā chiddo vā āṇigaṇṭhikāhato vā appaggho hoti tasmā na sabbadā bhaṇḍaṃ pakatiaggheneva kātabbanti. Evaṃ aggho oloketabbo.
“受用”就是指对物品的使用。因为通过使用,斧头之类的物品价值也会降低。所以应该这样审查:如果有人拿走别人价值一帕陀的斧头,就该问斧头的主人:“你这把斧头是花多少钱买的?”“花一帕陀,尊者。”“那你是买来之后就一直放着,还是用过它?”如果他说:“我用它砍过一天的牙签、或染色树皮、或煮钵用的柴火,或者磨过它。”那就应该知道,它原来的价值已经损减了。就像斧头一样,对于眼药罐、眼药棒、钥匙、稻草、谷壳、砖粉,仅仅擦一次或洗一次,价值也会损减。对于铅环,仅仅切掉摩羯鱼齿状的装饰,或者仅仅擦拭一下;对于浴衣,仅仅穿一次或披一次,或者仅仅以使用为名义搭在肩上或头上;对于米等物,仅仅扬簸一下,或者从中取出一两粒,甚至仅仅捡出一颗小石子丢掉;对于酥油等物,仅仅换到另一个容器里,甚至仅仅从中取出一只苍蝇或蚂蚁丢掉;对于糖块,为了知道它甜不甜而用指甲刺一下、只取一点点,价值也会损减。因此,凡是价值一帕陀的物品,物主像上面说的那样通过使用使它减损了,拿走它的比丘就不应该被判波罗夷。应该这样来看待“受用”。这样权衡这五种情况之后,智者应当牢记,以便按照具体情况判定有罪或无罪、重罪或轻罪。巴利
Paribhogoti bhaṇḍaparibhogo. Paribhogenāpi hi vāsiādibhaṇḍassa aggho parihāyati. Tasmā evaṃ upaparikkhitabbaṃ, sace koci kassaci pādagghanakaṃ vāsiṃ harati, tatra vāsisāmiko pucchitabbo – ‘‘tayā ayaṃ vāsi kittakena kītā’’ti? ‘‘Pādena, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ pana te kiṇitvāva ṭhapitā, udāhu taṃ vaḷañjesī’’ti? Sace vadati ‘‘ekadivasaṃ me dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā rajanachalliṃ vā pattapacanakadāruṃ vā chinnaṃ, ghaṃsitvā vā nisitā’’ti. Athassā porāṇo aggho bhaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Yathā ca vāsiyā evaṃ añjaniyā vā añjanisalākāya vā kuñcikāya vā palālena vā thusehi vā iṭṭhakacuṇṇena vā ekavāraṃ ghaṃsitvā dhovanamattenāpi aggho bhassati. Tipumaṇḍalassa makaradantacchedanenāpi parimajjitamattenāpi, udakasāṭikāya sakiṃ nivāsanapārupanenāpi paribhogasīsena aṃse vā sīse vā ṭhapanamattenāpi, taṇḍulādīnaṃ papphoṭanenāpi tato ekaṃ vā dve vā apanayanenāpi, antamaso ekaṃ pāsāṇasakkharaṃ uddharitvā chaḍḍitamattenāpi, sappitelādīnaṃ bhājanantarapaavattanenāpi, antamaso tato makkhikaṃ vā kipillikaṃ vā uddharitvā chaḍḍitamattenāpi, guḷapiṇḍakassa madhurabhāvajānanatthaṃ nakhena vijjhitvā aṇumattaṃ gahitamattenāpi aggho bhassati. Tasmā yaṃkiñci pādagghanakaṃ vuttanayeneva sāmikehi paribhogena ūnaṃ kataṃ hoti, na taṃ avahaṭo bhikkhu pārājikena kātabbo. Evaṃ paribhogo oloketabbo. Evaṃ imāni tulayitvā pañca ṭhānāni dhāreyyatthaṃ vicakkhaṇo, āpattiṃ vā anāpattiṃ vā garukaṃ vā lahukaṃ vā āpattiṃ yathāṭhāne ṭhapeyyāti.
现在,当分别解说“对什么样的不与取”等时,说了“什么样的名”等。其中,“什么样的”是指属于什么样的种类。而因为它从“波陀”开始,所以说了“一波陀,或值一波陀之物,或超过一波陀之物”。其中,“一波陀”指的是迦哈波那的四分之一,这只是非净物。“值一波陀”是指价值一波陀的净物。“超过一波陀”则两者都包括。到这里,就已经从一切方面显示了足以构成第二波罗夷的事。巴利
Idāni yadidaṃ ‘‘yathārūpe adinnādāne’’tiādīni vibhajantena ‘‘yathārūpaṃ nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathārūpanti yathājātikaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā pādato paṭṭhāya hoti, tasmā ‘‘pādaṃ vā pādārahaṃ vā atirekapādaṃ vā’’ti āha. Tattha pādena kahāpaṇassa catutthabhāgaṃ akappiyabhaṇḍameva dasseti. Pādārahena pādagghanakaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ. Atirekapādena ubhayampi. Ettāvatā sabbākārena dutiyapārājikappahonakavatthu dassitaṃ hoti.
大地之王,就是整个大地的王,像转轮圣王、阿育王那样;或者任何一洲之王,像锡兰王那样。地方王,就是一洲中某个地区的统治者,像频婆娑罗、波斯匿等人那样。所谓曼陀罗主,就是在这一洲的某个地区里各自领有一块地盘的人。所谓中间领主,就是夹在两个国王之间、拥有若干村落的人。裁判官,就是负责审判案件的人,他们坐在法庭上,根据罪行轻重,对盗贼等人下令砍手砍脚等处罚。但如果是已经获得官位的臣子或王子犯了罪,他们就禀报国王,自己不擅自判决重案。大臣,就是获得官位的高级官员;他们也在各个村落或城镇坐镇处理政务。所谓或又有,就是指其他任何依附于王族、或依附于自己领主而执行砍截刑罚的人。在这个义理中,这一切都被归为“王”。巴利
Pathabyā rājāti sakalapathaviyā rājā dīpacakkavattī asokasadiso, yo vā panaññopi ekadīpe rājā, sīhaḷarājasadiso. Padesarājāti ekadīpassa padesissaro, bimbisāra-pasenadi-ādayo viya. Maṇḍalikā nāma ye dīpapadesepi ekamekaṃ maṇḍalaṃ bhuñjanti. Antarabhogikā nāma dvinnaṃ rājūnaṃ antarā katipayagāmasāmikā. Akkhadassāti dhammavinicchanakā, te dhammasabhāyaṃ nisīditvā aparādhānurūpaṃ corānaṃ hatthapādacchejjādiṃ anusāsanti. Ye pana ṭhānantarappattā amaccā vā rājakumārā vā katāparādhā honti, te rañño ārocenti, garukaṃ ṭhānaṃ sayaṃ na vinicchinanti. Mahāmattāti ṭhānantarappattā mahāamaccā; tepi tattha tattha gāme vā nigame vā nisīditvā rājakiccaṃ karonti. Ye vā panāti aññepi ye rājakulanissitā vā sakissariyanissitā vā hutvā chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti, sabbepi te imasmiṃ atthe ‘‘rājāno’’ti dasseti.
应打杀:就是应该捶打和割截。应驱逐:就是赶出去。你是贼等等,说了这类话而呵责,因此说这是呵责。依前者:是依已经行淫法、犯了波罗夷罪的人。其余部分因为前面已经说过,而且词义浅显,所以很清楚。巴利
Haneyyunti potheyyuñceva chindeyyuñca. Pabbājeyyunti nīhareyyuṃ. Corosīti evamādīni ca vatvā paribhāseyyuṃ; tenevāha – ‘‘paribhāso eso’’ti. Purimaṃ upādāyāti methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā pārājikaṃ āpattiṃ āpannaṃ puggalaṃ upādāya. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānapadatthattā ca pākaṭamevāti.
93 已经按词序把诵出的学处逐条分别之后,现在为了用“应取”等六句从略显示取用,又用“一帕陀、或相当于一帕陀、或超过一帕陀”从略显示应取的物品。对那些物品,无论放在哪里,无论以何种方式取用,为了在未来遮止恶比丘们狡辩的余地,要按“地上物、陆上物”等方式详细开示,所以先立“地上物、陆上物”等论母,再按“地上物,就是放在地上的物品”等方式作分别解说。巴利
93. Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni yaṃ taṃ ādiyeyyātiādīhi chahi padehi saṅkhepato ādānaṃ dassetvā saṅkhepatoeva ‘‘pādaṃ vā pādārahaṃ vā atirekapādaṃ vā’’ti ādātabbabhaṇḍaṃ dassitaṃ, taṃ yattha yattha ṭhitaṃ, yathā yathā ādānaṃ gacchati, anāgate pāpabhikkhūnaṃ lesokāsanirundhanatthaṃ tathā tathā vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘bhūmaṭṭhaṃ thalaṭṭha’’ntiādinā nayena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘bhūmaṭṭhaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ bhūmiyaṃ nikkhittaṃ hotī’’tiādinā nayena tassa vibhaṅgaṃ āha.
94 94. 这里是对难解词句的注释,连同裁决论说。所谓“埋入”,是指在地上挖坑后放进去。所谓“覆盖”,是指用尘土、砖块等盖住。对于“地上的物品……中略……若前往,犯恶作”这句,意思是:这样埋入或覆盖而放在地里的物品,如果有比丘用某种方法知道了,生起盗心,想“我要取走它”,夜里起身前往,那么即使还没走到放物品的地方,在一切身体动作和言语动作中,都犯恶作。怎么犯呢?他为了取走那物品而起身时,无论活动哪个肢体,处处都是恶作。整理下衣上衣时,每动一次手就犯一次恶作。如果他想“大宝藏一个人拿不走,我要找个同伴”,想去某人那里而开门,在举足、动手时都犯恶作。但关门时,或者其他对前往没有帮助的动作,则不犯。他走到同伴躺卧的地方,喊“某某”,告知这件事后说“来,我们走”,每说一句话都犯恶作。同伴因为他的话而起身,同伴也犯恶作。起身后想去他那里,整理下衣上衣,开门后走到他身边,在动手、举足的一切处都犯恶作。他问同伴:“某某和某某在哪里?去叫某某和某某来”,每说一句话都犯恶作。见到所有人都到齐后,说:“我在某个地方发现了这样的宝藏,我们去取来,做功德,也安乐地生活。”每说一句话都犯恶作。巴利
94. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanāya saddhiṃ vinicchayakathā. Nikhātanti bhūmiyaṃ khaṇitvā ṭhapitaṃ. Paṭicchannanti paṃsuiṭṭhakādīhi paṭicchannaṃ. Bhūmaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ…pe… gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassāti taṃ evaṃ nikhaṇitvā vā paṭicchādetvā vā ṭhapitattā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ yo bhikkhu kenacideva upāyena ñatvā ‘‘āharissāmī’’ti theyyacitto hutvā rattibhāge uṭṭhāya gacchati, so bhaṇḍaṭṭhānaṃ appatvāpi sabbakāyavacīvikāresu dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Kathaṃ? So hi tassa āharaṇatthāya uṭṭhahanto yaṃ yaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ phandāpeti, sabbattha dukkaṭameva. Nivāsanapārupanaṃ saṇṭhapeti, hatthavāre hatthavāre dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Mahantaṃ nidhānaṃ na sakkā ekena āharituṃ, dutiyaṃ pariyesissāmī’’ti kassaci sahāyassa santikaṃ gantukāmo dvāraṃ vivarati, padavāre ca hatthavāre ca dukkaṭaṃ. Dvārapidahane pana aññasmiṃ vā gamanassa anupakāre anāpatti. Tassa nipannokāsaṃ gantvā ‘‘itthannāmā’’ti pakkosati, tamatthaṃ ārocetvā ‘‘ehi gacchāmā’’ti vadati, vācāya vācāya dukkaṭaṃ. So tassa vacanena uṭṭhahati, tassāpi dukkaṭaṃ. Uṭṭhahitvā tassa santikaṃ gantukāmo nivāsanapārupanaṃ saṇṭhapeti, dvāraṃ vivaritvā tassa samīpaṃ gacchati, hatthavārapadavāresu sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. So taṃ pucchati ‘‘asuko ca asuko ca kuhiṃ, asukañca asukañca pakkosāhī’’ti, vācāya vācāya dukkaṭaṃ. Sabbe samāgate disvā ‘‘mayā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne evarūpo nidhi upaladdho, gacchāma taṃ gahetvā puññāni ca karissāma, sukhañca jīvissāmā’’ti vadati, vācāya vācāya dukkaṭameva.
这样得到同伴后,他就去找锄头。如果自己有锄头,心想“我去把它拿来”,那么在走去、拿取、带回来的过程中,每一次动手、每一次迈步都犯恶作。如果没有,就去找别的比丘或在家人乞求。乞求时,如果不说假话,只说“请给我锄头,我需要用锄头,有点事要做,做完就还回来”,那么每说一句都犯恶作。如果撒谎说“有排水沟要清理,精舍里有地面工程要做”,那么每说一句假话,就每一处都犯波逸提。不过《大注疏》里说,即使说的是真话或是假话,也只是恶作,应当知道那是书写时的疏忽。因为在偷盗的前方便阶段,凡是属于波逸提的场合,根本不存在恶作这回事。如果锄头没有柄,心想“我要做个柄”,就磨刀或磨斧,为了这个目的前去,到了以后砍干木、削木、敲打,在每一次动手、每一次迈步中都犯恶作。如果砍的是生木,就犯波逸提。此后一切动作都犯恶作。《简要注疏》和《大护法注》里还说,为了砍伐那里生长的木杆藤蔓而去找刀斧的人,也犯恶作。如果他们这样想:“去乞求刀、斧、锄头会被人怀疑,我们干脆弄些铁来自己打造吧。”于是去森林里挖土找铁矿石。挖非净地的人,在犯恶作的同时还犯波逸提,这是《大护法注》里说的。就像这里一样,在一切波逸提的场合,恶作都跑不掉。挖净地的人只犯恶作。取了矿石以后,此后一切所作中,每做一个动作都犯恶作。巴利
Evaṃ laddhasahāyo kudālaṃ pariyesati. Sace panassa attano kudālo atthi, ‘‘taṃ āharissāmī’’ti gacchanto ca gaṇhanto ca āharanto ca sabbattha hatthavārapadavāresu dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati . Sace natthi, aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā gahaṭṭhaṃ vā gantvā yācati, yācanto ca sace ‘‘kudālaṃ me dehi, kudālena me attho , kiñci kātabbamatthi, taṃ katvā paccāharissāmī’’ti musā abhaṇanto yācati, vācāya vācāya dukkaṭaṃ. Sace ‘‘mātikā sodhetabbā atthi, vihāre bhūmikammaṃ kātabbaṃ atthī’’ti musāpi bhaṇati, yaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ musā, tattha tattha pācittiyaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana saccepi alikepi dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ, taṃ pamādalikhitanti veditabbaṃ. Na hi adinnādānassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṃ nāma atthi. Sace pana kudālassa daṇḍo natthi, ‘‘daṇḍaṃ karissāmī’’ti vāsiṃ vā pharasuṃ vā niseti, tadatthāya gacchati, gantvā sukkhakaṭṭhaṃ chindati tacchati ākoṭeti, sabbattha hatthavārapadavāresu dukkaṭaṃ. Allarukkhaṃ chindati, pācittiyaṃ. Tato paraṃ sabbapayogesu dukkaṭaṃ. Saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mahāpaccariyañca tattha jātakakaṭṭhalatāchedanatthaṃ vāsipharasuṃ pariyesantānampi dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Sace pana tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘vāsipharasukudāle yācantā āsaṅkitā bhavissāma, lohaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā karomā’’ti. Tato araññaṃ gantvā lohabījatthaṃ pathaviṃ khaṇanti, akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇantānaṃ dukkaṭehi saddhiṃ pācittiyānīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭā na muccati. Kappiyapathaviṃ khaṇantānaṃ dukkaṭāniyeva. Bījaṃ pana gahetvā tato paraṃ sabbakiriyāsu payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ.
在寻找筐子时,手部动作和每一步的犯戒判定,都按前面说过的方式,属于恶作。说妄语则犯波逸提。为了做筐子而割断藤蔓,也犯波逸提。这一切都应依照前面的方式理解。至于“若前往,犯恶作”这一句,意思是:像这样找到了同伴、锄头和筐子之后,前往藏宝的地方,每走一步都犯恶作。但如果前往时生起善心,想“得到这宝藏后,我要用来供佛、供法或供僧”,以善心前往就没有犯戒。为什么?因为文中说的是“以盗心……若前往,犯恶作”。就像这里一样,在一切情况下,只要不是盗心,就没有犯戒。离开道路,为了去藏宝的地方而另开一条路,砍断草木,犯波逸提;砍伐干木,犯恶作。巴利
Piṭakapariyesanepi hatthavārapadavāresu vuttanayeneva dukkaṭaṃ. Musāvāde pācittiyaṃ. Piṭakaṃ kātukāmatāya vallicchedane pācittiyanti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Gacchati vā āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ pariyiṭṭhasahāyakudālapiṭako nidhiṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana gacchanto ‘‘imaṃ nidhiṃ laddhā buddhapūjaṃ vā dhammapūjaṃ vā saṅghabhattaṃ vā karissāmī’’ti kusalaṃ uppādeti, kusalacittena gamane anāpatti. Kasmā? ‘‘Theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā…pe… gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha atheyyacittassa anāpatti. Maggato okkamma nidhānaṭṭhānaṃ gamanatthāya maggaṃ karonto bhūtagāmaṃ chindati, pācittiyaṃ. Sukkhakaṭṭhaṃ chindati, dukkaṭaṃ.
其中“那里生长的”,是指长久埋藏的陶罐上面长出来的东西。所谓“木棍或藤蔓”,并不只是木棍和藤蔓而已,凡是砍断任何湿的或干的草、树木、藤蔓等,因为属于同一个动作的一部分,都只是犯恶作。巴利
Tatthajātakanti ciranihitāya kumbhiyā upari jātakaṃ. Kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vāti na kevalaṃ kaṭṭhalatameva, yaṃkiñci allaṃ vā sukkhaṃ vā tiṇarukkhalatādiṃ chindantassa sahapayogattā dukkaṭameva hoti.
长老们在这里把八种恶作归纳在一起显示出来:前方便恶作、俱方便恶作、不可触恶作、恶行恶作、律仪恶作、知而恶作、白告恶作、承诺恶作。其中,“以盗心寻找同伴或第二把锄头或筐子,或者前往寻找,犯恶作”,这叫做前方便恶作。在这里,在恶作的情形下就是恶作,在波逸提的情形下就是波逸提。“砍伐那里生长的树木或藤蔓,犯恶作”,这叫做俱方便恶作。但在这里,波逸提事和恶作事都只停留在恶作的地步。为什么?因为是与偷盗同时进行的方便。至于触摸十种宝物、七种谷物,以及一切武器等物品所犯的恶作,这叫做不可触恶作。触摸芭蕉、椰子等那里生长的果实所犯的恶作,这叫做恶行恶作。在乞食时,若灰尘落入钵中,不先接过钵、不先向下倒净,就在那里取食所犯的恶作,这叫做律仪恶作。“听闻后不说,犯恶作”,这叫做知而恶作。在十一种劝告中说的“以白告犯恶作”,这叫做白告恶作。“诸比丘,那位比丘的前行不明确,且在承诺时犯恶作”,这叫做承诺恶作。而这是俱方便恶作。因此说:“凡是砍伐任何生的或干的草、树木、藤蔓等,因为是同时进行的方便,就只是恶作。”巴利
Aṭṭhavidhaṃ hetaṃ dukkaṭaṃ nāma imasmiṃ ṭhāne samodhānetvā therehi dassitaṃ – pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ , sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ, anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ, durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ, vinayadukkaṭaṃ, ñātadukkaṭaṃ, ñattidukkaṭaṃ, paṭissavadukkaṭanti. Tattha ‘‘theyyacitto dutiyaṃ vā kudālaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā pariyesati gacchati vā, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti idaṃ pubbapayogadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Ettha hi dukkaṭaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṃ, pācittiyaṭṭhāne pācittiyameva hoti. ‘‘Tatthajātakaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ vā lataṃ vā chindati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti idaṃ sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Ettha pana pācittiyavatthu ca dukkaṭavatthu ca dukkaṭaṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhati. Kasmā? Avahārassa sahapayogattāti. Yaṃ pana dasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ, sattavidhaṃ dhaññaṃ, sabbañca āvudhabhaṇḍādiṃ āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Yaṃ kadalināḷikerādīnaṃ tatthajātakaphalāni āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana piṇḍāya carantassa patte raje patite pattaṃ appaṭiggahetvā adhovitvā vā tattha bhikkhaṃ gaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, idaṃ vinayadukkaṭaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sutvā na vadanti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 419) idaṃ ñātadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Yaṃ ekādasasu samanubhāsanāsu ‘‘ñattiyā dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. 414) vuttaṃ, idaṃ ñattidukkaṭaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno purimikā ca na paññāyati, paṭissave ca āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 207) idaṃ paṭissavadukkaṭaṃ nāma. Idaṃ pana sahapayogadukkaṭaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yaṃkiñci allaṃ vā sukkhaṃ vā tiṇarukkhalatādiṃ chindantassa sahapayogattā dukkaṭameva hotī’’ti.
如果他在那里生长的草、树、藤蔓等被砍时,生起了惭愧心,防护就生起,他忏悔因砍伐而犯的恶作后就得清净。如果他没放弃努力,仍然热心地挖土,砍伐的恶作就止息,转而落入挖掘的恶作。即使挖的是非净地,因为在这里属于俱方便,也还是只犯恶作。如果他把四面八方都挖了,挖到罐底时生起惭愧心,他忏悔因挖掘而犯的恶作后就得清净。巴利
Sace panassa tatthajātake tiṇarukkhalatādimhi chinnepi lajjidhammo okkamati, saṃvaro uppajjati, chedanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ desetvā muccati. Atha dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā saussāhova paṃsuṃ khaṇati, chedanadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, khaṇanadukkaṭe patiṭṭhāti. Akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇantopi hi idha sahapayogattā dukkaṭameva āpajjati. Sace panassa sabbadisāsu khaṇitvā kumbhimūlaṃ pattassāpi lajjidhammo okkamati, khaṇanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ desetvā muccati.
“或拨开”,意思是:如果他仍然带着热忱把土拨开,堆到一边,那么挖掘的恶作就止息,转而落在拨开的恶作上。他把那些土一处一处堆起来时,每做一个动作就犯一次恶作。但如果他堆成堆之后又放弃努力,就会生起惭耻法;只要说出拨开的恶作罪,就能得清净。“或取出”,意思是:如果他仍然带着热忱把土取出来抛到外面,那么拨开的恶作就止息,转而落在取出的恶作上。他用锄头、手或篮子把土到处抛撒时,每做一个动作就犯一次恶作。但如果他把所有土都清出去,让罐子立在干地上之后,却生起惭耻法,那么只要说出取出的恶作罪,就能得清净。如果他仍然带着热忱去碰罐子,那么取出的恶作就止息,转而落在触碰的恶作上。碰了之后,如果生起惭耻法,只要说出触碰的恶作罪,就能得清净。如果他仍然带着热忱摇动罐子,那么触碰的恶作就止息,转而落在所说的“摇动则犯土喇咤亚罪”这一土喇咤亚罪上。巴利
Byūhati vāti atha pana saussāhova paṃsuṃ viyūhati, ekapasse rāsiṃ karoti, khaṇanadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, viyūhanadukkaṭe patiṭṭhāti. Tañca paṃsuṃ tattha tattha puñjaṃ karonto payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Sace pana rāsiṃ katvāpi dhuranikkhepaṃ karoti, lajjidhammaṃ āpajjati , viyūhanadukkaṭaṃ desetvā muccati. Uddharati vāti atha pana saussāhova paṃsuṃ uddharitvā bahi pāteti, viyūhanadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, uddharaṇadukkaṭe patiṭṭhāti. Paṃsuṃ pana kudālena vā hatthehi vā pacchiyā vā tahiṃ tahiṃ pātento payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Sace pana sabbaṃ paṃsuṃ nīharitvā kumbhiṃ thalaṭṭhaṃ katvāpi lajjidhammaṃ āpajjati, uddharaṇadukkaṭaṃ desetvā muccati. Atha pana saussāhova kumbhiṃ āmasati, uddharaṇadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, āmasanadukkaṭe patiṭṭhāti. Āmasitvāpi ca lajjidhammaṃ āpajjanto āmasanadukkaṭaṃ desetvā muccati. Atha saussāhova kumbhiṃ phandāpeti, āmasanadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, ‘‘phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti vuttathullaccaye patiṭṭhāti.
这里先讲“恶作”和“土喇咤亚”这两个词的含义。首先,所谓“恶作”,就是“恶劣地做了”——背离导师所教导的应做之事而去做,所以叫恶作。另一种说法是“做了丑恶的事”,因为那种行为丑陋,在比丘的各种行为中不显庄严,所以也叫恶作。关于这一点,经中这样说过:巴利
Tatrāyaṃ dukkaṭathullaccayānaṃ dvinnampi vacanattho – paṭhamaṃ tāvettha duṭṭhu kataṃ satthārā vuttakiccaṃ virādhetvā katanti dukkaṭaṃ. Atha vā duṭṭhaṃ kataṃ, virūpā sā kiriyā bhikkhukiriyānaṃ majjhe na sobhatīti evampi dukkaṭaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ –
“恶作”这个说法,你好好听我如实讲:
有过失、偏离正轨、出错,以及任何恶作。
一个人如果做了恶事,不管是公开还是暗中。
他们说这是恶作,所以就叫它恶作。巴利
‘‘Dukkaṭaṃ iti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ; Aparaddhaṃ viraddhañca, khalitaṃ yañca dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ manusso kare pāpaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā raho; Dukkaṭanti pavedenti, tenetaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti. (pari. 339);
另一种则是土喇咤亚,因为它粗大,也因为它是一种过失。这里应当理解成合成词,就像“来世有恶趣”“有苦果”等说法那样。因为在需要向一个人发露的诸过失中,没有和它同等的粗大过失。所以说“因粗大、因过失而称土喇咤亚”。对此也有偈颂说:巴利
Itaraṃ pana thūlattā, accayattā ca thullaccayaṃ. ‘‘Samparāye ca duggati’’ (saṃ. ni. 1.49), ‘‘yaṃ hoti kaṭukapphala’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 66; netti. 91) viya cettha saṃyogabhāvo veditabbo. Ekassa santike desetabbesu hi accayesu tena samo thūlo accayo natthi. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘thūlattā accayattā ca thullaccaya’’nti. Vuttañcetaṃ –
关于“土喇咤亚”,我这就如实讲给你听。
有一人在其跟前发露罪过,另一人受其发露;
没有一种过失能和它相比,因此这就被称为如是。巴利
‘‘Thullaccayanti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ suṇohi yathātathaṃ; Ekassa mūle yo deseti, yo ca taṃ paṭiggaṇhati; Accayo tena samo natthi, tenetaṃ iti vuccatī’’ti. (pari. 339);
每次在令它动摇的加行中,都犯土喇咤亚。令它动摇之后,如果生起了羞耻法,忏悔土喇咤亚就能解脱。在这里,从同一加行开始,前面的罪就依次止息。但是,如果没有作同一加行,而是生起了羞耻法,那么先前加行中所犯的恶作和波逸提,全都要一一忏悔。在同一加行中,于其中所生的截断,即使有很多恶作,到了挖土的时候就止息,只成为一个挖土恶作。挖土时即使有很多拨开,拨开时即使有很多取出,取出时即使有很多触摸,触摸时即使有很多令动摇,到了那一步就止息。在挖土等情形中,如果生起了羞耻法,即使有很多条罪,只忏悔一条就能解脱,这是《库伦达注》中所说的。而所谓前罪止息,只在“由白文得恶作,由二羯磨语得土喇咤亚,皆止息”(《波罗夷》414)这样的随说经文中出现。但在这里的第二波罗夷中,应当依据注释书阿阇梨的权威来理解。巴利
Phandāpentassa ca payoge payoge thullaccayaṃ. Phandāpetvāpi ca lajjidhammaṃ okkanto thullaccayaṃ desetvā muccati. Sahapayogato paṭṭhāyeva cettha purimā purimā āpatti paṭippassambhati. Sahapayogaṃ pana akatvā lajjidhammaṃ okkantena yā pubbapayoge dukkaṭapācittiyā āpannā, sabbā tā desetabbā. Sahapayoge ca tatthajātakacchedane bahukānipi dukkaṭāni paṃsukhaṇanaṃ patvā paṭippassambhanti. Ekaṃ khaṇanadukkaṭameva hoti. Khaṇane bahukānipi viyūhanaṃ, viyūhane bahukānipi uddharaṇaṃ, uddharaṇe bahukānipi āmasanaṃ, āmasane bahukānipi phandāpanaṃ patvā paṭippassambhanti. Paṃsukhaṇanādīsu ca lajjidhamme uppanne bahukāpi āpattiyo hontu, ekameva desetvā muccatīti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Purimāpattipaṭippassaddhi ca nāmesā ‘‘ñattiyā dukkaṭaṃ, dvīhi kammavācāhi thullaccayā paṭippassambhantī’’ti (pārā. 414) evaṃ anusāvanāsuttesuyeva āgatā. Idha pana dutiyapārājike aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇena gahetabbāti.
“令离原位”:就是犯波罗夷。意思是,如果有人让瓶动摇之后,还没有生起羞耻心,就使那个瓶从原位移动哪怕一根发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。这里说的“令离原位”,应当知道有六种方式。哪六种?抓住瓶口边缘,往自己这边拉,使这一端所碰到的地方被另一端越过,哪怕只有一根发尖那么一点,波罗夷。同样抓住后,往对面推,使另一端所碰到的地方被这一端越过,哪怕只有一根发尖那么一点,波罗夷。往左边或往右边移开,使左端所碰到的地方被右端越过,哪怕只有一根发尖那么一点,波罗夷;或者使右端所碰到的地方被左端越过,哪怕只有一根发尖那么一点,波罗夷。向上举起,使瓶离开地面哪怕一根发尖那么一点,波罗夷。挖开下面再往下沉,使底部所碰到的地方被瓶口边缘越过,哪怕只有一根发尖那么一点,波罗夷。这是就安住在一处的瓶来说的。如果有人在瓶口边缘套上绳索,把铁桩或者金合欢木心之类的桩子打进地里,再用链条绑在那里固定住:如果只在一个方向用一条链条绑住,就有两个位置;如果在二、三、四个方向用四条链条绑住,就有五个位置。巴利
Ṭhānācāveti, āpatti pārājikassāti yo pana phandāpetvāpi lajjidhammaṃ anokkamitvāva taṃ kumbhiṃ ṭhānato antamaso kesaggamattampi cāveti, pārājikameva āpajjatīti attho. Ṭhānā cāvanañcettha chahi ākārehi veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Kumbhiṃ mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ gahetvā attano abhimukhaṃ ākaḍḍhanto iminā antena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ kesaggamattampi pārimantena atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Tatheva gahetvā parato pellento pārimantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ kesaggamattampi iminā antena atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Vāmato vā dakkhiṇato vā apanāmento vāmantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ kesaggamattampi dakkhiṇantena atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Dakkhiṇantena vā phuṭṭhokāsaṃ kesaggamattampi vāmantena atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Uddhaṃ ukkhipanto kesaggamattampi bhūmito moceti, pārājikaṃ. Khaṇitvā heṭṭhato osīdento bundena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ kesaggamattampi mukhavaṭṭiyā atikkāmeti, pārājikanti evaṃ ekaṭṭhāne ṭhitāya kumbhiyā. Yadi pana kumbhimukhavaṭṭiyā pāsaṃ katvā lohakhāṇuṃ vā khadirasārādikhāṇuṃ vā pathaviyaṃ ākoṭetvā tattha saṅkhalikāya bandhitvā ṭhapenti, ekissā disāya ekāya saṅkhalikāya baddhāya dve ṭhānāni labbhanti, dvīsu tīsu catūsu disāsu catūhi saṅkhalikāhi baddhāya pañca ṭhānāni labbhanti.
在这种情况下,如果瓶子系在一根桩上:他先拔桩,或者弄断链条,犯土喇咤亚。之后,他按前面所说的方式,让瓶子离开原位哪怕只有发尖那么一点点,犯波罗夷。如果他先取瓶,犯土喇咤亚。之后,他让桩离开原位哪怕只有发尖那么一点点,或者弄断链条,犯波罗夷。按这个方式,对于系在两根、三根、四根桩上的瓶子,在最后令它离开原位时犯波罗夷,其余情况应知为土喇咤亚。巴利
Tattha ekakhāṇuke baddhakumbhiyā paṭhamaṃ khāṇukaṃ vā uddharati, saṅkhalikaṃ vā chindati, thullaccayaṃ. Tato kumbhiṃ yathāvuttanayena kesaggamattampi ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Atha paṭhamaṃ kumbhiṃ uddharati, thullaccayaṃ. Tato khāṇukaṃ kesaggamattampi ṭhānā cāveti, saṅkhalikaṃ vā chindati, pārājikaṃ. Etena upāyena dvīsu tīsu catūsu khāṇukesu baddhakumbhiyāpi pacchime ṭhānācāvane pārājikaṃ. Sesesu thullaccayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如果没有木桩,就把环套在链子的顶端,再套进那里长出来的根部。如果先把瓶子取出来,然后才切断根,再把环取出来,就犯波罗夷。如果不断根,只是把环从这里那里地来回挪动,那就不犯。但是,如果并没有从根部取出来,而是用手抓住它,让它悬在空中,也犯波罗夷。这就是这里的差别。其余按前面所说的来理解。巴利
Sace khāṇu natthi, saṅkhalikāya agge valayaṃ katvā tatthajātake mūle pavesitaṃ hoti, paṭhamaṃ kumbhiṃ uddharitvā pacchā mūlaṃ chetvā valayaṃ nīharati, pārājikaṃ. Atha mūlaṃ acchetvā valayaṃ ito cito ca sāreti, rakkhati. Sace pana mūlato anīharitvāpi hatthena gahetvā ākāsagataṃ karoti, pārājikaṃ. Ayamettha viseso. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
有些人为了当标记,在瓶口上种榕树之类的树,树根缠住瓶子立在那里。如果有人想“我要砍断树根,把瓶子拿走”而动手砍,每砍一次就犯一个恶作。砍断以后腾出空间,只要让瓶子离开原位哪怕一根头发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果正在砍根的时候,瓶子被碰倒滚到低处去了,那暂时还不算破戒,得继续守着。要是从落下的地方把瓶子拿起来,就犯波罗夷。如果根砍断以后,瓶子只靠一根根还立着,而那人想“砍断这根,瓶子就会倒”,于是去砍,刚砍断就犯波罗夷。如果瓶子只靠一根根立着,就像绑在绳套上的猪一样,再没有别的什么东西挂着它,砍断那根根的时候也犯波罗夷。如果瓶口上放着一块大石头,有人想用棍子把它挑开,因而砍了瓶口上长着的树,犯恶作。如果是为了拿瓶子而砍了旁边长着的树,因为那棵树不是长在瓶上的,砍它的人犯波逸提。巴利
Keci pana nimittatthāya kumbhimatthake nigrodharukkhādīni ropenti, mūlāni kumbhiṃ vinandhitvā ṭhitāni honti, ‘‘mūlāni chinditvā kumbhiṃ gahessāmī’’ti chindantassa payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Chinditvā okāsaṃ katvā kumbhiṃ kesaggamattampi ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Mūlāni chindatova luṭhitvā kumbhī ninnaṭṭhānaṃ gatā, rakkhati tāva. Gataṭṭhānato uddharati, pārājikaṃ. Sace chinnesu mūlesu ekamūlamattena kumbhī tiṭṭhati, so ca taṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ mūle chinne patissatī’’ti chindati, chinnamatte pārājikaṃ. Sace pana ekamūleneva pāse baddhasūkaro viya ṭhitā hoti, aññaṃ kiñci lagganakaṃ natthi, tasmimpi mūle chinnamatte pārājikaṃ. Sace kumbhimatthake mahāpāsāṇo ṭhapito hoti, taṃ daṇḍena ukkhipitvā apanetukāmo kumbhimatthake jātarukkhaṃ chindati, dukkaṭaṃ. Tassā samīpe jātakaṃ chetvā āharati, atatthajātakattā taṃ chindato pācittiyaṃ.
如果没办法把瓶子拿出来,为了拿瓶里的东西,就把自己的容器伸进去,然后以偷盗的心去碰瓶子里价值五个摩沙迦或者超过五个摩沙迦的东西,就犯恶作。这里说的界限,是为了判定波罗夷。不过,以偷盗的心去碰不到五个摩沙迦的东西,也一样犯恶作。巴利
Attano bhājananti sace pana kumbhiṃ uddharituṃ asakkonto kumbhigatabhaṇḍaggahaṇatthaṃ attano bhājanaṃ pavesetvā antokumbhiyaṃ pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Paricchedo cettha pārājikaniyamanatthaṃ vutto. Theyyacittena pana ūnapañcamāsakampi āmasanto dukkaṭaṃ āpajjatiyeva.
所谓“令动摇”:在这里,只要还没有和自己的容器连成一体就放进去,这段时间就称为“令动摇”。另外,把东西从这里拨到那里,也同样是令动摇,他犯土喇咤亚(thullaccaya,重罪)。但当一体的状态被切断时,瓶里的就只在瓶里,容器里的也只在容器里,那时才称为“自己容器里的东西”。这样做之后,即使没有把容器从瓶里取出来,也犯波罗夷。巴利
Phandāpetīti ettha yāva ekābaddhaṃ katvā attano bhājanaṃ paveseti, tāva phandāpetīti vuccati. Api ca ito cito ca apabyūhantopi phandāpetiyeva, so thullaccayaṃ āpajjati. Yadā pana ekābaddhabhāvo chinno, kumbhigataṃ kumbhiyameva, bhājanagatampi bhājaneyeva hoti, tadā attano bhājanagataṃ nāma hoti. Evaṃ katvā kumbhito anīhatepi ca bhājane pārājikaṃ āpajjati.
“或断拳”:在这里,就像从指缝间掉出来的钱币碰不到瓶里的钱币一样,这样握成拳头的人,就叫作“断拳”;这个人也犯波罗夷。巴利
Muṭṭhiṃ vā chindatīti ettha yathā aṅgulantarehi nikkhantakahāpaṇā kumbhigate kahāpaṇe na samphusanti, evaṃ muṭṭhiṃ karonto muṭṭhiṃ chindati nāma; sopi pārājikaṃ āpajjati.
“经中所载”是指在经中记载的;这也是对用线穿起来的东西以及线制之物的称呼。腰带之类有金制的、银制的,也有线制的,珍珠串等也归入这一类。“缠头”是指缠头的布。对其中任何一件,以盗心触摸,犯恶作;令它动摇,犯土喇咤亚。抓住腰带等的一端,使它悬空而举起,犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Suttārūḷhanti sutte ārūḷhaṃ; suttena āvutassāpi suttamayassāpi etaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Pāmaṅgādīnihi sovaṇṇamayānipi honti rūpiyamayānipi suttamayānipi, muttāvaliādayopi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gatā. Veṭhananti sīsaveṭhanapaṭo vuccati. Etesu yaṃkiñci theyyacitto āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Phandāpeti, thullaccayaṃ. Pāmaṅgādīni koṭiyaṃ gahetvā ākāsaṭṭhaṃ akaronto uccāreti, thullaccayaṃ.
“摩擦而取”在这里是指:在装满的缸上面,把另一口缸平口朝下放着;或者把一端放在缸底、另一端放在缸口边上放着。对这样摩擦而取的人,犯土喇咤亚;如果让物品从缸口脱出,就犯波罗夷。但是,如果物品放在半缸或空缸里,那么只有自己实际碰到的那一处才算“处所”,不是整口缸都算。所以,即使是对这样摩擦而取的人,只要物品从所放的位置移动了毛发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果缸是满的或不满的,径直向上提起,那么从底部所放的位置移动一点点,就犯波罗夷。对于放在缸里的任何足以构成波罗夷的物品,如果让它在整口缸里移动,或者摩擦腰带等物再取出来,只要还没超过缸口边缘,就一直只是土喇咤亚。因为《简要大灯》等书中说,整口缸都算处所。然而《大注》中说:“只有所放的那一处才是处所,不是整口缸。所以,从所放的位置移动毛发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。”这个说法才是标准。另一种说法,即没有让物品悬空时的说法,是依照衣架上所放衣服缠绕的方式而说的,不能采纳。因为《律分别》中说到重罪时应依重者为准,这是律法的性质。另外,从“或使它进入自己的容器,或截断它的系缚”这句话,也应这样理解。正如放在缸里的物品,不是整口缸都算处所。巴利
Ghaṃsanto nīharatīti ettha pana paripuṇṇāya kumbhiyā upari samatittikaṃ kumbhiṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ vā ekaṃ koṭiṃ bunde ekaṃ koṭiṃ mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ vā ghaṃsantassa nīharato thullaccayaṃ. Kumbhimukhā mocentassa pārājikaṃ. Yaṃ pana upaḍḍhakumbhiyaṃ vā rittakumbhiyaṃ vā ṭhapitaṃ, tassa attano phuṭṭhokāsova ṭhānaṃ, na sakalā kumbhī, tasmā taṃ ghaṃsantassāpi nīharato patiṭṭhitokāsato kesaggamatte mutte pārājikameva. Kumbhiyā pana paripuṇṇāya vā ūnāya vā ujukameva uddharantassa heṭṭhimakoṭiyā patiṭṭhitokāsā muttamatteva pārājikaṃ. Antokumbhiyaṃ ṭhapitaṃ yaṃkiñci pārājikappahonakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sakalakumbhiyaṃ cārentassa, pāmaṅgādiñca ghaṃsitvā nīharantassa yāva mukhavaṭṭiṃ nātikkamati, tāva thullaccayameva. Tassa hi sabbāpi kumbhī ṭhānanti saṅkhepamahāpaccariyādīsu vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ṭhapitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ, na sakalā kumbhī. Tasmā yathāṭhitaṭṭhānato kesaggamattampi mocentassa pārājikamevā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ pamāṇaṃ. Itaraṃ pana ākāsagataṃ akarontassa cīvaravaṃse ṭhapitacīvaraveṭhanakanayena vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Vinayavinicchaye hi āgate garuke ṭhātabbaṃ, esā vinayadhammatā. Apica ‘‘attano bhājanagataṃ vā karoti, muṭṭhiṃ vā chindatī’’ti vacanato petaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yathā antokumbhiyaṃ ṭhitassa na sabbā kumbhī ṭhānanti.
关于酥油等物,只要有人以任何一种方式饮用,在刚喝下时就算犯波罗夷——这是《大注》中说的。不过,《大灯》等注疏则作了这样的区分:如果口不离器而吸饮,若进入他人喉中的那一口还不值一足,必须和口中的合起来才值一足,这时还算守护;一旦以咽喉为界截断,就犯波罗夷。即使是用嘴唇截断并闭上嘴唇,也一样犯波罗夷。若用莲茎、竹管、苇管等来饮,只要进入他人喉中的那一口已值一足,就犯波罗夷;若还要和口中的合起来才值,则还不犯波罗夷。若破坏它与莲茎等物连成一体的状态,以嘴唇截断时,就犯波罗夷。若需和莲茎等物中的合起来才值一足,而用手指按住莲茎等的底部来饮,也犯波罗夷。若值一足之物尚未进入他人喉中,在莲茎等物中及口中虽然超过一足之量,但仍连成一体而存在,那就仍算守护。这一切都符合“或令其入自己的器皿,或截断其束”这一原则,所以是很好的说明。以上就是关于连成一体的情形。巴利
Sappiādīsu yaṃkiñci pivato ekapayogena pītamatte pārājikanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana ayaṃ vibhāgo dassito – ‘‘mukhaṃ anapanetvā ākaḍḍhantassa pivato sace paragalagataṃ pādaṃ na agghati, mukhagatena saddhiṃ agghati, rakkhati tāva. Kaṇṭhena pana paricchinnakāleyeva pārājikaṃ hoti. Sacepi oṭṭhehi paricchindanto oṭṭhe pidahati, pārājikameva. Uppaladaṇḍaveḷunāḷinaḷanāḷiādīhi pivantassāpi sace paragalagatameva pādaṃ agghati, pārājikaṃ. Sace saha mukhagatena agghati, na tāva pārājikaṃ hoti. Uppaladaṇḍādigatena saddhiṃ ekābaddhabhāvaṃ kopetvā oṭṭhehi paricchinnamatte pārājikaṃ. Sace uppaladaṇḍādigatena saddhiṃ agghati, uppaladaṇḍādīnaṃ bunde aṅguliyāpi pihitamatte pārājikaṃ. Pādagghanake paragalaṃ appaviṭṭhe uppaladaṇḍādīsu ca mukhe ca atirekapādārahampi ekābaddhaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati, rakkhatiyevā’’ti. Taṃ sabbampi yasmā ‘‘attano bhājanagataṃ vā karoti , muṭṭhiṃ vā chindatī’’ti imaṃ nayaṃ bhajati, tasmā sudassitameva. Esa tāva ekābaddhe nayo.
如果用手、用钵、用盘子等任何容器取来喝,在让足值之物装满的那个动作完成时,就犯波罗夷。如果东西很贵,用贝壳一次就能取到足值之量,那么仅仅一次取出就犯波罗夷。如果把容器沉下去取,只要所取之物还是一整块相连的,就还不算犯。以容器口边缘为界限截断,或者取出来,就犯波罗夷。而当把酥油、油,或者清得像油一样的蜜糖从缸里倒进自己的容器时,因为这些东西清澈,不成一整块相连,所以足值之物一旦从缸口边缘滴落,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Sace pana hatthena vā pattena vā thālakādinā vā kenaci bhājanena gahetvā pivati, yamhi payoge pādagghanakaṃ pūreti, tamhi gate pārājikaṃ. Atha mahagghaṃ hoti, sippikāyapi ekapayogeneva pādagghanakaṃ gahetuṃ sakkā hoti, ekuddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ. Bhājanaṃ pana nimujjāpetvā gaṇhantassa yāva ekābaddhaṃ hoti, tāva rakkhati. Mukhavaṭṭiparicchedena vā uddhārena vā pārājikaṃ. Yadā pana sappiṃ vā telaṃ vā acchaṃ telasadisameva madhuphāṇitaṃ vā kumbhiṃ āviñchetvā attano bhājane paveseti, tadā tesaṃ acchatāya ekābaddhatā natthīti pādagghanake mukhavaṭṭito gaḷitamatte pārājikaṃ.
不过,煮好之后放着的蜜糖像胶一样黏稠,可以拉长、可以牵引。生起疑惑时,它仍然连成一体,所以还能取出来。这东西虽然从缸口出来、进了容器,但因为跟外面还连成一体,所以仍然算受到保护;只有从缸口边缘断开的那一刻,才犯波罗夷。如果有人以偷盗之心,把值一足钱的酥油、油,或者任何能喝的东西,或者任何一块贵价布料、一块皮革之类的东西,投进别人的缸里,当它从手中脱落的那一刻,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Pacitvā ṭhapitaṃ pana madhuphāṇitaṃ sileso viya cikkanaṃ ākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhanayoggaṃ hoti, uppanne kukkucce ekābaddhameva hutvā paṭinīharituṃ sakkoti, etaṃ mukhavaṭṭiyā nikkhamitvā bhājane paviṭṭhampi bāhirena saddhiṃ ekābaddhattā rakkhati, mukhavaṭṭito chinnamatte pana pārājikaṃ. Yopi theyyacittena parassa kumbhiyā pādagghanakaṃ sappiṃ vā telaṃ vā avassapivanakaṃ yaṃkiñci dukūlasāṭakaṃ vā cammakhaṇḍādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ pakkhipati, hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ.
有人知道空罐子“现在要倒油了”,就以偷盗心把某样东西丢进去。如果油倒进去以后,他喝到价值五个摩沙迦的油,那么刚喝下时就犯波罗夷——这是《大注》里说的。不过,这种说法和同一处关于干池、干沟按直判方式处理的判定相冲突,而且这里也看不出有盗取的特征,所以不应采用。但《大灯》等注书里说,把那样东西取出来时才犯波罗夷,这个说法才合理。巴利
Rittakumbhiyā ‘‘idāni telaṃ ākirissantī’’ti ñatvā yaṃkiñci bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto pakkhipati, taṃ ce tattha tele ākiṇṇe pañcamāsakaagghanakaṃ pivati, pītamatte pārājikanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana tattheva sukkhataḷāke sukkhamātikāya ujukaraṇavinicchayena virujjhati, avahāralakkhaṇañcettha na paññāyati, tasmā na gahetabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana tassa uddhāre pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ.
有人为了把东西藏进别人的空罐里,先把物品放进去;后来有人在罐里倒满了油,他害怕“这人要是知道了,会找我麻烦”,就以偷盗的心把沾了差不多一脚背深油的物品取出来,这就犯波罗夷。如果是以清净心取出来,物主来讨要时,就应当赔偿物品。所谓赔偿物品,意思是:别人丢失的东西,应当赔偿它的原价或者同样的物品。如果不赔,物主放弃追讨时,就犯波罗夷。如果有人往别人的罐里倒入酥油或油,而这个人以偷盗的心把沾了饮用油的物品放进去,按照前面说的方式,同样犯波罗夷。如果知道别人往自己的空罐里倒了酥油或油,就以偷盗的心把物品放进去,按照前面说的方式,在取出时犯波罗夷。以清净心放进去,后来以偷盗的心取出来,同样犯波罗夷。如果始终以清净心取出来,就既不算不与取,也不算颈罪;不过《大筏》注里只说是无犯。《库伦达》注里说:“‘你为什么往我的罐里倒油?’他生气了,把自己的物品取出来扔掉,这不算赔偿物品。”以偷盗的心抓住罐口边缘拖拽罐子,想让油流出来,当差不多一脚背深的油流出来时,犯波罗夷。以偷盗的心故意把罐子弄裂,心想“油会渗漏出来”,当差不多一脚背深的油渗漏出来时,犯波罗夷。以偷盗的心打孔,做成向下孔、向上孔或横向孔,但这是容易搞混的地方,所以要仔细辨别。这里的判定是:向下孔,就是孔口朝下;向上孔,就是孔口朝上;横向孔,就是像勺子一样孔道笔直。其中,从外侧开始凿的向下孔,当油从内侧流到差不多一脚背深时,即使还没流到外面,也犯波罗夷。为什么?因为从那里流出来的油就已经算是到了外面,不再算作罐里的油了。从内侧开始凿的,当油流到外侧边缘差不多一脚背深时,犯波罗夷。向上孔无论怎么凿,当油流到外侧边缘差不多一脚背深时,犯波罗夷。因为那油只要还没流到外侧边缘,就仍然算在罐里。诸义注中说:“横向孔应当按油从罐腹中间流出的情况来判定。”不过,如果在内外之间居中凿孔,那就和水池堤岸破漏的界限判定相合。从内侧凿的,按外侧边缘来判;从外侧凿的,按内侧边缘来判——这才是这里合理的判定。如果有人以偷盗的心把罐子的底座或支撑的石头移开,心想“罐子会翻倒流油”,当罐子翻倒油流出来时,犯波罗夷。如果知道有人要倒油,而在空罐上弄裂或凿孔,后来就按流出来的油量来赔偿物品。不过有些义注里也写成犯波罗夷,那是写错了。巴利
Parassa rittakumbhiyā saṅgopanatthāya bhaṇḍaṃ ṭhapetvā tattha tele ākiṇṇe ‘‘sace ayaṃ jānissati, maṃ palibujjhissatī’’ti bhīto pādagghanakaṃ telaṃ pītaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacittena uddharati, pārājikaṃ. Suddhacittena uddharati, pare āharāpente bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ nāma yaṃ parassa naṭṭhaṃ, tassa mūlaṃ vā tadeva vā bhaṇḍaṃ dātabbanti attho. No ce deti, sāmikassa dhuranikkhepe pārājikaṃ. Sace parassa kumbhiyā añño sappiṃ vā telaṃ vā ākirati, tatra cāyaṃ theyyacittena telapivanakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pakkhipati, vuttanayeneva pārājikaṃ. Attano rittakumbhiyā parassa sappiṃ vā telaṃ vā ākiraṇabhāvaṃ ñatvā theyyacittena bhaṇḍaṃ nikkhipati, pubbe vuttanayeneva uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Suddhacitto nikkhipitvā pacchā theyyacittena uddharati, pārājikameva. Suddhacittova uddharati, neva avahāro, na gīvā; mahāpaccariyaṃ pana anāpattimattameva vuttaṃ. ‘‘‘Kissa mama kumbhiyaṃ telaṃ ākirasī’ti kupito attano bhaṇḍaṃ uddharitvā chaḍḍeti, no bhaṇḍadeyya’’nti kurundiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Theyyacittena mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ gahetvā kumbhiṃ āviñchati telaṃ gaḷetukāmo, pādagghanake gaḷite pārājikaṃ. Theyyacitteneva jajjaraṃ karoti ‘‘savitvā gamissatī’’ti pādagghanake savitvā gate pārājikaṃ. Theyyacitteneva chiddaṃ karoti omaṭṭhaṃ vā ummaṭṭhaṃ vā vemaṭṭhaṃ vā, idaṃ pana sammohaṭṭhānaṃ; tasmā suṭṭhu sallekkhetabbaṃ. Ayañhettha vinicchayo – omaṭṭhaṃ nāma adhomukhachiddaṃ; ummaṭṭhaṃ nāma uddhaṃmukhachiddaṃ; vemaṭṭhaṃ nāma uḷuṅkasseva ujugatachiddaṃ. Tatra omaṭṭhassa bahi paṭṭhāya katassa abbhantarantato pādagghanake tele gaḷite bahi anikkhantepi pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā tato gaḷitamattameva bahigataṃ nāma hoti, na kumbhigatasaṅkhyaṃ labhati. Anto paṭṭhāya katassa bāhirantato pādagghanake gaḷite pārājikaṃ. Ummaṭṭhassa yathā tathā vā katassa bāhirantato pādagghanake gaḷite pārājikaṃ. Tañhi yāva bāhirantato na gaḷati, tāva kumbhigatameva hoti. ‘‘Vemaṭṭhassa ca kapālamajjhato gaḷitavasena kāretabbo’’ti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana anto ca bahi ca paṭṭhāya majjhe ṭhapetvā katachidde taḷākassa ca mariyādabhedena sameti. Anto paṭṭhāya kate pana bāhirantena, bahi paṭṭhāya kate abbhantarantena kāretabboti idamettha yuttaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘vaṭṭitvā gacchissatī’’ti theyyacittena kumbhiyā ādhārakaṃ vā upatthambhanaleḍḍuke vā apaneti, vaṭṭitvā gatāya pārājikaṃ. Telākiraṇabhāvaṃ pana ñatvā rittakumbhiyā jajjarabhāve vā chiddesu vā katesu pacchā nikkhantatelappamāṇena bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hoti. Aṭṭhakathāsau pana katthaci pārājikantipi likhitaṃ, taṃ pamādalikhitaṃ.
有人以盗心在装满的罐子上方,把石板或石块架得不牢、放得不稳,心想:“它掉下来会砸破罐子,油就会流出来。”这样做完时,就犯波罗夷。若是在空罐上方这样做,后来罐子装满时它掉下来砸破了罐子,则构成赔偿物品。因为在这类情形中,物品还不存在时就已做了手脚,所以一开始并不犯波罗夷;但由于已经实施了毁坏物品的方便行为,所以构成赔偿物品。物主来索还时如果不给,因物主放弃追索,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Paripuṇṇāya kumbhiyā upari kathalaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā ‘‘patitvā bhindissati, tato telaṃ paggharissatī’’ti theyyacittena dubbandhaṃ vā karoti, duṭṭhapitaṃ vā ṭhapeti, avassapatanakaṃ tathā karontassa katamatte pārājikaṃ. Rittakumbhiyā upari karoti, taṃ pacchā puṇṇakāle patitvā bhindati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu bhaṇḍassa natthikāle katapayogattā āditova pārājikaṃ na hoti. Bhaṇḍavināsadvārassa pana katattā bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hoti. Āharāpentesu adadato sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepena pārājikaṃ.
以盗心把水渠弄直,心想“水会冲走,或者会越过堤岸”;无论水是冲走还是越过堤岸,在弄直的那一刻就犯波罗夷。因为这类加行属于前加行的不与取。如果水渠是干涸的,弄直之后水才来,冲走或越过堤岸,那就构成应赔偿物品。为什么?因为没有使物品离开原处的加行。它的特征将在船的部分说明。巴利
Theyyacittena mātikaṃ ujukaṃ karoti ‘‘vaṭṭitvā vā gamissati, velaṃ vā uttarāpessatī’’ti ; vaṭṭitvā vā gacchatu, velaṃ vā uttaratu, ujukaraṇakāle pārājikaṃ. Īdisā hi payogā pubbapayogāvahāre saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Sukkhamātikāya ujukatāya pacchā udake āgate vaṭṭitvā vā gacchatu, velaṃ vā uttaratu, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Kasmā? Ṭhānā cāvanapayogassa abhāvā. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ nāvaṭṭhe āvi bhavissati.
关于“就地打破”等说法,先看注疏里的解释:所谓“打破”,就是用锤子敲打而弄破。所谓“丢弃”,就是倒进水或沙子,让它溢出来。所谓“焚烧”,就是拿来木柴烧掉。所谓“令不堪使用”,就是弄成不能吃或不能喝;如果把粪便、尿、毒药、吃剩的东西或尸体投进去,因为并没有让物品离开原来的位置,所以犯恶作罪,这属于佛陀才能了知的范畴。虽然是恶作罪,但如果有人要求归还,还是要赔偿物品。这里前两种情形对不上,因为它们和弄破罐子、弄直水渠是同一性质。后两种情形则即使不让物品离开原位也能做到。所以这里这样判定:据说注疏中“因为没有让物品离开原位,所以是恶作罪”这句话,是针对后两种情形说的。因为即使不让物品离开原位,也可以出于盗心或想毁坏而烧掉,或者弄成不堪使用。至于前两种情形,按前面所说的方法打破或丢弃时,确实有让物品离开原位,所以那样做时,如果是想毁坏,就要赔偿物品;如果是出于盗心,就犯波罗夷。有人问:巴利原文说的是“恶作”,那这样讲不是不合理吗?答:不会,因为要按不同的含义来理解。因为在巴利原文中,关于盗心这一边,有人这样说:所谓“打破”,就是用水弄破;所谓“丢弃”,就是在那里呕吐或丢弃小便。巴利
Tattheva bhindati vātiādīsu aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tāva vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhindati vāti muggarena pothetvā bhindati. Chaḍḍeti vāti udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā ākiritvā uttarāpeti. Jhāpeti vāti dārūni āharitvā jhāpeti. Aparibhogaṃ vā karotīti akhāditabbaṃ vā apātabbaṃ vā karoti; uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā visaṃ vā ucchiṭṭhaṃ vā kuṇapaṃ vā pātesi, āpatti dukkaṭassāti ṭhānācāvanassa natthitāya dukkaṭaṃ, buddhavisayo nāmeso. Kiñcāpi dukkaṭaṃ, āharāpente pana bhaṇḍadeyya’’nti. Tattha purimadvayaṃ na sameti. Tañhi kumbhijajjarakaraṇena ca mātikāujukaraṇena ca saddhiṃ ekalakkhaṇaṃ. Pacchimaṃ pana dvayaṃ ṭhānā acāventenāpi sakkā kātuṃ. Tasmā ettha evaṃ vinicchayaṃ vadanti – ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyaṃ kira ‘ṭhānā cāvanassa natthitāya dukkaṭa’nti idaṃ pacchimadvayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ṭhānā cāvanaṃ akarontoyeva hi theyyacittena vā vināsetukāmatāya vā jhāpeyyapi, aparibhogampi kareyya. Purimadvaye pana vuttanayena bhindantassa vā chaḍḍentassa vā ṭhānā cāvanaṃ atthi, tasmā tathā karontassa vināsetukāmatāya bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena pārājika’’nti. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dukkaṭa’’nti vuttattā ayuttanti ce? Na; aññathā gahetabbatthato. Pāḷiyañhi theyyacittapakkhe ‘‘bhindati vāti udakena sambhindati, chaḍḍeti vāti tattha vamati vā passāvaṃ vā chaḍḍetī’’ti evameke vadanti.
这里的要点是这样的:就像《调伏事》里那个烧草的人,他并不想让草离开原来的位置,只是把它折断;但因为它已经被折断了,油之类的东西就流出来;而其中凝固的部分,仍然连成一块。同样,他并不想丢弃,只是往里面撒水、沙等;但因为撒了进去,油就被丢弃了。所以,按照世俗的说法,就说成“折断”或“丢弃”。这些词的含义应当这样理解。不过,如果是在想要毁坏的这种情况下,用另一种方式也说得通。因为这样解说时,巴利原文和义注就能前后相合、连贯一致。即便如此,也不该就此满足,还应当亲近师长,去了知最终的裁决。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha sāro – vinītavatthumhi tiṇajjhāpako viya ṭhānā acāvetukāmova kevalaṃ bhindati, bhinnattā pana telādīni nikkhamanti, yaṃ vā panettha patthinnaṃ, taṃ ekābaddhameva tiṭṭhati. Achaḍḍetukāmoyeva ca kevalaṃ tattha udakavālikādīni ākirati, ākiṇṇattā pana telaṃ chaḍḍīyati. Tasmā vohāravasena ‘‘bhindati vā chaḍḍeti vā’’ti vuccatīti. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho gahetabbo. Nāsetukāmatāpakkhe pana itarathāpi yujjati. Evañhi kathiyamāne pāḷi ca aṭṭhakathā ca pubbāparena saṃsanditvā kathitā honti. Ettāvatāpi ca santosaṃ akatvā ācariye payirupāsitvā vinicchayo veditabboti.
95 95. “放在陆地上”是指在陆地上,也就是在地面、岩石表面、山坡等任何地方,不管是有遮盖还是没遮盖,放在那里就应当理解为“放在陆地上”。如果那件东西堆成一堆,就要按容器内器皿中物品的握拳截断判定法来判定。如果像树脂、生漆等那样连成一体,就要按生蜜、糖蜜的判定法来判定。如果很重,像铁块、糖块、油罐、蜜罐等那样成捆沉重之物,就要按在容器中移离原位的判定法来判定。用锁链系住的,也要注意其位置的变化。如果是铺开摆放的外衣、毯子、布料等,直接抓住拖拽,当远端越过近端所接触的位置时,犯波罗夷。应当这样从各个方向观察。如果卷起来后提举,哪怕只让它像发尖那么一点点离开地面,也犯波罗夷。其余按前面所说的方法理解。巴利
95. Thalaṭṭhe thale nikkhittanti bhūmitale vā pāsāṇatalapabbatatalādīsu vā yattha katthaci paṭicchanne vā appaṭicchanne vā ṭhapitaṃ thalaṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ sace rāsikataṃ hoti, antokumbhiyaṃ bhājanagatakaraṇamuṭṭhicchedanavinicchayena vinicchinitabbaṃ. Sace ekābaddhaṃ silesaniyyāsādi pakkamadhuphāṇitavinicchayena vinicchinitabbaṃ. Sace garukaṃ hoti bhārabaddhaṃ lohapiṇḍi-guḷapiṇḍi-telamadhughaṭādi vā, kumbhiyaṃ ṭhānācāvanavinicchayena vinicchinitabbaṃ. Saṅkhalikabaddhassa ca ṭhānabhedo sallakkhetabbo. Pattharitvā ṭhapitaṃ pana pāvārattharaṇasāṭakādiṃ ujukaṃ gahetvā ākaḍḍhati, pārimante orimantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkante pārājikaṃ. Evaṃ sabbadisāsu sallakkhetabbaṃ. Veṭhetvā uddharati, kesaggamattaṃ ākāsagataṃ karontassa pārājikaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
96 96. 对于空中的孔雀,应当以六种方式来了知它的位置界限:前方以喙尖为界,后方以尾端为界,两侧以翼尖为界,下方以脚爪尖为界,上方以冠尖为界。比丘心想“我要抓住这只属于别人、停在空中的孔雀”,于是站在它前面,或者伸出手,孔雀就在空中拍动翅膀,借着风力阻断去路而停下来。那个比丘犯恶作。如果他没有让孔雀移动,只是用手去碰它,也还是犯恶作。如果没让它离开原位却使它动弹,犯土喇咤亚。但是,如果用手抓住或没抓住,而让喙尖碰到的地方越过尾端,或者让尾端碰到的地方越过喙尖,犯波罗夷。同样,让左翼尖碰到的地方越过右翼尖,或者让右翼尖碰到的地方越过左翼尖,犯波罗夷。同样,让脚爪尖碰到的地方越过冠尖,或者让冠尖碰到的地方越过脚爪尖,犯波罗夷。巴利
96. Ākāsaṭṭhe morassa chahi ākārehi ṭhānaparicchedo veditabbo – purato mukhatuṇḍakena, pacchato kalāpaggena, ubhayapassesu pakkhapariyantehi, adho pādanakhasikhāya, uddhaṃ sikhaggenāti. Bhikkhu ‘‘sassāmikaṃ ākāsaṭṭhaṃ moraṃ gahessāmī’’ti purato vā tiṭṭhati, hatthaṃ vā pasāreti, moro ākāseyeva pakkhe cāreti, vātaṃ gāhāpetvā gamanaṃ upacchinditvā tiṭṭhati. Tassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ. Taṃ aphandento hatthena āmasati, dukkaṭameva. Ṭhānā acāvento phandāpeti, thullaccayaṃ. Hatthena pana gahetvā vā aggahetvā vā mukhatuṇḍakena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ kalāpaggaṃ, kalāpaggena vā phuṭṭhokāsaṃ mukhatuṇḍakaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Tathā vāmapakkhapariyantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ dakkhiṇapakkhapariyantaṃ, dakkhiṇapakkhapariyantena vā phuṭṭhokāsaṃ vāmapakkhapariyantaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Tathā pādanakhasikhāya phuṭṭhokāsaṃ sikhaggaṃ, sikhaggena vā phuṭṭhokāsaṃ pādanakhasikhaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ.
孔雀在空中飞行时,如果停落在头上等身体部位上,那个地方就是它所在的位置。所以,就算抓着它停在手上左右摆弄,也只是让它动来动去而已;但如果用另一只手抓住它,使它离开原来的位置,就犯波罗夷。如果把另一只手凑过去,孔雀自己飞起来停在那只手上,就不犯。明知它停在身体部位上,以偷盗的心迈出一步,犯土喇咤亚;迈出第二步,犯波罗夷。巴利
Ākāsena gacchanto moro sīsādīsu yasmiṃ aṅge nilīyati, taṃ tassa ṭhānaṃ. Tasmā taṃ hatthe nilīnaṃ ito cito ca karontopi phandāpetiyeva, yadi pana itarena hatthena gahetvā ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ . Itaraṃ hatthaṃ upaneti, moro sayameva uḍḍetvā tattha nilīyati, anāpatti . Aṅge nilīnabhāvaṃ ñatvā theyyacittena ekaṃ padavāraṃ gacchati, thullaccayaṃ. Dutiye pārājikaṃ.
孔雀站在地上时,按它的两只脚和尾羽来算,有三个着地点。有人把它提起来,只要还有一个着地点碰到地面,就犯土喇咤亚;一旦连发尖那么一点点离开地面,就犯波罗夷。把关在笼子里的孔雀连笼子一起提起来,犯波罗夷。但如果价值不足一巴达,那就一切都按价值来判。以盗心把在内院里走动的孔雀一步步引向院外,当它越过门槛时,就犯波罗夷。就像牛栏是栏中牛的位置一样,内院就是这只孔雀的位置。但如果是用手抓住孔雀,即使还在内院里,把它举到空中,也一样犯波罗夷。孔雀在村里走动时,让它越过村界,就犯波罗夷。孔雀自己走出去,在村边或院边走动,有盗心的人用木棍或瓦片吓它,想把它赶向森林,但孔雀飞起来后落在村里、内院中或屋顶上,那它还是被守护着。但如果孔雀朝森林方向飞起或走去,而偷盗者并没有“先把它赶进森林再捉”的打算,那么当它连发尖那么一点点离开地面飞起时,或者迈出第二步时,就犯波罗夷。为什么?因为孔雀一旦出了村,它站的地方就是它的位置。关于孔雀等鸟类,也是同样的判定。巴利
Bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitamoro dvinnaṃ vā pādānaṃ kalāpassa ca vasena tīṇi ṭhānāni labhati. Taṃ ukkhipantassa yāva ekampi ṭhānaṃ pathaviṃ phusati, tāva thullaccayaṃ. Kesaggamattampi pathaviyā mocitamatte pārājikaṃ. Pañjare ṭhitaṃ saha pañjarena uddharati, pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana pādaṃ na agghati, sabbattha agghavasena kātabbaṃ. Antovatthumhi carantaṃ moraṃ theyyacittena padasā bahivatthuṃ nīharanto dvāraparicchedaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Vaje ṭhitabalībaddassa hi vajo viya antovatthu tassa ṭhānaṃ. Hatthena pana gahetvā antovatthusmimpi ākāsagataṃ karontassa pārājikameva. Antogāme carantampi gāmaparikkhepaṃ atikkāmentassa pārājikaṃ . Sayameva nikkhamitvā gāmūpacāre vā vatthūpacāre vā carantaṃ pana theyyacitto kaṭṭhena vā kathalāya vā utrāsetvā aṭavimukhaṃ karoti, moro uḍḍetvā antogāme vā antovatthumhi vā chadanapiṭṭhe vā nilīyati, rakkhati. Sace pana aṭavimukhe uḍḍeti vā gacchati vā ‘‘aṭaviṃ pavesetvā gahessāmī’’ti parikappe asati pathavito kesaggamattampi uḍḍitamatte vā dutiyapadavāre vā pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā gāmato nikkhantassa ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ hoti. Kapiñjarādīsupi ayameva vinicchayo.
如果布料被风吹起,像铺在地面上一样在空中飞行,迎面飞来时,有人用手抓住它的一端,只要还只是在左右挪动而没有让它离开原来的位置,在阻断它行进时就犯恶作。如果没有让它离开原位而只是摇动它,让它颤动,就犯土喇咤亚。如果让它离开原位,就犯波罗夷。它的位置界限,应当像对孔雀那样,从六种情况来理解。巴利
Sāṭakaṃ vāti vātavegukkhittaṃ pathavitale pattharitvā ṭhapitamiva ākāsena gacchantaṃ khalibaddhaṃ sāṭakaṃ abhimukhāgataṃ hatthena ekasmiṃ ante gaṇhāti, ito cito ca ṭhānaṃ avikopentoyeva gamanupacchede dukkaṭaṃ. Ṭhānācāvanaṃ akaronto cāleti, phandāpane thullaccayaṃ. Ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Ṭhānaparicchedo cassa morasseva chahi ākārehi veditabbo.
如果布料没有捆起来,只抓住一端,另一端就会垂落到地上,这时它有两个位置——手和地面。如果还像原来抓着那样,把它从最初抓取的位置移开,犯土喇咤亚。之后用另一只手或脚把它从地面提起来,犯波罗夷。或者先把它从地面提起,犯土喇咤亚;然后再让它离开手所抓持的位置,犯波罗夷。又或者不松开手,直接把手垂下去让布料着地,再用同一只手把它提起来,犯波罗夷。对于卷起来的布料,也是同样的判定。巴利
Abaddhasāṭako pana ekasmiṃ ante gahitamatteva dutiyenantena patitvā bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāti, tassa dve ṭhānāni honti – hattho ceva bhūmi ca. Taṃ yathāgahitameva paṭhamaṃ gahitokāsappadesato cāleti, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā bhūmito dutiyahatthena vā pādena vā ukkhipati, pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ vā bhūmito uddharati, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā gahitokāsappadesato cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Gahaṇaṃ vā amuñcanto ujukameva hatthaṃ onāmetvā bhūmigataṃ katvā teneva hatthena ukkhipati, pārājikaṃ. Veṭhanepi ayameva vinicchayo.
有人正在切割黄金或纯金,比如给人们做项链等装饰品的工匠切割金条时,切下的金块掉落下来。如果比丘以偷盗的心,用手去接从空中飞来的那块金子,单单接住就已经构成偷盗的判定点。如果他把手从接住的地方移开,就犯波罗夷。如果金块落在衣服上,他用手拾起来,犯波罗夷;如果不拾起来就直接走开,走到第二步时犯波罗夷。落在钵里的情况也一样。如果落在头上、脸上或脚上,他用手去拿,犯波罗夷;如果不拿就直接走开,走到第二步时犯波罗夷。无论金块落在哪里,就以它落下的那个位置作为判定点,而不是以整个身体或衣钵作为判定点。巴利
Hiraññaṃvā suvaṇṇaṃ vā chijjamānanti manussānaṃ alaṅkarontānaṃ gīveyyakādipiḷandhanaṃ vā suvaṇṇasalākaṃ chindantānaṃ suvaṇṇakārānaṃ suvaṇṇakhaṇḍaṃ vā chijjamānaṃ patati, tañce bhikkhu ākāsena āgacchantaṃ theyyacitto hatthena gaṇhāti, gahaṇameva ṭhānaṃ. Gahitappadesato hatthaṃ apaneti, pārājikaṃ. Cīvare patitaṃ hatthena ukkhipati, pārājikaṃ. Anuddharitvāva yāti, dutiye padavāre pārājikaṃ. Patte patitepi eseva nayo. Sīse vā mukhe vā pāde vā patiṭṭhitaṃ hatthena gaṇhāti, pārājikaṃ. Aggahetvāva yāti, dutiye padavāre pārājikaṃ. Yattha katthaci patati, tassa patitokāsova ṭhānaṃ, na sabbaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ pattacīvaraṃ vāti.
97 97. 对于放置在床、椅等上面的物品,不管是有覆盖的还是没有覆盖的,只要以偷盗的心去触摸,就犯恶作。而对于放置在床、椅上的物品,这里的判定应当依照“陆地事”中所说的方法来理解。不过这里有一个差别:如果绑在床柱上的布单铺在床或椅上,中间没有碰到床面,只碰到床脚,那就应当以床脚作为基准位置。因为只要越过床脚上方所接触的位置,哪怕只超过一点点,就犯波罗夷。如果是连床带椅一起搬走,那就应当以床脚、椅脚所安立的位置作为基准来理解。巴利
97. Vehāsaṭṭhe mañcapīṭhādīsu ṭhapitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ āmāsaṃ vā hotu anāmāsaṃ vā, theyyacittena āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Mañcapīṭhesu ṭhapitabhaṇḍesu panettha thalaṭṭhe vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sace khaliyā baddhasāṭako mañce vā pīṭhe vā patthaṭo majjhena mañcatalaṃ na phusati, mañcapādeva phusati, tesaṃ vasena ṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pādānaṃ upari phuṭṭhokāsameva hi atikkamitamattena tattha pārājikaṃ hoti. Saha mañcapīṭhehi harantassa pana mañcapīṭhapādānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsavasena ṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
所谓“衣竿”,是指为了放置衣物而绑好立起来的竿子,或者木棍。在那里,把衣收拢后,从一端绕过另一端做成环状放着的衣,以它安立之处所接触的地方为“处”,不是整根衣竿都算。所以,以盗心抓住那个环状处拉拽时,从衣在竿上安立的那一端,到另一端衣所接触竿的位置,只要拉过一指或两指宽,就犯波罗夷。抓住衣端拉拽的,也是同样的判定。如果在衣竿上向左或向右移动,当左端超过右端所在的位置,或右端超过左端所在的位置,只要移动十指或十二指宽,就犯波罗夷。向上提起时,只要提起像头发尖那么一点点,就犯波罗夷。对于用绳子绑好放着的衣,不管有没有碰到衣竿,解开它时犯偷兰遮;解开的那一刻就犯波罗夷。因为一旦解开,就算作“从处上离开了”。对于缠在竿上放着的衣,把它解下来时犯偷兰遮;刚解下来就犯波罗夷。对于做成环状放着的衣,如果切断环、或者解开环、或者从一端竿头解下取出,犯偷兰遮;刚切断、刚解开、刚取出时,就犯波罗夷。如果不那样做,只是在衣竿上这里那里移动,那还算是守护着的。因为对于环状放置的衣来说,整根衣竿都是它的“处”。为什么?因为在那里有滑动的性质。可是,当用手把它拿起来悬在空中时,就犯波罗夷。对于展开来放着的衣,以它安立之处所接触的地方为“处”。在那里收拢后放着的,按前面所说的方式来判断。至于有一端触地而放着的衣,它的“处”有两个:衣竿上的安立处和地上的安立处。在那里,对于一端触地放着的未绑缚的布,应按前面所说的方式来判断。对于衣绳,也是同样的判断。巴利
Cīvaravaṃse vāti cīvaraṭhapanatthāya bandhitvā ṭhapite vaṃse vā kaṭṭhadaṇḍake vā. Tattha saṃharitvā pārato antaṃ orato bhogaṃ katvā ṭhapitacīvarassa patiṭṭhitokāsena phuṭṭhokāsova ṭhānaṃ, na sabbo cīvaravaṃso. Tasmā theyyacittena taṃ bhoge gahetvā ākaḍḍhantassa pārato vaṃse patiṭṭhitokāsaṃ orato cīvarena vaṃsassa phuṭṭhappadesaṃ atikkāmentassa ekadvaṅgulamattākaḍḍhaneneva pārājikaṃ. Ante gahetvā ākaḍḍhantassāpi eseva nayo. Tattheva pana cīvaravaṃse vāmato vā dakkhiṇato vā sārentassa vāmantena dakkhiṇantaṭṭhānaṃ dakkhiṇantena vā vāmantaṭṭhānaṃ atikkantamatte dasadvādasaṅgulamattasāraṇeneva pārājikaṃ. Uddhaṃ ukkhipantassa kesaggamattukkhipanena pārājikaṃ. Cīvaravaṃsaṃ phusantaṃ vā aphusantaṃ vā rajjukena bandhitvā ṭhapitacīvaraṃ mocentassa thullaccayaṃ, mutte pārājikaṃ. Muttamattameva hi taṃ ‘‘ṭhānā cuta’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Vaṃse veṭhetvā ṭhapitaṃ nibbeṭhentassa thullaccayaṃ, nibbeṭhitamatte pārājikaṃ. Valayaṃ katvā ṭhapite valayaṃ chindati vā moceti vā ekaṃ vā vaṃsakoṭiṃ mocetvā nīharati, thullaccayaṃ . Chinnamatte muttamatte nīhaṭamatte ca pārājikaṃ. Tathā akatvāva cīvaravaṃse ito cito ca sāreti, rakkhati tāva. Valayassa hi sabbopi cīvaravaṃso ṭhānaṃ. Kasmā? Tattha saṃsaraṇadhammatāya. Yadā pana naṃ hatthena gahetvā ākāsagataṃ karoti, pārājikaṃ. Pasāretvā ṭhapitassa patiṭṭhitokāsena phuṭṭhokāsova ṭhānaṃ. Tattha saṃharitvā ṭhapite vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Yaṃ pana ekenantena bhūmiṃ phusitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, tassa cīvaravaṃse ca bhūmiyañca patiṭṭhitokāsavasena dve ṭhānāni. Tattha bhūmiyaṃ ekenantena patiṭṭhite abaddhasāṭake vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo. Cīvararajjuyāpi ayameva vinicchayo.
如果是挂在钩子上的物品,比如药罐或药袋,放上去的时候没有碰到墙也没有碰到地,那么当人摩擦挂钩、把它取出来时,只要它一离开钩尖,就犯波罗夷。如果物品是绑在挂钩上的,抓住底部把它提起来悬在空中,即使还没离开钩尖,也犯波罗夷。如果物品靠着墙,先从钩尖取出来,犯土喇咤亚;之后再让它离开墙,犯波罗夷。如果先让它离开墙,再从钩上取出来,道理也一样。但是,如果物品太重取不出来,自己把它靠到墙上之后再从钩上取下来,那么即使后来没有让它离开墙,只要它一离开钩尖,就犯波罗夷。因为自己造作的位置,并不算真正的位置。如果物品是碰着地放着的,那就只有两个位置。这里的判定应按照前面所说的来。如果物品是装进网袋后挂着的,那么无论从网袋里取出来,还是连着网袋一起从钩上取下来,都犯波罗夷。这里也应当依照靠墙、触地等情形来理解位置的差别。巴利
Aṅkusake laggetvā ṭhapitabhaṇḍaṃ pana bhesajjaghaṭo vā bhesajjatthavikā vā sace bhittiṃ vā bhūmiṃ vā aphusitvā ṭhapitaṃ lagganakaṃ ghaṃsantassa nīharato aṅkusakoṭito nikkhantamatte pārājikaṃ. Lagganakaṃ baddhaṃ hoti, bundena ukkhipitvā ākāsagataṃ karontassa aṅkusakoṭito anikkhantepi pārājikaṃ. Bhittinissitaṃ hoti, paṭhamaṃ aṅkusakoṭito nīharati, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā bhittiṃ moceti, pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ bhittiṃ mocetvā pacchā aṅkusato nīharantassāpi eseva nayo. Sace pana bhāriyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ nīharituṃ asakkonto sayaṃ bhittinissitaṃ katvā aṅkusato nīharati, puna bhittiṃ amocetvāpi aṅkusato nīhaṭamatteyeva pārājikaṃ. Attanā kataṭṭhānañhi ṭhānaṃ na hoti. Bhūmiṃ phusitvā ṭhitassa pana dve eva ṭhānāni. Tattha vuttoyeva vinicchayo . Yaṃ pana sikkāya pakkhipitvā laggitaṃ hoti, taṃ sikkāto nīharantassāpi saha sikkāya aṅkusato nīharantassāpi pārājikaṃ. Bhittibhūmisannissitavasena cettha ṭhānabhedopi veditabbo.
墙钉,是指竖直钉进墙里的,或者本来就在那里长出来的;而象钩则是弯着钉进去的。把东西挂在这些上面放置,应当按前面讲钩子的方式来判定。如果东西架在两根或三根依次并排立着的桩上,有人抓住矛或叉的尖端或根部往上提、往外拽,只要超出了每一根桩各自被触碰的范围,就犯波罗夷。因为对它们来说,被触碰的范围就是它们各自的位置,并不像所有的墙钉或象钩那样。如果面朝墙壁站着,从中间抓住往外拽,当一端超出所触范围、另一端也超出时,就犯波罗夷。从对面推也一样。用手抓住竖直往上提,哪怕只让离地一根头发丝那么点,就犯波罗夷。如果东西靠着墙放着,拽的时候蹭着墙,当尖端超出根部所触的范围,或者根部超出尖端所触的范围时,就犯波罗夷。面朝墙壁站着拽,当一端超出所触范围而到另一端时,就犯波罗夷。竖直往上提,哪怕只让离地一根头发丝那么点,也犯波罗夷。巴利
Bhittikhīloti ujukaṃ katvā bhittiyaṃ ākoṭito vā tatthajātako eva vā; nāgadanto pana vaṅko ākoṭito eva. Tesu laggetvā ṭhapitaṃ aṅkusake vuttanayeneva vinicchinitabbaṃ. Dvīsu tīsu pana paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitesu āropetvā ṭhapitaṃ kuntaṃ vā bhindivālaṃ vā agge vā bunde vā gahetvā ākaḍḍhati, ekamekassa phuṭṭhokāsamatte atikkante pārājikaṃ. Phuṭṭhokāsamattameva hi tesaṃ ṭhānaṃ hoti, na sabbe khīlā vā nāgadantā vā. Bhittiabhimukho ṭhatvā majjhe gahetvā ākaḍḍhati, orimantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ pārimantena atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ. Parato pellentassāpi eseva nayo. Hatthena gahetvā ujukaṃ ukkhipanto kesaggamattampi ākāsagataṃ karoti, pārājikaṃ. Bhittiṃ nissāya ṭhapitaṃ bhittiṃ ghaṃsanto ākaḍḍhati, aggena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ bundaṃ, bundena vā phuṭṭhokāsaṃ aggaṃ atikkāmentassa pārājikaṃ . Bhittiabhimukho ṭhatvā ākaḍḍhanto ekenantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ aparantaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Ujukaṃ ukkhipanto kesaggamattaṃ ākāsagataṃ karoti, pārājikaṃ.
挂在树上,是指把东西挂到多罗树等树上设置的钩子之类上面,判定方法应按照前面讲钩子时所说的来理解。至于摇动树上自然长出的多罗果串,则犯土喇咤亚。如果某个果实里装满的东西达到波罗夷的量,那么当它从系缚中解脱的那一刻,就犯波罗夷。砍断果串,犯波罗夷。用末端把叶腋处抬起来放置,会得到两个位置——放置的位置和茎柄的位置;对此应按照前面所说的方法来判定。如果有人因为害怕“刚一砍断就会发出声音”,而自己用末端先抬起叶腋再砍断,那么在砍断的当下就犯波罗夷。因为自己造作的地方,并不是物品所在的位置。一切树上的花和果,都应按照这个方法来判断。巴利
Rukkhe vā laggitanti tālarukkhādīsu āropetvā laggite aṅkusakādīsu vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Tatthajātakaṃ pana tālapiṇḍiṃ cālentassa thullaccayaṃ. Yasmiṃ phale pārājikavatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ bandhanā muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Piṇḍiṃ chindati, pārājikaṃ. Aggena paṇṇantaraṃ āropetvā ṭhapitā dve ṭhānāni labhati – ṭhapitaṭṭhānañca vaṇṭaṭṭhānañca; tattha vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Yo pana ‘‘chinnamattā patamānā saddaṃ kareyyā’’ti bhayena sayaṃ aggena paṇṇantaraṃ āropetvā chindati, chinnamatte pārājikaṃ . Attanā kataṭṭhānañhi ṭhānaṃ na hoti. Etena upāyena sabbarukkhānaṃ pupphaphalesu vinicchayo veditabbo.
关于“持钵者”这一条:这里不管是树托、环托、棒托,还是篮子之类任何用来放钵的东西,都算作钵托。钵放在上面时,被钵碰到的那块空间就是它的“处”。其中对树托来说,处的界定有五种情况。抓住放在上面的钵的口沿,向四个方向中任何一个方向拉,当一端越过所碰触的空间范围到达另一端时,就犯波罗夷。向上提起哪怕只有一根头发那么一点,也犯波罗夷。连同钵托一起拿走,也同样按这个标准判定。巴利
Pattādhārakepīti ettha rukkhādhārako vā hotu valayādhārako vā daṇḍādhārako vā yaṃkiñci pattaṭṭhapanakaṃ pacchikāpi hotu pattādhārako tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tattha ṭhapitapattassa pattena phuṭṭhokāso eva ṭhānaṃ. Tattha rukkhādhārake pañcahākārehi ṭhānaparicchedo hoti. Tattha ṭhitaṃ pattaṃ mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ gahetvā catūsu disāsu yato kutoci kaḍḍhanto ekenantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ aparantaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Uddhaṃ kesaggamattaṃ ukkhipato pārājikaṃ. Sahādhārakena harantassāpi eseva nayoti.
98 98. 关于“水中处”——所谓“放在水里”,是指因为害怕国王等人,把不会被水损坏的铜器、铁器之类妥善盖好后,放进池塘等不流动的水里。只有它安放的那一处才算“处”,并不是整片水域都算。如果在水不深的地方一步步走过去,每迈一步就犯一次恶作罪。如果在深水里用手或脚划动,每挥一次手、每踏一次脚,每一次动作都犯一次恶作罪。为了取水罐而潜入水中又浮上来,也用同样的判定方法。不过,如果中途看见水蛇或凶鱼,因为害怕而逃走,那就无犯。至于触摸等情况,应当依照前面在地面水罐处所讲的方法来判定。但这里有一点不同:那里是挖开地面再拖出来,这里是陷在泥里。这样,处所的界定共有六种方式。巴利
98. Udakaṭṭhe – udake nikkhittaṃ hotīti rājabhayādibhītehi udakena avinassanadhammesu tambalohabhājanādīsu suppaṭicchannaṃ katvā pokkharaṇīādīsu asandanake udake nikkhittaṃ. Tassa patiṭṭhitokāsoyeva ṭhānaṃ, na sabbaṃ udakaṃ. Gacchati vā āpatti dukkaṭassāti agambhīre udake padasā gacchantassa padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ. Gambhīre hatthehi vā pādehi vā payogaṃ karontassa hatthavārehi vā padavārehi vā payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Eseva nayo kumbhigahaṇatthaṃ nimujjanummujjanesu. Sace pana antarā kiñci udakasappaṃ vā vāḷamacchaṃ vā disvā bhīto palāyati, anāpatti. Āmasanādīsu bhūmigatāya kumbhiyā vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo . Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha bhūmiṃ khaṇitvā kaḍḍhati, idha kaddame osāreti. Evaṃ chahākārehi ṭhānaparicchedo hoti.
在青莲花等花中,如果某朵花里装满了物品,那么这朵花被切断时,就犯波罗夷。在这里,对于青莲花一类,只要哪怕一侧的纤维还没断,它就仍然受到保护。但对于红莲花一类,花茎被切断后,即使里面的纤维没断,也不再受到保护。如果是物主砍下来放着的青莲花等,当那朵装满物品的花被拔起时,就犯波罗夷。如果是捆成手束的花,当那束装满物品的花被拔起时,就犯波罗夷。如果是捆成担的花,用六种方式中的任何一种让那担花离开原处,就按照地面水罐那段所说的方法,犯波罗夷。如果是长茎的青莲花等,把花或茎编成花鬘,铺草在水面的绳索上放着或绑着,那么这些花移动的界限要按六种方式来理解:纵向以花顶端和茎末端为界,横向以周边为界,下方以安立之处为界,上方以覆盖在其上的物体背面为界。巴利
Uppalādīsu yasmiṃ pupphe vatthuṃ pūreti, tasmiṃ chinnamatte pārājikaṃ. Uppalajātikānañcettha yāva ekasmimpi passe vāko na chijjati, tāva rakkhati. Padumajātikānaṃ pana daṇḍe chinne abbhantare suttaṃ acchinnampi na rakkhati. Sāmikehi chinditvā ṭhapitāni uppalādīni honti, yaṃ vatthuṃ pūreti, tasmiṃ uddhaṭe pārājikaṃ. Hatthakabaddhāni honti, yasmiṃ hatthake vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ uddhaṭe pārājikaṃ. Bhārabaddhāni honti, taṃ bhāraṃ channaṃ ākārānaṃ yena kenaci ākārena ṭhānā cāventassa bhūmaṭṭhakumbhiyaṃ vuttanayena pārājikaṃ. Dīghanāḷāni uppalādīni honti, pupphesu vā nāḷesu vā veṇiṃ katvā udakapiṭṭhe rajjukesu tiṇāni santharitvā ṭhapenti vā bandhanti vā, tesaṃ dīghato pupphaggena ca nāḷantena ca tiriyaṃ pariyantehi heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitokāsena uddhaṃ upari ṭhitassa piṭṭhiyāti chahākārehi ṭhānā cāvanaparicchedo veditabbo.
如果有人摇动水面,让放在水面上的花束随着水动起来、掀起波纹,哪怕只让它从原来的位置移动一根头发尖那么一点点,也犯波罗夷。不过,如果他心里想“我要在这里拿它”,那么在花还没到那个位置之前,它还是受保护的;等花到了那个位置再取走,就犯波罗夷。对于完全高出水面的花,整个有水的范围都算它的处所;如果把花连茎拔起来、直直往上抽,当茎的末端超出水面一根头发尖那么一点点时,就犯波罗夷。如果抓住花,把它拨到一边再拖着拔起来,那么有水的范围就不算它的处所,在拔起来的那一刻就犯波罗夷。把捆成束的花系好,放在水中、树上或灌木上,如果不解开系绳就把它从这里移到那里,犯偷兰遮;系绳刚一解开,就犯波罗夷。先解开系绳,然后再拿走——关于这里处所范围的界定有六种方式,这两点在《大义释》等书中都有说到。对于想连莲株一起取走莲池里的花的人,应当根据花茎和叶茎所接触的水域,来理解上方和横向的处所范围。然而,如果他不拔起莲株,只是把花或叶子朝自己这边拉,犯偷兰遮;在拔起来的那一刻,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Yopi udakapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapitapupphakalāpaṃ udakaṃ cāletvā vīciṃ uṭṭhāpetvā kesaggamattampi yathāṭhitaṭṭhānato cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Atha pana parikappeti ‘‘ettha gataṃ gahessāmī’’ti, rakkhati tāva; gataṭṭhāne pana uddharato pārājikaṃ. Udakato accuggatassa pupphassa sakalamudakaṃ ṭhānaṃ, taṃ uppāṭetvā ujukaṃ uddharantassa nāḷante kesaggamattaṃ udakato atikkante pārājikaṃ. Pupphe gahetvā apanāmetvā ākaḍḍhanto uppāṭeti, na udakaṃ ṭhānaṃ, uppāṭitamatte pārājikaṃ. Kalāpabaddhāni pupphāni udakaṭṭhāne vā rukkhe vā gacche vā bandhitvā ṭhapenti, bandhanaṃ amocetvā ito cito ca karontassa thullaccayaṃ, bandhane muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ bandhanaṃ mocetvā pacchā harati, ettha chahākārehi ṭhānaparicchedoti idaṃ ubhayaṃ mahāpaccariyādīsu vuttaṃ. Paduminiyaṃ pupphāni saha paduminiṃyā gaṇhitukāmassa pupphanāḷehi ca pattanāḷehi ca phuṭṭhaudakavasena uddhañceva tiriyañca ṭhānaparicchedo veditabbo. Taṃ panassa paduminiṃ anuppāṭetvā pupphāni vā pattāni vā attano abhimukhaṃ ākaḍḍhantassa thullaccayaṃ. Uppāṭitamatte pārājikaṃ.
把花和叶的茎从原处拔起之前,先拔起整株莲花,犯偷兰遮。之后,当花和叶的茎已经离开原位时,犯波罗夷。不过,对于已经被拔起的莲花,摘取它的花时,应当先估定物品的价值再处理。对于放在外面、堆成一堆、扎成一束、捆成一担的花,也是同样的道理。拔起足以构成一件物品的藕或藕茎,犯波罗夷。这里应当根据泥土中被触碰到的范围来界定“处”。拔起它们时,即使细根还没断,仍然算受到保护。藕节上长出的叶或花,也受到保护,这在《大注》中就是这样说的。不过,藕节上的刺,就像青春期的人脸上的痘痘一样,因为不长,所以不受保护。其余的情况和青莲花等所说的相同。巴利
Pupphapattanāḷe ṭhānato acāvetvāpi paṭhamaṃ paduminiṃ uppāṭentassa thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā pupphapattanāḷesu ṭhānā cāvitesu pārājikaṃ. Uppāṭitāya paduminiyā pupphaṃ gaṇhanto pana bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo. Bahi ṭhapite rāsikatakalāpabaddhabhārabaddhapupphepi eseva nayo. Bhisaṃ vā muḷālaṃ vā yena vatthu pūrati, taṃ uppāṭentassa pārājikaṃ. Kaddame phuṭṭhokāsavasena cettha ṭhānaṃ paricchinditabbaṃ. Tāni uppāṭentassa sukhumampi mūlaṃ acchinnaṃ hoti, rakkhati tāva. Bhisapabbe jātaṃ pattaṃ vā pupphaṃ vā hoti, tampi rakkhatīti mahāaṭṭhakathāyameva vuttaṃ. Bhisagaṇṭhimhi pana kaṇṭako hoti yobbanappattānaṃ mukhapiḷakā viya, ayaṃ adīghattā na rakkhati. Sesaṃ uppalādīsu vuttanayameva.
对于有主人的鱼和龟来说,在池塘等地方,整个水域都算是有主物所在的范围。所以,如果有人在有主人养护的地方,用钓钩、渔网、鱼笼或者手去抓有主人的鱼,当那条鱼已经足够构成一件物品时,只要把它从水里提起哪怕只有一根头发尖那么一点点,就犯波罗夷。有些鱼在被抓的时候四处乱窜,或者跳到空中,或者落到岸上;就算抓的是停在空中的鱼或落在岸上的鱼,也一样犯波罗夷。对于爬出外面觅食的龟,抓它也是同样的道理。但如果把原本在水里的众生从水中弄出来再抓,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Macchakacchapānaṃ sassāmikānaṃ vāpiādīsu sakalamudakaṃ ṭhānaṃ. Tasmā yo paṭijagganaṭṭhāne sassāmikaṃ macchaṃ baḷisena vā jālena vā kumanena vā hatthena vā gaṇhāti, tassa yena macchena vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ kesaggamattampi udakato uddhaṭamatte pārājikaṃ. Koci maccho gayhamāno ito cito ca dhāvati, ākāsaṃ vā uppatati, tīre vā patati, ākāse vā ṭhitaṃ tīre vā patitaṃ gaṇhatopi pārājikameva. Kacchapampi bahi gocaratthaṃ gataṃ gaṇhato eseva nayo. Udakaṭṭhaṃ pana udakā mocayato pārājikaṃ.
不过,在各个地区,人们依靠共用的那座大湖的排水口,挖一条也是共用的、像小河一样的引水渠。然后从那里引出小支渠,又在支渠末端各自挖坑,供自己引水用。当他们需要用水时,就把坑、小支渠和引水渠疏通,打开排水口。于是鱼随着水游出来,逐渐进入那些坑里住下。对于湖里和引水渠里的鱼,有人捕捉时,他们不加阻止。但对于进入各自的小支渠和水坑里的鱼,他们不允许别人捕捉,会加以阻止。在那里,如果有人捕捉湖里、排水口或引水渠里的鱼,不应按偷盗来处罚。但如果捕捉进入小支渠或水坑里的鱼,就要按所捕之鱼的价值来处罚。如果那条正被捕捉的鱼从那里跳向空中,或落到岸上,那么捕捉停在空中或岸上、已经脱离水中的鱼,不算偷盗。为什么?因为主人们的所有权只及于停留在自己占有范围内的鱼。那里就是这样约定的。对于龟,也是同样的道理。巴利
Tesu tesu pana janapadesu sabbasādhāraṇassa mahātaḷākassa niddhamanatumbaṃ nissāya sabbasādhāraṇameva kunnadīsadisaṃ udakavāhakaṃ khaṇanti. Tato khuddakamātikāyo nīharitvā mātikākoṭiyaṃ attano attano vaḷañjanatthāya āvāṭe khaṇanti. Tesaṃ pana yadā udakena attho hoti, tadā āvāṭe khuddakamātikāyo udakavāhakañca sodhetvā niddhamanatumbaṃ ugghāṭenti. Tato udakena saddhiṃ macchā nikkhamitvā anupubbena āvāṭe patvā vasanti. Tattha taḷāke ca udakavāhakesu ca macche gaṇhante na vārenti. Khuddakāsu pana attano attano mātikāsu udakaāvāṭesu ca paviṭṭhamacche gaṇhituṃ na denti, vārenti; tattha yo taḷāke vā niddhamanatumbe vā udakavāhake vā macche gaṇhāti, avahārena so na kāretabbo. Khuddakamātikāsu pana āvāṭesu vā paviṭṭhaṃ gaṇhanto gahitassa agghavasena kāretabbo. Sace tato gayhamāno maccho ākāse vā uppatati, tīre vā patati, taṃ ākāsaṭṭhaṃ vā tīraṭṭhaṃ vā udakavinimuttaṃ gaṇhato avahāro natthi. Kasmā? Yasmā attano pariggahaṭṭhāne ṭhitasseva te sāmikā. Evarūpā hi tattha katikā. Kacchapepi eseva nayo.
如果被捉的鱼从小水坑爬进小支渠,在那里捉它,仍然算偷盗。但如果它从小支渠爬进引水渠,再从那里爬进湖里,捉它就不算偷盗。如果有人从小水坑用饭粒引诱鱼,让它爬上支渠后再捉,那就是偷盗。但如果从那里引诱它爬上引水渠后再捉,就不算偷盗。有些人从某个共有水域把鱼带来,放进后面自己挖的水坑里养着,每天杀两三条来加菜。这样的鱼,不管它在水里、空中还是岸上,无论在哪儿捉,都算偷盗。龟也是一样的道理。巴利
Sace pana maccho gayhamāno āvāṭato khuddakamātikaṃ āruhati, tattha naṃ gaṇhatopi avahāroyeva. Khuddakamātikāto pana udakavāhakaṃ, tato ca taḷākaṃ ārūḷhaṃ gaṇhato avahāro natthi. Yo āvāṭato bhattasitthehi palobhetvā mātikaṃ āropetvā gaṇhāti, avahārova. Tato pana palobhetvā udakavāhakaṃ āropetvā gaṇhantassa avahāro natthi. Keci pana kutocideva sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhānato macche ānetvā pacchimavatthubhāge udakāvāṭe khipitvā posetvā divase divase dve tīṇi uttaribhaṅgatthāya mārenti. Evarūpaṃ macchaṃ udake vā ākāse vā tīre vā yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ gaṇhato avahāro eva. Kacchapepi eseva nayo.
夏天河水断流时,水会积在某个低洼处。人们为了毒鱼,把醉鱼果之类的毒物投进去,然后离开。鱼吃了那些东西就死了,翻着肚皮浮在水面上。有人到了那里,心想“趁主人还没来,我先把这些鱼拿走”,于是就拿走,这要按鱼的价值来判罚。如果他是把它当成粪扫衣想而拿,就不算不与取;但如果是叫人替自己拿,就要赔偿物品的价钱。投了鱼毒之后离开的人,会带着容器回来,装满鱼再走。只要他们还想着“我们还会再来”,那些鱼就仍然是有主的。可是当他们觉得“够了,不要了”,毫无留恋地离开,从那时起,以偷盗心去拿的人就犯恶作。若是粪扫衣想的人去拿,则无犯。对鱼和龟是这样判,对一切水生生物也应当这样判。巴利
Nidāghakāle pana nadiyā sote pacchinne katthaci ninnaṭṭhāne udakaṃ tiṭṭhati, tattha manussā macchānaṃ vināsāya madanaphalavasādīni pakkhipitvā gacchanti, macchā tāni khādantā maritvā uttānā udake plavantā tiṭṭhanti. Yo tattha gantvā ‘‘yāva sāmikā nāgacchanti, tāvime macche gaṇhissāmī’’ti gaṇhāti, agghavasena kāretabbo. Paṃsukūlasaññāya gaṇhato avahāro natthi, āharāpente pana bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Macchavisaṃ pakkhipitvā gatamanussā bhājanāni āharitvā pūretvā gacchanti, yāva ‘‘punapi āgacchissāmā’’ti sālayā honti, tāva te sassāmikamacchāva. Yadā pana te ‘‘alaṃ amhāka’’nti nirālayā pakkamanti, tato paṭṭhāya theyyacittena gaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Paṃsukūlasaññissa anāpatti. Yathā ca macchakacchapesu, evaṃ sabbāyapi odakajātiyā vinicchayo veditabboti.
99 99. 关于船的部分,先说明船是什么:“所谓船,就是用来渡水的东西。”所以在这里,哪怕只是染布用的槽、竹筏,也应当理解为“船”。不过在结界时,固定的船——不管是凿出来的,还是用木板拼起来的——最低限度必须能载三个人才行。但在这里,即使只能载一个人,也叫作“船”。放在船上的东西,指任何与根相连或不与根相连的物品;它被偷盗的特征,应当按陆地物品中说的方式来了知。至于“我要偷船”等,其中第二次寻找、前往、触摸、摇动,都跟前面说的一样。关于“解开系缚”:如果船在系缚刚解开时不会离开原位,那么在系缚还没解开之前,犯恶作;一旦解开,就犯土喇咤亚甚至波罗夷,后面会说明。其余跟前面说的一样。以上就是对圣典文的解释。巴利
99. Nāvaṭṭhe – paṭhamaṃ tāva nāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nāvā nāma yāya taratī’’ti āha. Tasmā idha antamaso rajanadoṇikāpi veṇukalāpakopi ‘‘nāvā’’tveva veditabbo. Sīmāsammannane pana dhuvanāvā anto khaṇitvā vā phalakehi bandhitvā vā katā sabbantimena paricchedena tiṇṇaṃ vāhanikā eva vaṭṭati. Idha pana ekassapi vāhanikā ‘‘nāvā’’ tveva vuccati. Nāvāya nikkhittanti yaṃkiñci indriyabaddhaṃ vā anindriyabaddhaṃ vā; tassa avahāralakkhaṇaṃ thalaṭṭhe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Nāvaṃ avaharissāmītiādimhi ca dutiyapariyesanagamanaāmasanaphandāpanāni vuttanayāneva. Bandhanaṃ mocetīti ettha pana yā bandhane muttamatte ṭhānā na cavati, tassā bandhanaṃ yāva na muttaṃ hoti, tāva dukkaṭaṃ. Mutte pana thullaccayampi pārājikampi hoti, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ tāva pāḷivaṇṇanā.
那么,这里有一个不属于圣典的判释:对于系在急流中停住的船,只有系缚处这一个位置;一旦从那里解开,就犯波罗夷。这里的道理和前面说的一样。至于漂失的船,它漂到哪里、停在哪片水域,那片水域就是它的位置。因此,如果有人把它向上抬,或向下沉,或向四个方向移动,只要超出所触的范围,就犯波罗夷。在静水中,对于没有系缚、随自己状态停住的船,如果有人向前、向后、向左、向右拖拽,当一端超出先前所触的范围,而另一端仍在水里停住时,只要超出就犯波罗夷。当船从水中被抬起哪怕发尖那么一点,下方船底所触的范围,只要超出船头边缘,就犯波罗夷。对于系在岸边、停在静水中的船,有系缚处和停住处两个位置。如果先解开系缚,犯偷兰遮;之后又以六种方式中的任何一种使它离开位置,就犯波罗夷。如果先使它离开位置,之后再解开系缚,也同样是这个道理。对于拖上岸后翻转朝上放着的船,所触的范围就是它的位置。应当知道,这种船的位置范围有五种判定方式。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha pāḷimuttakavinicchayo – caṇḍasote bandhitvā ṭhapitanāvāya ekaṃ ṭhānaṃ bandhanameva , tasmiṃ muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Tattha yutti pubbe vuttā eva. Vippanaṭṭhā nāvā pana yaṃ yaṃ udakappadesaṃ pharitvā ṭhitā hoti, svāssā ṭhānaṃ. Tasmā taṃ uddhaṃ vā uccārentassa, adho vā opilāpentassa, catūsu vā disāsu phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkāmentassa atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ. Niccale udake abandhanaṃ attano dhammatāya ṭhitanāvaṃ purato vā pacchato vā vāmadakkhiṇapassato vā kaḍḍhantassa ekenantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ aparena udake patiṭṭhitantena atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ. Uddhaṃ kesaggamattaṃ udakato mocite adho nāvātalena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ mukhavaṭṭiṃ atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ. Tīre bandhitvā niccale udake ṭhapitanāvāya bandhanañca ṭhitokāso cāti dve ṭhānāni. Taṃ paṭhamaṃ bandhanā moceti, thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā channaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarena ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvā pacchā bandhanamocanepi eseva nayo. Thale ussādetvā ukkujjitvā ṭhapitanāvāya phuṭṭhokāsova ṭhānaṃ. Tassā pañcahākārehi ṭhānaparicchedo veditabbo.
把船翻过来扣着放的时候,船头边缘所接触到的范围就是它的位置。对这艘船,也要先按五种方式弄清楚位置的范围,然后从任何一处把所触范围向上超出哪怕一根头发尖那么一点点,就应知道犯波罗夷。在陆地上把船拖上去之后,放在两根木垫块上面,这时木垫块所接触的范围就是它的位置。所以在这里,应当依照前面说过的方法,像对待铺开绑在床脚顶端的布、以及插在象牙桩上的矛那样来判定。巴利
Nikkujjitvā ṭhapitanāvāya pana mukhavaṭṭiyā phuṭṭhokāsova ṭhānaṃ, tassāpi pañcahākārehi ṭhānaparicchedaṃ ñatvā yato kutoci phuṭṭhokāsaṃ uddhañca kesaggamattaṃ atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Thale pana ussādetvā dvinnaṃ dārughaṭikānaṃ upari ṭhapitanāvāya dārughaṭikānaṃ phuṭṭhokāsoyeva ṭhānaṃ, tasmā tattha mañcapādamatthakesuyeva patthaṭabaddhasāṭake nāgadantesu ṭhapitabhindivāle ca vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo.
如果是用绳索拴住的船,不先解开那根六十或七十寻长的绳子就直接拖拽,巴利
Yottabaddhāya pana nāvāya saṭṭhisattatibyāmappamāṇaṃ yottaṃ amocetvāva ākaḍḍhitvā
把船拖上陆地,和绳索一起放在地上时,并不是只有船身碰到的那一点地方才算“处所”。应当这样理解:从绳索末端开始,一直到船在陆地上停稳处的最后边缘,这是纵向的长度;横向则是以船和绳索在陆地上停稳处的边界为准,这个范围就是“处所”。如果人把船纵向或横向拖拽,当一端已经离开了原来接触的地方,另一端也离开了在陆地上停稳的位置,哪怕只是把船和绳索一起向上提离地面一根头发丝那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果有人登上停在渡口的船,以盗心用桨或篙把船撑走,犯波罗夷。但如果他撑开伞,或者用脚踩、用手提起衣袍,像张帆一样兜风,而强风吹来把船带走了,船是被风带走的,这个人就没有偷盗的行为。他有动作,但这个动作不是让船离开原处的动作。不过,如果船正这样行进时,他打断船原本的自然行程,把船带到别的方向去,那就犯波罗夷。如果船自己到了某个村落渡口,他并没有让船离开原处,就把它卖掉然后离开,那也没有偷盗,但应当赔偿所取之物的价值。巴利
Pathavilaggaṃ katvā saha yottena thale ṭhapitāya nāvāya na phuṭṭhokāsamattameva ṭhānaṃ. Atha kho yottakoṭito paṭṭhāya yāva nāvāya pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsassa pacchimanto tāva dīghato, tiriyaṃ pana nāvāya ca yottassa ca pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitapariyantappamāṇaṃ ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ dīghato vā tiriyato vā kaḍḍhantassa ekenantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ aparena pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitantena atikkantamatte, uddhaṃ kesaggamattaṃ saha yottena pathavito mocite pārājikaṃ. Yo pana titthe ṭhitanāvaṃ āruhitvā theyyacitto arittena vā phiyena vā pājeti, pārājikaṃ. Sace pana chattaṃ vā paṇāmetvā cīvaraṃ vā pādehi akkamitvā hatthehi ukkhipitvā laṅkārasadisaṃ katvā vātaṃ gaṇhāpeti, balavā ca vāto āgamma nāvaṃ harati, vāteneva sā haṭā hoti; puggalassa natthi avahāro. Payogo atthi, so pana ṭhānā cāvanapayogo na hoti. Yadi pana taṃ nāvaṃ evaṃ gacchantiṃ pakatigamanaṃ upacchinditvā aññaṃ disābhāgaṃ neti, pārājikaṃ. Sayameva yaṃkiñci gāmatitthaṃ sampattaṃ ṭhānā acāventova vikkiṇitvā gacchati, neva atthi avahāro. Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti.
100 在“车乘”这一项里,先说明什么是车乘,所以说了“所谓车乘,就是轿子”等话。其中,上面有像亭子一样的木板顶盖、或者用布幔整个盖住做成的,就是轿子。两边装上金、银等做的椽子,做成像金翅鸟翅膀那样形状的,是敞篷车。战车和货车则不用多说,大家都清楚。在这些车乘当中,不管放在哪里,不管是有生命的还是无生命的东西,只要是以堆叠等方式放着的货物,如果有人起了盗心,把它从原处挪走,就应该知道,跟前面讲船和陆地时所说的一样,犯波罗夷。巴利
100. Yānaṭṭhe – yānaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘yānaṃ nāma vayha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ sabbapaliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā kataṃ vayhaṃ. Ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇarajatādimayā gopānasiyo datvā garuḷapakkhakanayena katā sandamānikā. Ratho ca sakaṭañca pākaṭameva. Tesu yattha katthaci saviññāṇakaṃ vā aviññāṇakaṃ vā rāsiādivasena ṭhapitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacittena ṭhānā cāventassa nāvaṭṭhe ca thalaṭṭhe ca vuttanayeneva pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ.
不过这里有个差别:如果车上的米等货物是用箱子装着的,偷的人即使没有把箱子提起来,只要把箱子弄开、破坏了米等货物原本连成一体的状态,就犯波罗夷。在陆地等其他情形中,这个道理也同样适用。至于“我要偷车”等情形,第二次寻找等步骤,和前面所说的一样。关于“使其离开原处”,这里说:双牛拉的车,两头牛共八只脚,加上两个车轮,一共是十个位置。如果以偷盗的心坐在车辕上赶牛,牛抬起脚的时候,犯偷兰遮;而当车轮从着地处移开哪怕一根头发尖那么一点点,就犯波罗夷。如果牛知道“这个人不是我们的主人”,于是甩掉车轭,或者站着不动,或者挣扎着不肯走,那么车暂时还受到保护。如果再把牛调正,套上车轭,牢牢系好,用刺棒打牛驱赶,那么和前面说的一样:牛抬脚时犯偷兰遮,车轮移开时犯波罗夷。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – yānaṭṭhaṃ taṇḍulādibhaṇḍaṃ piṭakena gaṇhato piṭake anukkhittepi piṭakaṃ apaharitvā taṇḍulādīnaṃ ekābaddhabhāve vikopite pārājikaṃ. Thalaṭṭhādīsupi ayaṃ nayo labbhati. Yānaṃ avaharissāmītiādimhi dutiyapariyesanādīni vuttanayāneva. Ṭhānā cāvetīti ettha pana dukayuttassa yānassa dvinnaṃ goṇānaṃ aṭṭha pādā, dve ca cakkānīti dasa ṭhānāni. Taṃ theyyacittassa dhure nisīditvā pājayato goṇānaṃ pāduddhāre thullaccayaṃ. Cakkānaṃ pana pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitappadesato kesaggamatte atikkante pārājikaṃ. Sace pana goṇā ‘‘nāyaṃ amhākaṃ sāmiko’’ti ñatvā dhuraṃ chaḍḍetvā ākaḍḍhantā tiṭṭhanti vā phandanti vā, rakkhati tāva. Goṇe puna ujukaṃ paṭipādetvā dhuraṃ āropetvā daḷhaṃ yojetvā pācanena vijjhitvā pājentassa vuttanayeneva tesaṃ pāduddhāre thullaccayaṃ. Cakkātikkame pārājikaṃ.
即使是在泥泞的路上,一个车轮陷在泥里,另一个车轮被牛拉着转动前进,因为一个车轮还停着,这时还不算偷盗。但如果把牛重新调正后驱赶,当停住的车轮超出所触之处哪怕一个发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。四牛所驾的车有十八个位置,八牛所驾的车有三十四个位置——应当用这个方法来了知各种驾车的不同位置。巴利
Sacepi sakaddame magge ekaṃ cakkaṃ kaddame laggaṃ hoti, dutiyaṃ cakkaṃ goṇā parivattentā pavattenti, ekassa ṭhitattā na tāva avahāro hoti . Goṇe pana puna ujukaṃ paṭipādetvā pājentassa ṭhitacakke kesaggamattaṃ phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkante pārājikaṃ. Catuyuttakassa pana aṭṭhārasa ṭhānāni, aṭṭhayuttakassa catuttiṃsāti – etenupāyena yuttayānassa ṭhānabhedo veditabbo.
如果是未套牛的车,在车辕处以一根支撑木、后方以两根辅助支撑木撑住而放着,那么按三根支撑木和轮子来算,有五个支点。如果车辕处的支撑木在下方已经加工妥当,就有六个支点。如果后面没有支撑,只靠车辕处的支撑木撑着,那么按支撑木来算,有三个或四个支点。靠车辕放在木板或木头上面的,有三个支点。放在地面上也是这样。把那个车辕拖走或抬起来,使它前后支点移动的,犯偷兰遮。轮子所立之处只要移动超过一根发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。把轮子卸下来,用两个轴端架在木头上,有两个支点。拖它或抬它时,如果越过了所接触的位置,就犯波罗夷。放在地面上时,靠车辕和四根轴柱立住,有五个支点。抓住车辕拖的时候,如果轴柱的后端越过了前端,就犯波罗夷。抓住轴柱拖的时候,如果轴柱的前端越过了后端,就犯波罗夷。抓住侧面拖的时候,只要轴柱横向越过了所立之处,就犯波罗夷。抓住中间抬起来的时候,只要离开地面一根发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果没有轴柱桩,而是把臂做成平的,在中间穿孔,把轴端插进去,那么它下面整个面都接触地面而停住。在这里,应当知道,按四方和上方越过所触位置来算,都犯波罗夷。轮子以轮毂放在地面上,只有一个支点,它的界限有五种情况。以轮辋侧面和轮毂同时触地而停住的,有两个支点。把轮辋翘起的部分用脚踩下去,使它接触地面,然后抓住辐条或轮辋抬起来,这时对自己来说原来的位置就不算位置了,所以即使它还停在那里,只要其余位置移动了哪怕一点点,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Yaṃ pana ayuttakaṃ dhure ekāya pacchato ca dvīhi upatthambhinīhi upatthambhetvā ṭhapitaṃ, tassa tiṇṇaṃ upatthambhinīnaṃ cakkānañca vasena pañca ṭhānāni. Sace dhure upatthambhinī heṭṭhābhāge kappakatā hoti, cha ṭhānāni. Pacchato pana anupatthambhetvā dhure upatthambhitasseva upatthambhinīvasena tīṇi vā cattāri vā ṭhānāni. Dhurena phalakassa vā dārukassa vā upari ṭhapitassa tīṇi ṭhānāni. Tathā pathaviyaṃ ṭhapitassa. Taṃ dhuraṃkaḍḍhitvā vā ukkhipitvā vā purato ca pacchato ca ṭhānā cāventassa thullaccayaṃ. Cakkānaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne kesaggamattaṃ atikkante pārājikaṃ. Cakkāni apanetvā dvīhi akkhasīsehi dārūnaṃ upari ṭhapitassa dve ṭhānāni. Taṃ kaḍḍhanto vā ukkhipanto vā phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitassa dhurena ca catūhi ca akkhuddhīhi patiṭṭhitavasena pañca ṭhānāni. Taṃ dhure gahetvā kaḍḍhato uddhīnaṃ pacchimantehi purimante atikkante pārājikaṃ. Uddhīsu gahetvā kaḍḍhato uddhīnaṃ purimantehi pacchimante atikkante pārājikaṃ. Passe gahetvā kaḍḍhato uddhīnaṃyeva tiriyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānassa atikkamena pārājikaṃ. Majjhe gahetvā ukkhipato kesaggamattaṃ pathavito mutte pārājikaṃ. Atha uddhikhāṇukā na honti, samameva bāhaṃ katvā majjhe vijjhitvā akkhasīsāni pavesitāni honti, taṃ heṭṭhimatalassa samantā sabbaṃ pathaviṃ phusitvā tiṭṭhati. Tattha catūsu disāsu uddhañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhānātikkamavasena pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ nābhiyā ṭhapitacakkassa ekameva ṭhānaṃ, tassa pañcahākārehi paricchedo. Nemipassena ca nābhiyā ca phusitvā ṭhitassa dve ṭhānāni. Nemiyā uṭṭhitabhāgaṃ pādena akkamitvā bhūmiyaṃ phusāpetvā aresu vā nemiyā vā gahetvā ukkhipantassa attanā kataṭṭhānaṃ ṭhānaṃ na hoti, tasmā tasmiṃ ṭhitepi avasesaṭṭhāne atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ.
依靠墙壁放置的轮子也有两个支点。其中,先让轮子离开墙壁的,犯土喇咤亚;之后哪怕只离开地面一发尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果先让轮子离开地面,而靠墙的支点没有动摇,也是同样的判定。如果抓住辐条往下拖,使触墙而住的位置上缘越过下缘,就犯波罗夷。在道路上行驶的车,车主因为某件事下车离开了道路,这时另一个比丘迎面走来,看见无人看护,心想“我要偷这辆车”就上了车,在他还没动手之前,牛自己拉着车走了,这不算偷盗。其余情况和船的那段说法相似。巴利
Bhittiṃ nissāya ṭhapitacakkassāpi dve ṭhānāni. Tattha paṭhamaṃ bhittito mocentassa thullaccayaṃ. Pacchā pathavito kesaggamattuddhāre pārājikaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ bhūmito mocentassa pana sace bhittiyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ na kuppati, eseva nayo. Atha aresu gahetvā heṭṭhā kaḍḍhantassa bhittiṃ phusitvā ṭhitokāsassa uparimo anto heṭṭhimaṃ atikkamati, pārājikaṃ. Maggappaṭipanne yāne yānasāmiko kenacideva karaṇīyena orohitvā maggā okkanto hoti, athañño bhikkhu paṭipathaṃ āgacchanto ārakkhasuññaṃ passitvā, ‘‘yānaṃ avaharissāmī’’ti ārohati, tassa payogaṃ vināyeva goṇā gahetvā pakkantā, avahāro natthi. Sesaṃ nāvāyaṃ vuttasadisanti.
101 从这以后,就是“负担”本身了。它按头负担等分成四种来说明。其中,为了不把头负担等搞混,应当了解头和身体其他部位的界限。先说头的下界:前喉处是喉窝,后颈处有些人有发旋,有些人头发向后颈两侧往下长,这叫耳鬓。耳鬓以下就是下界,以上是头。在这个范围里的负担,就叫头负担。巴利
101. Ito paraṃ bhāroyeva bhāraṭṭhaṃ. So sīsabhārādivasena catudhā dassito. Tattha sīsabhārādīsu asammohatthaṃ sīsādīnaṃ paricchedo veditabbo. Tattha sīsassa tāva purimagale galavāṭako, piṭṭhigale kesañci kesante āvaṭṭo hoti, galasseva ubhosu passesu kesañci kesā oruyha jāyanti, ye kaṇṇacūḷikāti vuccanti, tesaṃ adhobhāgo cāti ayaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedo, tato upari sīsaṃ. Etthantare ṭhitabhāro sīsabhāro nāma.
从两侧耳尖以下、从肘部以上,从后颈发旋和喉窝以下,从后背中脊和胸口心窝以上,这个范围就是肩。处在这个范围内的负担,就叫肩负担。巴利
Ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, kapparehi paṭṭhāya upari, piṭṭhigalāvattato ca galavāṭakato ca paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, piṭṭhivemajjhāvattato ca uraparicchedamajjhe hadayaāvāṭato ca paṭṭhāya upari khandho. Etthantare ṭhitabhāro khandhabhāro nāma.
从后背中脊和心窝以下,一直到脚趾尖,这是腰的范围。在这个范围内遍及全身而存在的负担,就叫腰负担。巴利
Piṭṭhivemajjhāvattato pana hadayaāvāṭato ca paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā yāva pādanakhasikhā, ayaṃ kaṭiparicchedo. Etthantare samantato sarīre ṭhitabhāro kaṭibhāro nāma.
从肘部开始,一直往下到手指甲尖,这一段是悬挂物的范围。在这个范围内所承担的重量,就叫作悬挂负担。巴利
Kapparato paṭṭhāya pana heṭṭhā yāva hatthanakhasikhā, ayaṃ olambakaparicchedo. Etthantare ṭhitabhāro olambako nāma.
现在讲“头戴货物”等情形,这里有一个之前没讲过的判定标准:如果比丘没有受物主吩咐“拿上这个,送到那里去”,而是自己主动说“把这个给我吧,我帮你们搬东西”,然后用头顶着他们的货物走,一旦以偷盗的心去碰那件货物,就犯恶作。如果始终没有超出前面所说的头部界限,只是在原地来回挪动或前后推拉,就犯偷兰遮。一旦把货物从头顶移到肩上,即使物主心里想“让他搬吧”,但因为并没有得到他们的吩咐,所以犯波罗夷。即使没有移放到肩上,只要让货物离开头顶哪怕一根头发尖那么一点距离,也是波罗夷。至于双担——一个担子在头上、一个在背上,那就根据两个位置分别来判定。不过,这里这段开示只是针对纯粹头戴货物等情况来说的。凡是头戴货物中所说的判定,在肩扛货物等情形中也同样适用。巴利
Idāni sīse bhārantiādīsu ayaṃ apubbavinicchayo – yo bhikkhu ‘‘idaṃ gahetvā ettha yāhī’’ti sāmikehi anāṇatto sayameva ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ nāma detha, ahaṃ vo bhaṇḍaṃ vahāmī’’ti tesaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sīsena ādāya gacchanto theyyacittena taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Yathāvuttasīsaparicchedaṃ anatikkāmentova ito cito ca ghaṃsanto sāretipi paccāsāretipi, thullaccayaṃ. Khandhaṃ oropitamatte kiñcāpi sāmikānaṃ ‘‘vahatū’’ti cittaṃ atthi, tehi pana anāṇattattā pārājikaṃ. Khandhaṃ pana anoropetvāpi sīsato kesaggamattaṃ mocentassa pārājikaṃ. Yamakabhārassa pana eko bhāro sīse patiṭṭhāti, eko piṭṭhiyaṃ, tattha dvinnaṃ ṭhānānaṃ vasena vinicchayo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana suddhasīsabhārādīnaṃyeva vasena desanā āraddhā. Yo cāyaṃ sīsabhāre vutto, khandhabhārādīsupi ayameva vinicchayo.
这里说“手中负担”:因为是用手拿着的,所以悬挂着的东西就被称为“手中负担”。巴利
Hatthebhāranti ettha pana hatthena gahitattā olambako ‘‘hatthe bhāro’’ti vutto.
这个人最初即使是从地上拿起来,或者以清净心用头顶等方式搬运,也只算作“手上的负担”。如果以盗心看到像那样的放置处,然后在把它放到地上或灌木丛等处时,只要它从手中脱离,就犯波罗夷。关于“从地上拿取”:这里说的是,那些货物中不管哪一种,如果先前以清净心为了吃早饭等原因把它放在地上,后来又生起盗心,把它抬起来哪怕只有一根头发尖那么高,也犯波罗夷。巴利
So paṭhamaṃyeva bhūmito vā gahito hotu, suddhacittena sīsādīhi vā, ‘‘hatthe bhāro’’ tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati . Taṃ theyyacittena tādisaṃ gahanaṭṭhānaṃ disvā bhūmiyaṃ vā gacchādīsu vā nikkhipantassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Bhūmito gaṇhātīti ettha pana tesaṃ bhārānaṃ yaṃkiñci pātarāsādikāraṇā suddhacittena bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipitvā puna theyyacittena kesaggamattaṃ uddharantassa pārājikanti.
102 102. 关于园地,先说明园地:“所谓园地,就是花圃、果园。”其中,种雨季花等的叫花圃,种芒果等果实的叫果园。对放在园地里的东西,用四种方式判定,和在地面等处所说的方法一样。巴利
102. Ārāmaṭṭhepi – ārāmaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘ārāmo nāma pupphārāmo phalārāmo’’ti āha. Tesu vassikādīnaṃ pupphanako pupphārāmo. Ambaphalādīnaṃ phalanako phalārāmo. Ārāme catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittassa vinicchayo bhūmaṭṭhādīsu vuttanayo eva.
在这类生长的产物中,所谓“根”,就是香根草、岩兰草等任何根。如果拔取,或者拿取已经拔起的根,只要用这根让物品达到犯戒的程度,拿了就犯波罗夷。块茎也算在根里面。在这里,拔取的时候哪怕只差一点点没拔断,也只是偷兰遮。这方面的判定,应当依照莲藕那段所说的方法来理解。所谓“皮”,就是任何可以用来做药或者做染料的树皮。如果剥取,或者拿取已经剥下的皮,按照根那段所说的方法,犯波罗夷。所谓“花”,就是雨季花、茉莉花等任何花。如果摘取,或者拿取已经摘下的花,按照青莲花、红莲花那段所说的方法,犯波罗夷。因为花也靠没有断的花梗或者绑扎来守护。不过有些花梗里面有针状的东西,那就不算守护。所谓“果”,就是芒果、棕榈果等任何果实。如果从树上拿,判定已经在讲“附着在树上”的那段里说过了。如果先摘下来放好,那就归入地面等处这一类来处理。巴利
Tatthajātake pana mūlanti usīrahiriverādikaṃ yaṃkiñci mūlaṃ, taṃ uppāṭetvā vā uppāṭitaṃ vā gaṇhantassa yena mūlena vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ gahite pārājikaṃ. Kandopi mūleneva saṅgahito. Uppāṭentassa cettha appamattakepi acchinne thullaccayameva. Tattha vinicchayo bhise vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tacanti bhesajjatthāya vā rajanatthāya vā upayogagamanūpagaṃ yaṃkiñci rukkhattacaṃ; taṃ uppāṭetvā vā uppāṭitaṃ vā gaṇhantassa mūle vuttanayena pārājikaṃ. Pupphanti vassikamallikādikaṃ yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ, taṃ ocinitvā vā ocinitaṃ vā gaṇhantassa uppalapadumesu vuttanayena pārājikaṃ. Pupphānampi hi vaṇṭaṃ vā bandhanaṃ vā acchinnaṃ rakkhati. Vaṇṭabbhantare pana kesañci sūcikā hoti, sā na rakkhati. Phalanti ambaphalatālaphalādikaṃ yaṃkiñci, taṃ rukkhato gaṇhantassa vinicchayo rukkhe laggitakathāyaṃ vutto. Apanetvā ṭhapitaṃ bhūmaṭṭhādisaṅgahitameva.
“侵占园地”:如果谎称“这是我的”而去侵占别人的东西,因为这是不与取的加行,所以犯恶作。“令所有者生疑”:由于精通裁决,或者因为依仗强者、有靠山等,而让园主产生疑惑。怎么产生呢?园主看到那人这样热衷于裁决,就心想:“我能不能把这个园地弄回自己手里?还是不能?”他这样生起的疑惑,就是由那人引起的,因此犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Ārāmaṃ abhiyuñjatīti parasantakaṃ ‘‘mama santako aya’’nti musā bhaṇitvā abhiyuñjati, adinnādānassa payogattā dukkaṭaṃ. Sāmikassa vimatiṃuppādetīti vinicchayakusalatāya balavanissitādibhāvena vā ārāmasāmikassa saṃsayaṃ janeti. Kathaṃ? Tañhi tathā vinicchayappasutaṃ disvā sāmiko cinteti – ‘‘sakkhissāmi nu kho ahaṃ imaṃ ārāmaṃ attano kātuṃ, na sakkhissāmi nu kho’’ti. Evaṃ tassa vimati uppajjamānā tena uppāditā hoti, tasmā thullaccayaṃ āpajjati.
“放弃所有权”:如果物主心想“这个人顽固粗暴,说不定连我的性命和梵行都会被他妨碍,我现在已经不需要这座园子了”,于是放弃所有权,这时侵占者就犯波罗夷。如果侵占者自己也已经放弃了所有权,但即使物主已经放弃所有权,侵占者仍然没有放弃,心里想“我要好好压制他,让他见识我的权威,等他顺从之后再还给他”,对应该归还这件事仍然很有干劲,那么暂时还算安全。如果侵占者心想“我已经抢过来了,现在绝不还给他”而放弃所有权,但物主还没有放弃所有权,还在寻找帮手、等待时机,心想“我先找到有羞耻心的僧众,之后再作打算”,对重新拿回来仍然很有干劲,那也暂时还算安全。当侵占者心想“我不给”,物主也想“我拿不回来了”——双方都放弃所有权时,侵占者就犯波罗夷。如果侵占之后正在裁决,裁决还没定下来,物主也还没放弃所有权,而侵占者明知自己不是物主,却从那园子里摘取任何花或果,就按所拿物品的价值来处罚。巴利
Dhuraṃnikkhipatīti yadā pana sāmiko ‘‘ayaṃ thaddho kakkhaḷo jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyampi me kareyya, alaṃ dāni mayhaṃ iminā ārāmenā’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, abhiyuñjako pārājikaṃ āpajjati. Sace sayampi katadhuranikkhepo hoti, atha ca pana sāmikena dhure nikkhittepi abhiyuñjako dhuraṃ anikkhipitvāva ‘‘imaṃ suṭṭhu pīḷetvā mama āṇāpavattiṃ dassetvā kiṅkārappaṭissāvibhāve naṃ ṭhapetvā dassāmī’’ti dātabbabhāve saussāho hoti, rakkhati tāva. Athāpi abhiyuñjako ‘‘acchinditvā na dāni naṃ imassa dassāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, sāmiko pana na dhuraṃ nikkhipati, pakkhaṃ pariyesati, kālaṃ āgameti, ‘‘lajjiparisaṃ tāva labhāmi, pacchā jānissāmī’’ti puna gahaṇeyeva saussāho hoti, rakkhatiyeva. Yadā pana sopi ‘‘na dassāmī’’ti, sāmikopi ‘‘na lacchāmī’’ti – evaṃ ubhopi dhuraṃ nikkhipanti, tadā abhiyuñjakassa pārājikaṃ. Atha pana abhiyuñjitvā vinicchayaṃ kurumāno aniṭṭhite vinicchaye sāmikenapi dhuranikkhepe akate attano assāmikabhāvaṃ jānantoyeva tato kiñci pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā gaṇhāti, bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo.
“行法者”:就是在比丘僧团里或王室中主持裁决的人。“令物主败诉”:意思是向裁决者行贿、引入伪证,使园主败诉。“犯波罗夷”:不只是他本人,凡是为了帮他达成目的而故意去做的伪裁决者、伪证人,这一切人都犯波罗夷。在这里要知道,物主只要放下负担,就算败诉;没有放下负担,就还没有败诉。“行法者败诉”:即使他是依照法、律、师的教导来进行裁决,如果自己导致败诉,他也因为用妄语加害物主这一因缘而犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Dhammaṃ carantoti bhikkhusaṅghe vā rājakule vā vinicchayaṃ karonto. Sāmikaṃ parājetīti vinicchayikānaṃ ukkocaṃ datvā kūṭasakkhiṃ otāretvā ārāmasāmikaṃ jinātīti attho. Āpatti pārājikassāti na kevalaṃ tasseva, sañcicca tassa atthasādhane pavattānaṃ kūṭavinicchayikānampi kūṭasakkhīnampi sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Ettha ca sāmikassa dhuranikkhepavaseneva parājayo veditabbo. Anikkhittadhuro hi aparājitova hoti. Dhammaṃ caranto parajjatīti sacepi dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena vinicchayassa pavattattā sayaṃ parājayaṃ pāpuṇāti; evampi musāvādena sāmikānaṃ pīḷākaraṇapaccayā thullaccayaṃ āpajjatīti.
103 103. 关于“住处”这一义项,也是用四种方式安立,方法同前所说。在这里,关于“侵占”:如果是为了四方僧团而布施给比丘们的精舍、别院或僧园,无论大小,有人去侵占它,侵占不成立,也不能强行夺取。为什么?因为所有人都没有放弃责任。这里并不是所有四方比丘都放弃了责任。但是,如果侵占的是属于某类诵长部者等的团体或某个人的所有物,然后夺取,那就能让他们放弃责任。因此,在那里应按照园地部分所说的方法来了知判定。巴利
103. Vihāraṭṭhepi – catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ vuttanayameva. Abhiyogepi cettha cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa bhikkhūnaṃ dinnaṃ vihāraṃ vā pariveṇaṃ vā āvāsaṃ vā mahantampi khuddakampi abhiyuñjato abhiyogo na ruhati. Acchinditvā gaṇhitumpi na sakkoti. Kasmā? Sabbesaṃ dhuranikkhepābhāvato. Na hettha sabbe cātuddisā bhikkhū dhuranikkhepaṃ karontīti . Dīghabhāṇakādibhedassa pana gaṇassa ekapuggalassa vā santakaṃ abhiyuñjitvā gaṇhanto sakkoti te dhuraṃ nikkhipāpetuṃ. Tasmā tattha ārāme vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabboti.
104 104. 关于田地,先说明什么是田地:“所谓田地,就是生长早熟谷物或晚熟谷物的地方。”其中,早熟谷物指稻等七种谷物;晚熟谷物指绿豆、黑豆等;甘蔗田等也包括在这里。这里同样以四种情况来判定,方法如前所说。但在田间,如果压折稻穗等,或用手一根一根折断,或用镰刀割取,或把许多株连根拔起而拿取,当以种子、穗、一把或绿豆、黑豆等果实使物品价值满足时,在结缚解开的那一刻,就犯波罗夷。不过,未被折断的茎、纤维或皮壳,即使是少许,也仍然受到保护。巴利
104. Khettaṭṭhepi – khettaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘khettaṃ nāma yattha pubbaṇṇaṃ vā aparaṇṇaṃ vā jāyatī’’ti āha. Tattha pubbaṇṇanti sāliādīni satta dhaññāni; aparaṇṇanti muggamāsādīni; ucchukhettādikampi ettheva saṅgahitaṃ. Idhāpi catūhi ṭhānehi nikkhittaṃ vuttanayameva. Tatthajātake pana sālisīsādīni nirumbhitvā vā ekamekaṃ hattheneva chinditvā vā asitena lāyitvā vā bahūni ekato uppāṭetvā vā gaṇhantassa yasmiṃ bīje vā sīse vā muṭṭhiyaṃ vā muggamāsādiphale vā vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ bandhanā mocitamatte pārājikaṃ. Acchijjamāno pana daṇḍako vā vāko vā taco vā appamattakopi rakkhati.
稻秆虽然长,只要谷穗的茎秆还没有从稻管里露出来,就仍然算在守护范围内。如果茎秆从稻管底部露出哪怕发尖那么一点点,就要按物品价值来判罚。不过,如果是用镰刀割下来拿在手里,即使下方已经割断,只要穗头还缠在一起,就仍然算在守护范围内。可是,一旦解开缠结,拿起来哪怕发尖那么一点点,如果物品价值够得上,就犯波罗夷。如果主人割下来放好之后,不管带不带糠壳,只要拿起来,当所拿的东西价值够得上时,就犯波罗夷。如果他心里盘算:“我要把它碾一碾、扬一扬,只取里面的精实”,这时候仍然算在守护范围内。在碾磨、扬簸的过程中,即使把它从原来的位置挪开,也不犯波罗夷;直到后来把谷物装进容器时,才犯波罗夷。这里的追诉方式,和前面所说的一样。巴利
Vīhināḷaṃ dīghampi hoti, yāva antonāḷato vīhisīsadaṇḍako na nikkhamati, tāva rakkhati. Kesaggamattampi nāḷato daṇḍakassa heṭṭhimatale nikkhante bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Asitena lāyitvā gaṇhato pana muṭṭhigatesu heṭṭhā chinnesupi sace sīsāni jaṭitāni, rakkhanti tāva. Vijaṭetvā pana kesaggamattampi ukkhipato sace vatthu pūrati, pārājikaṃ. Sāmikehi pana lāyitvā ṭhapitaṃ sabhusaṃ vā abhusaṃ vā katvā gaṇhato yena vatthu pūrati, tasmiṃ gahite pārājikaṃ. Sace parikappeti ‘‘idaṃ madditvā papphoṭetvā sārameva gaṇhissāmī’’ti rakkhati tāva. Maddanapapphoṭanesu ṭhānā cāventassāpi pārājikaṃ natthi, pacchā bhājanagate katamatte pārājikaṃ. Abhiyogo panettha vuttanayo eva.
在木桩、移界等事情上,所谓土地是无价的。所以,如果只用一根木桩,就把哪怕只有发尖那么一点大的土地——不管主人看见还是没看见——变成自己的,那么当那根木桩被移动、不管有没有刻名去掉,只要一移过去,他就犯波罗夷,和他同一心意的人也都犯波罗夷。如果要用两根木桩才能取得,第一根木桩犯偷兰遮,第二根犯波罗夷。如果要用三根才能取得,第一根犯突吉罗,第二根犯偷兰遮,第三根犯波罗夷。用很多根时也一样,最后两根除外,前面那些都犯突吉罗;最后两根中,一根犯偷兰遮,另一根犯波罗夷。而且这一切都要以主人放弃所有权为前提。所有情形都是这样。巴利
Khīlasaṅkamanādīsu pathavī nāma anagghā. Tasmā sace ekeneva khīlena ito kesaggamattampi pathavippadesaṃ sāmikānaṃ passantānaṃ vā apassantānaṃ vā attano santakaṃ karoti, tasmiṃ khīle nāmaṃ chinditvā vā acchinditvā vā saṅkāmitamatte tassa ca, ye cassa ekacchandā, sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Sace pana dvīhi khīlehi gahetabbaṃ hoti, paṭhame khīle thullaccayaṃ; dutiye pārājikaṃ. Sace tīhi gahetabbaṃ hoti, paṭhame dukkaṭaṃ, dutiye thullaccayaṃ, tatiye pārājikaṃ. Evaṃ bahukesupi avasāne dve ṭhapetvā purimehi dukkaṭaṃ, avasāne dvinnaṃ ekena thullaccayaṃ, itarena pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tañca kho sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepena. Evaṃ sabbattha.
有人想把绳子说成“这是我的”,就拉绳子或者扔棍子,犯恶作。如果他想“我现在要用两次动作把它变成我自己的”,那么这两次动作里,第一次犯土喇咤亚,第二次犯波罗夷。巴利
Rajjuṃ vāti ‘‘mama santakaṃ ida’’nti ñāpetukāmo rajjuṃ vā pasāreti, yaṭṭhiṃ vā pāteti, dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Idāni dvīhi payogehi attano santakaṃ karissāmī’’ti tesaṃ paṭhame thullaccayaṃ, dutiye pārājikaṃ.
想用篱笆把别人的田地圈起来占为己有而埋木桩,每做一个动作就犯一次恶作。最后一根桩还没埋下时犯土喇咤亚,那根桩埋下时就犯波罗夷。如果光靠木桩还做不到,要借助枝条围起来才能占为己有,那么砍下枝条时也是同样的道理。像这样,无论用什么方式围起来能占为己有,在每一个地方的最初动作都犯恶作。到最后两个动作时,应知前一个犯土喇咤亚,后一个犯波罗夷。巴利
Vatiṃ vāti parassa khettaṃ parikkhepavasena attano kātukāmo dārūni nikhaṇati, payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Ekasmiṃ anāgate thullaccayaṃ, tasmiṃ āgate pārājikaṃ. Sace tattakena asakkonto sākhāparivāreneva attano kātuṃ sakkoti, sākhāpātanepi eseva nayo. Evaṃ yena yena parikkhipitvā attano kātuṃ sakkoti, tattha tattha paṭhamapayogehi dukkaṭaṃ. Avasāne dvinnaṃ ekena thullaccayaṃ, itarena pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ.
或者田界:想要让别人知道“这是我的田地”,而把自己的田地边界……巴利
Mariyādaṃ vāti parassa khettaṃ ‘‘mama ida’’nti ñāpetukāmo attano khettamariyādaṃ
就像田埂越过别人的田地那样,他把它移过去;或者用泥土等把它加宽扩大;或者把原本没有的田埂设立起来——前面的这些做法犯恶作。最后两种做法中,一种犯偷兰遮,另一种犯波罗夷。巴利
Kedārapāḷiṃ yathā parassa khettaṃ atikkamati, evaṃ saṅkāmeti, paṃsumattikādīhi vā vaḍḍhetvā vitthataṃ karoti, akataṃ vā pana patiṭṭhāpeti, purimapayogehi dukkaṭaṃ. Dvinnaṃ pacchimānaṃ ekena thullaccayaṃ, itarena pārājikanti.
105 105. 关于地基,先说明地基是什么:所谓地基,就是“园林地基、精舍地基”。其中,不播种子,也不种树苗,只是把土地平整好,不管有没有用三种围墙中的某一种围起来,只要是为了花园等用途而留出的地块,就叫园林地基。同样道理,为了某一座精舍、经行处、住所等用途而留出的地块,就叫精舍地基。即使某个地方以前是园林或精舍,后来毁坏了,只剩下土地,不再发挥园林或精舍的作用,它也仍然归入园林地基或精舍地基的范围内。这里的判定标准,和田地基那里所说的一样。巴利
105. Vatthuṭṭhepi – vatthuṃ tāva dassento vatthu nāma ‘‘ārāmavatthu vihāravatthū’’ti āha. Tattha bījaṃ vā uparopake vā aropetvāva kevalaṃ bhūmiṃ sodhetvā tiṇṇaṃ pākārānaṃ yena kenaci parikkhipitvā vā aparikkhipitvā vā pupphārāmādīnaṃ atthāya ṭhapito bhūmibhāgo ārāmavatthu nāma. Eteneva nayena ekavihārapariveṇaāvāsānaṃ atthāya ṭhapito bhūmibhāgo vihāravatthu nāma. Yopi pubbe ārāmo ca vihāro ca hutvā pacchā vinassitvā bhūmimatto ṭhito, ārāmavihārakiccaṃ na karoti, sopi ārāmavihāravatthusaṅgaheneva saṅgahito. Vinicchayo panettha khettaṭṭhe vuttasadisoyevāti.
106 关于村落的部分,该说的已经说过了。巴利
106. Gāmaṭṭhe yaṃ vattabbaṃ taṃ vuttameva.
107 107. 关于林野:先说明林野,说道:“所谓林野,就是人们所占有、执持的地方,那就是林野。”在这里,林野有被人们占有的,也有没被占有的;但这里指的是那种被占有、有守护,不付钱就不能拿取柴木、藤蔓等物的林野。所以先说了“人们所占有、执持的地方”,然后又说“林野”。这样表达的意思是:“被占有”并不是林野的特征。而是以林野本身的特征成为林野,并且被人们所占有,在这个意义上就是林野。这里的判定和关于园地等的说明是一样的。巴利
107. Araññaṭṭhe – araññaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘araññaṃ nāma yaṃ manussānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hoti, taṃ arañña’’nti āha. Tattha yasmā araññaṃ nāma manussānaṃ pariggahitampi atthi, apariggahitampi; idha pana yaṃ pariggahitaṃ sārakkhaṃ, yato na vinā mūlena kaṭṭhalatādīni gahetuṃ labbhanti, taṃ adhippetaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yaṃ manussānaṃ pariggahitaṃ hotī’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘arañña’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena imamatthaṃ dasseti – ‘‘na pariggahitabhāvo araññassa lakkhaṇaṃ. Yaṃ pana attano araññalakkhaṇena araññaṃ manussānañca pariggahitaṃ, taṃ imasmiṃ atthe arañña’’nti. Tattha vinicchayo ārāmaṭṭhādīsu vuttasadiso.
在这类林中,即使只是砍断一棵贵重的大树,也犯波罗夷。关于“或藤蔓”这一句:在这里,藤条和藤蔓都算藤蔓。其中,无论藤条还是藤蔓,如果很长,穿透或缠绕大树和灌木生长,那么只砍断根部不构成偷盗,只砍断顶端也不构成偷盗;但当根部和顶端都被砍断时,就构成偷盗。如果它是缠绕着树站住的,那么把它从树上解开的那一刻,就构成偷盗。巴利
Tatthajātakesu panettha ekasmimpi mahaggharukkhe chinnamatte pārājikaṃ. Lataṃ vāti ettha ca vettopi latāpi latā eva; tattha yo vetto vā latā vā dīghā hoti, mahārukkhe ca gacche ca vinivijjhitvā vā veṭhetvā vā gatā, sā mūle chinnāpi avahāraṃ na janeti agge chinnāpi, yadā pana aggepi mūlepi chinnā hoti, tadā avahāraṃ janeti. Sace pana veṭhetvā ṭhitā hoti, veṭhetvā ṭhitā pana rukkhato mocitamattā avahāraṃ janeti.
关于“茅草等”这一句:这里不管是茅草还是树叶,全都被“茅草”这个说法涵盖在内。如果是为了盖房子等用途,无论是拿别人割好的,还是自己割了再拿,都要按物品的价值来判罚。不只是茅草和树叶,其他像树皮、藤蔓之类的东西,只要主人还执著不放,拿的人都要按物品价值来判罚。已经砍下来削好放在那里的半干树木,也不能拿。但如果一棵树的树梢和树根都已经被砍断,树枝也已经朽烂,树皮也剥落了,那就可以当作“主人已经丢弃”来拿。即使树上刻有标记,当标记被树皮包住看不见时,也可以拿。为了盖房子等用途砍了树,等房子建好、已经有人住进去之后,那些木材在树林里被雨水和日晒弄坏了,看到这种木材,也可以当作“已经被丢弃”来拿。为什么?因为森林的主人已经对这些木材没有支配权了。那些向森林主人布施之后才砍下来的木材,支配权属于布施的人,而他们已经把这些木材丢弃了,对他们来说已经不再执著。巴利
Tiṇaṃvāti ettha tiṇaṃ vā hotu paṇṇaṃ vā, sabbaṃ tiṇaggahaṇeneva gahitaṃ; taṃ gehacchadanādīnamatthāya parehi chinnaṃ vā attanā chinditvā vā gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Na kevalañca tiṇapaṇṇameva, aññampi yaṃkiñci vākachalli ādi, yattha sāmikā sālayā, taṃ gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Tacchetvā ṭhapito addhagatopi rukkho na gahetabbo. Yo pana agge ca mūle ca chinno hoti, sākhāpissa pūtikā jātā, challiyopi gaḷitā, ‘‘ayaṃ sāmikehi chaḍḍito’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Lakkhaṇacchinnassāpi yadā lakkhaṇaṃ challiyā pariyonaddhaṃ hoti, tadā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Gehādīnaṃ atthāya rukkhe chinditvā yadā tāni katāni ajjhāvutthāni ca honti, dārūnipi araññe vassena ca ātapena ca vinassanti, īdisānipi disvā ‘‘chaḍḍitānī’’ti gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Yasmā araññasāmikā etesaṃ anissarā. Yehi araññasāmikānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ datvā chinnāni, te eva issarā, tehi ca tāni chaḍḍitāni, nirālayā tattha jātāti.
如果一位比丘事先把该给守林人的东西给了他们,然后进入森林,让人砍取他想要的树,那么他即使没有去守林人的哨所,也可以走他喜欢走的路。如果他进去时没有给东西,心里想“出来时我再给”,让人砍了树,出来时把该给守林人的东西给了他们再走,这也是可以的。如果他心里想着“我会给的”就离开了,当被要求“请给吧”时,回答说“我会给的”,那么在被要求时就必须给。如果有人自己出钱说“请让比丘通行”,那么他既然已经得到了许可,就可以通行。但如果有个有权势的人不给钱,只是阻止说“不要向比丘们收取份额”,而守林人又说“我们如果不向比丘和苦行者收取份额,又从哪里得到收入呢?尊者,请给吧”,那就必须给。巴利
Yopi bhikkhu paṭhamaṃyeva araññapālānaṃ deyyadhammaṃ datvā araññaṃ pavisitvā yathārucite rukkhe gāhāpeti, tassa tesaṃ ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ agantvāpi yathārucitena maggena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Athāpi pavisanto adatvā ‘‘nikkhamanto dassāmī’’ti rukkhe gāhāpetvā nikkhamanto tesaṃ dātabbaṃ datvā gacchati, vaṭṭati eva. Athāpi ābhogaṃ katvā gacchati ‘‘dehī’’ti vutte ‘‘dassāmī’’ti, ‘‘dehī’’ti vutte dātabbameva. Sace koci attano dhanaṃ datvā ‘‘bhikkhussa gantuṃ dethā’’ti vadati, laddhakappameva, gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana koci issarajātiko dhanaṃ adatvāva ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ bhāgaṃ mā gaṇhathā’’ti vāreti, araññapālā ca ‘‘mayaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tāpasānañca bhāgaṃ agaṇhantā kuto lacchāma, detha, bhante’’ti vadanti, dātabbameva.
如果守林人正在睡觉、沉迷玩乐,或者去了别的地方,有人来到后喊“守林人在哪里”,没看到人就走了,这要赔偿物品。如果有人到了守护地点,却因为专注业处等事、或者心不在焉、失念而走过了界限,也一样要赔偿物品。如果有人到了那个地方,这时有盗贼、大象、猛兽或大暴雨出现,他为了赶快逃离这些危险而匆忙越过那个地方,暂时还算安全,但仍然要赔偿物品。不过,森林里的这个守护地点比偷税关卡还要严重。偷税关卡的话,只要没有进入它的范围,从远处绕过去,只犯恶作;但这个地方,如果以偷盗的心绕过去,即使从空中飞过,也犯波罗夷。所以,在这里应当不放逸。巴利
Yo pana araññapālesu niddāyantesu vā kīḷāpasutesu vā katthaci pakkantesu vā āgantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ araññapālā’’ti pakkositvāpi adisvā gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Yopi ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ patvā kammaṭṭhānādīni manasikaronto vā aññavihito vā assatiyā atikkamati, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Yassāpi taṃ ṭhānaṃ pattassa coro vā hatthī vā vāḷamigo vā mahāmegho vā vuṭṭhahati, so ca tamhā upaddavā muccitukamyatāya sahasā taṃ ṭhānaṃ atikkamati, rakkhati tāva, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. Idaṃ pana araññe ārakkhaṭṭhānaṃ nāma suṅkaghātatopi garukataraṃ. Suṅkaghātassa hi paricchedaṃ anokkamitvā dūratova pariharanto dukkaṭameva āpajjati. Idaṃ pana theyyacittena pariharantassa ākāsena gacchatopi pārājikameva. Tasmā ettha appamattena bhavitabbanti.
108 关于水:所谓“容器中的水”,是指在缺水的时候,把水存放在水缸等容器里。水放在哪个容器里,如果有人把那个容器拉开,或者在容器上打个洞,或者在水池、湖泊等地方把自己的容器伸进去取水,就按照前面讲酥油等物时所说的方法来判定。巴利
108. Udake pana – bhājanagatanti udakadullabhakāle udakamaṇikādīsu bhājanesu saṅgopetvā ṭhapitaṃ; taṃ yasmiṃ bhājane ṭhapitaṃ hoti, taṃ bhājanaṃ āviñchitvā vā chiddaṃ katvā vā tattha pokkharaṇītaḷākesu ca attano bhājanaṃ pavesetvā gaṇhantassa sappitelesu vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo.
破坏堤坝时,如果连同那里生长的草木一起破坏,因为属于不与取的加行,犯恶作。而且每打一下都各犯一次。站在堤内面朝外破坏的,按外部来判;站在堤外面朝内破坏的,按内部来判;把内外都破坏后,留下中间再破坏的,按中间来判。把堤坝弄弱之后,自己呼唤牛来,或让村里的孩子去呼唤,牛来了用角破坏堤坝,堤坝就因此被破坏。把堤坝弄弱之后,把牛赶进水里,或让村里的孩子把牛赶进水里,牛激起的水波冲破堤坝流出去。对村里的孩子说“你们在水里玩吧”,或者孩子玩耍时吓唬他们,他们激起的水波也会冲破堤坝流出去。砍伐水里长着的树,或让别人砍,树倒下时激起的水波也会冲破堤坝流出去,堤坝就因此被破坏。把堤坝弄弱之后,为了保护湖泊,堵住从湖泊排出的水或排水管,或者为了把流往别处的水引到这里来而筑坝,或者把水渠修直,或者破坏自己在上游的湖泊,溢出的水冲走堤坝,堤坝就因此被破坏。在所有情况下,都应按流出水的价值,以相应的偷盗罪来判。巴利
Mariyādacchedane pana tattha jātakabhūtagāmena saddhimpi mariyādaṃ chindantassa adinnādānapayogattā dukkaṭaṃ. Tañca pana pahāre pahāre hoti. Antoṭhatvā bahimukho chindanto bahi antena kāretabbo. Bahi ṭhatvā antomukho chindanto antoantena kāretabbo. Anto ca bahi ca chinditvā majjhe ṭhapetvā taṃ chindanto majjhena kāretabbo. Mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā gāvo pakkosati, gāmadārakehi vā pakkosāpeti, tā āgantvā khurehi mariyādaṃ chindanti, teneva chinnā hoti. Mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā gāvo udake paveseti, gāmadārakehi vā pavesāpeti, tāhi uṭṭhāpitavīciyo mariyādaṃ bhinditvā gacchanti. Gāmadārake vā ‘‘udake kīḷathā’’ti vadati, kīḷante vā utrāseti, tehi uṭṭhāpitavīciyopi mariyādaṃ chinditvā gacchanti. Antoudake jātarukkhaṃ chindati, aññena vā chindāpeti, tenapi patantena uṭṭhāpitavīciyo mariyādaṃ chinditvā gacchanti, teneva chinnā hoti. Mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā taḷākarakkhaṇatthāya taḷākato nibbahanaudakaṃ vā niddhamanatumbaṃ vā pidahati, aññato gacchantaṃ vā udakaṃ yathā ettha pavisati, evaṃ pāḷiṃ vā bandhati, mātikaṃ vā ujukaṃ karoti, tassa uparibhāge ṭhitaṃ attano taḷākaṃ vā bhindati, ussannaṃ udakaṃ mariyādaṃ gahetvā gacchati, teneva chinnā hoti. Sabbattha nikkhantaudakagghānurūpena avahārena kāretabbo.
打开排水管把水排出去的人,道理也是一样。不过,如果堤坝被弄得不够牢固,牛自己跑过来,或者被没人指使的村里小孩赶过来,用蹄子踩坏了堤坝;或者牛自己下了水,或者被没人指使的村里小孩赶进水里,激起了波浪;或者村里小孩自己下水玩耍,激起了波浪;或者水里的树被别人砍倒,倒下时激起了波浪,这些波浪冲破了堤坝;又或者,把堤坝弄得不够牢固之后,堵住了干涸池塘的排水口或排水管,或者在水流向别处的通道上筑起堤坝,或者把干涸的水渠修直,后来天一下雨,水冲过来冲破了堤坝——在所有这些情况下,都算应当赔偿物品。巴利
Niddhamanapanāḷiṃ ugghāṭetvā nīharantassāpi eseva nayo. Sace pana tena mariyādāya dubbalāya katāya attano dhammatāya āgantvā vā anāṇattehi gāmadārakehi āropitā vā gāviyo khurehi mariyādaṃ bhindanti, attanoyeva dhammatāya anāṇattehi vā gāmadārakehi udake pavesitā vīciyo uṭṭhāpenti, gāmadārakā vā sayameva pavisitvā kīḷantā uṭṭhāpenti antoudake vā rukkho aññena chijjamāno patitvā uṭṭhāpeti, uṭṭhāpitā vīciyo mariyādaṃ chindanti, sacepi mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā sukkhataḷākassa udakanibbahanaṭṭhānaṃ vā udakaniddhamanatumbaṃ vā pidahati, aññato gamanamagge vā pāḷiṃ bandhati, sukkhamātikaṃ vā ujukaṃ karoti, pacchā deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ āgantvā mariyādaṃ bhindati, sabbattha bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ.
如果有人在旱季把干涸池塘的堤岸一直挖到池底,把它弄坏,后来天一下雨,流过来的水就漏掉了,这要按财物赔偿。即使因为这件事长出了庄稼,他要是连值一足钱那么点价值的东西都不赔给主人,那他就因为推卸对主人的责任而成了非沙门。巴利
Yo pana nidāghe sukkhavāpiyā mariyādaṃ yāva talaṃ pāpetvā chindati, pacchā deve vuṭṭhe āgatāgataṃ udakaṃ palāyati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Yattakaṃ tappaccayā sassaṃ uppajjati, tato pādamattagghanakampi adento sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepena assamaṇo hoti.
如果是大家共用的池塘,那么池塘里的水,所有人都可以使用。在池塘下方,人们种庄稼,为了守护庄稼,从池塘引出一条大渠,穿过田地中间流过去,这条大渠在常年流水的时候也是大家共用的。然后从大渠再引出小渠,把水引进各自的田里,这些水就不让别人取用。到了旱季,水变少的时候,就按轮次供水;谁轮到供水时得不到水,他的庄稼就会枯死。所以,在别人轮次的时候,其他人不能取水。在这里,如果比丘以偷盗的心,把他人的小渠或田里的水,引进自己或他人的渠里或田里,或者引向森林入口,这就构成偷盗。巴利
Yaṃ pana sabbasādhāraṇaṃ taḷākaṃ hoti; taḷāke udakassa sabbepi manussā issarā. Heṭṭhato panassa sassāni karonti, sassapālanatthaṃ taḷākato mahāmātikā nikkhamitvā khettamajjhena yāti, sāpi sadā sandanakāle sabbasādhāraṇā. Tato pana khuddakamātikā nīharitvā attano attano kedāresu udakaṃ pavesenti. Taṃ aññesaṃ gahetuṃ na denti. Nidāghasamayeva udake mandībhūte vārena udakaṃ denti, yo udakavāre sampatte na labhati, tassa sassāni milāyanti; tasmā aññesaṃ vāre añño gahetuṃ na labhati. Tattha yo bhikkhu paresaṃ khuddakamātikāto vā kedārato vā udakaṃ theyyacittena attano vā parassa vā mātikaṃ vā kedāraṃ vā paveseti, aṭavimukhaṃ vā vāheti, avahāro vassa hoti.
如果有人想:“我的水轮要很久以后才来,而这庄稼正在枯萎”,于是就在别人的田里……巴利
Yopi ‘‘cirena me udakavāro bhavissati, idañca sassaṃ milāyatī’’ti paresaṃ kedāre
堵住水流入他人田地的通道,把水引到自己田里,这就是偷盗。不过,如果水还没从池塘流出、还没到别人水渠口的时候,只是把干水渠在各处堵起来,让流过来的水不进入别人的田、只进入自己的田。水还没流出时堵的,算堵得好;水已经流出时堵的,就要赔偿。如果自己走到池塘,亲手打开排水管,把水引到自己田里,那就不算偷盗。为什么?因为田地是依靠池塘才有的。但在《库伦达》等注疏里却说这是偷盗,这跟“依处所、时间、地域”这个判定标准对不上。所以,只有《大注释》里说的才是合理的。巴利
Pavisantassa udakassa pavisanamaggaṃ pidahitvā attano kedāraṃ paveseti, avahāro eva. Sace pana taḷākato aniggate paresaṃ mātikāmukhaṃ asampatteva udake sukkhamātikaṃyeva yathā āgacchantaṃ udakaṃ aññesaṃ kedāre appavisitvā attanoyeva kedāraṃ pavisati, evaṃ tattha tattha bandhati. Anikkhante baddhā subaddhā, nikkhante baddhā, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Taḷākaṃ gantvā sayameva niddhamanapanāḷiṃ ugghāṭetvā attano kedāraṃ pavesentassāpi natthi avahāro. Kasmā? Taḷākaṃ nissāya khettassa katattā. Kurundiyādīsu pana ‘‘avahāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ ‘‘vatthuṃ kālañca desañcā’’ti iminā lakkhaṇena na sameti. Tasmā mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva yuttanti.
109 109. 齿木应该按照园林所属物的裁决方法来裁决。但这里有一个差别:如果有人受雇于僧团,按日、或按半月、或按月轮流拿来齿木,他拿来并切断之后,只要还没有交给比丘僧团,那就还是属于他自己的。所以,以偷盗心拿取的人,要按物品的价值来处罚。而生长在那里的齿木属于重物,如果以偷盗心拿取由比丘僧团守护保管的这类物品,也要按物品的价值来处罚。同样的原则也适用于属于团体、个人或在家人所有的已切断或未切断的齿木。在那些园林、苑地中生长的齿木,沙弥们按轮次为比丘僧团拿来时,也会为阿阇梨和和尚拿来,那些齿木在切断并交给僧团之前,全都还是属于他们的。所以,以偷盗心拿取那些齿木的人,也要按物品的价值来处罚。但当他们切断后交给僧团,放在齿木台上,说“请比丘僧团随意取用”,从那时起就不算偷盗了。不过规矩应当知道:如果有人每天都到僧团中来,他应当每天只拿一根齿木。如果有人不是每天来,而是住在精舍里,只在闻法或布萨时才出现在堂中,他就应当估量好数量,拿四五根齿木放在自己住处嚼用。那些用完之后,如果齿木台上还有很多,可以再拿来嚼用。但如果他没有估量好数量就拿,自己的还没用完,台上的却已经用光了,那时有些长老可能会说“谁拿的,谁拿回来”,有些则说“让他们嚼吧,沙弥们会再拿来的”,所以为了避免争论,应当估量好数量。拿取本身并没有过失。走在路上时,也可以把一两根放进袋子里带着走。巴利
109. Dantapoṇaṃ ārāmaṭṭhakavinicchayena vinicchinitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yo saṅghassa vetanabhato hutvā devasikaṃ vā pakkhamāsavārena vā dantakaṭṭhaṃ āharati, so taṃ āharitvā chinditvāpi yāva bhikkhusaṅghaṃ na sampaṭicchāpeti, tāva tasseva hoti. Tasmā taṃ theyyacittena gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Tatthajātakaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ, tampi bhikkhusaṅghena rakkhitagopitaṃ gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Eseva nayo gaṇapuggalagihimanussasantakepi chinnake acchinnake ca. Tesaṃ ārāmuyyānabhūmīsu jātaṃ sāmaṇerā vārena bhikkhusaṅghassa dantakaṭṭhaṃ āharantā ācariyupajjhāyānampi āharanti, taṃ yāva chinditvā saṅghaṃ na paṭicchāpenti, tāva sabbaṃ tesaṃyeva hoti. Tasmā tampi theyyacittena gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Yadā pana te chinditvā saṅghassa paṭicchāpetvā dantakaṭṭhamāḷake nikkhipanti, ‘‘yathāsukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅgho paribhuñjatū’’ti; tato paṭṭhāya avahāro natthi, vattaṃ pana jānitabbaṃ. Yo hi devasikaṃ saṅghamajjhe osarati, tena divase divase ekameva dantakaṭṭhaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Yo pana devasikaṃ na osarati, padhānaghare vasitvā dhammasavane vā uposathagge vā dissati, tena pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetvā cattāri pañcadantakaṭṭhāni attano vasanaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā khāditabbāni. Tesu khīṇesu sace punapi dantakaṭṭhamāḷake bahūni hontiyeva, punapi āharitvā khāditabbāni. Yadi pana pamāṇaṃ asallakkhetvā āharati, tesu akkhīṇesuyeva māḷake khīyanti, tato keci therā ‘‘yehi gahitāni, te paṭiāharantū’’ti vadeyyuṃ, keci ‘‘khādantu, puna sāmaṇerā āharissantī’’ti, tasmā vivādapariharaṇatthaṃ pamāṇaṃ sallakkhetabbaṃ. Gahaṇe pana doso natthi. Maggaṃ gacchantenāpi ekaṃ vā dve vā thavikāya pakkhipitvā gantabbanti.
110 “林主”就是森林之主,这是对森林里最年长的那棵大树的叫法。不过在这里,它指的是所有被人占有的树,比如芒果树、面包果树、菠萝蜜树这类。又或者,在人们种胡椒藤之类的地方,如果一棵树被砍的时候,哪怕还只连着一条树皮、一层韧皮、一块木片或者一点边材,只要它这样连着倒在地上,那它就仍然受到保护。巴利
110. Vanassa patīti vanappati; vanajeṭṭhakarukkhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana sabbopi manussehi pariggahitarukkho adhippeto ambalabujapanasādiko. Yattha vā pana maricavalliādīni āropenti, so chijjamāno sace ekāyapi challiyā vā vākena vā sakalikāya vā pheggunā vā sambaddhova hutvā bhūmiyaṃ patati, rakkhati tāva.
如果树已经被砍断,却还靠着藤蔓或者旁边树枝的牵连支撑而直直立着,或者正在倒下但还没碰到地面,这种情况下不算豁免,仍然构成偷盗。同样,如果用锯子锯断,却像没断一样照样立着,也适用同样的道理。巴利
Yo pana chinnopi vallīhi vā sāmantarukkhasākhāhi vā sambaddho sandhāritattā ujukameva tiṭṭhati, patanto vā bhūmiṃ na pāpuṇāti, natthi tattha parihāro, avahāro eva hoti. Yopi kakacena chinno acchinno viya hutvā tatheva tiṭṭhati, tasmimpi eseva nayo.
如果有人先把树弄得不牢固,之后再摇晃它让它倒下,或者让别人来摇晃;或者在它旁边砍倒另一棵树,让那棵树压到这棵树上,或者让别人来压;或者把猴子赶上去,让猴子爬上这棵树,或者让别人把猴子赶上去;或者把狐蝠放上去,或者让别人放上去——这些都会使那棵树倒下,那就构成对那棵树的偷盗。巴利
Yo pana rukkhaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā pacchā cāletvā pāteti, aññena vā cālāpeti; aññaṃ vāssa santike rukkhaṃ chinditvā ajjhottharati, parena vā ajjhottharāpeti; makkaṭe vā paripātetvā tattha āropeti, aññena vā āropāpeti; vagguliyo vā tattha āropeti, parena vā āropāpeti; tā taṃ rukkhaṃ pātenti, tasseva avahāro.
如果那棵树是被他弄衰弱之后,另一个人并没有受他指使,却去摇动那棵树,把它弄倒了,巴利
Sace pana tena rukkhe dubbale kate añño anāṇatto eva taṃ cāletvā pāteti,
如果被树压到,或者猴子、蝙蝠按自己的习性爬上去,或者别人没受指示就把东西放上去,或者他自己去清理风口,或者强风吹来把树刮倒——这些情况全都要赔偿物品。不过这里说的清理风口,是指在风还没来的时候,用把干涸河床弄直之类的办法来处理,不是别的做法。如果砍劈树木,或者用刀斧敲打,或者放火,或者钉入蛙刺或毒药,因此把树弄死,这些情况也全都要赔偿物品。巴利
Rukkhena vā ajjhottharati, attano dhammatāya makkaṭā vā vagguliyo vā ārohanti, paro vā anāṇatto āropeti, sayaṃ vā esa vātamukhaṃ sodheti, balavavāto āgantvā rukkhaṃ pāteti; sabbattha bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Vātamukhasodhanaṃ panettha asampatte vāte sukkhamātikāya ujukaraṇādīhi sameti, no aññathā. Rukkhaṃ āvijjhitvā satthena vā ākoṭeti, aggiṃ vā deti, maṇḍukakaṇṭakaṃ vā visaṃ vā ākoṭeti, yena so marati, sabbattha bhaṇḍadeyyamevāti.
111 111. 关于夺取者:如果一个人以偷盗的心去碰别人正在拿着的财物,比如看见别人用头顶等方式带着财物走,心想“我要把这东西抢过来”,就快速走过去碰它,到这一步他犯的是恶作。令其动摇,就是做出拉拽推扯的动作,而物主不放手,这时他犯的是土喇咤亚。使物离开原位,就是拉拽之后让东西从物主手中脱落,这时他犯的是波罗夷。不过,如果物主站起来打他,又把那财物夺回来拿走,那么比丘在第一次拿取的时候就已经犯了波罗夷。如果从头部、耳朵、脖子或手上割断或解开装饰品而取走,当装饰品从头等部位脱落的那一刻,就犯波罗夷。但如果是手上的手镯或臂钏,没有把它取下来,只是摩擦上臂或来回推拉,或者把它举到空中,那么它暂时还受到保护。就像树根处衣竿上的手镯一样,不构成波罗夷。为什么?因为它属于有执受之物。凡是在有执受的部分里,只要还没有从那里取出来,它就仍然在那里。同样的道理也适用于指环、脚镯、臂钏、腰带等装饰品。巴利
111. Haraṇake – aññassa haraṇakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto āmasatīti paraṃ sīsabhārādīhi bhaṇḍaṃ ādāya gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘etaṃ harissāmī’’ti vegena gantvā āmasati, ettāvatā assa dukkaṭaṃ. Phandāpetīti ākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhanaṃ karoti, sāmiko na muñcati, tenassa thullaccayaṃ. Ṭhānā cāvetīti ākaḍḍhitvā sāmikassa hatthato moceti, tenassa pārājikaṃ. Sace pana taṃ bhaṇḍasāmiko uṭṭhahitvā pothetvā puna taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ mocāpetvā gaṇheyya, bhikkhu paṭhamaggahaṇeneva pārājiko. Sīsato vā kaṇṇato vā gīvato vā hatthato vā alaṅkāraṃ chinditvā vā mocetvā vā gaṇhantassa sīsādīhi mocitamatte pārājikaṃ. Hatthe pana valayaṃ vā kaṭakaṃ vā anīharitvā aggabāhaṃ ghaṃsantova aparāparaṃ vā sāreti, ākāsagataṃ vā karoti, rakkhati tāva. Rukkhamūlacīvaravaṃsesu valayamiva na pārājikaṃ janeti. Kasmā? Saviññāṇakattā. Saviññāṇakakoṭṭhāsagatañhi yāva tato na nīhaṭaṃ, tāva tattheva hoti. Eseva nayo aṅgulimuddikapādakaṭakakaṭūpagapiḷandhanesu.
如果有人抢夺别人身上穿的衣服,而对方因为羞耻急忙不肯松手,盗贼从一边拉,对方从另一边拉,这时候衣服还在对方的保护范围内。一旦衣服从对方手中脱离,就犯波罗夷。如果在拉拽过程中衣服被扯断,其中一部分落到盗贼手里,而这一部分的价值达到一足价,同样犯波罗夷。
关于“令持货人同行”的情况:如果盗贼心想“我要把持货人和货物一起带走”,就威胁持货人说“从那边走”,持货人因为害怕而朝着盗贼指定的方向迈出一步,盗贼犯土喇咤亚;迈出第二步,犯波罗夷。
关于“令其放下”的情况:如果盗贼看见持货人手里拿着武器,心生畏惧,想让他放下武器后再夺取,便退到一旁加以恐吓,使他放下,当货物从对方手中脱离的刹那,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Yo pana parassa nivatthasāṭakaṃ acchindati, paro ca salajjitāya sahasā na muñcati, ekenantena coro kaḍḍhati, ekenantena paro, rakkhati tāva. Parassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Athāpi taṃ kaḍḍhantassa chijjitvā ekadeso hatthagato hoti, so ca pādaṃ agghati pārājikameva. Sahabhaṇḍahārakanti ‘‘sabhaṇḍahārakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ nessāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘ito yāhī’’ti bhaṇḍahārakaṃ tajjeti, so bhīto corena adhippetadisābhimukho hutvā ekaṃ pādaṃ saṅkāmeti, corassa thullaccayaṃ; dutiye pārājikaṃ. Pātāpetīti athāpi coro bhaṇḍahārakassa hatthe āvudhaṃ disvā sāsaṅko hutvā pātāpetvā gahetukāmo ekamantaṃ paṭikkamma santajjetvā pātāpeti, parassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ.
“令其放下,犯恶作”这类说法,是就预谋计划而言的。如果有人令对方把货物放下,心里盘算“我喜欢的那个,我要拿走”,这样计划之后令对方放下,那么他在令对方放下时和触碰时犯恶作,在令货物晃动时犯偷兰遮。如果让价值一足价的东西离开原位,就犯波罗夷。此后,即使他后悔而放手,也根本没有沙门身份了。如果有人看见搬货的人经过,就追上去说“站住,站住,把货物放下”,从而令对方放下,那么当货物从那人手中脱离的刹那,他也犯波罗夷。巴利
Pātāpeti, āpatti dukkaṭassātiādi pana parikappavasena vuttaṃ. Yo hi bhaṇḍaṃ pātāpetvā ‘‘yaṃ mama ruccati, taṃ gahessāmī’’ti parikappetvā pātāpeti, tassa pātāpane ca āmasane ca dukkaṭaṃ, phandāpane thullaccayaṃ. Pādagghanakassa ṭhānā cāvane pārājikaṃ. Taṃ pacchā paṭipātiyamānassa muñcatopi natthiyeva samaṇabhāvo. Yopi bhaṇḍahārakaṃ atikkamantaṃ disvā anubandhanto ‘‘tiṭṭha, tiṭṭha, bhaṇḍaṃ pātehī’’ti vatvā pātāpeti, tassāpi tena hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ.
如果那人只说“站住,站住”,却不说“放下”;而对方看了他一眼,心想“要是他抓住我,可能连我也会杀掉”,于是因为害怕,把货物扔进隐蔽的地方,心想“我以后再回来拿”,然后就走了——这种情况下,不因为令对方放下货物而犯波罗夷。但如果他后来回来,以偷盗的心取走货物,在把货物拿起来的那一刻,就犯波罗夷。
如果他这样想:“在我让他放下的时候,这东西就已经成了我的了”,于是把它当成自己的东西拿走,那么在拿的时候它仍受保护,但他需要赔偿这件物品。如果物主说“还给我”,他却不还,当物主放弃追讨时,他犯波罗夷。
如果他想“那人已经把这东西丢下走了,现在这是无主物”,于是把它当成粪扫衣来拿,道理也是一样的。
但如果物主只是因为听到“站住,站住”而回头看了一眼,看见了他,就想“现在这东西已经不是我的了”,于是放弃追讨,毫无留恋地丢下东西逃走,那么别人以偷盗的心拿走那东西,在拿起来的时候犯恶作。如果物主让他归还,他就应当归还;如果不还,就犯波罗夷。为什么呢?因为那东西是因为他的行为才被丢下的——这是大注疏中说的。但在其他注疏中,对此并没有进一步的辨析。按照前面所说的道理,不论是以“这是我的东西”的想法,还是以“这是粪扫衣”的想法拿走,判断标准都是这样。巴利
Yo pana ‘‘tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vadati, ‘‘pātehī’’ti na vadati; itaro ca taṃ oloketvā ‘‘sace esa maṃ pāpuṇeyya, ghāteyyāpi ma’’ nti sālayova hutvā taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahanaṭṭhāne pakkhipitvā ‘‘puna nivattitvā gahessāmī’’ti pakkamati, pātanapaccayā pārājikaṃ natthi. Āgantvā pana theyyacittena gaṇhato uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Atha panassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘mayā pātāpenteneva idaṃ mama santakaṃ kata’’nti tato naṃ sakasaññāya gaṇhāti; gahaṇe rakkhati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. ‘‘Dehī’’ti vutte adentassa sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepe pārājikaṃ. ‘‘So imaṃ chaḍḍetvā gato, anajjhāvutthakaṃ dāni ida’’nti paṃsukūlasaññāya gaṇhatopi eseva nayo. Atha pana sāmiko ‘‘tiṭṭha tiṭṭhā’’ti vuttamatteneva olokento taṃ disvā ‘‘na dāni idaṃ mayha’’nti dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā nirālayo chaḍḍetvā palāyati, taṃ theyyacittena gaṇhato uddhāre dukkaṭaṃ. Āharāpente dātabbaṃ, adentassa pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Tassa payogena chaḍḍitattāti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññesu pana vicāraṇā eva natthi. Purimanayeneva sakasaññāya vā paṃsukūlasaññāya vā gaṇhantepi ayameva vinicchayoti.
112 112. 关于寄存物——即使故意说谎“我不拿”,因为属于不与取的加行,也是恶作。说“你们在说什么?这既不合我的身份,也不合你们的身份”这类话的,同样只是恶作。如果物主生起疑惑:“我私下把这东西放在他手里,没有别人知道,他到底会不会还给我?”对比丘来说是土喇咤亚。物主看到他的粗暴等表现后,心想“他不会还给我了”,于是放下责任。这时,如果这位比丘在归还这件事上还有劲头,心想“我要让他吃点苦头再还”,那就还算是守护着。即使他在归还方面已经没劲了,但物主在取回方面还有劲,也还是守护着。但如果他在归还方面没劲了,物主也放下责任想“他不会还给我了”,这样双方都放下责任,比丘就犯波罗夷。即使他嘴上说“我会还”,心里却不想给,在物主放下责任时,也犯波罗夷。所谓寄存物,是指别人为了保管而放在自己手里的东西。为了把它从没有守护的地方移到有守护的地方而拿走,不犯。即使以盗心把它从原处移开,也不构成偷取。为什么?因为东西是放在他自己手里,但成了物债。以盗心受用的,也是同样的道理。暂时借用的情况也一样。“行持正法”等,如前所说。以上是圣典注释。巴利
112. Upanidhimhi – nāhaṃ gaṇhāmīti sampajānamusāvādepi adinnādānassa payogattā dukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ tumhe bhaṇatha? Nevidaṃ mayhaṃ anurūpaṃ, na tumhāka’’ntiādīni vadantassāpi dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Raho mayā etassa hatthe ṭhapitaṃ, na añño koci jānāti, ‘dassati nu kho me no’’’ti sāmiko vimatiṃ uppādeti, bhikkhussa thullaccayaṃ. Tassa pharusādibhāvaṃ disvā sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ dassatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, tatra sacāyaṃ bhikkhu ‘‘kilametvā naṃ dassāmī’’ti dāne saussāho, rakkhati tāva. Sacepi so dāne nirussāho, bhaṇḍassāmiko pana gahaṇe saussāho , rakkhateva. Yadi pana so dāne nirussāho bhaṇḍasāmikopi ‘‘na mayhaṃ dassatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, evaṃ ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepena bhikkhuno pārājikaṃ . Yadipi mukhena ‘‘dassāmī’’ti vadati, cittena pana adātukāmo, evampi sāmikassa dhuranikkhepe pārājikaṃ. Taṃ pana upanidhi nāma saṅgopanatthāya attano hatthe parehi ṭhapitabhaṇḍaṃ, aguttadesato ṭhānā cāvetvā guttaṭṭhāne ṭhapanatthāya harato anāpatti. Theyyacittenapi ṭhānā cāventassa avahāro natthi. Kasmā? Attano hatthe nikkhittattā, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. Theyyacittena paribhuñjatopi eseva nayo. Tāvakālikaggahaṇepi tatheva. Dhammaṃ carantotiādi vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ tāva pāḷivaṇṇanā.
关于圣典之外的判定,这里按照钵的四种分类等,是这样说的:据说有一个比丘,对别人一个很贵重的钵起了贪心,想把它拿走,就仔细记住那个钵放的位置,然后把自己的钵也放在那旁边。他在天快亮的时候过来,让人诵法,然后对正在睡觉的大长老说:“尊者,我向您顶礼。”“你是谁?”“尊者,我是外来比丘,想一早就走。我的钵用这样的肩带系着,放在那样的钵袋里,搁在某个地方。尊者,我要是能拿回它就好了。”长老就进去拿了那个钵。就在拿起来的那一刻,这个贼就犯了波罗夷。如果长老出来问他:“你是谁?怎么在不合适的时候来?”他因为害怕就逃跑,在逃跑的时候就已经犯了波罗夷。不过长老因为心地清净,所以没有犯。如果长老心想“我要拿那个”,结果拿了另一个,也是同样的道理。不过,这种情况只适用于拿了另一个完全相似的东西,就像在关于杀人那类教诫的类似事例中一样。但在《库伦达》中说“应该按脚步来处罚”,那是适用于拿了不相似的东西的情况。巴利
Pāḷimuttakavinicchayo panettha pattacatukkādivasena evaṃ vutto – eko kira bhikkhu parassa mahagghe patte lobhaṃ uppādetvā taṃ haritukāmo ṭhapitaṭṭhānamassa suṭṭhu sallakkhetvā attanopi pattaṃ tasseva santike ṭhapesi. So paccūsasamaye āgantvā dhammaṃ vācāpetvā niddāyamānaṃ mahātheramāha – ‘‘vandāmi, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Ko eso’’ti? ‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, āgantukabhikkhu, kālassevamhi gantukāmo, asukasmiñca me ṭhāne īdisena nāma aṃsabaddhakena īdisāya pattatthavikāya patto ṭhapito. Sādhāhaṃ, bhante, taṃ labheyya’’nti thero pavisitvā taṃ gaṇhi. Uddhāreyeva corassa pārājikaṃ. Sace āgantvā ‘‘kosi tvaṃ avelāya āgato’’ti vutto bhīto palāyati, pārājikaṃ patvāva palāyati. Therassa pana suddhacittattā anāpatti. Thero ‘‘taṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti aññaṃ gaṇhi, eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana aññaṃ tādisameva gaṇhante yujjati, manussaviggahe āṇattasadisavatthusmiṃ viya. Kurundiyaṃ pana ‘‘padavārena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ atādisameva gaṇhante yujjati.
他以为那是(盗贼所要的)那个钵,就拿起来给了他。因为这是物主把钵交给了盗贼,所以不犯波罗夷;但因为是用不清净的心拿的,所以犯恶作。他以为那是(盗贼所要的)那个钵,就拿起了盗贼自己的钵给了他,这里也一样,因为是盗贼自己的东西,所以不犯波罗夷;但同样因为是用不清净的心拿的,所以还是犯恶作。在所有情况下,长老都无犯。巴利
Taṃ maññamāno attano pattaṃ gaṇhitvā adāsi, corassa sāmikena dinnattā pārājikaṃ natthi, asuddhacittena pana gahitattā dukkaṭaṃ. Taṃ maññamāno corasseva pattaṃ gaṇhitvā adāsi, idhāpi corassa attano santakattā pārājikaṃ natthi, asuddhacittena pana gahitattā dukkaṭameva. Sabbattha therassa anāpatti.
又有另一位,心里想着“我要把钵偷走”,同样在长老睡觉时向他顶礼。长老问“是谁”,他回答:“尊者,我是生病的比丘,请先给我一个钵,我要到村口去拿药。”长老心想:“这里没有病人,这人肯定是贼。”于是取出自己怨敌比丘的钵,想“让他拿走吧”,就交给了他。就在取钵的当下,两人都犯波罗夷。如果认定“这是怨敌比丘的钵”,却取了另一个人的钵,道理也一样。但如果认定“这是怨敌的”,而取出贼自己的钵给他,按前面说的,长老犯波罗夷,贼犯恶作。如果误以为“这是怨敌的”,却拿了自己的钵给他,按前面说的,两人都犯恶作。巴利
Aparo ‘‘pattaṃ coressāmī’’ti tatheva niddāyamānaṃ theraṃ vandi. ‘‘Ko aya’’nti ca vutte ‘ahaṃ, bhante, gilānabhikkhu, ekaṃ tāva me pattaṃ detha, gāmadvāraṃ gantvā bhesajjaṃ āharissāmī’’ti. Thero ‘‘idha gilāno natthi, coro ayaṃ bhavissatī’’ti sallakkhetvā ‘‘imaṃ haratū’’ti attano veribhikkhussa pattaṃ nīharitvā adāsi, dvinnampi uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Veribhikkhussa patto’’ti saññāya aññassa pattaṃ uddharantepi eseva nayo. Sace pana ‘‘verissāya’’nti saññāya corasseva pattaṃ uddharitvā deti, vuttanayeneva therassa pārājikaṃ, corassa dukkaṭaṃ. Atha ‘‘verissāya’’nti maññamāno attano pattaṃ deti, vuttanayeneva ubhinnampi dukkaṭaṃ.
有一位大长老对作为侍者的年轻比丘说:“拿上钵和袈裟,我们去某某村乞食。”年轻比丘拿上后,跟在长老身后走着,生起了盗心。如果他把头上的负担移到肩上,不犯波罗夷。为什么?因为是受命而拿的。但如果他离开道路进入森林,就要按所走的步数来判罪。如果他转身朝寺院方向逃跑,进入寺院后继续走,越过近行地时就犯波罗夷。或者,他从大长老换下衣的地方朝村子方向逃跑,越过村的近行地时就犯波罗夷。如果两人都乞食完毕,不管是已经吃了还是拿了食物,然后出来,长老又对他说:“拿上钵和袈裟,我们回寺院去。”这时,如果他像前面那样以盗心把头上的负担移到肩上,衣钵暂时还在守护中。他进入森林,就要按步数判罪。他转身只朝村子方向逃跑,越过村的近行地时就犯波罗夷。如果他先朝寺院方向逃跑,在寺院里没站住、没坐下,以尚未止息的盗心继续走,越过近行地时就犯波罗夷。但如果是未经教令而自己拿取的,那么即使只是把头上的负担移到肩上等,也犯波罗夷。其余情形与前面相同。巴利
Eko mahāthero upaṭṭhākaṃ daharabhikkhuṃ ‘‘pattacīvaraṃ gaṇha, asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya carissāmā’’ti āha. Daharo gahetvā therassa pacchato pacchato gacchanto theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā sace sīse bhāraṃ khandhe karoti, pārājikaṃ natthi. Kasmā? Āṇattiyā gahitattā. Sace pana maggato okkamma aṭaviṃ pavisati, padavārena kāretabbo. Atha nivattitvā vihārābhimukho palāyitvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā gacchati, upacārātikkame pārājikaṃ. Athāpi mahātherassa nivāsanaparivattanaṭṭhānato gāmābhimukho palāyati, gāmūpacārātikkame pārājikaṃ. Yadi pana ubhopi piṇḍāya caritvā bhuñjitvā vā gahetvā vā nikkhamanti, thero ca punapi taṃ vadati – ‘‘pattacīvaraṃ gaṇha, vihāraṃ gamissāmā’’ti. Tatra ce so purimanayeneva theyyacittena sīse bhāraṃ khandhe karoti, rakkhati tāva. Aṭaviṃ pavisati, padavārena kāretabbo. Nivattitvā gāmābhimukho eva palāyati, gāmūpacārātikkame pārājikaṃ. Purato vihārābhimukho palāyitvā vihāre aṭṭhatvā anisīditvā avūpasanteneva theyyacittena gacchati, upacārātikkame pārājikaṃ. Yo pana anāṇatto gaṇhāti, tassa sīse bhāraṃ khandhe karaṇādīsupi pārājikaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
如果有人被吩咐说“你去某个精舍,把衣洗好、染好再回来”,他答应“好”,拿了衣就走,那么他在半路上生起盗心,把头上顶的东西移到肩上等等,不犯波罗夷。如果离开道路,就按走过的步数来判罪。到了那座精舍,住在那里,以盗心受用、把它消耗掉,或者盗贼把它偷走,这不算“取走”,但构成应赔偿的物债。从那里出来返回时,也是同样的判定。巴利
Yo pana ‘‘asukaṃ nāma vihāraṃ gantvā cīvaraṃ dhovitvā rajitvā vā ehī’’ti vutto ‘‘sādhū’’ti gahetvā gacchati, tassapi antarāmagge theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā sīse bhāraṃ khandhe karaṇādīsu pārājikaṃ natthi. Maggā okkamane padavārena kāretabbo. Taṃ vihāraṃ gantvā tattheva vasanto theyyacittena paribhuñjanto jīrāpeti, corā vā tassa taṃ haranti, avahāro natthi, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. Tato nikkhamitvā āgacchatopi eseva nayo.
如果有人没有受到长老指示,或者长老作出暗示,而是自己察觉到衣已经脏了,就说:“尊者,请把衣给我;我去某个村子,染色后带回来。”然后拿了衣就走。他在半路上生起盗心,把头上的负担移到肩上等等,就犯波罗夷。为什么?因为这是未经指示而拿的。即使他离开道路,或者折返回到原来的精舍,或者越过精舍界,也同样按上面所说的道理犯波罗夷。到了那里,染好色再回来时,如果生起盗心,道理也一样。不过,如果他到了所去之处,或者在途中,或者在精舍,或者回到原来的精舍后,住在一边,没有越过近行界,以盗心使用而把衣穿坏,或者盗贼把衣抢走,或者以任何方式丢失,那就属于赔偿物。如果越过近行界,就犯波罗夷。巴利
Yo pana anāṇatto therena nimitte vā kate sayameva vā kiliṭṭhaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘detha, bhante, cīvaraṃ; asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gantvā rajitvā āharissāmī’’ti gahetvā gacchati; tassa antarāmagge theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā sīse bhāraṃ khandhe karaṇādīsu pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Anāṇattiyā gahitattā. Maggā okkamatopi paṭinivattitvā tameva vihāraṃ āgantvā vihārasīmaṃ atikkamatopi vuttanayeneva pārājikaṃ. Tattha gantvā rajitvā paccāgacchatopi theyyacitte uppanne eseva nayo. Sace pana yattha gato, tattha vā antarāmagge vihāre vā tameva vihāraṃ paccāgantvā tassa ekapasse vā upacārasīmaṃ anatikkamitvā vasanto theyyacittena paribhuñjanto jīrāpeti, corā vā tassa taṃ haranti, yathā vā tathā vā nassati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Upacārasīmaṃ atikkamato pana pārājikaṃ.
如果长老正在做标记时,有人说:“尊者,请给我,我染好色后带回来。”接着又问:“尊者,我去哪里染色?”长老对他说:“你想去哪里染色,就去那里染。”这种人就叫“已放行的使者”。即使他怀着盗心逃走,也不按不与取来判罪。但是,如果他怀着盗心逃走,或者拿去使用,或者用别的方式毁坏丢失,那就只是应当赔偿物品。比丘把某件资具托人带给另一位比丘,说:“请交给某寺的某位比丘。”当那个人对这件物品生起盗心时,在一切情形下的判定,都和前面所说“去某寺把衣洗了或染了再回来”这种情况相同。巴利
Yo pana therena nimitte kayiramāne ‘‘detha, bhante, ahaṃ rajitvā āharissāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kattha gantvā, bhante, rajāmī’’ti pucchati. Thero ca naṃ ‘‘yattha icchasi, tattha gantvā rajāhī’’ti vadati, ayaṃ ‘‘vissaṭṭhadūto’’ nāma. Theyyacittena palāyantopi na avahārena kāretabbo. Theyyacittena pana palāyatopi paribhogena vā aññathā vā nāsayatopi bhaṇḍadeyyameva hoti. Bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe kiñci parikkhāraṃ pahiṇati – ‘‘asukavihāre asukabhikkhussa dehī’’ti, tassa theyyacitte uppanne sabbaṭṭhānesu ‘‘asukaṃ nāma vihāraṃ gantvā cīvaraṃ dhovitvā rajitvā vā ehī’’ti ettha vuttasadiso vinicchayo.
另一位比丘想派一个人去,就做出一个暗示:“谁能拿着东西去呢?”如果其中有一个人说:“尊者,交给我吧,我拿着去。”他拿了就走,当他生起盗心时,在所有情形下的判定,都和前面所说的“尊者,请把衣给我,我去某个村子染好再带回来”那一段相同。长老为了做衣得到布料,寄放在护持者家里。这时他的弟子想拿走那块布,就到那里说:“听说那块布是给长老的,请交给我。”对方相信了他的话,近事男存放的布由近事女拿出来,或近事女存放的布由近事男或其他人拿出来交给他,这就是不与取,犯波罗夷。但如果长老的护持者们把自己的布存放在那里,心想“我们把这布给长老”。这时他的弟子想拿走那块布,就到那里说:“听说你们想给长老布,请把那块布给我。”他们相信了他的话,说:“尊者,我们本来打算供养后再给,喏,拿去吧。”因为物主已经交给他,所以不犯波罗夷;但因为是以不清净的心拿走的,犯恶作,而且这属于应当赔偿之物。巴利
Aparo bhikkhuṃ pahiṇitukāmo nimittaṃ karoti – ‘‘ko nu kho gahetvā gamissatī’’ti, tatra ce eko – ‘‘detha, bhante, ahaṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti gahetvā gacchati, tassa theyyacitte uppanne sabbaṭṭhānesu ‘‘detha, bhante, cīvaraṃ, asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gantvā rajitvā āharissāmī’’ti ettha vuttasadiso vinicchayo. Therena cīvaratthāya vatthaṃ labhitvā upaṭṭhākakule ṭhapitaṃ hoti. Athassa antevāsiko vatthaṃ haritukāmo tatra gantvā ‘‘taṃ kira vatthaṃ dethā’’ti therena pesito viya vadati; tassa vacanaṃ saddahitvā upāsakena ṭhapitaṃ upāsikā vā, upāsikāya ṭhapitaṃ upāsako vā añño vā, koci nīharitvā deti, uddhāreyevassa pārājikaṃ. Sace pana therassa upaṭṭhākehi ‘‘imaṃ therassa dassāmā’’ti attano vatthaṃ ṭhapitaṃ hoti. Athassa antevāsiko taṃ haritukāmo tattha gantvā ‘‘therassa kira vatthaṃ dātukāmattha, taṃ dethā’’ti vadati. Te cassa saddahitvā ‘‘mayaṃ, bhante, bhojetvā dassāmāti ṭhapayimha, handa gaṇhāhī’’ti denti. Sāmikehi dinnattā pārājikaṃ natthi, asuddhacittena pana gahitattā dukkaṭaṃ, bhaṇḍadeyyañca hoti.
一位比丘告诉另一位比丘后,就前往村里,说:“某某人会给我雨安居衣,你把它领来后先放着。”那位比丘说:“好。”他把那人给的那件高价衣,和自己得到的那件低价衣放在一起。那人回来后,不管是否知道自己的高价衣已经被领走,只要他说“把我的雨安居衣给我”,这位比丘就对他说:“你拿到了那件粗布衣,我的衣可是很贵的,两件都放在某某地方了,你进去拿吧。”那人进去拿了粗布衣,而另一个人拿了另一件,这就构成不与取,犯波罗夷。或者,他在自己的衣上写上那比丘的名字,在那比丘的衣上写上自己的名字,然后说:“去,念名字后拿走。”这里道理也一样。但如果他把自己和那人所得的衣放在一起,这样说:“你和我所得的这两件衣都放在内室里了,去,挑你想要的拿走吧。”那人因为惭愧,只拿了原住比丘得到的那件粗布衣,这时原住比丘拿剩下那件,就没有犯。客比丘在常住比丘们做衣时,把钵和衣放在旁边,心想“他们会帮我收好”,然后去洗澡或去别处。如果常住比丘们帮他收好,那就好;如果没有收好而丢了,他没有责任。即使他说“尊者,请把这个放好”然后离开,而那些人因为忙自己的事没有注意到,道理也一样。又或者,他们被请求“尊者,请把这个放好”时,回答“我们正忙”而拒绝,他却想“他们一定会放好的”,不当回事就走了,道理也一样。但如果他们被请求或没被请求,却说“我们会放好,你走吧”,那就必须收好。如果没有收好而丢了,他就有责任。为什么?因为已经接受了。巴利
Bhikkhu bhikkhussa vatvā gāmaṃ gacchati, ‘‘itthannāmo mama vassāvāsikaṃ dassati, taṃ gahetvā ṭhapeyyāsī’’ti. ‘‘Sādhū’’ti so bhikkhu tena dinnaṃ mahagghasāṭakaṃ attanā laddhena appagghasāṭakena saddhiṃ ṭhapetvā tena āgatena attano mahagghasāṭakassa laddhabhāvaṃ ñatvā vā añatvā vā ‘‘dehi me vassāvāsika’’nti vutto ‘‘tava thūlasāṭako laddho, mayhaṃ pana sāṭako mahaggho, dvepi asukasmiṃ nāma okāse ṭhapitā, pavisitvā gaṇhāhī’’ti vadati. Tena pavisitvā thūlasāṭake gahite itarassa itaraṃ gaṇhato uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Athāpi tassa sāṭake attano nāmaṃ attano ca sāṭake tassa nāmaṃ likhitvā ‘‘gaccha nāmaṃ vācetvā gaṇhāhī’’ti vadati, tatrāpi eseva nayo. Yo pana attanā ca tena ca laddhasāṭake ekato ṭhapetvā taṃ evaṃ vadati – ‘‘tayā ca mayā ca laddhasāṭakā dvepi antogabbhe ṭhapitā, gaccha yaṃ icchasi, taṃ vicinitvā gaṇhāhī’’ti. So ca lajjāya āvāsikena laddhaṃ thūlasāṭakameva gaṇheyya, tatrāvāsikassa vicinitvā gahitāvasesaṃ itaraṃ gaṇhato anāpatti. Āgantuko bhikkhu āvāsikānaṃ cīvarakammaṃ karontānaṃ samīpe pattacīvaraṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘ete saṅgopessantī’’ti maññamāno nhāyituṃ vā aññatra vā gacchati. Sace naṃ āvāsikā saṅgopenti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce, naṭṭhe gīvā na hoti. Sacepi so ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, ṭhapethā’’ti vatvā gacchati, itare ca sakiccappasutattā na jānanti, eseva nayo. Athāpi te ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, ṭhapethā’’ti vuttā ‘‘mayaṃ byāvaṭā’’ti paṭikkhipanti, itaro ca ‘‘avassaṃ ṭhapessantī’’ti anādiyitvā gacchati, eseva nayo. Sace pana tena yācitā vā ayācitā vā ‘‘mayaṃ ṭhapessāma, tvaṃ gacchā’’ti vadanti; taṃ saṅgopitabbaṃ. No ce saṅgopenti, naṭṭhe gīvā. Kasmā? Sampaṭicchitattā.
如果一位比丘担任库管,清晨就把比丘们的钵和衣从楼上搬下来,关上房门,也不通知他们,自己就去远处乞食了。如果那些钵和衣被贼偷走,责任就在他身上。但如果有人被比丘们叫住说:“尊者,请把钵和衣搬下来,该取筹了。”他先问:“人都到齐了吗?”回答:“是的,都到齐了。”他才把钵和衣拿出来放好,锁上库房门,交代说:“你们拿了钵和衣之后,把楼下的门关好再走。”然后才离开。这时,比丘们当中有一个懒惰的比丘,等大家都走了以后,才慢慢揉着眼睛爬起来,去水边洗脸。贼看到这个机会,就偷走了他的钵和衣,这算是偷得干净利落。库管没有责任。巴利
Yo bhikkhu bhaṇḍāgāriko hutvā paccūsasamaye eva bhikkhūnaṃ pattacīvarāni heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ oropetvā dvāraṃ apidahitvā tesampi anārocetvāva dūre bhikkhācāraṃ gacchati; tāni ce corā haranti, tasseva gīvā. Yo pana bhikkhūhi ‘‘oropetha, bhante, pattacīvarāni; kālo salākaggahaṇassā’’ti vutto ‘‘samāgatatthā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘āma, samāgatamhā’’ti vutte pattacīvarāni nīharitvā nikkhipitvā bhaṇḍāgāradvāraṃ bandhitvā ‘‘tumhe pattacīvarāni gahetvā heṭṭhāpāsādadvāraṃ paṭijaggitvā gaccheyyāthā’’ti vatvā gacchati. Tatra ceko alasajātiko bhikkhu bhikkhūsu gatesu pacchā akkhīni puñchanto uṭṭhahitvā udakaṭṭhānaṃ mukhadhovanatthaṃ gacchati, taṃ khaṇaṃ disvā corā tassa pattacīvaraṃ haranti, suhaṭaṃ. Bhaṇḍāgārikassa gīvā na hoti.
如果有人没通知库房管理员,就把自己的资具放在库房里,后来那资具丢了,管理员没有责任。但如果管理员看到了,认为“这放得不是地方”,就把它收起来另放,那丢了就是管理员的责任。如果放东西的比丘对管理员说:“尊者,我把某某资具放在这里了,请您留意。”管理员回答“好的”并接受了,后来他又觉得放得不对,把它挪到别处,那丢了还是管理员的责任。但如果管理员拒绝说“我不知道”,那就没有责任。如果有人是在管理员亲眼看着的时候放的,也没有让管理员答应保管,那丢了就只是丢了。如果管理员把它挪到别处,丢了就是管理员的责任。如果库房看管得很严实,僧团和佛塔的所有资具都放在那里,而管理员又笨又不机灵,打开门去听法或者去干别的事,盗贼趁这个空当偷走多少,全都算管理员的责任。如果管理员从库房出来,在外面经行,或者打开门让身体吹风凉快,或者就在那里坐着修沙门法,或者就在那里坐着忙别的事,或者因为大小便憋不住,而附近正好有方便的地方,他就出去一下,或者以其他任何方式疏忽大意,门开着,或者门本来就开着他就进去了,或者盗贼挖墙打洞进去,凡是因他疏忽而被盗贼拿走的,全都算他的责任。不过他们说,天热的时候打开窗户躺着是可以的。但如果因为大小便憋不住,而附近又没有方便的地方,只好去别处,这属于生病的情况,不算他的责任范围,所以没有责任。巴利
Sacepi koci bhaṇḍāgārikassa anārocetvāva bhaṇḍāgāre attano parikkhāraṃ ṭhapeti, tasmimpi naṭṭhe bhaṇḍāgārikassa gīvā na hoti. Sace pana bhaṇḍāgāriko taṃ disvā ‘‘aṭṭhāne ṭhapita’’nti gahetvā ṭhapeti, naṭṭhe tassa gīvā. Sacepi ṭhapitabhikkhunā ‘‘mayā, bhante, īdiso nāma parikkhāro ṭhapito, upadhāreyyāthā’’ti vutto ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, dunnikkhittaṃ vā maññamāno aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti, tasseva gīvā. ‘‘Nāhaṃ jānāmī’’ti paṭikkhipantassa pana natthi gīvā. Yopi tassa passantasseva ṭhapeti, bhaṇḍāgārikañca na sampaṭicchāpeti , naṭṭhaṃ sunaṭṭhameva. Sace taṃ bhaṇḍāgāriko aññatra ṭhapeti, naṭṭhe gīvā. Sace bhaṇḍāgāraṃ suguttaṃ, sabbo saṅghassa ca cetiyassa ca parikkhāro tattheva ṭhapīyati, bhaṇḍāgāriko ca bālo abyatto dvāraṃ vivaritvā dhammakathaṃ vā sotuṃ, aññaṃ vā kiñci kātuṃ katthaci gacchati, taṃ khaṇaṃ disvā yattakaṃ corā haranti, sabbaṃ tassa gīvā. Bhaṇḍāgārato nikkhamitvā bahi caṅkamantassa vā dvāraṃ vivaritvā sarīraṃ utuṃ gāhāpentassa vā tattheva samaṇadhammānuyogena nisinnassa vā tattheva nisīditvā kenaci kammena byāvaṭassa vā uccārapassāvapīḷitassāpi tato tattheva upacāre vijjamāne bahi gacchato vā aññena vā kenaci ākārena pamattassa sato dvāraṃ vivaritvā vā vivaṭameva pavisitvā vā sandhiṃ chinditvā vā yattakaṃ tassa pamādapaccayā corā haranti, sabbaṃ tasseva gīvā. Uṇhasamaye pana vātapānaṃ vivaritvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Uccārapīḷitassa pana tasmiṃ upacāre asati aññattha gacchantassa gilānapakkhe ṭhitattā avisayo; tasmā gīvā na hoti.
如果有人因为里面太热而难受,把门关好锁好之后走到外面,盗贼抓住他,说“把门打开”,那么直到第三次都不该打开。可是,如果那些盗贼举起斧头之类的东西说:“你要是不开门,我们就把你杀了,再破门把东西拿走。”这时心想:“我死了对僧团和住处都没有好处,住处也会被毁。”那就应该开门。这里也说,因为这不是他能力所及的事,所以他没有责任。如果有个外来的人把钥匙交出去,或者把门打开,盗贼拿走多少东西,全都算在那个人的责任上。如果僧团为了守护库房,装上了针锁和钥匙封印,交给管理员,管理员只是插上门闩就躺下,盗贼打开门拿走东西,那也全是管理员的责任。如果装上了针锁和钥匙封印之后躺下,盗贼来了说“开门”,那就应该按前面说的办法处理。如果这样防护好之后躺下,盗贼破墙、破屋顶,或者挖地道进来拿走东西,管理员没有责任。如果库房里还住着别的长老,门开着的时候,他们各自拿了自己的东西就走,管理员在他们走后没有看好门,如果那里有东西被偷,因为管理员是主管,责任还是管理员的。不过,长老们也应该帮忙。这是这里的规矩。巴利
Yo pana anto uṇhapīḷito dvāraṃ suguttaṃ katvā bahi nikkhamati, corā ca naṃ gahetvā ‘‘dvāraṃ vivarā’’ti vadanti, yāva tatiyaṃ na vivaritabbaṃ. Yadi pana te corā ‘‘sace na vivarasi, tañca māressāma, dvārañca bhinditvā parikkhāraṃ harissāmā’’ti pharasuādīni ukkhipanti. ‘‘Mayi ca mate saṅghassa ca senāsane vinaṭṭhe guṇo natthī’’ti vivarituṃ vaṭṭati. Idhāpi avisayattā gīvā natthīti vadanti. Sace koci āgantuko kuñcikaṃ vā deti, dvāraṃ vā vivarati, yattakaṃ corā haranti, sabbaṃ tassa gīvā. Saṅghena bhaṇḍāgāraguttatthāya sūciyantakañca kuñcikamuddikā ca yojetvā dinnā hoti, bhaṇḍāgāriko ghaṭikamattaṃ datvā nipajjati, corā vivaritvā parikkhāraṃ haranti, tasseva gīvā. Sūciyantakañca kuñcikamuddikañca yojetvā nipannaṃ panetaṃ sace corā āgantvā ‘‘vivarā’’ti vadanti, tattha purimanayeneva paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Evaṃ guttaṃ katvā nipanne pana sace bhittiṃ vā chadanaṃ vā bhinditvā umaṅgena vā pavisitvā haranti, na tassa gīvā. Sace bhaṇḍāgāre aññepi therā vasanti, vivaṭe dvāre attano attano parikkhāraṃ gahetvā gacchanti, bhaṇḍāgāriko tesu gatesu dvāraṃ na jaggati, sace tattha kiñci avaharīyati, bhaṇḍāgārikassa issaratāya bhaṇḍāgārikasseva gīvā. Therehi pana sahāyehi bhavitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tattha sāmīci.
如果库房管理员说:“你们就站在外面拿你们的资具,不要进来。”而他们当中有一位放逸的大长老,带着沙弥和侍者一起进了库房,又坐又躺,那么丢失多少物品,全都算在他头上。不过,库房管理员应当和其余长老互为帮手。如果库房管理员自己带着放逸的沙弥和侍者,在库房里又坐又躺,那里面丢失了什么,全都算在他头上。所以,库房管理员应当自己住在那里。其余的人则应当住在树下,不要住在库房里。巴利
Yadi bhaṇḍāgāriko ‘‘tumhe bahi ṭhatvāva tumhākaṃ parikkhāraṃ gaṇhatha, mā pavisitthā’’ti vadati, tesañca eko lolamahāthero sāmaṇerehi ceva upaṭṭhākehi ca saddhiṃ bhaṇḍāgāraṃ pavisitvā nisīdati ceva nipajjati ca, yattakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ nassati, sabbaṃ tassa gīvā. Bhaṇḍāgārikena pana avasesattherehi ca sahāyehi bhavitabbaṃ. Atha bhaṇḍāgārikova lolasāmaṇere ca upaṭṭhāke ca gahetvā bhaṇḍāgāre nisīdati ceva nipajjati ca, yaṃ tattha nassati, sabbaṃ tasseva gīvā. Tasmā bhaṇḍāgārikeneva tattha vasitabbaṃ. Avasesehi appeva rukkhamūle vasitabbaṃ, na ca bhaṇḍāgāreti.
如果比丘们把资具存放在各自同伙比丘的住处里,资具丢失时,由存放的那个人自己负责;其他同伴比丘则应当帮忙。如果僧团就在库房管理员的住处发放粥饭,而他却去村里托钵,东西丢了也由他自己负责。为了看管多余衣物而住在寺院里的守护者,明明已经能得到粥饭或配给,却还出去托钵,在此期间那里丢了任何东西,全都由他负责。不仅如此,就像库房管理员一样,凡是因为他疏忽而丢失的东西,全都由他负责。巴利
Ye pana attano attano sabhāgabhikkhūnaṃ vasanagabbhesu parikkhāraṃ ṭhapenti, parikkhāre naṭṭhe yehi ṭhapito, tesaṃyeva gīvā. Itarehi pana sahāyehi bhavitabbaṃ. Yadi pana saṅgho bhaṇḍāgārikassa vihāreyeva yāgubhattaṃ dāpeti, so ca bhikkhācāratthāya gāmaṃ gacchati, naṭṭhaṃ tasseva gīvā. Bhikkhācāraṃ pavisantehi atirekacīvararakkhaṇatthāya ṭhapitavihāravārikassāpi yāgubhattaṃ vā nivāpaṃ vā labhamānasseva bhikkhācāraṃ gacchato yaṃ tattha nassati, sabbaṃ gīvā. Na kevalañca ettakameva, bhaṇḍāgārikassa viya yaṃ tassa pamādappaccayā nassati, sabbaṃ gīvā.
如果精舍很大,去别处守护的人,放在另一处的物品被人拿走,因为不在他的看管范围内,他不用负责。但在这样的精舍里,应该把资具放在中间大家都进出的地方,然后坐在那里守着。或者安排两三个精舍守护人。如果他们已经用心地到处看守,还是有东西丢了,他们不用负责。如果盗贼把精舍守护人绑起来,把要搬走的东西抢走,或者盗贼堵住了路,守护人只好改走别的路,东西因此被抢走,那也不用他们负责。如果精舍没有给守护人提供粥、饭或配给的食物,那么从他们应得的份额里多留出两三份粥筹,以及够他们吃的饭筹,是可以的。但不应该固定下来,因为人们会后悔,心想:“精舍守护人把我们那份饭给吃了。”所以应该轮流安排。如果同修比丘把筹食带来给他们,那很好;如果不带来,就应该让他们轮值后自己去领。如果精舍守护人已经拿到两三份粥筹、四五份饭筹,却还去托钵乞食,那就跟库房管理员一样,所有丢失的东西都算他的责任。如果僧团没有给精舍守护人提供饭或配给的食物,比丘们就应该自己承担精舍的轮值,各自照顾自己的依止者;轮到值时不能推辞,要像其他比丘那样去做。但是,对于没有同伴的比丘,或者只有一个同伴、又没有同修比丘能带饭来给他的比丘,不应该给他安排这种轮值。巴利
Sace vihāro mahā hoti, aññaṃ padesaṃ rakkhituṃ gacchantassa aññasmiṃ padese nikkhittaṃ haranti, avisayattā gīvā na hoti. Īdise pana vihāre vemajjhe sabbesaṃ osaraṇaṭṭhāne parikkhāre ṭhapetvā nisīditabbaṃ. Vihāravārikā vā dve tayo ṭhapetabbā. Sace tesaṃ appamattānaṃ ito cito ca rakkhataṃyeva kiñci nassati, gīvā na hoti. Vihāravārike bandhitvā haritabhaṇḍampi corānaṃ paṭipathaṃ gatesu aññena maggena haritabhaṇḍampi na tesaṃ gīvā. Sace vihāravārikānaṃ vihāre dātabbaṃ yāgubhattaṃ vā nivāpo vā na hoti, tehi pattabbalābhato atirekā dve tisso yāgusalākā, tesaṃ pahonakabhattasalākā ca ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Nibaddhaṃ katvā pana na ṭhapetabbā, manussā hi vippaṭisārino honti, ‘‘vihāravārikāyeva amhākaṃ bhattaṃ bhuñjantī’’ti. Tasmā parivattetvā ṭhapetabbā. Sace tesaṃ sabhāgā salākabhattāni āharitvā denti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ; no ce denti, vāraṃ gāhāpetvā nīharāpetabbāni. Sace vihāravāriko dve tisso yāgusalākā, cattāri pañca salākabhattāni ca labhamānova bhikkhācāraṃ gacchati, bhaṇḍāgārikassa viya sabbaṃ naṭṭhaṃ gīvā hoti. Sace saṅghassa vihārapālānaṃ dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vā nivāpo vā natthi, bhikkhū vihāravāraṃ gahetvā attano attano nissitake jaggenti, sampattavāraṃ aggahetuṃ na labhanti, yathā aññe bhikkhū karonti, tatheva kātabbaṃ. Bhikkhūhi pana asahāyakassa vā attadutiyassa vā yassa sabhāgo bhikkhu bhattaṃ ānetvā dātā natthi, evarūpassa vāro na pāpetabbo.
如果是为了经营寺院的日常事务而安排人住在精舍里,那么依靠这份事务生活的人就应该留下来承担。不靠这个生活的人,就不应该让他轮值。如果是为了守护果实而安排比丘住在精舍里,那么他们守护、看管之后,按果实的轮次分来吃。吃这些果实的人就应该留下来承担,不依靠这个生活的人就不应该让他轮值。如果是为了守护住所、床、椅和铺盖而安排人,那么住在寺院里的人就应该留下来承担。但露地住的人或树下住的人,不应该让他轮值。巴利
Yampi pākavattatthāya vihāre ṭhapenti, taṃ gahetvā upajīvantena ṭhātabbaṃ. Yo taṃ na upajīvati , so vāraṃ na gāhāpetabbo. Phalāphalatthāyapi vihāre bhikkhuṃ ṭhapenti, jaggitvā gopetvā phalavārena bhājetvā khādanti. Yo tāni khādati, tena ṭhātabbaṃ. Anupajīvanto na gāhāpetabbo. Senāsanamañcapīṭhapaccattharaṇarakkhaṇatthāyapi ṭhapenti, āvāse vasantena ṭhātabbaṃ. Abbhokāsiko pana rukkhamūliko vā na gāhāpetabbo.
有一位新学比丘,虽然出家不久,却广学多闻,能为许多人教导法义、解答疑问、阐释巴利经文、说法开示,还能承担僧团的事务。这样的人即使享用利养、住在寺院里,也不应该安排他轮值。他们说:应当知道这是特殊的人才。巴利
Eko navako hoti, bahussuto pana bahūnaṃ dhammaṃ vāceti, paripucchaṃ deti, pāḷiṃ vaṇṇeti, dhammakathaṃ katheti, saṅghassa bhāraṃ nittharati, ayaṃ lābhaṃ paribhuñjantopi āvāse vasantopi vāraṃ na gāhetabbo. ‘‘Purisaviseso nāma ñātabbo’’ti vadanti.
对于守护布萨堂和佛像殿的人,则应当每天供给双份的粥饭,每年供给一纳利米、三衣,以及价值十或二十摩沙迦的如法物品。如果他正在领取这些物品时,因为疏忽而在那里丢失了什么,全部由他负责赔偿。但如果是被捆绑后遭到强行抢夺的,就不由他负责。在这种情况下,用佛塔的财物或僧团的财物来守护佛塔的财物,是可以的。用佛塔的财物来守护僧团的财物,则不可以。但如果僧团的财物和佛塔的财物放在一起,那么在守护佛塔财物时,僧团的财物也一并得到了守护,这样是可以的。即使按半月轮值的方式守护布萨堂等地方,如果因为疏忽而丢失了物品,仍然由他负责赔偿。巴利
Uposathāgārapaṭimāgharajaggakassa pana diguṇaṃ yāgubhattaṃ devasikaṃ taṇḍulanāḷi saṃvacchare ticīvaraṃ, dasavīsagghanakaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍañca dātabbaṃ. Sace pana tassa taṃ labhamānasseva pamādena tattha kiñci nassati, sabbaṃ gīvā. Bandhitvā balakkārena acchinnaṃ pana na gīvā. Tattha cetiyassa vā saṅghassa vā santakena cetiyassa santakaṃ rakkhāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Cetiyassa santakena saṅghassa santakaṃ rakkhāpetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana cetiyassa santakena saddhiṃ saṅghassa santakaṃ ṭhapitaṃ hoti, taṃ cetiyasantake rakkhāpite rakkhitameva hotīti evaṃ vaṭṭati. Pakkhavārena uposathāgārādīni rakkhatopi pamādavasena naṭṭhaṃ gīvāyevāti.
关于破坏关税的讨论巴利
Suṅkaghātakathā
113 113. “破坏关税”的意思是,在那里破坏关税,所以叫“关税破坏”;这是关税处的别名。因为人们把该交税的物品不交税就带出去时,就是在损害、毁坏国王的关税,所以称为“关税破坏”。“进入其中”,就是进入国王在山谷等处划定界限后设立的关税处。“国王应得之物”,指属于国王的物品;凡是应当向国王缴纳价值五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦关税的物品,就是这国王应得之物。也有“国王所爱”的读法,意思相同。“以盗心”,就是生起“我不给国王交关税”的盗心后,触碰那件物品,犯恶作。从放置处拿起来放进袋子里,或者在隐蔽处把它绑在大腿上,犯土喇咤亚。因为关税处已经划定界限,所以不算“移离原处”。当第二只脚越过关税处的界限时,就犯波罗夷。巴利
113. Suṅkaṃ tato hanantīti suṅkaghātaṃ; suṅkaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tañhi yasmā tato suṅkārahaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ suṅkaṃ adatvā nīharantā rañño suṅkaṃ hananti vināsenti, tasmā suṅkaghātanti vuttaṃ. Tatra pavisitvāti tatra pabbatakhaṇḍādīsu raññā paricchedaṃ katvā ṭhapite suṅkaṭṭhāne pavisitvā. Rājaggaṃ bhaṇḍanti rājārahaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ; yato rañño pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ suṅkaṃ dātabbaṃ hoti, taṃ bhaṇḍanti attho. Rājakantipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Theyyacittoti ‘‘ito rañño suṅkaṃ na dassāmī’’ti theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Ṭhapitaṭṭhānato gahetvā thavikāya vā pakkhipati, paṭicchannaṭṭhāne vā ūrunā saddhiṃ bandhati, thullaccayaṃ. Suṅkaṭṭhānena paricchinnattā ṭhānācāvanaṃ na hoti. Suṅkaṭṭhānaparicchedaṃ dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ.
把该物品扔到关税处外面去:他看到国王的差役正在忙别的事,就站在关税处里面,把物品往外扔。如果那物品必定会落到外面,那么它一离开手的刹那,就犯波罗夷。如果那物品被树或树桩挡住,或者被强风吹起后又落回关税处里面,那就不犯。再拿起来扔出去,按照前面所说的方式,犯波罗夷。物品落地后滚动着又进入关税处里面,仍然是波罗夷。不过在《库伦达疏略》中说:“如果落到外面后停住,再滚动进入,波罗夷。如果还没停住就直接滚动进入,不犯。”巴利
Bahisuṅkaghātaṃ pātetīti rājapurisānaṃ aññavihitabhāvaṃ passitvā anto ṭhitova bahi patanatthāya khipati. Tañce avassaṃ patanakaṃ, hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Tañce rukkhe vā khāṇumhi vā paṭihataṃ balavavātavegukkhittaṃ vā hutvā puna antoyeva patati, rakkhati. Puna gaṇhitvā khipati, pubbe vuttanayeneva pārājikaṃ. Bhūmiyaṃ patitvā vaṭṭantaṃ puna anto pavisati, pārājikameva. Kurundīsaṅkhepaṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘sace bahi patitaṃ ṭhatvā vaṭṭantaṃ pavisati, pārājikaṃ. Sace atiṭṭhamānaṃyeva vaṭṭitvā pavisati rakkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
站在关税处内,用手、脚或棍棒让物品滚动,或者让别人让它滚动,如果物品没停下来就滚了出去,犯波罗夷。站在关税处内,看着物品往外走,心想“它会滚出去”或者“别人会让它滚出去”,之后把物品放在关税处内,后来物品自己滚动或被别人滚动而到了外面,仍然不算犯。但如果是以清净心放置的,而物品那样出去了,那就没什么可说的。把两个包裹绑在一起,放在关税处边界上,即使外面那个包裹的关税只值一足价,但因为和内包裹绑在一起,内包裹仍然受到保护。但如果翻转过来,把里面那个放到外面,犯波罗夷。绑在扁担上放置的,也是同样的道理。但如果没有绑在一起,只是放在扁担末端,犯波罗夷。巴利
Anto ṭhatvā hatthena vā pādena vā yaṭṭhiyā vā vaṭṭeti, aññena vā vaṭṭāpeti, sace aṭṭhatvā vaṭṭamānaṃ gataṃ, pārājikaṃ. Anto ṭhatvā bahi gacchantaṃ rakkhati, ‘‘vaṭṭitvā gamissatī’’ti vā ‘‘añño naṃ vaṭṭessatī’’ti vā anto ṭhapitaṃ pacchā sayaṃ vā vaṭṭamānaṃ aññena vā vaṭṭitaṃ bahi gacchati, rakkhatiyeva. Suddhacittena ṭhapite pana tathā gacchante vattabbameva natthi. Dve puṭake ekābaddhe katvā suṅkaṭṭhānasīmantare ṭhapeti, kiñcāpi bahipuṭake suṅkaṃ pādaṃ agghati, tena saddhiṃ ekābaddhatāya pana anto puṭako rakkhati. Sace pana parivattetvā abbhantarimaṃ bahi ṭhapeti, pārājikaṃ. Kājepi ekabaddhaṃ katvā ṭhapite eseva nayo. Sace pana abandhitvā kājakoṭiyaṃ ṭhapitamattameva hoti, pārājikaṃ.
在行驶的车乘上,或在马背等处放置物品时,心想“之后会拿出去”,即使已经拿出去了,也不构成偷盗,也不构成应缴关税之罪。为什么?因为规定是“让进入这里的人缴纳关税”,而这个物品位于关税处之外,也不是他带出去的,所以既不构成应缴关税之罪,也不构成波罗夷。巴利
Gacchante yāne vā assapiṭṭhiādīsu vā ṭhapeti ‘‘bahi nīharissatī’’ti nīhaṭepi avahāro natthi, bhaṇḍadeyyampi na hoti. Kasmā? ‘‘Atra paviṭṭhassa suṅkaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti vuttattā idañca suṅkaṭṭhānassa bahi ṭhitaṃ, na ca tena nītaṃ, tasmā neva bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ na pārājikaṃ.
车乘等物停放好后,如果那人没有动手,车乘等自己走过去了,即使他有偷盗的心,也不构成不与取。但如果他让人赶着车乘等越过了界限,或者因为大象等受过训练,他站在前面喊“来啊”,一旦越过界限,就犯波罗夷。在羊毛戒那条里,这种情况是让别人拿走,不算犯;但在这里,就犯波罗夷。在那里,如果不知情地把东西放进别人的车乘或物品里,让它越过三由旬,那些东西就变成舍堕。在这里,则不算犯。巴利
Ṭhitayānādīsu ṭhapite vinā tassa payogaṃ gatesu theyyacittepi sati nevatthi avahāro. Yadi pana ṭhapetvā yānādīni pājento atikkāmeti , hatthisuttādīsu vā kataparicayattā purato ṭhatvā ‘‘ehi, re’’ti pakkosati, sīmātikkame pārājikaṃ. Eḷakalomasikkhāpade imasmiṃ ṭhāne aññaṃ harāpeti, anāpatti, idha pārājikaṃ. Tatra aññassa yāne vā bhaṇḍe vā ajānantassa pakkhipitvā tiyojanaṃ atikkāmeti, nissaggiyāni hontīti pācittiyaṃ. Idha anāpatti.
在关税处,必须交了关税才能过去。有一个人心里盘算:“如果他们说‘交关税’,我就交;如果不说,我就走。”税吏看见他,一个说:“这个比丘要走,抓住他,收他的关税。”另一个说:“出家人交什么关税,让他走吧。”这就等于获得了许可,可以通行。但如果有人说:“比丘不交关税不能过去,近事男们,抓住他。”另一个人又说:“向比丘收关税,岂不是要拿走他的钵和袈裟?何必呢,让他走吧。”这样也同样是获得了许可。即使税吏们在睡觉,或者在赌博,或者去了别的地方,而这位比丘喊“税吏在哪里”也找不到人,同样算是获得了许可。即使到了关税处,比丘因为别的事分心,或者在思考什么,或者在诵经,或者在专注修行,或者被盗贼、大象、狮子、老虎等突然冲出来追赶,或者看见大乌云涌起想跑进前面的厅堂,因而越过了那个地方,也仍然算是获得了许可。巴利
Suṅkaṭṭhāne suṅkaṃ datvāva gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Eko ābhogaṃ katvā gacchati ‘‘sace ‘suṅkaṃ dehī’ti vakkhanti, dassāmi; no ce vakkhanti, gamissāmī’’ti. Taṃ disvā eko suṅkiko ‘‘eso bhikkhu gacchati, gaṇhatha naṃ suṅka’’nti vadati, aparo ‘‘kuto pabbajitassa suṅkaṃ, gacchatū’’ti vadati, laddhakappaṃ hoti, gantabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhūnaṃ suṅkaṃ adatvā gantuṃ na vaṭṭati, gaṇha upāsakā’’ti vutte pana ‘‘bhikkhussa suṅkaṃ gaṇhantehi pattacīvaraṃ gahetabbaṃ bhavissati, kiṃ tena, gacchatū’’ti vuttepi laddhakappameva. Sacepi suṅkikā niddāyanti vā, jūtaṃ vā kīḷanti, yattha katthaci vā gatā, ayañca ‘‘kuhiṃ suṅkikā’’ti pakkositvāpi na passati, laddhakappameva. Sacepi suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ patvā aññavihito, kiñci cintento vā sajjhāyanto vā manasikāraṃ anuyuñjanto vā corahatthisīhabyagghādīhi sahasā vuṭṭhāya samanubaddho vā, mahāmeghaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ disvā purato sālaṃ pavisitukāmo vā hutvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ atikkamati, laddhakappameva.
说到逃避关税,这里的意思是:即使已经走进关卡附近的范围才躲开,也仍然算是偷漏税。巴利
Suṅkaṃpariharatīti ettha upacāraṃ okkamitvā kiñcāpi pariharati, avahāroyevāti
《库伦达义注》里是这样说的。而《大义注》里则说:“‘国王的差役会骚扰逃避的人’,这只是显示过患而已;进入近行范围后逃避的,犯恶作;没有进入近行范围就逃避的,无犯。”这和巴利圣典是相符的。在这里,近行范围应当以两掷土块的距离来界定。巴利
Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘‘pariharantaṃ rājapurisā viheṭhentī’ti kevalaṃ ādīnavaṃ dassetvā upacāraṃ okkamitvā pariharato dukkaṭaṃ, anokkamitvā pariharato anāpattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ pāḷiyā sameti. Ettha dvīhi leḍḍupātehi upacāro paricchinditabboti.
114 接着,为了明确指出足以构成偷盗的人,世尊说“人是有情”。带走一个自由人,也不算偷盗。即使这个自由人是父母安置的,或者自己把自己抵押出去,换取了五十或六十钱,带走他仍然不算偷盗;不过那笔钱会在原地增值。但如果带走的是家生奴、财买奴、战俘奴这类奴隶,那就构成偷盗。正是针对这一点才说:“有情,指的就是人。”这里应当知道:家中女奴所生的奴隶叫家生奴,用钱财买来的叫财买奴,从别国抢来、被迫为奴的叫战俘奴。对这样的有情生起“我要把他带走”的念头而触碰他,犯恶作。抓住手或脚把他抬起来,使他挣扎,犯土喇咤亚。抬起来后想逃跑,哪怕只移动了头发尖那么一点距离,就犯波罗夷。如果抓住头发或手拖拽,则按脚步数来判定。巴利
114. Ito parasmiṃ ekaṃsena avahārappahonakapāṇaṃ dassento ‘‘manussapāṇo’’ti āha. Tampi bhujissaṃ harantassa avahāro natthi. Yopi bhujisso mātarā vā pitarā vā āṭhapito hoti, attanā vā attano upari katvā paññāsaṃ vā saṭṭhiṃ vā aggahesi, tampi harantassa avahāro natthi; dhanaṃ pana gataṭṭhāne vaḍḍhati. Antojātaka-dhanakkīta-karamarānītappabhedaṃ pana dāsaṃyeva harantassa avahāro hoti. Tameva hi sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘pāṇo nāma manussapāṇo vuccatī’’ti. Ettha ca gehadāsiyā kucchimhi dāsassa jāto antojātako, dhanena kīto dhanakkīto, paradesato paharitvā ānetvā dāsabyaṃ upagamito karamarānītoti veditabbo. Evarūpaṃ pāṇaṃ ‘‘harissāmī’’ti āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Hatthe vā pāde vā gahetvā ukkhipanto phandāpeti, thullaccayaṃ. Ukkhipitvā palāyitukāmo kesaggamattampi ṭhitaṭṭhānato atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Kesesu vā hatthesu vā gahetvā kaḍḍhati, padavārena kāretabbo.
说“我要带他徒步走”来威胁或殴打对方,或者说“你从这里走”,对方按所说的方向走去,在迈出第二步时就犯波罗夷。即使只是和那人同心赞同的人,也都在同一刹那犯波罗夷。比丘看见奴隶后,不管有没有问他苦乐,只要说“去吧,逃走后好好过日子”,如果那人逃走了,在第二步时就犯波罗夷。那人来到另一位比丘跟前,那位比丘说“逃吧”,如果有一百位比丘依次对来到自己跟前的人这样说,他们全都犯波罗夷。但如果是对正在飞快逃跑的人说“逃吧,趁主人还没抓住你”,则不犯波罗夷。然而如果是对慢慢走的人说,而那人因为他的话而快跑起来,就犯波罗夷。如果看见那人已经逃到别的村子或别的地方之后,又让他从那里逃走,也同样犯波罗夷。巴利
Padasānessāmīti tajjento vā paharanto vā ‘‘ito gacchāhī’’ti vadati, tena vuttadisābhāgaṃ gacchantassa dutiyapadavārena pārājikaṃ. Yepi tena saddhiṃ ekacchandā honti, sabbesaṃ ekakkhaṇe pārājikaṃ. Bhikkhu dāsaṃ disvā sukhadukkhaṃ pucchitvā vā apucchitvā vā ‘‘gaccha, palāyitvā sukhaṃ jīvā’’ti vadati, so ce palāyati, dutiyapadavāre pārājikaṃ. Taṃ attano samīpaṃ āgataṃ añño ‘‘palāyā’’ti vadati, sace bhikkhusataṃ paṭipāṭiyā attano samīpamāgataṃ vadati, sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Yo pana vegasā palāyantaṃyeva ‘‘palāya, yāva taṃ sāmikā na gaṇhantī’’ti bhaṇati, anāpatti pārājikassa. Sace pana saṇikaṃ gacchantaṃ bhaṇati, so ca tassa vacanena sīghaṃ gacchati, pārājikaṃ. Palāyitvā aññaṃ gāmaṃ vā desaṃ vā gataṃ disvā tatopi palāpentassa pārājikameva.
名叫“不与取”的情况,有时也能通过某种方式脱罪。比如有人这样说:“你在这里做什么?巴利
Adinnādānaṃ nāma pariyāyena muccati. Yo hi evaṃ vadati – ‘‘tvaṃ idha kiṃ karosi,
如果对他说“你为什么不逃走呢”,或者“你为什么不去某个地方过安乐的生活呢”,或者“奴仆们逃到某个地方后过着安乐的生活”,他听了这话就逃走,这不构成偷盗。如果有人对他说“我们要去某个地方,到了那里的人过着安乐的生活,和我们一起走的人在路上也不会因为干粮等而劳累”,然后带着自愿跟自己一起来的人上路,这是以赶路的方式而行,不是出于偷盗心,这也不构成偷盗。在路上遇到盗贼出现时,即使他说“喂!盗贼来了,快逃,快来,走吧”,因为这是为了帮人脱离盗贼之难而说的,所以不说是偷盗。巴利
Kiṃ te palāyituṃ na vaṭṭatīti vā, kiṃ katthaci gantvā sukhaṃ jīvituṃ na vaṭṭatīti vā, dāsadāsiyo palāyitvā amukaṃ nāma padesaṃ gantvā sukhaṃ jīvantī’’ti vā, so ca tassa vacanaṃ sutvā palāyati, avahāro natthi. Yopi ‘‘mayaṃ amukaṃ nāma padesaṃ gacchāma, tatrāgatā sukhaṃ jīvanti, amhehi ca saddhiṃ gacchantānaṃ antarāmaggepi pātheyyādīhi kilamatho natthī’’ti vatvā sukhaṃ attanā saddhiṃ āgacchantaṃ gahetvā gacchati maggagamanavasena, na theyyacittena; nevatthi avahāro. Antarāmagge ca coresu uṭṭhitesu ‘‘are! Corā uṭṭhitā, vegena palāya, ehi yāhī’’ti vadantassāpi corantarāya mocanatthāya vuttattā avahāraṃ na vadantīti.
在无足者当中,所谓“蛇”,是指有主人的蛇,也就是被耍蛇人之类捉住的蛇;他们戏弄它……巴利
Apadesu ahi nāma sassāmiko ahituṇḍikādīhi gahitasappo; yaṃ kīḷāpentā
他们就算只得到半帕达、一帕达或一个钱币,放蛇时也一定要拿了金银才肯放。他们走到某位比丘坐的地方,把蛇笼放下,然后就在那里睡觉,或者去别处。如果那位比丘以偷盗的心碰那个笼子,犯恶作;如果让它晃动,犯土喇咤亚;如果把它从原位挪开,犯波罗夷。如果打开笼子后抓住蛇的脖子,犯恶作;如果把蛇提起来,犯土喇咤亚;如果把蛇竖直提起,当蛇尾从笼底脱出哪怕只有一毫毛尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。如果摩擦着往外拖,当蛇尾从笼口脱出时,就犯波罗夷。如果把笼口稍微打开,或者打一下,喊一声“喂,出来!”让蛇出来,犯波罗夷。同样地,打开笼口后,学蛙叫或鼠叫,或者撒谷粒,然后叫它的名字,或者弹指,这样让蛇出来,也犯波罗夷。即使不打开笼口而做这些动作,饥饿的蛇用头撞开笼盖,弄出一个口子逃走了,也一样犯波罗夷。但如果笼口开着,蛇自己出来逃走了,那就只是赔偿物品。又或者,不管打开还是没打开笼口,只是学蛙叫、鼠叫或撒谷粒,而不叫它的名字,也不弹指,蛇因为饿了,想着“我要吃蛙之类的”而出来逃走,那也只是赔偿物品。鱼在这里,只是因为“无足”这个归类才被带进来说的。这里应当说的内容,已经在水的部分说过了。巴利
Aḍḍhampi pādampi kahāpaṇampi labhanti, muñcantāpi hiraññaṃ vā suvaṇṇaṃ vā gahetvāva muñcanti. Te kassaci bhikkhuno nisinnokāsaṃ gantvā sappakaraṇḍaṃ ṭhapetvā niddāyanti vā, katthaci vā gacchanti, tatra ce so bhikkhu theyyacittena taṃ karaṇḍaṃ āmasati, dukkaṭaṃ. Phandāpeti, thullaccayaṃ. Ṭhānā cāveti, pārājikaṃ. Sace pana karaṇḍakaṃ ugghāṭetvā sappaṃ gīvāya gaṇhāti, dukkaṭaṃ. Uddharati, thullaccayaṃ. Ujukaṃ katvā uddharantassa karaṇḍatalato sappassa naṅguṭṭhe kesaggamatte mutte pārājikaṃ. Ghaṃsitvā kaḍḍhantassa naṅguṭṭhe mukhavaṭṭito muttamatte pārājikaṃ . Karaṇḍamukhaṃ īsakaṃ vivaritvā pahāraṃ vā datvā ‘‘ehi, re’’ti nāmena pakkositvā nikkhāmeti, pārājikaṃ . Tatheva vivaritvā maṇḍūkasaddaṃ vā mūsikasaddaṃ vā lājāvikiraṇaṃ vā katvā nāmena pakkosati, accharaṃ vā paharati, evaṃ nikkhantepi pārājikaṃ. Mukhaṃ avivaritvāpi evaṃ kate chāto sappo sīsena karaṇḍapuṭaṃ āhacca okāsaṃ katvā palāyati, pārājikameva. Sace pana mukhe vivarite sayameva sappo nikkhamitvā palāyati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Athāpi mukhaṃ vivaritvā vā avivaritvā vā kevalaṃ maṇḍūkamūsikasaddaṃ lājāvikiraṇameva ca karoti, na nāmaṃ gahetvā pakkosati, na accharaṃ vā paharati, sappo ca chātattā ‘‘maṇḍūkādīni khādissāmī’’ti nikkhamitvā palāyati, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Maccho kevalaṃ idha apadaggahaṇena āgato. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ udakaṭṭhe vuttamevāti.
115 在“二足”这一项中,为了说明哪些可以被偷走,他说“人类和有翼类”。但天神不能被偷走。“有翼类”就是翅膀已经长出来的。它们有三种:毛翼、皮翼、骨翼。其中应当知道,孔雀、鸡等是毛翼,蝙蝠等是皮翼,蜜蜂等是骨翼。所有这些人类和有翼类,在这里只是通过“二足”这个统称被包含进来。至于这里应当说明的内容,已经按照讲说空中众生和生命众生时的同样方式说过了。巴利
115. Dvipadesu – ye avaharituṃ sakkā, te dassento ‘‘manussā pakkhajātā’’ti āha. Devatā pana avaharituṃ na sakkā. Pakkhā jātā etesanti pakkhajātā. Te lomapakkhā cammapakkhā aṭṭhipakkhāti tividhā. Tattha morakukkuṭādayo lomapakkhā, vagguliādayo cammapakkhā, bhamarādayo aṭṭhipakkhāti veditabbā. Te sabbepi manussā ca pakkhajātā ca kevalaṃ idha dvipadaggahaṇena āgatā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ ākāsaṭṭhe ca pāṇe ca vuttanayamevāti.
116 116. 关于四足类——“兽类”应当理解为:律藏中提到的其余一切四足种类。象等则是显而易见的。其中,以偷盗之心触碰象,犯恶作;令象动摇,犯偷兰遮。如果有大力士仗着力量骄慢,用头从幼小象崽的肚脐下方把它顶起来抓住,当它的四足和象鼻离开地面,哪怕只离一根毛尖那么一点,就犯波罗夷。不过,有的象被绑在象厩里,有的没绑就站着,有的站在内院中,有的站在王宫广场上。其中,在象厩里被绑住脖子放着的,脖子上的绑缚加上四足,共有五处。如果脖子和一足被铁链绑住,就有六处。如果脖子和两足被绑住,就有七处。根据这些来理解令象动摇和离开原处的情形。没被绑的,整个象厩就是它的处所。越过那里,就犯波罗夷。站在内院里的,整个内院就是它的处所。越过院门,就犯波罗夷。站在王宫广场上的,整个城市就是它的处所。越过城门,就犯波罗夷。站在城外的,它站的地方就是它的处所。把它带走时,按每一步来判定。躺卧的,只有一处。以偷盗之心让它站起来,它刚一站起来,就犯波罗夷。马也是同样的判定。不过,如果它四足都被绑住,就应当知道有八处。这个道理也适用于骆驼。巴利
116. Catuppadesu – pasukāti pāḷiyaṃ āgatāvasesā sabbā catuppadajātīti veditabbā. Hatthiādayo pākaṭāyeva. Tattha theyyacittena hatthiṃ āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ, phandāpentassa thullaccayaṃ. Yo pana mahābalo balamadena taruṇaṃ bhiṅkacchāpaṃ nābhimūle sīsena uccāretvā gaṇhanto cattāro pāde, soṇḍaṃ ca bhūmito kesaggamattampi moceti, pārājikaṃ. Hatthī pana koci hatthisālāyaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapito hoti, koci abaddhova tiṭṭhati, koci antovatthumhi tiṭṭhati, koci rājaṅgaṇe tiṭṭhati, tattha hatthisālāyaṃ gīvāya bandhitvā ṭhapitassa gīvābandhanañca cattāro ca pādāti pañca ṭhānāni honti. Gīvāya ca ekasmiñca pāde ayasaṅkhalikāya baddhassa cha ṭhānāni. Gīvāya ca dvīsu ca pādesu baddhassa satta ṭhānāni. Tesaṃ vasena phandāpanaṭhānācāvanāni veditabbāni. Abaddhassa sakalā hatthisālā ṭhānaṃ. Tato atikkamane, pārājikaṃ. Antovatthumhi ṭhitassa sakalaṃ antovatthumeva ṭhānaṃ. Tassa vatthudvārātikkamane pārājikaṃ. Rājaṅgaṇe ṭhitassa sakalanagaraṃ ṭhānaṃ. Tassa nagaradvārātikkamane pārājikaṃ. Bahinagare ṭhitassa ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ. Taṃ haranto padavārena kāretabbo. Nipannassa ekameva ṭhānaṃ. Taṃ theyyacittena uṭṭhāpentassa uṭṭhitamatte pārājikaṃ. Assepi ayameva vinicchayo. Sace pana so catūsu pādesu baddho hoti, aṭṭha ṭhānāni veditabbāni. Esa nayo oṭṭhepi.
有的牛被人拴在屋里,有的没拴就站着;有的被拴在牛栏里,有的没拴就站着。其中,被拴在屋里的牛,四个蹄子加上拴绑处,一共是五个位置;没拴的牛,整间屋子就是它的位置。被拴在牛栏里的牛,也是五个位置。没拴的牛,整个牛栏就是它的位置。如果让牛越过牛栏的门,就犯波罗夷。破开牛栏把牛牵走,让牛越过栏墙的缺口,也犯波罗夷。或者打开门、或者破开牛栏之后,自己站在外面喊牛的名字让它出来,犯波罗夷。用摇动树枝来招呼牛,也是同样的判定。如果不开门、不破栏,只是摇动树枝招呼,牛因为饥饿跳过牛栏跑出来,同样犯波罗夷。但如果门开着或者牛栏破了,牛自己走出来,那就只是赔偿财物的事。又或者不论开门没开门、破栏没破栏,只是摇动树枝却不招呼,牛因为饥饿或者走着或者跳着出来,那也只是赔偿财物的事。一头牛在村子中间,有的被拴着站着,有的卧着。站着的牛有五个位置,卧着的牛有两个位置;根据这些位置,应当知道令牛动摇和令牛离开原处的情形。巴利
Goṇopi koci gehe bandhitvā ṭhapito hoti. Koci abaddhova tiṭṭhati, koci pana vaje bandhitvā ṭhapito hoti, koci abaddhova tiṭṭhati. Tattha gehe bandhitvā ṭhapitassa cattāro pādā, bandhanañcāti pañca ṭhānāni; abaddhassa sakalaṃ gehaṃ. Vajepi baddhassa pañca ṭhānāni. Abaddhassa sakalo vajo. Taṃ vajadvāraṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Vajaṃ bhinditvā haranto khaṇḍadvāraṃ atikkāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Dvāraṃ vā vivaritvā vajaṃ vā bhinditvā bahi ṭhito nāmena pakkositvā nikkhāmeti, pārājikaṃ. Sākhābhaṅgaṃ dassetvā pakkosantassāpi eseva nayo. Dvāraṃ avivaritvā vajaṃ abhinditvā sākhābhaṅgaṃ cāletvā pakkosati, goṇo chātatāya vajaṃ laṅghetvā nikkhamati, pārājikameva. Sace pana dvāre vivarite vaje vā bhinne sayameva nikkhamati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Dvāraṃ vivaritvā vā avivaritvā vā vajampi bhinditvā vā abhinditvā vā kevalaṃ sākhābhaṅgaṃ cāleti, na pakkosati, goṇo chātatāya padasā vā laṅghetvā vā nikkhamati, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Eko majjhe gāme baddho ṭhito, eko nipanno. Ṭhitagoṇassa pañca ṭhānāni honti, nipannassa dve ṭhānāni; tesaṃ vasena phandāpanaṭhānācāvanāni veditabbāni.
如果有人不把卧着的牛扶起来,就地把它杀死,那就属于赔偿物品。但在围墙完好、设有村门的村子里,站着的牛以整个村子作为它的处所。在没有围墙的地方,无论是站着的还是走着的牛,只以它的脚所踩到的地方作为处所。对驴和其他畜生,也是同样的判定标准。巴利
Yo pana nipannaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvā tattheva ghāteti, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Suparikkhitte pana dvārayutte gāme ṭhitagoṇassa sakalagāmo ṭhānaṃ. Aparikkhitte ṭhitassa vā carantassa vā pādehi akkantaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ gadrabhapasukāsupi ayameva vinicchayoti.
117 117. 关于多足类:如果以一只百足虫(蜈蚣)就构成犯戒事,那么牵着它按脚逐条计算时,犯九十九个土喇咤亚罪,和一个波罗夷罪。其余部分依照已说的方式理解。巴利
117. Bahuppadesu – sace ekāya satapadiyā vatthu pūrati, taṃ padasā nentassa navanavuti thullaccayāni, ekaṃ pārājikaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
118 “Ocarati”就是潜入,意思是到处钻到里面去。“Ocaritvā”是观察、看清楚之后的意思。“Ācikkhati”就是把别人家里或寺院等处放得不好、没有妥善看管的物品,告诉另一个有能力去偷的人。两个人都犯波罗夷罪:对于肯定会被拿走的物品,潜入者在下指令的那一刻犯波罗夷罪,另一人在将物品移离原处时犯波罗夷罪,所以两人同样犯波罗夷罪。但如果有人用暗示的方式说:“屋里没有男人,东西就放在某个地方,没人好好看着,门也没关,只要过去就能拿走,难道就没有一个靠男人本事吃饭的人去把它拿来吗?”别人听了之后想“那我现在就去拿”,于是去把东西拿走了,那么拿走的人因为把物品从原处移出而犯波罗夷罪,说暗示话的人则无犯。因为他是通过暗示的方式,才从不与取这件事里脱开的。巴利
118. Ocaratīti ocarako, tattha tattha anto anupavisatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ocaritvāti sallakkhetvā, upadhāretvāti attho. Ācikkhatīti parakulesu vā vihārādīsu vā duṭṭhapitaṃ asaṃvihitārakkhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ aññassa corakammaṃ kātuṃ paṭibalassa āroceti. Āpatti ubhinnaṃ pārājikassāti avassaṃ hāriye bhaṇḍe ocarakassa āṇattikkhaṇe itarassa ṭhānācāvaneti evaṃ āpatti ubhinnaṃ pārājikassa. Yo pana ‘‘puriso gehe natthi, bhaṇḍaṃ asukasmiṃ nāma padese ṭhapitaṃ asaṃvihitārakkhaṃ, dvāraṃ asaṃvutaṃ, gatamatteneva sakkā harituṃ, natthi nāma koci purisakārūpajīvī, yo taṃ gantvā hareyyā’’tiādinā nayena pariyāyakathaṃ karoti, tañca sutvā añño ‘‘ahaṃ dāni harissāmī’’ti gantvā harati, tassa ṭhānācāvane pārājikaṃ, itarassa pana anāpatti. Pariyāyena hi adinnādānato muccatīti.
守护货物的人,就叫货物守护者。有人把货物运到他的住处,说“这是……”巴利
Oṇiṃ rakkhatīti oṇirakkho. Yo parena attano vasanaṭṭhāne ābhataṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘idaṃ
“尊者,请稍等片刻,等我办完这件事再回来。”被人这样嘱托后,他就守着,这就是这个词的意思。所以这样说:“所谓保管货物者,就是看护被运来的物品的人。”其中,保管货物的人大多不把捆好、挂起来放着的物品解开,而是从下面把袋子或包裹割开,拿走一点东西后,再把缝线等恢复成原来的样子。对于他怀着“我要这样拿”的念头去触碰等行为,应当知道有相应的罪。巴利
Tāva, bhante, muhuttaṃ oloketha, yāva ahaṃ idaṃ nāma kiccaṃ katvā āgacchāmī’’ti vutto rakkhati, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘oṇirakkho nāma āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento’’ti. Tattha oṇirakkho yebhuyyena bandhitvā laggetvā ṭhapitabhaṇḍaṃ amocetvāva heṭṭhā pasibbakaṃ vā puṭakaṃ vā chinditvā kiñcimattaṃ gahetvā sibbanādiṃ puna pākatikaṃ karoti, ‘‘evaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti āmasanādīni karontassa anurupā āpattiyo veditabbāti.
共谋取物论巴利
Saṃvidāvahārakathā
通过共同商议而取走,就叫共谋取物;这是说,通过互相劝说而完成的取走。所谓共谋之后,意思是出于同一个意愿、同一个想法而商量之后。这里的分判是这样的:许多比丘商量好之后出发,说我们去某个叫某某的家里,或者打破屋顶,或者拆开门窗,把东西拿走。他们当中有一人把东西取走了。当那东西被取走时,他们所有人都犯波罗夷罪。在《附随》中也是这样说的——巴利
Saṃvidhāya avahāro saṃvidāvahāro; aññamaññasaññattiyā katāvahāroti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṃvidahitvāti ekacchandatāya ekajjhāsayatāya sammantayitvāti attho. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – sambahulā bhikkhū ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gehaṃ gantvā, chadanaṃ vā bhinditvā, sandhiṃ vā chinditvā bhaṇḍaṃ harissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā gacchanti. Tesu eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati. Tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Parivārepi cetaṃ vuttaṃ –
四个人商量好之后,拿走了重物;
三人犯波罗夷,一人不犯波罗夷;
这个问题是善者们所思考的。巴利
‘‘Caturo janā saṃvidhāya, garubhaṇḍaṃ avāharuṃ; Tayo pārājikā, eko na pārājiko; Pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitā’’ti. (pari. 479);
这段话的意思是:有老师和他的弟子共四个人,想拿价值六摩沙迦的贵重物品。于是老师就说:“你拿一摩沙迦,你拿一摩沙迦,你拿一摩沙迦,我来拿三摩沙迦。”可是弟子当中,第一个弟子说:“尊者,您拿三摩沙迦吧——你拿一摩沙迦,你拿一摩沙迦,我来拿一摩沙迦。”另外两个弟子也都这样说了。在这件事里,每个弟子各自亲手拿了一摩沙迦,因此他们犯恶作罪;另有五摩沙迦是教别人去拿的,因此他们三人都犯波罗夷罪。而老师这边,有三摩沙迦是他亲手拿的,因此他犯偷兰遮罪;另有三摩沙迦是他教别人去拿的,也因此同样犯偷兰遮罪。因为在“不与取”这条学处里,亲手取不能构成教唆取的条件,教唆取也不能构成亲手取的条件。亲手取只能由亲手取来成立,教唆取只能由教唆取来成立。所以这样说:“四个人共同谋划……这个问题是由智者所思考的。”巴利
Tassāyaṃ attho – cattāro janā ācariyantevāsikā chamāsakaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ āharitukāmā jātā. Tattha ācariyo ‘‘tvaṃ ekaṃ māsakaṃ hara, tvaṃ ekaṃ, tvaṃ ekaṃ, ahaṃ tayo harissāmī’’ti āha. Antevāsikesu pana paṭhamo ‘‘tumhe, bhante, tayo haratha, tvaṃ ekaṃ hara, tvaṃ ekaṃ, ahaṃ ekaṃ harissāmī’’ti āha. Itarepi dve evameva āhaṃsu. Tattha antevāsikesu ekamekassa ekeko māsako sāhatthiko hoti, tena nesaṃ dukkaṭāpattiyo; pañca āṇattikā, tehi tiṇṇampi pārājikaṃ. Ācariyassa pana tayo sāhatthikā, tehissa thullaccayaṃ. Tayo āṇattikā, tehipi thullaccayameva. Imasmiñhi adinnādānasikkhāpade sāhatthikaṃ vā āṇattikassa, āṇattikaṃ vā sāhatthikassa aṅgaṃ na hoti. Sāhatthikaṃ pana sāhatthikeneva kāretabbaṃ, āṇattikaṃ āṇattikeneva. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘caturo janā saṃvidhāya…pe… pañhā mesā kusalehi cintitā’’ti.
另外,在共谋取物这件事上,为了消除疑惑,也应该从含义上认清这四种情况:一物一处、一物多处、多物一处、多物多处。其中,一物一处是指:看见同一家店铺的柜台上放着一件价值五摩沙迦的东西,放置得不当,许多比丘指使一个人说“去把那件拿来”,当那件东西被取走时,所有比丘都犯波罗夷罪。一物多处是指:看见同一家店铺的五个柜台上各放着一件价值一摩沙迦的东西,放置得不当,许多比丘指使一个人说“去把那些拿来”,当第五摩沙迦被取走时,所有比丘都犯波罗夷罪。多物一处是指:看见属于许多人的、价值五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦的东西放在一处,放置得不当,许多比丘指使一个人说“去把那件拿来”,当那件东西被取走时,所有比丘都犯波罗夷罪。多物多处是指:看见五家店铺的五个柜台上各放着一件价值一摩沙迦的东西,放置得不当,许多比丘指使一个人说“去把那些拿来”,当第五摩沙迦被取走时,所有比丘都犯波罗夷罪。巴利
Apica saṃvidāvahāre asammohatthaṃ ‘‘ekabhaṇḍaṃ ekaṭṭhānaṃ, ekabhaṇḍaṃ nānāṭhānaṃ; nānābhaṇḍaṃ ekaṭṭhānaṃ, nānābhaṇḍaṃ nānāṭhāna’’nti idampi catukkaṃ atthato sallakkhetabbaṃ. Tattha ekabhaṇḍaṃ ekaṭṭhānanti ekakulassa āpaṇaphalake pañcamāsakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ duṭṭhapitaṃ disvā sambahulā bhikkhū ekaṃ āṇāpenti ‘‘gacchetaṃ āharā’’ti, tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Ekabhaṇḍaṃ nānāṭhānanti ekakulassa pañcasu āpaṇaphalakesu ekekamāsakaṃ duṭṭhapitaṃ disvā sambahulā ekaṃ āṇāpenti ‘‘gacchete āharā’’ti, pañcamassa māsakassa uddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Nānābhaṇḍaṃ ekaṭṭhānanti bahūnaṃ santakaṃ pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne duṭṭhapitaṃ disvā sambahulā ekaṃ āṇāpenti ‘‘gacchetaṃ āharā’’ti, tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Nānābhaṇḍaṃ nānāṭhānanti pañcannaṃ kulānaṃ pañcasu āpaṇaphalakesu ekekamāsakaṃ duṭṭhapitaṃ disvā sambahulā ekaṃ āṇāpenti ‘‘gacchete āharā’’ti, pañcamassa māsakassa uddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājikanti.
119 “约定行为”就是让人知道的行为;意思是,按时间界限来让人知道。这里,如果说了“食前拿走”,那么无论是今天食前拿走,还是明天,或者未来某一年拿走,都不算违背约定;这两种情况都按照前面所说的盗贼情形,犯波罗夷。但如果说了“今天食前拿走”,却在明天食前拿走,那就越过了“今天”这个约定界限,成了约定之后才拿走。如果说了“明天食前拿走”,却在今天食前拿走,那就是还没到“明天”这个约定界限,成了约定之前就拿走;这样拿的人,拿的人自己犯波罗夷,根本指使者无犯。如果说了“明天食前”,却在当天或明天食后拿走,应当知道这也是在约定之前或约定之后拿走。这个道理也适用于食后、夜间、白天。在这里,也应当按初夜、中夜、后夜、黑月、白月、月、季节、年等来理解约定与违背约定。如果说了“食前拿走”,而有人想着“我就在食前拿走”,却努力到食后,这该怎么判?大善长老说:“这仍然是食前的努力,所以根本指使者不免罪。”大莲长老则说:“因为已经越过时间界限,属于违背约定,所以根本指使者无犯。”巴利
119.Saṅketakammanti sañjānanakammaṃ; kālaparicchedavasena saññāṇakaraṇanti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘purebhattaṃ avaharā’’ti vutte ajja vā purebhattaṃ avaharatu, sve vā, anāgate vā saṃvacchare, natthi visaṅketo; ubhinnampi ocarake vuttanayeneva pārājikaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘ajja purebhattaṃ avaharā’’ti vutte sve purebhattaṃ avaharati, ‘‘ajjā’’ti niyāmitaṃ taṃ saṅketaṃ atikkamma pacchā avahaṭaṃ hoti. Sace ‘‘sve purebhattaṃ avaharā’’ti vutte ajja purebhattaṃ avaharati , ‘‘sve’’ti niyāmitaṃ taṃ saṅketaṃ appatvā pure avahaṭaṃ hoti; evaṃ avaharantassa avahārakasseva pārājikaṃ, mūlaṭṭhassa anāpatti. ‘‘Sve purebhatta’’nti vutte tadaheva vā sve pacchābhattaṃ vā harantopi taṃ saṅketaṃ pure ca pacchā ca haratīti veditabbo. Esa nayo pacchābhattarattindivesupi. Purimayāma-majjhimayāma-pacchimayāma-kāḷajuṇha-māsa-utu-saṃvaccharādivasenāpi cettha saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā. ‘‘Purebhattaṃ harā’’ti vutte ‘‘purebhattameva harissāmī’’ti vāyamantassa pacchābhattaṃ hoti; ettha kathanti? Mahāsumatthero tāva āha – ‘‘purebhattapayogova eso, tasmā mūlaṭṭho na muccatī’’ti. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘kālaparicchedaṃ atikkantattā visaṅketaṃ, tasmā mūlaṭṭho muccatī’’ti.
关于作相的讨论巴利
Nimittakammakathā
120 作相行为,是指为了让别人产生某个认知而做出某种相状,这按照“我要眨眼”等说法分为三种。此外,这里还应该包括举手、拍手、弹指、抬头、咳嗽等种种方式。其余内容与前面讲约定行为时所说的一样。巴利
120.Nimittakammanti saññuppādanatthaṃ kassaci nimittassa karaṇaṃ, taṃ ‘‘akkhiṃ vā nikhaṇissāmī’’tiādinā nayena tidhā vuttaṃ. Aññampi panettha hatthalaṅghana-pāṇippahāraaṅguliphoṭana-gīvunnāmana-ukkāsanādianekappakāraṃ saṅgahetabbaṃ. Sesamettha saṅketakamme vuttanayamevāti.
121 121. 现在,为了对这些约定行为、作相行为不再混淆,而说“比丘命令比丘”等语。其中,“他以为是那个”:盗取者把吩咐者通过作相标记所指的物品,以为“就是这个”,于是盗取那件物品,两人都犯波罗夷。“他以为是那个,却取了另一个”:把被告知“拿走”的物品,以为“就是这个”,却盗取了放在同一处的另一件物品,最初吩咐的人无犯。“以为是另一个,却取了那个”:吩咐者通过作相标记所指的物品价值低,而盗取者以为“是另一个”,于是盗取了那件物品,两人都犯波罗夷。“以为是另一个,也取了另一个”:按前面同样的方式,他以为放在那件物品附近的这件贵重物品是“另一个”,如果那确实就是另一件物品,那么只有盗取者犯波罗夷。巴利
121. Idāni etesveva saṅketakammanimittakammesu asammohatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetī’’tiādimāha. Tattha so taṃ maññamāno tanti so avahārako yaṃ āṇāpakena nimittasaññaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, taṃ etanti maññamāno tameva avaharati, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. So taṃ maññamāno aññanti yaṃ avaharāti vuttaṃ, taṃ etanti maññamāno aññaṃ tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhapitaṃ avaharati, mūlaṭṭhassa anāpatti. Aññaṃ maññamāno tanti āṇāpakena nimittasaññaṃ katvā vuttabhaṇḍaṃ appagghaṃ, idaṃ aññaṃ tasseva samīpe ṭhapitaṃ sārabhaṇḍanti evaṃ aññaṃ maññamāno tameva avaharati, ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. Aññaṃ maññamāno aññanti purimanayeneva idaṃ aññaṃ tasseva samīpe ṭhapitaṃ sārabhaṇḍanti maññati, tañce aññameva hoti, tasseva pārājikaṃ.
在“告诉某某”这类句子中,应当知道有一位老师,以及三位分别名叫佛护、法护、僧护的弟子。其中,“比丘命令比丘”是说:老师在某处看中了一件物品,为了把它偷走,就命令佛护。“告诉某某”:佛护,你去把这件事告诉法护。“某某告诉某某”:法护也应当告诉僧护。“某某取走某某物品”:这样,由你——法护——所命令的僧护,去把某某物品取走,因为他在我们当中一向勇敢,有能力办成这件事。“犯恶作罪”:这样下令的老师首先犯恶作罪。如果这道命令按照他的意图传达下去,那么后文所说的土喇咤亚罪,在命令发出的当下就成立。如果那件物品必定会被取走,那么后文说“所有人都犯波罗夷”,这个人就在命令的当下犯波罗夷。这个道理应当在整个情形中这样理解。巴利
Itthannāmassa pāvadātiādīsu eko ācariyo tayo buddharakkhita-dhammarakkhita-saṅgharakkhitanāmakā antevāsikā daṭṭhabbā. Tattha bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetīti ācariyo kiñci bhaṇḍaṃ katthaci sallakkhetvā tassa haraṇatthāya buddharakkhitaṃ āṇāpeti. Itthannāmassa pāvadāti gaccha tvaṃ, buddharakkhita, etamatthaṃ dhammarakkhitassa pāvada. Itthannāmo itthannāmassa pāvadatūti dhammarakkhitopi saṅgharakkhitassa pāvadatu. Itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharatūti evaṃ tayā āṇattena dhammarakkhitena āṇatto saṅgharakkhito itthannāmaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharatu, so hi amhesu vīrajātiko paṭibalo imasmiṃ kammeti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ gacchati, yaṃ parato thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, āṇattikkhaṇe tadeva hoti. Atha taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avassaṃ hāriyaṃ hoti, yaṃ parato ‘‘sabbesaṃ āpatti pārājikassā’’ti vuttaṃ, tato imassa taṅkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hotīti ayaṃ yutti sabbattha veditabbā.
佛护告诉法护,法护又告诉僧护:“我们的老师这样说:‘据说要把某某物品偷来,据说你在我们当中是个勇士。’”他这样告诉,他们俩也犯恶作。盗贼接受:僧护答应说“好,我去拿”。根本指使者犯土喇咤亚罪——僧护刚一接受,老师就犯土喇咤亚罪,因为他确实把大众引向了恶行。他偷走那物品:如果僧护偷走了那物品,四个人全都犯波罗夷。而且不只是四个人——用这种方法,只要不中途变卦,而是一层层下令,哪怕有百个、千个沙门,也全都犯波罗夷。巴利
So itarassa ārocetīti buddharakkhito dhammarakkhitassa, dhammarakkhito ca saṅgharakkhitassa ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo evaṃ vadati – ‘itthannāmaṃ kira bhaṇḍaṃ avahara, tvaṃ kira amhesu ca vīrapuriso’’’ti āroceti, evaṃ tesampi dukkaṭaṃ. Avahārako paṭiggaṇhātīti ‘‘sādhu harissāmī’’ti saṅgharakkhito sampaṭicchati. Mūlaṭṭhassa āpatti thullaccayassāti saṅgharakkhitena paṭiggahitamatte ācariyassa thullaccayaṃ, mahājano hi tena pāpe niyojitoti. So taṃ bhaṇḍanti so ce saṅgharakkhito taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, sabbesaṃ catunnampi janānaṃ pārājikaṃ. Na kevalañca catunnaṃ, etena upāyena visaṅketaṃ akatvā paramparāya āṇāpentaṃ samaṇasataṃ samaṇasahassaṃ vā hotu, sabbesaṃ pārājikameva.
第二种情况:他命令另一个人——那个受老师吩咐的佛护,没有去找法护,或者不想说,就直接走到僧护那里,命令说:“我们的老师这样说:‘据说要偷某某物品。’”犯恶作罪:就这个命令而言,佛护先犯恶作。接受,犯恶作罪:僧护答应时,应当知道根本指使者本人犯恶作。但如果僧护偷了那件物品,指使者佛护和偷盗者僧护两人都犯波罗夷。不过,根本指使的老师因为改变了原先的约定,不犯波罗夷。法护因为不知情,完全无犯。佛护虽然让两人脱了罪,自己却堕落了。巴利
Dutiyavāre – so aññaṃ āṇāpetīti so ācariyena āṇatto buddharakkhito dhammarakkhitaṃ adisvā vā avattukāmo vā hutvā saṅgharakkhitameva upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo evamāha – ‘itthannāmaṃ kira bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’’ti āṇāpeti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti āṇattiyā tāva buddharakkhitassa dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggaṇhāti, āpatti dukkaṭassāti saṅgharakkhitena sampaṭicchite mūlaṭṭhasseva dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. Sace pana so taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āṇāpakassa ca buddharakkhitassa, avahārakassa ca saṅgharakkhitassāti ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. Mūlaṭṭhassa pana ācariyassa visaṅketattā pārājikena anāpatti. Dhammarakkhitassa ajānanatāya sabbena sabbaṃ anāpatti. Buddharakkhito pana dvinnaṃ sotthibhāvaṃ katvā attanā naṭṭho.
从这之后,在四种教令方式中,先说第一种:他去了一趟又回来,意思是说,他走到放东西的地方,看到里里外外都有看守,没法偷到手,就回来了。“什么时候办得到,那时候再说”——意思是:“难道今天就能偷到手吗?去吧,什么时候能办到,那时候就把它偷走。”这样再次教令,也只是犯恶作罪。但是,如果那件东西注定要被拿走,那么“成就这件事的思心所”就如同道心之后紧接着生起的果心一样,所以这个人在发出教令的那一刻就犯波罗夷。即使偷东西的人过了六十年才去偷那件东西,而教令的人在这期间已经死了,或者已经还俗了——他将以不是沙门的身份死去,或者还俗——偷东西的人在偷到手的那一刻,仍然犯波罗夷。巴利
Ito paresu catūsu āṇattivāresu paṭhame tāva so gantvā puna paccāgacchatīti bhaṇḍaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā anto ca bahi ca ārakkhaṃ disvā avaharituṃ asakkonto āgacchati. Yadā sakkosi, tadāti kiṃ ajjeva avahaṭaṃ hoti? Gaccha yadā sakkosi tadā naṃ avaharāti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ puna āṇattiyāpi dukkaṭameva hoti. Sace pana taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avassaṃ hāriyaṃ hoti, atthasādhakacetanā nāma maggānantaraphalasadisā, tasmā ayaṃ āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājiko. Sacepi avahārako saṭṭhivassātikkamena taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āṇāpako ca antarāyeva kālaṃ vā karoti, hīnāya vā āvattati; assamaṇova hutvā kālaṃ vā karissati, hīnāya vā āvattissati, avahārakassa pana avahārakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ.
在第二种情况里,因为他是轻声说那句话,或者因为那人耳聋,所以没能让对方听到“不要偷”。巴利
Dutiyavāre – yasmā taṃ saṇikaṃ vā bhaṇanto tassa vā badhiratāya ‘‘mā avaharī’’ti
这句话没有让他听到,所以根本指使者没有脱罪。在第三种情况里,因为让他听到了,所以脱罪。在第四种情况里,因为前者让他听到了,而后者回应“善哉”并表示同意、因而罢手,所以两个人都脱罪。巴利
Etaṃ vacanaṃ na sāveti, tasmā mūlaṭṭho na mutto. Tatiyavāre – pana sāvitattā mutto. Catutthavāre – tena ca sāvitattā, itarena ca ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā oratattā ubhopi muttāti.
122 122. 现在,为了说明前面在各处依照“从原位移开”而说的不与取,其构成条件是什么,以及依照物品类别而有的犯戒差别,所以说了“以五种方式”等话。其中,“以五种方式”就是由五种原因,意思是说具备五个条件。这里简要的意思是:对偷取未给予之物的人,按照“是他人所摄之物”等说法所说的五种方式具备时,就犯波罗夷,不具足这五种方式就不犯。这五种方式是:他人所摄之物、想这是他人所摄之物、物品属于重物、有偷盗之心、从原位移开。此后,又用两种情形,依照物品类别,说明了对于轻物品所犯的偷兰遮和恶作。巴利
122. Idāni tattha tattha ṭhānā cāvanavasena vuttassa adinnādānassa aṅgaṃ vatthubhedena ca āpattibhedaṃ dassento ‘‘pañcahi ākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pañcahi ākārehīti pañcahi kāraṇehi; pañcahi aṅgehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – adinnaṃ ādiyantassa ‘‘parapariggahitañca hotī’’tiādinā nayena vuttehi pañcahākārehi pārājikaṃ hoti, na tato ūnehīti. Tatrime pañca ākārā – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā , parikkhārassa garukabhāvo, theyyacittaṃ, ṭhānācāvananti. Ito parehi pana dvīhi vārehi lahuke parikkhāre vatthubhedena thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca dassitaṃ.
125 依“以六种方式”等所说的三种情形,应当知道有六种方式:非己物想、非亲厚取、非暂时性、物品属于重物、有偷盗的心、把东西从原来的位置移开。这里再按物品类别来说,第一种情形犯波罗夷,第二和第三种情形说的是偷兰遮和恶作。在后面的三种情形里,即使物品有差别,但因为该物品不是别人所拥有的,所以只说犯恶作。这里说的“不是别人所拥有的”,指的是没人住的地方的东西、被丢弃的东西、断了根的东西、没有主人的东西,或者是自己的东西,这两类都算作“不是别人所拥有的”。不过,因为在这里有“这是别人所拥有的”的想法,而且是用偷盗的心拿走的,所以不说无犯。巴利
125.‘‘Chahākārehī’’tiādinā nayena vuttavārattaye pana na sakasaññitā, na vissāsaggāhitā, na tāvakālikatā, parikkhārassa garukabhāvo, theyyacittaṃ, ṭhānācāvananti evaṃ cha ākārā veditabbā. Vatthubhedena panetthāpi paṭhamavāre pārājikaṃ. Dutiyatatiyesu thullaccayadukkaṭāni vuttāni. Tato paresu pana tīsu vāresu vijjamānepi vatthubhede vatthussa parehi apariggahitattā dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ. Tatra yadetaṃ ‘‘na ca parapariggahita’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ anajjhāvutthakaṃ vā hotu chaḍḍitaṃ chinnamūlakaṃ assāmikavatthu, attano santakaṃ vā, ubhayampi ‘‘na ca parapariggahita’’ntveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Yasmā panettha parapariggahitasaññā ca atthi, theyyacittena ca gahitaṃ, tasmā anāpatti na vuttāti.
131 131. 这样,按照物品和心念说明了犯戒的类别之后,现在为了说明无犯的类别,而说“有己物想者无犯”等。其中,“有己物想者”是指对某物有“这是我的东西”这种己物想的人。即使他拿了别人的东西,在拿的时候也无犯,但拿了之后应当归还。如果物主说“还给我”,他却不归还,当物主放弃追讨时,就犯波罗夷。巴利
131. Evaṃ vatthuvasena ca cittavasena ca āpattibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni anāpattibhedaṃ dassento ‘‘anāpatti sasaññissā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sasaññissāti sakasaññissa, ‘‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ idaṃ bhaṇḍa’’nti evaṃ sasaññissa parabhaṇḍampi gaṇhato gahaṇe anāpatti, gahitaṃ pana puna dātabbaṃ. Sace sāmikehi ‘‘dehī’’ti vutto na deti, tesaṃ dhuranikkhepe pārājikaṃ.
依亲厚取者,即使取了也不犯戒。亲厚取的特征应当依据这部经来了知:“比丘们,我允许对具足五支的人行亲厚取——见过面、是亲密的朋友、曾被允许过、还活着、而且取了之后他会满意。”(《大品》356)其中,“见过面”指只是见过一面的朋友;“亲密的朋友”指交情深厚的朋友;“曾被允许过”指对方曾说过“我的东西,你想要什么就拿去吧,拿的时候不用问我”。“还活着”指即使躺在起不来的床上,只要命根还没断。“取了之后他会满意”指拿的时候心里欢喜。对于这样的人,知道“我拿了之后他会满意”而去拿,是合适的。这五支是从完全穷尽的角度来说的。但亲厚取实际成立只需三支:见过面、还活着、取了之后会满意;或者亲密的朋友、还活着、取了之后会满意;或者曾被允许过、还活着、取了之后会满意。巴利
Vissāsaggāheti vissāsaggahaṇepi anāpatti. Vissāsaggāhalakkhaṇaṃ pana iminā suttena jānitabbaṃ – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa vissāsaṃ gahetuṃ – sandiṭṭho ca hoti, sambhatto ca, ālapito ca, jīvati ca, gahite ca attamano’’ti (mahāva. 356). Tattha sandiṭṭhoti diṭṭhamattakamitto, sambhattoti daḷhamitto, ālapitoti ‘‘mama santakaṃ yaṃ icchasi, taṃ gaṇheyyāsi, āpucchitvā gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthī’’ti vutto. Jīvatīti anuṭṭhānaseyyāya sayitopi yāva jīvitindriyupacchedaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Gahite ca attamanoti gahite tuṭṭhacitto hoti, evarūpassa santakaṃ ‘‘gahite me attamano bhavissatī’’ti jānantena gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Anavasesapariyādānavasena cetāni pañcaṅgāni vuttāni. Vissāsaggāho pana tīhi aṅgehi ruhati – sandiṭṭho, jīvati, gahite attamano; sambhatto, jīvati, gahite attamano; ālapito, jīvati, gahite attamanoti.
如果有人已经不在世,或者虽然东西被拿了却并不满意,那么他的物品即使是通过亲厚信任的方式拿到的,也还是要还回去。归还的时候,死者的财物应当先交给那些对他的财物有支配权的在家人或出家人。对不满意者的物品,应当还给他本人。如果有人一开始就通过言语或仅仅心生认可,说“你拿我的东西,拿得好”,后来却因为某种原因生气了,他就不能要求索回。如果有人虽然不想给,但心里默许,什么也不说,他后来也不能要求索回。但如果有人说“我拿了或用了你们的东西”,对方回答说“拿了也好,用了也好,但我因为某件事把它放在那里,请恢复原样”,这种情况下他可以要求索回。巴利
Yo pana na jīvati, na ca gahite attamano hoti; tassa santakaṃ vissāsaggāhena gahitampi puna dātabbaṃ. Dadamānena ca matakadhanaṃ tāva ye tassa dhane issarā gahaṭṭhā vā pabbajitā vā, tesaṃ dātabbaṃ. Anattamanassa santakaṃ tasseva dātabbaṃ. Yo pana paṭhamaṃyeva ‘‘suṭṭhu kataṃ tayā mama santakaṃ gaṇhantenā’’ti vacībhedena vā cittuppādamattena vā anumoditvā pacchā kenaci kāraṇena kupito, paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yopi adātukāmo cittena pana adhivāseti, na kiñci vadati, sopi puna paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yo pana ‘‘mayā tumhākaṃ santakaṃ gahitaṃ vā paribhuttaṃ vā’’ti vutte ‘‘gahitaṃ vā hotu paribhuttaṃ vā, mayā pana taṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena ṭhapitaṃ, pākatikaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadati. Ayaṃ paccāharāpetuṃ labhati.
所谓暂时借用,是指心里想着“我会还回去、我会补偿”而拿取。像这样取用,即使只是暂时借用,也不犯戒。不过,拿了之后,如果物品的主人——不管是一个人还是一个团体——同意说“这个就归你了”,那当然好。如果不同意,对方来讨要时就必须归还。如果是僧团的东西,那就一定要还回去。巴利
Tāvakāliketi ‘‘paṭidassāmi paṭikarissāmī’’ti evaṃ gaṇhantassa tāvakālikepi gahaṇe anāpatti. Gahitaṃ pana sace bhaṇḍasāmiko puggalo vā gaṇo vā ‘‘tuyhevetaṃ hotū’’ti anujānāti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce anujānāti, āharāpente dātabbaṃ. Saṅghasantakaṃ pana paṭidātumeva vaṭṭati.
关于“取用饿鬼的东西”:这里,即使是投生在饿鬼界的众生,或者是死后就在同一个身体状态里再生的,乃至四大王天等诸天,全都被归入“饿鬼”一类,取用他们的东西,不算犯戒。就算帝释天王铺开店铺坐在那里,一位有天眼的比丘知道了,为了自己置办衣料,哪怕对方一直喊“别拿、别拿”,他还是拿了价值十万的布料走掉,也是可以的。至于人们为了祭拜天神而挂在树上等处的布料,那就更不用说了。巴利
Petapariggaheti ettha pana pettivisaye upapannāpi kālaṃ katvā tasmiṃyeva attabhāve nibbattāpi cātumahārājikādayo devāpi sabbe ‘‘petā’’ tveva saṅkhyaṃ gatā, tesaṃ pariggahe anāpatti. Sacepi hi sakko devarājā āpaṇaṃ pasāretvā nisinno hoti, dibbacakkhuko ca bhikkhu taṃ ñatvā attano cīvaratthāya satasahassagghanakampi sāṭakaṃ tassa ‘‘mā gaṇha, mā gaṇhā’’ti vadantassāpi gahetvā gacchati, vaṭṭati. Devatā pana uddissa balikammaṃ karontehi rukkhādīsu laggitasāṭake vattabbameva natthi.
对于“畜生的保管”:对畜生的保管,也不犯戒。即使龙王或金翅鸟青年化作人形开设店铺,如果有比丘按照前面说的方式取走属于他的物品离开,也是可以的。狮子或老虎等杀死鹿、水牛等正在吞食时,如果比丘被饥饿逼迫,一开始不应该去阻止,因为它们甚至会伤害人。但如果它们稍微吃了一些之后能够阻止,阻止后取走,这是许可的。对于老鹰等带着肉食行进的情况,让它们掉落再取走,也是许可的。巴利
Tiracchānagatapariggaheti tiracchānagatānampi pariggahe anāpatti. Sacepi hi nāgarājā vā supaṇṇamāṇavako vā manussarūpena āpaṇaṃ pasāreti, tato cassa santakaṃ koci bhikkhu purimanayeneva gahetvā gacchati, vaṭṭati. Sīho vā byaggho vā migamahiṃsādayo vadhitvā khādanto jighacchāpīḷito āditova na vāretabbo. Anatthampi hi kareyya. Yadi pana thoke khāyite vāretuṃ sakkoti, vāretvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Senādayopi āmisaṃ gahetvā gacchante pātāpetvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati.
对粪扫衣有想的人:如果对无主物生起“这是粪扫衣”这样的想而拿取,也无犯。但如果那是有主物,物主来讨回时就应该归还。对疯癫者:像前面说过的那种疯癫者,也无犯。对最初犯戒者:这里达尼耶就是最初犯戒者,他无犯。至于其他那些偷洗衣物等的贼、六群比丘等人,则确实有犯。巴利
Paṃsukūlasaññissāti assāmikaṃ ‘‘idaṃ paṃsukūla’’nti evaṃsaññissāpi gahaṇe anāpatti. Sace pana taṃ sassāmikaṃ hoti, āharāpente dātabbaṃ . Ummattakassāti pubbe vuttappakārassa ummattakassāpi anāpatti. Ādikammikassāti idha dhaniyo ādikammiko, tassa anāpatti. Avasesānaṃ pana rajakabhaṇḍikādicorānaṃ chabbaggiyādīnaṃ āpattiyevāti.
生起与作,还有想与有心。
世间罪与业,以及善与受。巴利
Samuṭṭhānañca kiriyā, atho saññā sacittakaṃ; Lokavajjañca kammañca, kusalaṃ vedanāya cāti.
不过在杂项部分,这条学处有三种生起方式:亲手做的,从身和心生起;命令他人做的,从语和心生起;亲手做也命令他人做的,从身、语和心三方面生起。它属于行动生起,因为只有正在做的时候才会犯,没做就不犯。由于没有“我要拿取未给予之物”这种想而得以脱离,所以是想解脱。它是有心的,是世间罪,是身业、语业,是不善心。无论是以满足、恐惧还是无所谓的心态犯下,都同样犯这条戒,所以有三种受。这一切应当依照第一条学处中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Imasmiṃ pana pakiṇṇake idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – sāhatthikaṃ kāyato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti, āṇattikaṃ vācato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti, sāhatthikāṇattikaṃ kāyato ca vācato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyāsamuṭṭhānañca, karontoyeva hi etaṃ āpajjati na akaronto. ‘‘Adinnaṃ ādiyāmī’’ti saññāya abhāvena muccanato saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ , lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tuṭṭho vā bhīto vā majjhatto vā taṃ āpajjatīti tivedananti sabbaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
已调伏事例的解说巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
132 在决断事例的讨论中,六群比丘的事例,在随制部分已经说过了。巴利
132. Vinītavatthukathāsu chabbaggiyavatthu anupaññattiyaṃ vuttameva.
在第二事中:所谓心,就是凡夫的心被贪等驱使,背离了本性而奔驰、流转、四处乱跑。如果世尊仅仅因为心生起就制定罪过,哪怕没有通过身门、语门造作,那谁能让自己做到无犯呢!所以他说:“比丘心生起,无犯。”但人不应该被心控制,应该以如理作意的力量来制止心。巴利
Dutiyavatthumhi – cittaṃ nāma puthujjanānaṃ rāgādivasena pakatiṃ vijahitvā dhāvati sandhāvati vidhāvati. Sace bhagavā kāyavacīdvārabhedaṃ vināpi cittuppādamattena āpattiṃ paññapeyya, ko sakkuṇeyya anāpattikaṃ attānaṃ kātuṃ! Tenāha – ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu cittuppāde’’ti. Cittavasikena pana na bhavitabbaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānabalena cittaṃ nivāretabbamevāti.
133-4 触摸、摇动、移离处所等事,其含义本身就很清楚。从那里之后直到“以盗心从地取”等,乃至事情结束。巴利
133-4. Āmasana-phandāpana-ṭhānācāvanavatthūni uttānatthāneva. Tato parāni ca theyyacitto bhūmito aggahesīti vatthupariyosānāni.
135 在“语词方式”这件事里,“取了”就是拿;“你是贼”就是指责。另一个人被问“被谁偷了?”时,就用顺着提问用词的方式承认说“被我偷了”。因为如果另一个人问的是“被谁拿了?被谁移走了?被谁放置了?”,那么这个人也会说“被我拿了、移走了、放置了”。口本来就是为了吃饭和说话而有的,但如果没有盗心,就不构成偷盗。所以世尊说:“比丘,于语词方式无犯。”意思是,仅仅在世俗言说上,不算犯戒。从这里往后,直到“缠绕事”结束,全部内容都很容易明白。巴利
135. Niruttipathavatthusmiṃ 1.329 ādiyīti gaṇhi, ‘‘corosi tva’’nti parāmasi. Itaro pana ‘‘kena avahaṭa’’nti vutte ‘‘mayā avahaṭa’’nti pucchāsabhāgena paṭiññaṃ adāsi. Yadi hi itarena ‘‘kena gahitaṃ, kena apanītaṃ, kena ṭhapita’’nti vuttaṃ abhavissa, atha ayampi ‘‘mayā gahitaṃ, apanītaṃ, ṭhapita’’nti vā vadeyya. Mukhaṃ nāma bhuñjanatthāya ca kathanatthāya ca kataṃ, theyyacittaṃ pana vinā avahāro natthi. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu niruttipathe’’ti. Vohāravacanamatte anāpattīti attho. Tato paraṃ veṭhanavatthu pariyosānaṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.
137 在“不分离身体”这件事里,“住着”是指因为对布料的渴爱,而在那同一个身体里受生。“不理会”是指不接受他的话,或者不表示尊重。“使那身体起来”是指鬼以自己的神通力让那身体起来,所以说“使那身体起来”。“关了门”是指那位比丘的精舍就在坟场附近,所以胆小的比丘很快跑进去,把门关上。“就在那里倒下”是指门关上后,鬼对布料不再执着,舍弃那身体,随业而去,因此那身体就倒在那里,“倒下”就是这个意思。巴利
137. Abhinnasarīravatthusmiṃ adhivatthoti sāṭakataṇhāya tasmiṃyeva sarīre nibbatto. Anādiyantoti tassa vacanaṃ agaṇhanto, ādaraṃ vā akaronto. Taṃ sarīraṃ uṭṭhahitvāti peto attano ānubhāvena taṃ sarīraṃ uṭṭhāpesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘taṃ sarīraṃ uṭṭhahitvā’’ti. Dvāraṃ thakesīti bhikkhussa susānasamīpeyeva vihāro, tasmā bhīrukajātiko bhikkhu khippameva tattha pavisitvā dvāraṃ thakesi. Tattheva paripatīti dvāre thakite peto sāṭake nirālayo hutvā taṃ sarīraṃ pahāya yathākammaṃ gato, tasmā taṃ sarīraṃ tattheva paripati, patitanti vuttaṃ hoti.
身体还没坏的时候,也就是尸体还温热、皮肉完整时,不能拿它的布来做粪扫衣。如果拿了,会有这样的灾祸,还会犯恶作罪。身体坏了以后,就可以拿。怎样才算坏呢?哪怕只是被乌鸦、老鹰、狗、豺狼等用嘴或牙齿稍微撕破一点,也算坏了。如果只是跌倒时蹭破了表皮,皮还没破,这仍算没坏;皮破了,才算坏。如果活着的时候就有破开的疮、麻风疮或伤口,这也算坏。从第三天起,因为肿胀等而变成尸体状态的,也算坏。不过,即使身体完全没坏,也可以让守墓人或其他人为自己取来。如果找不到别人,就用刀或其他东西弄出伤口后再取。面对异性的身体时,则要提起正念,生起沙门想,在头上或手脚背上弄出伤口后再取。巴利
Abhinne sarīreti abbhuṇhe allasarīre paṃsukūlaṃ na gahetabbaṃ, gaṇhantassa evarūpā upaddavā honti, dukkaṭañca āpajjati. Bhinne pana gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Kittāvatā pana bhinnaṃ hoti? Kāka-kulala-soṇa-siṅgālādīhi mukhatuṇḍakena vā dāṭhāya vā īsakaṃ phālitamattenāpi. Yassa pana patato ghaṃsanena chavimattaṃ chinnaṃ hoti, cammaṃ acchinnaṃ, etaṃ abhinnameva; camme pana chinne bhinnaṃ. Yassāpi sajīvakāleyeva pabhinnā gaṇḍakuṭṭhapiḷakā vā vaṇo vā hoti, idampi bhinnaṃ. Tatiyadivasato pabhuti uddhumātakādibhāvena kuṇapabhāvaṃ upagatampi bhinnameva. Sabbena sabbaṃ pana abhinnepi susānagopakehi vā aññehi vā manussehi gāhāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. No ce aññaṃ labhati, satthakena vā kenaci vā vaṇaṃ katvā gahetabbaṃ. Visabhāgasarīre pana satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā samaṇasaññaṃ uppādetvā sīse vā hatthapādapiṭṭhiyaṃ vā vaṇaṃ katvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
关于把草移过去这件事的讨论巴利
Kusasaṅkāmanavatthukathā
138 138. 紧接着,在那件事里,他把草移开后拿了衣。意思是:先前在解释“应取”这个词的义注中,只是以名称列举了偷盗取、强夺取、计谋取、隐藏取、草取等取法,而这里他是以草取的方式偷取的。巴利
138. Tadanantare vatthusmiṃ kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā cīvaraṃ aggahesīti pubbe ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’ti imassa padassa atthavaṇṇanāyaṃ nāmamattena dassitesu theyyāvahāra-pasayhāvahāra-parikappāvahārapaacchannāvahāra-kusāvahāresu kusāvahārena avaharīti attho.
这些取法的差别应当这样理解:如果有人不管是在夜里还是白天,用凿墙破洞之类的手段,不被发现地偷走有主之物,或者用假秤、假币等欺骗手段取得,那么他这样拿取的行为,就应当知道是“偷盗取”。巴利
Imesaṃ pana avahārānaṃ evaṃ nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ – yo hi koci sassāmikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ rattibhāge vā divasabhāge vā sandhicchedādīni katvā adissamāno avaharati, kūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇādīhi vā vañcetvā gaṇhāti, tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahāro ‘‘theyyāvahāro’’ti veditabbo.
如果有人用暴力压制别人,仗着力量制服对方,或者用恐吓、让人害怕的方式,夺取他们的财物;就像那些拦路抢劫、洗劫村庄的暴徒,因为嗔怒而掠夺别人的家宅,也像国王、大臣等人,仗着自己拥有的权势,用强力过度夺取——他这样拿取,就应当知道是“强夺取”。巴利
Yo pana pare pasayha balasā abhibhuyya, atha vā pana santajjetvā bhayaṃ dassetvā tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhāti, panthaghāta-gāmaghātādīni karontā dāmarikacorā viya kodhavasena paragharavilopaṃ karontā attano pattabalito ca adhikaṃ balakkārena gaṇhantā rāja-rājamahāmattādayo viya; tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahāro ‘‘pasayhāvahāro’’ti veditabbo.
先设想再拿取,就叫“设想取”。它按设想物品和设想地点分成两种。其中,设想物品是这样:这里有人想要一件布,走进内室,先设想:“如果是布,我就拿;如果是线,我就不拿”,然后在黑暗中拿起一个袋子。如果里面是布,在拿起的那一刻就犯波罗夷。如果是线,就无罪。拿到外面解开,知道是线后,再拿回来放回原处,仍然无罪。如果知道是线,却想“既然已经拿到了,就该拿走”而离开,就按走过的步数来判罪。如果放在地上再拿起来,在拿起的那一刻犯波罗夷。如果被物主们围住喊“贼!贼!”而丢下逃跑,无罪。物主们看见后拿走,这是善的。如果是别人拿走,就要赔偿物品。如果物主们回去后,他自己看见那东西,心想“这是我之前拿出来的,现在归我了”而拿走,无罪,但要赔偿物品。用“如果是线,我就拿;如果是布,我就不拿”“如果是酥油,我就拿;如果是油,我就不拿”这类方式先设想再拿取,也是同样的道理。巴利
Parikappetvā gaṇhato pana avahāro ‘‘parikappāvahāro’’ti vuccati, so bhaṇḍaparikappa-okāsaparikappavasena duvidho . Tatrāyaṃ bhaṇḍaparikappo – idhekacco sāṭakatthiko antogabbhaṃ pavisitvā ‘‘sace sāṭako bhavissati, gaṇhissāmi; sace suttaṃ, na gaṇhissāmī’’ti parikappetvā andhakāre pasibbakaṃ gaṇhāti, sāṭako ce tatra hoti, uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ. Suttaṃ ce hoti, rakkhati. Bahi nīharitvā muñcitvā ‘‘sutta’’nti ñatvā puna āharitvā yathāṭhāne ṭhapeti, rakkhatiyeva. ‘‘Sutta’’nti ñatvāpi ‘‘yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ gahetabba’’nti gacchati, padavārena kāretabbo. Bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā gaṇhāti, uddhāre pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Coro, coro’’ti sāmikehi pariyuṭṭhito chaḍḍetvā palāyati, rakkhati. Sāmikā taṃ disvā gaṇhanti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Añño ce koci gaṇhāti, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Atha nivattesu sāmikesu sayameva taṃ disvā ‘‘pagevetaṃ mayā nīhaṭaṃ, mama dāni santaka’’nti gaṇhāti, rakkhati; bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. ‘‘Sace suttaṃ bhavissati, gaṇhissāmi; sace sāṭako, na gaṇhissāmi. Sace sappi bhavissati, gaṇhissāmi; sace telaṃ, na gaṇhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena parikappetvā gaṇhantassāpi eseva nayo.
不过在《大帕查里亚》等注书中则这样说:想要布的人,拿了装布的袋子就出去,站在外面解开,看见是布之后才离开,这种情况只按他走过的步数来治罪。但在这里,因为他事先盘算过“如果是布,我就拿”,所以可以看出有盘算;又因为他是看见之后才拿走的,所以看不出有“盘算取”。然而《大义注》中说:对所盘算的东西,在还没看见、只是停留在盘算状态时就拿走,这叫作取,因此那里可以看出有“盘算取”。这也和圣典中“以为是那个而偷取那个”的说法相符。其中,这种以“如果是布,我就拿”等方式生起的盘算,就叫作“物品盘算”。巴利
Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana ‘‘sāṭakatthikopi sāṭakapasibbakameva gahetvā nikkhanto bahi ṭhatvā muñcitvā ‘sāṭako aya’nti disvā gacchanto paduddhāreneva kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘sace sāṭako bhavissati, gaṇhissāmī’’ti parikappitattā parikappo dissati, disvā haṭattā parikappāvahāro na dissati. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yaṃ parikappitaṃ taṃ adiṭṭhaṃ parikappitabhāve ṭhitaṃyeva uddharantassa avahāro vutto, tasmā tattha parikappāvahāro dissati. ‘‘Taṃ maññamāno taṃ avaharī’’ti pāḷiyā ca sametīti. Tattha yvāyaṃ ‘‘sace sāṭako bhavissati, gaṇhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena pavatto parikappo, ayaṃ ‘‘bhaṇḍaparikappo’’ nāma.
关于“场所的预谋”,应当这样理解:在这里,某个贪心的比丘进入别人的精舍、俗家,或者树林里的工作棚等处,坐在那里跟人聊天时,看到某件可以起贪心的资具。他看到之后,就以门口、楼下、殿堂、精舍的门、仓库、树根等为界限,心里盘算:“如果在这个范围内有人看见我,我就装作因为想看而拿起来把玩的样子,给他们看;如果没人看见,我就拿走。”他拿了那件东西,一旦越过自己所盘算的界限,就犯巴拉基卡。如果他盘算的是近行界,而他在朝那个方向走的时候,因为思惟业处等事,或者心不在焉,无意中越过了近行界,那就只应赔偿物品。如果到了那个地方,有盗贼、大象、猛兽或者大暴雨出现,他为了脱离这些灾难而匆忙越过那个地方,也只是应赔偿物品。不过,这里有些人说:“因为从一开始就是以盗心拿的,所以不算守护,就是取走了。”《大义注》的立场就是这样。而《大护持》里则说:“即使他在界限内骑上象或马,不驱赶它,也不让别人驱赶,即使越过了界限,也没有巴拉基卡,只是应赔偿物品。”其中,那种以“如果在这个范围内有人看见我,我就装作因为想看而拿起来把玩的样子,给他们看”这样的方式生起的盘算,就叫作“场所的预谋”。巴利
Okāsaparikappo pana evaṃ veditabbo – idhekacco lolabhikkhu parapariveṇaṃ vā kulagharaṃ vā araññe kammantasālaṃ vā pavisitvā tattha kathāsallāpena nisinno kiñci lobhaneyyaṃ parikkhāraṃ oloketi, olokento ca pana disvā dvārapamukhaheṭṭhāpāsādapariveṇadvārakoṭṭhakarukkhamūlādivasena paricchedaṃ katvā ‘‘sace maṃ etthantare passissanti, daṭṭhukāmatāya gahetvā vicaranto viya etesaṃyeva dassāmi; no ce passissanti, harissāmī’’ti parikappeti. Tassa taṃ ādāya parikappitaparicchedaṃ atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ. Sace upacārasīmaṃ parikappeti, tadabhimukhova gacchanto kammaṭṭhānādīni manasi karonto vā aññavihito vā asatiyā upacārasīmaṃ atikkamati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Athāpissa taṃ ṭhānaṃ pattassa coro vā hatthī vā vāḷamigo vā mahāmegho vā vuṭṭhahati, so ca tamhā upaddavā muccitukamyatāya sahasā taṃ ṭhānaṃ atikkamati, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Keci panettha ‘‘yasmā mūleva theyyacittena gahitaṃ, tasmā na rakkhati, avahāroyevā’’ti vadanti. Ayaṃ tāva mahāaṭṭhakathānayo. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘sacepi so antoparicchede hatthiṃ vā assaṃ vā abhiruhitvā taṃ neva pājeti, na pājāpeti; paricchede atikkantepi pārājikaṃ natthi, bhaṇḍadeyyamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatra yvāyaṃ ‘‘sace maṃ etthantare passissanti, daṭṭhukāmatāya gahetvā vicaranto viya etesaṃyeva dassāmī’’ti pavatto parikappo, ayaṃ ‘‘okāsaparikappo’’ nāma.
像这样,按照这两种设想去设想之后,取走物品的行为,就应当知道是“设想取物”。巴利
Evamimesaṃ dvinnampi parikappānaṃ vasena parikappetvā gaṇhato avahāro ‘‘parikappāvahāro’’ti veditabbo.
先把东西遮起来再拿走,这叫“遮掩取物”。应当这样理解:如果有个比丘,看见人们在园林等地方玩耍或走进去时,解下来放在那里的装饰品,心想:“要是我弯下腰去拿,他们会发现‘这个沙门在拿东西’,然后来找我麻烦”,于是用尘土或树叶把它盖住,想“等会儿再来拿”——到这一步,还没有把它取走,所以还不算偷取。可是,当那些人想进村子,找那件东西也找不到,就说“现在天黑了,明天再来看”,然后怀着顾恋之情就那样走了。这时候,他把那东西取出来,在取出的当下就犯巴拉基卡。如果他心里认为“遮起来的时候这东西就已经是我的了”,或者认为“他们已经走了,这是扔掉的东西”,以这种粪扫想而拿,那就属于要赔偿的物品。如果那些人第二天回来找,找不到就放弃走了,他拿的东西仍然属于要赔偿的物品。为什么?因为靠他的手段,那些人才没有看见。但如果有人看见这样的东西,它还在原来的地方,他没有把它遮起来,而是带着偷心用脚把它踩进泥里或沙里,那么在踩进去的当下,就犯巴拉基卡。巴利
Paṭicchādetvā pana avaharaṇaṃ paṭicchannāvahāro. So evaṃ veditabbo – yo bhikkhu manussānaṃ uyyānādīsu kīḷantānaṃ vā pavisantānaṃ vā omuñcitvā ṭhapitaṃ alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ disvā ‘‘sace onamitvā gahessāmi, ‘kiṃ samaṇo gaṇhātī’ti maṃ jānitvā viheṭheyyu’’nti paṃsunā vā paṇṇena vā paṭicchādeti – ‘‘pacchā gaṇhissāmī’’ti, tassa ettāvatā uddhāro natthīti na tāva avahāro hoti. Yadā pana te manussā antogāmaṃ pavisitukāmā taṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ vicinantāpi apassitvā ‘‘idāni andhakāro, sve jānissāmā’’ti sālayā eva gatā honti. Athassa taṃ uddharato uddhāre pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Paṭicchannakāleyeva taṃ mama santaka’’nti sakasaññāya vā ‘‘gatā dāni te, chaḍḍitabhaṇḍaṃ ida’’nti paṃsukūlasaññāya vā gaṇhantassa pana bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Tesu dutiyadivase āgantvā vicinitvā adisvā dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā gatesupi gahitaṃ bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Kasmā? Yasmā tassa payogena tehi na diṭṭhaṃ, yo pana tathārūpaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ disvā yathāṭhāne ṭhitaṃyeva appaṭicchādetvā theyyacitto pādena akkamitvā kaddame vā vālikāya vā paveseti, tassa pavesitamatteyeva pārājikaṃ.
把草签移过去再拿走东西,这叫“草签取物”。这种情况也要这样理解:比丘们在分布料时,如果有人想用自己份额旁边那份价值更低、更高或相等的他人份额来换,他就拿起落在自己份额上的草签,想把它投到别人的份额上——这时还不算犯。他把草签投到别人份额上时,也还不算犯。可是,当草签落下后,他从别人的份额里拿起别人的草签,一拿起就犯波罗夷。如果他先拿起别人份额里的草签,想投到自己份额上,那么拿起时还不算犯,投下时也还不算犯。但如果他从自己份额里拿起自己的草签,只是在拿起时还不算犯;拿起后投到别人份额上,一离手就犯波罗夷。巴利
Kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā pana avaharaṇaṃ ‘‘kusāvahāro’’ti vuccati. Sopi evaṃ veditabbo – yo bhikkhu kusaṃ pātetvā cīvare bhājiyamāne attano koṭṭhāsassa samīpe ṭhitaṃ appagghataraṃ vā mahagghataraṃ vā samasamaṃ vā agghena parassa koṭṭhāsaṃ haritukāmo attano koṭṭhāse patitaṃ kusadaṇḍakaṃ parassa koṭṭhāse pātetukāmo uddharati, rakkhati tāva. Parassa koṭṭhāse pāteti, rakkhateva. Yadā pana tasmiṃ patite parassa koṭṭhāsato parassa kusadaṇḍakaṃ uddharati, uddhaṭamatte pārājiko hoti. Sace paṭhamataraṃ parakoṭṭhāsato kusadaṇḍakaṃ uddharati attano koṭṭhāse pātetukāmatāya uddhāre rakkhati , pātane rakkhati. Attano koṭṭhāsato pana attano kusadaṇḍakaṃ uddharati, uddhāreyeva rakkhati. Taṃ uddharitvā parakoṭṭhāse pātentassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ.
如果他把落在两份上的草签都藏起来不让看见,等其余比丘都走了以后,另一人说:“尊者,我的草签不见了。”“贤友,我的也不见了。”“那么,尊者,哪一份是我的?”“这份是你的。”他这样指出自己的份额后,那人不管有没有争论,拿了那份就走了;另一人随后去取他的份额,在取的时候犯波罗夷。即使那人说“我不把我的份额给你,你自己认准你的份额拿走”,他明知“这不是我的”,却仍然拿走那人的份额,在取的时候犯波罗夷。但如果另一人想:“这是你的份额,这是我的份额,何必为这个争吵呢?”于是说:“不管是我的还是你的,你们拿好的那份吧。”这就叫已给而取,这里不算偷取。即使那位怕争吵的比丘听到“你喜欢哪份就拿哪份”,他放下自己那份好的,只拿差的那份走了,另一人再翻找后取走剩下的,也同样不算偷取。巴利
Sace pana dvīsupi koṭṭhāsesu patitadaṇḍake adassanaṃ gameti, tato avasesabhikkhūsu gatesu itaro ‘‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, daṇḍako na paññāyatī’ti. ‘Mayhampi, āvuso, na paññāyatī’ti. ‘Katamo pana, bhante, mayhaṃ bhāgo’ti? ‘Ayaṃ tuyhaṃ bhāgo’’’ti attano bhāgaṃ dasseti, tasmiṃ vivaditvā vā avivaditvā vā taṃ gaṇhitvā gate itaro tassa bhāgaṃ uddharati, uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Sacepi tena ‘‘ahaṃ mama bhāgaṃ tuyhaṃ na demi, tvaṃ pana attano bhāgaṃ ñatvā gaṇhā’’ti vutte ‘‘nāyaṃ mamā’’ti jānantopi tasseva bhāgaṃ gaṇhāti, uddhāre pārājikaṃ. Sace pana itaro ‘‘ayaṃ tuyhaṃ bhāgo, ayaṃ mayhaṃ bhāgoti kiṃ iminā vivādenā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ vā patto hotu, tumhākaṃ vā, yo varabhāgo taṃ tumhe gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, dinnakaṃ nāma gahitaṃ hoti, natthettha avahāro. Sacepi so vivādabhīruko bhikkhu ‘‘yaṃ tuyhaṃ ruccati, taṃ gaṇhā’’ti vutto attano pattaṃ varabhāgaṃ ṭhapetvā lāmakaṃyeva gahetvā gacchati, tato itarassa vicinitāvasesaṃ gaṇhantassāpi avahāro natthevāti.
不过,注疏里是这样说的:“在这个地方,只以移动草签的方式提到了衣料的分配;但是应当把四种资具的生起和分配方式引出来说明。”这样说了之后,在《衣犍度》里,以耆婆的故事为开头,引出关于衣料生起的讨论:“尊者,愿世尊接受我这缝制好的一对布料,也请允许为比丘僧团设立居士衣。”(《大品》337)在《卧坐具犍度》里,以“那时,王舍城发生饥荒,人们没办法供养僧团饮食,他们想设指定食、邀请食、筹食、半月食、斋日食、初日食”这段经文为开头,引出关于钵食的讨论。(《小品》325)还是在《卧坐具犍度》里,以“那时,十七群比丘正在修葺某处边远的大寺,心想:‘我们要在这里安居。’六群比丘看见十七群比丘在修葺寺院”这个六群比丘的故事为开头,引出关于卧坐具的讨论。(《小品》316)在这部分的末尾,又详细讲述了熟酥等药物的问题。不过,我们会在这些内容各自出现的地方来讲;这样安排的理由,前面已经说过了。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāsupana vuttaṃ – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne kusasaṅkāmanavasena cīvarabhājanīyameva ekaṃ āgataṃ, catunnampi pana paccayānaṃ uppattiñca bhājanīyañca nīharitvā dassetabba’’nti evañca vatvā cīvarakkhandhake‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā sīveyyakaṃ dussayugaṃ; bhikkhusaṅghassa ca gahapaticīvaraṃ anujānātū’’ti (mahāva. 337) idaṃ jīvakavatthuṃ ādiṃ katvā uppannacīvarakathā, senāsanakkhandhake ‘‘tena kho pana samayena rājagahaṃ dubbhikkhaṃ hoti, manussā na sakkonti saṅghabhattaṃ kātuṃ, icchanti uddesabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ salākabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 325) idaṃ suttamādiṃ katvā piṇḍapātakathā, senāsanakkhandhakeyeva ‘‘tena kho pana samayena sattarasavaggiyā bhikkhū aññataraṃ paccantimaṃ mahāvihāraṃ paṭisaṅkharonti – ‘idha mayaṃ vassaṃ vasissāmā’ti. Addasaṃsu kho chabbaggiyā bhikkhū sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū vihāraṃ paṭisaṅkharonte’’ti (cūḷava. 316) idaṃ chabbaggiyavatthuṃ ādiṃ katvā āgatasenāsanakathā, tadavasāne ca sappiādibhesajjakathā vitthārena kathitā. Mayaṃ pana taṃ sabbaṃ āgatāgataṭṭhāneyeva kathayissāma; evaṃ kathane kāraṇaṃ pubbe vuttameva.
139 从此以后,关于浴室的事情本身就已经很清楚了。巴利
139. Ito paraṃ jantāgharavatthu uttānatthameva.
140 140. 在五种残食之事中,那些比丘让未受具足戒的人把食物作净后食用了。而取用残食时,应当取他们吃剩后丢弃的。如果能在他们正吃时让他们丢弃后再取,这也是可以的。不过,为了守护自己,也出于对别人的悲悯,就不应该取。巴利
140. Pañcasu vighāsavatthūsu te bhikkhū anupasampannena kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā paribhuñjiṃsu. Vighāsaṃ pana gaṇhantena khāditāvasesaṃ chaḍḍitaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Yadi sakkoti khādante chaḍḍāpetvā gaṇhituṃ, etampi vaṭṭati. Attaguttatthāya pana parānuddayatāya ca na gahetabbaṃ.
141 在米饭、嚼食、糕点、甘蔗、枣子、容器等物品的事情上,对并不存在的人说“给另一个人一份”,这就是无根据的执取。他是在物主们正在给的时候这样拿的。“比丘无犯波罗夷”,是说拿的是物主们给的东西,所以对他说无犯。在故意妄语上犯波逸提,是说他所做的那个故意妄语,对此判为波逸提,就像后面三合米粥的事例一样。至于拿取,这里的判定是:属于僧团的物品,由被选定的人或被吩咐的净人等给予时,以及属于在家人的物品,由物主或被吩咐的人给予时,说了“给另一个人一份”再拿,就属于应赔偿的物品。拿别人正在给的东西,要按物品价值处罚。由未被选定或未被吩咐的人给予时,说了“再给一份”再拿,或者算了虚假的年份再拿,就像四钵份的事例一样,在追回时,要按物品价值处罚。拿其他人这样给的东西,属于应赔偿的物品。但如果是物主吩咐“给这个人”而让人给的,或者自己亲手给的,那就是如法施与的。这是此处从全部注释的判定中提炼出来的要点。巴利
141. Odanakhādanīyapūvaucchutimbarūsakabhājanīyavatthūsu aparassa bhāgaṃ dehīti asantaṃ puggalaṃ āha. Amūlakaṃ aggahesīti sāmikesu dentesu evaṃ aggahesi. Anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassāti sāmikehi dinnaṃ aggahesi; tenassa anāpatti vuttā. Āpatti sampajānamusāvāde pācittiyassāti yo panānena sampajānamusāvādo vutto, tasmiṃ pācittiyaṃ āha; parato tekaṭulayāguvatthumhi viya. Gahaṇe pana ayaṃ vinicchayo – saṅghassa santakaṃ sammatena vā āṇattehi vā ārāmikādīhi diyyamānaṃ, gihīnañca santakaṃ sāmikena vā āṇattena vā diyyamānaṃ ‘‘aparassa bhāgaṃ dehī’’ti vatvā gaṇhato bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Aññena diyyamānaṃ gaṇhanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Asammatena vā anāṇattena vā diyyamāne ‘‘aparampi bhāgaṃ dehī’’ti vatvā vā kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā vā gaṇhanto pattacatukke viya tassuddhāreyeva bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo. Itarehi diyyamānaṃ evaṃ gaṇhato bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Sāmikena pana ‘‘imassa dehī’’ti dāpitaṃ vā sayaṃ dinnaṃ vā sudinnanti ayamettha sabbaaṭṭhakathāvinicchayato sāro.
142-3 在饭屋等事例中:所谓“饭屋”,是指卖饭的煮饭房。所谓“肉屋”,是指卖肉的煮肉房。所谓“糕点屋”,是指卖嚼食的煮糕点房。这里剩下的内容,以及资具事例中的内容,都很清楚。巴利
142-3. Odaniyagharādivatthūsu – odaniyagharaṃ nāma vikkāyikabhattapacanagharaṃ. Sūnagharaṃ nāma vikkāyikamaṃsapacanagharaṃ. Pūvagharaṃ nāma vikkāyikakhajjakapacanagharaṃ. Sesamettha, parikkhāravatthūsu ca pākaṭameva.
144 144. 关于凳子这一类情形:那位比丘盘算之后,心想“我要拿走到达这个位置的东西”,于是把它挪动了。在他挪动的过程中,并不构成偷盗。但是挪动之后,从他所盘算的地方拿取时,就说是犯了波罗夷。这样搬运时,如果对凳子没有盗心,就只对袋子估价后处理。如果对凳子也有盗心,那就对两者都估价后处理。坐垫等三个案例,内容浅显易懂。巴利
144. Pīṭhavatthusmiṃ – so bhikkhu parikappetvā ‘‘etaṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti saṅkāmesi. Tenassa saṅkāmane avahāro natthi. Saṅkāmetvā pana parikappitokāsato gahaṇe pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ haranto ca yadi pīṭhake theyyacittaṃ natthi, thavikaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo. Atha pīṭhakepi atthi, ubho agghāpetvā kāretabboti. Bhisiādīni tīṇi vatthūni pākaṭāneva.
146 146. 在亲厚取用等三种情形中,自己拿取时无犯;若叫人拿来,则成为应偿还之物。入村乞食者的那份,只有在近行界内站着时才可以拿。但如果施主们说:“尊者,近行界外的地方也请拿吧,我们会过来受用”,那么即使是村内的位置也可以拿。这里其余的内容,意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
146. Vissāsaggāhādīsu tīsu vatthūsu gahaṇe anāpatti, āharāpentesu bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Piṇḍāya paviṭṭhassa paṭiviso antoupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitasseva gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Yadi pana dāyakā ‘‘bahiupacāraṭṭhānampi bhante, bhāgaṃ gaṇhatha, āgantvā paribhuñjissantī’’ti vadanti, evaṃ antogāmaṭṭhānampi gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
148-9 在七个偷芒果贼等事例中,若以粪扫衣想而拿取,无犯;若叫人拿来,则属于应赔偿之物;若以盗心受用,犯波罗夷。这里的判定如下:物主有贪着,盗贼也有贪着,以粪扫衣想而吃的人,属于应赔偿之物;以盗心拿取的人,在拿走的那一刻就构成偷盗,应估量物品价值后处理。物主有贪着,盗贼无贪着,也是同样的判定。物主无贪着,盗贼有贪着,心想“我们还会再来拿”而把东西丢在某个隐秘处后离开,也是同样的判定。两者都无贪着,以粪扫衣想而吃的人,无犯;以盗心而吃的人,犯恶作。巴利
148-9. Sattasu ambacorakādivatthūsu paṃsukūlasaññāya gahaṇe anāpatti, āharāpentesu bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena paribhoge pārājikaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – sāmikāpi sālayā, corāpi sālayā, paṃsukūlasaññāya khādantassa bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena gaṇhato uddhāreyeva avahāro, bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo. Sāmikā sālayā, corā nirālayā, eseva nayo. Sāmikā nirālayā, corā sālayā; ‘‘puna gaṇhissāmā’’ti kismiñcideva gahanaṭṭhāne khipitvā gatā, eseva nayo. Ubhopi nirālayā, paṃsukūlasaññāya khādato anāpatti, theyyacittena dukkaṭaṃ.
如果是僧团所有的芒果等果实,不管是长在僧团园林里的,还是别人带来供养的,只要偷取价值五个摩沙迦或超过五个摩沙迦的东西,就犯波罗夷。在边境地区,因为盗贼作乱,村落里的人纷纷逃离时,比丘们也会舍弃精舍,心里想着“等以后有人再回来住时,我们再回来”,满怀期待地离开。比丘们到了这样的精舍后,把芒果等熟果当作“别人丢弃的东西”,以粪扫衣的想法来受用,不犯戒;如果是以偷盗的心来受用,就构成偷盗,应当对物品估价后进行处理。巴利
Saṅghassa ambādīsu pana saṅghārāme jātaṃ vā hotu, ānetvā dinnaṃ vā pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā agghanakaṃ avaharantassa pārājikaṃ. Paccante corupaddavena gāmesu vuṭṭhahantesu bhikkhūpi vihāre chaḍḍetvā ‘‘puna āvasante janapade āgamissāmā’’ti saussāhāva gacchanti. Bhikkhū tādisaṃ vihāraṃ patvā ambapakkādīni ‘‘chaḍḍitakānī’’ti paṃsukūlasaññāya paribhuñjanti, anāpatti; theyyacittena paribhuñjato avahāro hoti, bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo.
《大帕查里义注》和《简要义注》里则不加区分地说:在废弃的住处,如果有人以盗心受用果实或非果实,犯波罗夷。为什么?因为这些属于已来者和未来者所有。对于僧团共有物和个人私有物,只以是否有重返的意图为标准。如果从那里把芒果等熟果送给俗家以维系关系,犯污家恶作。如果以盗心送给别人,则按价值处罚。对僧团物也是如此。把指定为住处用途的物品送给俗家以维系关系,犯恶作;以占有者心态送,犯偷兰遮;以盗心送,犯波罗夷。如果物品不够,应按价值处罚。坐在近行界之外,以占有者心态受用,犯偷兰遮。敲钟并宣布时间后,心想“这该归我”而吃或用,是吃得安心、用得安心。不敲钟只宣布时间,或只敲钟不宣布时间,或既不敲钟也不宣布时间,知道别人不在后,心想“这该归我”而吃或用,也是吃得安心、用得安心。两个花圃的事例很清楚。巴利
Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyañca avisesena vuttaṃ – ‘‘chaḍḍitavihāre pana phalāphalaṃ theyyacittena paribhuñjato pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Āgatānāgatānaṃ santakattā’’ti. Gaṇasantake pana puggalike ca saussāhamattameva pamāṇaṃ. Sace pana tato ambapakkādiṃ kulasaṅgahaṇatthāya deti, kuladūsakadukkaṭaṃ. Theyyacittena dento agghena kāretabbo. Saṅghikepi eseva nayo. Senāsanatthāya niyamitaṃ kulasaṅgahaṇatthāya dadato dukkaṭaṃ, issaravatāya thullaccayaṃ, theyyacittena pārājikaṃ. No ce vatthu pahoti, agghena kāretabbo. Bahi upacārasīmāya nisīditvā issaravatāya paribhuñjato gīvā. Ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā kālaṃ ghosetvā ‘‘mayhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti khāditaṃ sukhāditaṃ. Ghaṇṭiṃ apaharitvā kālameva ghosetvā, ghaṇṭimeva paharitvā kālaṃ aghosetvā, ghaṇṭimpi apaharitvā kālampi aghosetvā aññesaṃ natthibhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘mayhaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti khāditampi sukhāditameva. Pupphārāmavatthudvayaṃ pākaṭameva.
150 150. 在“依言而行”的三种情形中,“依言而说”是指:被你吩咐之后,说“我依照你的话来说”。“比丘无犯波罗夷”,是因为物品由物主给予,所以无犯。再者,诸比丘,不应当说“依言而说”,意思是:一个比丘不应当被另一个比丘这样吩咐——“我被你吩咐之后,依照你的话来说”。不过,如果先划定范围,说“我将依照你的话取某某”,这是可以的。“依言而施”是指:被我吩咐之后,依照我的话而施与。其余部分和前面所说的一样。在这两种情形中,也是先划定范围之后再说,才可以。因为到这一步,他就从指责中脱身了。巴利
150. Vuttavādakavatthuttaye vutto vajjemīti tayā vutto hutvā ‘‘tava vacanena vadāmī’’ti attho. Anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassāti sāmikehi dinnattā anāpatti. Na ca, bhikkhave, ‘‘vutto vajjemī’’ti vattabboti ‘‘ahaṃ tayā vutto hutvā tava vacanena vadāmī’’ti evaṃ añño bhikkhu aññena bhikkhunā na vattabboti attho. Paricchedaṃ pana katvā ‘‘itthannāmaṃ tava vacanena gaṇhissāmī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Vutto vajjehīti mayā vutto hutvā mama vacanena vadehīti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Imesupi ca dvīsu vatthūsu paricchedaṃ katvā vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Ettāvatā hi upārambhā mutto hotīti.
151-2 在三个摩尼珠事例的中间那个事例里——“我非有病”的意思就是“我没有生病”。其余部分很清楚。巴利
151-2. Maṇivatthuttayassa majjhime vatthusmiṃ – nāhaṃ akallakoti nāhaṃ gilānoti attho. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
153 153. 关于两个野猪陷阱的事例:第一位比丘看到野猪饥饿,出于悲悯把它放了,所以不犯戒。但如果物主不肯接受,就应该赔偿财物——要么牵来一头同样大的死野猪给他,要么赔等值的财物。如果到处都找不到陷阱的主人,就把等值的布、袈裟或钵放在陷阱附近,放在他们回来时能看见的地方,然后才能离开。如果是以偷盗的心放走野猪,那就犯波罗夷。在这里,有的野猪用脚把陷阱拖过来,陷阱刚一断,它因为还没离开原来的位置,所以仍然算停在原处,就像急流中被拴住的船一样。有的野猪按自己的习性停在原地,有的趴着,有的被机关陷阱缠住。所谓机关陷阱,就是末端绑着弓、钩或其他棍棒,这些棍棒到处挂在树上之类的地方,挡住野猪的去路。其中,拖了陷阱之后还停在那里的,陷阱的绑缚处只有一处,因为陷阱一松开或一断,它马上就跑掉了。按自己习性停在原地的,绑缚处加上四只脚,一共五处。趴着的,绑缚处加上趴卧处,一共两处。被机关陷阱缠住的,它走到哪里,哪里就是绑缚处。所以,从各处把它放走的比丘,哪怕有十位、二十位甚至上百位,都犯波罗夷。就像看到各处来的奴隶,却只放走其中一个奴隶一样。巴利
153. Sūkaravatthudvaye – kiñcāpi paṭhamassa bhikkhuno chātajjhattaṃ disvā kāruññena mocitattā anāpatti. Sāmikesu pana asampaṭicchantesu bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, tāva mahanto vā matasūkaro āharitvā dātabbo, tadagghanakaṃ vā bhaṇḍaṃ. Sace pāsasāmike kuhiñcipi na passati, pāsasāmantā tadagghanakaṃ sāṭakaṃ vā kāsāvaṃ vā thālakaṃ vā yathā te āgatā passanti, īdise ṭhāne ṭhapetvāva gantabbaṃ, theyyacittena pana mocentassa pārājikameva. Ettha ca koci sūkaro pāsaṃ pādena kaḍḍhitvā chinnamatte pāse ṭhānācāvanadhammena ṭhānena ṭhito hoti caṇḍasote baddhanāvā viya. Koci attano dhammatāya ṭhito, koci nipanno, koci kūṭapāsena baddho hoti. Kūṭapāso nāma yassa ante dhanukaṃ vā aṅkusako vā añño vā koci daṇḍako baddho hoti, yo tattha tattha rukkhādīsu laggitvā sūkarassa gamanaṃ nivāreti. Tatra pāsaṃ kaḍḍhitvā ṭhitassa ekameva ṭhānaṃ pāsabandhanaṃ, so hi pāse muttamatte vā chinnamatte vā palāyati. Attano dhammatāya ṭhitassa bandhanañca cattāro ca pādāti pañca ṭhānāni. Nipannassa bandhanañca sayanañcāti dve ṭhānāni. Kūṭapāsabaddhassa yattha yattha gacchati, taṃ tadeva ṭhānaṃ. Tasmā taṃ tato tato mocentā dasapi vīsatipi satampi bhikkhū pārājikaṃ āpajjanti. Tattha tattha āgataṃ disvā ekameva dāsaṃ palāpento viya.
前面三种四足动物的情形,应当按照前面所说的方式,理解令其移动和令其离开原处的情况。对于被狗咬伤的野猪,如果以悲悯心让人把它放走,要赔偿物品;如果以盗心放走,就犯波罗夷。如果野猪还没到陷阱附近或还没到狗旁边,有人半路迎上去先把它赶走,就不构成不与取。如果有人给被绑住的野猪草和水,让它恢复力气,然后大声喊叫,心想“它一受惊就会逃跑”,如果它因此逃跑,就犯波罗夷。把陷阱弄弱之后,用喊叫声让它逃跑的,也是同样的判法。巴利
Purimānaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ catuppadakathāyaṃ vuttanayena phandāpanaṭhānācāvanāni veditabbāni. Sunakhadaṭṭhaṃ sūkaraṃ vissajjāpentassāpi kāruññādhippāyena bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena pārājikaṃ. Pāsaṭṭhānaṃ pana sunakhasamīpaṃ vā asampattaṃ paṭipathaṃ gantvā paṭhamameva palāpentassa avahāro natthi. Yopi baddhasūkarassa ghāsañca pānīyañca datvā balaṃ gāhāpetvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karoti – ‘‘utrasto palāyissatī’’ti; so ce palāyati, pārājikaṃ. Pāsaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā ukkuṭṭhisaddena palāpentassāpi eseva nayo.
如果有人给了草和水之后离开,心里想“它恢复力气就会逃跑”,如果它真的逃跑了,就要赔偿物品。把陷阱弄得不结实之后离开,也是同样的判法。有人在陷阱旁边放刀或放火,心里想“绳子断了或者被烧了,它就会逃跑”。如果野猪摇动陷阱,导致绳子断了或被烧了而逃跑,就要赔偿物品。如果把陷阱连着棍子一起推倒,后来野猪踩着它逃走,就要赔偿物品。如果野猪被压石压住了,有人想把它放走,出于怜悯把压石抬起来,就要赔偿物品;如果是以偷盗的心去做,就犯波罗夷。如果刚抬起来时它没走,而是后来才逃走,就要赔偿物品。如果把抬起来的压石又放下,后来野猪踩着它逃走,就要赔偿物品。对于掉进陷阱里的野猪,出于怜悯把它拉出来,就要赔偿物品;如果是以偷盗的心去做,就犯波罗夷。如果把陷阱填平后离开,后来野猪踩着它逃走,就要赔偿物品。对于被尖桩刺中的野猪,出于怜悯把它拔出来,就要赔偿物品;如果是以偷盗的心去做,就犯波罗夷。如果把尖桩拔出来之后丢掉,就要赔偿物品。巴利
Yo pana ghāsañca pānīyañca datvā gacchati, ‘‘balaṃ gahetvā palāyissatī’’ti; so ce palāyati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Pāsaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā gacchantassāpi eseva nayo. Pāsasantike satthaṃ vā aggiṃ vā ṭhapeti ‘‘chinne vā daḍḍhe vā palāyissatī’’ti. Sūkaro pāsaṃ cālento chinne vā daḍḍhe vā palāyati, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Pāsaṃ yaṭṭhiyā saha pāteti, pacchā sūkaro taṃ maddanto gacchati , bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Sūkaro adūhalapāsāṇehi akkanto hoti, taṃ palāpetukāmassa adūhalaṃ kāruññena ukkhipato bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena pārājikaṃ. Sace ukkhittamatte agantvā pacchā gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Ukkhipitvā ṭhapitaṃ adūhalaṃ pāteti, pacchā sūkaro taṃ maddanto gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Opāte patitasūkarampi kāruññena uddharato bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena pārājikaṃ. Opātaṃ pūretvā nāseti, pacchā sūkaro taṃ maddanto gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Sūle viddhaṃ kāruññena uddharati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena pārājikaṃ. Sūlaṃ uddharitvā chaḍḍeti, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ.
在寺院范围内,如果有人布下绳套或压石陷阱,应当制止他们:“这里是野兽的避难处,不要在这里做这种事。”如果他们说出“尊者,请让人拿走”,那就应当让人拿走。如果他们自己拿走,那最好。如果他们既不拿走,也不让人拿走,那就请求守护者同意后,让人拿走。人们在守护庄稼的时候,会在田里布下绳套、压石等,想着“我们吃着肉,也能保护庄稼”。等过了庄稼的季节,他们对那些地方不再在意、已经离开之后,对于那里被绑住或落入陷阱的动物,可以把它放走。巴利
Vihārabhūmiyaṃ pana pāse vā adūhalaṃ vā oḍḍentā vāretabbā – ‘‘migarūpānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṭṭhānametaṃ, mā idha evaṃ karothā’’ti. Sace ‘‘harāpetha, bhante’’ti vadanti, harāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha sayaṃ haranti, sundarameva. Atha neva haranti, na harituṃ denti, rakkhaṃ yācitvā harāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Manussā sassarakkhaṇakāle khettesu pāse ca adūhalapāsāṇādīni ca karonti – ‘‘maṃsaṃ khādantā sassāni rakkhissāmā’’ti. Vītivatte sassakāle tesu anālayesu pakkantesu tattha baddhaṃ vā patitaṃ vā mocetuṃ vaṭṭatīti.
对于两起鹿的事例和猪的事例,判决方式和前面讲猪的事例时所说的一样。巴利
Migavatthudvayepi sūkaravatthūsu vuttasadisoyeva vinicchayo.
关于两种鱼笼的情形,判定方法也和前面一样。不过这里有个区别:如果打开鱼笼的口,或者解开尾部的囊袋,或者从侧面开个洞,把鱼从鱼笼里赶出来让它们跑掉,就犯波罗夷。拿饭粒给鱼看,用这种方式把鱼引走,也犯波罗夷。连鱼笼一起提起来,也犯波罗夷。如果只是打开鱼笼口、解开尾部囊袋、或者开个洞,而鱼自己凭本性跑掉了,那就只需赔偿物品。这样做了之后拿饭粒给鱼看,鱼为了觅食出来跑掉,也只是赔偿物品。如果不打开笼口、不解开尾部囊袋、不从侧面开洞,只是拿饭粒给鱼看,而鱼因为饥饿用头撞出空间,为了觅食出来跑掉,也只是赔偿物品。对于空鱼笼,如果打开笼口、或者解开尾部囊袋、或者开个洞,来来往往的鱼到了出口处从囊袋的孔洞跑掉,也只是赔偿物品。拿起空鱼笼扔进草丛里,也只是赔偿物品。就像车上的货物、凳子上的袋子那样。巴利
Macchavatthudvayepi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – kumīnamukhaṃ vivaritvā vā pacchāpuṭakaṃ muñcitvā vā passena chiddaṃ katvā vā kumīnato macche pothetvā palāpentassa pārājikaṃ. Bhattasitthāni dassetvā evaṃ palāpentassāpi pārājikaṃ. Saha kumīnena uddharatopi pārājikaṃ. Kevalaṃ kumīnamukhaṃ vivarati, pacchāpuṭakaṃ muñcati, chiddaṃ vā karoti, macchā pana attano dhammatāya palāyanti, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Evaṃ katvā bhattasitthāni dasseti, macchā gocaratthāya nikkhamitvā palāyanti, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Mukhaṃ avivaritvā pacchāpuṭakaṃ amuñcitvā passena chiddaṃ akatvā kevalaṃ bhattasitthāni dasseti, macchā pana chātajjhattā sīsena paharitvā okāsaṃ katvā gocaratthāya nikkhamitvā palāyanti, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Tucchakumīnassa mukhaṃ vā vivarati, pacchāpuṭakaṃ vā muñcati, chiddaṃ vā karoti, āgatāgatā macchā dvāraṃ pattā puṭakachiddehi palāyanti, bhaṇḍadeyyameva. Tucchakumīnaṃ gahetvā gumbe khipati, bhaṇḍadeyyamevāti. Yāne bhaṇḍaṃ pīṭhe thavikāya sadisaṃ.
关于肉片这件事:如果是在空中抓取,那么抓到的那个位置就是它所在的位置。要用六种方式来判断,然后才能认定是否构成了“令其离开原处”。这里剩下的内容,应当依照木守护者、染衣者的衣物以及芒果贼等事例中所说的方法来判定。巴利
Maṃsapesivatthumhi – sace ākāse gaṇhāti, gahitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ. Taṃ chahākārehi paricchinditvā ṭhānācāvanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha dārugopālakarajakasāṭakavatthūsu ca ambacorakādivatthūsu vuttanayena vinicchinitabbaṃ.
155 关于瓮器之事:如果有人拿了酥油等价值不到一足价的东西,然后立下防护,想“我不再这样做了”,但第二天等时候又生起同样的心,照样舍弃防护去受用,即使全部受用了,也不犯波罗夷。犯恶作或偷兰遮,而且这东西属于应当赔偿的。这位比丘也正是这样做的,因此说“比丘不犯波罗夷”。但如果他没有舍弃防护,心想“我要每天受用”,一点一点地受用,那么到哪一天凑满一足价,那一天就犯波罗夷。巴利
155.Kumbhivatthusmiṃ – yo sappitelādīni apādagghanakāni gahetvā ‘‘na puna evaṃ karissāmī’’ti saṃvare ṭhatvā dutiyadivasādīsupi puna citte uppanne evameva dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā paribhuñjanto sabbampi taṃ paribhuñjati, nevatthi pārājikaṃ. Dukkaṭaṃ vā thullaccayaṃ vā āpajjati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. Ayampi bhikkhu evamevamakāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassā’’ti. Dhuranikkhepaṃ pana akatvā ‘‘divase divase paribhuñjissāmī’’ti thokaṃ thokampi paribhuñjato yasmiṃ divase pādagghanakaṃ pūrati, tasmiṃ pārājikaṃ.
共谋搬运的事例,应按照共谋搬运中判断的方法来理解;遗忘的事例,涉及施食处等情形;两件残食的事例,涉及芒果贼等情形,都应按照前面所说的判断方法来理解。两件草的事例,含义本身就很清楚。巴利
Saṃvidāvahāravatthūni saṃvidāvahāre, muṭṭhivatthūni odaniyagharādivatthūsu dve vighāsavatthūni ambacorakādivatthūsu vuttavinicchayanayena veditabbāni. Dve tiṇavatthūni uttānatthāneva.
156 156. 在分芒果等事例中,那些比丘去了一个常住比丘已划定范围的村落住处。在那里,比丘们虽然吃着各种果实,但当那些客比丘到来时,他们并没有对净人说:“把果实给长老们。”于是那些客比丘心想:“难道僧团的东西我们不该得到吗?”就敲钟分果,也按雨安居的次序给了他们一份,自己也吃了。因此,世尊对他们说:“诸比丘,为了受用,无犯。”所以,如今也是这样:如果常住比丘不给客比丘,而在分果的时候,看到有别人应得的一份,就以偷盗的心自己吃掉,那么在那里,客比丘可以敲钟分配后受用。巴利
156.Ambabhājāpanādivatthūsu te bhikkhū ekaṃ gāmakāvāsaṃ paricchinnabhikkhukaṃ agamaṃsu. Tattha bhikkhū phalāphalaṃ paribhuñjamānāpi tesu āgatesu ‘‘therānaṃ phalāni dethā’’ti kappiyakārake na avocuṃ. Atha te bhikkhū ‘‘kiṃ saṅghikaṃ amhākaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhājāpetvā tesampi vassaggena bhāgaṃ datvā attanāpi paribhuñjiṃsu. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā ‘‘anāpatti, bhikkhave, paribhogatthāyā’’ti āha. Tasmā idānipi yattha āvāsikā āgantukānaṃ na denti, phalavāre ca sampatte aññesaṃ atthibhāvaṃ disvā corikāya attanāva khādanti, tattha āgantukehi ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā bhājetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
如果常住比丘把树守护起来,到了分果的时候再分着吃,并且如法地用来供给四种资具,那么客比丘对这些就没有支配权。即使是那些已经被指定为供衣服之用的树,客比丘同样没有支配权。对于被指定为供其余资具之用的树,道理也是一样。巴利
Yattha pana āvāsikā rukkhe rakkhitvā phalavāre sampatte bhājetvā khādanti, catūsu paccayesu sammā upanenti, anissarā tattha āgantukā. Yepi rukkhā cīvaratthāya niyametvā dinnā, tesupi āgantukā anissarā. Eseva nayo sesapaccayatthāya niyametvā dinnesupi.
不过,如果那些树木并没有被这样指定,常住比丘们守护、保管之后却以盗心去受用,那么他们就不应该按照常住比丘们的共住规约来行事。如果树木是为了受用果实而布施的,常住比丘们也守护、保管,并如法地拿来供养,那么就应该按照他们自己的共住规约来行事。然而,《大护持》中说:对于指定给予的四种资具,如果以盗心受用,应当估量物品价值后予以处罚。如果只是按受用的方式分配来受用,则须赔偿物品。其中,被指定为住所用的,如果只是按受用的方式分配来受用,则犯土喇咤亚罪,并须赔偿物品。巴利
Ye pana tathā aniyamitā, āvāsikā ca te rakkhitvā gopetvā corikāya paribhuñjanti, na tesu āvāsikānaṃ katikāya ṭhātabbaṃ. Ye phalaparibhogatthāya dinnā, āvāsikāpi ne rakkhitvā gopetvā sammā upanenti, tesuyeva tesaṃ katikāya ṭhātabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ niyametvā dinnaṃ theyyacittena paribhuñjanto bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo. Paribhogavaseneva taṃ bhājetvā paribhuñjantassa bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Yaṃ panettha senāsanatthāya niyamitaṃ, taṃ paribhogavaseneva bhājetvā paribhuñjantassa thullaccayañca bhaṇḍadeyyañcā’’ti.
指定给衣物的,就只能用在衣物上。如果碰上饥荒,比丘们靠乞食过得很辛苦,而衣物却容易得到,那就可以为了僧团的安稳,做告白羯磨后,也用在乞食上。如果比丘们因为住所或医药而困苦,也可以为了僧团的安稳,做告白羯磨后,用在那些用途上。指定给乞食、指定给医药而布施的东西,也是同样的道理。不过,指定给住所而布施的,属于重物,要好好守护保管,只能用在那个用途上。但如果碰上饥荒,比丘们没法靠乞食维持生活,这时候因为国王、疾病、盗贼、恐惧等原因去别处的人,他们的精舍会荒废,棕榈树、椰子树等也会被毁掉,而依靠住所资具却能维持生活。在这种时候,即使把住所舍出去,为了维护住所而受用,也是世尊允许的。所以,可以留下一两处上等住所,把其余下等的舍出去用在乞食上。但不能把根本彻底断掉来使用。巴利
Odissa cīvaratthāya dinnaṃ cīvareyeva upanetabbaṃ. Sace dubbhikkhaṃ hoti, bhikkhū piṇḍapātena kilamanti, cīvaraṃ pana sulabhaṃ, saṅghasuṭṭhutāya apalokanakammaṃ katvā piṇḍapātepi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Senāsanena gilānapaccayena vā kilamantesu saṅghasuṭṭhutāya apalokanakammaṃ katvā tadatthāyapi upanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Odissa piṇḍapātatthāya gilānapaccayatthāya ca dinnepi eseva nayo. Odissa senāsanatthāya dinnaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, taṃ rakkhitvā gopetvā tadatthameva upanetabbaṃ. Sace pana dubbhikkhaṃ hoti, bhikkhū piṇḍapātena na yāpenti. Ettha rājarogacorabhayādīhi aññattha gacchantānaṃ vihārā palujjanti, tālanāḷikerādike vināsenti, senāsanapaccayaṃ pana nissāya yāpetuṃ sakkā hoti. Evarūpe kāle senāsanaṃ vissajjetvāpi senāsanajagganatthāya paribhogo bhagavatā anuññāto. Tasmā ekaṃ vā dve vā varasenāsanāni ṭhapetvā itarāni lāmakakoṭiyā piṇḍapātatthāya vissajjetuṃ vaṭṭati. Mūlavatthucchedaṃ pana katvā na upanetabbaṃ .
如果有人把一座园林指定为四种资具的用途之后布施出来,就不该在那座园林上作告白羯磨。但若某种资具短缺,就可以拿来用在那个用途上。园林应当有人守护,即使付工资,也应当雇人守护。那些领了工资、就住在园林里盖了房子守护的人,如果他们把椰子或棕榈果等送给来访的比丘,只有僧团允许的——“你们每天可以吃这么多”——他们才能给那么多;超过这个数量,即使他们给,也不该接受。巴利
Yo pana ārāmo catuppaccayatthāya niyametvā dinno, tattha apalokanakammaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Yena pana paccayena ūnaṃ, tadatthaṃ upanetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ārāmo jaggitabbo, vetanaṃ datvāpi jaggāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ye pana vetanaṃ labhitvā ārāmeyeva gehaṃ katvā vasantā rakkhanti, te ce āgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ nāḷikeraṃ vā tālapakkaṃ vā denti, yaṃ tesaṃ saṅghena anuññātaṃ hoti – ‘‘divase divase ettakaṃ nāma khādathā’’ti tadeva te dātuṃ labhanti; tato uttari tesaṃ dadantānampi gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
如果有人以租约的方式取得园林后,只把符合规定的物品提供给僧团,作为四种资具的用途,那么这个人即使布施很多,也是可以的。如果园林是为了佛塔的灯油而布施,或者是为了修补破损而布施,那么这座园林也应当被维护;即使要支付工资,也应当雇人维护。在这里,佛塔所属的物品和僧团所属的物品都可以用来支付工资。对于这座园林,那些用工资住在那里守护的人,以及那些以租约取得园林后提供符合规定物品的人,他们布施那里出产的果实的方式,应当依照前面所说的办法来理解。巴利
Yo pana ārāmaṃ keṇiyā gahetvā saṅghassa catuppaccayatthāya kappiyabhaṇḍameva deti, ayaṃ bahukampi dātuṃ labhati. Cetiyassa padīpatthāya vā khaṇḍaphullapaṭisaṅkharaṇatthāya vā dinno ārāmopi paṭijaggitabbo; vetanaṃ datvāpi jaggāpetabbo. Vetanañca panettha cetiyasantakampi saṅghasantakampi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Etampi ārāmaṃ vetanena tattheva vasitvā rakkhantānañca keṇiyā gahetvā kappiyabhaṇḍadāyakānañca tattha jātakaphaladānaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.
在庵婆罗园等事例中说到:“比丘们,守园人布施,无犯。”那么这里,什么样的守园人布施是允许的,什么样的不允许呢?大须摩长老先说:“凡是限定给守园人的——‘你每天拿这么多’——只有那么多是允许的,超过就不允许。”大莲华长老则说:“哪有给守园人立下字据或做个标记才布施的?东西交到他们手上,他们就是主人,所以他们给的东西即使很多也允许。”《库伦达注》里则说:“人们的花园或其他果类非果类,由孩子们看守,他们给的允许。但叫人拿来之后再接受,则不可以。对于僧团之物和佛塔之物,只有以租金取得后看守的人所给的布施才允许。以工资看守的人,只允许给属于他自己那份的量。”《大护法注》里则说:“在家人中的守园人布施给比丘的,这允许。而僧团的守园人,从自己的工资中扣出一部分来布施,这允许。如果有人以半个花园或某几棵树作为工资来守护,他也只允许布施属于自己那份的树。以租金取得后看守的人,则全部允许。”不过这一切在字句上虽有不同,在意义上却是同一个意思;所以应当了解了其中的意趣之后再接受。巴利
Ambapālakādivatthūsu – anāpatti, bhikkhave, gopakassa dāneti ettha kataraṃ pana gopakadānaṃ vaṭṭati, kataraṃ na vaṭṭatīti? Mahāsumatthero tāva āha – ‘‘yaṃ gopakassa paricchinditvā dinnaṃ hoti – ‘ettakaṃ divase divase gaṇhā’ti tadeva vaṭṭati; tato uttari na vaṭṭatī’’ti. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘kiṃ gopakānaṃ paṇṇaṃ āropetvā nimittasaññaṃ vā katvā dinnaṃ atthi, etesaṃ hatthe vissaṭṭhakassa ete issarā, tasmā yaṃ te denti taṃ bahukampi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘manussānaṃ ārāmaṃ vā aññaṃ vā phalāphalaṃ dārakā rakkhanti, tehi dinnaṃ vaṭṭati . Āharāpetvā pana na gahetabbaṃ. Saṅghike pana cetiyasantake ca keṇiyā gahetvā rakkhantasseva dānaṃ vaṭṭati. Vetanena rakkhantassa attano bhāgamattaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘yaṃ gihīnaṃ ārāmarakkhakā bhikkhūnaṃ denti, etaṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhusaṅghassa pana ārāmagopakā yaṃ attano bhatiyā khaṇḍetvā denti, etaṃ vaṭṭati. Yopi upaḍḍhārāmaṃ vā kecideva rukkhe vā bhatiṃ labhitvā rakkhati, tassāpi attano pattarukkhatoyeva dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Keṇiyā gahetvā rakkhantassa pana sabbampi vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Etaṃ pana sabbaṃ byañjanato nānaṃ, atthato ekameva; tasmā adhippāyaṃ ñatvā gahetabbaṃ.
在木材这件事上,有人说“世尊,我只是暂时用一下”,这是想表达“世尊,我是暂时用一下的心”的人说的。所谓“暂时用一下的心”,意思就是“我会再拿回来还回去”这样的心。世尊说:“如果是暂时使用的情形,就不算犯戒。”巴利
Dāruvatthumhi – tāvakāliko ahaṃ bhagavāti tāvakālikacitto ahaṃ bhagavāti vattukāmena vuttaṃ, tāvakālikacittoti ‘‘puna āharitvā dassāmī’’ti evaṃcitto ahanti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavā ‘‘tāvakālike anāpattī’’ti āha.
这里还有一个不属于圣典的判定原则:如果僧团要办僧团的事务,比如建布萨堂或食堂,那就先向僧团请示之后,暂时拿来用。如果僧团的材料没人看管,被雨淋湿了,或者被太阳晒干了,那也可以把这些全都搬到自己的住处去用。如果僧团派人去取,就应该用别的材料或者按价钱来补偿。如果没办法补偿,就应该说:“尊者,这是用僧团的东西做的,请用僧团共用的受用物来使用。”至于住处,这位比丘就是主人。即使石柱、木柱、门板或者窗户不够用,也可以暂时拿僧团的东西来修补,让它恢复原样。这个原则对其他材料也同样适用。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha pāḷimuttakavinicchayo – sace saṅgho saṅghikaṃ kammaṃ kāreti uposathāgāraṃ vā bhojanasālaṃ vā, tato āpucchitvā tāvakālikaṃ haritabbaṃ. Yo pana saṅghiko dabbasambhāro agutto deve vassante temeti, ātapena sukkhati, taṃ sabbampi āharitvā attano āvāse kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṅgho āharāpento aññena vā dabbasambhārena mūlena vā saññāpetabbo. Na sakkā ce hoti saññāpetuṃ, ‘‘saṅghikena, bhante, kataṃ saṅghikaparibhogena vaḷañjathā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Senāsanassa pana ayameva bhikkhu issaro. Sacepi pāsāṇatthambho vā rukkhatthambho vā kavāṭaṃ vā vātapānaṃ vā nappahoti, saṅghikaṃ tāvakālikaṃ āharitvā pākatikaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Esa nayo aññesupi dabbasambhāresūti.
关于水的规定:当水很难得到,要从一由旬或半由旬外取来时,对于这样已被占有的水,取用就构成偷盗。如果水是从别处取来的,或者存放在池塘等地方,只是用来煮粥做饭和饮用,不作其他大的用途,那么以偷盗心取用,也构成偷盗。但是,如果拿一壶或两壶水来洗座位、浇菩提树、作水供养、煮染料,这是允许的。在这种情况下,应当依照僧团的规约来做。如果取用过量,或者以偷盗心把泥土等东西放进去,就应当估量物品的价值来处理。巴利
Udakavatthusmiṃ – yadā udakaṃ dullabhaṃ hoti, yojanatopi aḍḍhayojanatopi āharīyati, evarūpe pariggahitaudake avahāro. Yatopi āharimato vā pokkharaṇīādīsu ṭhitato vā kevalaṃ yāgubhattaṃ sampādenti, pānīyaparibhogañca karonti, na aññaṃ mahāparibhogaṃ, tampi theyyacittena gaṇhato avahāro. Yato pana ekaṃ vā dve vā ghaṭe gahetvā āsanaṃ dhovituṃ, bodhirukkhe siñcituṃ udakapūjaṃ kātuṃ, rajanaṃ pacituṃ labbhati, tattha saṅghassa katikavaseneva paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Atirekaṃ gaṇhanto, mattikādīni vā theyyacittena pakkhipanto bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabbo.
如果常住的比丘们把共同约定搞得很强硬,不许别人洗或染物品,自己却趁别人没看见时拿来全都做了,那他们就不该坚持这个约定。他们自己洗多少,就该允许别人也洗多少。如果僧团有两三个池塘或水井,并且已经约定:“要在这里洗澡,要从这里取饮用水,要在这里做一切日常使用。”那就应该完全按照约定来做。如果没有约定,那在哪里做一切日常使用都可以。巴利
Sace āvāsikā katikavattaṃ daḷhaṃ karonti, aññesaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovituṃ vā rajituṃ vā na denti, attanā pana aññesaṃ apassantānaṃ gahetvā sabbaṃ karonti, tesaṃ katikāya na ṭhātabbaṃ. Yattakaṃ te dhovanti, tattakaṃ dhovitabbaṃ. Sace saṅghassa dve tisso pokkharaṇiyo vā udakasoṇḍiyo vā honti, katikā ca katā ‘‘ettha nhāyitabbaṃ, ito pānīyaṃ gahetabbaṃ, idha sabbaparibhogo kātabbo’’ti. Katikavatteneva sabbaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yattha katikā natthi, tattha sabbaparibhogo vaṭṭatīti.
关于陶土的情况:如果某个地方陶土很难得到,或者有人把各种颜色的陶土拿来存放在那里,那么即使只有一点点,也值五个摩沙迦,因此犯波罗夷。不过,如果是为了僧团的事务或塔庙的事务,在事情完成之后,先征得僧团同意再取用,或者只是暂时取用,那是可以的。石灰和彩绘颜料也是同样的道理。巴利
Mattikāvatthusmiṃ – yattha mattikā dullabhā hoti, nānappakārā vā vaṇṇamattikā āharitvā ṭhapitā, tattha thokāpi pañcamāsakaṃ agghati, tasmā pārājikaṃ. Saṅghike pana kamme cetiyakamme ca niṭṭhite saṅghaṃ āpucchitvā vā tāvakālikaṃ vā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sudhāyapi cittakammavaṇṇesupi eseva nayo.
关于草的事:如果草被烧了,因为并没有把它从原来的地方移走,所以犯恶作,但需要赔偿物品。僧团把草整理好之后,用来覆盖僧团的住处;后来某时僧团没法再整理了,这时如果另一位比丘以职责的名义去整理,这草还是属于僧团的。如果他不整理,僧团就应该对某位比丘说:“你整理一下,然后交出来。”如果那位比丘想要一份,即使给了他一份,也应该让他整理。如果他要求增加份额,也还是应该给。如果他还要再增加,就应该对他说:“你去整理,全部拿走,覆盖你自己住的住所。”为什么?因为如果损坏了,就没有利益了。不过,布施的人不应该连地基一起给,那是重物;只应该给草本身。如果他在整理后覆盖自己住所时,僧团又能整理了,就应该对他说:“你不用整理了,僧团会整理。”巴利
Tiṇavatthūsu – jhāpitatiṇe ṭhānācāvanassa abhāvā dukkaṭaṃ, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hoti. Saṅgho tiṇavatthuṃ jaggitvā saṅghikaṃ āvāsaṃ chādeti, puna kadāci jaggituṃ na sakkoti, athañño eko bhikkhu vattasīsena jaggati, saṅghassevetaṃ. No ce jaggati, saṅgheneko bhikkhu vattabbo ‘‘jaggitvā dehī’’ti. So ce bhāgaṃ icchati, bhāgaṃ datvāpi jaggāpetabbaṃ. Sace bhāgaṃ vaḍḍheti, dātabbameva. Vaḍḍhetiyeva, ‘‘gaccha jaggitvā sabbaṃ gahetvā attano santakaṃ senāsanaṃ chādehī’’ti vattabbo. Kasmā? Naṭṭhe attho natthi. Dadantehi pana savatthukaṃ na dātabbaṃ , garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti; tiṇamattaṃ pana dātabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ ce jaggitvā attano senāsanaṃ chādente puna saṅgho jaggituṃ pahoti, ‘‘tvaṃ mā jaggi, saṅgho jaggissatī’’ti vattabboti.
床等七种物品是大家都知道的。但在巴利律典经文中,即使没有直接提及,如果拿走石柱、树柱,或者其他任何够得上“一足价”的东西,同样犯波罗夷。在禅堂等地方,对于被丢弃、属于精舍等的墙壁或围墙,如果有人打破它而偷取砖块等物,也是同样的处理方式。为什么呢?因为僧团的东西,有时有人住,有时没人住。在边境地区,因为害怕盗贼,人们迁离的时候,如果有人拿走被遗弃的寺院等处的任何资具,也是同样的处理方式。不过,如果有人只是暂时从那里拿走,后来比丘们又住回那些寺院时要求归还,那就应该归还。即使从那里拿来后已经建成了坐卧处,也应该归还那个坐卧处或者等值的东西。如果人们没有断绝恋着而迁离,心想“我们还会再回来住的”,这时如果有人拿了僧团共有的或个人的物品,只要他们同意,就不需要补救;但如果是僧团的重物,那就必须补救。巴利
Mañcādīni satta vatthūni pākaṭāneva. Pāḷiyaṃ pana anāgatampi pāsāṇatthambhaṃ vā rukkhatthambhaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci pādagghanakaṃ harantassa pārājikameva. Padhānagharādīsu chaḍḍitapatitānaṃ pariveṇādīnaṃ kuṭṭampi pākārampi bhinditvā iṭṭhakādīni avaharantassāpi eseva nayo. Kasmā? Saṅghikaṃ nāma kadāci ajjhāvasanti, kadāci na ajjhāvasanti. Paccante corabhayena janapade vuṭṭhahante chaḍḍitavihārādīsu kiñci parikkhāraṃ harantassāpi eseva nayo. Ye pana tato tāvakālikaṃ haranti, puna āvasitesu ca vihāresu bhikkhū āharāpenti, dātabbaṃ. Sacepi tato āharitvā senāsanaṃ kataṃ hoti, taṃ vā tadagghanakaṃ vā dātabbameva. ‘‘Puna āvasissāmā’’ti ālayaṃ acchinditvā vuṭṭhitesu janapadesu gaṇasantakaṃ vā puggalikaṃ vā gahitaṃ hoti; te ce anujānanti, paṭikammena kiccaṃ natthi. Saṅghikaṃ pana garubhaṇḍaṃ, tasmā paṭikammaṃ kattabbameva.
157 关于在寺院中受用物品的这一段,意思本身就很清楚。巴利
157. Vihāraparibhogavatthu uttānatthameva.
比丘们,我说“允许暂时拿走”这句话的意思是:如果一位比丘把属于僧团的床或椅子暂时拿走,在自己觉得舒服的地方,以僧团受用的方式使用,哪怕用一两个月,并且来了年长的比丘就让给他们用,不阻拦,那么即使那东西丢了、坏了、被贼偷了,他也没有罪责。不过,住完之后离开时,应该把它放回原来的地方。但如果他以个人私用的方式使用,来了年长的比丘也不让给人家,那东西丢了,他就有罪责。如果把东西拿到别的住处去用,而那里有年长的比丘来了,叫他让出来,他就应该说:“这是我从某某住处拿来的,我去把它放回原处。”如果那位比丘说“我会把它放回原处”,那么把东西交给他之后离开,也是可以的。这在《简略注》中已经说过。巴利
Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāvakālikaṃ haritunti ettha yo bhikkhu saṅghikaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā tāvakālikaṃ haritvā attano phāsukaṭṭhāne ekampi dvepi māse saṅghikaparibhogena paribhuñjati, āgatāgatānaṃ vuḍḍhatarānaṃ deti, nappaṭibāhati , tassa tasmiṃ naṭṭhepi jiṇṇepi corāvahaṭepi gīvā na hoti. Vasitvā pana gacchantena yathāṭhāne ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yo pana puggalikaparibhogena paribhuñjati, āgatāgatānaṃ vuḍḍhatarānaṃ na deti, tasmiṃ naṭṭhe tassa gīvā hoti. Aññaṃ pana āvāsaṃ haritvā paribhuñjantena sace tattha vuḍḍhataro āgantvā vuṭṭhāpeti, ‘‘mayā idaṃ asukāvāsato nāma āhaṭaṃ, gacchāmi, naṃ pākatikaṃ karomī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace so bhikkhu ‘‘ahaṃ pākatikaṃ karissāmī’’ti vadati, tassa bhāraṃ katvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
在瞻波城的事例中,所谓“三合粥”,就是用芝麻、米和绿豆,或者芝麻、米和黑豆,或者芝麻、米和马豆,或者芝麻、米加上任何一种别的豆类,把这三样东西放进去煮成的。据说,他们是把这三样东西加进掺了四分之一水的牛奶里,再配上酥油、蜂蜜、糖等做成的。巴利
Campāvatthumhi – tekaṭulayāgūti tilataṇḍulamuggehi vā tilataṇḍulamāsehi vā tilataṇḍulakulatthehi vā tilataṇḍulehi saddhiṃ yaṃkiñci ekaṃ aparaṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā tīhi katā, etaṃ kira imehi tīhi catubhāgaudakasambhinne khīre sappimadhusakkarādīhi yojetvā karonti.
在王舍城的事件中,“蜜丸”是指一种极美味的糕点,也叫作“蜜首”。这里剩下的内容,在这两个事件里,都应该按照“饭食分配”事件中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Rājagahavatthumhi – madhugoḷakoti atirasakapūvo vuccati; ‘‘madhusīsaka’’ntipi vadanti. Sesamettha vatthudvayepi odanabhājanīyavatthusmiṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
158 158. 在阿朱卡的事件中,“他这样说”是指他生病后说的。具寿优波离是具寿阿朱卡的同党——这不是因为偏袒而结党,而应当理解为:长老因为认为他无罪,出于对知惭者的护念和对律的护念,所以成为同党。这里其余的内容意思很清楚。巴利
158. Ajjukavatthusmiṃ – etadavocāti gilāno hutvā avoca. Āyasmā upāli āyasmato ajjukassa pakkhoti na agatigamanavasena pakkho, api ca kho anāpattisaññitāya lajjīanuggahena vinayānuggahena ca thero pakkhoti veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānameva.
159 159. 在波罗奈城的事件中,“被贼所恼”是指被贼人抢掠。所谓“以神通带来,安置在宫殿中”:据说长老看到那户人家被忧愁之箭刺透,翻来覆去、坐立不安,出于对那户人家的悲悯,为了守护他们的信心,以法护持,便用神通决意:“愿他们自己的宫殿就在孩子们近前。”孩子们认出“这是我们的宫殿”,就爬了上去。随后长老收回神通,宫殿也仍旧停在原来的地方。不过,按照世俗的说法,才说“他以神通把那些孩子带来,安置在宫殿中”。在神通所及的范围内,像这样以决意神通来做,是没有犯戒的;但变化神通则不合适。巴利
159. Bārāṇasīvatthusmiṃ – corehi upaddutanti corehi viluttaṃ. Iddhiyā ānetvā pāsāde ṭhapesīti thero kira taṃ kulaṃ sokasallasamappitaṃ āvaṭṭantaṃ vivaṭṭantaṃ disvā tassa kulassa anukampāya pasādānurakkhaṇatthāya dhammānuggahena attano iddhiyā ‘‘tesaṃyeva pāsādaṃ dārakānaṃ samīpe hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Dārakā ‘‘amhākaṃ pāsādo’’ti sañjānitvā abhiruhiṃsu. Tato thero iddhiṃ paṭisaṃhari, pāsādopi sakaṭṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsi. Vohāravasena pana vuttaṃ ‘‘te dārake iddhiyā ānetvā pāsāde ṭhapesī’’ti. Iddhivisayeti īdisāya adhiṭṭhāniddhiyā anāpatti. Vikubbaniddhi pana na vaṭṭati.
160-1 最后两个事例本身的意思已经很清楚。巴利
160-1. Avasāne vatthudvayaṃ uttānatthamevāti.
第二,由无与伦比的胜者所阐明;
在这里,波罗夷就是被烦恼打败。
这个学处和它完全一致,再没有别的什么了。
含摄种种理趣,深义决断。
所以,当事情发生时,通达律的比丘,
通过护持律,在此作出裁决。
巴利圣典和它的注释书,连同它们完整的意趣,都要一并把握。
深入其中之后,应当以不放逸的态度作出判断。
任何时候都不该热衷于去挑别人的罪过。
应当作意:“我将见到无犯。”
就算看到了过失,也不该一次又一次地不说。
审察之后,再与智者商议,然后才说。
即使是在如法的事物上,对于心念轻浮的人,
凡夫在这里因为随顺欲求,退失了沙门的功德。
因此,要把别人的受用之物,看作像毒蛇一样的爬虫;
就像看着火一样,智者不该懈怠。巴利
Dutiyaṃ adutiyena, yaṃ jinena pakāsitaṃ; Parājitakilesena, pārājikamidaṃ idha. Sikkhāpadaṃ samaṃ tena, aññaṃ kiñci na vijjati; Anekanayavokiṇṇaṃ, gambhīratthavinicchayaṃ. Tasmā vatthumhi otiṇṇe, bhikkhunā vinayaññunā; Vinayānuggahenettha, karontena vinicchayaṃ. Pāḷiṃ aṭṭhakathañceva, sādhippāyamasesato; Ogayha appamattena, karaṇīyo vinicchayo. Āpattidassanussāho, na kattabbo kudācanaṃ; Passissāmi anāpatti-miti kayirātha mānasaṃ. Passitvāpi ca āpattiṃ, avatvāva punappunaṃ; Vīmaṃsitvātha viññūhi, saṃsanditvā ca taṃ vade. Kappiyepi ca vatthusmiṃ, cittassa lahuvattino; Vasena sāmaññaguṇā, cavantīdha puthujjanā. Tasmā paraparikkhāraṃ, āsīvisamivoragaṃ; Aggiṃ viya ca sampassaṃ, nāmaseyya vicakkhaṇoti.
《波罗夷品义注》第二部分巴利
Pārājikakaṇḍa-aṭṭhakathā (dutiyo bhāgo)
第三波罗夷巴利
3. Tatiyapārājikaṃ
第三,由清净的佛陀以三种方式阐明;
波罗夷的注释,现在到了。
因为这样,所以先前已经说明的那一点是很容易理解的;
把那个排除之后,这里也有这样的解释。巴利
Tatiyaṃ tīhi suddhena, yaṃ buddhena vibhāvitaṃ; Pārājikaṃ tassa dāni, patto saṃvaṇṇanākkamo. Yasmā tasmā suviññeyyaṃ, yaṃ pubbe ca pakāsitaṃ; Taṃ vajjayitvā assāpi, hoti saṃvaṇṇanā ayaṃ.
初制因缘注释巴利
Paṭhamapaññattinidānavaṇṇanā
162 那时,佛陀、世尊住在毗舍离城的大林重阁讲堂。这里说的“毗舍离”,是一座以阴性名词形式流传其名的城市。这座城因为三次扩建城墙围篱而变得广阔,所以称为“毗舍离”。也应该知道,这座城是在正自觉者成就一切知智的时候,才在各方面达到极盛的。这样说明了所行境的村落之后,接着说明住处:“在大林的重阁讲堂”。其中,“大林”是指自然生长、不是人工种植、有明确边界的广大森林。而迦毗罗卫城附近的大林,则与雪山连成一片,没有边界,一直延伸到大海。这里的大林不是那样,而是有边界的广大森林,所以叫“大林”。“重阁讲堂”则应该理解为:在依大林而建的僧园中,以一座重阁为主体,用雁翼形屋顶覆盖建造的、具足一切庄严的世尊香室。巴利
162.Tenasamayena buddho bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti ettha vesāliyanti evaṃnāmake itthiliṅgavasena pavattavohāre nagare. Tañhi nagaraṃ tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanena visālībhūtattā ‘‘vesālī’’ti vuccati. Idampi ca nagaraṃ sabbaññutappatteyeva sammāsambuddhe sabbākārena vepullaṃ pattanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ gocaragāmaṃ dassetvā nivāsaṭṭhāna māha – ‘‘mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāya’’nti. Tattha mahāvanaṃ nāma sayaṃjātaṃ aropimaṃ saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vanaṃ. Kapilavatthusāmantā pana mahāvanaṃ himavantena saha ekābaddhaṃ aparicchedaṃ hutvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitaṃ. Idaṃ tādisaṃ na hoti, saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vananti mahāvanaṃ. Kūṭāgārasālā pana mahāvanaṃ nissāya kate ārāme kūṭāgāraṃ anto katvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchadanena katā sabbākārasampannā buddhassa bhagavato gandhakuṭi veditabbā.
世尊以种种方式讲说不净:他通过许多理由,开示显示不净相、让人厌离身体的教说。比如:“这个身体里有头发、体毛……乃至……尿。” 这是在说什么呢?比丘们,对这个只有一臂长的身体,就算从各个方面仔细寻找,也看不到任何一点像珍珠、摩尼宝、琉璃、沉香、檀香、番红花、樟脑或香粉那样干净的东西。反过来,看到的只是头发、体毛等种种形态的极度恶臭、令人厌恶、不堪入目的不净物。所以,对它不应该生起欲念和贪染。就连长在头顶上的头发,也是不净的、肮脏的、可厌的。而它们的不净、肮脏、可厌,要从颜色、形状、气味、来源、所在位置这五个方面来理解。体毛等也是这样。这里是简略的说明,详细内容应按照《清净道论》里讲的方法来了解。就这样,世尊对每一个部分,都以五种分类,用种种方式讲说不净。巴利
Anekapariyāyena asubhakathaṃ kathetīti anekehi kāraṇehi asubhākārasandassanappavattaṃ kāyavicchandaniyakathaṃ katheti. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe. … mutta’’nti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Bhikkhave, imasmiṃ byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā candanaṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādīni vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati. Atha kho paramaduggandhaṃ jegucchaṃ assirīkadassanaṃ kesalomādinānappakāraṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tasmā na ettha chando vā rāgo vā karaṇīyo. Yepi hi uttamaṅge sirasmiṃ jātā kesā nāma, tepi asubhā ceva asucino ca paṭikkūlā ca. So ca nesaṃ asubhāsucipaṭikkūlabhāvo vaṇṇatopi saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopīti pañcahi kāraṇehi veditabbo. Evaṃ lomādīnanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.182) vuttanayena veditabbo. Iti bhagavā ekamekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse pañcapañcappabhedena anekapariyāyena asubhakathaṃ katheti.
赞叹不净:先从不净论母入手,依膨胀相等等方式,再通过分别解说加以剖析、描述、称扬,这就是在赞叹不净。赞叹不净修习:对于依靠发等所缘,或膨胀相等所缘,或内外诸所缘,执取不净相之后生起的心,加以修习、增长、充分开展,为了显示这种不净修习的功德利益而赞叹其价值,称颂其功德。例如:比丘们,致力于不净修习的比丘,对于发等所缘,或膨胀相等所缘,能证得初禅——舍弃五支、具备五支、具足三种善、成就十种相。他依止这个名为初禅的心之宝箧,增长观智,证得最上义阿拉汉果。巴利
Asubhāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti uddhumātakādivasena asubhamātikaṃ nikkhipitvā padabhājanīyena taṃ vibhajanto vaṇṇento saṃvaṇṇento asubhāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati. Asubhabhāvanāya vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti yā ayaṃ kesādīsu vā uddhumātakādīsu vā ajjhattabahiddhāvatthūsu asubhākāraṃ gahetvā pavattassa cittassa bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā phātikammaṃ, tassā asubhabhāvanāya ānisaṃsaṃ dassento vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, guṇaṃ parikitteti. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘asubhabhāvanābhiyutto, bhikkhave , bhikkhu kesādīsu vā vatthūsu uddhumātakādīsu vā pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilabhati. So taṃ paṭhamajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ cittamañjūsaṃ nissāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā uttamatthaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti.
在这里,初禅有十种相:从障碍中净化心;趋向中等的定相;心投入其中;对清净的心保持舍;对止行保持舍;对专一现前保持舍;以不超越此处所生诸法的意义而赞叹;以诸根同一味的意义、以推动相应精进的意义、以反复修习的意义而赞叹。巴利
Tatrimāni paṭhamassa jhānassa dasa lakkhaṇāni – pāripanthikato cittavisuddhi, majjhimassa samādhinimittassa paṭipatti, tattha cittapakkhandanaṃ, visuddhassa cittassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, samathappaṭipannassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, ekattupaṭṭhānassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanāti.
这里引的圣典文句是:初禅的“始”是什么?“中”是什么?“终”是什么?初禅以行道清净为始,以舍的增广为中,以喜悦为终。初禅以行道清净为始,这个“始”有几种相?这个“始”有三种相:心从初禅的障碍中净化;因为清净,心就趋向中等的寂止相;因为趋向,心就投入其中。心从障碍中净化,因为清净而心趋向中等的寂止相,因为趋向而心投入其中——这就是初禅行道清净的“始”,这个“始”具备这三种相。因此说:初禅于始即善,且具足三相。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi – ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa ko ādi, kiṃ majjhe, kiṃ pariyosānaṃ? Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa kati lakkhaṇāni? Ādissa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – yo tassa paripantho tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Yañca paripanthato cittaṃ visujjhati, yañca visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, yañca paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ ādikalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañca’.
初禅的舍的修习增广属于中间阶段,这个中间阶段有几种特征?中间阶段有三种特征:对清净的心保持舍,对已进入止修的心保持舍,对以单一性现前的心保持舍。对清净的心保持舍,对已进入止修的心保持舍,对以单一性现前的心保持舍——这就是初禅的舍的修习增广属于中间阶段,这个中间阶段具备这三种特征。因此说:初禅在中间阶段是善的,而且具备三种特征。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Majjhassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni – visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, samathappaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati, ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Yañca visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, yañca samathappaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati , yañca ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ majjhekalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañca’.
初禅的欢喜圆满是它的终点,这个终点有几种特征?这个终点有四种特征:对于在那里生起的诸法,以不超越它们的意义为欢喜;以诸根同一味的意义为欢喜;以推动相应精进的意义为欢喜;以反复修习的意义为欢喜。初禅的欢喜圆满是它的终点,这个终点具备这四种特征。因此说:初禅在终点上既是善的,又具备四种特征。如此,达到这三种状态的心,具备三种善,成就十种特征,即具备寻、具备伺、具备喜、具备乐、具备心的决意、具备信、具备精进、具备念、具备定、具备慧。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Pariyosānassa cattāri lakkhaṇāni – tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā. Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa imāni cattāri lakkhaṇāni . Tena vuccati – ‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇañceva hoti catulakkhaṇasampannañca. ‘‘Evaṃ tividhattagataṃ cittaṃ tividhakalyāṇakaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ vitakkasampannañceva hoti vicārasampannañca pītisampannañca sukhasampannañca cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampannañca saddhāsampannañca vīriyasampannañca satisampannañca samādhisampannañca paññāsampannañcā’’ti (paṭi. ro. 1.158).
一次又一次地说明、赞叹不净等至的功德,就是反复确定“是这样,是这样”,从而不断说明:他在赞叹不净等至的功德,讲述它的利益,称扬它的优点。比如:“比丘们,当一位比丘的心长期反复熟悉不净想而安住时,他的心对行淫之事就会退缩、抗拒、反转,不会向外舒展,只会停留在舍或厌逆之中。比丘们,就像鸡毛或筋腱被扔进火里,会卷缩、抗拒、反转,不会向外舒展;同样地,比丘们,当一位比丘的心长期反复熟悉不净想而安住时,他的心对行淫之事就会退缩、抗拒、反转,不会向外舒展。”巴利
Ādissa ādissa asubhasamāpattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti ‘‘evampi itthampī’’ti punappunaṃ vavatthānaṃ katvā ādisanto asubhasamāpattiyā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, ānisaṃsaṃ katheti, guṇaṃ parikitteti. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘asubhasaññāparicitena, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato methunadhammasamāpattiyā cittaṃ paṭilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati, na sampasārīyati, upekkhā vā pāṭikulyatā vā saṇṭhāti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, kukkuṭapattaṃ vā nhārudaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ paṭilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati, na sampasārīyati; evameva kho, bhikkhave, asubhasaññāparicitena bhikkhuno cetasā bahulaṃ viharato methunadhammasamāpattiyā cittaṃ paṭilīyati paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati, na sampasārīyatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.49).
比丘们,“我想要独处半个月”的意思是:比丘们,我想要在半个月里独自隐居、独住,一个人待着。“除了一个送饭的人以外,谁都不该来见我”是说:除了那个不主动跟人攀谈、只是为了我而从信众家里把已经备好的饭食取来送给我的比丘——也就是那位送饭的比丘——之外,其他任何比丘或在家人都不该来见我。巴利
Icchāmahaṃ, bhikkhave, addhamāsaṃ paṭisallīyitunti ahaṃ bhikkhave ekaṃ addhamāsaṃ paṭisallīyituṃ nilīyituṃ ekova hutvā viharituṃ icchāmīti attho. Namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena piṇḍapātanīhārakenāti yo attanā payuttavācaṃ akatvā mamatthāya saddhesu kulesu paṭiyattaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ nīharitvā mayhaṃ upanāmeti, taṃ piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā namhi aññena kenaci bhikkhunā vā gahaṭṭhena vā upasaṅkamitabboti.
为什么世尊这样说呢?据说在过去,有五百个猎鹿人,用大棍和罗网把森林围起来,兴高采烈地一辈子以猎杀鸟兽为生,死后投生到地狱。他们在地狱里受了苦报之后,因为过去所造的某种善业,又投生到人间;由于善根成熟,他们全都在世尊身边出了家、受了具足戒。他们那些根本不善业中还没有成熟的果报,就在那半个月里,通过自己动手或借他人之手,给他们制造了断命的机会。世尊看到了这件事。业果这种东西,谁也没法阻挡。那些比丘当中,有凡夫,也有入流者、一来者、不来者和漏尽者。其中漏尽者不再受生,其余圣弟子都已确定趣向,最终归于善趣,但凡夫的趣向则不确定。于是世尊心想:“这些人贪恋自己的身体,害怕死亡,没法净化自己的趣向。来吧,我为他们说不净的教说,让他们断除贪欲。他们听了之后,对身体不再贪恋,净化了趣向,就能投生天界。这样,他们在我座下出家就有了意义。”巴利
Kasmā pana evamāhāti? Atīte kira pañcasatā migaluddakā mahatīhi daṇḍavāgurāhi araññaṃ parikkhipitvā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā ekatoyeva yāvajīvaṃ migapakkhighātakammena jīvikaṃ kappetvā niraye upapannā; te tattha paccitvā pubbe katena kenacideva kusalakammena manussesu upapannā kalyāṇūpanissayavasena sabbepi bhagavato santike pabbajjañca upasampadañca labhiṃsu; tesaṃ tato mūlākusalakammato avipakkavipākā aparāparacetanā tasmiṃ addhamāsabbhantare attūpakkamena ca parūpakkamena ca jīvatupacchedāya okāsamakāsi, taṃ bhagavā addasa. Kammavipāko nāma na sakkā kenaci paṭibāhituṃ. Tesu ca bhikkhūsu puthujjanāpi atthi sotāpannasakadāgāmīanāgāmīkhīṇāsavāpi. Tattha khīṇāsavā appaṭisandhikā, itare ariyasāvakā niyatagatikā sugatiparāyaṇā, puthujjanānaṃ pana gati aniyatā. Atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime attabhāve chandarāgena maraṇabhayabhītā na sakkhissanti gatiṃ visodhetuṃ, handa nesaṃ chandarāgappahānāya asubhakathaṃ kathemi. Taṃ sutvā attabhāve vigatacchandarāgatāya gativisodhanaṃ katvā sagge paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhissanti. Evaṃ nesaṃ mama santike pabbajjā sātthikā bhavissatī’’ti.
于是,为了帮助他们,他以业处为主题,为他们讲说不净的教法,并不是想赞叹死亡。讲完之后,他心里这样想:“如果比丘们在这半个月里见到我,就会一次又一次地跑来报告:‘今天有一个比丘死了,今天有两个……乃至今天有十个死了。’而这样的业报,无论是我还是别人,都无法阻止。我听到这些又能怎样呢?我何必去听这些没有意义的灾祸和不幸?不如我干脆不与比丘们见面。”因此他这样说:“比丘们,我想独自静修半个月;除了送饭的人以外,任何人都不许来见我。”巴利
Tato tesaṃ anuggahāya asubhakathaṃ kathesi kammaṭṭhānasīsena, no maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanādhippāyena. Kathetvā ca panassa etadahosi – ‘‘sace maṃ imaṃ addhamāsaṃ bhikkhū passissanti, ‘ajja eko bhikkhu mato, ajja dve…pe… ajja dasā’ti āgantvā āgantvā ārocessanti. Ayañca kammavipāko na sakkā mayā vā aññena vā paṭibāhituṃ. Svāhaṃ taṃ sutvāpi kiṃ karissāmi? Kiṃ me anatthakena anayabyasanena sutena? Handāhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ adassanaṃ upagacchāmī’’ti. Tasmā evamāha – ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, bhikkhave, addhamāsaṃ patisallīyituṃ; namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena piṇḍapātanīhārakenā’’ti.
另一些人则说:“他这样说,是为了避免别人的讥嫌,然后就去独处了。”据说其他人会诽谤世尊:“这位自称‘一切知者、正法妙轮转者’的人,连自己的弟子互相残杀都阻止不了,还能做成别的什么?”对此,智者会说:“世尊正专心独处,不知道这件事,也没有人来告诉他;如果他知道,一定会阻止。”但这只是他们自己的想法,这里最根本的原因还是前面说的那个。关于“Nāssudhā”这个词,“assudhā”只是用来补足音节的虚词,或者表示强调;意思是:根本没有人来见世尊。巴利
Apare panāhu – ‘‘parūpavādavivajjanatthaṃ evaṃ vatvā paṭisallīno’’ti. Pare kira bhagavantaṃ upavadissanti – ‘‘ayaṃ ‘sabbaññū, ahaṃ saddhammavaracakkavattī’ti paṭijānamāno attanopi sāvake aññamaññaṃ ghātente nivāretuṃ na sakkoti. Kimaññaṃ sakkhissatī’’ti? Tattha paṇḍitā vakkhanti – ‘‘bhagavā paṭisallānamanuyutto nayimaṃ pavattiṃ jānāti, kocissa ārocayitāpi natthi, sace jāneyya addhā nivāreyyā’’ti. Idaṃ pana icchāmattaṃ, paṭhamamevettha kāraṇaṃ. Nāssudhāti ettha ‘‘assudhā’’ti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇatthe vā nipāto; neva koci bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamatīti attho.
因为有许多颜色、形状等原因而发生变化,所以叫“多相变异”;意思是说,被种种相状混杂、混入了种种原因。那是什么呢?就是对不净的修习。他们致力于这种多相变异的不净修习而安住,也就是精勤专注地安住。感到痛苦,是指对自己的身体感到痛苦、难受。感到羞耻,是指觉得丢脸。感到厌恶,是指生起了厌恶心。年轻,是指年少。青年,是指具备青春。性好装饰,是指本性就喜欢打扮。洗过头,是指连头一起洗了。这里用“年轻”这个词,是在显示刚进入青春的状态,因为刚进入青春的众生特别喜好装饰。用“洗过头”来显示从事装饰的时机。因为青年即使做完某件事后身体弄脏了,也不会去装饰;但洗过头之后,他就专门去打扮了。那时,他连蛇尸之类的都不愿看。如果有仇敌把蛇尸、狗尸或人尸用绳子绑在他脖子上,强行挂上去,他就会感到痛苦、羞耻、厌恶;同样,那些比丘对自己的身体感到痛苦、羞耻、厌恶,就像那个人厌离那具尸体一样,想要舍弃自己的身体,便拿起刀自己结束生命。他们也互相结束对方的生命,说:“你来结束我的命,我来结束你的命。”巴利
Anekehi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīhi kāraṇehi vokāro assāti anekākāravokāro; anekākāravokiṇṇo anekakāraṇasammissoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ko so? Asubhabhāvanānuyogo, taṃ anekākāravokāraṃ asubhabhāvanānuyogaṃ anuyuttā viharantīti yuttapayuttā viharanti. Aṭṭīyantīti sakena kāyena aṭṭā dukkhitā honti . Harāyantīti lajjanti. Jigucchantīti sañjātajigucchā honti. Daharoti taruṇo. Yuvāti yobbanena samannāgato. Maṇḍanakajātikoti maṇḍanakapakatiko. Sīsaṃnhātoti sīsena saddhiṃ nhāto. Daharo yuvāti cettha daharavacanena paṭhamayobbanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Paṭhamayobbane hi sattā visesena maṇḍanakajātikā honti. Sīsaṃnhātoti iminā maṇḍanānuyogakālaṃ. Yuvāpi hi kiñci kammaṃ katvā saṃkiliṭṭhasarīro na maṇḍanānuyutto hoti; sīsaṃnhāto pana so maṇḍanamevānuyuñjati. Ahikuṇapādīni daṭṭhumpi na icchati. So tasmiṃ khaṇe ahikuṇapena vā kukkurakuṇapena vā manussakuṇapena vā kaṇṭhe āsattena kenacideva paccatthikena ānetvā kaṇṭhe baddhena paṭimukkena yathā aṭṭīyeyya harāyeyya jiguccheyya; evameva te bhikkhū sakena kāyena aṭṭīyantā harāyantā jigucchantā so viya puriso taṃ kuṇapaṃ vigatacchandarāgatāya attano kāyaṃ pariccajitukāmā hutvā satthaṃ ādāya attanāpi attānaṃ jīvitā voropenti. ‘‘Tvaṃ maṃ jīvitā voropehi; ahaṃ ta’’nti evaṃ aññamaññampi jīvitā voropenti.
名叫米迦兰提迦的沙门伪装者:米迦兰提迦是他的名字;沙门伪装者是指穿着沙门衣服的人。据说他只留一个顶髻,把其余头发剃光,穿一件袈裟,另一件搭在肩上,就靠着寺院住,以吃剩饭剩菜过活。人们走到那位米迦兰提迦沙门伪装者跟前,这样说道。善哉这个词是表达请求的助词。我们这个词是目的格复数,意思是说:贤友,请夺走我们的生命吧。在这里,圣者们既没有杀生,也没有教唆别人杀生,也没有随喜杀生。但凡夫们全都做了。沾满鲜血的:就是沾满了血。流向瓦古穆达河:瓦古穆达是世人公认有福德的河。据说他也是怀着我要在那里洗掉那罪业的想法而去的,但靠河水的力量,连一点点罪业也根本消不掉。巴利
Migalaṇḍikampi samaṇakuttakanti migalaṇḍikoti tassa nāmaṃ; samaṇakuttakoti samaṇavesadhārako. So kira sikhāmattaṃ ṭhapetvā sīsaṃ muṇḍetvā ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ aṃse katvā vihāraṃyeva upanissāya vighāsādabhāvena jīvati. Tampi migalaṇḍikaṃ samaṇakuttakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadanti. Sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto. Noti upayogabahuvacanaṃ, sādhu āvuso amhe jīvitā voropehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca ariyā neva pāṇātipātaṃ kariṃsu na samādapesuṃ, na samanuññā ahesuṃ. Puthujjanā pana sabbamakaṃsu. Lohitakanti lohitamakkhitaṃ. Yena vaggumudānadīti vaggumatā lokassa puññasammatā nadī. Sopi kira ‘‘taṃ pāpaṃ tattha pavāhessāmī’’ti saññāya gato, nadiyā ānubhāvena appamattakampi pāpaṃ pahīnaṃ nāma natthi.
163 确实生起了追悔。据说,在那些比丘当中,没有任何人做出身体或言语上的异常举动,所有人都在正念正知中,以右侧卧下。当他回忆起这件事时,追悔确实生起了。“生起了懊悔”——这句话是为了确定那追悔本身的性质而说的。那是懊悔性的追悔,不是律藏意义上的追悔。“我确实无所得”等话,是为了展示追悔生起的方式。其中,“我确实无所得”是在悲叹:从今以后,我再也没有所谓的利益和安乐可得了。“我确实没有利益”这句话,则是使这个意思更加坚定。这里的意思是:即使有人会说“你有利益”,那也是错的,我确实没有利益。“我确实恶得”是说:即使凭借善业之力获得了这人身,我确实恶得了这人身。“我确实非善得”这句话,则是使这个意思更加坚定。这里的意思是:即使有人会说“你善得了”,那也是错的,我确实非善得。“造作了非福”是指累积或生起了非福。为什么呢?因为我夺走了比丘们的……乃至……生命。其含义是:我夺走了那些具戒的、以那具戒之德而具足善法、上等法、最胜法的比丘们的生命。巴利
163.Ahudeva kukkuccanti tesu kira bhikkhūsu kenacipi kāyavikāro vā vacīvikāro vā na kato, sabbe satā sampajānā dakkhiṇena passena nipajjiṃsu. Taṃ anussarato tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosiyeva. Ahu vippaṭisāroti tasseva kukkuccassa sabhāvaniyamanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ . Vippaṭisārakukkuccaṃ ahosi, na vinayakukkuccanti. Alābhā vata metiādi kukkuccassa pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha alābhā vata meti āyatiṃ dāni mama hitasukhalābhā nāma natthīti anutthunāti. ‘‘Na vata me lābhā’’tiiminā pana tamevatthaṃ daḷhaṃ karoti. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sacepi koci ‘‘lābhā te’’ti vadeyya, taṃ micchā, na vata me lābhāti. Dulladdhaṃ vata meti kusalānubhāvena laddhampi idaṃ manussattaṃ dulladdhaṃ vata me. Na vata me suladdhantiiminā pana tamevatthaṃ daḷhaṃ karoti. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sacepi koci ‘‘suladdhaṃ te’’ti vadeyya, taṃ micchā; na vata me suladdhanti. Apuññaṃ pasutanti apuññaṃ upacitaṃ janitaṃ vā. Kasmāti ce? Yohaṃ bhikkhū…pe… voropesinti . Tassattho – yo ahaṃ sīlavante tāya eva sīlavantatāya kalyāṇadhamme uttamadhamme seṭṭhadhamme bhikkhū jīvitā voropesinti.
有一位属于魔众的天女,按名字来说并不出名,是一位地居天神,持有邪见,站在魔罗那一边,随顺魔罗。她心里想:“这样一来,他就逃不出魔罗的掌控和魔罗的势力范围了。”于是她佩戴上所有装饰,展示自己的神通力,像在不破裂的水面上和大地上行走一样走来,对那个叫弥伽兰迪迦的假沙门说了这番话。“善哉,善哉”是表示随喜赞叹的感叹词,所以这里用了两遍。“你渡了未渡者”:意思是,对于尚未从轮回中渡脱的人,你用夺走他生命的方式使他渡脱、解脱了。据说这位天女愚蠢无知,她的见解是:“没有死的人,就没有从轮回中解脱;死了的人,就解脱了。”所以她就像拿着解脱轮回的凭证一样,怀着这种见解,促使他去做那件事,才这样说的。那时,那个弥伽兰迪迦假沙门虽然先前已经生起了强烈的懊悔,但看到那位天女的神通力后,就断定:“这位天女既然这样说,那这件事一定就是这样的。”于是便赞叹说“我真是有福报”等等。他一座寺院接一座寺院、一间僧房接一间僧房地走去,这样说道:他走到各处寺院和僧房,打开门进去后,对比丘们这样说:“谁还没有渡脱?我来渡谁?”巴利
Aññatarā mārakāyikāti nāmavasena apākaṭā ekā bhummadevatā micchādiṭṭhikā mārapakkhikā mārassanuvattikā ‘‘evamayaṃ māradheyyaṃ māravisayaṃ nātikkamissatī’’ti cintetvā sabbābharaṇavibhūsitā hutvā attano ānubhāvaṃ dassayamānā abhijjamāne udake pathavītale caṅkamamānā viya āgantvā migalaṇḍikaṃ samaṇakuttakaṃ etadavoca. Sādhu sādhūti sampahaṃsanatthe nipāto; tasmā eva dvivacanaṃ kataṃ. Atiṇṇe tāresīti saṃsārato atiṇṇe iminā jīvitāvoropanena tāresi parimocesīti. Ayaṃ kira etissā devatāya bālāya dummedhāya laddhi ‘‘ye na matā, te saṃsārato na muttā. Ye matā, te muttā’’ti. Tasmā saṃsāramocakamilakkhā viya evaṃladdhikā hutvā tampi tattha niyojentī evamāha. Atha kho migalaṇḍiko samaṇakuttako tāva bhusaṃ uppannavippaṭisāropi taṃ devatāya ānubhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ devatā evamāha – addhā iminā atthena evameva bhavitabba’’nti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā ‘‘lābhā kira me’’tiādīni parikittayanto. Vihārena vihāraṃ pariveṇena pariveṇaṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ vadetīti taṃ taṃ vihārañca pariveṇañca upasaṅkamitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā anto pavisitvā bhikkhū evaṃ vadati – ‘‘ko atiṇṇo, kaṃ tāremī’’ti?
确实有恐惧:因为想到死亡,心里就生起怖畏。确实有战栗:从心脏、肌肉等开始,身体因此颤动;也有人说,是因为极度恐惧而身体僵硬,因为僵硬就称为战栗。身毛竖立:就是汗毛竖起来。然而诸漏尽者由于善见诸法空无有情,根本看不到有死亡的有情,所以应当知道,他们完全没有这些。他曾一天之内夺走一位比丘、两位比丘……乃至六十位比丘的生命:这样按数目累计,他总共夺走了那五百位比丘的生命。巴利
Hotiyevabhayanti maraṇaṃ paṭicca cittutrāso hoti. Hoti chambhitattanti hadayamaṃsaṃ ādiṃ katvā tasmā sarīracalanaṃ hoti; atibhayena thaddhasarīrattantipi eke, thambhitattañhi chambhitattanti vuccati. Lomahaṃsoti uddhaṃṭhitalomatā, khīṇāsavā pana sattasuññatāya sudiṭṭhattā maraṇakasattameva na passanti, tasmā tesaṃ sabbampetaṃ nāhosīti veditabbaṃ. Ekampi bhikkhuṃ dvepi…pe… saṭṭhimpi bhikkhū ekāhena jīvitā voropesīti evaṃ gaṇanavasena sabbānipi tāni pañca bhikkhusatāni jīvitā voropesi.
164 从独处静坐中起来后,他了知那五百位比丘已经命终,于是从独处的状态中出来。他虽然心里清楚,却装作不知道,为了引出话题,便对阿难尊者说:“阿难,为什么比丘僧团好像变少了呢?”阿难,在此之前,很多比丘一起来到跟前侍奉、受持教诫、提问、诵习,园林看起来就像一片光明;可现在才过了大约半个月,比丘僧团就显得稀薄、稀少、寥寥无几、稀疏零落。这是什么原因呢?比丘们都去了哪里?巴利
164.Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti tesaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ jīvitakkhayapattabhāvaṃ ñatvā tato ekībhāvato vuṭṭhito jānantopi ajānanto viya kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi. Kiṃ nu kho ānanda tanubhūto viya bhikkhusaṅghoti ānanda ito pubbe bahū bhikkhū ekato upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchanti, uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ gaṇhanti sajjhāyanti, ekapajjoto viya ārāmo dissati, idāni pana addhamāsamattassa accayena tanubhūto viya tanuko mando appako viraḷaviraḷo viya jāto bhikkhusaṅgho. Kinnu kho kāraṇaṃ, kiṃ disāsu pakkantā bhikkhūti?
这时,阿难尊者没有察觉到那五百位比丘是因为业报而命终,只看到他们是因为修习不净业处的缘故,于是说了“确实如此,尊者世尊”等话,接着为了替比丘们求一个能证得阿罗汉果的其他业处,又说了“善哉,尊者世尊”等话。这段话的意思是:善哉,尊者世尊,请开示另一个方法,让比丘僧团能够安立在阿罗汉果上。就像大海有许多可以下水的渡口一样,趣入涅槃的业处也有很多,比如十随念、十遍、四界差别、梵住、入出息念等。世尊应当先安慰比丘们,然后为他们开示其中某一种业处——这就是他的意图。巴利
Athāyasmā ānando kammavipākena tesaṃ jīvitakkhayappattiṃ asallakkhento asubhakammaṭṭhānānuyogapaccayā pana sallakkhento ‘‘tathā hi pana bhante bhagavā’’tiādiṃ vatvā bhikkhūnaṃ arahattappattiyā aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācanto ‘‘sādhu bhante bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – sādhu bhante bhagavā aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ ācikkhatu, yena bhikkhusaṅgho arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya; mahāsamuddaṃ orohaṇatitthāni viya hi aññānipi dasānussatidasakasiṇacatudhātuvavatthānabrahmavihārānāpānasatippabhedāni bahūni nibbānorohaṇakammaṭṭhānāni santi. Tesu bhagavā bhikkhū samassāsetvā aññataraṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhatūti adhippāyo.
这时,世尊想照那样去做,就打发长老离开,说了“那么,阿难……”等话。其中,“依止毗舍离”的意思是:依止毗舍离,凡在周围一牛吼地或半由旬之内居住的比丘,全都要召集起来。把他们都召集到集会堂之后,世尊亲自去该去的地方,又派年轻比丘到别处去,片刻之间就把所有比丘一个不剩地聚到集会堂里。“尊者,现在世尊认为时机到了”,这里的意思是:世尊,比丘僧团已经集合了,现在正是给比丘们说法、给予教诫的时候,你们知道现在该做什么。巴利
Atha bhagavā tathā kātukāmo theraṃ uyyojento ‘‘tenahānandā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vesāliṃ upanissāyāti vesāliṃ upanissāya samantā gāvutepi addhayojanepi yāvatikā bhikkhū viharanti , te sabbe sannipātehīti attho. Te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ sannipātetvāti attanā gantuṃ yuttaṭṭhānaṃ sayaṃ gantvā aññattha daharabhikkhū pahiṇitvā muhutteneva anavasese bhikkhū upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ samūhaṃ katvā. Yassa dāni bhante bhagavā kālaṃ maññatīti ettha ayamadhippāyo – bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgho sannipatito esa kālo bhikkhūnaṃ dhammakathaṃ kātuṃ, anusāsaniṃ dātuṃ, idāni yassa tumhe kālaṃ jānātha, taṃ kattabbanti.
入出息念定论巴利
Ānāpānassatisamādhikathā
165 那时,世尊……中略……对比丘们说:“比丘们,这个也是……”这样招呼之后,为了给比丘们指出一条不同于先前为了证得阿罗汉果而教导的不净业处的修行途径,便说:“入出息念定。”巴利
165. Atha kho bhagavā…pe… bhikkhū āmantesi – ayampi kho bhikkhaveti āmantetvā ca pana bhikkhūnaṃ arahattappattiyā pubbe ācikkhitaasubhakammaṭṭhānato aññaṃ pariyāyaṃ ācikkhanto ‘‘ānāpānassatisamādhī’’ti āha.
现在,因为世尊正是为了向比丘们开示寂静殊胜的业处才说了这段经文,所以我在这里不省略任何内容,按照义理贯连的次第来作注释。其中,对“比丘们,此亦是”这一句,先这样贯连理解:比丘们,不只是不净修习能导向烦恼的断除,而且这入出息念定……中略……也能使它们止息。巴利
Idāni yasmā bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ santapaṇītakammaṭṭhānadassanatthameva ayaṃ pāḷi vuttā, tasmā aparihāpetvā atthayojanākkamaṃ ettha vaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Tatra ‘‘ayampi kho bhikkhave’’ti imassa tāva padassa ayaṃ yojanā – bhikkhave na kevalaṃ asubhabhāvanāyeva kilesappahānāya saṃvattati, apica ayampi kho ānāpānassatisamādhi…pe… vūpasametīti.
这里的义理注释是:入出息念,就是专注把握入息和出息的念。这在《无碍解道》中已经说过:巴利
Ayaṃ panettha atthavaṇṇanā – ānāpānassatīti assāsapassāsapariggāhikā sati. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
入息是吸气,不是呼气;出息是呼气,不是吸气。依靠入息而现起的念,依靠出息而现起的念。吸气的人,这念在他那里现起;呼气的人,这念在他那里现起。巴利
‘‘Ānanti assāso, no passāso. Apānanti passāso, no assāso. Assāsavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, passāsavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ sati. Yo assasati tassupaṭṭhāti, yo passasati tassupaṭṭhātī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.160).
所谓“定”,就是与那能收摄入出息的正念一同生起的心一境性。而且,这个开示是以“定”为标题,不是以“念”为标题。所以,与入出息念相应的定,就是入出息念定;或者说,在入出息念当中的定,就是入出息念定。这里的含义应当这样理解。“已修习”:已经令它生起、已经令它增长。“已多作”:已经反复地做。“既寂静又殊胜”:既是寂静的,又是殊胜的,这两个词都应当依据“既……又……”这个说法来确定。这是什么意思呢?因为,就像不净业处,单从证悟的角度来说是寂静的、殊胜的,但由于所缘粗重、由于所缘可厌,所以就所缘来说,它既不寂静也不殊胜;而这个入出息念定,无论从哪方面来说都不是不寂静或不是殊胜的,相反,它因所缘的寂静性而寂静、止息、寂灭,也因称为证悟的支分的寂静性而寂静,又因所缘的殊胜性而殊胜、令人不满足,也因支分的殊胜性而殊胜。因此说“既寂静又殊胜”。巴利
Samādhīti tāya ānāpānapariggāhikāya satiyā saddhiṃ uppannā cittekaggatā; samādhisīsena cāyaṃ desanā, na satisīsena. Tasmā ānāpānassatiyā yutto samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhi, ānāpānassatiyaṃ vā samādhi ānāpānassatisamādhīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito ca. Bahulīkatoti punappunaṃ kato. Santo ceva paṇīto cāti santo ceva paṇīto ceva, ubhayattha evasaddena niyamo veditabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi yathā asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ kevalaṃ paṭivedhavasena santañca paṇītañca oḷārikārammaṇattā pana paṭikūlārammaṇattā ca ārammaṇavasena neva santaṃ na paṇītaṃ, na evaṃ kenaci pariyāyena asanto vā appaṇīto vā, apica kho ārammaṇasantatāyapi santo vūpasanto nibbuto paṭivedhasaṅkhātaaṅgasantatāyapi ārammaṇappaṇītatāyapi paṇīto atittikaro aṅgappaṇītatāyapīti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘santo ceva paṇīto cā’’ti.
“纯粹且安乐的住”:在这里,“没有掺杂”就是纯粹,意思是未被浇灌、未混杂、独特、不共;这里并不是靠遍作或近行才有寂静,而是从最初作意开始,就以其自性本身而寂静、殊胜。不过有些人说,“纯粹”是未被浇灌、具滋养、自性甘美。应当知道,这纯粹且安乐的住,因为在安止的那一刻能获得身心的乐,所以是安乐的住。巴利
Asecanako ca sukho ca vihāroti ettha pana nāssa secananti asecanako anāsittako abbokiṇṇo pāṭekko āveṇiko, natthettha parikammena vā upacārena vā santatā ādimanasikārato pabhuti attano sabhāveneva santo ca paṇīto cāti attho. Keci pana asecanakoti anāsittako ojavanto sabhāveneva madhuroti vadanti. Evamayaṃ asecanako ca appitappitakkhaṇe kāyikacetasikasukhappaṭilābhāya saṃvattanato sukho ca vihāroti veditabbo.
“已生起的、已生起的”:指的是那些还没有被镇伏的、还没有被镇伏的。“恶”:就是低劣的。“不善法”:就是从无善巧所生的法。“立即令其消失”:就是在刹那间令其消失、加以镇伏。“令止息”:就是好好地令之止息;或者,因为是属于顺决择分的,所以随着圣道的逐步增长而断除、令寂止,这也是一种解释。巴利
Uppannuppanneti avikkhambhite avikkhambhite. Pāpaketi lāmake. Akusale dhammeti akosallasambhūte dhamme. Ṭhānaso antaradhāpetīti khaṇeneva antaradhāpeti vikkhambheti. Vūpasametīti suṭṭhu upasameti, nibbedhabhāgiyattā vā anupubbena ariyamaggavuḍḍhippato samucchindati paṭippassambhetītipi attho.
“犹如”是譬喻的举例说明。“在夏季的最后一个月”,就是阿沙荼月。“被扬起的尘土”,是指在半个月里,地面被风吹日晒变得干燥,又被牛、水牛等踩踏得破碎,尘土和微尘向上扬起、飘到空中。“巨大的非时云”,是指覆盖整个天空后生起、在阿沙荼月白分整整半个月里降雨的云。因为它是在雨季还没到的时候出现的,所以这里指的就是“非时云”。“立即令其消失”,就是刹那间让它看不见,让它沉落到地面上。“同样地”,这是譬喻的对应说明。此后就按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Seyyathāpīti opammanidassanametaṃ. Gimhānaṃ pacchime māseti āsāḷhamāse. Ūhataṃ rajojallanti addhamāse vātātapasukkhāya gomahiṃsādipādappahārasambhinnāya pathaviyā uddhaṃ hataṃ ūhataṃ ākāse samuṭṭhitaṃ rajañca reṇuñca. Mahā akālameghoti sabbaṃ nabhaṃ ajjhottharitvā uṭṭhito āsāḷhajuṇhapakkhe sakalaṃ addhamāsaṃ vassanakamegho. So hi asampatte vassakāle uppannattā akālameghoti idhādhippeto. Ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametīti khaṇeneva adassanaṃ neti, pathaviyaṃ sannisīdāpeti. Evameva khoti opammasampaṭipādanametaṃ. Tato paraṃ vuttanayameva.
现在,“诸比丘,如何修习入出息念定”这里,“如何”是希望从多方面详细解说入出息念定修习的提问。“诸比丘,修习入出息念定”则是针对所问之法、希望从多方面详细解说的开示。第二句也是这样。这里简要的含义是:诸比丘,以何种方式、以何种行相、以何种方法修习、多作入出息念定,才能寂静……中略……令止息呢?巴利
Idāni kathaṃ bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhīti ettha kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanaṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bhāvito ca bhikkhave ānāpānassatisamādhīti nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāya puṭṭhadhammanidassanaṃ . Esa nayo dutiyapadepi. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave kenapakārena kenākārena kena vidhinā bhāvito ānāpānassatisamādhi kenapakārena bahulīkato santo ceva…pe… vūpasametīti.
现在,为了详细说明这件事的含义,说了“诸比丘,在此……”等话。其中,“诸比丘,在此,比丘”的意思是:比丘们,在这个教法中的比丘。这里,“在此”这个词,是用来说明这个教法是能生起一切种类入出息念定的修行者所依靠的教法,同时也否定了其他教法有同样的性质。因为圣典中这样说:“诸比丘,只有在此处,有沙门……其他外道的沙门则空无沙门。”因此说“在这个教法中的比丘”。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārento ‘‘idha bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha idha bhikkhave bhikkhūti bhikkhave imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idhasaddo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139). Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
前往林野……中略……或前往空屋,这是为了说明:为他选取与入出息念定的修习相适应的住处。因为这位比丘长久以来心一直散逸在色等所缘上,不愿意登上入出息念定这个所缘,就像套了野牛的马车,只往岔路上狂奔。所以,好比有个牧牛人,想驯服一头喝足了狡诈母牛之奶而长大的狡诈小牛,就把它从母牛身边带走,在一边埋下一根大木桩,然后用绳子把它绑在那里。那头小牛东挣西跳也逃不掉,就只能靠近那根木桩,或者卧在它旁边。同样,这位比丘想调伏长久以来因品尝色等所缘之味而养大的顽劣之心,也应把心从色等所缘上带开,进入林野……中略……或空屋,在那里用念的绳子把心绑在入出息这根木桩上。这样,他的心即使东挣西跳,也得不到过去习惯的所缘,无法挣断念绳逃走,就只能通过近行定和安止定的方式,靠近并安住在那同一个所缘上。因此,古德们说:巴利
Araññagato vā…pe… suññāgāragato vāti idamassa ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpanaṃ. Imassa hi bhikkhuno dīgharattaṃ rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu anuvisaṭaṃ cittaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhiārammaṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ na icchati. Kūṭagoṇayuttaratho viya uppathameva dhāvati. Tasmā seyyathāpi nāma gopo kūṭadhenuyā sabbaṃ khīraṃ pivitvā vaḍḍhitaṃ kūṭavacchaṃ dametukāmo dhenuto apanetvā ekamante mahantaṃ thambhaṃ nikhaṇitvā tattha yottena bandheyya. Athassa so vaccho ito cito ca vipphanditvā palāyituṃ asakkonto tameva thambhaṃ upanisīdeyya vā upanipajjeyya vā; evameva imināpi bhikkhunā dīgharattaṃ rūpārammaṇādirasapānavaḍḍhitaṃ duṭṭhacittaṃ dametukāmena rūpādiārammaṇato apanetvā araññaṃ vā…pe… suññāgāraṃ vā pavesetvā tattha assāsapassāsathambhe satiyottena bandhitabbaṃ. Evamassa taṃ cittaṃ ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇaṃ alabhamānaṃ satiyottaṃ chinditvā palāyituṃ asakkontaṃ tamevārammaṇaṃ upacārappanāvasena upanisīdati ceva upanipajjati ca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像有人在这里,把一头需要调教的小牛绑在木桩上;
应当这样把自己的心牢牢系在念的所缘上。巴利
‘‘Yathā thambhe nibandheyya, vacchaṃ dammaṃ naro idha; Bandheyyevaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ, satiyārammaṇe daḷha’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.217; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.374; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.107; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
这样一来,这个住处就适合他修行。因此说:“这是为了说明随顺他修习入出息念定而选取的住处。”巴利
Evamassetaṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanānurūpaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘idamassa ānāpānassatisamaādhibhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaparidīpana’’nti.
或者,因为入出息念这种业处是一切业处当中最上等的,是一切知佛、独觉佛和佛弟子证得殊胜成就与现法乐住的基础。如果不离开充满女人、男人、象、马等声音的村落周边,就不容易修成,因为声音是禅那的刺。而在没有村落的林野中,瑜伽行者就容易把握这种业处,修成入出息第四禅,再以它作为基础来观照诸行,证得最高的果位——阿拉汉果。所以,世尊为了指出适合他的住处,才说了“前往林野……”等话。巴利
Atha vā yasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānappabhede muddhabhūtaṃ sabbaññubuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ itthipurisahatthiassādisaddasamākulaṃ gāmantaṃ apariccajitvā na sukaraṃ sampādetuṃ, saddakaṇṭakattā jhānassa. Agāmake pana araññe sukaraṃ yogāvacarena idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tadeva ca pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ sampāpuṇituṃ, tasmāssa anurūpaṃsenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
世尊就像一位建筑风水师。正如建筑风水师会先观察建城的地形,仔细勘察之后才指示说“在这里建城”,等城市顺利建成,就能从王室得到丰厚的供养和敬重;同样地,世尊为修行者考察了合适的住处之后,才指示说“应当在这里修习业处”。之后,修行者按照教导在那个地方精勤修习业处,依次证得阿拉汉果时,就会对世尊生起极大的敬重:“世尊确实是正自觉者。”而这位比丘被称为“如豹者”。就像大豹王在森林里,依靠草丛、树林或山岩隐蔽自己,然后捕猎野牛、羚羊、野猪等野兽;同样地,这位在森林等处精勤修习业处的比丘,应当知道他会依次证得入流道、一来道、不来道、阿拉汉道以及圣果。因此,古德们说:巴利
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya hi bhagavā, so yathā vatthuvijjācariyo nagarabhūmiṃ passitvā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā ‘‘ettha nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti upadisati, sotthinā ca nagare niṭṭhite rājakulato mahāsakkāraṃ labhati; evameva yogāvacarassa anurūpasenāsanaṃ upaparikkhitvā ettha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbanti upadisati. Tato tattha kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttena yoginā kamena arahatte patte ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ labhati. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu ‘‘dīpisadiso’’ti vuccati. Yathā hi mahādīpirājā araññe tiṇagahanaṃ vā vanagahanaṃ vā pabbatagahanaṃ vā nissāya nilīyitvā vanamahiṃsagokaṇṇasūkarādayo mige gaṇhāti; evamevāyaṃ araññādīsu kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjanto bhikkhu yathākkamena sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamagge ceva ariyaphalañca gaṇhātīti veditabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像一种叫豹的动物,先把自己藏起来,再扑捉野兽;
同样,这位佛子精勤于修习,是位观禅者;
走进森林之后,他摘取最殊胜的果实。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi dīpiko nāma, nilīyitvā gaṇhatī mige; Tathevāyaṃ buddhaputto, yuttayogo vipassako; Araññaṃ pavisitvāna, gaṇhāti phalamuttama’’nti. (mi. pa. 6.1.5);
世尊为了向他指出适合精进、策励与用功的林野住处,就说了“前往林野……”等话。巴利
Tenassa parakkamajavayoggabhūmiṃ araññasenāsanaṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘araññagato vā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“前往林野”:所谓林野,按照“出了门槛之外,那一切都是林野”以及“所谓林野住所,最少也要离村五百弓”这样的说法,在具备这些特征的林野中,任何适合获得独处之乐的林野,他已经去了。“前往树下”:就是到了树的附近。“前往空屋”:就是到了空旷寂静的地方。在这里,除了林野和树下之外,其余七种住所也可以说成是“前往空屋”。这样,为他开示了适合三季、适合界与性行、适合修习入出息念的住所之后,接着开示远离昏沉与掉举的寂静威仪,所以说“坐下”。然后,为了显示坐姿的稳固、呼吸运行的舒适以及把握所缘的方法,说了“结跏趺坐……”等话。巴利
Tattha araññagato vāti araññanti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) ca ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 653) ca evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesu araññesu anurūpaṃ yaṃkiñci pavivekasukhaṃ araññaṃ gato. Rukkhamūlagato vāti rukkhasamīpaṃ gato. Suññāgāragato vāti suññaṃ vivittokāsaṃ gato. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā araññañca rukkhamūlañca avasesasattavidhasenāsanagatopi suññāgāragatoti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Evamassa ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlañca ānāpānassatibhāvanānurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ upadisitvā alīnānuddhaccapakkhikaṃ santamiriyāpathaṃ upadisanto ‘‘nisīdatī’’ti āha. Athassa nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ ārammaṇapariggahūpāyañca dassento ‘‘pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā’’tiādimāha.
在这其中,“结跏趺坐”是指把双腿从四周盘绑起来的坐姿。“盘结”就是绑紧、系牢。“把身体挺直”是指把上半身摆正,让十八节脊椎骨一节对一节地接正。这样坐好之后,皮肤、肌肉、筋腱就不会弯曲。当它们不弯曲时,那些因为弯曲而可能在每一刹那生起的受就不会生起。那些受不生起时,心就能专一,业处不会散乱退失,而是不断增长、扩展。巴利
Tattha pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ. Ābhujitvāti ābandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanappaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu anuppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati. Vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati.
把念安放在面前:就是把念安放在业处所缘的前面。或者,“遍”(pari)是把握的意思;“面”(mukha)是出离的意思;“念”(sati)是安住的意思;因此说“把念安放在面前”。这里也应按照《无碍解道》(Paṭi. Ma. 1.164-165)所说的方法来理解其含义。这里的简要意思是:已经把握、已经出离的念。他正念地入息:那位比丘这样坐着,这样把念安立起来之后,不让那念丢失,正念地入息,正念地出息,成为正念的实行者——这就是所说的意思。巴利
Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā. Atha vā ‘‘parī’’ti pariggahaṭṭho; ‘‘mukha’’nti niyyānaṭṭho; ‘‘satī’’ti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho; tena vuccati – ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164-165) vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvā’’ti. So satova assasatīti so bhikkhu evaṃ nisīditvā evañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā taṃ satiṃ avijahanto satoeva assasati, sato passasati, satokārī hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明他以哪些方式成为正念而行者,便说了“长入息”等话。这层意思在《无碍解道》中已经说过,也就是在对“他正念地入息,正念地出息”这句话的分别解释里:巴利
Idāni yehākārehi satokārī hoti, te dassento ‘‘dīghaṃ vā assasanto’’tiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ – ‘‘so satova assasati, sato passasatī’’ti etasseva vibhaṅge –
以三十二种方式成为正念而行者:以长入息,对了知心的一境性、不散乱的人,念现起。他以那念、那智成为正念而行者。以长出息……(中略)……以随观舍遣而入息、以随观舍遣而出息,对了知心的一境性、不散乱的人,念现起。他以那念、那智成为正念而行者。巴利
‘‘Bāttiṃsāya ākārehi satokārī hoti. Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena satokārī hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasena paṭinissaggānupassī passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena satokārī hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.165).
在这里,“长出息”指的是让出息持续地生起。“入息”是从外面吸进来的风,“出息”是从里面呼出去的风。不过在经藏注释书里,它们是按相反的顺序出现的。巴利
Tattha dīghaṃ vā assasantoti dīghaṃ vā assāsaṃ pavattento. ‘‘Assāso’’ti bahi nikkhamanavāto. ‘‘Passāso’’ti anto pavisanavāto. Suttantaṭṭhakathāsu pana uppaṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ.
在这里,一切住胎众生从母胎出来的时候,最先是一股内在的风向外排出。随后,外面的风带着细微的尘土进入体内,碰到上颚就停息了。入息和出息应当这样来理解。至于它们的长短,则要依据距离来理解。就像水或沙子填满某个空间而停留时,会说“长水、长沙”或“短水、短沙”。同样,那些极其细微的入息和出息,在象的身体和蛇的身体里,缓慢地充满并缓慢地排出那被称为“自身”的长距离,所以称为“长”;在狗、兔等身上,则快速地充满并快速地排出那被称为“自身”的短距离,所以称为“短”。在人当中,有些人像象、蛇等那样,按时间和距离而有长的入息和出息;有些人像狗、兔等那样,则是短的。因此,对他们来说,按时间,经历长距离而出入的,就是长;经历短距离而出入的,应当知道是短。在这里,这位比丘以九种方式,当长入息、长出息时,了知“我长入息、我长出息”。应当知道,这样了知的人,就以一种方式成就了身随观念处的修习。正如《无碍解道》所说:巴利
Tattha sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakānaṃ mātukucchito nikkhamanakāle paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati. Pacchā bāhiravāto sukhumaṃ rajaṃ gahetvā abbhantaraṃ pavisanto tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyati. Evaṃ tāva assāsapassāsā veditabbā. Yā pana tesaṃ dīgharassatā, sā addhānavasena veditabbā. Yathā hi okāsaddhānaṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ udakaṃ vā vālikā vā ‘‘dīghamudakaṃ dīghā vālikā, rassamudakaṃ rassā vālikā’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi assāsapassāsā hatthisarīre ahisarīre ca tesaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ dīghaṃ addhānaṃ saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti, tasmā ‘‘dīghā’’ti vuccanti. Sunakhasasādīnaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ rassaṃ addhānaṃ sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamanti, tasmā ‘‘rassā’’ti vuccanti. Manussesu pana keci hatthiahiādayo viya kāladdhānavasena dīghaṃ assasanti ca passasanti ca. Keci sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ. Tasmā tesaṃ kālavasena dīghamaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca te dīghā. Ittaramaddhānaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca ‘‘rassā’’ti veditabbā. Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehi dīghaṃ assasanto ca passasanto ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmi passasāmī’’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ pajānato cassa ekenākārena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatīti veditabbā. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
怎样在长入息时了知“我长入息”,在长出息时了知“我长出息?他在被称为距离的长入息上入息,在被称为距离的长出息上出息,在被称为距离的长入出息上入息也出息。当他在被称为距离的长入出息上入息也出息时,欲生起;由于欲,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入息上入息,由于欲,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长出息上出息,由于欲,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入出息上入息也出息。当他在由于欲而被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入出息上入息也出息时,喜悦生起;由于喜悦,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入息上入息,由于喜悦,他在被称为距离、比之前更微细的长出息上出息……在被称为距离的长入出息上入息也出息。当他在由于喜悦而被称为距离、比之前更微细的长入出息上入息也出息时,心从长入出息转向,舍安住。以这九种方式,长入出息是身;现起是念;随观是智。身是现起,不是念;念既是现起也是念。他以那念、那智随观那身。因此说:于身修习身随观念处。巴利
‘‘Kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto ‘dīghaṃ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṃ passasanto ‘dīghaṃ passasāmī’ti pajānāti? Dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati, dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati, dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi chando uppajjati; chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati, chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte passasati, chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Chandavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi pāmojjaṃ uppajjati; pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasati, pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ passāsaṃ…pe… dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatipi passasatipi. Pāmojjavasena tato sukhumataraṃ dīghaṃ assāsapassāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte assasatopi passasatopi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā cittaṃ vivattati, upekkhā saṇṭhāti. Imehi navahi ākārehi dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyo; upaṭṭhānaṃ sati; anupassanā ñāṇaṃ; kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati; sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.166).
同样的方法也适用于短息的段落。不过这里有一个差别:在长息那段说的是“以称为长时的长入息”,而在这里说的是“以称为短促的短入息而入息”。所以,按照这个方式,应当一直贯通到“因此称为于身修习身随观念处”为止。应当知道,这位修行者就这样依长时和依短促,以这些方式了知入息和出息:当长入息时,他了知“我长入息”……当短出息时,他了知“我短出息”。巴利
Eseva nayo rassapadepi. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ‘‘yathā ettha ‘dīghaṃ assāsaṃ addhānasaṅkhāte’ti vuttaṃ; evamidha ‘rassaṃ assāsaṃ ittarasaṅkhāte assasatī’’ti āgataṃ. Tasmā tassa vasena yāva ‘‘tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā’’ti tāva yojetabbaṃ. Evamayaṃ addhānavasena ittaravasena ca imehākārehi assāsapassāse pajānanto dīghaṃ vā assasanto ‘‘dīghaṃ assasāmī’’ti pajānāti…pe… rassaṃ vā passasanto ‘‘rassaṃ passasāmī’’ti pajānātīti veditabbo.
入息有长有短;
出息也同样如此。
存在四种形态。
就在比丘的鼻端。巴利
‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso; Passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti; Nāsikaggeva bhikkhuno’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.219; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
“我应当觉知整个入息身而入息……我应当觉知整个出息身而出息……这样来修学。”意思是:让整个入息身的初、中、后三个阶段都被清楚地知道、被明显地觉察,同时修学“我应当入息”;让整个出息身的初、中、后三个阶段都被清楚地知道、被明显地觉察,同时修学“我应当出息”。像这样让它们被清楚地知道、被明显地觉察时,他就是以与智慧相应的心在入息,也在出息;因此说“我应当入息、我应当出息,这样来修学”。确实,有一位比丘,在细碎散开的入息身或出息身中,只有初段变得明显,中段和后段不明显。他只能把握初段,在中段和后段上感到吃力。有一位比丘,只有中段变得明显,初段和后段不明显。他只能把握中段,在初段和后段上感到吃力。有一位比丘,只有后段变得明显,初段和中段不明显。他只能把握后段,在初段和中段上感到吃力。有一位比丘,全部三个阶段都变得明显,他能够把握全部,在任何地方都不感到吃力。为了说明应当成为这样的修行者,世尊说:“我应当觉知整个入息身而入息……我应当觉知整个出息身而出息……这样来修学。”巴利
Sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedīassasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti sakalassa assāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘assasissāmī’’ti sikkhati. Sakalassa passāsakāyassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘passasissāmī’’ti sikkhati. Evaṃ viditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttacittena assasati ceva passasati ca; tasmā ‘‘assasissāmi passasissāmī’’ti sikkhatīti vuccati. Ekassa hi bhikkhuno cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭe assāsakāye passāsakāye vā ādi pākaṭo hoti, na majjhapariyosānaṃ. So ādimeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, majjhapariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa majjhaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādipariyosānaṃ. So majjhameva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādipariyosāne kilamati. Ekassa pariyosānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, na ādimajjhaṃ. So pariyosānaṃyeva pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, ādimajjhe kilamati. Ekassa sabbampi pākaṭaṃ hoti, so sabbampi pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, na katthaci kilamati. Tādisena bhavitabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti.
在这里,“学”就是这样的精勤和努力。或者,对于这样状态的人来说,他的防护就是这里的增上戒学;他的定就是增上心学;他的慧就是增上慧学。应当这样理解这里的含义:他依靠那念、那作意,在那个所缘上,学习、练习、修习、反复修持这三种学。其中,在先前的方式里,只需要入息和出息,不需要做别的什么;但从这里开始,则应当致力于生起智慧等。因此,在先前的方式里,只是依现在时态说“他知道‘我入息’、他知道‘我出息’”;从这里开始,为了显示应当做的生起智慧等行相,就以“我当觉知全身而入息”等说法,用未来时态来安立经文,应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha sikkhatīti evaṃ ghaṭati vāyamati. Yo vā tathābhūtassa saṃvaro; ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tathābhūtassa samādhi; ayaṃ adhicittasikkhā. Yā tathābhūtassa paññā; ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhāti. Imā tisso sikkhāyo tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha yasmā purimanaye kevalaṃ assasitabbaṃ passasitabbameva ca, na aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ; ito paṭṭhāya pana ñāṇuppādanādīsu yogo karaṇīyo. Tasmā tattha ‘‘assasāmīti pajānāti passasāmīti pajānāti’’cceva vattamānakālavasena pāḷiṃ vatvā ito paṭṭhāya kattabbassa ñāṇuppādanādino ākārassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmī’’tiādinā nayena anāgatavacanavasena pāḷi āropitāti veditabbā.
他训练自己:“我要让粗重的身行平静下来,然后吸气……我要让粗重的身行平静下来,然后呼气。”也就是说,他让粗重的身行(呼吸)平息、止息、灭去、寂静下来,同时训练自己:“我要吸气,我要呼气。”巴利
Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhatīti oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento paṭippassambhento nirodhento vūpasamento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati.
在这里,应当这样理解粗重与微细,以及轻安。因为这位比丘在还没有收摄身心的时候,身体和心都是躁动不安的。由于粗重的身心还没有平息,呼吸也就粗重,变得很强,不断地生起,光靠鼻子已经不够用,他张着嘴吸气和呼气。可是,当他的身体和心都被收摄之后,它们就变得宁静、平息了。当它们平息之后,呼吸就变得微细,生起时到了让人要分辨“到底还有没有”的程度。就像一个人跑完步,或者从山上下来,或者把重担从头顶卸下之后站着,他的呼吸是粗重的,鼻子不够用,他张着嘴吸气和呼气。可是,当他消除了疲劳,洗了澡、喝了水,把湿布敷在心口,躺在清凉的树荫下时,他的呼吸就变得微细,到了让人要分辨“到底还有没有”的程度。同样地,这位比丘在之前还没有收摄身心的阶段,身体和心……乃至到了让人要分辨的程度。这是什么原因呢?因为他在之前还没有收摄身心的阶段,并没有“我要让粗重的身行平息”这样的转向、专注、作意和观察;而在收摄身心的阶段,这些都有了。因此,从还没有收摄身心的阶段到收摄身心的阶段,他的身行变得微细。所以古德们说:巴利
Tatrevaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā. Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca cittañca sadarathā honti. Oḷārikānaṃ kāyacittānaṃ oḷārikatte avūpasante assāsapassāsāpi oḷārikā honti, balavatarā hutvā pavattanti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panassa kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā honti, tadā te santā honti vūpasantā. Tesu vūpasantesu assāsapassāsā sukhumā hutvā pavattanti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbākārappattā honti. Seyyathāpi purisassa dhāvitvā pabbatā vā orohitvā mahābhāraṃ vā sīsato oropetvā ṭhitassa oḷārikā assāsapassāsā honti, nāsikā nappahoti, mukhena assasantopi passasantopi tiṭṭhati. Yadā panesa taṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca allasāṭakaṃ hadaye katvā sītāya chāyāya nipanno hoti, athassa te assāsapassāsā sukhumā honti, ‘‘atthi nu kho natthī’’ti vicetabbākārappattā. Evameva imassa bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle kāyo ca…pe… vicetabbākārappattā honti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hissa pubbe apariggahitakāle ‘‘oḷārikoḷārike kāyasaṅkhāre passambhemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahitakāle pana atthi. Tenassa apariggahitakālato pariggahitakāle kāyasaṅkhāro sukhumo hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
当身体和心被搅动时,它就变得特别强烈。
身体不躁动时,它变得微细而运转。巴利
‘‘Sāraddhe kāye citte ca, adhimattaṃ pavattati; Asāraddhamhi kāyamhi, sukhumaṃ sampavattatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.220; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
在把握呼吸的阶段,呼吸也是粗的;到了初禅的近行定,呼吸就变细了。而在初禅近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了初禅本身,呼吸就变细了。在初禅和第二禅的近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了第二禅,呼吸就变细了。在第二禅和第三禅的近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了第三禅,呼吸就变细了。在第三禅和第四禅的近行定中,呼吸是粗的;到了第四禅,呼吸就变得极其微细,几乎不再运行了。以上这是长部诵者和相应部诵者的主张。巴利
Pariggahepi oḷāriko, paṭhamajjhānūpacāre sukhumo; tasmimpi oḷāriko paṭhamajjhāne sukhumo. Paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, dutiyajjhāne sukhumo. Dutiyajjhāne ca tatiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, tatiyajjhāne sukhumo. Tatiyajjhāne ca catutthajjhānūpacāre ca oḷāriko, catutthajjhāne atisukhumo appavattimeva pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ mataṃ.
中部诵者则认为:“在初禅时(呼吸)是粗的,在第二禅近行定时是细的。”他们主张,从较低的禅那到较高的禅那近行定,呼吸越来越细。不过,按照所有诵者共同接受的观点:未专注于(呼吸)时生起的身行,在专注时止息;专注时生起的身行,在初禅近行定时止息……在第四禅近行定时生起的身行,在第四禅时止息。以上就是依止禅(修行)的方法。巴利
Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘paṭhamajjhāne oḷāriko, dutiyajjhānūpacāre sukhumo’’ti evaṃ heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijjhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Sabbesaṃyeva pana matena apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhati, pariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhānūpacāre…pe… catutthajjhānūpacāre pavattakāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne paṭippassambhati. Ayaṃ tāva samathe nayo.
在观修中,如果还没有对所缘加以把握,这时生起的身行是粗的;一旦把握了四大种,身行就变细了。而那个(把握四大种时的身行)相对(前面的阶段)还是粗的,把握所造色时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握全部色法时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握无色法时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握色法与无色法时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握缘时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,把握有缘的名色时才是细的。那个又还是粗的,以诸行相为所缘的观修中才是细的。那个在弱的观修中还是粗的,在强的观修中才是细的。在这里,应当依照前面所说的方式,了知前一个阶段的身行被后一个阶段的身行所止息。如此,在这里应当了知身行的粗与细,以及它的止息。巴利
Vipassanāyaṃ pana apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro oḷāriko, mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, upādārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, arūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, paccayapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahe sukhumo. Sopi oḷāriko, lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya sukhumo. Sopi dubbalavipassanāya oḷāriko, balavavipassanāya sukhumo. Tattha pubbe vuttanayeneva purimassa purimassa pacchimena pacchimena passaddhi veditabbā. Evamettha oḷārikasukhumatā ca passaddhi ca veditabbā.
在《无碍解道》中,配合它的问难与解答,这个意思是这样说的:“怎样修学‘我令身行止息而吸入……’……‘……而呼出’呢?什么是身行?长吸入是属身体的、系属于身的这些法,这就是身行;他修学令那些身行止息、灭去、平静。长呼出是属身体的这些法……短吸入……短呼出……觉知全身而吸入……觉知全身而呼出,这些是属身体的、系属于身的法,这就是身行;他修学令那些身行止息、灭去、平静。”巴利
Paṭisambhidāyaṃ panassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi evamattho vutto – ‘‘kathaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmī’’ti sikkhati? Katame kāyasaṅkhārā? Dīghaṃ assāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyappaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā, te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati. Dīghaṃ passāsā kāyikā ete dhammā…pe… rassaṃ assāsā…pe… rassaṃ passāsā… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assāsā… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī passāsā kāyikā ete dhammā kāyappaṭibaddhā kāyasaṅkhārā, te kāyasaṅkhāre passambhento nirodhento vūpasamento sikkhati.
以这样的身行——身体的弯曲、伸直、收拢、伸展、移动、颤动、动摇、震动——他修学:我要让身行平息而入息;他修学:我要让身行平息而出息。巴利
Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi yā kāyassa ānamanā vinamanā sannamanā paṇamanā iñjanā phandanā calanā kampanā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati.
对于具备这样性质的身行——也就是身体不弯曲、不歪斜、不收缩、不伸展、不移动、不颤动、不摇动、不震动——他修学:我要让寂静、微细的身行平息下来而入息;他修学:我要让寂静、微细的身行平息下来而出息。巴利
Yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi yā kāyassa na ānamanā na vinamanā na sannamanā na paṇamanā aniñjanā aphandanā acalanā akampanā, santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati.
据说,他这样训练:我要让身行平息下来,然后入息;我要让身行平息下来,然后出息。如果情况是这样的话,就不会有对风的修习,不会有对入出息本身的修习,不会有对入出息念的修习,也不会有对入出息念定的修习;而且智者既不会进入那种等至,也不会从那种等至出定。巴利
Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmīti sikkhati, passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā na hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā na na hoti, na ca naṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
据说,他这样训练自己:“我要让身行平息下来,然后入息……出息。”当这种状态存在时,风的修习就发生了,入出息本身的修习也发生了,入出息念的修习也发生了,入出息念定的修习也发生了;而智者既能进入那种等至,也能从中出来。巴利
Iti kira passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assasissāmi…pe… passasissāmīti sikkhati. Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
打个比方来说,就像敲击铜器的时候,最先响起的是粗重的声音。因为对粗重声音的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使粗重的声音消失了,接下来还会响起微细的声音。因为对微细声音的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使微细的声音也消失了,接下来心仍然会以微细声音的相为所缘而继续运转。同样地,最先生起的是粗的入出息。因为对粗的入出息的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使粗的入出息停止了,接下来还会生起细的入出息。因为对细的入出息的相已经好好把握、好好作意、好好确认,所以即使细的入出息也停止了,接下来心仍然会以细的入出息的相为所缘,而不会散乱。巴利
Yathā kathaṃ viya? Seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā saddā pavattanti, oḷārikānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumakā saddā pavattanti, sukhumakānaṃ saddānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ pavattati; evameva paṭhamaṃ oḷārikā assāsapassāsā pavattanti, oḷārikānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi oḷārike assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumakā assāsapassāsā pavattanti, sukhumakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ nimittaṃ suggahitattā sumanasikatattā sūpadhāritattā niruddhepi sukhumake assāsapassāse atha pacchā sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇatāpi cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati.
事情到了这个地步,风的修习也起来了,入出息的修习也起来了,入出息念的修习也起来了,入出息念定的修习也起来了,而且智者会进入这种等至,也会从这种等至出来。巴利
Evaṃ sante vātūpaladdhiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatiyā ca pabhāvanā hoti, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā hoti, tañca naṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā samāpajjantipi vuṭṭhahantipi.
使身行平息:入出息就是身,现起是念,随观是智。身是现起,但不是念;念既是现起,也是念。他以那个念、那个智随观那个身。因此说:“于身,修习身随观念处。”巴利
Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti assāsapassāsā kāyo, upaṭṭhānaṃ sati, anupassanā ñāṇaṃ. Kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ no sati, sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena taṃ kāyaṃ anupassati. Tena vuccati – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti (paṭi. ma. 1.171).
这里先就依身随观所说的第一组四法,逐词加以解释。巴利
Ayaṃ tāvettha kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassa anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
在这里,这第一组四法只是为初学者作为业处来说的;其余三组四法,则是为已经证得禅那的人,依受随观、心随观、法随观来说的。因此,想通过修习这个业处,以入出息念第四禅作为观禅的近因,连同无碍解一起证得阿罗汉果的佛弟子,所应当做的一切,在这里首先都要依初学者的情形,从最开始就这样来理解。首先,应当清净四种戒。其中,清净有三种:不犯戒、犯戒后出罪、不被烦恼逼迫。因为只有戒清净的人,修习才能成就。还有,塔院义务、菩提树院义务、戒师义务、教授师义务、浴室义务、布萨堂义务、八十二种犍度义务、十四种大义务,依这些而说的增上行仪戒,也应当好好圆满。如果有人说:“我守护戒就好了,何必还要做增上行仪的事?”他的戒不可能圆满。相反,增上行仪的义务圆满时,戒就圆满;戒圆满时,定就能孕育出来。世尊确实这样说过:“诸比丘,若比丘不圆满增上行仪法,却说‘我要圆满诸戒’,这是不可能的。”(《增支部》5.21)应当广说。因此,他应当好好圆满这称为塔院义务等的增上行仪戒。接着:巴利
Yasmā panettha idameva catukkaṃ ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, itarāni pana tīṇi catukkāni ettha pattajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena vuttāni, tasmā idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā ānāpānassaticatutthajjhānapadaṭṭhānāya vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena buddhaputtena yaṃ kātabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ idheva tāva ādikammikassa kulaputtassa vasena ādito pabhuti evaṃ veditabbaṃ. Catubbidhaṃ tāva sīlaṃ visodhetabbaṃ. Tattha tividhā visodhanā – anāpajjanaṃ, āpannavuṭṭhānaṃ, kilesehi ca appatipīḷanaṃ. Evaṃ visuddhasīlassa hi bhāvanā sampajjati. Yampidaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ ācariyavattaṃ jantāgharavattaṃ uposathāgāravattaṃ dveasīti khandhakavattāni cuddasavidhaṃ mahāvattanti imesaṃ vasena ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccati, tampi sādhukaṃ paripūretabbaṃ. Yo hi ‘‘ahaṃ sīlaṃ rakkhāmi, kiṃ ābhisamācārikena kamma’’nti vadeyya, tassa sīlaṃ paripūressatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ābhisamācārikavatte pana paripūre sīlaṃ paripūrati, sīle paripūre samādhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘so vata, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ābhisamācārikaṃ dhammaṃ aparipūretvā ‘sīlāni paripūressatī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.21) vitthāretabbaṃ. Tasmā tena yampidaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādi ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccati, tampi sādhukaṃ paripūretabbaṃ. Tato –
住处、家族、利得,团体以及业为第五。
远行、亲属、疾病、经教研习、神通,这就是那十种。巴利
‘‘Āvāso ca kulaṃ lābho, gaṇo kammañca pañcamaṃ; Addhānaṃ ñāti ābādho, gantho iddhīti te dasā’’ti.
对于以上所说的十种障碍,存在哪一种障碍,就该把它断除。巴利
Evaṃ vuttesu dasasu palibodhesu yo palibodho atthi, so upacchinditabbo.
像这样断除了障碍之后,就应该学习业处。业处也有两种:一切处业处和守护业处。其中,所谓一切处业处,就是对比丘僧团等修慈,以及死随念;也有人说不净想也算。修业处的比丘首先应该划定范围,对界内的比丘僧团修慈,然后对界内的诸天修慈,然后对行境村落中有权势的人修慈,然后对那里的人,再扩展到一切众生。因为他对僧团修慈,能让同住的人心生柔软,于是他就能和他们安乐共住。对界内诸天修慈,诸天因为心被慈软化,就会以如法的守护好好地保护他。对行境村落中有权势的人修慈,那些有权势的人因为心相续被慈软化,就会以如法的守护好好地保护他的资具。对那里的人修慈,因为他的心被慈软化,那些人对他生起净信,他就能不被他们轻视地生活。对一切众生修慈,他就能在一切处所行无碍。巴利
Evaṃ upacchinnapalibodhena kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Tampi duvidhaṃ hoti – sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānañca pārihāriyakammaṭṭhānañca. Tattha sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma bhikkhusaṅghādīsu mettā maraṇassati ca asubhasaññātipi eke. Kammaṭṭhānikena hi bhikkhunā paṭhamaṃ tāva paricchinditvā sīmaṭṭhakabhikkhusaṅghe mettā bhāvetabbā; tato sīmaṭṭhakadevatāsu, tato gocaragāme issarajane, tato tattha manusse upādāya sabbasattesu. So hi bhikkhusaṅghe mettāya sahavāsīnaṃ muducittataṃ janeti, athassa sukhasaṃvāsatā hoti. Sīmaṭṭhakadevatāsu mettāya mudukatacittāhi devatāhi dhammikāya rakkhāya susaṃvihitārakkho hoti. Gocaragāme issarajane mettāya mudukatacittasantānehi issarehi dhammikāya rakkhāya surakkhitaparikkhāro hoti. Tattha manussesu mettāya pasāditacittehi tehi aparibhūto hutvā vicarati. Sabbasattesu mettāya sabbattha appaṭihatacāro hoti.
而对于死随念,当人这样思惟“我一定会死”时,就会舍弃不正当的寻求,悚惧感不断增长,成为不退缩、不懈怠的人。通过不净想,即使面对天界的所缘,也不会生起渴爱。因此,这三种(业处)因为具有极大的利益,被认为“应当在一切处修习、应当希求”,又因为它们是所希求的瑜伽精勤业的近因,所以称为“一切处业处”。巴利
Maraṇassatiyā pana ‘‘avassaṃ maritabba’’nti cintento anesanaṃ pahāya uparūparivaḍḍhamānasaṃvego anolīnavuttiko hoti. Asubhasaññāya dibbesupi ārammaṇesu taṇhā nuppajjati. Tenassetaṃ tayaṃ evaṃ bahūpakārattā ‘‘sabbattha atthayitabbaṃ icchitabba’’nti katvā adhippetassa ca yogānuyogakammassa padaṭṭhānattā ‘‘sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati.
在三十八种所缘里,哪一种适合某个人的性格,他就应当一直守护那一种,所以按照前面说过的方法,这也叫做“应当守护的业处”。不过在这里,入出息念这个业处本身就被称为“应当守护的业处”。这是这里的简要说明。如果想了解详细内容,比如戒清净的论述和断除障碍的论述,就应当从《清净道论》中获取。巴利
Aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu pana yaṃ yassa caritānukūlaṃ, taṃ tassa niccaṃ pariharitabbattā yathāvutteneva nayena ‘‘pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāna’’ntipi vuccati. Idha pana idameva ānāpānasssātikammaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana sīlavisodhanakathaṃ palibodhupacchedakathañca icchantena visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
戒清净且断除了障碍的人,在学这个业处时,应当亲近一位佛弟子——他依靠这个业处证得了第四禅,修成了观禅,达到了阿罗汉果——并在他面前学习。如果找不到这样的人,就向一位阿那含学习;如果找不到,就向一位斯陀含学习;如果找不到,就向一位入流者学习;如果找不到,就向一位证得入出息念第四禅的人学习;如果找不到,就向一位对巴利圣典和注释不迷惑、能作决断的导师学习。因为阿罗汉等人只宣说自己所证得的道。而这位导师,就像在密林中开出一条大象走的路一样,在一切处都不迷惑,能辨别适合与不适合之后再说。巴利
Evaṃ visuddhasīlena pana upacchinnapalibodhena ca idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhantena imināva kammaṭṭhānena catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattassa buddhaputtassa santike uggahetabbaṃ. Taṃ alabhantena anāgāmissa, tampi alabhantena sakadāgāmissa, tampi alabhantena sotāpannassa, tampi alabhantena ānāpānacatutthajjhānalābhissa, tampi alabhantena pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca asammūḷhassa vinicchayācariyassa santike uggahetabbaṃ. Arahantādayo hi attanā adhigatamaggameva ācikkhanti. Ayaṃ pana gahanapadese mahāhatthipathaṃ nīharanto viya sabbattha asammūḷho sappāyāsappāyaṃ paricchinditvā katheti.
这里接着按顺序说明:那位比丘应当生活简朴,具足戒律与行仪,然后去亲近前面所说的那种导师,用服侍和依教奉行来让导师心生欢喜,然后在导师面前学习具备五个环节的业处。这五个环节就是:学习、遍问、现起、安止、相。其中,“学习”是指学取业处;“遍问”是指对业处反复询问;“现起”是指业处在心中显现;“安止”是指心安住在业处上;“相”是指业处的相。也就是说,要把握“这个业处有这样的相”,这就是在掌握业处的自性。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – tena bhikkhunā sallahukavuttinā vinayācārasampannena vuttappakāramācariyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vattapaṭipattiyā ārādhitacittassa tassa santike pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Tatrime pañca sandhayo – uggaho, paripucchā, upaṭṭhānaṃ, appanā, lakkhaṇanti. Tattha ‘‘uggaho’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ, ‘‘paripucchā’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā, ‘‘upaṭṭhānaṃ’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘appanā’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānappanā, ‘‘lakkhaṇaṃ’’ nāma kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃlakkhaṇamidaṃ kammaṭṭhāna’’nti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
像这样学习五支业处时,自己不会疲惫,也不会让导师受累。所以,应当先请导师简要地讲解,然后长时间反复诵习,这样掌握了五支业处之后,如果那个地方适合,就该住在那里。如果那个地方不适合,就向导师告辞:如果是钝根的人,最多走一由旬;如果是利根的人,走远一点也可以。然后前往一个远离十八种住处过失、具备五种住处条件的住处,到了那里住下来,要断除琐碎的牵挂,吃完饭,消除饭后的昏沉,通过随念三宝的功德让心生起欢喜,从导师那里学来的哪怕一句话也不忘失,应当这样作意这个入出息念业处。这就是这里的简要说明。如果想要详细知道,就应该从《清净道论》里取来。巴利
Evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhanto attanāpi na kilamati, ācariyampi na viheṭheti; tasmā thokaṃ uddisāpetvā bahukālaṃ sajjhāyitvā evaṃ pañcasandhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā sace tattha sappāyaṃ hoti, tattheva vasitabbaṃ. No ce tattha sappāyaṃ hoti, ācariyaṃ āpucchitvā sace mandapañño yojanaparamaṃ gantvā, sace tikkhapañño dūrampi gantvā aṭṭhārasasenāsanadosavivajjitaṃ, pañcasenāsanaṅgasamannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ upagamma tattha vasantena upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi asammussantena idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana imaṃ kathāmaggaṃ icchantena visuddhimaggato (visuddhi. 1.55) gahetabbo.
那么,对于前面所说的“应当作意这个入出息念业处”,这里作意的方法是这样的——巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabba’’nti tatrāyaṃ manasikāravidhi –
计数、跟随、接触、安住、观察;
转向、清净,以及对它们的反观。巴利
‘‘Gaṇanā anubandhanā, phusanā ṭhapanā sallakkhaṇā; Vivaṭṭanā pārisuddhi, tesañca paṭipassanā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.223; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
“计数”就是计数。“随逐”就是跟随。“触”就是所触之处。“安止”就是安止定。“观察”就是观。“转向”就是道。“清净”就是果。“对它们的省察”就是省察。在这里,初学的善男子首先应当以计数来作意这个业处。计数时,不应低于五,不应超过十,中间不应出现间断。因为如果低于五,心在狭窄的空间里生起时就会躁动,就像牛群被关在狭窄的牛栏里一样。如果超过十,心就会依赖计数才生起。如果中间出现间断,心就会动摇,想:“我的业处是不是已经达到顶点了?”因此,应当避免这些过失而计数。巴利
‘‘Gaṇanā’’ti gaṇanāyeva. ‘‘Anubandhanā’’ti anuvahanā. ‘‘Phusanā’’ti phuṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapanā’’ti appanā. ‘‘Sallakkhaṇā’’ti vipassanā. ‘‘Vivaṭṭanā’’ti maggo. ‘‘Pārisuddhī’’ti phalaṃ. ‘‘Tesañca paṭipassanā’’ti paccavekkhaṇā. Tattha iminā ādikammikakulaputtena paṭhamaṃ gaṇanāya idaṃ kamaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Gaṇentena ca pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā na ṭhapetabbaṃ, dasannaṃ upari na netabbaṃ, antare khaṇḍaṃ na dassetabbaṃ. Pañcannaṃ heṭṭhā ṭhapentassa hi sambādhe okāse cittuppādo vipphandati, sambādhe vaje sanniruddhagogaṇo viya. Dasannaṃ upari nentassa gaṇanānissitova cittuppādo hoti. Antarā khaṇḍaṃ dassentassa ‘‘sikhāppattaṃ nu kho me kammaṭṭhānaṃ, no’’ti cittaṃ vikampati. Tasmā ete dose vajjetvā gaṇetabbaṃ.
计数时,首先要采用缓慢的计数方式,就像量谷人计数那样。量谷人把一升容器装满,说一声“一”,然后倒出来。再装的时候,如果看到一点杂物,就把它扔掉,嘴里说着“一、一”。对“二、二”等等也是这样。同样地,在这里也应当取入出息中现起的那一次,从“一、一”开始,一直到“十、十”,随着每一次生起而观察、计数。他这样计数的时候,呼出和吸入的入出息就变得清晰了。巴利
Gaṇentena ca paṭhamaṃ dandhagaṇanāya dhaññamāpakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ. Dhaññamāpako hi nāḷiṃ pūretvā ‘‘eka’’nti vatvā okirati. Puna pūrento kiñci kacavaraṃ disvā taṃ chaḍḍento ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti vadati. Esa nayo ‘‘dve dve’’tiādīsu. Evameva imināpi assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti taṃ gahetvā ‘‘ekaṃ eka’’nti ādiṃkatvā yāva ‘‘dasa dasā’’ti pavattamānaṃ pavattamānaṃ upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabbaṃ. Tassevaṃ gaṇayato nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca assāsapassāsā pākaṭā honti.
这时,他应该放弃那种慢吞吞的计数方式,也就是像量谷人那样的数法,改用快速的计数方式,也就是像牧牛人那样的数法。因为一个熟练的牧牛人,早上用衣角兜着石子,手里拿着绳子和棍子,来到牛栏,拍打牛背,然后坐在门闩柱的顶上。每当一头牛走到门口,他就扔一颗石子,数“一、二”。整夜被关在拥挤狭窄的地方、吃尽苦头的牛群,出栏时互相挤撞,一群一群地急冲出来。他也跟着飞快地数“三、四、五、十”。同样地,这个人按前面说的方法计数时,入出息变得清楚了,就会越来越快地反复运行。他由此知道“它们在反复运行”,于是不把注意力放在内息或外息上,只取那到达门口的息,飞快地数:“一、二、三、四、五;一、二、三、四、五、六;一、二、三、四、五、六、七……八……九……十。”因为在与计数相连的业处中,单靠计数之力,心就能得专一,就像在湍急的水流中靠船桨把船稳住一样。巴利
Athānena taṃ dandhagaṇanaṃ dhaññamāpakagaṇanaṃ pahāya sīghagaṇanāya gopālakagaṇanāya gaṇetabbaṃ . Cheko hi gopālako sakkharāyo ucchaṅgena gahetvā rajjudaṇḍahattho pātova vajaṃ gantvā gāvo piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā palighatthambhamatthake nisinno dvāraṃ pattaṃ pattaṃyeva gāvaṃ ‘‘eko dve’’ti sakkharaṃ khipitvā khipitvā gaṇeti. Tiyāmarattiṃ sambādhe okāse dukkhaṃ vutthagogaṇo nikkhamanto aññamaññaṃ upanighaṃsanto vegena vegena puñjo puñjo hutvā nikkhamati. So vegena vegena ‘‘tīṇi cattāri pañca dasā’’ti gaṇetiyeva. Evamimassāpi purimanayena gaṇayato assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hutvā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ punappunaṃ sañcaranti. Tato tena ‘‘punappunaṃ sañcarantī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca aggahetvā dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva gahetvā ‘‘eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca , eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha, eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañca cha satta…pe… aṭṭha… nava… dasā’’ti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Gaṇanāpaṭibaddhe hi kammaṭṭhāne gaṇanābaleneva cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti arittūpatthambhanavasena caṇḍasote nāvāṭhapanamiva.
当他这样快速地计数时,业处就像不间断地运转一样显现出来。这时,知道“它不间断地运转”之后,不去执取内风和外风,只按前面的方法越来越快地计数。因为如果让心随着入内的风一起进去,内部就像被风冲击、充满脂肪一样;如果让心随着外出的风一起出去,心就会向外散乱到各种不同的所缘上。但是,如果把念安住在触处上而修习,修习才能成就。因此说:“不执取内风和外风,只按前面的方法越来越快地计数。”巴利
Tassevaṃ sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇayato kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirantarappavattaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Atha ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattatī’’ti ñatvā anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabbaṃ. Antopavisanavātena hi saddhiṃ cittaṃ pavesayato abbhantaraṃ vātabbhāhataṃ medapūritaṃ viya hoti, bahinikkhamanavātena saddhiṃ cittaṃ nīharato bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipati. Phuṭṭhokāse pana satiṃ ṭhapetvā bhāventasseva bhāvanā sampajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anto ca bahi ca vātaṃ apariggahetvā purimanayeneva vegena vegena gaṇetabba’’nti.
那么,要计数到多久呢?直到不靠计数,念也能安住在出入息的所缘上。因为计数就是为了切断向外散乱的寻思,让念稳稳地安住在出入息的所缘上。巴利
Kīva ciraṃ panetaṃ gaṇetabbanti? Yāva vinā gaṇanāya assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati santiṭṭhati. Bahi visaṭavitakkavicchedaṃ katvā assāsapassāsārammaṇe sati saṇṭhapanatthaṃyeva hi gaṇanāti.
像这样用计数来作意之后,就应该用随逐来作意。所谓随逐,就是放下计数,用念不间断地跟随入息和出息;而且这不是按初、中、后三段来跟随。因为对于呼出的风,脐是初,心脏是中,鼻端是后;对于吸入的风,鼻端是初,心脏是中,脐是后。如果跟随它时心散乱到别处,身心就会变得躁动、动摇。正如所说的:巴利
Evaṃ gaṇanāya manasikatvā anubandhanāya manasikātabbaṃ. Anubandhanā nāma gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā satiyā nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanaṃ; tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena. Bahinikkhamanavātassa hi nābhi ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Abbhantarapavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādi, hadayaṃ majjhaṃ, nābhi pariyosānaṃ. Tañcassa anugacchato vikkhepagataṃ cittaṃ sāraddhāya ceva hoti iñjanāya ca. Yathāha –
以正念随逐入息的初、中、后时,如果心向内散乱,那么身体和心都会变得躁动、动摇、颤动。以正念随逐出息的初、中、后时,如果心向外散乱,那么身体和心也都会变得躁动、动摇、颤动。巴利
‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca. Passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157).
所以,以随逐的方式作意时,不应该按初、中、后来作意,而应该以触和安住的方式来作意。因为不像计数随逐那样,有以触和安住方式各自分开的作意。只是在每一个被触到的点上计数时,他既在作意计数,也在作意触。就在那里把计数收摄回来,以念随逐,并以安止的方式安放心,这就叫作以随逐、触和安住来作意。这个含义应当通过注释书里说的跛者喻和守门人喻,以及《无碍解道》里说的锯喻来理解。巴利
Tasmā anubandhanāya manasikarontena na ādimajjhapariyosānavasena manasikātabbaṃ. Apica kho phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasikātabbaṃ. Gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi. Phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva pana gaṇento gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karoti. Tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto appanāvasena ca cittaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti vuccati. Svāyamattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttapaṅguḷadovārikopamāhi paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttakakacopamāya ca veditabbo.
这里有一个跛脚人的比喻。就像有个跛脚的人,在母子俩荡秋千玩的时候,等他们把秋千推出去之后,他就坐在秋千柱的底下,随着秋千板一次次荡过来、荡过去,他能看到秋千板的两头和中间,但他并不需要为了看到两头和中间而专门费力气。同样,这位比丘以念的力量安住在系缚所缘的柱子底下,把入出息当作秋千推出去之后,就安坐在那个相上,以念跟随每一次入出息在触点上经过的初、中、后,并把心安放在那里观见,但他并不需要为了看到这些而专门费力气。这就是跛脚人的比喻。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ paṅguḷopamā – ‘‘seyyathāpi paṅguḷo dolāya kīḷataṃ mātāputtānaṃ dolaṃ khipitvā tattheva dolatthambhamūle nisinno kamena āgacchantassa ca gacchantassa ca dolāphalakassa ubho koṭiyo majjhañca passati, na ca ubhokoṭimajjhānaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti. Evamevāyaṃ bhikkhu sativasena upanibandhanatthambhamūle ṭhatvā assāsapassāsadolaṃ khipitvā tattheva nimitte satiyā nisinno kamena āgacchantānañca gacchantānañca phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchanto tattha ca cittaṃ ṭhapento passati, na ca tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ byāvaṭo hoti. Ayaṃ paṅguḷopamā.
这个则是守门人的比喻:就像守门人不会去盘查城内和城外的男人,问“你是谁?从哪里来?要去哪里?你手里拿着什么?”因为那些不是他的职责。他只盘查每一个来到门口的人。同样,这位比丘不会把已经进入体内的气息和已经呼出体外的气息当作职责,只有每一阵到达门口的气息才是他的职责。这就是守门人的比喻。巴利
Ayaṃ pana dovārikopamā – ‘‘seyyathāpi dovāriko nagarassa anto ca bahi ca purise ‘ko tvaṃ, kuto vā āgato, kuhiṃ vā gacchasi, kiṃ vā te hatthe’ti na vīmaṃsati, na hi tassa te bhārā. Dvārappattaṃ dvārappattaṃyeva pana vīmaṃsati; evameva imassa bhikkhuno anto paviṭṭhavātā ca bahi nikkhantavātā ca na bhārā honti, dvārappattā dvārappattāyeva bhārāti. Ayaṃ dovārikopamā.
不过,锯喻应当从一开始就这样理解。因为确实这样说过:巴利
Kakacopamā pana āditopabhuti evaṃ veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
相、入息、出息,而不是单一心的所缘。
不了知这三法,修习就无从成立。
相、入息与出息,而不是单一心的所缘。
对于了知这三法的人来说,修习就可以得到。巴利
‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanānupalabbhati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.159);
这三法怎么就不是同一心的所缘了?这三法又并非不被知道,心怎么就不散乱了?而且精进显现出来,加行成就,证得殊胜?
就像一棵树被放在平坦的地面上,有人用锯子去锯它。那人靠着锯子碰到树的锯齿,正念现前;他不对来的锯齿或去的锯齿作意,来的或去的锯齿也不是不知道,精进显现出来,加行成就。巴利
Kathaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇaṃ na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati ? Seyyathāpi rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto, tamenaṃ puriso kakacena chindeyya, rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti.
就像把一棵树放在平坦的地面上,这就是系缚所缘的相。就像锯齿,入出息也是如此。就像那人因为碰到树的锯齿而保持正念现前,他不对来去的锯齿作意,而来去的锯齿也并非不被知道,此时精进显现出来,加行也得以成就;同样地,比丘把正念安立在鼻端或口相上而坐,他不对来去的入出息作意,而来去的入出息也并非不被知道,此时精进显现出来,加行也得以成就,殊胜也得以证得。巴利
Yathā rukkho same bhūmibhāge nikkhitto; evaṃ upanibandhananimittaṃ. Yathā kakacadantā; evaṃ assāsapassāsā. Yathā rukkhe phuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena purisassa sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, evameva bhikkhu nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā nisinno hoti, na āgate vā gate vā assāsapassāse manasi karoti, na āgatā vā gatā vā assāsapassāsā aviditā honti, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
什么是精进?对于已经发动精进的人来说,他的身和心都变得堪能做事——这就是精进。什么是加行?已经发动精进的人,各种杂染被断除,寻思被止息——这就是加行。什么是殊胜?已经发动精进的人,诸结被断除,随眠被彻底遣除——这就是殊胜。如此,这三法并不是同一颗心的所缘,而这三法也不是不被了知。心不散乱,精进得以显现,加行得以成就,殊胜得以证得。巴利
Padhānanti katamaṃ padhānaṃ? Āraddhavīriyassa kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ hoti – idaṃ padhānaṃ. Katamo payogo? Āraddhavīriyassa upakkilesā pahīyanti, vitakkā vūpasammanti – ayaṃ payogo. Katamo viseso? Āraddhavīriyassa saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī honti – ayaṃ viseso. Evaṃ ime tayo dhammā ekacittassa ārammaṇā na honti, na cime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, na ca cittaṃ vikkhepaṃ gacchati, padhānañca paññāyati, payogañca sādheti, visesamadhigacchati.
对于任何人来说,入出息念如果已经圆满,并且被很好地修习;
按次第修习成熟,就像佛陀所教导的那样。
他照亮了这个世界,就像月亮从云中脱出一样。巴利
‘‘Ānāpānassatī yassa, paripuṇṇā subhāvitā; Anupubbaṃ paricitā, yathā buddhena desitā; So imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti, abbhā muttova candimā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 1.160);
这就是锯喻。不过在这里应当知道,对已经来到这种状态的人,只要对入出息的来去不作意就够了。这样修这个业处的人,有的人不久就生起禅相,并且成就了具备其余禅支的安止定,也就是所谓的安住。可是也有的人,从以计数方式作意的时候开始,随着粗重的入出息逐渐止息,身体粗重感平息下来,身心都变得轻快,身体就像要在空中跳起来一样。好比身体粗重的人坐在床或椅子上时,床椅会下陷、吱嘎作响,坐垫会起皱;而身体不粗重的人坐下去时,床椅不下陷、不吱嘎作响,坐垫也不起皱,床椅就像塞满了棉花一样。为什么呢?因为身体不粗重就是轻快的。同样地,从以计数方式作意的时候开始,随着粗重的入出息逐渐止息,身体粗重感平息下来,身心都变得轻快,身体就像要在空中跳起来一样。巴利
Ayaṃ kakacopamā. Idha panassa āgatāgatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojananti veditabbaṃ. Idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaroto kassaci nacireneva nimittañca uppajjati, avasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjati. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālatopabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti. Yathā sāraddhakāyassa mañce vā pīṭhe vā nisīdato mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, vikūjati, paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti. Asāraddhakāyassa pana nisīdato neva mañcapīṭhaṃ onamati, na vikūjati, na paccattharaṇaṃ valiṃ gaṇhāti, tūlapicupūritaṃ viya mañcapīṭhaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā asāraddho kāyo lahuko hoti; evameva gaṇanāvasena manasikārakālatopabhuti anukkamato oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasena kāyadarathe vūpasante kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hoti, sarīraṃ ākāse laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hoti.
当他的粗显入出息停止后,心就以微细入出息的相为所缘而继续运作;当那个也停止后,心又接二连三地以比那更微细、更微细的相为所缘而继续运作。这是怎样的呢?就像一个人用大铁棒敲击铜锣,一击之下发出很大的声音,他的心就以粗显的声音为所缘而运作;当粗显的声音停止后,接着就以微细声音的相为所缘;当那个也停止后,心又接二连三地以比那更微细、更微细的声音的相为所缘而继续运作。应当这样理解。这也是曾经说过的——‘譬如敲击铜锣时’等,详细解说见《无碍解道》(1.171)。巴利
Tassa oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhe sukhumaassāsapassāsanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattati, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumatarasukhumatamanimittārammaṇaṃ pavattatiyeva. Kathaṃ? Yathā puriso mahatiyā lohasalākāya kaṃsatāḷaṃ ākoṭeyya, ekappahārena mahāsaddo uppajjeyya, tassa oḷārikasaddārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavatteyya, niruddhe oḷārike sadde atha pacchā sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ, tasmimpi niruddhe aparāparaṃ tato sukhumatarasukhumatamasaddanimittārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ pavattateva; evanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi kaṃse ākoṭite’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vitthāro.
就像其他业处越往上修就越清晰,这个业处却不是这样。这个业处越往上修、越持续修习,反而变得越来越微细,甚至不再现起。当它这样不现起的时候,那位比丘不应该从座位上站起来,拍一拍皮垫就走。他该怎么做呢?他不应该想“我去问老师”或者“我的业处现在丢了”就起身离开,因为改变姿势走动的话,业处就会变得生疏。所以,应该就像还坐在原位时那样,从那个位置把它提起来。巴利
Yathā hi aññāni kammaṭṭhānāni uparūpari vibhūtāni honti, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana uparūpari bhāventassa bhāventassa sukhumattaṃ gacchati, upaṭṭhānampi na upagacchati. Evaṃ anupaṭṭhahante pana tasmiṃ na tena bhikkhunā uṭṭhāyāsanā cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā gantabbaṃ. Kiṃ kātabbaṃ? ‘‘Ācariyaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘naṭṭhaṃ dāni me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti vā na vuṭṭhātabbaṃ, iriyāpathaṃ vikopetvā gacchato hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ navanavameva hoti. Tasmā yathānisinneneva desato āharitabbaṃ.
这里有个取回业处的方法。那位比丘知道业处不现起之后,应当这样思惟:“这些入出息,在哪里有?在哪里没有?对谁有?对谁没有?”这样思惟之后,知道“这些入出息在母胎里没有,沉入水中的人没有,同样,无想者、死者、入第四禅的人、具足色界无色界有的人、入灭尽定的人也没有”,然后就该这样自己提醒自己:“贤者,你又不是在母胎里,不是沉入水中,不是无想者,不是死者,不是入第四禅的人,不是具足色界无色界有的人,不是入灭尽定的人,你的入出息确实存在,只是因为智慧薄弱才把握不住罢了。”然后,他应当就依平常接触的地方把心安住下来,让作意继续运转。长鼻子的人,入出息触碰鼻端而运转;短鼻子的人,则触碰上唇。所以,他应当确立“它们触碰这个地方”这个相。世尊正是基于这个道理才说:“诸比丘,我不说失念、不正知的人能修习入出息念。”虽然任何业处都只有具念、正知的人才能成就,但其他业处对作意的人来说是明显的。而这个入出息念业处,是沉重、重大的修习,只有佛、独觉佛、佛弟子这些大丈夫才能以它为作意的境地,既不浅薄,也不是浅薄众生所能亲近的。越作意,它就越寂静、越微细。因此,在这里需要强而有力的念和慧。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ āharaṇūpāyo. Tena hi bhikkhunā kammaṭṭhānassa anupaṭṭhahanabhāvaṃ ñatvā iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ – ‘‘ime assāsapassāsā nāma kattha atthi, kattha natthi, kassa vā atthi, kassa vā natthī’’ti. Athevaṃ paṭisañcikkhatā ‘‘ime antomātukucchiyaṃ natthi, udake nimuggānaṃ natthi, tathā asaññībhūtānaṃ matānaṃ catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ nirodhasamāpannāna’’nti ñatvā evaṃ attanāva attā paṭicodetabbo – ‘‘nanu tvaṃ, paṇḍita, neva mātukucchigato, na udake nimuggo, na asaññībhūto, na mato, na catutthajjhānasamaāpanno, na rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgī, na nirodhasamāpanno, atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā, mandapaññatāya pana pariggahetuṃ na sakkosī’’ti. Athānena pakatiphuṭṭhavaseneva cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Ime hi dīghanāsikassa nāsā puṭaṃ ghaṭṭentā pavattanti, rassanāsikassa uttaroṭṭhaṃ. Tasmānena imaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ ghaṭṭentīti nimittaṃ paṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Imameva hi atthavasaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa ānāpānassatibhāvanaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.149; saṃ. ni. 5.992). Kiñcāpi hi yaṃkiñci kammaṭṭhānaṃ satassa sampajānasseva sampajjati, ito aññaṃ pana manasikarontassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idaṃ pana ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ garukaṃ garukabhāvanaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ mahāpurisānameva manasikārabhūmibhūtaṃ, na ceva ittaraṃ, na ca ittarasattasamāsevitaṃ. Yathā yathā manasi karīyati, tathā tathā santañceva hoti sukhumañca. Tasmā ettha balavatī sati ca paññā ca icchitabbā.
就像缝制细软布料的时候,针要细,针孔要比针更细;同样,修习这个像细软布料一样的业处时,作为“针”的念,以及和它相应、像针孔一样的慧,也都要强而有力。而具足这样的念和慧的比丘,不应该在平常接触的部位之外去寻找那些入出息。巴利
Yathā hi maṭṭhasāṭakassa tunnakaraṇakāle sūcipi sukhumā icchitabbā, sūcipāsavedhanampi tato sukhumataraṃ; evameva maṭṭhasāṭakasadisassa imassa kammaṭṭhānassa bhāvanākāle sūcipaṭibhāgā satipi sūcipāsavedhanapaṭibhāgā taṃsampayuttā paññāpi balavatī icchitabbā. Tāhi ca pana satipaññāhi samannāgatena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā.
就像农夫耕完田以后,把耕牛解开,让它们朝牧场走去,自己坐在阴凉处休息。这时那些耕牛可能飞快地跑进森林。聪明的农夫想再把它们抓住套上轭,不会跟着它们的脚印在森林里到处乱转,而是拿起缰绳和刺棒,直接走到它们常下水的地方,坐下或躺下。等那些牛白天吃草走动之后,下到那个渡口,洗澡、喝水,上岸站着时,他看见了,就用缰绳把它们绑住,用刺棒赶着带回来,套上轭,继续干活。同样,那位比丘不应该在平常接触的部位之外去寻找入出息。他应该拿起念的缰绳和慧的刺棒,把心安放在平常接触的部位,让作意运转起来。当他这样作意时,不久那些入出息就会现起,就像牛在渡口一样。然后他用念的缰绳把它们绑住,就在那个地方把它们套上,用慧的刺棒驱策着,继续用功修行业处。当他这样用功时,不久相就会现起。不过这个相并不是每个人都一样。而且有些人说:它现起时,对某些人来说像是产生乐触的棉絮、木棉絮,或者像风吹过的气流。巴利
Yathā pana kassako kasiṃ kasitvā balibadde muñcitvā gocarābhimukhe katvā chāyāya nisinno vissameyya, athassa te balibaddā vegena aṭaviṃ paviseyyuṃ. Yo hoti cheko kassako so puna te gahetvā yojetukāmo na tesaṃ anupadaṃ gantvā aṭaviṃ āhiṇḍati. Atha kho rasmiñca patodañca gahetvā ujukameva tesaṃ nipātatitthaṃ gantvā nisīdati vā nipajjati vā. Atha te goṇe divasabhāgaṃ caritvā nipātatitthaṃ otaritvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā ṭhite disvā rasmiyā bandhitvā patodena vijjhanto ānetvā yojetvā puna kammaṃ karoti; evameva tena bhikkhunā na te assāsapassāsā aññatra pakatiphuṭṭhokāsā pariyesitabbā. Satirasmiṃ pana paññāpatodañca gahetvā pakatiphuṭṭhokāse cittaṃ ṭhapetvā manasikāro pavattetabbo. Evañhissa manasikaroto nacirasseva te upaṭṭhahanti, nipātatitthe viya goṇā. Tato tena satirasmiyā bandhitvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā paññāpatodena vijjhantena puna kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ; tassevamanuyuñjato nacirasseva nimittaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Taṃ panetaṃ na sabbesaṃ ekasadisaṃ hoti ; apica kho kassaci sukhasamphassaṃ uppādayamāno tūlapicu viya, kappāsapicu viya, vātadhārā viya ca upaṭṭhātīti ekacce āhu.
不过,这是义注里的判定:这个相在有些人那里,会像星星,像宝珠,像珍珠球那样现起;在有些人那里,会像粗糙触感的棉籽,像心材做的针那样现起;在有些人那里,会像长长的花环绳,像花鬘,像烟焰那样现起;在有些人那里,会像展开的蜘蛛网,像云层,像莲花,像车轮,像月轮,像日轮那样现起。而且,当许多比丘诵习了经以后坐在一起,有一位比丘问“这部经在你们那里现起时是什么样子”,一个人说“在我这里,它像大山里的大河一样现起”,另一个人说“在我这里,像一片树林”,又一个人说“在我这里,像一棵有清凉树荫、枝叶茂盛、果实累累的树”。对他们来说,同一部经因为想的不同,就以不同的方式现起。同样,同一个业处也因为想的不同,就以不同的方式现起。应当知道,这是想所生、以想为因、从想而生,所以因为想的不同,就以不同的方式现起。巴利
Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāvinicchayo – idañhi kassaci tārakarūpaṃ viya, maṇiguḷikā viya, muttāguḷikā viya ca kassaci kharasamphassaṃ hutvā kappāsaṭṭhi viya, sāradārusūci viya ca kassaci dīghapāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya, kusumadāmaṃ viya, dhūmasikhā viya ca kassaci vitthata makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya, valāhakapaṭalaṃ viya, padumapupphaṃ viya, rathacakkaṃ viya, candamaṇḍalaṃ viya, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ viya ca upaṭṭhāti. Tañca panetaṃ yathā sambahulesu bhikkhūsu suttantaṃ sajjhāyitvā nisinnesu ekena bhikkhunā ‘‘tumhākaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā idaṃ suttaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti vutte eko ‘‘mayhaṃ mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viya hutvā upaṭṭhātī’’ti āha. Aparo ‘‘mayhaṃ ekā vanarāji viya’’. Añño ‘‘mayhaṃ sītacchāyo sākhāsampanno phalabhārabharitarukkho viyā’’ti. Tesañhi taṃ ekameva suttaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ ekameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhāti. Saññajañhi etaṃ saññānidānaṃ saññāppabhavaṃ tasmā saññānānatāya nānato upaṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,以入息为所缘的心是一回事,以出息为所缘的心是另一回事,以相为所缘的心又是另一回事。如果一个人不具备这三种法,他的业处既达不到安止,也达不到近行。如果一个人具备这三种法,他的业处才能达到安止和近行。确实是这样说的:巴利
Ettha ca aññameva assāsārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ, aññaṃ passāsārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ nimittārammaṇaṃ yassa hi ime tayo dhammā natthi, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ neva appanaṃ na upacāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Yassa panime tayo dhammā atthi, tasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ appanañca upacārañca pāpuṇāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
相与入出息,不是单一心识的所缘;
对于不知道这三种法的人来说,修习是找不到的。
入出息是相,非一心之所缘;
对于了知这三法的人来说,修习是可以得到的。巴利
‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Ajānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanānupalabbhati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassa; Jānato ca tayo dhamme, bhāvanā upalabbhatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.231);
当相这样现起时,那位比丘应当前往导师那里报告:“尊者,我现起了这样的相。”导师不应当说“这是相”或“这不是相”,而应当说“是这样,贤友”,然后嘱咐他“要反复作意”。因为如果说“这是相”,他就会懈怠;如果说“这不是相”,他就会失望沮丧。所以,这两种话都不说,只应当督促他作意。这是长部诵师的主张。中部诵师则说:“贤友,这是相,是业处,要反复作意,善男子。”然后,他应当把心安放在相上。从此以后,他就以这种安止的方式修行。古人确实这样说过:巴利
Evaṃ upaṭṭhite pana nimitte tena bhikkhunā ācariyasantikaṃ gantvā ārocetabbaṃ – ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, evarūpaṃ nāma upaṭṭhātī’’ti. Ācariyena pana ‘‘etaṃ nimitta’’nti vā ‘‘na nimitta’’nti vā na vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ hoti, āvuso’’ti vatvā pana ‘‘punappunaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vattabbo. ‘‘Nimitta’’nti hi vutte vosānaṃ āpajjeyya; ‘‘na nimitta’’nti vutte nirāso visīdeyya. Tasmā tadubhayampi avatvā manasikāreyeva niyojetabboti. Evaṃ tāva dīghabhāṇakā. Majjhimabhāṇakā panāhu – ‘‘nimittamidaṃ, āvuso, kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasi karohi sappurisāti vattabbo’’ti. Athānena nimitteyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Evamassāyaṃ ito pabhuti ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
把心安住在相上,让各种行相清晰显现;
智者把心系在自己的入息和出息上。巴利
‘‘Nimitte ṭhapayaṃ cittaṃ, nānākāraṃ vibhāvayaṃ; Dhīro assāsapassāse, sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.232; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163);
从那个相开始现起之后,五盖就被镇伏了,烦恼也平息了,正念也现前了,心也定了。这里说的心定其实有两种情况:在近行地,是因为断除了五盖而心定;在安止地,是因为禅支显现而心定。其中,“近行地”就是近行定,“安止地”就是安止定。这两者有什么区别呢?近行定在善速行路运行之后,会落入有分;安止定则是,如果有人白天坐下来入定,他整个白天都在善速行路中运行,不会落入有分。在这两种定当中,因为相显现而让心得定的,是近行定。这时候,他不应该从颜色等方面去注意那个相,也不应该从特相方面去观察它。他应该像刹帝利大王后守护转轮王的胎一样,像农夫守护稻谷的穗一样,以不放逸的心来守护这个相;守护好了,它就会带来果报。巴利
Tassevaṃ nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti kilesā sannisinnāva sati upaṭṭhitāyeva, cittaṃ samāhitameva. Idañhi dvīhākārehi cittaṃ samāhitaṃ nāma hohi – upacārabhūmiyaṃ vā nīvaraṇappahānena, paṭilābhabhūmiyaṃ vā aṅgapātubhāvena. Tattha ‘‘upacārabhūmī’’ti upacārasamādhi; ‘‘paṭilābhabhūmī’’ti appanāsamādhi. Tesaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇaṃ? Upacārasamādhi kusalavīthiyaṃ javitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, appanāsamādhi divasabhāge appetvā nisinnassa divasabhāgampi kusalavīthiyaṃ javati, na bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Imesu dvīsu samādhīsu nimittapātubhāvena upacārasamādhinā samāhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti . Athānena taṃ nimittaṃ neva vaṇṇato manasikātabbaṃ, na lakkhaṇato paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Apica kho khattiyamahesiyā cakkavattigabbho viya kassakena sāliyavagabbho viya ca appamattena rakkhitabbaṃ; rakkhitaṃ hissa phaladaṃ hoti.
守护好所得的相,就不会有退失。
没有守护的时候,得到多少就失去多少。巴利
‘‘Nimittaṃ rakkhato laddha, parihāni na vijjati; Ārakkhamhi asantamhi, laddhaṃ laddhaṃ vinassatī’’ti.
在这里,守护的方法是:那位比丘要避开七种不适合的东西——住处、行境、谈话、人、食物、季节、威仪路,只受用这七种适合的,然后反复对那个相作意。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ rakkhaṇūpāyo – tena bhikkhunā āvāso, gocaro, bhassaṃ, puggalo, bhojanaṃ, utu, iriyāpathoti imāni satta asappāyāni vajjetvā tāneva satta sappāyāni sevantena punappunaṃ taṃ nimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ.
像这样,通过依靠适合的所缘,把相变得稳固,使它增长、壮大之后,就应当不间断地做这十种安止善巧的修行:让依处清净,让诸根平衡,对相善巧,在心应当被策励的时候策励心,在心应当被抑制的时候抑制心,在心应当被欢喜的时候欢喜心,在心应当被舍置的时候舍置心,远离未得定的人,亲近已得定的人,决心倾向于此。巴利
Evaṃ sappāyasevanena nimittaṃ thiraṃ katvā vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ gamayitvā vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, nimittakusalatā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sapaggahetabba tasmiṃ samaye cittapaggaṇhanā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaniggaṇhanā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye sampahaṃsetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittasampahaṃsanā, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaajjhupekkhanā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanā, samāhitapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imāni dasa appanākosallāni avijahantena yogo karaṇīyo.
他这样精勤而住的时候,心想“现在安止就要生起了”,于是截断有分,以相为所缘的意门转向生起。当这个转向灭去后,执取同一个所缘,生起四个或五个速行心:其中第一个是遍作,第二个是近行,第三个是随顺,第四个是种姓,第五个是安止心。或者说,第一个既是遍作也是近行,第二个是随顺,第三个是种姓,第四个是安止心。只有第四个或第五个速行心进入安止,不会是第六个或第七个,因为已经靠近落入有分之故。巴利
Tassevaṃ anuyuttassa viharato idāni appanā uppajjissatīti bhavaṅgaṃ vicchinditvā nimittārammaṇaṃ manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tasmiñca niruddhe tadevārammaṇaṃ gahetvā cattāri pañca vā javanāni, yesaṃ paṭhamaṃ parikammaṃ, dutiyaṃ upacāraṃ, tatiyaṃ anulomaṃ, catutthaṃ gotrabhu , pañcamaṃ appanācittaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ vā parikammañceva upacārañca, dutiyaṃ anulomaṃ, tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ appanācittanti vuccati. Catutthameva hi pañcamaṃ vā appeti, na chaṭṭhaṃ sattamaṃ vā āsannabhavaṅgapātattā.
不过,阿毗达摩论师瞿达多长老说:“由于习行缘,善法变得强有力,所以第六或第七速行心能进入安止。”这种说法在注释书中已被否定。在这里,前分心属于欲界,而安止心则属于色界。这样一来,他就舍弃了五支,具备了五支,成就了十种相,具足三种善,证得了初禅。他在同一个所缘上止息了寻等,进而达到第二、第三、第四禅。到此为止,以安住的方式,他的修行已经达到了终点。这是这里的简要说明。如果想了解详细内容,则应当从《清净道论》中获取。巴利
Ābhidhammikagodattatthero panāha – ‘‘āsevanapaccayena kusalā dhammā balavanto honti; tasmā chaṭṭhaṃ sattamaṃ vā appetī’’ti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu paṭikkhittaṃ. Tattha pubbabhāgacittāni kāmāvacarāni honti, appanācittaṃ pana rūpāvacaraṃ. Evamanena pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ, pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ, dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ, tividhakalyāṇaṃ, paṭhamajjhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti. So tasmiṃyevārammaṇe vitakkādayo vūpasametvā dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni pāpuṇāti. Ettāvatā ca ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanāya pariyosānappatto hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepakathā. Vitthāro pana icchantena visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
这样,已经证得第四禅的比丘,如果想通过简择和回转的方式增长业处、达到清净,就先以转向、入定、决意、出定、观察这五种方式,让这个禅那达到自在和熟练。然后,他把握色与非色——也就是“以非色为先导的色,或以色为先导的非色”——并开始修观。怎么修呢?他从禅那出定后,把握禅支,看到它们所依止的心所依处,以及依止于心所依处的诸界,还有这一切所依的整个业生身。接着他确定:“禅支是非色,所依处等是色”,这样来分别色与非色。巴利
Evaṃ pattacatutthajjhāno panettha bhikkhu sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaḍḍhetvā pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmo tadeva jhānaṃ āvajjanasamāpajjanaadhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇasaṅkhātehi pañcahākārehi vasippattaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā arūpapubbaṅgamaṃ vā rūpaṃ, rūpapubbaṅgamaṃ vā arūpanti rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti. Kathaṃ? So hi jhānā vuṭṭhahitvā jhānaṅgāni pariggahetvā tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthuṃ taṃ nissayāni ca bhūtāni tesañca nissayaṃ sakalampi karajakāyaṃ passati. Tato ‘‘jhānaṅgāni arūpaṃ, vatthādīni rūpa’’nti rūpārūpaṃ vavatthapeti.
或者,他从定中出来后,在头发等身体各部分,按地界等的方式,把握四大种以及依靠它们的色法。然后他观察到识:这个识要么以刚才把握的色法为所缘,要么以刚才把握的色法为依处和门,并且与相应的心所一起生起。接着他确定:“四大种等是色,与相应法俱起的识是无色。”巴利
Atha vā samāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā kesādīsu koṭṭhāsesu pathavīdhātuādivasena cattāri bhūtāni taṃnissitarūpāni ca pariggahetvā yathāpariggahitarūpārammaṇaṃ yathāpariggahitarūpavatthudvārārammaṇaṃ vā sasampayuttadhammaṃ viññāṇañca passati. Tato ‘‘bhūtādīni rūpaṃ sasampayuttadhammaṃ viññāṇaṃ arūpa’’nti vavatthapeti.
或者,他从定中出来后,观察呼吸的生起即是业所生的身体和心。就像铁匠鼓动风箱时,风要依靠皮囊、人以及相应的努力才能流动;同样,呼吸也要依靠身体和心才能生起。然后他判定:呼吸和身体是色,心以及和心相应的法是名。巴利
Atha vā samāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayo karajakāyo ca cittañcāti passati. Yathā hi kammāragaggariyā dhamamānāya bhastañca purisassa ca tajjaṃ vāyāmaṃ paṭicca vāto sañcarati; evameva kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsāti. Tato assāsapassāse ca kāyañca rūpaṃ, cittañca taṃsampayuttadhamme ca arūpanti vavatthapeti.
这样确定了名色之后,他再去寻找名色的因缘。在寻找的过程中,他看到了名色的因缘,于是对三世名色流转的疑惑就消除了。疑惑消除后,他以聚团观察的方式,将三相安立在诸行上,在生灭随观的前分阶段,舍弃了光明等十种观染,确定远离观染的修行之道为“道”,舍弃对生起的执取,到达坏灭随观。当一切诸行以怖畏的样貌呈现时,他通过不间断的坏灭随观,厌离、离染、解脱,依次证得四圣道,安住在阿罗汉果上,达到十九种观察智的终极,成为包括天界在内的一切世间最上的应供者。到此为止,从数息开始,直到观修结束,他的入出息念定修习就算完成了。巴利
Evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tassa paccayaṃ pariyesati, pariyesanto ca taṃ disvā tīsupi addhāsu nāmarūpassa pavattiṃ ārabbha kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Vitiṇṇakaṅkho kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti vavatthapetvā udayaṃ pahāya bhaṅgānupassanaṃ patvā nirantaraṃ bhaṅgānupassanena bhayato upaṭṭhitesu sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto yathākkamaṃ cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhāya ekūnavīsatibhedassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa pariyantappatto sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti. Ettāvatā cassa gaṇanaṃ ādiṃ katvā vipassanāpariyosānā ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā ca samattā hotīti.
但在其余三个四法组中,因为并没有各别不同的业处修习方法,所以它们的含义应当依照逐句注释的方式来了知。“感受喜”:就是使喜被感受、被了知,而修习“我将入息、我将出息”。其中,喜以两种方式被感受:依所缘,以及依不痴。巴利
Itaresu pana tīsu catukkesu yasmā visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi; tasmā anupadavaṇṇanānayeneva nesaṃ attho veditabbo. Pītippaṭisaṃvedīti pītiṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karonto pākaṭaṃ karonto assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti – ārammaṇato ca asammohato ca.
喜是如何通过所缘而被体验到的?他进入带有喜的两种禅那,在他入定的那一刹那,由于获得禅那,喜就通过所缘而被体验到,因为所缘被清楚地觉知了。巴利
Kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhena ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā.
怎样才是以不痴的方式(感受喜)?他进入具有喜的两种禅那,出定之后,以灭尽、坏灭的方式随观与禅那相应的喜。在他修观的刹那,通过通达特相,喜就以不痴的方式被清楚地了知。这在《无碍解道》中已经说过:巴利
Kathaṃ asammohato? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati, tassa vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ –
以长入息而了知心一境性、不散乱时,念已现前。以那念、那智,他感受那喜。以长出息……中略……以短入息……以短出息……以觉知全身而入息……以觉知全身而出息……以平静身行而入息……以平静身行而出息,了知心一境性、不散乱时,念已现前;以那念、那智,他感受那喜。当转向时,他感受那喜;当了知时……当观察时……当省察时……当决意于心时……当以信胜解时……当策励精进时……当现起念时……当令心等持时……当以慧了知时……当证知应证知时……当遍知应遍知时……当断除应断除时……当修习应修习时……当现证应现证时,他感受那喜。如此,那喜被感受。巴利
‘‘Dīghaṃ assāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasena…pe… rassaṃ assāsavasena… rassaṃ passāsavasena… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assāsavasena… sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī passāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ assāsavasena… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passāsavasena cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā hoti, tāya satiyā tena ñāṇena sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Āvajjato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti jānato… passato… paccavekkhato… cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahato… saddhāya adhimuccato… vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato… satiṃ upaṭṭhāpayato… cittaṃ samādahato… paññāya pajānato… abhiññeyyaṃ abhijānato… pariññeyyaṃ parijānato… pahātabbaṃ pajahato… bhāvetabbaṃ bhāvayato… sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikaroto sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Evaṃ sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.172).
按照同样的方法,其余各句也应该从含义上理解。不过这里有一些特别的差别:应当知道,依三种禅那而感受乐,依四种禅那而感受心行。所谓“心行”,指的是受和想这两个蕴。在这里,关于感受乐这一句,为了显示观禅的层面,《无碍解道》中说:“乐有两种——身乐和心乐。”令心行轻安的意思是:让粗重的、粗重的心行变得轻安,让它止息。这应该按照身行部分所讲的方式详细理解。另外,在这里的喜句中,是以喜为首来说受;在乐句中,是直接就受本身来说;在两个心行句中,根据“想和受这些心所法,系属于心,是心行”的说法,指的是与想相应的受。应当知道,这一组四法是以受随观的方式来说的。巴利
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānipi atthato veditabbāni. Idaṃ panettha visesamattaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena sukhapaṭisaṃveditā catunnampi vasena cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. ‘‘Cittasaṅkhāro’’ti vedanādayo dve khandhā. Sukhappaṭisaṃvedipade cettha vipassanābhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhāni – kāyikañca sukhaṃ cetasikañcā’’ti paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāranti oḷārikaṃ oḷārikaṃ cittasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento, nirodhentoti attho. So vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apicettha pītipade pītisīsena vedanā vuttā. Sukhapade sarūpeneva vedanā . Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesu ‘‘saññā ca vedanā ca cetasikā ete dhammā cittapaṭibaddhā cittasaṅkhārā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.174; ma. ni. 1.463) vacanato saññāsampayuttā vedanāti. Evaṃ vedanānupassanānayena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
在第三个四法组里,也应该知道:是依四种禅那来感受心的。所谓“令心喜悦”,就是让心喜悦、欢喜、欢悦、极其欢悦,同时修学“我将出息,我将入息”。在这里,喜悦有两种方式——依靠定和依靠观。巴利
Tatiyacatukkepi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā. Abhippamodayaṃ cittanti cittaṃ modento pamodento hāsento pahāsento assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhati. Tattha dvīhākārehi abhippamodo hoti – samādhivasena ca vipassanāvasena ca.
怎样依定力来修?他进入两种有喜的禅那,在入定的那一刻,以与定相应的喜让心喜悦、欢欣。怎样依观力来修?进入两种有喜的禅那后出定,以灭尽、衰坏的方式随观与禅那相应的喜;在观的那一刻,以与禅那相应的喜为所缘,让心喜悦、欢欣。这样修行的人,就称为在学“令心喜悦,我将出息,我将入息”。巴利
Kathaṃ samādhivasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjati, so samāpattikkhaṇe sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Kathaṃ vipassanāvasena? Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakapītiṃ khayato vayato sammasati; evaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe jhānasampayuttakapītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ āmodeti pamodeti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘abhippamodayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
让心专注,是指:依靠初禅等,把心平稳地安放在所缘上、稳稳地保持在所缘上;或者,进入那些禅那之后出定,对与禅那相应的心,从坏灭、消散的角度去观察,在观照的刹那,通过通达诸法之相,生起刹那的心一境性;依靠这样生起的刹那心一境性,同样把心平稳地安放在所缘上、稳稳地保持在所缘上,这就叫作学“让心专注,我将出息,我将入息”。巴利
Samādahaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānādivasena ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakacittaṃ khayato vayato sammasato vipassanākkhaṇe lakkhaṇapaṭivedhena uppajjati khaṇikacittekaggatā; evaṃ uppannāya khaṇikacittekaggatāya vasenapi ārammaṇe cittaṃ samaṃ ādahanto samaṃ ṭhapento ‘‘samādahaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti vuccati.
让心解脱:以初禅让心从诸盖中解脱、释放;以第二禅让心从寻与伺中解脱、释放;以第三禅让心从喜中解脱、释放;以第四禅让心从乐与苦中解脱、释放。或者,进入这些禅那后出定,以坏灭、衰灭的方式观察与禅那相应的心。他在观照的刹那,以无常随观让心从常想中解脱、释放;以苦随观让心从乐想中解脱、释放;以无我随观让心从我想中解脱、释放;以厌离随观让心从欢喜中解脱、释放;以离欲随观让心从贪欲中解脱、释放;以灭尽随观让心从集起中解脱、释放;以舍遣随观让心从执取中解脱、释放,同时出息、入息。因此说:学“让心解脱,我将出息、我将入息”。应当知道,这个四法组是依心随观而说的。巴利
Vimocayaṃ cittanti paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dutiyena vitakkavicārehi, tatiyena pītiyā, catutthena sukhadukkhehi cittaṃ mocento vimocento. Tāni vā pana jhānāni samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya jhānasampayuttakacittaṃ khayato vayato sammasati. So vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññāto, anattānupassanāya attasaññāto, nibbidānupassanāya nandito, virāgānupassanāya rāgato, nirodhānupassanāya samudayato, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati ca. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimocayaṃ cittaṃ assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti. Evaṃ cittānupassanāvasena idaṃ catukkaṃ bhāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
在第四个四法组里,说到“随观无常者”时,这里首先应当了解无常,应当了解无常性,应当了解无常随观,应当了解无常随观者。其中,“无常”指的是五蕴。为什么?因为它们有生起、变易和坏灭的性质。“无常性”指的是这些五蕴的生起、变易和坏灭,或者说已生起的事物不能保持同一状态,以刹那坏灭的方式毁坏。“无常随观”是指依那个无常性,在色等诸法上观察为“无常”。“无常随观者”是指具备那种随观的人。因此,这样的人在出息和入息时,在这里应当理解为“我学:‘作为无常随观者,我将出息,我将入息。’”巴利
Catutthacatukke pana aniccānupassīti ettha tāva aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ, aniccatā veditabbā, aniccānupassanā veditabbā , aniccānupassī veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘anicca’’nti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā. ‘‘Aniccatā’’ti tesaññeva uppādavayaññathattaṃ hutvā abhāvo vā nibbattānaṃ tenevākārena aṭhatvā khaṇabhaṅgena bhedoti attho. ‘‘Aniccānupassanā’’ti tassā aniccatāya vasena rūpādīsu ‘‘anicca’’nti anupassanā; ‘‘aniccānupassī’’ti tāya anupassanāya samannāgato; tasmā evaṃ bhūto assasanto ca passasanto ca idha ‘‘aniccānupassī assasissāmi, passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo.
对于“离贪随观”这句,这里有两种离贪:灭尽离贪和究竟离贪。其中,“灭尽离贪”是指诸行的刹那坏灭;“究竟离贪”是指涅槃。“离贪随观”是指以照见这两者为所缘而现起的观与道。应当知道,具足这两种随观之后,在出息和入息时,就是在修学“我作为离贪随观者,将出息,将入息”。在“灭尽随观”这一句上,也是同样的道理。巴利
Virāgānupassīti ettha pana dve virāgā – khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha ‘‘khayavirāgo’’ti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo; ‘‘accantavirāgo’’ti nibbānaṃ; ‘‘virāgānupassanā’’ti tadubhayadassanavasena pavattā vipassanā ca maggo ca. Tāya duvidhāyapi anupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto ca passasanto ca ‘‘virāgānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatī’’ti veditabbo. Nirodhānupassīpadepi eseva nayo.
“随观弃舍”这里也有两种弃舍:舍弃弃舍和趣入弃舍。弃舍本身就是随观,所以叫弃舍随观;这是观和道的别名。观以彼分断的方式,连同蕴行一起舍弃烦恼,又因为见到有为法的过患,而倾向于其对立面的涅槃,所以称为舍弃弃舍和趣入弃舍。道以正断的方式,连同蕴行一起舍弃烦恼,又以涅槃为所缘而跃入其中,所以称为舍弃弃舍和趣入弃舍。不过,这两者都是因为随顺观照前前诸智,所以叫随观。具足这两种弃舍随观而出息、入息的人,应当知道就是修习“作为弃舍随观者,我将出息,我将入息”。这样修习,就是以十六种方式修习。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Paṭinissaggānupassīti etthāpi dve paṭinissaggā – pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ca pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo ca. Paṭinissaggoyeva anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā; vipassanāmaggānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, saṅkhatadosadassanena ca tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Maggo samucchedavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajati, ārammaṇakaraṇena ca nibbāne pakkhandatīti pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissago cāti vuccati. Ubhayampi pana purimapurimañāṇānaṃ anuanu passanato anupassanāti vuccati. Tāya duvidhāya paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgato hutvā assasanto ca passasanto ca paṭinisaggānupassī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti veditabbo. Evaṃ bhāvitoti evaṃ soḷasahi ākārehi bhāvito. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
167 至于“那时,世尊”等语的开头处,简略含义是这样:世尊这样用入出息念定的讲说让比丘们安顿下来之后,接着,第三波罗夷制戒的因缘和事由——比丘们互相夺命——已经发生。针对这个因缘、这个事由,世尊召集比丘僧团,询问并呵责之后,因为其中自己夺自己生命以及通过鹿杖外道使人夺命的情况不构成波罗夷事,所以把那些搁置一旁,只取构成波罗夷的互相夺命一事,制定波罗夷戒,说“若比丘故意夺取人命……”等语。不过,因为这里有圣者混杂其中,所以不说“愚痴人”,而说“那些比丘”。巴利
167.Athakho bhagavātiādimhi pana ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Evaṃ bhagavā ānāpānassatisamādhikathāya bhikkhū samassāsetvā atha yaṃ taṃ tatiyapārājikapaññattiyā nidānañceva pakaraṇañca uppannaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ aññamaññaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ, etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātetvā paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca yasmā tattha attanā attānaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ migalaṇḍikena ca voropāpanaṃ pārājikavatthu na hoti; tasmā taṃ ṭhapetvā pārājikassa vatthubhūtaṃ aññamaññaṃ jīvitā voropanameva gahetvā pārājikaṃ paññapento ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca manussaviggaha’’ntiādimāha. Ariyapuggalamissakattā panettha ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti avatvā ‘‘te bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ.
这样以从根本上断除的方式加以确立之后,在第三条波罗夷已经制定之后,为了另外再制定戒条,又出现了赞叹死亡、称扬死亡的事例。为了说明这件事的起因,才说了“这件事对世尊来说如此……”等等。巴利
Evaṃ mūlacchejjavasena daḷhaṃ katvā tatiyapārājike paññatte aparampi anupaññattatthāya maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanavatthu udapādi, tassuppattidīpanatthaṃ ‘‘evañcidaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
168 168. 其中,“心被系缚”是指心被欲贪所系缚,也就是染着、有所期待的意思。“我们赞叹死亡、称扬死亡”是指:先指出生命中的过患,再赞叹死亡的功德,也就是显示它的利益。“已作善”等词的含义是这样的:你已经作了善,也就是清净的行为,所以你就是“已作善者”。同样,你已经作了善巧、无可指责的行为,所以是“已作善巧者”。“已作怖畏救护”是指:死亡来临时,众生心中生起称为怖畏的恐惧,你已经作了从那种恐惧中救护、保护的业,所以是“已作怖畏救护”。“未作恶”是指你没有作卑劣的业。“未作残酷”是指你没有作残忍、暴虐、恶戒的业。“未作罪垢”是指你没有作暴行以及贪等烦恼炽盛的业。为什么这样说呢?因为一切种类的善,你都已作了;而恶,你没有作。因此我们对你说:“你为什么要被这疾病制伏,过着这种卑劣、罪恶、充满众多痛苦的恶活呢?”你的死亡比你的生命更好,也就是说,你的死比你的生更美好。为什么呢?因为从此处命终之后,你就成为命终者,命终、死去——就是这个意思。身体坏散之后……你将往生到那里。这样往生之后,你在那里将具足、拥有天界所生的五种欲功德,即可爱的色等五种欲的成分,从而享乐、相应、融合,来回游行、漫步或喜悦——就是这个意思。巴利
168. Tattha paṭibaddhacittāti chandarāgena paṭibaddhacittā; sārattā apekkhavantoti attho. Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇemāti jīvite ādīnavaṃ dassetvā maraṇassa guṇaṃ vaṇṇema; ānisaṃsaṃ dassemāti. Katakalyāṇotiādīsu ayaṃ padattho – kalyāṇaṃ sucikammaṃ kataṃ tayāti tvaṃ kho asi katakalyāṇo. Tathā kusalaṃ anavajjakammaṃ kataṃ tayāti katakusalo. Maraṇakāle sampatte yā sattānaṃ uppajjati bhayasaṅkhātā bhīrutā, tato tāyanaṃ rakkhaṇakammaṃ kataṃ tayāti katabhīruttāṇo pāpaṃ. Lāmakakammaṃ akataṃ tayāti akatapāpo. Luddaṃ dāruṇaṃ dussīlyakammaṃ akataṃ tayāti akataluddo. Kibbisaṃ sāhasikakammaṃ lobhādikilesussadaṃ akataṃ tayāti akatakibbiso. Kasmā idaṃ vuccati? Yasmā sabbappakārampi kataṃ tayā kalyāṇaṃ, akataṃ tayā pāpaṃ; tena taṃ vadāma – ‘‘kiṃ tuyhaṃ iminā rogābhibhūtattā lāmakena pāpakena dukkhabahulattā dujjīvitena’’. Mataṃ te jīvitā seyyoti tava maraṇaṃ jīvitā sundarataraṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā ito tvaṃ kālaṅkato katakālo hutvā kālaṃ katvā maritvāti attho. Kāyassa bhedā…pe… upapajjissasi. Evaṃ upapanno ca tattha dibbehi devaloke uppannehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi manāpiyarūpādikehi pañcahi vatthukāmakoṭṭhāsehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricarissasi sampayutto samodhānagato hutvā ito cito ca carissasi, vicarissasi abhiramissasi vāti attho.
169 “不适宜的”是指那些无益、不能带来增长,并且会迅速让人寿命耗尽的事物。巴利
169.Asappāyānīti ahitāni avuḍḍhikarāni yāni khippameva jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpenti.
词句分别的注释巴利
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
172 “故意地”——这是对论母中“故意夺取人命”一句里“故意”这个词的摘出解释。其中,“sañcicca”里的“saṃ”是个前缀,和它合在一起,这个说法就表示努力;它的意思是“思虑之后、好好思虑之后”。不过,因为故意夺取生命的人,是知道、明觉的,而且他的夺取是在思虑之后、超越之后才构成违犯的。所以,不依字面,只为了显示其义,便对它作了这样的词句分别:“知道、明觉、思虑之后、超越之后而违犯”。其中,“知道”是指知道“这是有情”。“明觉”是指明觉“我夺取生命”;因此,其义就是既知此有情,又如此了知。“思虑之后”是指以杀心的思,思虑、策划之后。“超越之后”是指以努力的方式,压制并发出无怀疑之心以后。“违犯”是指这样生起者的违犯,这便是“故意”一词的究竟义——如此说。巴利
172.Sañciccāti ayaṃ ‘‘sañcicca manussaviggaha’’nti mātikāya vuttassa sañciccapadassa uddhāro. Tattha santi upasaggo, tena saddhiṃ ussukkavacanametaṃ sañciccāti ; tassa sañcetetvā suṭṭhu cetetvāti attho. Yasmā pana yo sañcicca voropeti, so jānanto sañjānanto hoti, tañcassa voropanaṃ cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo hoti. Tasmā byañjane ādaraṃ akatvā atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo’’ti evamassa padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha jānantoti ‘‘pāṇo’’ti jānanto. Sañjānantoti ‘‘jīvitā voropemī’’ti sañjānanto; teneva pāṇajānanākārena saddhiṃ jānantoti attho. Ceccāti vadhakacetanāvasena cetetvā pakappetvā. Abhivitaritvāti upakkamavasena maddanto nirāsaṅkacittaṃ pesetvā. Vītikkamoti evaṃ pavattassa yo vītikkamo ayaṃ sañciccasaddassa sikhāppatto atthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了从最初开始说明“夺取人的生命”这句话里所说的“人的存在状态”,就说了“所谓人的个体”等话。其中,为了从胎生者的角度说明一切极细微的存在状态,说了“在母胎中”。第一心,就是结生心。已生起,就是已产生。第一识显现,这是它的同义词。这里用“在母胎中第一心”这句话,也显示了整个五蕴的结生。因此,那第一心、与它相应的三个非色蕴,以及和它一起生起的羯罗蓝,这就是最初的人的个体。其中,“羯罗蓝”对男女来说,依身十法、心所依十法、性十法而有三十种色;对非男非女来说,依身十法、心所依十法而有二十种色。其中,男女的羯罗蓝,就像用一根生丝线从生酥中挑起的一滴油那样大小,清澈、明净。这在注释书中已经说过——巴利
Idāni ‘‘manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropeyyā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ manussattabhāvaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘manussaviggaho nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena sabbasukhumaattabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mātukucchismi’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ cittanti paṭisandhicittaṃ. Uppannanti jātaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtanti idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ citta’’nti vacanena cettha sakalāpi pañcavokārapaṭisandhi dassitā hoti. Tasmā tañca paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ taṃsampayuttā ca tayo arūpakkhandhā tena saha nibbattañca kalalarūpanti ayaṃ sabbapaṭhamo manussaviggaho. Tattha ‘‘kalalarūpa’’nti itthipurisānaṃ kāyavatthubhāvadasakavasena samatiṃsa rūpāni, napuṃsakānaṃ kāyavatthudasakavasena vīsati. Tattha itthipurisānaṃ kalalarūpaṃ jātiuṇṇāya ekena aṃsunā uddhaṭatelabindumattaṃ hoti acchaṃ vippasannaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
就像从芝麻油里滴出的一滴油,又像纯净没有杂质的新鲜酥油;
像这样,颜色和形态相似的,就叫做羯罗蓝。巴利
‘‘Tilatelassa yathā bindu, sappimaṇḍo anāvilo; Evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāgaṃ kalalanti pavuccatī’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 26 pakiṇṇakakathā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.235);
从这样微小的所依开始,对于通常寿命一百二十岁的有情,从出生直到临终时,在这期间逐渐成长的这个身体,就叫做人的自体。巴利
Evaṃ parittakaṃ vatthuṃ ādiṃ katvā pakatiyā vīsavassasatāyukassa sattassa yāva maraṇakālā etthantare anupubbena vuḍḍhippatto attabhāvo eso manussaviggaho nāma.
“夺取生命”的意思是:即使在羯罗蓝阶段,用灼烧、按压等方法,或者通过给药等方式,或者在那之后用与此相应的手段,使对方与生命分离。然而,因为所谓夺取生命,从含义上说就是切断命根,所以在对这个词的解释中说:“切断命根、阻断、破坏相续。”其中,切断、阻断命根的相续连接,就称为“切断命根、阻断”。这个含义由“破坏相续”这句话显示出来。“破坏”就是使分离。巴利
Jīvitāvoropeyyāti kalalakālepi tāpanamaddanehi vā bhesajjasampadānena vā tato vā uddhampi tadanurūpena upakkamena jīvitā viyojeyyāti attho. Yasmā pana jīvitā voropanaṃ nāma atthato jīvitindriyupacchedanameva hoti, tasmā etassa padabhājane ‘‘jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodheti santatiṃ vikopetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha jīvitindriyassa paveṇighaṭanaṃ upacchindanto uparodhento ca ‘‘jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodhetī’’ti vuccati. Svāyamattho ‘‘santatiṃ vikopetī’’tipadena dassito. Vikopetīti viyojeti.
在这里,命根有两种:色命根和非色命根。其中,对非色命根没法施加加行,所以无法把它夺去;但对色命根则可以施加加行,能够把它夺去。不过,在夺去色命根的时候,非色命根也一并被夺去。因为非色命根正是和色命根一起灭尽的,它的存在依赖于色命根。那么,在夺去的时候,夺去的是过去的、未来的,还是现在的呢?既不是过去的,也不是未来的。因为在这两者当中,一个已经灭去,一个尚未生起,两者都不存在;由于不存在,就没法施加加行;由于没法施加加行,所以连一个也夺不去。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
Tattha duvidhaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ – rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, arūpajīvitindriyañca. Tesu arūpajīvitindriye upakkamo natthi, taṃ voropetuṃ na sakkā. Rūpajīvitindriye pana atthi, taṃ voropetuṃ sakkā. Taṃ pana voropento arūpajīvitindriyampi voropeti. Teneva hi saddhiṃ taṃ nirujjhati tadāyattavuttito. Taṃ pana voropento kiṃ atītaṃ voropeti, anāgataṃ, paccuppannanti? Neva atītaṃ, na anāgataṃ, tesu hi ekaṃ niruddhaṃ ekaṃ anuppannanti ubhapampi asantaṃ, asantattā upakkamo natthi, upakkamassa natthitāya ekampi voropetuṃ na sakkā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
在过去的心识刹那,他曾活着,现在不活着,将来也不会活着。在未来的心识刹那,他将活着,不曾活着,现在也不活着。在现在的心识刹那,他正活着,不曾活着,将来也不会活着。巴利
‘‘Atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha, na jīvati; na jīvissati. Anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissati, na jīvittha; na jīvati. Paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe jīvati, na jīvittha; na jīvissatī’’ti (mahāni. 10).
因此,在活命的地方,加害就是合理的,所以它剥夺的是现在(的命根)。巴利
Tasmā yattha jīvati tattha upakkamo yuttoti paccuppannaṃ voropeti.
所谓“现在”也有三种:刹那现在、相续现在、一期现在。其中,“刹那现在”是指具足生、老、坏灭的,它没办法被夺去。为什么呢?因为它自己就会灭去。“相续现在”是指以同类相续的方式持续大约七八个速行心路的时间就灭去的;或者,从热的地方进来、走进内室坐下后,直到黑暗出现;或者从冷的地方进来、在内室坐下后,直到不同季节的相状显现、而前一个季节还没有消退,在这段时间里,就叫“相续现在”。而从结生开始,一直到死亡,这叫“一期现在”。后面这两种都可以被夺去。怎么夺去呢?当对它施加加害时,新得到加害的命根在灭去时,会成为力量微弱、速度减退的相续的缘。因此,相续现在或一期现在还没到预定的时间,就在中途灭去了。这样,后面这两种都可以被夺去,所以正是针对这一点才说“破坏相续”,应当这样理解。巴利
Paccuppannañca nāmetaṃ khaṇapaccuppannaṃ, santatipaccuppannaṃ, addhāpaccuppannanti tividhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘khaṇapaccuppannaṃ’’ nāma uppādajarābhaṅgasamaṅgi, taṃ voropetuṃ na sakkā. Kasmā? Sayameva nirujjhanato. ‘‘Santatipaccuppannaṃ’’ nāma sattaṭṭhajavanavāramattaṃ sabhāgasantativasena pavattitvā nirujjhanakaṃ, yāva vā uṇhato āgantvā ovarakaṃ pavisitvā nisinnassa andhakāraṃ hoti, sītato vā āgantvā ovarake nisinnassa yāva visabhāgautupātubhāvena purimako utu nappaṭippassambhati, etthantare ‘‘santatipaccuppanna’’nti vuccati . Paṭisandhito pana yāva cuti, etaṃ ‘‘addhāpaccuppannaṃ’’ nāma. Tadubhayampi voropetuṃ sakkā. Kathaṃ? Tasmiñhi upakkame kate laddhupakkamaṃ jīvitanavakaṃ nirujjhamānaṃ dubbalassa parihīnavegassa santānassa paccayo hoti. Tato santatipaccuppannaṃ vā addhāpaccuppannaṃ vā yathāparicchinnaṃ kālaṃ apatvā antarāva nirujjhati . Evaṃ tadubhayampi voropetuṃ sakkā, tasmā tadeva sandhāya ‘‘santatiṃ vikopetī’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
为了把这件事说清楚,应当了解什么是命、什么是杀生、什么是杀生者、什么是杀生的加行。其中,从世俗的说法来讲,“命”就是指有情众生;从究竟真实来讲,“命”就是指命根。因为当人伤害命根时,就说他“杀命”,这命根就是前面所说的那种。所谓“杀生”,是指以某种思心所发起断除命根的加行,那个杀害的思心所就称为“杀生”。所谓“杀生者”,应当理解为具有所说的那种思心所的人。所谓“杀生的加行”,是指杀生的六种加行:亲手、教令、投掷、固定、咒术所成、神通所成。巴利
Imassa panatthassa āvibhāvatthaṃ pāṇo veditabbo, pāṇātipāto veditabbo, pāṇātipāti veditabbo, pāṇātipātassa payogo veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāṇo’’ti vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Jīvitindriyañhi atipātento ‘‘pāṇaṃ atipātetī’’ti vuccati taṃ vuttappakārameva. ‘‘Pāṇātipāto’’ti yāya cetanāya jīvitindriyupacchedakaṃ payogaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sā vadhakacetanā ‘‘pāṇātipāto’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Pāṇātipātī’’ti vuttacetanāsamaṅgi puggalo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Pāṇātipātassa payogo’’ti pāṇātipātassa chapayogā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti.
在这里,“亲手”是指杀人者自己用身体或身体所带的东西去打。“教令”是指命令别人说“这样刺、这样打,把他杀掉”,也就是下命令。“投掷”是指想杀掉站在远处的人,用身体或身体所带的东西把箭、刀、网、石头等投掷出去。“固定”是指想用不能移动的工具杀人,而设置陷阱、靠壁、放置药物等。这四种将在后面的圣典注释中详细说明。巴利
Tattha ‘‘sāhatthiko’’ti sayaṃ mārentassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā paharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Āṇattiko’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpentassa ‘‘evaṃ vijjhitvā vā paharitvā vā mārehī’’ti āṇāpanaṃ. ‘‘Nissaggiyo’’ti dūre ṭhitaṃ māretukāmassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā ususattiyantapāsāṇādīnaṃ nissajjanaṃ. ‘‘Thāvaro’’ti asañcārimena upakaraṇena māretukāmassa opātaapassenaupanikkhipanaṃ bhesajjasaṃvidhānaṃ. Te cattāropi parato pāḷivaṇṇanāyameva vitthārato āvibhavissanti.
咒术所成和神通所成这两种,在巴利圣典正文里并没有出现。它们应当这样理解:简单来说,为了杀人而念咒施术,就是咒术所成的加行。不过在各部注释书里则这样说:“什么是咒术所成的加行?就是阿闼婆术士施行阿闼婆咒术——当城市被围困或战事发生时,他们对敌方、对敌军中的仇敌,制造灾厄,制造祸患,制造疾病,制造热病,让人得绞痛,让人得霍乱,让人得痢疾。阿闼婆术士就是这样施行阿闼婆咒术。持明者则转动咒术之后,当城市被围困时……(中略)……让人得痢疾。”注释书这样展示了咒术所成的加行之后,又举出许多被阿闼婆术士和持明者杀死的事例——那些又有什么用呢!这里的关键特征就是:为了杀人而念咒施术,便是咒术所成的加行。巴利
Vijjāmayaiddhimayā pana pāḷiyaṃ anāgatā. Te evaṃ veditabbā. Saṅkhepato hi māraṇatthaṃ vijjāparijappanaṃ vijjāmayo payogo. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana ‘‘katamo vijjāmayo payogo? Āthabbaṇikā āthabbaṇaṃ payojenti; nagare vā ruddhe saṅgāme vā paccupaṭṭhite paṭisenāya paccatthikesu paccāmittesu ītiṃ uppādenti, upaddavaṃ uppādenti, rogaṃ uppādenti, pajjarakaṃ uppādenti, sūcikaṃ karonti, visūcikaṃ karonti, pakkhandiyaṃ karonti. Evaṃ āthabbaṇikā āthabbaṇaṃ payojenti. Vijjādhārā vijjaṃ parivattetvā nagare vā ruddhe…pe… pakkhandiyaṃ karontī’’ti evaṃ vijjāmayaṃ payogaṃ dassetvā āthabbaṇikehi ca vijjādharehi ca māritānaṃ bahūni vatthūni vuttāni, kiṃ tehi! Idañhettha lakkhaṇaṃ māraṇāya vijjāparijappanaṃ vijjāmayo payogoti.
由业报所生的神通而起的运用,就是神通所成的加行。而所谓业报所生的神通,其实种类很多:龙有龙的神通,金翅鸟有金翅鸟的神通,夜叉有夜叉的神通,天人有天人的神通,国王有国王的神通。其中,龙的神通应当理解为:龙用看见、咬、触碰的方式去伤害别的众生。金翅鸟的神通应当理解为:能从大海里把两三百由旬那么大的龙抓出来。夜叉则不同,他们来的时候看不见,打的时候也看不见,可是被他们打中的众生当场就死在那里,这就是夜叉的神通。天人的神通应当理解为:多闻天王在还没证得入流果之前,用眼睛作武器看鸠槃荼,就能让他们死去,其他天人各自也有各自的神通威力。国王的神通应当理解为:转轮王和他的随从能在空中飞行等等;阿育王能在上下各一由旬的范围内下令行事等等;还有父王狮子国国王用牙一击,就让小须摩那居士死去。巴利
Kammavipākajāya iddhiyā payojanaṃ iddhimayo payogo. Kammavipākajiddhi ca nāmesā nāgānaṃ nāgiddhi, supaṇṇānaṃ supaṇṇiddhi, yakkhānaṃ yakkhiddhi, devānaṃ deviddhi, rājūnaṃ rājiddhīti bahuvidhā. Tattha diṭṭhadaṭṭhaphuṭṭhavisānaṃ nāgānaṃ disvā ḍaṃsitvā phusitvā ca parūpaghātakaraṇe ‘‘nāgiddhi’’ veditabbā. Supaṇṇānaṃ mahāsamuddato dvattibyāmasatappamāṇanāguddharaṇe ‘‘supaṇṇiddhi’’ veditabbā. Yakkhā pana neva āgacchantā na paharantā dissanti, tehi pahaṭasattā pana tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne maranti, tatra tesaṃ ‘‘yakkhiddhi’’ daṭṭhabbā. Vessavaṇassa sotāpannakālato pubbe nayanāvudhena olokitakumbhaṇḍānaṃ maraṇe aññesañca devānaṃ yathāsakaṃ iddhānubhāve ‘‘deviddhi’’ veditabbā. Rañño cakkavattissa saparisassa ākāsagamanādīsu, asokassa heṭṭhā upari ca yojane āṇāpavattanādīsu, piturañño ca sīhaḷanarindassa dāṭhākoṭanena cūḷasumanakuṭumbiyassamaraṇe ‘‘rājiddhi’’ daṭṭhabbāti.
有些人则引用这样的经文:“再者,比丘们,如果有具足神通、心得自在的沙门或婆罗门,以邪恶的心对别人腹中的胎儿这样作意:‘但愿这腹中的胎儿不能平安出生。’比丘们,这样也是对家族的伤害。”他们举出这类经文之后,就说修习所成的神通也能做伤害他人的事;而且他们认为,在伤害他人的同时,神通也会毁坏,就像被燃烧的房屋围住的水罐会破裂一样。但这只是他们自己的想法罢了。为什么呢?因为这种说法和善三法、受三法、寻三法、小三法的分类对不上。怎么对不上呢?修习所成的神通,在善三法里既是善也是无记,而杀生是不善。在受三法里,神通和不苦不乐受相应,杀生则和苦受相应。在寻三法里,神通是无寻无伺,杀生则有寻有伺。在小三法里,神通是广大法,杀生是小法。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto aññissā kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ pāpakena manasāanupekkhitā hoti ‘aho vatāyaṃ kucchigato gabbho na sotthinā abhinikkhameyyā’ti. Evampi bhikkhave kulumbassa upaghāto hotī’’ti ādikāni suttāni dassetvā bhāvanāmayiddhiyāpi parūpaghātakammaṃ vadanti; saha parūpaghātakaraṇena ca ādittagharūparikhittassa udakaghaṭassa bhedanamiva iddhivināsañca icchanti; taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattameva. Kasmā? Yasmā kusalavedanāvitakkaparittattikehi na sameti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi bhāvanāmayiddhi nāma kusalattike kusalā ceva abyākatā ca, pāṇātipāto akusalo. Vedanāttike adukkhamasukhasampayuttā pāṇātipāto dukkhasampayutto. Vitakkattike avitakkāvicārā, pāṇātipāto savitakkasavicāro. Parittattike mahaggatā, pāṇātipāto parittoti.
“或为他寻找夺命工具”:这里,“夺”就是夺取。夺取什么?生命。或者,可被夺取的东西就叫“夺取者”,意思是应当被放置(到他面前)。“工具”和“夺取者”合在一起,就是“夺命工具”。“他的”指人的身体。“寻找”意思是,能怎么弄到就怎么做,也就是应当把它放置(到他身边)。这就说明必须实际使用固定的手段。否则,仅仅找到了就犯波罗夷,那是不合理的。不过在巴利原文里,并没有采用全部文句,只是为了指出这里所说的、属于固定使用手段的武器,才作了“剑……中间省略……绳子”这样的逐词解释。巴利
Satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyāti ettha haratīti hārakaṃ. Kiṃ harati? Jīvitaṃ. Atha vā haritabbanti hārakaṃ; upanikkhipitabbanti attho. Satthañca taṃ hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ. Assāti manussaviggahassa. Pariyeseyyāti yathā labhati tathā kareyya; upanikkhipeyyāti attho. Etena thāvarappayogaṃ dasseti. Itarathā hi pariyiṭṭhamatteneva pārājiko bhaveyya; na cetaṃ yuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana sabbaṃ byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā yaṃ ettha thāvarappayogasaṅgahitaṃ satthaṃ, tadeva dassetuṃ ‘‘asiṃ vā…pe… rajjuṃ vā’’ti padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ.
在这里,“武器”应当理解为除了前面已经说过的之外,任何带刃的东西。棍棒、石块、毒药、绳索这些,因为都能毁坏生命,所以也应归入“武器”的范围。
“或者赞叹死亡”:在这里,有人用“你这种罪恶、低劣的生活有什么用?你连好的食物都吃不上”这类方式,来显示活着的过患;又用“你是近事男,已经做了善事……你没有做过恶事,死了比活着更好,你从这里命终之后,会被天女围绕,在欢喜园里享受快乐”这类方式,来称赞死亡。这两种做法都是在赞叹死亡。因此,解释时分成了两种:显示活着的过患,和称赞死亡。巴利
Tattha satthanti vuttāvasesaṃ yaṃkiñci samukhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Laguḷapāsāṇavisarajjūnañca jīvitavināsanabhāvato satthasaṅgaho veditabbo. Maraṇavaṇṇaṃvāti ettha yasmā ‘‘kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitena, yo tvaṃ na labhasi paṇītāni bhojanāni bhuñjitu’’ntiādinā nayena jīvite ādīnavaṃ dassentopi ‘‘tvaṃ khosi upāsaka katakalyāṇo…pe… akataṃ tayā pāpaṃ, mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo, ito tvaṃ kālaṅkato paricarissasi accharāparivuto nandanavane sukhappatto viharissasī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇe vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇantopi maraṇavaṇṇameva saṃvaṇṇeti. Tasmā dvidhā bhinditvā padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘jīvite ādīnavaṃ dasseti, maraṇe vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti.
“或劝人死”是指让人采取导致死亡的方法。在“拿刀来”这类说法里,虽然没有提到“掉进坑里、地狱或悬崖”等等,但因为后面已经说明了这个道理,就该知道这些在意义上也已经说到了。毕竟不可能把一切都按它具体的样子一一说出来。巴利
Maraṇāya vā samādapeyyāti maraṇatthāya upāyaṃ gāhāpeyya. Satthaṃ vā āharāti ādīsu ca yampi na vuttaṃ ‘‘sobbhe vā narake vā papāte vā papatā’’tiādi, taṃ sabbaṃ parato vuttanayattā atthato vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi sakkā sabbaṃ sarūpeneva vattuṃ.
“如是心、如是意”:这里说的是“如是之心、如是之意”;在“死对你比活着更好”这句话里,指的是死亡之心、死亡之意。不过,这里说“意”是为了说明“心”这个词的含义,而从意义上说,这两者其实是同一个东西,所以为了显示它们在意义上没有差别,就说“心即是意,意即是心”。即使把“如是”这个词抽出来,意思也还没有真正说清楚。在“心之思惟”这个说法里,应当根据上下文把“如是”补进去。要知道,虽然这里没有直接说成“如是心之思惟”,但根据上下文,其实已经表达了这层意思。同样地,为了显示这个意思,经文接着说了“有死亡想”等等。还有,这里的“思惟”并不是指“寻”这个心所,而只是“安排、筹划”的另一种说法。而这种安排,在这个语境里,可以归入想、思、意图之中。所以,应当理解为:心以种种方式去思惟,因此叫“心之思惟”。同样地,它的词语解释也是按照想、思、意图来说的。这里所说的“意图”,应当理解为“寻”。巴利
Iticittamanoti iticitto itimano; ‘‘mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’ti ettha vuttamaraṇacitto maraṇamanoti attho. Yasmā panettha mano cittasaddassa atthadīpanatthaṃ vutto, atthato panetaṃ ubhayampi ekameva, tasmā tassa atthato abhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ cittaṃ taṃ mano, yaṃ mano taṃ citta’’nti vuttaṃ. Itisaddaṃ pana uddharitvāpi na tāva attho vutto. Cittasaṅkappoti imasmiṃ pade adhikāravasena itisaddo āharitabbo. Idañhi ‘‘iticittasaṅkappo’’ti evaṃ avuttampi adhikārato vuttameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hissa tamevaatthaṃ dassento ‘‘maraṇasaññī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā cettha ‘‘saṅkappo’’ti nayidaṃ vitakkassa nāmaṃ. Atha kho saṃvidahanamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tañca saṃvidahanaṃ imasmiṃ atthe saññācetanādhippāyehi saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Tasmā citto nānappakārako saṅkappo assāti cittasaṅkappoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hissa padabhājanampi saññācetanādhippāyavasena vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘adhippāyo’’ti vitakko veditabbo.
以种种差别的方式,是指以大大小小的各种方法。其中,在赞叹死亡方面,应当知道:通过显示活着的过患,这是小的方式;通过称赞死亡,这是大的方式。而在劝人赴死方面,应当知道:通过握拳、用膝盖顶撞等来劝人赴死,这是大的方式;比如在共同进食的人指甲里投毒等来劝人赴死,这是小的方式。巴利
Uccāvacehi ākārehīti mahantāmahantehi upāyehi. Tattha maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇane tāva jīvite ādīnavadassanavasena avacākāratā maraṇe vaṇṇabhaṇanavasena uccākāratā veditabbā. Samādapane pana muṭṭhijāṇunipphoṭanādīhi maraṇasamādapanavasena uccākāratā, ekato bhuñjantassa nakhe visaṃ pakkhipitvā maraṇādisamādapanavasena avacākāratā veditabbā.
在坑穴、地狱或悬崖中:这里,坑穴指的是四周陡峭、深邃的坑洞。地狱指的是地面到处裂开而自然形成的大裂缝,大象也会掉进去,盗贼也藏在里面。悬崖指的是在山与山之间或陆地与陆地之间,一侧陡峭断绝的地方。依前者:指的是对行淫法、取不与物而犯波罗夷的人而言。其余内容因为前面已经说过,而且含义浅显,所以很清楚。巴利
Sobbhe vā narake vā papāte vāti ettha sobbho nāma samantato chinnataṭo gambhīro āvāṭo. Narako nāma tattha tattha phalantiyā bhūmiyā sayameva nibbattā mahādarī, yattha hatthīpi patanti, corāpi nilīnā tiṭṭhanti. Papātoti pabbatantare vā thalantare vā ekato chinno hoti. Purime upādāyāti methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā adinnañca ādiyitvā pārājikaṃ āpattiṃ āpanne puggale upādāya. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānatthattā ca pākaṭamevāti.
174 174. 这样把已经诵出的学处按顺序逐条解释之后,现在,因为在下面对词语的解释中,只是简略地显示了人的波罗夷,并没有详细地举出罪相来确立论母。而在简略显示的意义当中,比丘们并不能以一切方式掌握其方法,未来恶人也就有了可乘之机。因此,为了让比丘们能以一切方式掌握方法,也为了遮止未来恶人的可乘之机,再次以“自己决意”等方式确立论母,详细显示人的波罗夷,而说“自己杀”等。巴利
174. Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni yasmā heṭṭhā padabhājanīyamhi saṅkhepeneva manussaviggahapārājikaṃ dassitaṃ, na vitthārena āpattiṃ āropetvā tanti ṭhapitā. Saṅkhepadassite ca atthe na sabbākāreneva bhikkhū nayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkonti, anāgate ca pāpapuggalānampi okāso hoti, tasmā bhikkhūnañca sabbākārena nayaggahaṇatthaṃ anāgate ca pāpapuggalānaṃ okāsapaṭibāhanatthaṃ puna ‘‘sāmaṃ adhiṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā nayena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārato manussaviggahapārājikaṃ dassento ‘‘sāmanti sayaṃ hanatī’’tiādimāha.
这里,连同难词注释一起作出的判定如下:“以身”是指用手、脚、拳头、膝盖等任何大小肢体。“以身所系物”是指没有从身体上解下来的刀剑等武器。“以投掷物”是指从身体和身所系物上解下来后投掷出去的箭、矛等。到这里,已经说明了亲手杀和投掷杀这两种加行。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanāya saddhiṃ vinicchayakathā – kāyenāti hatthena vā pādena vā muṭṭhinā vā jāṇunā vā yena kenaci aṅgapaccaṅgena. Kāyapaṭibaddhenāti kāyato amocitena asiādinā paharaṇena. Nissaggiyenāti kāyato ca kāyapaṭibaddhato ca mocitena ususattiādinā. Ettāvatā sāhatthiko ca nissaggiyo cāti dve payogā vuttā honti.
在这里,每一种又按是否指定目标分成两类。其中,指定目标的情况是:他针对某个指定对象下手,就因那个对象死亡这件事而结罪。没有指定目标的情况是:心里想“不管是谁,死了就行”,这样因为下手这个因缘,无论谁死了,都因这件事而结罪。不管哪种情况,如果打下去当时就死了,或者后来因为同一伤病而死,都是在打下手的当下就结罪。如果带着杀意打了一下,对方没死,后来又起了别的心念再打一下,假如对方是因为第一击而死的,那就只跟第一击的业绑在一起;如果是因为第二击而死的,就不构成杀生。如果两击合起来才致死,也还是只跟第一击的业绑在一起。如果两击都没打死,那就没有杀生。这个道理也适用于很多人一起打一个人的情形,同样是跟导致死亡的那一击结罪。巴利
Tattha ekameko uddissānuddissabhedato duvidho. Tattha uddesike yaṃ uddissa paharati, tasseva maraṇena kammunā bajjhati. ‘‘Yo koci maratū’’ti evaṃ anuddesike pahārappaccayā yassa kassaci maraṇena kammunā bajjhati. Ubhayathāpi ca paharitamatte vā maratu pacchā vā teneva rogena, paharitamatteyeva kammunā bajjhati. Maraṇādhippāyena ca pahāraṃ datvā tena amatassa puna aññacittena pahāre dinne pacchāpi yadi paṭhamappahāreneva marati, tadā eva kammunā baddho. Atha dutiyappahārena marati, natthi pāṇātipāto. Ubhayehi matepi paṭhamappahāreneva kammunā baddho. Ubhayehi amate nevatthi pāṇātipāto. Esa nayo bahūhipi ekassa pahāre dinne. Tatrāpi hi yassa pahārena marati, tasseva kammunā baddho hotīti.
在这里,还应当了解业与犯戒之间的差别,以及羊的四种情况。有人盯着一只躺在某处的羊,心想“我夜里来杀它”。而羊躺的地方,却躺着他的母亲、父亲或一位阿罗汉,身上披着黄褐色的袈裟。他夜里来,心想“我要杀羊”,结果杀了母亲、父亲或阿罗汉。因为当时有“我要杀这个东西”的作意,所以他既是杀者,也触犯了无间业,并犯波罗夷。如果躺在那里的是别的外来人,他心想“我要杀羊”而杀了那人,他既是杀者,也犯波罗夷,但不触犯无间业。如果躺在那里的是夜叉或饿鬼,他心想“我要杀羊”而杀了它,他只是杀者,不触无间业,也不犯波罗夷,但犯偷兰遮。如果那里没有别人躺着,就是一只羊,他杀了它,他既是杀者,也犯波逸提。如果他心想“我要杀母亲、父亲或阿罗汉中的某一位”,结果确实杀了其中一位,他既是杀者,也触无间业,并犯波罗夷。如果他心想“我要杀他们中的某一位”,结果杀了别的外来人,或杀了夜叉、饿鬼,或杀了羊,就按前面所说的道理来理解。不过在这里,作意是极其凶暴的。巴利
Kammāpattibyattibhāvatthañcettha eḷakacatukkampi veditabbaṃ. Yo hi eḷakaṃ ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nipannaṃ upadhāreti ‘‘rattiṃ āgantvā vadhissāmī’’ti. Eḷakassa ca nipannokāse tassa mātā vā pitā vā arahā vā paṇḍukāsāvaṃ pārupitvā nipanno hoti. So rattibhāge āgantvā ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā arahantaṃ vā māreti. ‘‘Imaṃ vatthuṃ māremī’’ti cetanāya atthibhāvato ghātako ca hoti, anantariyakammañca phusati, pārājikañca āpajjati . Añño koci āgantuko nipanno hoti , ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti taṃ māreti, ghātako ca hoti pārājikañca āpajjati, ānantariyaṃ na phusati. Yakkho vā peto vā nipanno hoti, ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti taṃ māreti ghātakova hoti, na cānantariyaṃ phusati, na ca pārājikaṃ āpajjati, thullaccayaṃ pana hoti. Añño koci nipanno natthi, eḷakova hoti taṃ māreti, ghātako ca hoti, pācittiyañca āpajjati. ‘‘Mātāpituarahantānaṃ aññataraṃ māremī’’ti tesaṃyeva aññataraṃ māreti, ghātako ca hoti, ānantariyañca phusati, pārājikañca āpajjati. ‘‘Tesaṃ aññataraṃ māressāmī’’ti aññaṃ āgantukaṃ māreti, yakkhaṃ vā petaṃ vā māreti, eḷakaṃ vā māreti, pubbe vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Idha pana cetanā dāruṇā hotīti.
在这里,还应当知道其他像稻草堆这类情形。比如有人想“我要擦拭血刀或矛”,结果进入稻草堆时,杀死了躺在里面的母亲、父亲、阿罗汉、外来的人、夜叉、饿鬼或畜生。从世俗说法来讲,他被称为“杀者”,但因为并没有杀心,所以既不构成业,也不犯戒。可是,如果有人在进入时察觉到了身体的触感,心想“里面想必有众生,让它死吧”,然后进入杀死,那么就要根据那些对象的不同,判定他结业和犯戒。这个道理,也适用于为了藏匿而进入的人,以及向丛林、灌木丛等处投掷的人。巴利
Aññānipi ettha palālapuñjādivatthūni veditabbāni. Yo hi ‘‘lohitakaṃ asiṃ vā sattiṃ vā pucchissāmī’’ti palālapuñje pavesento tattha nipannaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā arahantaṃ vā āgantukapurisaṃ vā yakkhaṃ vā petaṃ vā tiracchānagataṃ vā māreti, vohāravasena ‘‘ghātako’’ti vuccati, vadhakacetanāya pana abhāvato neva kammaṃ phusati, na āpattiṃ āpajjati. Yo pana evaṃ pavesento sarīrasamphassaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘satto maññe abbhantaragato maratū’’ti pavesetvā māreti, tassa tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ anurūpena kammabaddho ca āpatti ca veditabbā. Esa nayo tattha nidahanatthaṃ pavesentassāpi vanappagumbādīsu khipantassāpi.
如果有人想着“我要杀贼”,结果杀死了扮成贼的样子走来的父亲,他就触犯了无间业,也犯下波罗夷罪。但如果有人看见敌军中另一个战士正在和父亲交战,就向那个战士射箭,心想“射中这个人,就会射中我父亲”,而箭正好按他的意图射中了父亲,那他就是杀父者。如果他想的是“那个战士被射中后,我父亲就会逃走”而射箭,箭却没有按他的意图飞,结果杀死了父亲,那么按世俗的说法,他被称为“杀父者”,但并没有无间业。巴利
Yopi ‘‘coraṃ māremī’’ti coravesena gacchantaṃ pitaraṃ māreti, ānantariyañca phusati, pārājiko ca hoti. Yo pana parasenāya aññañca yodhaṃ pitarañca kammaṃ karonte disvā yodhassa usuṃ khipati, ‘‘etaṃ vijjhitvā mama pitaraṃ vijjhissatī’’ti yathādhippāyaṃ gate pitughātako hoti. ‘‘Yodhe viddhe mama pitā palāyissatī’’ti khipati, usu ayathādhippāyaṃ gantvā pitaraṃ māreti, vohāravasena ‘‘pitughātako’’ti vuccati; ānantariyaṃ pana natthīti.
“站在近处”是指站在附近。“命令”是指指定对象或没有指定对象而发出命令。其中,当敌军已经列阵在前,若没有指定对象就命令“这样射、这样打、这样杀”,那么受命者杀多少,双方就有多少杀生。如果这时发令者的父母在场,他也会触犯无间业。如果只有受命者的父母在场,那就只有受命者一人触犯无间业。如果被杀者是阿罗汉,那双方都触犯无间业。但如果是先指定对象再命令“射那个高的、矮的、穿红衣的、穿蓝衣的、坐在象背上的、坐在中间的,打他、杀他”,如果受命者杀的就是那个人,那双方都有杀生;如果所杀的是无间业的对象,那就犯无间业。如果杀的是别人,发令者就没有杀生。到这里,关于命令的加行就讲完了。巴利
Adhiṭṭhahitvāti samīpe ṭhatvā. Āṇāpetīti uddissa vā anuddissa vā āṇāpeti. Tattha parasenāya paccupaṭṭhitāya anuddisseva ‘‘evaṃ vijjha , evaṃ pahara, evaṃ ghātehī’’ti āṇatte yattake āṇatto ghāteti, tattakā ubhinnaṃ pāṇātipātā. Sace tattha āṇāpakassa mātāpitaro honti, ānantariyampi phusati. Sace āṇattasseva mātāpitaro, sova ānantariyaṃ phusati. Sace arahā hoti, ubhopi ānantariyaṃ phusanti. Uddisitvā pana ‘‘etaṃ dīghaṃ rassaṃ rattakañcukaṃ nīlakañcukaṃ hatthikkhandhe nisinnaṃ majjhe nisinnaṃ vijjha pahara ghātehī’’ti āṇatte sace so tameva ghāteti, ubhinnampi pāṇātipāto; ānantariyavatthumhi ca ānantariyaṃ. Sace aññaṃ māreti, āṇāpakassa natthi pāṇātipāto. Etena āṇattiko payogo vutto hoti. Tattha –
对象、时间、地点,武器和举止姿态;
智者应当先衡量这五种情况,再把握其中的义理。巴利
Vatthuṃ kālañca okāsaṃ, āvudhaṃ iriyāpathaṃ; Tulayitvā pañca ṭhānāni, dhāreyyatthaṃ vicakkhaṇo.
事、时、处,武器、威仪,
行为差别,就是这六种命令的决定因素。巴利
Vatthu kālo ca okāso, āvudhaṃ iriyāpatho; Kiriyāvisesoti ime, cha āṇattiniyāmakā.
在这里,“对象”是指要被杀的那个众生。“时间”是指上午、傍晚等时段,以及青年、老年等年龄阶段。“地点”是指村庄、树林、家门口、屋子里面、车道、十字路口等等。“武器”是指剑、箭、矛之类。“威仪路”是指被杀者的行走、坐下等动作姿态。“行为差别”是指刺、砍、劈、剥头皮等等。巴利
Tattha ‘‘vatthū’’ti māretabbo satto. ‘‘Kālo’’ti pubbaṇhasāyanhādikālo ca yobbanathāvariyādikālo ca. ‘‘Okāso’’ti gāmo vā vanaṃ vā gehadvāraṃ vā gehamajjhaṃ vā rathikā vā siṅghāṭakaṃ vāti evamādi. ‘‘Āvudha’’nti asi vā usu vā satti vāti evamādi. ‘‘Iriyāpatho’’ti māretabbassa gamanaṃ vā nisajjā vāti evamādi. ‘‘Kiriyāviseso’’ti vijjhanaṃ vā chedanaṃ vā bhedanaṃ vā saṅkhamuṇḍakaṃ vāti evamādi.
如果违背了对象,命令说“杀掉那个人”,却杀了另一个人;或者命令说“在前面打杀”,却在后面、侧面或其他地方打杀,那么下命令的人不构成业缚,只有受命杀人的人构成业缚。如果没有违背对象,按照命令去杀,那么下命令的人在发出命令的那一刻、受命的人在杀人的那一刻,两者都构成业缚。在这里,由于对象不同,业和罪过也就不同。以上就是关于对象方面,应当先了解什么是符合约定、什么是违背约定。巴利
Yadi hi vatthuṃ visaṃvādetvā ‘‘yaṃ mārehī’’ti āṇatto tato aññaṃ māreti, ‘‘purato paharitvā mārehī’’ti vā āṇatto pacchato vā passato vā aññasmiṃ vā padese paharitvā māreti. Āṇāpakassa natthi kammabandho; āṇattasseva kammabandho. Atha vatthuṃ avisaṃvādetvā yathāṇattiyā māreti, āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇe āṇattassa ca māraṇakkhaṇeti ubhayesampi kammabandho. Vatthuvisesena panettha kammaviseso ca āpattiviseso ca hotīti. Evaṃ tāva vatthumhi saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
如果只是命令“午前去杀”,没有限定“今天还是明天”,那么受命的人不管哪一天午前去杀,都不算违背约定。但如果命令的是“今天午前去杀”,他却在中午、傍晚,或者第二天午前才去杀,那就违背了约定,下命令的人也不承担业缚。如果受命的人本来想在午前杀,努力到中午才得手,道理也一样。按照这个道理,就应该明白:在各种时间差别中,什么时候算守约、什么时候算违约。巴利
Kāle pana yo ‘‘ajja sve’’ti aniyametvā ‘‘pubbaṇhe mārehī’’ti āṇatto yadā kadāci pubbaṇhe māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘ajja pubbaṇhe’’ti vutto majjhanhe vā sāyanhe vā sve vā pubbaṇhe māreti. Visaṅketo hoti, āṇāpakassa natthi kammabandho. Pubbaṇhe māretuṃ vāyamantassa majjhanhe jātepi eseva nayo. Etena nayena sabbakālappabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
关于地点:如果命令时没有限定,只说“把站在村里的那个人杀掉”,那么受命的人不管在哪里杀了他,都不算违背约定。但如果命令时限定了“只能在村里杀”,他却在树林里杀了;同样,命令说“在树林里杀”,他却在村里杀了;命令说“在内屋门口杀”,他却在屋子中间杀了——这就违背了约定。按照这个道理,应当知道:在一切地点差别中,什么情况算守约、什么情况算违约。巴利
Okāsepi yo ‘‘etaṃ gāme ṭhitaṃ mārehī’’ti aniyametvā āṇatto taṃ yattha katthaci māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘gāmeyevā’’ti niyametvā āṇatto vane māreti, tathā ‘‘vane’’ti āṇatto gāme māreti. ‘‘Antogehadvāre’’ti āṇatto gehamajjhe māreti, visaṅketo. Etena nayena sabbokāsabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
关于武器,如果一个人被命令“用武器杀”,但没有限定“用剑还是用箭”,那么他用任何一种武器去杀,都不算违越约定。但如果他被吩咐“用剑”却用箭去杀,被吩咐“用这把剑”却用另一把剑去杀;或者对同一把剑,他被吩咐“用这个刃杀”却用另一个刃、或用剑面、剑尖、剑柄去杀,那就违越约定了。按照这个道理,应当知道在一切武器种类中,都有约定和违越约定的情况。巴利
Āvudhepi yo ‘‘asinā vā usunā vā’’ti aniyametvā ‘‘āvudhena mārehī’’ti āṇatto yena kenaci āvudhena māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘asinā’’ti vutto usunā, ‘‘iminā vā asinā’’ti vutto aññena asinā māreti. Etasseva vā asissa ‘‘imāya dhārāya mārehī’’ti vutto itarāya vā dhārāya talena vā tuṇḍena vā tharunā vā māreti, visaṅketo. Etena nayena sabbaāvudhabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
关于威仪方面,如果有人说“把那个正在走的人杀掉”,受命者如果杀了正在走的他,就不算违背约定。但如果被吩咐“只杀正在走的人”,却杀了坐着的人;或者被吩咐“只杀坐着的人”,却杀了正在走的人,那就是违背约定。按照这个方式,在各种威仪差别中,应当了解约定和违背约定的情况。巴利
Iriyāpathe pana yo ‘‘etaṃ gacchantaṃ mārehī’’ti vadati, āṇatto ca naṃ sace gacchantaṃ māreti, natthi visaṅketo. ‘‘Gacchantameva mārehī’’ti vutto pana sace nisinnaṃ māreti. ‘‘Nisinnameva vā mārehī’’ti vutto gacchantaṃ māreti, visaṅketo hoti. Etena nayena sabbairiyāpathabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
在行为方式上也是如此:如果有人被吩咐“刺穿后再杀”,他就确实刺穿后再杀,那就不算违背约定。但如果有人被吩咐“刺穿后再杀”,他却砍断后再杀,那就是违背约定。按照这个方法,在各种行为方式的差别中,应当知道什么是符合约定、什么是违背约定。巴利
Kiriyāvisesepi yo ‘‘vijjhitvā mārehī’’ti vutto vijjhitvāva māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘vijjhitvā mārehī’’ti vutto chinditvā māreti, visaṅketo. Etena nayena sabbakiriyāvisesabhedesu saṅketavisaṅketatā veditabbā.
如果有人不具体指定,只按特征下令说“把长的、短的、黑的、白的、瘦的、胖的杀掉”,受命的人杀了任何一个这类人,那双方都不算违约,都犯波罗夷。但如果他是针对自己下令,受命的人心想“就是这个人”,结果杀了下令者本人,那下令者犯恶作,杀人者犯波罗夷。如果下令者是针对自己下令,而对方却杀了另一个这类人,那下令者无罪,只有杀人者犯波罗夷。为什么?因为没有限定地点。不过,即使是针对自己下令,如果限定了地点,说“在某处夜间住处、日间住处、上座座位、新学座位或中间座位上坐着的那种人,你杀他”,而那里坐的却是另一个人,受命的人如果杀了那个人,杀人者不能脱罪,下令者也不能脱罪。为什么?因为地点已经限定了。如果在限定地点以外的地方杀,下令者就无罪。这个道理在大注疏里已经讲得很清楚、很确定了,所以在这里不应该轻慢对待。巴利
Yo pana liṅgavasena ‘‘dīghaṃ rassaṃ kāḷaṃ odātaṃ kisaṃ thūlaṃ mārehī’’ti aniyametvā āṇāpeti, āṇatto ca yaṃkiñci tādisaṃ māreti, natthi visaṅketo ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Atha pana so attānaṃ sandhāya āṇāpeti, āṇatto ca ‘‘ayameva īdiso’’ti āṇāpakameva māreti, āṇāpakassa dukkaṭaṃ, vadhakassa pārājikaṃ. Āṇāpako attānaṃ sandhāya āṇāpeti, itaro aññaṃ tādisaṃ māreti, āṇāpako muccati, vadhakasseva pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Okāsassa aniyamitattā. Sace pana attānaṃ sandhāya āṇāpentopi okāsaṃ niyameti, ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā therāsane vā navāsane vā majjhimāsane vā nisinnaṃ evarūpaṃ nāma mārehī’’ti. Tattha ca añño nisinno hoti, sace āṇatto taṃ māreti, neva vadhako muccati na āṇāpako. Kasmā? Okāsassa niyamitattā. Sace pana niyamitokāsato aññatra māreti, āṇāpako muccatīti ayaṃ nayo mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ suṭṭhu daḷhaṃ katvā vutto. Tasmā ettha na anādariyaṃ kātabbanti.
“指定后”这一句,按论母的方式对命令与加行的说明到此结束。巴利
Adhiṭṭhāyāti mātikāvasena āṇattikapayogakathā niṭṭhitā.
现在,为了说明“由使者”这个论母词条的含义,说了“比丘命令比丘”等四种情况。其中,“他认为是那个人”:受命者把命令者所指明的“某某人”就当成那个人,于是夺了那个人的命,两个人都犯波罗夷。“他认为是那个人却杀了另一个人”:被命令“你去夺某人的命”,受命者以为就是那个人而下手,结果杀了一个相似的另一个人,根本命令者不犯。“他以为是另一个人却杀了那个人”:受命者看到命令者所说的那个人的强壮同伴站在旁边,心想“这人仗着那人的势力才这么嚣张,我先把这个人杀了”,在打下去的时候,那人转身站到了那个位置,受命者误以为那就是“同伴”而夺了他的命,两个人都犯波罗夷。“他以为是另一个人却杀了另一个人”:按前面的道理,心想“我先把他的同伴杀了”,结果杀的正是同伴,只有那个受命者犯波罗夷。巴利
Idāni ye dūtenāti imassa mātikāpadassa niddesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetī’’tiādayo cattāro vārā vuttā. Tesu so taṃ maññamānoti so āṇatto yo āṇāpakena ‘‘itthannāmo’’ti akkhāto, taṃ maññamāno tameva jīvitā voropeti, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Taṃ maññamāno aññanti ‘‘yaṃ jīvitā voropehī’’ti vutto taṃ maññamāno aññaṃ tādisaṃ jīvitā voropeti, mūlaṭṭhassa anāpatti. Aññaṃ maññamāno tanti yo āṇāpakena vutto, tassa balavasahāyaṃ samīpe ṭhitaṃ disvā ‘‘imassa balenāyaṃ gajjati, imaṃ tāva jīvitā voropemī’’ti paharanto itarameva parivattitvā tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitaṃ ‘‘sahāyo’’ti maññamāno jīvitā voropeti, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Aññaṃ maññamāno aññanti purimanayeneva ‘‘imaṃ tāvassa sahāyaṃ jīvitā voropemī’’ti sahāyameva voropeti, tasseva pārājikaṃ.
在解释“使者辗转传递”这一部分时,在“向某某人传达”等语句中,应当知道有一位老师和三位名叫佛护、法护、僧护的弟子。其中,“比丘命令比丘”是指:老师想杀死某个人,把这件事说明之后,命令佛护。“向某某人传达”是指:佛护,你去,把这件事传达给法护。“某某人应向某某人传达”是指:法护也应该向僧护传达。“某某人应夺走某某人的生命”是指:这样被你命令的法护所命令的僧护,应该夺走那个人的生命;因为他在我们当中是勇敢的人,有能力做这件事。“犯恶作罪”是指:这样命令的老师,首先就犯了恶作罪。“他向另一个人转告”是指:佛护对法护、法护对僧护转告说:“我们的老师这样说:‘据说要夺走某某人的生命。’据说你是我们当中的勇士。”这样,他们也犯了恶作罪。“杀手接受”是指:僧护答应说:“好,我将夺走。” “根本者的罪是偷兰遮”是指:僧护刚一接受,老师就犯了偷兰遮罪。因为大众是被他指使去做这恶事的。“他如果那样”是指:如果那位僧护夺走了那个人的生命,那么四个人全都犯波罗夷。不只是四个人,用这种方式,如果不取消约定而辗转命令,即使有百位沙门、千位沙门,所有人全都犯波罗夷。巴利
Dūtaparamparāpadassa niddesavāre itthannāmassa pāvadātiādīsu eko ācariyo tayo buddharakkhitadhammarakkhitasaṅgharakkhitanāmakā antevāsikā daṭṭhabbā. Tattha bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetīti ācariyo kañci puggalaṃ mārāpetukāmo tamatthaṃ ācikkhitvā buddharakkhitaṃ āṇāpeti. Itthannāmassa pāvadāti gaccha tvaṃ, buddharakkhita, etamatthaṃ dhammarakkhitassa pāvada. Itthannāmo itthannāmassa pāvadatūti dhammarakkhitopi saṅgharakkhitassa pāvadatu. Itthannāmo itthannāmaṃ jīvitā voropetūti evaṃ tayā āṇattena dhammarakkhitena āṇatto saṅgharakkhito itthannāmaṃ puggalaṃ jīvitā voropetu; so hi amhesu vīrajātiko paṭibalo imasmiṃ kammeti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭaṃ. So itarassa ārocetīti buddharakkhito dhammarakkhitassa, dhammarakkhito ca saṅgharakkhitassa ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo evaṃ vadati – ‘itthannāmaṃ kira jīvitā voropehī’ti. Tvaṃ kira amhesu vīrapuriso’’ti āroceti; evaṃ tesampi dukkaṭaṃ. Vadhako paṭiggaṇhātīti ‘‘sādhu voropessāmī’’ti saṅgharakkhito sampaṭicchati. Mūlaṭṭhassa āpatti thullaccayassāti saṅgharakkhitena paṭiggahitamatte ācariyassa thullaccayaṃ. Mahājano hi tena pāpe niyojitoti. So tanti so ce saṅgharakkhito taṃ puggalaṃ jīvitā voropeti, sabbesaṃ catunnampi janānaṃ pārājikaṃ. Na kevalañca catunnaṃ, etenūpāyena visaṅketaṃ akatvā paramparāya āṇāpentaṃ samaṇasataṃ samaṇasahassaṃ vā hotu sabbesaṃ pārājikameva.
在解释“违越约定的使者”这一词条时,“他命令另一个人”的意思是:佛护被老师命令后,没有去见法护,或者不想传达,就直接去找僧护,说:“我们的老师这样说:‘据说要夺取某某人的生命。’”他这样就是在破坏约定而发出命令。正因为他破坏了约定,才被称为“违越约定的使者”。“犯恶作罪”是说:在发出命令时,佛护就先犯了恶作。“接受,犯恶作罪”是说:当僧护答应接受时,应当知道根本者(老师)本身就犯了恶作。如果这样的话,那接受时岂不是没有罪了?可是在传递消息、接受、随喜死亡这些情况下都有罪,接受死亡任务时怎么会没有罪呢?所以,接受者本身就有这个恶作。正因如此,这里没有说“根本者的”。在前面那种方式里,也应当知道接受者有罪;只是因为没机会,所以没有说。因此,无论谁接受,都因为那个原因而有罪,这是我们在这一点上的主张。就像这里一样,在不与取(偷盗)中也是如此。巴利
Visakkiyadūtapadaniddese so aññaṃ āṇāpetīti so ācariyena āṇatto buddharakkhito dhammarakkhitaṃ adisvā vā avattukāmo vā hutvā saṅgharakkhitameva upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo evamāha – ‘itthannāmaṃ kira jīvitā voropehī’’ti visaṅketaṃ karonto āṇāpeti. Visaṅketakaraṇeneva hi esa ‘‘visakkiyadūto’’ti vuccati. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti āṇattiyā tāva buddharakkhitassa dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggaṇhāti āpatti dukkaṭassāti saṅgharakkhitena sampaṭicchite mūlaṭṭhasseva dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sante paṭiggahaṇe āpattiyeva na siyā, sañcaritta paṭiggahaṇamaraṇābhinandanesupi ca āpatti hoti, maraṇapaṭiggahaṇe kathaṃ na siyā tasmā paṭiggaṇhantassevetaṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Tenevettha ‘‘mūlaṭṭhassā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Purimanayepi cetaṃ paṭiggaṇhantassa veditabbameva; okāsābhāvena pana na vuttaṃ. Tasmā yo yo paṭiggaṇhāti, tassa tassa tappaccayā āpattiyevāti ayamettha amhākaṃ khanti. Yathā cettha evaṃ adinnādānepīti.
如果那个人真的夺走了他的生命,那么下令的佛护和动手的僧护,两人都犯波罗夷。但根本老师因为已经取消了约定,所以不犯波罗夷。法护因为不知情,完全无犯。而佛护虽然保全了另外两人,自己却因此堕落了。巴利
Sace pana so taṃ jīvitā voropeti, āṇāpakassa ca buddharakkhitassa voropakassa ca saṅgharakkhitassāti ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. Mūlaṭṭhassa pana ācariyassa visaṅketattā pārājikena anāpatti. Dhammarakkhitassa ajānanatāya sabbena sabbaṃ anāpatti. Buddharakkhito pana dvinnaṃ sotthibhāvaṃ katvā attanā naṭṭhoti.
在“去而复返的使者”这一释义中:“他去后又回来”,意思是:他走到那个应被夺命的人附近,因为对方守护严密,没法杀掉他,就回来了。“当你能的时候,那时再动手”,意思是:何必今天就要杀?去吧,等你能下手的时候,那时再夺他的命。“犯恶作罪”,意思是:像这样再次下命令,也只是犯恶作罪。但如果那个人必定会被夺命,那么成办此事的思心所就如同道心之后紧接着的果心一样,所以这个人在下命令的当下就犯波罗夷。即使杀手过了六十年才杀那个人,而下命令的人在中间就命终了,或者还俗了,或者以非沙门身份命终,或者将来会还俗。如果下命令的人在家时,针对母亲、父亲或阿罗汉下了这样的命令,然后出家;在他出家之后,受命的人杀了那个人,那么下命令的人在家时就已经成了杀母者、杀父者或杀阿罗汉者,因此他的出家与具足戒都不能成立。即使应被杀的人在命令时还是凡夫,但当受命者杀他时,他已经证得阿罗汉;或者他挨了受命者的打击后,依靠由痛苦所生的信心修观,证得阿罗汉果,随后就因为那个病而命终,那么下命令的人在命令的当下就成了杀阿罗汉者。而杀手则在任何情况下,都是在着手行动的当下就犯波罗夷。巴利
Gatapaccāgatadūtaniddese – so gantvā puna paccāgacchatīti tassa jīvitā voropetabbassa samīpaṃ gantvā susaṃvihitārakkhattā taṃ jīvitā voropetuṃ asakkonto āgacchati. Yadā sakkosi tadāti kiṃ ajjeva mārito mārito hoti, gaccha yadā sakkosi, tadā naṃ jīvitā voropehīti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ puna āṇattiyāpi dukkaṭameva hoti. Sace pana so avassaṃ jīvitā voropetabbo hoti, atthasādhakacetanā maggānantaraphalasadisā, tasmā ayaṃ āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājiko. Sacepi vadhako saṭṭhivassātikkamena taṃ vadhati, āṇāpako ca antarāva kālaṅkaroti, hīnāya vā āvattati, assamaṇova hutvā kālañca karissati, hīnāya vā āvattissati. Sace āṇāpako gihikāle mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā arahantaṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ āṇāpetvā pabbajati, tasmiṃ pabbajite āṇatto taṃ māreti, āṇāpako gihikāleyeva mātughātako pitughātako arahantaghātako vā hoti, tasmā nevassa pabbajjā , na upasampadā ruhati. Sacepi māretabbapuggalo āṇattikkhaṇe puthujjano, yadā pana naṃ āṇatto māreti tadā arahā hoti, āṇattato vā pahāraṃ labhitvā dukkhamūlikaṃ saddhaṃ nissāya vipassanto arahattaṃ patvā tenevābādhena kālaṃkaroti, āṇāpako āṇattikkhaṇeyeva arahantaghātako. Vadhako pana sabbattha upakkamakaraṇakkhaṇeyeva pārājikoti.
现在,为了在这些全都以“使者”方式说到的论母项目中,显示合乎约定与违离约定的情况,巴利
Idāni ye sabbesuyeva imesu dūtavasena vuttamātikāpadesu saṅketavisaṅketadassanatthaṃ
已经说了三种情况。其中,第一种情况:因为他说话声音轻细,或者那人耳聋,听不到“不要杀”这句话,所以根本者没有得到解脱。第二种情况:因为对方听到了,所以得到解脱。第三种情况:因为那人听到了,而另一个人答应“好”之后又停手了,所以两个人都得到解脱。巴利
Vuttā tayo vārā, tesu paṭhamavāre tāva – yasmā taṃ saṇikaṃ vā bhaṇanto tassa vā badhiratāya ‘‘mā ghātehī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ na sāveti, tasmā mūlaṭṭho na mutto. Dutiyavāre – sāvitattā mutto. Tatiyavāre pana tena ca sāvitattā itarena ca ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā oratattā ubhopi muttāti.
175 175. 在“当面而作背后想”等解释中,“当面”指在面前,“背后”指不在面前。其中,当那位有怨的比丘在受供养时和其他比丘一起来,坐在面前,有人因为愚痴昏暗,不知道他已经来了,心里想:“啊,但愿某某被杀掉!连盗贼都不去杀他,蛇也不咬他,也不拿刀或毒来害他!”这样随喜他的死亡而说出这类话,这叫“当面而作背后想而说”。意思是:他明明在面前,却当作他不在面前。如果有人看见他坐在面前,后来他和那些受完供养离开的比丘们一起走了,这人却仍然以为“他就坐在这里”,然后像前面那样说,这叫“背后而作当面想而说”。用同样的方法,应当知道“当面而作当面想”和“背后而作背后想”这两种。还应当知道,这四种情况中,每说一句话都犯恶作。巴利
175. Araho rahosaññīniddesādīsu arahoti sammukhe. Rahoti parammukhe. Tattha yo upaṭṭhānakāle veribhikkhumhi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ āgantvā purato nisinneyeva andhakāradosena tassa āgatabhāvaṃ ajānanto ‘‘aho vata itthannāmo hato assa, corāpi nāma taṃ na hananti, sappo vā na ḍaṃsati, na satthaṃ vā visaṃ vā āharatī’’ti tassa maraṇaṃ abhinandanto īdisāni vacanāni ullapati, ayaṃ araho rahosaññī ullapati nāma. Sammukheva tasmiṃ parammukhasaññīti attho. Yo pana taṃ purato nisinnaṃ disvā puna upaṭṭhānaṃ katvā gatehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ gatepi tasmiṃ ‘‘idheva so nisinno’’ti saññī hutvā purimanayeneva ullapati, ayaṃ raho arahosaññī ullapati nāma. Etenevupāyena araho arahosaññī ca raho rahosaññī ca veditabbo. Catunnampi ca etesaṃ vācāya vācāya dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明赞叹死亡的各种分类,在前面所说的五种论母解释——以身赞叹等——当中:
“以身做姿态”:就像他心里知道的那样——“拿刀、吃毒、上吊,或者跳进坑里等等而死的人,据说能得到钱财、得到名声,或者生到天界”——他用这个意思,通过手势等身体动作表达出来。
“用言语说”:就是把同样的意思分成句子说出来。
第三种方式,是同时用身体和言语两种方式来说。
在所有这些情况里,每一次赞叹的当下就犯恶作。当被赞叹的人因此产生痛苦时,赞叹的人犯土喇咤亚。如果被赞叹的人死了,就在赞叹的那一刻,赞叹的人犯波罗夷。
如果被赞叹的人自己不知道,而另一个人知道后心想“我确实找到了获得安乐的方法”,然后因为那个赞叹而死去,那就无犯。
如果是为了两个人而作赞叹,其中一个人知道后死去,犯波罗夷。如果两个人都死了,犯波罗夷,同时累积不善业。这个道理对很多人也一样适用。
如果不指定对象,到处漫游赞叹死亡,那么凡是知道这个赞叹而死去的人,都算作被他所杀。巴利
Idāni maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanāya vibhāgadassanatthaṃ vuttesu pañcasu kāyena saṃvaṇṇanādimātikāniddesesu – kāyena vikāraṃ karotīti yathā so jānāti ‘‘satthaṃ vā āharitvā visaṃ vā khāditvā rajjuyā vā ubbandhitvā sobbhādīsu vā papatitvā yo marati so kira dhanaṃ vā labhati, yasaṃ vā labhati, saggaṃ vā gacchatīti ayamattho etena vutto’’ti tathā hatthamuddādīhi dasseti. Vācāya bhaṇatīti tamevatthaṃ vākyabhedaṃ katvā bhaṇati. Tatiyavāro ubhayavasena vutto. Sabbattha saṃvaṇṇanāya payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Tassa dukkhuppattiyaṃ saṃvaṇṇakassa thullaccayaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa saṃvaṇṇanā katā, tasmiṃ mate saṃvaṇṇanakkhaṇeyeva saṃvaṇṇakassa pārājikaṃ. So taṃ na jānāti añño ñatvā ‘‘laddho vata me sukhuppattiupāyo’’ti tāya saṃvaṇṇanāya marati, anāpatti. Dvinnaṃ uddissa saṃvaṇṇanāya katāya eko ñatvā marati, pārājikaṃ. Dvepi maranti, pārājikañca akusalarāsi ca. Esa nayo sambahulesu. Anuddissa maraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇento āhiṇḍati, yo yo taṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ ñatvā marati, sabbo tena mārito hoti.
在通过使者赞叹死亡的情形中,如果吩咐说“你去某某家或某某村,对某某这样赞叹死亡”,只要在教法中被传达,就犯恶作。如果使者是为某人而被派去的,当那人产生痛苦时,主使者犯土喇咤亚;如果那人死了,主使者犯波罗夷。如果使者心想“他现在已经知道这是生天之道了”,却不告诉那人,而是告诉自己的亲戚或血亲,当那人死了,使者就违背约定,主使者则无罪。如果使者同样这样想,然后自己按照所赞叹的方式去做而死了,也同样是违背约定。如果不指定对象而传达,那么有多少人因为使者的赞叹而死,就有多少杀生。如果父母因此而死,那就成了无间业。巴利
Dūtena saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gehaṃ vā gāmaṃ vā gantvā itthannāmassa evaṃ maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇehī’’ti sāsane ārocitamatte dukkaṭaṃ. Yassatthāya pahito tassa dukkhuppattiyā mūlaṭṭhassa thullaccayaṃ, maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Dūto ‘‘ñāto dāni ayaṃ saggamaggo’’ti tassa anārocetvā attano ñātissa vā sālohitassa vā āroceti, tasmiṃ mate visaṅketo hoti, mūlaṭṭho muccati. Dūto tatheva cintetvā sayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya vuttaṃ katvā marati, visaṅketova. Anuddissa pana sāsane ārocite yattakā dūtassa saṃvaṇṇanāya maranti, tattakā pāṇātipātā. Sace mātāpitaro maranti, ānantariyampi hoti.
176 176. 关于书写赞叹死亡的说明——“书写”是指在贝叶或纸本上写下文字:“如果有人拿刀自杀,或跳下悬崖,或用火焚、水淹等其他方法死去,就能得到这样那样的好处”,或者写“这就是他的法”。在这里,恶作和土喇咤亚也应当按照前面所说的方式理解。如果针对特定对象而写,那么当所针对的那个人死亡时,就犯波罗夷。如果为许多人而写,有多少人死亡,就有多少杀生。如果父母因此死亡,就成无间业。不针对特定对象而写,道理也一样。如果生起后悔,心想“会有很多人死”,就把那本书烧掉,或者处理到字迹无法辨认,就能脱罪。如果那本书是别人的,不管是否针对特定对象而写,只要放回拿取的地方,就能脱罪。如果是花钱买来的,就把书还给书的主人,把钱还给从他手里收钱的人,就能脱罪。如果许多人同一个心意,想“我们来写赞叹死亡的文字”,一个人爬上棕榈树割叶子,一个人拿过来,一个人做成书,一个人书写,如果是刺刻的书,一个人涂墨,涂好墨、把书准备好之后,大家把它放在会堂、店铺,或者任何有很多好奇看字的人聚集的地方。有人读了之后,即使只有一个人死亡,所有人都犯波罗夷。如果很多人死亡,道理和前面说的一样。如果生起后悔,即使把那本书藏在箱子里,另一个人看到后拿出来再给很多人看,他们仍然不能脱罪。且不说箱子,即使把那本书扔进河里或海里,或者洗它,或者切成碎片,或者用火烧,只要在摩擦过、没洗净或没烧尽的叶子上字迹还能辨认,就不能脱罪。但如果处理到字迹无法辨认,就能脱罪。巴利
176. Lekhāsaṃvaṇṇanāya – lekhaṃ chindatīti paṇṇe vā potthake vā akkharāni likhati – ‘‘yo satthaṃ vā āharitvā papāte vā papatitvā aññehi vā aggippavesanaudakappavesanādīhi upāyehi marati, so idañcidañca labhatī’’ti vā ‘‘tassa dhammo hotī’’ti vāti. Etthāpi dukkaṭathullaccayā vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Uddissa likhite pana yaṃ uddissa likhitaṃ tasseva maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Bahū uddissa likhite yattakā maranti, tattakā pāṇātipātā. Mātāpitūnaṃ maraṇena ānantariyaṃ. Anuddissa likhitepi eseva nayo. ‘‘Bahū marantī’’ti vippaṭisāre uppanne taṃ potthakaṃ jhāpetvā vā yathā vā akkharāni na paññāyanti tathā katvā muccati. Sace so parassa potthako hoti, uddissa likhito vā hoti anuddissa likhito vā, gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Sace mūlena kīto hoti, potthakassāmikānaṃ potthakaṃ, yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahitaṃ, tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccati. Sace sambahulā ‘‘maraṇavaṇṇaṃ likhissāmā’’ti ekajjhāsayā hutvā eko tālarukkhaṃ ārohitvā paṇṇaṃ chindati, eko āharati, eko potthakaṃ karoti, eko likhati, eko sace kaṇṭakalekhā hoti, masiṃ makkheti, masiṃ makkhetvā taṃ potthakaṃ sajjetvā sabbeva sabhāyaṃ vā āpaṇe vā yattha vā pana lekhādassanakotūhalakā bahū sannipatanti, tattha ṭhapenti. Taṃ vācetvā sacepi eko marati, sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ. Sace bahukā maranti, vuttasadisova nayo. Vippaṭisāre pana uppanne taṃ potthakaṃ sacepi mañjūsāyaṃ gopenti, añño ca taṃ disvā nīharitvā puna bahūnaṃ dasseti, neva muccanti. Tiṭṭhatu mañjūsā, sacepi taṃ potthakaṃ nadiyaṃ vā samudde vā khipanti vā dhovanti vā khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ vā chindanti, aggimhi vā jhāpenti, yāva saṅghaṭṭitepi duddhote vā dujjhāpite vā patte akkharāni paññāyanti, tāva na muccanti. Yathā pana akkharāni na paññāyanti tatheva kate muccantīti.
现在,为了说明固定杀生加行的分类,在已经说过的“坑”等论母解释中,“针对人而挖坑”是指:心里想着“某某掉进去就会死”,针对某个人,在他经常活动的地方挖一个坑。挖的时候,即使是在有生命的地上挖,因为是杀生的加行,每挖一下都犯恶作。如果所针对的那个人因此生起痛苦,就犯土喇咤亚;如果因此死亡,就犯波罗夷。如果是别人掉进去死了,就无犯。如果不是针对特定的人,而是想“不管谁掉进去死了都行”而挖坑,那么有多少人掉进去死掉,就有多少次杀生。如果对象属于五无间业的情形,就构成无间业;如果对象属于构成土喇咤亚、波逸提罪的情形,就犯土喇咤亚、波逸提。巴利
Idāni thāvarapayogassa vibhāgadassanatthaṃ vuttesu opātādimātikāniddesesu manussaṃ uddissa opātaṃ khanatīti ‘‘itthannāmo patitvā marissatī’’ti kañci manussaṃ uddisitvā yattha so ekato vicarati, tattha āvāṭaṃ khanati, khanantassa tāva sacepi jātapathaviyā khanati, pāṇātipātassa payogattā payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Yaṃ uddissa khanati, tassa dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Aññasmiṃ patitvā mate anāpatti. Sace anuddissa ‘‘yo koci marissatī’’ti khato hoti, yattakā patitvā maranti, tattakā pāṇātipātā. Ānantariyavatthūsu ca ānantariyaṃ thullaccayapācittiyavatthūsu thullaccayapācittiyāni.
这里涉及多种思。哪一种思构成波罗夷呢?首先,《大注疏》中说:“挖一个坑,按深度和长宽挖好,量定尺寸,削平、清扫,在取出土筐时,那令事成就的思就如同紧接道心之后的果心一样。即使过了一百年后,有人掉进去必定会死,也仍然是以那令事成就的思构成波罗夷。”《大护法注》和《略注》中则说:“当挖下第一锄时,若心想‘掉进这个坑就会死’,此时若有人失足掉进去死了,就构成波罗夷。但持经长老们只取令事成就的思。”巴利
Bahū tattha cetanā; katamāya pārājikaṃ hotīti? Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ tāva vuttaṃ – ‘‘āvāṭaṃ gambhīrato ca āyāmavitthārato ca khanitvā pamāṇe ṭhapetvā tacchetvā puñchitvā paṃsupacchiṃ uddharantassa sanniṭṭhāpikā atthasādhakacetanā maggānantaraphalasadisā. Sacepi vassasatassa accayena patitvā avassaṃ maraṇakasatto hoti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāyameva pārājika’’nti. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyañca – ‘‘imasmiṃ āvāṭe patitvā marissatīti ekasmimpi kuddālappahāre dinne sace koci tattha pakkhalito patitvā marati, pārājikameva. Suttantikattherā pana sanniṭṭhāpakacetanaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
一个人命令另一个人说:“挖个坑,把某某人带来,推下去杀掉。”那人就把他推下去杀了,两个人都犯波罗夷。如果命令者推另一个人下去杀了,或者命令的人自己掉下去死了,或者另一个人自己因法性掉下去死了,在所有这种情况下,根本造作者(命令者)都不构成违越,可以脱罪。如果他想:“某某人会把某某人带来,在这里杀掉”,那么挖坑时也是同样的道理。如果他想“想死的人会在这里死”而挖坑,死一个人就犯波罗夷;死很多人就积集不善业;如果是父母死了就成无间业;如果涉及偷兰遮和波逸提的情况,就犯相应的偷兰遮和波逸提。巴利
Eko ‘‘opātaṃ khanitvā asukaṃ nāma ānetvā idha pātetvā mārehī’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpeti, so taṃ pātetvā māreti, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Aññaṃ pātetvā māreti, sayaṃ patitvā marati, añño attano dhammatāya patitvā marati, sabbattha visaṅketo hoti, mūlaṭṭho muccati. ‘‘Asuko asukaṃ ānetvā idha māressatī’’ti khatepi eseva nayo. Maritukāmā idha marissantīti khanati, ekassa maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Bahunnaṃ maraṇe akusalarāsi , mātāpitūnaṃ maraṇe ānantariyaṃ, thullaccayapācittiyavatthūsu thullaccayapācittiyāni.
有人想:“不管是谁,只要想杀人,就会把人推到这里弄死。”于是挖了坑。如果有人被推下去弄死,死一个人就犯波罗夷;死很多人就积下不善业;如果事情涉及杀父、杀母、杀阿罗汉这类无间业的对象,就犯无间业等罪。在这里,连阿罗汉也包括在内。但按前面那种说法,因为他们没有想死的心,所以不会掉下去,因此不算在内。在这两种情况下,如果是自己因法性而掉下去死了,就没有杀心。有人想:“不管是谁,只要想杀自己的仇人,就会把仇人推到这里弄死。”于是挖了坑。如果仇人们把仇人推下去弄死,死一个人就犯波罗夷,死很多人就积下不善业;如果母亲、父亲或阿罗汉被仇人带到这里杀死,就犯无间业。如果他们自己因法性而掉下去死了,就没有杀心。巴利
‘‘Ye keci māretukāmā, te idha pātetvā māressantī’’ti khanati, tattha pātetvā mārenti , ekasmiṃ mate pārājikaṃ, bahūsu akusalarāsi, ānantariyādivatthūsu ānantariyādīni. Idheva arahantāpi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Purimanaye pana ‘‘tesaṃ maritukāmatāya patanaṃ natthī’’ti te na saṅgayhanti. Dvīsupi nayesu attano dhammatāya patitvā mate visaṅketo. ‘‘Ye keci attano verike ettha pātetvā māressantī’’ti khanati, tattha ca verikā verike pātetvā mārenti, ekasmiṃ mārite pārājikaṃ, bahūsu akusalarāsi, mātari vā pitari vā arahante vā verikehi ānetvā tattha mārite ānantariyaṃ. Attano dhammatāya patitvā matesu visaṅketo.
如果有人不指定具体对象,心里想的是“不管想死的、不想死的,想杀的、不想杀的,任何掉进来或被人推进来的人都会死”,就这样去挖陷阱,那么每死一个人,他就随着每一个人的死亡,相应地承受业报,并犯下相应的罪过。如果怀孕的女人掉进去,连同胎儿一起死了,就是两个杀生。如果只有胎儿死了,就是一个杀生。如果胎儿没死,母亲死了,也只是一个杀生。被盗贼追赶的人掉进去死了,挖陷阱的人犯波罗夷。盗贼把人推到那里杀死,也是波罗夷。把掉进去的人拖出来再杀死,也是波罗夷。为什么?因为那个人是因为掉进陷阱这个行为而被抓住的。从陷阱里出来以后,因为同一个伤口而死,也是波罗夷。过了很多年之后,同一个伤口再次发作而死,也是波罗夷。因为掉进陷阱而生了病,后来又得了别的病,而陷阱导致的病更严重,即使最后是因为后来那个病而死,挖陷阱的人也不得脱罪。如果后来才生的病更严重,那个人因为那个病而死,就可以脱罪。如果两种病共同导致死亡,就不得脱罪。化生的人出现在陷阱里,出不来而死,也是波罗夷。本来是为了杀人而挖的坑,夜叉之类的掉进去死了,没有罪。本来是为了夜叉之类而挖的坑,人或其他众生掉进去死了,也是同样的道理。不过,为了夜叉之类而挖坑的人,即使在挖的时候让它们感到痛苦,也只犯恶作。如果导致死亡,则根据对象不同,或者犯偷兰遮,或者犯波逸提。不指定对象而挖的陷阱,有夜叉形状或饿鬼形状的掉进去,以畜生形状死去,以掉进去时的形状为准,所以是偷兰遮——优波帝沙长老这样说。以死时的形状为准,所以是波逸提——富沙天长老这样说。以畜生形状掉进去,以夜叉或饿鬼形状死去,也是同样的道理。巴利
Yo pana ‘‘maritukāmā vā amaritukāmā vā māretukāmā vā amāretukāmā vā ye keci ettha patitā vā pātitā vā marissantī’’ti sabbathāpi anuddisseva khanati. Yo yo marati tassa tassa maraṇena yathānurūpaṃ kammañca phusati, āpattiñca āpajjati. Sace gabbhinī patitvā sagabbhā marati, dve pāṇātipātā. Gabbhoyeva vinassati, eko. Gabbho na vinassati, mātā marati, ekoyeva. Corehi anubaddho patitvā marati, opātakhanakasseva pārājikaṃ. Corā tattha pātetvā mārenti, pārājikameva. Tattha patitaṃ bahi nīharitvā mārenti, pārājikameva. Kasmā? Opāte patitappayogena gahitattā. Opātato nikkhamitvā teneva ābādhena marati, pārājikameva. Bahūni vassāni atikkamitvā puna kupitena tenevābādhena marati, pārājikameva. Opāte patanappaccayā uppannarogena gilānasseva añño rogo uppajjati, opātarogo balavataro hoti, tena matepi opātakhaṇako na muccati. Sace pacchā uppannarogo balavā hoti, tena mate muccati. Ubhohi mate na muccati. Opāte opapātikamanusso nibbattitvā uttarituṃ asakkonto marati, pārājikameva. Manussaṃ uddissa khate yakkhādīsu patitvā matesu anāpatti. Yakkhādayo uddissa khate manussādīsu marantesupi eseva nayo. Yakkhādayo uddissa khanantassa pana khananepi tesaṃ dukkhuppattiyampi dukkaṭameva. Maraṇe vatthuvasena thullaccayaṃ vā pācittiyaṃ vā. Anuddissa khate opāte yakkharūpena vā petarūpena vā patati, tiracchānarūpena marati, patanarūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā thullaccayanti upatissatthero. Maraṇarūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā pācittiyanti phussadevatthero. Tiracchānarūpena patitvā yakkhapetarūpena matepi eseva nayo.
挖陷阱的人把陷阱卖给别人,或者白白送人,不管是谁掉进去死了,由此产生的罪和业缚都归他自己。得到陷阱的人没有罪。如果得到陷阱的人想:“这样掉下去的人出不来,会死掉,或者得不到救助”,于是把陷阱挖得更深或更浅、更长或更短、更宽或更窄,那么两个人都犯下罪和业缚。如果因为想到“会有很多人死掉”而生起后悔,用土把陷阱填平,假如有人掉在填的土上死了,即使已经填平,最初挖陷阱的人仍然脱不了罪。天上下雨时那里变成泥泞,有人陷在泥里死了,也一样。树木倒下,或者风、雨水把泥土冲走,或者有人为了挖块根而在那里掘出一个坑,如果有人陷进去或掉进去死了,最初挖陷阱的人仍然脱不了罪。不过,如果在那块地方建一个大水池或池塘,或者建塔庙,或者种菩提树,或者建住所或车道,就能脱罪。当陷阱被牢固地填平,树木等的根互相缠结在一起,已经变成实心地面时,那时也能脱罪。即使河流冲过来把陷阱冲走了,这样也能脱罪。以上就是关于陷阱的论述。巴利
Opātakhanako opātaṃ aññassa vikkiṇāti vā mudhā vā deti, yo yo patitvā marati, tappaccayā tasseva āpatti ca kammabandho ca. Yena laddho so niddoso. Atha sopi ‘‘evaṃ patitā uttarituṃ asakkontā nassissanti, suuddharā vā na bhavissantī’’ti taṃ opātaṃ gambhīrataraṃ vā uttānataraṃ vā dīghataraṃ vā rassataraṃ vā vitthatataraṃ vā sambādhataraṃ vā karoti, ubhinnampi āpatti ca kammabandho ca. Bahū marantīti vippaṭisāre uppanne opātaṃ paṃsunā pūreti, sace koci paṃsumhi patitvā marati, pūretvāpi mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Deve vassante kaddamo hoti, tattha laggitvā matepi. Rukkho vā patanto vāto vā vassodakaṃ vā paṃsuṃ harati, kandamūlatthaṃ vā pathaviṃ khanantā tattha āvāṭaṃ karonti. Tattha sace koci laggitvā vā patitvā vā marati, mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Tasmiṃ pana okāse mahantaṃ taḷākaṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā kāretvā cetiyaṃ vā patiṭṭhāpetvā bodhiṃ vā ropetvā āvāsaṃ vā sakaṭamaggaṃ vā kāretvā muccati. Yadāpi thiraṃ katvā pūrite opāte rukkhādīnaṃ mūlāni mūlehi saṃsibbitāni honti , jātapathavī jātā, tadāpi muccati. Sacepi nadī āgantvā opātaṃ harati, evampi muccatīti. Ayaṃ tāva opātakathā.
不过,对于陷阱这一类顺理成章、看起来也很妥当的捕猎装置,只要有人放下套索,心想“众生会在这里被绑住而死”,那就应当知道:对于那些注定会被绑住的众生,在刚放手的那一刻,就涉及波罗夷、无间罪、土喇咤亚、波逸提这些罪。
如果是为了特定对象而设置,结果被绑住的却是那对象以外的人,那就没有犯戒。套索无论是连同本钱一起给出去,还是白白送人,业力上的束缚都只归最初设置的人。
如果拿到套索的人把松脱的套索重新架好,或者看见有人从旁边走过,就筑起围栏把人引到正面来,或者把套索杆立得更硬,或者把套索绳绑得更紧,或者把桩子钉得更牢,那两个人就都解脱不了。
如果设置者生起后悔,把套索解下来就走了,别人看见后又重新架设,结果被绑住的众生一个接一个死去,最初设置的人仍然解脱不了。巴利
Opātasseva pana anulomesu pāsādīsupi yo tāva pāsaṃ oḍḍeti ‘‘ettha bajjhitvā sattā marissantī’’ti avassaṃ bajjhanakasattānaṃ vasena hatthā muttamatte pārājikānantariyathullaccayapācittiyāni veditabbāni. Uddissa kate yaṃ uddissa oḍḍito, tato aññesaṃ bandhane anāpatti. Pāse mūlena vā mudhā vā dinnepi mūlaṭṭhasseva kammabandho. Sace yena laddho so uggalitaṃ vā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā sammukhe paveseti, thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapeti, daḷhataraṃ vā pāsarajjuṃ bandhati, thirataraṃ vā khāṇukaṃ vā ākoṭeti, ubhopi na muccanti. Sace vippaṭisāre uppanne pāsaṃ uggalāpetvā gacchati, taṃ disvā puna aññe saṇṭhapenti, baddhā baddhā maranti, mūlaṭṭho na muccati.
如果那根套索杆不是他自己做的,那么把它放回被拿取的位置,他就解脱了。砍断在那里长出来的杆子,他就解脱了。但如果是他自己做的杆子,即使他加以保护,也还是不能解脱。因为如果别人拿了那根杆子去设置套索,众生因此而死,最初设置的人就不能解脱。如果他把那根杆子烧成炭火后扔掉,众生被那炭火打到而死,他也还是不能解脱。只有彻底烧尽或彻底毁掉,才能解脱。套索绳如果是别人搓的,把它放回被拿取的位置,他就解脱了。如果拿到绳子后自己搓成,就要把它拆开;如果拿到纤维后搓成,就要把纤维一条条拆散,才能解脱。但如果是他自己从树林里取来纤维搓成的,即使加以保护,也不能解脱。只有彻底烧尽或彻底毁掉,才能解脱。巴利
Sace pana tena pāsayaṭṭhi sayaṃ akatā hoti, gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Tatthajātakayaṭṭhiṃ chinditvā muccati. Sayaṃ katayaṭṭhiṃ pana gopentopi na muccati. Yadi hi taṃ añño gaṇhitvā pāsaṃ saṇṭhapeti, tappaccayā marantesu mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Sace taṃ jhāpetvā alātaṃ katvā chaḍḍeti, tena alātena pahāraṃ laddhā marantesupi na muccati. Sabbaso pana jhāpetvā vā nāsetvā vā muccati, pāsarajjumpi aññehi ca vaṭṭitaṃ gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Rajjuke labhitvā sayaṃ vaṭṭitaṃ ubbaṭṭetvā vāke labhitvā vaṭṭitaṃ hīraṃ hīraṃ katvā muccati. Araññato pana sayaṃ vāke āharitvā vaṭṭitaṃ gopentopi na muccati. Sabbaso pana jhāpetvā vā nāsetvā vā muccati.
布置压杀陷阱时,把压板架在四根支柱上,再放上石头,每做一步都犯恶作罪。等全部布置完毕,手一松开的那一刹那,就根据必定会被压死的众生的情况,按照有指定对象和没有指定对象等相应情形,应当知道构成波罗夷等罪。压杀陷阱不管是有人正式布施的,还是随便放置的,业的责任都只落在最初布置的人身上。如果接受陷阱的人把掉下来的石头重新搬上去,或者再放上别的石头让它变得更重,或者看见众生从旁边经过就筑起围栏,把众生引进压杀陷阱里,这两个人都不能脱罪。即使他起了悔意,把压杀陷阱推倒后离开,别人看见后又重新布置好,最初布置的人仍然不能脱罪。不过,就石头而言,要把它放回原来拿取的位置才能脱罪;压杀板的支柱,则按照套索杆那一节所说的方法,放回原来拿取的位置,或者烧掉,才能脱罪。巴利
Adūhalaṃ sajjento catūsu pādesu adūhalamañcaṃ ṭhapetvā pāsāṇe āropeti, payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Sabbasajjaṃ katvā hatthato muttamatte avassaṃ ajjhottharitabbakasattānaṃ vasena uddissakānuddissakānurūpena pārājikādīni veditabbāni. Adūhale mūlena vā mudhā vā dinnepi mūlaṭṭhasseva kammabaddho. Sace yena laddhaṃ so patitaṃ vā ukkhipati, aññepi pāsāṇe āropetvā garukataraṃ vā karoti, passena vā gacchante disvā vatiṃ katvā adūhale paveseti, ubhopi na muccanti. Sacepi vippaṭisāre uppanne adūhalaṃ pātetvā gacchati, taṃ disvā añño saṇṭhapeti, mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Pāsāṇe pana gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā adūhalapāde ca pāsayaṭṭhiyaṃ vuttanayena gahitaṭṭhāne vā ṭhapetvā jhāpetvā vā muccati.
把刺桩竖起来的人,即使已经全部准备就绪,只要一松手,众生一掉到桩尖上就必定会死,这时就按所指向或未指向的众生的情况,相应地判定波罗夷等罪。刺桩不管是有人出了钱雇人做的,还是随便弄来的,业的责任都只落在最初设置的人身上。如果得到这根刺桩的人想“让他们一下子就死”,就把它削得更尖;想“让他们死得痛苦”,就把它弄钝;觉得“太高了”,就把它放低;觉得“太低了”,就把它升高重新竖起来;或者把弯的弄直、把太直的弄弯、让它稍微倾斜——这样双方都不得脱罪。但如果他觉得“位置不对”,就把它移到别的地方,而这根刺桩从一开始就是为了杀人而特意寻找制作的,那最初设置的人仍不得脱罪;如果不是特意寻找,只是随手拿到现成的就竖起来,那最初设置的人可以脱罪。如果生起了后悔心,就按照套索杆那段所说的方式,把它放回原来拿取的位置,或者烧掉,这样就能脱罪。巴利
Sūlaṃ ropentassāpi sabbasajjaṃ katvā hatthato muttamatte sūlamukhe patitvā avassaṃ maraṇakasattānaṃ vasena uddissānuddissānurūpato pārājikādīni veditabbāni. Sūle mūlena vā mudhā vā dinnepi mūlaṭṭhasseva kammabaddho. Sace yena laddhaṃ so ‘‘ekappahāreneva marissantī’’ti tikhiṇataraṃ vā karoti, ‘‘dukkhaṃ marissantī’’ti kuṇṭhataraṃ vā karoti, ‘‘ucca’’nti sallakkhetvā nīcataraṃ vā ‘‘nīca’’nti sallakkhetvā uccataraṃ vā puna ropeti, vaṅkaṃ vā ujukaṃ atiujukaṃ vā īsakaṃ poṇaṃ karoti, ubhopi na muccanti. Sace pana ‘‘aṭṭhāne ṭhita’’nti aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti, taṃ ce māraṇatthāya ādito pabhuti pariyesitvā kataṃ hoti, mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Apariyesitvā pana katameva labhitvā ropite mūlaṭṭho muccati. Vippaṭisāre uppanne pāsayaṭṭhiyaṃ vuttanayena gahitaṭṭhāne vā ṭhapetvā jhāpetvā vā muccati.
177 177. 在“在倚靠物上放刀”这一条里,所谓倚靠物,指的是日常经常使用的东西:床、椅子、靠板,或者白天坐着时靠的柱子、那里原本生长的树,或者经行时站着倚靠的树、靠板——所有这些,因为可以倚靠,所以叫倚靠物。在这样的倚靠物上,以能刺伤或砍伤倚靠者的方式,放置斧头、凿子、刀、锥、刺等任何一种刀,犯恶作。在经常使用的地方,有人没有戒心地坐下、躺下或倚靠,因为碰到刀而生起痛苦,犯土喇咤亚;如果因此死亡,犯波罗夷。如果另一个与他有仇的比丘在寺院里巡视时看到了,心想“这大概是为了杀这个人而放的,好啊,让他好好死吧”,随喜地走开,犯恶作。但如果那个人也在那里,心想“这样做会更好”,把刀磨得更锋利等等,做了某些加工,那他也犯波罗夷。但如果他认为“位置不对”,把刀拔出来放到别处,如果是为了同一个目的而特意制作放置的,最初放置的人仍然不能脱罪;如果只是把现成的拿来放上去,最初放置的人就脱罪了。如果把那把移走,另外放一把更锋利的,最初放置的人就脱罪了。巴利
177. Apassene satthaṃ vāti ettha apassenaṃ nāma niccaparibhogo mañco vā pīṭhaṃ vā apassenaphalakaṃ vā divāṭṭhāne nisīdantassa apassenakatthambho vā tatthajātakarukkho vā caṅkame apassāya tiṭṭhantassa ālambanarukkho vā ālambanaphalakaṃ vā sabbampetaṃ apassayanīyaṭṭhena apassenaṃ nāma; tasmiṃ apassene yathā apassayantaṃ vijjhati vā chindati vā tathā katvā vāsipharasusattiārakaṇṭakādīnaṃ aññataraṃ satthaṃ ṭhapeti, dukkaṭaṃ. Dhuvaparibhogaṭṭhāne nirāsaṅkassa nisīdato vā nipajjato vā apassayantassa vā satthasamphassapaccayā dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇena pārājikaṃ. Taṃ ce aññopi tassa veribhikkhu vihāracārikaṃ caranto disvā ‘‘imassa maññe maraṇatthāya idaṃ nikhittaṃ, sādhu suṭṭhu maratū’’ti abhinandanto gacchati, dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sopi tattha ‘‘evaṃ kate sukataṃ bhavissatī’’ti tikhiṇatarādikaraṇena kiñci kammaṃ karoti, tassāpi pārājikaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘aṭṭhāne ṭhita’’nti uddharitvā aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti tadatthameva katvā ṭhapite mūlaṭṭho na muccati. Pākatikaṃ labhitvā ṭhapitaṃ hoti, muccati. Taṃ apanetvā aññaṃ tikhiṇataraṃ ṭhapeti mūlaṭṭho muccateva.
在涂毒这件事上,一直到随喜死亡为止都犯恶作,方法也是这样。不过,如果他想“这毒圈太小”,就把它做大;或者觉得“太大了”,就把它做小;或者把薄的涂厚、厚的涂薄;或者用火加热后,把它在下面或上面移动,那也犯波罗夷。如果他认为“这放的位置不对”,就把毒全部刮掉、擦干净,再放到别的地方:如果是他自己配药做的,最初放置的人就不得脱罪;如果不是他自己做的,就得脱罪。不过,如果他觉得“这毒太少了”,又拿来别的毒加进去,众生因为谁的毒而死,谁就犯波罗夷。如果是因为两个人的毒而死,两个人都犯波罗夷。如果他认为“这毒没有毒”,就把那毒拿走,只放自己的毒,那么那个人犯波罗夷,最初放置的人得脱罪。巴利
Visamakkhanepi yāva maraṇābhinandane dukkaṭaṃ tāva eseva nayo. Sace pana sopi khuddakaṃ visamaṇḍalanti sallakkhetvā mahantataraṃ vā karoti , mahantaṃ vā ‘‘atirekaṃ hotī’’ti khuddakaṃ karoti, tanukaṃ vā bahalaṃ; bahalaṃ vā tanukaṃ karoti, agginā tāpetvā heṭṭhā vā upari vā sañcāreti, tassāpi pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ aṭhāne ṭhita’’nti sabbameva tacchetvā puñchitvā aññasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapeti, attanā bhesajjāni yojetvā kate mūlaṭṭho na muccati , attanā akate muccati. Sace pana so ‘‘idaṃ visaṃ atiparitta’’nti aññampi ānetvā pakkhipati, yassa visena marati, tassa pārājikaṃ. Sace ubhinnampi santakena marati, ubhinnampi pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ visaṃ nibbisa’’nti taṃ apanetvā attano visameva ṭhapeti, tasseva pārājikaṃ mūlaṭṭho muccati.
把床或椅子弄得不结实,是指砍断横档下面的部分,或者割断那些用藤条、绳子绑着的部分,只留下一点点,然后在下面放上武器,心想“他掉到这里就会死”。对于靠板之类的木板,乃至经行道旁扶手木板的末端,砍断外侧那一边,在下面放上武器;或者把床、椅子、靠板搬到坑洞等地方放好,让人只要一坐上去或一靠上去就会掉下去;或者坑洞等地方有通行的桥,把它弄得不结实。这样做的时候,在制作过程中犯恶作。对方因此产生痛苦,犯土喇咤亚;如果死了,犯波罗夷。把比丘带到坑洞等的边缘站着,心想“他看到后因恐惧而颤抖,就会掉下去死”,犯恶作。他就在那里掉下去,产生痛苦时犯土喇咤亚,死亡时犯波罗夷。自己推落,或让别人推落,或别人没被指使而自己推落,或非人推落,或被风吹落,或因自身原因掉落,一切情况下,只要导致死亡,都犯波罗夷。为什么?因为是由于他的操作,那人才站在坑洞等的边缘。巴利
Dubbalaṃ vā karotīti mañcapīṭhaṃ aṭaniyā heṭṭhābhāge chinditvā vidalehi vā rajjukehi vā yehi vītaṃ hoti, te vā chinditvā appāvasesameva katvā heṭṭhā āvudhaṃ nikkhipati ‘‘ettha patitvā marissatī’’ti. Apassenaphalakādīnampi caṅkame ālambanarukkhaphalakapariyosānānaṃ parabhāgaṃ chinditvā heṭṭhā āvudhaṃ nikkhipati, sobbhādīsu mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā apassenaphalakaṃ vā ānetvā ṭhapeti, yathā tattha nisinnamatto vā apassitamatto vā patati, sobbhādīsu vā sañcaraṇasetu hoti, taṃ dubbalaṃ karoti; evaṃ karontassa karaṇe dukkaṭaṃ. Itarassa dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Bhikkhuṃ ānetvā sobbhādīnaṃ taṭe ṭhapeti ‘‘disvā bhayena kampento patitvā marissatī’’ti dukkaṭaṃ. So tattheva patati, dukkhuppattiyā thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Sayaṃ vā pāteti, aññena vā pātāpeti, añño avutto vā attano dhammatāya pāteti, amanusso pāteti, vātappahārena patati, attano dhammatāya patatti, sabbattha maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Tassa payogena sobbhāditaṭe ṭhitattā.
所谓“放置”,就是放在近处。这里,如果有人用“用这把刀死掉的人能得到财物”这类说法来赞叹死亡,或者劝人说“想死的就用这个去死,想杀人的就用这个去杀”,然后把刀放在那里,那么他这样做放置时就犯了恶作。如果想死的人用那把刀伤害自己,或者想杀人的人用它伤害别人,这两种情况下,只要对方因此产生痛苦,放置刀的人就犯土喇咤亚;如果导致死亡,就犯波罗夷。如果没有针对特定的人而放置,导致许多人死亡,那就是不善业的累积。在波罗夷等事中,就分别犯波罗夷等罪。如果生起了追悔,把刀放回原来拿取的地方,就得以解脱。如果是买来的刀,应当把刀归还原主,把钱还给那些从他手里收钱的人,这样才得以解脱。如果拿了铁块、犁头或锄头让人打成刀,应当把所拿的那件器具恢复原样,这样才得以解脱。如果拿了锄头让人打成刀,却把锄头毁掉改打成犁头,即使有人被犁头击中而死,他也不能从杀生罪中解脱。但如果是为了专门放置而收集铁让人打造,那就必须用砂石把它磨成粉末,撒散之后才得以解脱。即使像劝死书那样,是由许多人共同发心制作而成,其业缚的判断也应当依照书中所说的方式来理解。这个道理也适用于矛和棍棒。棍棒的判断与套索杖相同。石头也是如此。刀类则与刀相同。至于毒,放置毒的人应当根据事由、是否针对特定人等相应情况,在波罗夷等事中分别犯波罗夷等罪。如果是买来放置的,依照前面的方法恢复原状后就得以解脱。如果是自己用药物调配的,只要使它不再成为毒,就得以解脱。绳索的判断与套索绳相同。巴利
Upanikkhipanaṃ nāma samīpe nikkhipanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yo iminā asinā mato so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇetvā ‘‘iminā maraṇatthikā marantu, māraṇatthikā mārentū’’ti vā vatvā asiṃ upanikkhipati, tassa upanikkhipane dukkaṭaṃ. Maritukāmo vā tena attānaṃ paharatu , māretukāmo vā aññaṃ paharatu, ubhayathāpi parassa dukkhuppattiyā upanikkhepakassa thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Anuddissa nikkhitte bahūnaṃ maraṇe akusalarāsi. Pārājikādivatthūsu pārājikādīni. Vippaṭisāre uppanne asiṃ gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā muccati. Kiṇitvā gahito hoti, asissāmikānaṃ asiṃ, yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahitaṃ, tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccati. Sace lohapiṇḍiṃ vā phālaṃ vā kudālaṃ vā gahetvā asi kārāpito hoti, yaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā kārito, tadeva katvā muccati. Sace kudālaṃ gahetvā kāritaṃ vināsetvā phālaṃ karoti, phālena pahāraṃ labhitvā marantesupi pāṇātipātato na muccati. Sace pana lohaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā upanikkhipanatthameva kārito hoti, arena ghaṃsitvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ katvā vippakiṇṇe muccati. Sacepi saṃvaṇṇanāpotthako viya bahūhi ekajjhāsayehi kato hoti, potthake vuttanayeneva kammabandhavinicchayo veditabbo. Esa nayo sattibheṇḍīsu. Laguḷe pāsayaṭṭhisadiso vinicchayo. Tathā pāsāṇe. Satthe asisadisova. Visaṃ vāti visaṃ upanikkhipantassa vatthuvasena uddissānuddissānurūpato pārājikādivatthūsu pārājikādīni veditabbāni. Kiṇitvā ṭhapite purimanayena paṭipākatikaṃ katvā muccati. Sayaṃ bhesajjehi yojite avisaṃ katvā muccati. Rajjuyā pāsarajjusadisova vinicchayo.
关于药物:如果有个比丘,对怀有敌意的比丘,在他得了热病或者不相宜的病症时,怀着让他死的心思,把酥油之类本来不适宜的东西说成是适宜的而给他,或者给他任何其他的块茎、根、果实等,这样施药就犯恶作。如果对方因此产生痛苦,犯土喇咤亚;如果导致死亡,犯波罗夷。如果所缘的事属于无间业,就应当知道是无间罪。巴利
Bhesajje – yo bhikkhu veribhikkhussa pajjarake vā visabhāgaroge vā uppanne asappāyānipi sappiādīni sappāyānīti maraṇādhippāyo deti, aññaṃ vā kiñci kandamūlaphalaṃ tassa evaṃ bhesajjadāne dukkaṭaṃ. Parassa dukkhuppattiyaṃ maraṇe ca thullaccayapārājikāni, ānantariyavatthumhi ānantariyanti veditabbaṃ.
178 178. 关于施加色相:所谓“施加”,就是把对方不喜欢的色相放到他跟前,或者自己现出夜叉、饿鬼等形象站在那里。只要做了这个施加的动作,就犯恶作。对方看到那个色相后生起恐惧,犯土喇咤亚;如果因此死了,犯波罗夷。但如果那个色相正好让某个人喜欢,而那人因为得不到而憔悴致死,就不犯。对令人喜欢的色相,也是同样的道理。不过在这里特别要说的是:对女人现男人之相,对男人现女人之相,打扮好之后施加,只让对方看一眼,不让对方久看。对方因为得不到而憔悴致死,犯波罗夷;如果是被吓死的,就不犯。但如果不加分别,不管是吓死还是得不到而死,心里只想着“只要让他看见就会死”而施加色相,那么对方无论是被吓死还是憔悴而死,都犯波罗夷。用同样的方法,声的施加等也应该了解。这里只是说:非人的声音等能引起惊恐的,是不令人喜欢的声音;对男人来说,女人的声音、美妙的天乐声等能令心生喜悦的,是令人喜欢的声音。在雪山,毒树的根等气味和尸体的气味是不令人喜欢的气味;黑沉香根等气味是令人喜欢的气味。令人厌恶的根味等是不令人喜欢的味;不令人厌恶的根味等是令人喜欢的味。毒触、大麻风触等是不令人喜欢的触;中国丝绸、天鹅绒、棉花绒等触是令人喜欢的触。应当这样了解。巴利
178. Rūpūpahāre – upasaṃharatīti paraṃ vā amanāparūpaṃ tassa samīpe ṭhapeti, attanā vā yakkhapetādivesaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati, tassa upasaṃhāramatte dukkaṭaṃ. Parassa taṃ rūpaṃ disvā bhayuppattiyaṃ thullaccayaṃ, maraṇe pārājikaṃ. Sace pana tadeva rūpaṃ ekaccassa manāpaṃ hoti, alābhakena ca sussitvā marati, visaṅketo. Manāpiyepi eseva nayo. Tattha pana visesena itthīnaṃ purisarūpaṃ purisānañca itthirūpaṃ manāpaṃ taṃ alaṅkaritvā upasaṃharati, diṭṭhamattakameva karoti, aticiraṃ passitumpi na deti, itaro alābhakena sussitvā marati, pārājikaṃ. Sace uttasitvā marati , visaṅketo. Atha pana uttasitvā vā alābhakena vāti avicāretvā ‘‘kevalaṃ passitvā marissatī’’ti upasaṃharati, uttasitvā vā sussitvā vā mate pārājikameva. Etenevūpāyena saddūpahārādayopi veditabbā. Kevalañhettha amanussasaddādayo utrāsajanakā amanāpasaddā, purisānaṃ itthisaddamadhuragandhabbasaddādayo cittassādakarā manāpasaddā. Himavante visarukkhānaṃ mūlādigandhā kuṇapagandhā ca amanāpagandhā, kāḷānusārīmūlagandhādayo manāpagandhā . Paṭikūlamūlarasādayo amanāparasā, appaṭikūlamūlarasādayo manāparasā. Visaphassamahākacchuphassādayo amanāpaphoṭṭhabbā, cīnapaṭahaṃsapupphatūlikaphassādayo manāpaphoṭṭhabbāti veditabbā.
以法施加:这里的“法”要理解为教法。或者,从教法宣说的角度来看,地狱和天界中受苦与享福的差别,本身就是以法为所缘。所谓“地狱众生”,是指戒行毁坏、造了恶业、应当生到地狱的众生,为他讲说五种捆绑、刑罚等地狱的事。他听了之后恐惧而死,说法者犯波罗夷。但如果他听了之后,因为自身的法性而死,就无犯。如果是为了让他“听了这个之后,就不再造、会远离、会停止这类恶业”而讲说地狱的事,他听了之后恐惧而死,无犯。所谓“天界的事”,是指天女、舞者等以及欢喜园等种种福报的事;他听了之后,心向天界,想赶快得到那些福报,就用绝食、服毒、断食、阻断呼吸等方式让自己受苦,说法者犯偷兰遮;如果死了,犯波罗夷。但如果他听了之后,还是活到寿命尽时,因为自身的法性而死,就无犯。如果是为了让他“听了这个之后,会去修福德”而说,他听了之后心生向往而命终,无犯。巴利
Dhammūpahāre – dhammoti desanādhammo veditabbo. Desanāvasena vā niraye ca sagge ca vipattisampattibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇameva. Nerayikassāti bhinnasaṃvarassa katapāpassa niraye nibbattanārahassa sattassa pañcavidhabandhanakammakaraṇādinirayakathaṃ katheti. Taṃ ce sutvā so uttasitvā marati, kathikassa pārājikaṃ. Sace pana so sutvāpi attano dhammatāya marati, anāpatti. ‘‘Idaṃ sutvā evarūpaṃ pāpaṃ na karissati oramissati viramissatī’’ti nirayakathaṃ katheti, taṃ sutvā itaro uttasitvā marati, anāpatti. Saggakathanti devanāṭakādīnaṃ nandanavanādīnañca sampattikathaṃ; taṃ sutvā itaro saggādhimutto sīghaṃ taṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇitukāmo satthāharaṇavisakhādanaāhārupaccheda-assāsapassāsasannirundhanādīhi dukkhaṃ uppādeti, kathikassa thullaccayaṃ, marati pārājikaṃ. Sace pana so sutvāpi yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā attano dhammatāya marati, anāpatti . ‘‘Imaṃ sutvā puññāni karissatī’’ti katheti, taṃ sutvā itaro adhimutto kālaṃkaroti, anāpatti.
179 179. 关于“告知”——“被问才说”,是指有人这样问:“尊者,人死后怎样才能得到财富,或者投生到天界?”被这样问到时,他才说。巴利
179. Ācikkhanāyaṃ – puṭṭho bhaṇatīti ‘‘bhante kathaṃ mato dhanaṃ vā labhati sagge vā upapajjatī’’ti evaṃ pucchito bhaṇati.
在教导判罚的章节里说“没有被问”:意思是,根本没有被这样问,就自己主动开口说了。巴利
Anusāsaniyaṃ – apuṭṭhoti evaṃ apucchito sāmaññeva bhaṇati.
暗示业和相业,应当依照不与取这一节里已经讲过的方式来了知。巴利
Saṅketakammanimittakammāni adinnādānakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
像这样从各种角度说明了犯戒的类别之后,现在为了说明不犯戒的类别,而说“无犯,非故意”等。其中,“非故意”是指没有怀着“用这个手段我要杀死这个人”的意图。因为像这样没有存心,以所做的事即使导致他人死亡,也无犯,而且将会说“比丘非故意者无犯”。“不知者”是指不知道“用这个手段这个人将会死”,以这样的手段即使导致他人死亡,也无犯,而且将在毒食钵的事例中说“比丘不知者无犯”。“无杀意者”是指不希望对方死。即使以某种手段导致他人死亡,如果他没有杀意,也无犯,而且将会说“比丘无杀意者无犯”。疯狂等情况,和前面所说的一样。但在这里,最初犯戒的是那些互相夺命的比丘,他们无犯。其余赞叹死亡等的人,则有犯。巴利
Evaṃ nānappakārato āpattibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni anāpattibhedaṃ dassento ‘‘anāpatti asañciccā’’tiādimāha. Tattha asañciccāti ‘‘iminā upakkamena imaṃ māremī’’ti acetetvā. Evañhi acetetvā katena upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti, vakkhati ca ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu asañciccā’’ti. Ajānantassāti ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’ti ajānantassa upakkamena pare matepi anāpatti, vakkhati ca visagatapiṇḍapātavatthusmiṃ ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu ajānantassā’’ti. Namaraṇādhippāyassāti maraṇaṃ anicchantassa. Yena hi upakkamena paro marati, tena upakkamena tasmiṃ māritepi namaraṇādhippāyassa anāpatti. Vakkhati ca ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu namaraṇādhippāyassā’’ti. Ummattakādayo pubbe vuttanayā eva. Idha pana ādikammikā aññamaññaṃ jīvitā voropitabhikkhū, tesaṃ anāpatti. Avasesānaṃ maraṇavaṇṇasaṃvaṇṇanakādīnaṃ āpattiyevāti.
关于等起等项:这条学处有三种等起——从身与心、语与心、身语与心而生起。是造作、想解脱、有心、世间罪、身业、语业、不善心、苦受。即使国王登上宝座,正享受着王权之乐,当有人来报“大王,盗贼已捉到”,他笑着说“去,把他杀了”,也应当知道他是以忧俱之心而说的。然而,因为与乐混杂,又不是持续生起,所以凡夫难以了知这一点。巴利
Samuṭṭhānādīsu – idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ; kāyacittato ca vācācittato ca kāyavācācittato ca samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, dukkhavedanaṃ. Sacepi hi sirisayanaṃ ārūḷho rajjasampattisukhaṃ anubhavanto rājā ‘‘coro deva ānīto’’ti vutte ‘‘gacchatha naṃ mārethā’’ti hasamānova bhaṇati, domanassacitteneva bhaṇatīti veditabbo. Sukhavokiṇṇattā pana anuppabandhābhāvā ca dujjānametaṃ puthujjanehīti.
已裁决事例的注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
180 在裁决事例的第一则中,“出于悲悯”是指:那些比丘看到那位比丘遭受重病的巨大痛苦,生起了悲悯,心想:“你具戒,已作善业,为什么临死还害怕呢?具戒者生天,不就是只差一死而已吗?”他们就这样实际上盼着他死,却不知道自己是在盼他死,于是赞叹死亡。那位比丘也因为他们的赞叹而断绝了饮食,中途就命终了。因此他们犯了戒。不过,从世俗表达的角度说,才说他们“出于悲悯而赞叹死亡”。所以,如今有智慧的比丘也不应这样对生病的比丘赞叹死亡。因为如果那病人听了他的赞叹后,以断绝饮食等方法,哪怕寿命只剩一个速行心的刹那,中途死去,就是被这位比丘杀死的。应当按这个道理给予教诫:“具戒者证得道果并不稀奇,所以不要贪著住处等,应当把心念安立在佛、法、僧和身体上,在作意中不放逸。”即使赞叹了死亡,如果对方并没有因为这番赞叹而采取任何行动,只是随自己的法性,随寿命、随业力因缘而死,那么赞叹者不因为这个原因而犯戒。巴利
180. Vinītavatthukathāsu paṭhamavatthusmiṃ – kāruññenāti te bhikkhū tassa mahantaṃ gelaññadukkhaṃ disvā kāruññaṃ uppādetvā ‘‘sīlavā tvaṃ katakusalo, kasmā mīyamāno bhāyasi, nanu sīlavato saggo nāma maraṇamattapaṭibaddhoyevā’’ti evaṃ maraṇatthikāva hutvā maraṇatthikabhāvaṃ ajānantā maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇesuṃ. Sopi bhikkhu tesaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāya āhārupacchedaṃ katvā antarāva kālamakāsi. Tasmā āpattiṃ āpannā. Vohāravasena pana vuttaṃ ‘‘kāruññena maraṇavaṇṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇesu’’nti. Tasmā idānipi paṇḍitena bhikkhunā gilānassa bhikkhuno evaṃ maraṇavaṇṇo na saṃvaṇṇetabbo. Sace hi tassa saṃvaṇṇanaṃ sutvā āhārūpacchedādinā upakkamena ekajavanavārāvasesepi āyusmiṃ antarā kālaṃkaroti, imināva mārito hoti. Iminā pana nayena anusiṭṭhi dātabbā – ‘‘sīlavato nāma anacchariyā maggaphaluppatti, tasmā vihārādīsu āsattiṃ akatvā buddhagataṃ dhammagataṃ saṅghagataṃ kāyagatañca satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā manasikāre appamādo kātabbo’’ti. Maraṇavaṇṇe ca saṃvaṇṇitepi yo tāya saṃvaṇṇanāya kañci upakkamaṃ akatvā attano dhammatāya yathāyunā yathānusandhināva marati, tappaccayā saṃvaṇṇako āpattiyā na kāretabboti.
在第二个事例中,“诸比丘,不应不观察而……”这里,什么样的座位应该观察,什么样的座位不应该观察?如果只是光秃秃的座位,没有铺任何垫子,或者来的人站着亲眼看着时当场铺上的,那就不需要观察,可以坐。如果人们亲手摸过之后说“尊者,请坐这里”,那也可以坐。即使是最先来的人已经坐下,后来的人向上或向下移动,也没有观察的必要。如果用薄布盖着,还能看见座面,那也没有观察的必要。但是,如果事先就用毯子、毛毯等铺好了,那就应该用手摸一摸、确认之后再坐。不过《大护持》中说:“即使是用厚布铺的,如果看不出褶皱,也说不需要观察。”巴利
Dutiyavatthusmiṃ – na ca bhikkhave appaṭivekkhitvāti ettha kīdisaṃ āsanaṃ paṭivekkhitabbaṃ , kīdisaṃ na paṭivekkhitabbaṃ? Yaṃ suddhaṃ āsanameva hoti apaccattharaṇakaṃ, yañca āgantvā ṭhitānaṃ passataṃyeva attharīyati, taṃ napaccavekkhitabbaṃ , nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati. Yampi manussā sayaṃ hatthena akkamitvā ‘‘idha bhante nisīdathā’’ti denti, tasmimpi vaṭṭati. Sacepi paṭhamamevāgantvā nisinnā pacchā uddhaṃ vā adho vā saṅkamanti, paccavekkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Yampi tanukena vatthena yathā talaṃ dissati, evaṃ paṭicchannaṃ hoti, tasmimpi paccavekkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Yaṃ pana paṭikacceva pāvārakojavādīhi atthataṃ hoti, taṃ hatthena parāmasitvā sallakkhetvā nisīditabbaṃ. Mahāpaccariyaṃ pana ‘‘ghanasāṭakenāpi atthate yasmiṃ vali na paññāyati, taṃ nappaṭivekkhitabbanti vuttaṃ.
在木杵的案例中,“非故意”是指没有杀心、行为失误的情况。所以他说:“我是非故意的。”臼杵的案例意思很明白。在老年出家的几个案例中,第一个案例里,他以“不要障碍比丘僧团”为由把他赶走了。第二个案例里,在僧团中或众人中被叫作“长老的儿子”,他因为这句话感到厌烦,心想“让他死吧”,就把他赶走了。第三个案例里,因为让他产生痛苦,犯了土喇咤亚罪。巴利
Musalavatthusmiṃ – asañciccoti avadhakacetano viraddhapayogo hi so. Tenāha ‘‘asañcicco aha’’nti. Udukkhalavatthu uttānameva. Vuḍḍhapabbajitavatthūsupaṭhamavatthusmiṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghassa paṭibandhaṃ mā akāsī’’ti paṇāmesi. Dutiyavatthusmiṃ – saṅghamajjhepi gaṇamajjhepi ‘‘mahallakattherassa putto’’ti vuccamāno tena vacanena aṭṭīyamāno ‘‘maratu aya’’nti paṇāmesi. Tatiyavatthusmiṃ – tassa dukkhuppādanena thullaccayaṃ.
181 181. 接下来的三个案例本身意思很清楚。在掺毒钵食的案例中——那位比丘是修习六和敬法的,他先把最好的食物布施给同梵行者,然后自己才吃。因此说“他布施了首要之物”。“首要之物”就是首要的行为;意思是首先得到的钵食,或者最上等、最精妙的钵食。然而他那种被称为布施的首要行为,其实没办法真正施舍出去,因为他是从长老座开始分发钵食的。那些比丘,就是从长老座开始受用钵食的比丘;据说他们全都命终了。这里其余的内容意思很清楚。而在没有信心、怀有邪见的家庭中,恭敬地得到精妙食物后,如果不加观察,既不该自己吃,也不该给别人。即使从那里得到隔夜的食物或点心,也不该吃。因为那些家庭会把被蛇蝎等爬过、本该丢弃的东西也拿来布施。涂了香料、姜黄等物的钵食也不该接受。他们甚至认为,擦拭过身上患病处后放着的食物也可以布施。巴利
181. Tato parāni tīṇi vatthūni uttānatthāneva. Visagatapiṇḍapātavatthusmiṃ – sārāṇīyadhammapūrako so bhikkhu aggapiṇḍaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvāva bhuñjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aggakārikaṃ adāsī’’ti. Aggakārikanti aggakiriyaṃ; paṭhamaṃ laddhapiṇḍapātaṃ aggaggaṃ vā paṇītapaṇītaṃ piṇḍapātanti attho. Yā pana tassa dānasaṅkhātā aggakiriyā, sā na sakkā dātuṃ, piṇḍapātañhi so therāsanato paṭṭhāya adāsi. Te bhikkhūti te therāsanato paṭṭhāya paribhuttapiṇḍapātā bhikkhū; te kira sabbepi kālamakaṃsu. Sesamettha uttānameva. Assaddhesu pana micchādiṭṭhikesu kulesu sakkaccaṃ paṇītabhojanaṃ labhitvā anupaparikkhitvā neva attanā paribhuñjitabbaṃ, na paresaṃ dātabbaṃ. Yampi ābhidosikaṃ bhattaṃ vā khajjakaṃ vā tato labhati, tampi na paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Apihitavatthumpi hi sappavicchikādīhi adhisayitaṃ chaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ tāni kulāni denti. Gandhahaliddādimakkhitopi tato piṇḍapāto na gahetabbo. Sarīre rogaṭṭhānāni puñchitvā ṭhapitabhattampi hi tāni dātabbaṃ maññantīti.
在检验的案例中,检验的人用两种方式检验:他检验毒药,心想“他能不能杀死这个人?”;或者检验人,心想“这个人吃了这毒药会不会死?”这两种情况下,如果都是出于检验的意图而给的,那么不管对方死了还是没死,都犯土喇咤亚。但如果是以“让这毒药杀死他”或“让这个人吃下这毒药后死掉”这样的意图给的,那么对方死了就犯波罗夷;没死就犯土喇咤亚。巴利
Vīmaṃsanavatthusmiṃ – vīmaṃsamāno dve vīmaṃsati – ‘‘sakkoti nu kho imaṃ māretuṃ no’’ti visaṃ vā vīmaṃsati, ‘‘mareyya nu kho ayaṃ imaṃ visaṃ khāditvā no’’ti puggalaṃ vā. Ubhayathāpi vīmaṃsādhippāyena dinne maratu vā mā vā thullaccayaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ visaṃ etaṃ māretū’’ti vā ‘‘idaṃ visaṃ khāditvā ayaṃ maratū’’ti vā evaṃ dinne pana sace marati, pārājikaṃ; no ce, thullaccayaṃ.
182-3 从这以下,三个石头案例、三个砖头案例、凿子案例和椽子案例,意思都很清楚。而且,犯与不犯的区分不只是依据石头等物来判定,依据棍棒、锤子、利器、织机等物也同样可以判定。因此,律典中虽然没有提到,也应当依照已经说过的道理来理解。巴利
182-3. Ito parāni tīṇi silāvatthūni tīṇi iṭṭhakavāsigopānasīvatthūni ca uttānatthāneva. Na kevalañca silādīnaṃyeva vasena ayaṃ āpattānāpattibhedo hoti, daṇḍamuggaranikhādanavemādīnampi vasena hotiyeva, tasmā pāḷiyaṃ anāgatampi āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
关于架子的案例——“架子”是指高架床,是为了做涂白、花环、藤蔓等装饰工作而搭的。在这里,“贤友,绑在不稳的地方”是指以杀心指定一个位置,从那里掉下去会被树桩刺穿,或者掉进坑穴、悬崖等地方而死。这里,有人指定上面的位置,心想“从这里掉下去会死”;有人指定下面的位置,心想“掉到这里会死”;有人两处都指定,心想“从这里掉到这里会死”。其中,如果那人没有从上面指定的地方掉下去,而是从别处掉下去;或者没有掉到下面指定的地方,而是掉到别处;或者在两处都指定的情况下,错过了其中任何一处而掉下去——那人死了的话,因为杀心不成立,所以无犯。覆盖精舍的案例也是同样的道理。巴利
Aṭṭakavatthūsu – aṭṭakoti vehāsamañco vuccati; yaṃ setakammamālākammalatākammādīnaṃ atthāya bandhanti. Tattha āvuso atraṭṭhito bandhāhīti maraṇādhippāyo yatra ṭhito patitvā khāṇunā vā bhijjeyya, sobbhapapātādīsu vā mareyya , tādisaṃ ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha. Ettha ca koci upariṭhānaṃ niyāmeti ‘‘ito patitvā marissatī’’ti, koci heṭṭhā ṭhānaṃ ‘‘idha patitvā marissatī’’ti, koci ubhayampi ‘‘ito idha patitvā marissatī’’ti. Tatra yo upari niyamitaṭṭhānā apatitvā aññato patati, heṭṭhā niyamitaṭṭhāne vā apatitvā aññattha patati, ubhayaniyāme vā yaṃkiñci ekaṃ virādhetvā patati, tasmiṃ mate visaṅketattā anāpatti. Vihāracchādanavatthusmimpi eseva nayo.
关于不乐住的案例:据说那位比丘看到欲寻等念头生起,却没办法制止,于是对教法生不起欢喜,心里倾向于过在家生活。他随后想:“我宁可死,也不愿破戒。”于是他爬上那座山,跳下悬崖时,压死了一个编竹器的工匠。“编竹器的工匠”就是做竹器的人。诸比丘,不应自己跳下去——意思是说,不应让自己坠落。这里是换了一种格的变化来说的。在这里,不仅不应自己跳下去,也不该用其他任何方式自杀,甚至断食而死也不行。如果有病的人,明明有药、也有看护的人,却因为想死而断食,那也是恶作。如果有人得了重病,拖了很久,照顾他的比丘们又累又厌烦,心想“什么时候才能摆脱这个病人啊”,因此感到苦恼。如果他心想“这个身体再怎么照料也撑不住,比丘们也已经累了”,于是断食、不吃药,这是可以的。如果有人心想“这个病很凶,寿命行撑不住了,而我的殊胜证悟看起来已经近在手边”,因此断食,也是可以的。即使没有病,如果生起了悚惧心,心想“到处找食物就是障碍,我要专心修业处”,以修业处为理由而断食,也是可以的。但如果在宣称自己已得殊胜证悟之后断食,那就不可以。因为这种事只能对同类的、有惭耻心的比丘们说。巴利
Anabhirativatthusmiṃ – so kira bhikkhu kāmavitakkādīnaṃ samudācāraṃ disvā nivāretuṃ asakkonto sāsane anabhirato gihibhāvābhimukho jāto. Tato cintesi – ‘‘yāva sīlabhedaṃ na pāpuṇāmi tāva marissāmī’’ti. Atha taṃ pabbataṃ abhiruhitvā papāte papatanto aññataraṃ vilīvakāraṃ ottharitvā māresi. Vilīvakāranti veṇukāraṃ. Na ca bhikkhave attānaṃ pātetabbanti na attā pātetabbo. Vibhattibyattayena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca na kevalaṃ na pātetabbaṃ, aññenapi yena kenaci upakkamena antamaso āhārupacchedenapi na māretabbo. Yopi hi gilāno vijjamāne bhesajje ca upaṭṭhākesu ca maritukāmo āhāraṃ upacchindati, dukkaṭameva. Yassa pana mahāābādho cirānubaddho, bhikkhū upaṭṭhahantā kilamanti jigucchanti ‘‘kadā nu kho gilānato muccissāmā’’ti aṭṭīyanti. Sace so ‘‘ayaṃ attabhāvo paṭijaggiyamānopi na tiṭṭhati, bhikkhū ca kilamantī’’ti āhāraṃ upacchindati, bhesajjaṃ na sevati vaṭṭati. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ rogo kharo, āyusaṅkhārā na tiṭṭhanti, ayañca me visesādhigamo hatthappatto viya dissatī’’ti upacchindati vaṭṭatiyeva. Agilānassāpi uppannasaṃvegassa ‘‘āhārapariyesanaṃ nāma papañco, kammaṭṭhānameva anuyuñjissāmī’’ti kammaṭṭhānasīsena upacchindantassa vaṭṭati. Visesādhigamaṃ byākaritvā āhāraṃ upacchindati, na vaṭṭati. Sabhāgānañhi lajjībhikkhūnaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.
关于石头的事例:“为嬉戏”是指带着嬉笑、带着玩乐,意思就是玩耍。“石头”就是石块。不只是石块,任何木块或砖块,都不应该用手或器械投掷。如果是为了建造塔庙等目的,在劳作时嬉笑着滚动、投掷或抛掷石头等,是允许的。同样,做其他这类新工作时,或者清洗物品时,举起木头或洗衣棒投掷,也是允许的。在分发食物等时候,投掷木棍或土块赶走乌鸦或狗,也是允许的。巴利
Silāvatthusmiṃ – davāyāti davena hassena; khiḍḍāyāti attho. Silāti pāsāṇo; na kevalañca pāsāṇo, aññampi yaṃkiñci dārukhaṇḍaṃ vā iṭṭhakākhaṇḍaṃ vā hatthena vā yantena vā pavijjhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Cetiyādīnaṃ atthāya pāsāṇādayo hasantā hasantā pavaṭṭentipi khipantipi ukkhipantipi kammasamayoti vaṭṭati. Aññampi īdisaṃ navakammaṃ vā karontā bhaṇḍakaṃ vā dhovantā rukkhaṃ vā dhovanadaṇḍakaṃ vā ukkhipitvā pavijjhanti, vaṭṭati. Bhattavissaggakālādīsu kāke vā soṇe vā kaṭṭhaṃ vā kathalaṃ vā khipitvā palāpeti, vaṭṭati.
184 关于出汗等事的案例,含义都很清楚。而在这里,“我是追悔者”并不是说不用照顾病人,而是应当怀着想利益他的心,先全面观察病人的体力强弱、喜好、适宜与不适宜,然后再去照顾。巴利
184.Sedanādivatthūni sabbāneva uttānatthāni. Ettha ca ahaṃ kukkuccakoti na gilānupaṭṭhānaṃ na kātabbaṃ, hitakāmatāya sabbaṃ gilānassa balābalañca ruciñca sappāyāsappāyañca upalakkhetvā kātabbaṃ.
185 185. 关于“与怀孕的妇人有关的情形”——“丈夫已外出”是指丈夫去了远方。“令胎堕落”是指服用之后会使胎儿堕落的那种药。两个关于有夫之妇的情形,含义本身就很清楚。关于“压碎胎儿”的情形——当有人说“你压碎后让她堕胎”时,如果是由别人压碎而让她堕胎,则不算偏离约定。当有人说“你让别人压碎后让她堕胎”时,如果是她自己压碎而让她堕胎,同样算偏离约定。对于人的身体,所谓“间接方式”是不存在的。因此,当有人说“胎儿被压碎后就会堕落”时,无论是她自己压碎,还是让别人压碎后使其堕落,都不算偏离约定;一样是波罗夷罪。在“烧灼”的情形中,道理也是如此。巴利
185. Jāragabbhinivatthusmiṃ – pavutthapatikāti pavāsaṃ gatapatikā. Gabbhapātananti yena paribhuttena gabbho patati, tādisaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Dve pajāpatikavatthūni uttānatthāneva. Gabbhamaddanavatthusmiṃ – ‘‘madditvā pātehī’’ti vutte aññena maddāpetvā pāteti, visaṅketaṃ. ‘‘Maddāpetvā pātāpehī’’ti vuttepi sayaṃ madditvā pāteti, visaṅketameva. Manussaviggahe pariyāyo nāma natthi. Tasmā ‘‘gabbho nāma maddite patatī’’ti vutte sā sayaṃ vā maddatu, aññena vā maddāpetvā pātetu, visaṅketo natthi; pārājikameva tāpanavatthusmimpi eseva nayo.
关于不孕女的情形:所谓“不孕女”,是指怀不上胎的妇女。其实并不存在绝对怀不上胎的妇女,只是有的妇女即使怀上了胎,胎儿也留不住,这里说的正是这种情况。据说在经期,所有妇女都能怀胎。而被称为“不孕”的这位,她腹中所生的众生是不善业的果报现前。那些以微弱的善业结生的众生,被不善业的果报所压制而死去。因为在刚结生的时候,由于业力的作用,胎儿会以两种方式留不住——要么是风,要么是虫。风把胎儿吹干,让它消失;虫则把胎儿吃掉。如果针对这风或虫配药治疗,胎儿本可以留得住;但那位比丘没有这样做,反而给了别的粗劣药物,结果她就死了。世尊因为药被用错,制定了恶作罪。巴利
Vañjhitthivatthusmiṃ – vañjhitthī nāma yā gabbhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Gabbhaṃ agaṇhanakaitthī nāma natthi, yassā pana gahitopi gabbho na saṇṭhāti, taṃyeva sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Utusamaye kira sabbitthiyo gabbhaṃ gaṇhanti. Yā panāyaṃ ‘‘vañjhā’’ti vuccati, tassā kucchiyaṃ nibbattasattānaṃ akusalavipāko sampāpuṇāti. Te parittakusalavipākena gahitapaṭisandhikā akusalavipākena adhibhūtā vinassanti. Abhinavapaṭisandhiyaṃyeva hi kammānubhāvena dvīhākārehi gabbho na saṇṭhāti – vātena vā pāṇakehi vā. Vāto sosetvā antaradhāpeti, pāṇakā khāditvā. Tassa pana vātassa pāṇakānaṃ vā paṭighātāya bhesajje kate gabbho saṇṭhaheyya; so bhikkhu taṃ akatvā aññaṃ kharabhesajjaṃ adāsi. Tena sā kālamakāsi. Bhagavā bhesajjassa kaṭattā dukkaṭaṃ paññāpesi.
第二个事例也是同样的道理。因此,对来来去去的外来人不应该配药;如果配了,就犯恶作罪。但对五种同法者则应该配药,也就是对比丘、比丘尼、正学女、沙弥、沙弥尼。因为这些人戒行相等、信心相等、智慧相等,都在三学上用功,不能不给他们配药。配药时,如果他们有物品,就取他们的物品调配好再给;如果没有,就用自己的物品来配。如果自己也没有,就通过乞食的行仪,或者从亲属邀请的地方去寻求。如果实在得不到,为了病人的缘故,即使没有事先请求,也应该拿来配药。巴利
Dutiyavatthusmimpi eseva nayo. Tasmā āgatāgatassa parajanassa bhesajjaṃ na kātabbaṃ, karonto dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Pañcannaṃ pana sahadhammikānaṃ kātabbaṃ bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā sikkhamānāya sāmaṇerassa sāmaṇeriyāti. Samasīlasaddhāpaññānañhi etesaṃ tīsu sikkhāsu yuttānaṃ bhesajjaṃ akātuṃ na labbhati, karontena ca sace tesaṃ atthi, tesaṃ santakaṃ gahetvā yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace natthi, attano santakaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace attanopi natthi, bhikkhācāravattena vā ñātakapavāritaṭṭhānato vā pariyesitabbaṃ. Alabhantena gilānassa atthāya akataviññattiyāpi āharitvā kātabbaṃ.
还有另外五种人,也可以为他们配药:母亲、父亲、照顾他们的人、为自己做事的人,以及“黄叶者”。所谓“黄叶者”,是指想出家、正在准备衣钵期间住在寺院里的人。在这五种人当中,如果父母有权势,而且并不指望(得到药物),那就可以不给他们配;但如果他们即使身居王位也仍然指望得到,那就不能不配。对于指望得到药物的人,应当给药物;对于不知道怎么调配的人,应当调配好了再给。为了一切人的利益去寻求药物时,应当依照前面讲同法者时所说的办法去做。如果把母亲接到寺院里来照顾,那么所有服侍都应当以不直接触碰的方式来做;嚼食和啖食应当亲手递给她。父亲则应当像对待沙弥一样,亲手为他沐浴、按摩等来侍奉。那些照顾、看护父母的人,也应当同样对待。所谓“做事的人”,是指拿了工钱,在林中砍柴,或者做其他活计的人。他生病时,在他的亲属还没来看他之前,应当为他配药。如果有人完全依止比丘,做一切事务,那就必须为他配药。对于黄叶者,也应当像对待沙弥一样来对待。巴利
Aparesampi pañcannaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati – mātu, pitu, tadupaṭṭhākānaṃ, attano veyyāvaccakarassa, paṇḍupalāsassāti. Paṇḍupalāso nāma yo pabbajjāpekkho yāva pattacīvaraṃ paṭiyādiyati tāva vihāre vasati. Tesu sace mātāpitaro issarā honti, na paccāsīsanti, akātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sace pana rajjepi ṭhitā paccāsīsanti, akātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Bhesajjaṃ paccāsīsantānaṃ bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ, yojetuṃ ajānantānaṃ yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sabbesaṃ atthāya sahadhammikesu vuttanayeneva pariyesitabbaṃ. Sace pana mātaraṃ vihāre ānetvā jaggati, sabbaṃ parikammaṃ anāmasantena kātabbaṃ. Khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ sahatthā dātabbaṃ. Pitā pana yathā sāmaṇero evaṃ sahatthena nhāpanasambāhanādīni katvā upaṭṭhātabbo. Ye ca mātāpitaro upaṭṭhahanti paṭijagganti, tesampi evameva kātabbaṃ. Veyyāvaccakaro nāma yo vetanaṃ gahetvā araññe dārūni vā chindati, aññaṃ vā kiñci kammaṃ karoti, tassa roge uppanne yāva ñātakā na passanti tāva bhesajjaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yo pana bhikkhunissitakova hutvā sabbakammāni karoti, tassa bhesajjaṃ kātabbameva. Paṇḍupalāsepi sāmaṇere viya paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
还有另外十种人,也可以为他们配药:哥哥、弟弟、姐姐、妹妹、姨母、舅母、叔父、伯父、姑母、舅父。给所有这些亲属配药时,应当取用他们自己的药,只是调配好再给。如果他们自己的药不够,而且他们请求说“尊者,请先给我们,我们会还给您的”,那就可以暂时给。即使他们不请求,也可以说“我们有药,请先拿去用”,或者心里想“等他们有了就会还”,然后给。如果他们归还,就收下;如果不还,也不应去催。除了这十种亲属以外,不可为其他人配药。巴利
Aparesampi dasannaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati – jeṭṭhabhātu, kaniṭṭhabhātu, jeṭṭhabhaginiyā, kaniṭṭhabhaginiyā, cūḷamātuyā, mahāmātuyā, cūḷapituno, mahāpituno, pitucchāya, mātulassāti. Tesaṃ pana sabbesampi karontena tesaṃyeva santakaṃ bhesajjaṃ gahetvā kevalaṃ yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace pana nappahonti, yācanti ca ‘‘detha no, bhante, tumhākaṃ paṭidassāmā’’ti tāvakālikaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sacepi na yācanti, ‘‘amhākaṃ bhesajjaṃ atthi, tāvakālikaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vatvā vā ‘‘yadā nesaṃ bhavissati tadā dassantī’’ti ābhogaṃ vā katvā dātabbaṃ. Sace paṭidenti, gahetabbaṃ, no ce denti, na codetabbā. Ete dasa ñātake ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ na kātabbaṃ.
对于这些人的子孙后代,一直到第七代的家族范围之内,让他们拿来四种资具,或者没有受请就为他们配药,或者做医生的活,都不犯污家罪。如果嫂子或妹夫生病,是亲戚的话,也可以为他们做。不是亲戚的话,就当作兄弟和姐妹的那一份来给,说“请交给你们照顾的人”。或者当作他们子女的那一份来给,说“请带给你们的父母”。用这个方法,在一切情况下都应该这样判定。巴利
Etesaṃ puttaparamparāya pana yāva sattamo kulaparivaṭṭo tāva cattāro paccaye āharāpentassa akataviññatti vā bhesajjaṃ karontassa vejjakammaṃ vā kuladūsakāpatti vā na hoti. Sace bhātujāyā bhaginisāmiko vā gilānā honti, ñātakā ce, tesampi vaṭṭati. Aññātakā ce, bhātu ca bhaginiyā ca katvā dātabbaṃ, ‘‘tumhākaṃ jagganaṭṭhāne dethā’’ti. Atha vā tesaṃ puttānaṃ katvā dātabbaṃ, ‘‘tumhākaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dethā’’ti. Etenupāyena sabbapadesupi vinicchayo veditabbo.
为了他们,如果让沙弥从林子里采药送来,就应该让亲属沙弥或(自己的)沙弥去采。如果是为了自己,采来之后也应该给他们。他们自己也应该以“为戒师采药”的职责去采。戒师的父母生病来到精舍,而戒师又去了别的地方,共住弟子就应该把属于戒师的药给他。如果没有,就应该把自己的药让给戒师。如果自己也没有,就按前面说的方式去找来,做成属于戒师的(药)再给。戒师对共住弟子的父母也应该同样对待。这个原则也适用于老师和弟子之间。另外,如果有客人、盗贼、战败者、被亲属抛弃的贵人、穷人或者乡下人,生病后进入精舍,对所有这些人都应该毫无期待地给他们配药。巴利
Tesaṃ atthāya ca sāmaṇerehi araññato bhesajjaṃ āharāpentena ñātisāmaṇerehi vā āharāpetabbaṃ. Attano atthāya vā āharāpetvā dātabbaṃ. Tehipi ‘‘upajjhāyassa āharāmā’’ti vattasīsena āharitabbaṃ. Upajjhāyassa mātāpitaro gilānā vihāraṃ āgacchanti, upajjhāyo ca disāpakkanto hoti, saddhivihārikena upajjhāyassa santakaṃ bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ. No ce atthi, attano bhesajjaṃ upajjhāyassa pariccajitvā dātabbaṃ. Attanopi asante vuttanayena pariyesitvā upajjhāyassa santakaṃ katvā dātabbaṃ. Upajjhāyenapi saddhivihārikassa mātāpitūsu evameva paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Esa nayo ācariyantevāsikesupi. Aññopi yo āgantuko vā coro vā yuddhaparājito issaro vā ñātakehi pariccatto kapaṇo vā gamiyamanusso vā gilāno hutvā vihāraṃ pavisati, sabbesaṃ apaccāsīsantena bhesajjaṃ kātabbaṃ.
有信心的家族会用四种资具护持比丘僧团,像父母一样对待他们。如果那里有人生病了,他们出于信任说:“尊者,请配好药给我们吧。”这时既不该给,也不该配。但如果他们懂得如法的方式后这样问:“尊者,对于某某病,他们是用什么药配制的?”就可以回答说:“他们拿这些和那些药材来配制。”可要是他们问:“尊者,我母亲病了,请先告诉我药方。”那就不该告诉。不过,比丘之间可以互相交谈:“贤友,对于某某比丘的这种病,他们用了什么药?”“尊者,用了这些和那些药材。”另一个人听了之后,为自己母亲配药,这是允许的。巴利
Saddhaṃ kulaṃ hoti catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhāyakaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa mātāpituṭṭhāniyaṃ, tatra ce koci gilāno hoti, tassatthāya vissāsena ‘‘bhesajjaṃ katvā bhante dethā’’ti vadanti, neva dātabbaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Atha pana kappiyaṃ ñatvā evaṃ pucchanti – ‘‘bhante, asukassa nāma rogassa kiṃ bhesajjaṃ karontī’’ti? ‘‘Idañcidañca gahetvā karontī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bhante, mayhaṃ mātā gilānā, bhesajjaṃ tāva ācikkhathā’’ti evaṃ pucchite pana na ācikkhitabbaṃ. Aññamaññaṃ pana kathā kātabbā – ‘‘āvuso, asukassa nāma bhikkhuno imasmiṃ roge kiṃ bhesajjaṃ kariṃsū’’ti? ‘‘Idañcidañca bhante’’ti. Taṃ sutvā itaro mātu bhesajjaṃ karoti, vaṭṭateva.
听说大莲华长老的事是这样的:瓦萨巴国王的王后生了病,有个女人来问长老,长老没有说“我不知道”,而是同样跟比丘们商量了一番。她听了之后,他们就为她配了药。病好了以后,她把装满药的药箱,连同三衣和三百个迦诃波那,一起带来放在长老脚前,说:“尊者,请做花供养吧。”长老说:“这叫做师长应得的那一份。”就以如法的方式让人收下,然后做了花供养。对药物的处理,就应当这样去做。巴利
Mahāpadumattheropi kira vasabharañño deviyā roge uppanne ekāya itthiyā āgantvā pucchito ‘‘na jānāmī’’ti avatvā evameva bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samullapesi. Taṃ sutvā tassā bhesajjamakaṃsu. Vūpasante ca roge ticīvarena tīhi ca kahāpaṇasatehi saddhiṃ bhesajjacaṅkoṭakaṃ pūretvā āharitvā therassa pādamūle ṭhapetvā ‘‘bhante, pupphapūjaṃ karothā’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero ‘‘ācariyabhāgo nāmāya’’nti kappiyavasena gāhāpetvā pupphapūjaṃ akāsi. Evaṃ tāva bhesajje paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
有人请求说“尊者,请为病人诵护卫经”时,不应该诵;但如果对方说“请诵”,就可以诵。如果比丘心想“人们不懂,要是不诵,他们会后悔”,那就可以诵。如果有人说“请把护卫水和护卫线做好后给我”,那就应该只为他们搅动水、用手擦拭线,然后交给他们。如果比丘把寺院的水或自己的线送给他们,就犯恶作。人们拿来水和线,坐下后说“请诵护卫经”,就可以诵。如果他们不懂,应该告诉他们。比丘们坐着时,人们把水倒在比丘脚上,放好线后就走开,说“请作护卫,请诵护卫经”,这时不应该把脚移开。因为人们会因此后悔。如果村里有人为了病人派人到寺院,说“请诵护卫经”,就应该诵。如果村里王宫等处发生疾病或灾难,被请去诵,就应该诵《阿咤那胝经》等经。如果被请“请来为病人授戒、说法”,或者“请来王宫或大臣家中授戒、说法”,也应该去授戒、说法。如果被请“请来为亡者围绕”,不应该去。但若以修行为由,心想“我去看尸陀林、看不净,可以获得死随念”,那就可以去。对护卫经,应该这样奉行。巴利
Paritte pana ‘‘gilānassa parittaṃ karotha, bhante’’ti vutte na kātabbaṃ, ‘‘bhaṇathā’’ti vutte pana kātabbaṃ. Sace pissa evaṃ hoti ‘‘manussā nāma na jānanti, akayiramāne vippaṭisārino bhavissantī’’ti kātabbaṃ; ‘‘parittodakaṃ parittasuttaṃ katvā dethā’’ti vuttena pana tesaṃyeva udakaṃ hatthena cāletvā suttaṃ parimajjetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace vihārato udakaṃ attano santakaṃ vā suttaṃ deti, dukkaṭaṃ. Manussā udakañca suttañca gahetvā nisīditvā ‘‘parittaṃ bhaṇathā’’ti vadanti, kātabbaṃ. No ce jānanti, ācikkhitabbaṃ. Bhikkhūnaṃ nisinnānaṃ pādesu udakaṃ ākiritvā suttañca ṭhapetvā gacchanti ‘‘parittaṃ karotha, parittaṃ bhaṇathā’’ti na pādā apanetabbā. Manussā hi vippaṭisārino honti. Antogāme gilānassatthāya vihāraṃ pesenti, ‘‘parittaṃ bhaṇantū’’ti bhaṇitabbaṃ. Antogāme rājagehādīsu roge vā upaddave vā uppanne pakkosāpetvā bhaṇāpenti, āṭānāṭiyasuttādīni bhaṇitabbāni. ‘‘Āgantvā gilānassa sikkhāpadāni dentu, dhammaṃ kathentu. Rājantepure vā amaccagehe vā āgantvā sikkhāpadāni dentu, dhammaṃ kathentū’’ti pesitepi gantvā sikkhāpadāni dātabbāni, dhammo kathetabbo. ‘‘Matānaṃ parivāratthaṃ āgacchantū’’ti pakkosanti, na gantabbaṃ. Sīvathikadassane asubhadassane ca maraṇassatiṃ paṭilabhissāmīti kammaṭṭhānasīsena gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ paritte paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
关于团食:没有触碰过的团食,该给谁、不该给谁?首先应该给父母。即使它值一个钱币,也不会败坏信施。也该给照顾父母的人、为父母做事的人,以及“黄叶者”。其中,对黄叶者,即使放进钵里给他也可以。除了这些人以外,对其他在家人,即使是父母,也不可以给。因为出家人所受用的东西,对在家人来说,就像塔物一样。另外,所谓没有触碰过的团食,即使对来到跟前的强盗或权贵,也应该给。为什么?因为不给的话,他们会碰触食物说“他们不给”;给的话,他们又会生气说“他们给的是剩饭”。他们一旦发怒,甚至会杀人性命,也会给教法制造障碍。这里还应讲一个故事:有个盗龙想求王位而四处游走。对团食应当这样处理。巴利
Piṇḍapāte pana – anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāto kassa dātabbo, kassa na dātabbo? Mātāpitunaṃ tāva dātabbo. Sacepi kahāpaṇagghanako hoti, saddhādeyyavinipātanaṃ natthi. Mātāpituupaṭṭhākānaṃ veyyāvaccakarassa paṇḍupalāsassāti etesampi dātabbo. Tattha paṇḍupalāsassa thālake pakkhipitvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ āgārikānaṃ mātāpitunampi na vaṭṭati. Pabbajitaparibhogo hi āgārikānaṃ cetiyaṭṭhāniyo. Apica anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāto nāmesa sampattassa dāmarikacorassāpi issarassāpi dātabbo. Kasmā? Te hi adīyamānepi ‘‘na dentī’’ti āmasitvā dīyamānepi ‘‘ucchiṭṭhakaṃ dentī’’ti kujjhanti. Kuddhā jīvitāpi voropenti, sāsanassāpi antarāyaṃ karonti. Rajjaṃ patthayamānassa vicarato coranāgassa vatthu cettha kathetabbaṃ. Evaṃ piṇḍapāte paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
那么,接待应该对谁做,不应该对谁做?所谓接待,就是无论对来到精舍的任何人——不管是新来的客人、穷人、盗贼还是有权势的人——都应该做。怎么做呢?比如,看到一位花光了路费的新来者到了精舍,就应该给他水喝,给他涂脚用的油。如果他是合适的时间来的,就给他粥和饭;如果是在不合适的时间来的,要是有米,就给他米。他来得不是时候,也不该说“你走吧”。应该给他住的地方。做这一切都不应该期待回报。不应该生起这样的念头:“人们是四种资具的施主,这样善待他们,他们就会一次次生起信心,然后来帮忙。”对盗贼,即使是属于僧团的东西,也应该给。巴利
Paṭisanthāro pana kassa kātabbo, kassa na kātabbo? Paṭisanthāro nāma vihāraṃ sampattassa yassa kassaci āgantukassa vā daliddassa vā corassa vā issarassa vā kātabboyeva. Kathaṃ? Āgantukaṃ tāva khīṇaparibbayaṃ vihāraṃ sampattaṃ disvā pānīyaṃ dātabbaṃ, pādamakkhanatelaṃ dātabbaṃ. Kāle āgatassa yāgubhattaṃ, vikāle āgatassa sace taṇḍulā atthi; taṇḍulā dātabbā. Avelāyaṃ sampatto ‘‘gacchāhī’’ti na vattabbo. Sayanaṭṭhānaṃ dātabbaṃ. Sabbaṃ apaccāsīsanteneva kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Manussā nāma catupaccayadāyakā evaṃ saṅgahe kayiramāne punappunaṃ pasīditvā upakāraṃ karissantī’’ti cittaṃ na uppādetabbaṃ. Corānaṃ pana saṅghikampi dātabbaṃ.
为了说明接待的功德利益,像贼王奈迦的故事、和兄弟一起前往阎浮提的摩诃奈迦王的例子、父王在位时四位大臣的事例、无畏盗贼的故事等,许多这样的例子在《大义注》中都有详细讲述。巴利
Paṭisanthārānisaṃsadīpanatthañca coranāgavatthu, bhātarā saddhiṃ jambudīpagatassa mahānāgarañño vatthu, piturājassa rajje catunnaṃ amaccānaṃ vatthu, abhayacoravatthūti evamādīni bahūni vatthūni mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vitthārato vuttāni.
这里讲一个故事来说明。据说在斯里兰卡岛,有个叫无畏的盗贼,带着五百个手下,在一个地方扎了营,把周围三由旬的地方都清空了,住在那里。阿努拉德普勒的居民不敢渡过卡丹巴河,通往支提山的路上行人都断绝了。有一天,那个盗贼说:“我要去抢劫支提山。”就出发了。寺里的工人看见了,就去报告长部诵者无畏长老。长老问:“有酥油、糖蜜之类的东西吗?”回答说:“有的,尊者。”“那就给盗贼们吧。有米吗?”“有的,尊者,有给僧团带来的米、叶菜和牛乳。”“那就做好饭给盗贼们吧。”寺里的工人就照办了。盗贼们吃完饭,问:“这招待是谁做的?”回答说:“是我们的师父无畏长老做的。”盗贼们就来到长老面前,顶礼之后说:“我们本来是来抢僧团和支提山财物的,但被您这样的招待感动了,生起了信心。从今天起,寺院的如法守护就交给我们负责,请市民们来布施,来礼敬支提山吧。”从那时起,市民们来布施的时候,盗贼们就在河边迎接,一路护送到寺院,在寺院里布施的时候也站在旁边守护。市民们还把比丘们吃剩的食物给盗贼们吃。离开的时候,那些盗贼也把他们送到河边才回去。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ekavatthudīpanā – sīhaḷadīpe kira abhayo nāma coro pañcasataparivāro ekasmiṃ ṭhāne khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā samantā tiyojanaṃ ubbāsetvā vasati. Anurādhapuravāsino kadambanadiṃ na uttaranti, cetiyagirimagge janasañcāro upacchinno. Athekadivasaṃ coro ‘‘cetiyagiriṃ vilumpissāmī’’ti agamāsi. Ārāmikā disvā dīghabhāṇakaabhayattherassa ārocesuṃ. Thero ‘‘sappiphāṇitādīni atthī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Atthi, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Corānaṃ detha, taṇḍulā atthī’’ti? ‘‘Atthi, bhante, saṅghassatthāya āhaṭā taṇḍulā ca pattasākañca goraso cā’’ti. ‘‘Bhattaṃ sampādetvā corānaṃ dethā’’ti. Ārāmikā tathā kariṃsu. Corā bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā ‘‘kenāyaṃ paṭisanthāro kato’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ayyena abhayattherenā’’ti. Corā therassa santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘mayaṃ saṅghassa ca cetiyassa ca santakaṃ acchinditvā gahessāmāti āgatā, tumhākaṃ pana iminā paṭisanthārenamha pasannā, ajja paṭṭhāya vihāre dhammikā rakkhā amhākaṃ āyattā hotu, nāgarā āgantvā dānaṃ dentu, cetiyaṃ vandantū’’ti. Tato paṭṭhāya ca nāgare dānaṃ dātuṃ āgacchante nadītīreyeva paccuggantvā rakkhantā vihāraṃ nenti, vihārepi dānaṃ dentānaṃ rakkhaṃ katvā tiṭṭhanti. Tepi bhikkhūnaṃ bhuttāvasesaṃ corānaṃ denti. Gamanakālepi te corā nadītīraṃ pāpetvā nivattanti.
有一天,比丘僧团里生起了讥嫌的议论:“这位长老仗着自己的权势,把僧团的东西给了盗贼。”长老便让人召集集会,说道:“盗贼们本来是来抢夺僧团日常用品和塔寺财物的。当时我为了让他们不拿走,就对他们做了这样的招待。你们把所有这些合在一起估个价吧,把因为这件事而没被抢走的物品也合在一起估个价。”结果,长老拿出来的全部东西加起来,还抵不上塔寺里一张上好的彩绘布毯。于是他们说:“长老做的招待做得好,既没法指责,也没法追究,既不是侵占,也不是偷盗。”有智慧的比丘应当明白招待有这样大的利益,然后去做招待。巴利
Athekadivasaṃ bhikkhusaṅghe khīyanakakathā uppannā ‘‘thero issaravatāya saṅghassa santakaṃ corānaṃ adāsī’’ti. Thero sannipātaṃ kārāpetvā āha – ‘‘corā saṅghassa pakativaṭṭañca cetiyasantakañca acchinditvā gaṇhissāmā’’ti āgamiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ mayā evaṃ na harissantīti ettako nāma paṭisanthāro kato, taṃ sabbampi ekato sampiṇḍetvā agghāpetha. Tena kāraṇena aviluttaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ekato sampiṇḍetvā agghāpethāti. Tato sabbampi therena dinnakaṃ cetiyaghare ekaṃ varapotthakacittattharaṇaṃ na agghati. Tato āhaṃsu – ‘‘therena katapaṭisanthāro sukato codetuṃ vā sāretuṃ vā na labbhā, gīvā vā avahāro vā natthī’’ti. Evaṃ mahānisaṃso paṭisanthāroti sallakkhetvā kattabbo paṇḍitena bhikkhunāti.
187 187. 在指弹水这件事中——“uttanto”的意思是疲惫。“anassāsako”的意思是没有喘息。不过在这件事里,应当犯的是什么罪,已经在“小罪”部分说明了,所以这里没有说。巴利
187. Aṅgulipatodakavatthusmiṃ – uttantoti kilamanto. Anassāsakoti nirassāso. Imasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ yāya āpattiyā bhavitabbaṃ sā ‘‘khuddakesu nidiṭṭhā’’ti idha na vuttā.
紧接着的这件事里,“ottharitvā”是踩上去的意思。据说他被那些人拉扯时倒了下去。有一个人爬上他的肚子坐了下来。其余十五个人把他按在地上,像用大石头压死野兽一样把他弄死了。不过,因为那些人的目的是折磨他,不是想杀他,所以没有说这是波罗夷罪。巴利
Tadanantare vatthusmiṃ – ottharitvāti akkamitvā. So kira tehi ākaḍḍhiyamāno patito. Eko tassa udaraṃ abhiruhitvā nisīdi. Sesāpi pannarasa janā pathaviyaṃ ajjhottharitvā adūhalapāsāṇā viya migaṃ māresuṃ. Yasmā pana te kammādhippāyā, na maraṇādhippāyā; tasmā pārājikaṃ na vuttaṃ.
在“鬼医事件”这一段里——“杀了夜叉”:那些念鬼咒的人想解救被夜叉附身的人,就召请夜叉,说“放开!”如果夜叉不放,他们就用面粉或泥土做成一个人形,砍断它的手脚等部位。那个形象上哪个部位被砍断,夜叉身上相应的部位就被砍断。如果头被砍断,夜叉也会死。这样,他们也就杀了夜叉,所以说是土喇咤亚罪。而且不只是夜叉,即使有人杀了帝释天王,也同样犯土喇咤亚罪。巴利
Bhūtavejjakavatthusmiṃ – yakkhaṃ māresīti bhūtavijjākapāṭhakā yakkhagahitaṃ mocetukāmā yakkhaṃ āvāhetvā muñcāti vadanti. No ce muñcati, piṭṭhena vā mattikāya vā rūpaṃ katvā hatthapādādīni chindanti, yaṃ yaṃ tassa chijjati taṃ taṃ yakkhassa chinnameva hoti. Sīse chinne yakkhopi marati . Evaṃ sopi māresi; tasmā thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Na kevalañca yakkhameva, yopi hi sakkaṃ devarājaṃ māreyya, sopi thullaccayameva āpajjati.
在“凶暴夜叉住处”这件事里,“凶暴夜叉住处”就是指有凶恶暴虐的夜叉住在那里的精舍。如果有人不知道那是这样的精舍,只是为了住宿而派比丘去,那就无犯。如果有人是带着杀意派他去,那么对方死了就犯波罗夷,没死就犯土喇咤亚。就像凶暴夜叉住处一样,凡是那里住着凶暴的狮子、老虎等野兽,或者蟒蛇、黑蛇等长身动物,派比丘去那种凶险住处,也应当知道有罪和无犯的区分。这是律藏义理的方法。就像派比丘去凶暴夜叉住处一样,把凶暴夜叉派到比丘跟前,也应当知道有罪和无犯的区分。同样的道理也适用于凶暴旷野等事。这里只是词义上的差别:某个旷野里有凶暴野兽或长身动物,那就是凶暴旷野;有盗贼的,那就是盗贼旷野。而“人体波罗夷”这一条本身很微细,不能靠间接说法来脱罪。所以,如果有人这样说:“在某个地方有盗贼坐在那里,谁能砍下他的头带来,国王就会给他特别的赏赐。”有人听了这话,就去杀了那人,那个派他去的人就是波罗夷。巴利
Vāḷayakkhavatthusmiṃ – vāḷayakkhavihāranti yasmiṃ vihāre vāḷo caṇḍo yakkho vasati, taṃ vihāraṃ. Yo hi evarūpaṃ vihāraṃ ajānanto kevalaṃ vasanatthāya peseti, anāpatti. Yo maraṇādhippāyo peseti, so itarassa maraṇena pārājikaṃ, amaraṇena thullaccayaṃ āpajjati. Yathā ca vāḷayakkhavihāraṃ; evaṃ yattha vāḷasīhabyagghādimigā vā ajagarakaṇhasappādayo dīghajātikā vā vasanti, taṃ vāḷavihāraṃ pesentassāpi āpattānāpattibhedo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pāḷimuttakanayo. Yathā ca bhikkhuṃ vāḷayakkhavihāraṃ pesentassa; evaṃ vāḷayakkhampi bhikkhusantikaṃ pesentassa āpattānāpattibhedo veditabbo. Eseva nayo vāḷakantārādivatthūsupi. Kevalañhettha yasmiṃ kantāre vāḷamigā vā dīghajātikā vā atthi, so vāḷakantāro. Yasmiṃ corā atthi, so corakantāroti evaṃ padatthamattameva nānaṃ. Manussaviggahapārājikañca nāmetaṃ saṇhaṃ, pariyāyakathāya na muccati; tasmā yo vadeyya ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma okāse coro nisinno , yo tassa sīsaṃ chinditvā āharati, so rājato sakkāravisesaṃ labhatī’’ti. Tassa cetaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā koci naṃ gantvā māreti, ayaṃ pārājiko hotīti.
188 “以为是那个人”等句里说的是这样:那位比丘想杀掉跟自己有仇的比丘,心里盘算:“白天杀他,我恐怕不容易平安脱身,还是夜里动手吧。”这样打定主意后,到了夜里,他来到众人睡觉的地方,以为那就是仇人,结果杀死的正是仇人本人。另一个比丘以为是仇人,却杀错了别人;还有一个比丘以为杀的是仇人的同伴,结果杀的却是仇人本人;又有一个比丘以为杀的是别人,结果杀的正是那个同伴本人。这些全都犯波罗夷。巴利
188.Taṃ maññamānoti ādīsu so kira bhikkhu attano veribhikkhuṃ māretukāmo cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ me divā mārentassa na sukaraṃ bhaveyya sotthinā gantuṃ, rattiṃ naṃ māressāmī’’ti sallakkhetvā rattiṃ āgamma bahūnaṃ sayitaṭṭhāne taṃ maññamāno tameva jīvitā voropesi. Aparo taṃ maññamāno aññaṃ, aparo aññaṃ tasseva sahāyaṃ maññamāno taṃ, aparo aññaṃ tasseva sahāyaṃ maññamāno aññaṃ tassa sahāyameva jīvitā voropesi. Sabbesampi pārājikameva.
在非人附身的案例中,第一个案例里,有人心想“我要把夜叉赶走”,就动手打被附身的人;被附身的那个人心想“这人没法保证不打偏,我要打死他”。在这里,对于没有杀人意图的情况,说是无犯。但不能仅仅因为这样就该去打被非人附身的人,而应该把棕榈叶或护卫经带绑在他手上或脚上,诵念《宝经》等护卫经,并且应当说法:“不要骚扰持戒的比丘。”关于天界论等部分,含义浅显易懂。这里该说的,前面已经说过了。巴利
Amanussagahitavatthūsu paṭhame vatthusmiṃ ‘‘yakkhaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti pahāraṃ adāsi, itaro ‘‘na dānāyaṃ virajjhituṃ samattho, māressāmi na’’nti . Ettha ca namaraṇādhippāyassa anāpatti vuttāti. Na ettakeneva amanussagahitassa pahāro dātabbo, tālapaṇṇaṃ pana parittasuttaṃ vā hatthe vā pāde vā bandhitabbaṃ, ratanasuttādīni parittāni bhaṇitabbāni, ‘‘mā sīlavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ viheṭhehī’’ti dhammakathā kātabbāti. Saggakathādīni uttānatthāni. Yañhettha vattabbaṃ taṃ vuttameva.
189 砍树这件事,和前面“被绑缚”那件事的处理方式相同。但这里有一个差别:如果有人被树压住,虽然还没死,也能从一侧把树砍断或把地挖开而脱身,手里也有刀或斧头,他也宁可舍弃性命,不可以去砍树或挖地。为什么?因为这样做就犯了波逸提,违犯了佛陀的教令,不算是在守护尽形寿的戒。所以,宁可舍弃性命,也要守住“不犯戒”这个原则,不可以那样做。不过,由别的比丘砍树或挖地把他救出来,是可以的。如果必须用臼车把树推转才能救出来,大苏摩长老说:“可以砍那棵树,取来臼。”大莲华长老说:“砍别的树取来用,也可以。”对于掉进坑洞等情况,绑梯子把人救上来,道理也一样。自己不可以砍伐草木来做梯子,别人做好后拿来救人,是可以的。巴利
189.Rukkhacchedanavatthu aṭṭabandhanavatthusadisaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yo rukkhena otthatopi na marati , sakkā ca hoti ekena passena rukkhaṃ chetvā pathaviṃ vā khanitvā nikkhamituṃ, hatthe cassa vāsi vā kuṭhārī vā atthi, tena api jīvitaṃ pariccajitabbaṃ, na ca rukkho vā chinditabbo, na pathavī vā khaṇitabbā. Kasmā? Evaṃ karonto hi pācittiyaṃ āpajjati, buddhassa āṇaṃ bhañjati, na jīvitapariyantaṃ sīlaṃ karoti. Tasmā api jīvitaṃ pariccajitabbaṃ, na ca sīlanti pariggahetvā na evaṃ kātabbaṃ. Aññassa pana bhikkhuno rukkhaṃ vā chinditvā pathaviṃ vā khanitvā taṃ nīharituṃ vaṭṭati. Sace udukkhalayantakena rukkhaṃ pavaṭṭetvā nīharitabbo hoti, taṃyeva rukkhaṃ chinditvā udukkhalaṃ gahetabbanti mahāsumatthero āha. Aññampi chinditvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti mahāpadumatthero. Sobbhādīsu patitassāpi nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā uttāraṇe eseva nayo. Attanā bhūtagāmaṃ chinditvā nisseṇī na kātabbā, aññesaṃ katvā uddharituṃ vaṭṭatīti.
190 190. 在焚烧丛林这件事中——“焚烧丛林”是指在树林里放火。这里,按照指定和未指定两种情况,应当依照波罗夷、无间罪、土喇咤亚、波逸提等罪各自对应的事相,来了知波罗夷等不善业聚,方法和前面所说的一样。如果心里想“让青草、树木、灌木丛等烧掉”而放火,犯波逸提。如果心里想“让资具坏灭”而放火,犯恶作。即使只是出于嬉戏的意图,也犯恶作——这是《简要注》中说的。如果心里想“不管青的干的、有根的没根的,统统烧掉”而放火,就应当按事相分别了知波罗夷、土喇咤亚、波逸提、恶作等罪。巴利
190. Dāyālimpanavatthūsu – dāyaṃ ālimpesunti vane aggiṃ adaṃsu. Ettha pana uddissānuddissavasena pārājikānantariyathullaccayapācittivatthūnaṃ anurūpato pārājikādīni akusalarāsibhāvo ca pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. ‘‘Allatiṇavanappagumbādayo ḍayhantū’’ti ālimpentassa ca pācittiyaṃ. ‘‘Dabbūpakaraṇāni vinassantū’’ti ālimpentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Khiḍḍādhippāyenāpi dukkaṭanti saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃkiñci allasukkhaṃ saindriyānindriyaṃ ḍayhatū’’ti ālimpentassa vatthuvasena pārājikathullaccayapācittiyadukkaṭāni veditabbāni.
不过,世尊允许放逆火和做防火隔离。所以,在树林里看到樵夫放的火或自己烧起来的火蔓延过来时,如果心想“别让草屋被烧毁”,就可以对那火放逆火,让蔓延过来的火和逆火汇合到一起,因为没有燃料而熄灭。也可以做防护措施,比如在草屋周围铲掉地表草皮或挖沟,让烧过来的火得不到燃料而熄灭。这一切都只应该在火已经烧起来的时候做。如果火还没烧起来,就由未受具足戒的人以合乎戒律的方式来做。如果用水灭火,只能浇没有虫的水。巴利
Paṭaggidānaṃ pana parittakaraṇañca bhagavatā anuññātaṃ, tasmā araññe vanakammikehi vā dinnaṃ sayaṃ vā uṭṭhitaṃ aggiṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘tiṇakuṭiyo mā vinassantū’’ti tassa aggino paṭiaggiṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭati, yena saddhiṃ āgacchanto aggi ekato hutvā nirupādāno nibbāti. Parittampi kātuṃ vaṭṭati tiṇakuṭikānaṃ samantā bhūmitacchanaṃ parikhākhaṇanaṃ vā, yathā āgato aggi upādānaṃ alabhitvā nibbāti. Etañca sabbaṃ uṭṭhiteyeva aggismiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Anuṭṭhite anupasampannehi kappiyavohārena kāretabbaṃ. Udakena pana nibbāpentehi appāṇakameva udakaṃ āsiñcitabbaṃ.
191 在“杀人处”这一节里:就像说“打一次”时那样,说“打两次”等说法时,也应当知道同样构成波罗夷。若说“打两次”,即使只打一次就杀死了,因为已经落入所限定的范围内,仍然犯波罗夷;但若打三次才杀死,就超出界限了。这样,在限定之内或在界限范围内,就没有超出界限;一旦超出限定,一切情况都算超出界限,这时下命令的人无罪,责任只在杀者身上。就像打的数量一样,对人也是如此:若说“杀一个人”,只杀一人就犯波罗夷,杀两人就超出界限。若说“杀两个人”,无论杀一人还是两人都犯波罗夷,杀三人就超出界限——应当这样理解。比如有人在战场上用剑砍断了一个奔跑者的头,那无头的身躯还在跑,另一个人又打了他,使他倒下,问:谁犯波罗夷?半数长老说:“是让那身躯停下来的人。”阿毗达摩论师瞿达多长老说:“是砍头的人。”像这一类事例,在说明这一条义理时也应当提到。巴利
191.Āghātanavatthusmiṃ – yathā ekappahāravacane; evaṃ ‘‘dvīhi pahārehī’’ti ādivacanesupi pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Dvīhī’’ti vutte ca ekena pahārena māritepi khettameva otiṇṇattā pārājikaṃ, tīhi mārite pana visaṅketaṃ. Iti yathāparicchede vā paricchedabbhantare vā avisaṅketaṃ, paricchedātikkame pana sabbattha visaṅketaṃ hoti, āṇāpako muccati, vadhakasseva doso. Yathā ca pahāresu; evaṃ purisesupi ‘‘eko māretū’’ti vutte ekeneva mārite pārājikaṃ, dvīhi mārite visaṅketaṃ. ‘‘Dve mārentū’’ti vutte ekena vā dvīhi vā mārite pārājikaṃ, tīhi mārite visaṅketanti veditabbaṃ. Eko saṅgāme vegena dhāvato purisassa sīsaṃ asinā chindati, asīsakaṃ kabandhaṃ dhāvati, tamañño paharitvā pātesi, kassa pārājikanti vutte upaḍḍhā therā ‘‘gamanūpacchedakassā’’ti āhaṃsu. Ābhidhammikagodattatthero ‘‘sīsacchedakassā’’ti. Evarūpānipi vatthūni imassa vatthussa atthadīpane vattabbānīti.
192 在酪浆这件事上:如果没有限定,只说“给他喝酪浆”,那么不管给他喝了哪种酪浆,只要人死了,就犯波罗夷。如果作了限定,说“牛酪浆、水牛酪浆、山羊酪浆”,或者说“冷的、热的、熏过的、没熏过的”,那么给他喝所说的那种以外的酪浆,把人弄死了,就属于超出限定范围。巴利
192.Takkavatthusmiṃ – aniyametvā ‘‘takkaṃ pāyethā’’ti vutte yaṃ vā taṃ vā takkaṃ pāyetvā mārite pārājikaṃ. Niyametvā pana ‘‘gotakkaṃ mahiṃsatakkaṃ ajikātakka’’nti vā, ‘‘sītaṃ uṇhaṃ dhūpitaṃ adhūpita’’nti vā vutte yaṃ vuttaṃ, tato aññaṃ pāyetvā mārite visaṅketaṃ.
在盐醋药这件事上:所谓盐醋药,是一种用各种味道调配成的药。据说制作它的时候,把诃子、余甘子、毗醯勒的煎汁,各种谷物,各种蔬菜,七种谷物的饭,芭蕉果等各类果实,白藤、露兜树、枣椰笋等各类笋,鱼和肉块,以及多种蜂蜜、糖浆、岩盐、辛辣香料等药材放进去,涂封瓮口,放置一年、两年或三年,等它完全熟成后,颜色就像阎浮果汁一样。对于风病、咳嗽、麻风、黄疸、痔疮等病,以及吃了油腻食物之后,作为饭后饮料和帮助消化的药,没有别的药能比得上它。这种药,比丘在饭后也可以服用;生病的人可以照常饮用,没病的人则要掺水后当饮料喝。巴利
Loṇasovīrakavatthusmiṃ– loṇasovīrakaṃ nāma sabbarasābhisaṅkhataṃ ekaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Taṃ kira karontā harītakāmalakavibhītakakasāve sabbadhaññāni sabbaaparaṇṇāni sattannampi dhaññānaṃ odanaṃ kadaliphalādīni sabbaphalāni vettaketakakhajjūrikaḷīrādayo sabbakaḷīre macchamaṃsakhaṇḍāni anekāni ca madhuphāṇitasindhavaloṇanikaṭukādīni bhesajjāni pakkhipitvā kumbhimukhaṃ limpitvā ekaṃ vā dve vā tīṇi vā saṃvaccharāni ṭhapenti, taṃ paripaccitvā jamburasavaṇṇaṃ hoti. Vātakāsakuṭṭhapaṇḍubhagandarādīnaṃ siniddhabhojanaṃ bhuttānañca uttarapānaṃ bhattajīraṇakabhesajjaṃ tādisaṃ natthi. Taṃ panetaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pacchābhattampi vaṭṭati, gilānānaṃ pākatikameva, agilānānaṃ pana udakasambhinnaṃ pānaparibhogenāti.
第四波罗夷巴利
4. Catutthapārājikaṃ
通达四谛的导师,他所宣说的第四项,
现在该讲到他犯波罗夷罪的注释顺序了。
因此,凡是先前已经宣说过的,就应当容易了知。
除了它之外,这个注释也是针对它的。巴利
Catusaccavidū satthā, catutthaṃ yaṃ pakāsayi; Pārājikaṃ tassa dāni, patto saṃvaṇṇanākkamo. Yasmā tasmā suviññeyyaṃ, yaṃ pubbe ca pakāsitaṃ; Taṃ vajjayitvā assāpi, hoti saṃvaṇṇanā ayaṃ.
瓦古穆达河岸比丘故事的注释巴利
Vaggumudātīriyabhikkhuvatthuvaṇṇanā
193 当时,世尊住在毗舍离……(中略)……“我们操办在家人的事务”,意思是:我们替在家人决定田地和园林等地方该做的事;“应该这样做,不应该那样做”,我们这样告诉他们并教导他们。所谓“使者之事”,就是做信使的工作。所谓“上人法”,是指超越凡人的法;意思是超越凡人、能导向梵天或涅槃的法。也可以指超越凡人的最胜之人、禅修者和圣者的法。关于“某位比丘”等话,要这样理解:他们自己先这样商量好,后来对在家人说时,就用名字来称赞,比如说“名叫佛护的比丘证得了初禅,名叫法护的证得了二禅”。其中,“朋友,只有这个才更好”:操办事务和传递信使,树敌多、牵扯大,也不适合沙门身份。相比之下,这两者之中,只有我们向在家人互相称赞上人法,才是更好、更值得称赞、更美好的。这话说的是什么呢?不论他们调整好姿势坐着还是经行,不论在家人问还是不问,以“这位名叫某某的比丘证得了初禅”这样的方式,我们之间互相称赞上人法,那才是更好的。不过,因为没有未来时的关联,当时他并不是那样说的,所以接不上;因此要建立未来时的关联,这里的含义应理解为:“将来若有人这样称赞,那才是更好的。”至于词形特征,则要从语法学中去查考。巴利
193.Tena samayena buddho bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharati…pe… gihīnaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhemāti gihīnaṃ khettesu ceva ārāmādīsu ca kattabbakiccaṃ adhiṭṭhāma; ‘‘evaṃ kātabbaṃ, evaṃ na kātabba’’nti ācikkhāma ceva anusāsāma cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dūteyyanti dūtakammaṃ. Uttarimanussadhammassāti manusse uttiṇṇadhammassa; manusse atikkamitvā brahmattaṃ vā nibbānaṃ vā pāpanakadhammassāti attho. Uttarimanussānaṃ vā seṭṭhapurisānaṃ jhāyīnañca ariyānañca dhammassa. Asuko bhikkhūtiādīsu attanā evaṃ mantayitvā pacchā gihīnaṃ bhāsantā ‘‘buddharakkhito nāma bhikkhu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī, dhammarakkhito dutiyassā’’ti evaṃ nāmavaseneva vaṇṇaṃ bhāsiṃsūti veditabbo. Tattha esoyeva kho āvuso seyyoti kammantādhiṭṭhānaṃ dūteyyaharaṇañca bahusapattaṃ mahāsamārambhaṃ na ca samaṇasāruppaṃ. Tato pana ubhayatopi eso eva seyyo pāsaṃsataro sundarataro yo amhākaṃ gihīnaṃ aññamaññassa uttarimanussadhammassa vaṇṇo bhāsito. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Iriyāpathaṃ saṇṭhapetvā nisinnaṃ vā caṅkamantaṃ vā pucchantānaṃ vā apucchantānaṃ vā gihīnaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ asuko nāma bhikkhu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī’’ti evamādinā nayena yo amhākaṃ aññena aññassa uttarimanussadhammassa vaṇṇo bhāsito bhavissati, eso eva seyyoti. Anāgatasambandhe pana asati na etehi so tasmiṃ khaṇe bhāsitova yasmā na yujjati, tasmā anāgatasambandhaṃ katvā ‘‘yo evaṃ bhāsito bhavissati, so eva seyyo’’ti evamettha attho veditabbo. Lakkhaṇaṃ pana saddasatthato pariyesitabbaṃ.
194 他们容貌庄严,是因为他们身上出现了一种前所未有的、崭新的身体色泽,凭着这种色泽,他们才显得容貌庄严。诸根饱满,是因为五种净色所依之处圆满,眼等五根加上意根这六根都没有萎靡不振,所以诸根饱满。面貌清净,是说虽然总体上容貌庄严,但他们的面部色泽比身体色泽更加清净明朗;意思是清澈、无浊、完全洁净。肤色极净,是说他们凭着像大迦尼迦花那样的色泽而容貌庄严,其他人虽然也有类似的色泽,但肤色却不像他们这样明净透亮,因此说肤色极净。就这样,这些比丘既不专心诵习,也不专心问法,也不专心修习业处。他们靠着欺诈和虚赞不实的功德,得到殊胜的食物,吃饱之后,随心所欲地沉溺于睡眠之乐和聚会之乐,于是获得了这样的身体光泽,就像那些愚痴、如同迷鹿一般的人一样。巴利
194.Vaṇṇavā ahesunti aññoyeva nesaṃ abhinavo sarīravaṇṇo uppajji, tena vaṇṇena vaṇṇavanto ahesuṃ. Pīṇindriyāti pañcahi pasādehi abhiniviṭṭhokāsassa paripuṇṇattā manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ amilātabhāvena pīṇindriyā. Pasannamukhavaṇṇāti kiñcāpi avisesena vaṇṇavanto sarīravaṇṇato pana nesaṃ mukhavaṇṇo adhikataraṃ pasanno; accho anāvilo parisuddhoti attho. Vippasannachavivaṇṇāti yena ca te mahākaṇikārapupphādisadisena vaṇṇena vaṇṇavanto, tādiso aññesampi manussānaṃ vaṇṇo atthi. Yathā pana imesaṃ; evaṃ na tesaṃ chavivaṇṇo vippasanno. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vippasannachavivaṇṇā’’ti. Itiha te bhikkhū neva uddesaṃ na paripucchaṃ na kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjantā. Atha kho kuhakatāya abhūtaguṇasaṃvaṇṇanāya laddhāni paṇītabhojanāni bhuñjitvā yathāsukhaṃ niddārāmataṃ saṅgaṇikārāmatañca anuyuñjantā imaṃ sarīrasobhaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, yathā taṃ bālā bhantamigappaṭibhāgāti.
“瓦古穆达河岸的”是指住在瓦古穆达河岸边的人。诸比丘,是否堪忍?意思是:诸比丘,你们这具有四轮、九门的身体机器,是否堪忍、能忍受、能维持、能保养,而不生起任何痛苦?是否可维持?意思是:在一切事务中,是否都能维持下去、过得去,而不出现任何障碍?腹部像被割开一样,意思是:腹部像被割开那样难受;读作“parikatto(被割开)”也说得通。世尊在瓦古穆达河岸用种种方式这样呵责之后,因为他们的所作所为就是盗贼的行为,所以为了让将来其他人也不造作这类行为,于是世尊召唤诸比丘。巴利
Vaggumudātīriyāti vaggumudātīravāsino. Kacci bhikkhave khamanīyanti bhikkhave kacci tumhākaṃ idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ khamanīyaṃ sakkā khamituṃ sahituṃ pariharituṃ na kiñci dukkhaṃ uppādetīti. Kacci yāpanīyanti kacci sabbakiccesu yāpetuṃ gametuṃ sakkā, na kiñci antarāyaṃ dassetīti. Kucchi parikantoti kucchi parikantito varaṃ bhaveyya; ‘‘parikatto’’tipi pāṭho yujjati. Evaṃ vaggumudātīriye anekapariyāyena vigarahitvā idāni yasmā tehi katakammaṃ corakammaṃ hoti, tasmā āyatiṃ aññesampi evarūpassa kammassa akaraṇatthaṃ atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi.
195 世尊召唤比丘们之后,又说:“比丘们,有五种大盗……”等等。其中,“存在、可得”是说:既有,也能被找到。“在此”是指:在这众生世间里。“他这样想”是指:在前期阶段生起这样的欲求。“我什么时候才能……”里的“su”是虚词,意思是“什么时候”。“他后来”是指:他在前期这样思量后,逐渐扩大徒众,做拦路抢劫、劫掠边远村落等事,等到徒众壮大之后,就在有村落的地方弄到没有村落,在有乡镇的地方弄到没有乡镇,杀人、叫人杀,砍人、叫人砍,煮人、叫人煮。巴利
195. Āmantetvā ca pana ‘‘pañcime bhikkhave mahācorā’’tiādimāha. Tattha santo saṃvijjamānāti atthi ceva upalabbhanti cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Evaṃ hotīti evaṃ pubbabhāge icchā uppajjati. Kudāssu nāmāhanti ettha suiti nipāto; kudā nāmāti attho. So aparena samayenāti so pubbabhāge evaṃ cintetvā anukkamena parisaṃ vaḍḍhento panthadūhanakammaṃ paccantimagāmavilopanti evamādīni katvā vepullappattapariso hutvā gāmepi agāme, janapadepi ajanapade karonto hananto ghātento chindanto chedāpento pacanto pācento.
世尊这样指出外在的大盗之后,为了在教法中说明与之相似的五种大盗,才说了“正是如此”等话。其中,“恶比丘”:在其他地方,指断了善根、犯了波罗夷的人,称为“恶比丘”。但在这里,指的是虽然没有犯波罗夷,却安住在邪求之中,践踏种种小小戒而四处游走的人,这才叫“恶比丘”。他也像那个外在的大盗一样,在前期就这样想:“我什么时候才能……(中略)……资具。”其中,“被恭敬”是指得到了恭敬;“被尊重”是指得到了尊重;“被喜爱”是指为人心所喜爱;“被供养”是指以四资具供奉而得供养;“被礼敬”是指受人礼敬对待。巴利
Iti bāhirakamahācoraṃ dassetvā tena sadise sāsane pañca mahācore dassetuṃ ‘‘evameva kho’’tiādimāha. Tattha pāpabhikkhunoti aññesu ṭhānesu mūlacchinno pārājikappatto ‘‘pāpabhikkhū’’ti vuccati. Idha pana pārājikaṃ anāpanno icchācāre ṭhito khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni madditvā vicaranto ‘‘pāpabhikkhū’’ti adhippeto. Tassāpi bāhirakacorassa viya pubbabhāge evaṃ hoti – ‘‘kudāssu nāmāhaṃ…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti. Tattha sakkatoti sakkārappatto. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti manasā piyāyito. Pūjitoti catupaccayābhihārapūjāya pūjito. Apacitoti apacitippatto. Tattha yassa cattāro paccaye sakkaritvā suṭṭhu abhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte katvā denti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupetvā denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti, so mānito. Yassa sabbampetaṃ karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Imassa ca pana sabbampi imaṃ lokāmisaṃ patthayamānassa evaṃ hoti.
他在后来的时候——也就是在初期这样盘算之后——逐渐把那些对学处极度轻慢、掉举、傲慢、浮躁、多嘴、散乱言谈、失念、不正知、不守护根门、被戒师和依止师抛弃、看重利养的恶比丘聚集起来,教他们威仪安立之类的诡诈手段,然后说:“这位长老在某处住所入雨安居,圆满履行了义务,雨安居结束后才出来。”他借助世间公认的住所赞叹等手段,让那些有能力使世人成熟、熟悉本生等典籍、声音优美的恶比丘来称赞他的功德,于是被一百人或一千人围绕……乃至得到医药资具。诸比丘,这就是第一大盗。应当知道,他不像那些破门断锁的盗贼那样只偷一家或两家,而是欺骗大众,因为获取四种资具的缘故,所以称为“第一大盗”。而那些持经、持论或持律的比丘,在乞食不顺利时,通过教授经教、讲解注释、以随喜说法和威仪圆满让世人生起信心,在各地游行,受到尊敬、尊重、推崇、供养、礼遇,应当知道他们是“传承法脉者、令教法光耀者”。巴利
So aparena samayenāti so pubbabhāge evaṃ cintetvā anukkamena sikkhāya atibbagārave uddhate unnaḷe capale mukhare vikiṇṇavāce muṭṭhassatī asampajāne pākatindriye ācariyupajjhāyehi pariccattake lābhagaruke pāpabhikkhū saṅgaṇhitvā iriyāpathasaṇṭhapanādīni kuhakavattāni sikkhāpetvā ‘‘ayaṃ thero asukasmiṃ nāma senāsane vassaṃ upagamma vattapaṭipattiṃ pūrayamāno vassaṃ vasitvā niggato’’ti lokasammatasenāsanasaṃvaṇṇanādīhi upāyehi lokaṃ paripācetuṃ paṭibalehi jātakādīsu kataparicayehi sarasampannehi pāpabhikkhūhi saṃvaṇṇiyamānaguṇo hutvā satena vā sahassena vā parivuto…pe… bhesajjaparikkhārānaṃ. Ayaṃ bhikkhave paṭhamo mahācoroti ayaṃ sandhicchedādicorako viya na ekaṃ kulaṃ na dve, atha kho mahājanaṃ vañcetvā catupaccayagahaṇato ‘‘paṭhamo mahācoro’’ti veditabbo. Ye pana suttantikā vā ābhidhammikā vā vinayadharā vā bhikkhū bhikkhācāre asampajjamāne pāḷiṃ vācentā aṭṭhakathaṃ kathentā anumodanāya dhammakathāya iriyāpathasampattiyā ca lokaṃ pasādentā janapadacārikaṃ caranti sakkatā garukatā mānitā pūjitā apacitā, te ‘‘tantipaveṇighaṭanakā sāsanajotakā’’ti veditabbā.
“如来所宣说”,是指如来所亲证、亲自体证,或者让人知道的内容。“认为是自己的”,是说在大众当中,把经教和义注对照起来,用甜美的声音讲说能让人生起净信的经文,以说法的方式,被惊叹稀有的智者问道:“尊者啊,经教和义注真是极为清净,您是从谁那里学来的?”他却说:“谁能教像我这样的人?”不指出老师,反而宣称是自己亲证、由自然智所证得的法与律。这就是如来历经百千大劫再加四不可数劫,圆满波罗蜜,以艰难困苦所证得的法义,而他却盗为己有,是第二大盗。巴利
Tathāgatappaveditanti tathāgatena paṭividdhaṃ paccakkhakataṃ jānāpitaṃ vā. Attano dahatīti parisamajjhe pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca saṃsanditvā madhurena sarena pasādanīyaṃ suttantaṃ kathetvā dhammakathāvasena acchariyabbhutajātena viññūjanena ‘‘aho, bhante, pāḷi ca aṭṭhakathā ca suparisuddhā, kassa santike uggaṇhitthā’’ti pucchito ‘‘ko amhādise uggahāpetuṃ samattho’’ti ācariyaṃ anuddisitvā attanā paṭividdhaṃ sayambhuñāṇādhigataṃ dhammavinayaṃ pavedeti. Ayaṃ tathāgatena satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri asaṅkheyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā kicchena kasirena paṭividdhadhammatthenako dutiyo mahācoro.
“清净的梵行者”是指漏尽比丘。“行持清净梵行”是指行持没有杂染的最胜之行;或者也可以指从阿那含开始,一直到具戒凡夫,以无悔等为基础而修持清净梵行的人。“以毫无根据的非梵行来毁谤”是指用这个人身上根本不存在的非梵行来指责他、呵斥他。这是掩盖他人真实功德的人,因为想盗取圣者功德,所以是第三大盗。巴利
Suddhaṃ brahmacārinti khīṇāsavabhikkhuṃ. Parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantanti nirupakkilesaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ carantaṃ; aññampi vā anāgāmiṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva sīlavantaṃ puthujjanaṃ avippaṭisārādivatthukaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantaṃ. Amūlakena abrahmacariyena anuddhaṃsetīti tasmiṃ puggale avijjamānena antimavatthunā anuvadati codeti; ayaṃ vijjamānaguṇamakkhī ariyaguṇatthenako tatiyo mahācoro.
这里说的“重物、重资具”是这样的:在讲到不与取的那段律文里,“四个人一起商量好,去偷重物”这里,价值五个摩沙迦的东西被称为“重物”,但本段不是这个意思。本段是说,依据“比丘们,有这五种东西是不可舍弃的,僧团、团体或个人都不应舍弃。即使舍弃了,也仍然算没有舍弃。谁要是舍弃,就犯偷兰遮。是哪五种呢?僧园、僧园地……直到木器、陶器”这段话来判定,因为它们不可舍弃,所以叫重物。又依据“比丘们,有这五种东西是不可分配的,僧团、团体或个人都不应分配。即使分配了,也仍然算没有分配。谁要是分配,就犯偷兰遮。是哪五种呢?僧园、僧园地……直到木器、陶器”这段话,因为它们不可分配,属于共有资具的性质,所以叫重资具。关于僧园、僧园地等应该怎么说明,这些我们会在《犍度》中“比丘们,有这五种东西是不可舍弃的”这段经的注释里一并讲。
“用这些来摄受居士”,就是一次又一次地把这些给在家人,以此来拉拢、照顾在家人。“令亲近”,就是让他们变成这样赞叹“哎呀,我们的尊者”的人,跟随着、亲近着,生出感情来。这个人把不可舍弃、不可分配的重资具,以偷盗的心态取来用,借此摄受在家人,这就是第四种大盗。而且,这个人如果为了拉拢俗家而把这些重物送出去,就犯污家恶作,还应该受到驱摈羯磨。如果他是仗着自己的势力压过僧团而送出去,就犯偷兰遮。如果是以偷盗心送出去,那就要先估量物品的价值,再据此治罪。巴利
Garubhaṇḍāni garuparikkhārānīti yathā adinnādāne ‘‘caturo janā saṃvidhāya garubhaṇḍaṃ avāharu’’nti (pari. 479) ettha pañcamāsakagghanakaṃ ‘‘garubhaṇḍa’’nti vuccati, idha pana na evaṃ. Atha kho ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, avissajjiyāni na vissajjetabbāni saṅghena vā gaṇena vā puggalena vā. Vissajjitānipi avissajjitāni honti. Yo vissajjeyya, āpatti thullaccayassa. Katamāni pañca? Ārāmo, ārāmavatthu…pe… dārubhaṇḍaṃ, mattikābhaṇḍa’’nti vacanato avissajjitabbattā garubhaṇḍāni. ‘‘Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, avebhaṅgiyāni na vibhajitabbāni saṅghena vā gaṇena vā puggalena vā. Vibhattānipi avibhattāni honti. Yo vibhajeyya, āpatti thullaccayassa. Katamāni pañca? Ārāmo, ārāmavatthu…pe… dārubhaṇḍaṃ, mattikābhaṇḍa’’nti (cūḷava. 322) vacanato avebhaṅgiyattā sādhāraṇaparikkhārabhāvena garuparikkhārāni. Ārāmo ārāmavatthūtiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, avissajjiyānī’’ti khandhake āgatasuttavaṇṇanāyameva bhaṇissāma. Tehi gihī saṅgaṇhātīti tāni datvā datvā gihīṃ saṅgaṇhāti anuggaṇhāti. Upalāpetīti ‘‘aho amhākaṃ ayyo’’ti evaṃ lapanake anubandhanake sasnehe karoti. Ayaṃ avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyañca garuparikkhāraṃ tathābhāvato thenetvā gihi saṅgaṇhanako catuttho mahācoro. So ca panāyaṃ imaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ kulasaṅgaṇhanatthaṃ vissajjento kuladūsakadukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Pabbājanīyakammāraho ca hoti. Bhikkhusaṅghaṃ abhibhavitvā issaravatāya vissajjento thullaccayaṃ āpajjati. Theyyacittena vissajjento bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kāretabboti.
这个人是头号大盗,意思是:他是这些盗贼中最厉害的一个。没有哪个盗贼能跟他相比,因为他盗取的是超越五根执取、极其微细精妙的出世间法。可是,出世间法能像金银财宝那样靠欺骗手段偷走吗?不可能。所以经文才说:“凡是宣称自己证得了实际上没有的、不真实的上人法。”这个人只是把自身根本没有的法挂在嘴上说“我有这个”,但他没办法真的把它从原来的境地中夺走,也没办法让它在自己身上真正生起。那为什么还叫他盗贼呢?因为他这样宣称之后,就凭这种虚假的声望得到了供养。他这样接受供养时,那些供养其实是通过巧妙的手段欺骗、偷取得来的。所以经文说:“这是什么缘故?诸比丘,你们是以盗心吃掉了国食。”这里的意思是:我们前面说的“这个人是头号大盗,他宣称自己证得了实际上没有的、不真实的上人法”,是出于什么原因这样说的呢?就是因为“诸比丘,你们是以盗心吃掉了国食”——诸比丘,因为他以盗心、以偷盗的心态吃掉了国食。这里“vo”这个词,就像“ye hi vo ariyā araññavanapatthānī”等句子里那样,只是个凑足音节的虚词,所以不应该把它理解成“你们所吃的”。巴利
Ayaṃ aggo mahācoroti ayaṃ imesaṃ corānaṃ jeṭṭhacoro; iminā sadiso coro nāma natthi, yo pañcindriyaggahaṇātītaṃ atisaṇhasukhumaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ theneti. Kiṃ pana sakkā lokuttaradhammo hiraññasuvaṇṇādīni viya vañcetvā thenetvā gahetunti? Na sakkā, tenevāha – ‘‘yo asantaṃ abhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapatī’’ti. Ayañhi attani asantaṃ taṃ dhammaṃ kevalaṃ ‘‘atthi mayhaṃ eso’’ti ullapati, na pana sakkoti ṭhānā cāvetuṃ, attani vā saṃvijjamānaṃ kātuṃ. Atha kasmā coroti vuttoti? Yasmā taṃ ullapitvā asantasambhāvanāya uppanne paccaye gaṇhāti. Evañhi gaṇhatā te paccayā sukhumena upāyena vañcetvā thenetvā gahitā honti. Tenevāha – ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu? Theyyāya vo bhikkhave raṭṭhapiṇḍo bhutto’’ti. Ayañhi ettha attho – yaṃ avocumha – ‘‘ayaṃ aggo mahācoro, yo asantaṃ abhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapatī’’ti . Taṃ kissa hetūti kena kāraṇena etaṃ avocumhāti ce. ‘‘Theyyāya vo bhikkhave raṭṭhapiṇḍo bhutto’’ti bhikkhave yasmā so tena raṭṭhapiṇḍo theyyāya theyyacittena bhutto hoti. Ettha hi vokāro ‘‘ye hi vo ariyā araññavanapatthānī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35-36) viya padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Tasmā ‘‘tumhehi bhutto’’ti evamassa attho na daṭṭhabbo.
现在,为了用偈颂把同一个道理说得更清楚,他接着说了“以另一种方式存在”等话。其中,“以另一种方式存在”是指以身体行为不清净等其他某种方式而存在。“以另一种方式宣说”是指以身体行为清净等其他某种方式宣说,也就是让人知道:“我是极清净的,我内心有出世间法。”这样宣说之后,他就把由此得来的食物像阿罗汉一样享用。“如同骗子通过隐蔽处,他所得的食物是偷盗所得”的意思是:通过隐蔽,也就是通过欺骗,把另一种方式的存在显示成另一种方式;自己本来不是树丛、不是灌木丛,却用枝叶等遮盖,把自己显示得像树丛、像灌木丛一样。“如同骗子”是指像那个以捕捉林中鸟雀为生、靠树丛灌木丛的假象行骗的狡诈捕鸟者。“他所得的食物是偷盗所得”的意思是:那个并非阿罗汉却显现出阿罗汉的样子而得到食物并享用的人,他所享用的那份食物,就像捕鸟骗子通过隐蔽欺骗而捕到鸟一样,是欺骗了人之后才得到、才被享用的,所以称为偷盗所得。巴利
Idāni tamevatthaṃ gāthāhi vibhūtataraṃ karonto ‘‘aññathā santa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha aññathā santanti aparisuddhakāyasamācārādikena aññenākārena santaṃ. Aññathā yo pavedayeti parisuddhakāyasamācārādikena aññena ākārena yo pavedeyya. ‘‘Paramaparisuddho ahaṃ, atthi me abbhantare lokuttaradhammo’’ti evaṃ jānāpeyya. Pavedetvā ca pana tāya pavedanāya uppannaṃ bhojanaṃ arahā viya bhuñjati. Nikacca kitavasseva bhuttaṃ theyyena tassa tanti nikaccāti vañcetvā aññathā santaṃ aññathā dassetvā. Agumbaagacchabhūtameva sākhāpalāsapallavādicchādanena gumbamiva gacchamiva ca attānaṃ dassetvā. Kitavassevāti vañcakassa kerāṭikassa gumbagacchasaññāya araññe āgatāgate sakuṇe gahetvā jīvitakappakassa sākuṇikasseva. Bhuttaṃ theyyena tassa tanti tassāpi anarahantasseva sato arahantabhāvaṃ dassetvā laddhabhojanaṃ bhuñjato; yaṃ taṃ bhuttaṃ taṃ yathā sākuṇikakitavassa nikacca vañcetvā sakuṇaggahaṇaṃ, evaṃ manusse vañcetvā laddhassa bhojanassa bhuttattā theyyena bhuttaṃ nāma hoti.
有些人不懂这个道理,却照样这样受用信众的供养,他们就是“黄衣缠颈者”……这些人死后投生到地狱,也就是投生到无乐的恶趣。“黄衣缠颈者”就是用黄衣缠着脖子的人。这句话的意思是:他们只是扛着圣者的旗帜而已,真正的沙门品质一点也没有。这正是《中部》里所说的“阿难,未来世会有种姓者成为黄衣缠颈者”那种恶戒之人的称呼。“恶法者”就是具有低劣品质的人。“不防护者”就是不以身体等来约束自己的人。“恶者”就是低劣的人。“以恶业”就是指造作时不见过患而作的那些欺骗他人等恶业。“这些人死后投生到地狱”就是投生到无乐的恶趣;因此有“宁可吞热铁丸”的偈颂。其含义是:如果这个破戒、不防护、住于欲行、以诡诈欺骗世间的补特伽罗吞下那如炽燃火焰的热铁丸,那么,他受用这国家的团食,与受用那铁丸,在这两者之中,还是吞下铁丸更好、更殊胜、更美妙,因为吞下铁丸后,在来世并不会体验以一切知智也难以了知其限量的苦。然而,由于受用了这样获得的国家的团食,他在来世便体验上述那样的苦,因为这正是达到极点的邪命。巴利
Imaṃ pana atthavasaṃ ajānantā ye evaṃ bhuñjanti, kāsāvakaṇṭhā…pe… nirayaṃ te upapajjare kāsāvakaṇṭhāti kāsāvena veṭhitakaṇṭhā. Ettakameva ariyaddhajadhāraṇamattaṃ, sesaṃ sāmaññaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Bhavissanti kho panānanda anāgatamaddhānaṃ gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.380) evaṃ vuttadussīlānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pāpadhammāti lāmakadhammā. Asaññatāti kāyādīhi asaññatā. Pāpāti lāmakapuggalā. Pāpehi kammehīti tehi karaṇakāle ādīnavaṃ adisvā katehi paravañcanādīhi pāpakammehi. Nirayaṃ te upapajjareti nirassādaṃ duggatiṃ te upapajjanti; tasmā seyyo ayoguḷoti gāthā. Tassattho – sacāyaṃ dussīlo asaññato icchācāre ṭhito kuhanāya lokaṃ vañcako puggalo tattaṃ aggisikhūpamaṃ ayoguḷaṃ bhuñjeyya ajjhohareyya, tassa yañcetaṃ raṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ bhuñjeyya, yañcetaṃ ayoguḷaṃ, tesu dvīsu ayoguḷova bhutto seyyo sundarataro paṇītataro ca bhaveyya, na hi ayoguḷassa bhuttattā samparāye sabbaññutañāṇenāpi dujjānaparicchedaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavati. Evaṃ paṭiladdhassa pana tassa raṭṭhapiṇḍassa bhuttattā samparāye vuttappakāraṃ dukkhaṃ anubhoti, ayañhi koṭippatto micchājīvoti.
世尊这样把恶行的过患展示给那些看不见恶行过患的人之后,又以种种方式呵责住在婆耆牟达河岸的比丘们难养、难供养……并说“你们应当诵说这条学处”,接着在制定第四条波罗夷时,说出了“若有比丘,未如实了知……”等话。巴利
Evaṃ pāpakiriyāya anādīnavadassāvīnaṃ ādīnavaṃ dassetvā ‘‘atha kho bhagavā vaggumudātīriye bhikkhū anekapariyāyena vigarahitvā dubbharatāya dupposatāya…pe… imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyāthā’’ti ca vatvā catutthapārājikaṃ paññapento ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu anabhijāna’’nti ādimāha.
就这样,以连根断除的方式坚定地制定第四条波罗夷之后,为了进一步制定尚未制定的规定,又出现了增上慢的事例。为了说明这件事的发生,才这样说:就这样,世尊为诸比丘制定了这条学处。巴利
Evaṃ mūlacchejjavasena daḷhaṃ katvā catutthapārājike paññatte aparampi anuppaññattatthāya adhimānavatthu udapādi. Tassuppattidīpanatthaṃ etaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘evañcidaṃ bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti.
增上慢事注释巴利
Adhimānavatthuvaṇṇanā
196 196. 其中,“于未见而作已见想”是指:对阿拉汉果,虽然还没有用智眼真正见到,却生起“我们已经见到阿拉汉果”的想法。“未得”等词也依同样的方式理解。但这里有差别:“未得”是指在自己相续中,还没有以生起的方式获得。“未证”是指还没有通过修习道而证得,也有还没有获得的意思。“未现证”是指还没有通达,或者以省察的方式还没有亲自作证。“以增上慢”是指以已得的慢心,也就是生起“我们已经证得”这样的慢心;或者是指以增上慢、顽固的慢心。“记说其他”是指记说阿拉汉果,也就是向比丘们宣称:“贤友们,我们已经证得阿拉汉果,应做的事已经做完。”因为他们还没有通过道断除烦恼,只是靠止观的力量暂时压伏了烦恼,所以后来遇到相应的因缘条件时,心就倾向于贪染;意思是倾向于贪欲。其余诸词也依同样的方式理解。巴利
196. Tattha adiṭṭhe diṭṭhasaññinoti arahatte ñāṇacakkhunā adiṭṭheyeva ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ amhehi arahatta’’nti diṭṭhasaññino hutvā. Esa nayo appattādīsu. Ayaṃ pana viseso – appatteti attano santāne uppattivasena appatte. Anadhigateti maggabhāvanāya anadhigate; appaṭiladdhetipi attho. Asacchikateti appaṭividdhe paccavekkhaṇavasena vā appaccakkhakate. Adhimānenāti adhigatamānena; ‘‘adhigatā maya’’nti evaṃ uppannamānenāti attho, adhikamānena vā thaddhamānenāti attho. Aññaṃ byākariṃsūti arahattaṃ byākariṃsu; ‘‘pattaṃ āvuso amhehi arahattaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesuṃ. Tesaṃ maggena appahīnakilesattā kevalaṃ samathavipassanābalena vikkhambhitakilesānaṃ aparena samayena tathārūpapaccayasamāyoge rāgāya cittaṃ namati; rāgatthāya namatīti attho. Esa nayo itaresu.
而那种记说确实是不可记说的。在判定罪过时,他们那种记说并不被当作有效的表述,它不构成罪过的要素。巴利
Tañcakho etaṃ abbohārikanti tañca kho etaṃ tesaṃ aññabyākaraṇaṃ abbohārikaṃ āpattipaññāpane vohāraṃ na gacchati; āpattiyā aṅgaṃ na hotīti attho.
这种增上慢在谁身上会生起,在谁身上不会生起呢?先说在圣弟子身上不会生起。因为圣弟子通过观察道、果、涅槃以及已被断除和残余的烦恼,生起了喜悦,对通达圣者的功德已经没有疑惑。所以,对入流者等圣者来说,不会以“我是一来者”这样的方式生起增上慢。在破戒者身上也不会生起,因为他对证得圣者的功德已经完全绝望。对持戒但舍弃了业处、沉溺于睡眠等的人,也不会生起。然而,对戒行极其清净、在业处上不放逸、已经确定名色、通过把握因缘而超越了疑惑、将三相套用于诸行并观照诸行、已经启动观禅的人,则会生起。它生起后,会让纯止的获得者或纯观的获得者停在半路上。因为这个人十年、二十年甚至三十年都看不到烦恼现行,就以为“我是入流者”“我是一来者”或“我是不来者”。但对止观两者都获得的人,只会让他停在阿罗汉果上。因为他的烦恼已被定力镇伏,诸行已被观力善加把握,所以即使六十年、八十年乃至一百年,烦恼也不会现行,他的心行就像漏尽者一样。他这样长时间看不到烦恼现行,就不停在中间果位,而认为“我是阿罗汉”。巴利
Kassa panāyaṃ adhimāno uppajjati, kassa nuppajjatīti? Ariyasāvakassa tāva nuppajjati so hi maggaphalanibbānapahīnakilesaavasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇena sañjātasomanasso ariyaguṇapaṭivedhe nikkaṅkho. Tasmā sotāpannādīnaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ sakadāgāmī’’tiādivasena adhimāno nuppajjati. Dussīlassa nuppajjati, so hi ariyaguṇādhigame nirāsova. Sīlavatopi pariccattakammaṭṭhānassa niddārāmatādimanuyuttassa nuppajjati. Suparisuddhasīlassa pana kammaṭṭhāne appamattassa nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā paccayapariggahena vitiṇṇakaṅkhassa tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre sammasantassa āraddhavipassakassa uppajjati, uppanno ca suddhasamathalābhiṃ vā suddhavipassanālābhiṃ vā antarā ṭhapeti, so hi dasapi vīsatipi tiṃsampi vassāni kilesasamudācāraṃ apassitvā ‘‘ahaṃ sotāpanno’’ti vā ‘‘sakadāgāmī’’ti vā ‘‘anāgāmī’’ti vā maññati. Samathavipassanālābhiṃ pana arahatteyeva ṭhapeti. Tassa hi samādhibalena kilesā vikkhambhitā, vipassanābalena saṅkhārā supariggahitā, tasmā saṭṭhimpi vassāni asītimpi vassāni vassasatampi kilesā na samudācaranti, khīṇāsavasseva cittacāro hoti. So evaṃ dīgharattaṃ kilesasamudācāraṃ apassanto antarā aṭhatvāva ‘‘arahā aha’’nti maññatīti.
具分别学处注释巴利
Savibhaṅgasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
197 “不了知”就是没有认知。然而,这种不了知表现出来时,由于他相续中的智慧尚未生起、也未曾亲自证得,所以就成了虚妄不实。因此,在词语分解中先说是“不存在的、不真实的、不现见的”,然后才说“不知者、不见者”。巴利
197.Anabhijānanti na abhijānaṃ. Yasmā panāyaṃ anabhijānaṃ samudācarati, svassa santāne anuppanno ñāṇena ca asacchikatoti abhūto hoti. Tenassa padabhājane ‘‘asantaṃ abhūtaṃ asaṃvijjamāna’’nti vatvā ‘‘ajānanto apassanto’’ti vuttaṃ .
“上人法”是指上人——修禅定的人和圣者——的法。“自许”是指把它归到自己身上,或者把自己归到那里面去,所以叫自许;这样表现出来,就是这里的语义关联。不过在词语分解里,因为所谓上人法包括了禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见……乃至乐于住在空闲处,这样列举了禅那等许多种法。所以,为了说明所有这些法都有“自许”这一层意思,就用复数形式说“他把那些善法归到自己身上”。其中,如果表现出来的是“这些法在我身上存在”,那就是把法归到自己身上;如果表现出来的是“我存在于这些法当中”,那就是把自己归到这些法里面去。应当这样理解。巴利
Uttarimanussadhammanti uttarimanussānaṃ jhāyīnañceva ariyānañca dhammaṃ. Attupanāyikanti attani taṃ upaneti, attānaṃ vā tattha upanetīti attupanāyiko, taṃ attupanāyikaṃ; evaṃ katvā samudācareyyāti sambandho. Padabhājane pana yasmā uttarimanussadhammo nāma jhānaṃ vimokkhaṃ samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṃ…pe… suññāgāre abhiratīti evaṃ jhānādayo anekadhammā vuttā. Tasmā tesaṃ sabbesaṃ vasena attupanāyikabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘te vā kusale dhamme attani upanetī’’ti bahuvacananiddesaṃ akāsi. Tattha ‘‘ete dhammā mayi sandissantī’’ti samudācaranto attani upaneti. ‘‘Ahaṃ etesu sandissāmī’’ti samudācaranto attānaṃ tesu upanetīti veditabbo.
能够成就圣智见。在这里,世间和出世间的慧,以“了知”的意义称为智,以“像用眼睛看见一样现前证知诸法”的意义称为见,合起来就是智见。圣洁、清净、最上的智见,就是圣智见。足够、圆满、有能力摧毁烦恼的圣智见就在这里;或者说,在禅那等各种上人法中,这圣智见是足够的,所以称为“能够成就圣智见”,而这个能够成就的圣智见就是上人法——应当这样理解词句之间的关系。其中,因为具有这种智见,他才被称为“能够成就圣智见”。为了说明这一点,在词语分解中以“明”为首来说:“智就是三明,见就是那智本身,那见也就是智。”不过在这里,一切广大和出世间的慧都应当理解为“智”。巴利
Alamariyañāṇadassananti ettha lokiyalokuttarā paññā jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, cakkhunā diṭṭhamiva dhammaṃ paccakkhakaraṇato dassanaṭṭhena dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ. Ariyaṃ visuddhaṃ uttamaṃ ñāṇadassananti ariyañāṇadassanaṃ. Alaṃ pariyattaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ ariyañāṇadassanamettha, jhānādibhede uttarimanussadhamme alaṃ vā ariyañāṇadassanamassāti alamariyañāṇadassano, taṃ alamariyañāṇadassanaṃ uttarimanussadhammanti evaṃ padatthasambandho veditabbo. Tattha yena ñāṇadassanena so alamariyañāṇadassanoti vuccati. Tadeva dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇanti tisso vijjā, dassananti yaṃ ñāṇaṃ taṃ dassanaṃ; yaṃ dassanaṃ taṃ ñāṇa’’nti vijjāsīsena padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahaggatalokuttarā panettha sabbāpi paññā ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti veditabbā.
“应表现”的意思是:把上面所说的这种上人法当成自己拥有的,然后对人宣说。“对女人等”则是举例说明可以告知的对象。因为向这些人说了,就算已经宣说;但向天、魔、梵天说了不算,向饿鬼、夜叉、畜生说了也不算。“我如此知、我如此见”是举例说明表现的方式。在词语分解中,“我知这些法,我见这些法”是说明在禅那等法上,知与见的作用如何生起;“这些法确实为我所有”等,则是说明把它们当成自己拥有的状态。巴利
Samudācareyyāti vuttappakārametaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ attupanāyikaṃ katvā āroceyya. Itthiyā vātiādi pana ārocetabbapuggalanidassanaṃ. Etesañhi ārocite ārocitaṃ hoti na devamārabrahmānaṃ, nāpi petayakkhatiracchānagatānanti. Iti jānāmi iti passāmīti samudācaraṇākāranidassanametaṃ. Padabhājane panassa ‘‘jānāmahaṃ ete dhamme, passāmahaṃ ete dhamme’’ti idaṃ tesu jhānādīsu dhammesu jānanapassanānaṃ pavattidīpanaṃ, ‘‘atthi ca me ete dhammā’’tiādi attupanāyikabhāvadīpanaṃ .
198 “从那以后另一个时候”这句话,是为了说明承认犯戒的那个时刻。但实际上,就在他宣说的当下,就已经犯了波罗夷。因为犯戒的人,不管被别人举发还是没被别人举发,都会承认,所以才说“不管被追问还是没被追问”。巴利
198.Tato aparena samayenāti āpattipaṭijānanasamayadassanametaṃ. Ayaṃ pana ārocitakkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ āpajjati. Āpattiṃ pana āpanno yasmā parena codito vā acodito vā paṭijānāti; tasmā ‘‘samanuggāhiyamāno vā asamanuggāhiyamāno vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在这里,当被追问时,先问“你证得了什么?”这是问所证得的法:在禅那、解脱等当中,或者在入流道等当中,你证得了什么?“你是怎样证得的?”这是问方法。这里的意思是:你是以无常相为核心而证得的,还是以苦相、无我相当中的某一个?你是依定而深入证得的,还是依观?同样,你是依色而深入证得的,还是依无色?你是依内而深入证得的,还是依外?"你什么时候证得的?"这是问时间。也就是说,是在上午、中午等哪个时间?"你在哪里证得的?"这是问地点。也就是说,在哪个地方——是夜间的住处、白天的住处、树下、殿堂,还是哪一座寺院?"你断了哪些烦恼?"这是问已断的烦恼。也就是说,你哪些应当由某一道断除的烦恼已经断了?"你获得了哪些法?"这是问所获得的法。也就是说,在初道等当中,你获得了哪些法?巴利
Tattha samanuggāhiyamāne tāva – kiṃ te adhigatanti adhigamapucchā; jhānavimokkhādīsu, sotāpattimaggādīsu vā kiṃ tayā adhigatanti. Kinti te adhigatanti upāyapucchā. Ayañhi etthādhippāyo – kiṃ tayā aniccalakkhaṇaṃ dhuraṃ katvā adhigataṃ, dukkhānattalakkhaṇesu aññataraṃ vā? Kiṃ vā samādhivasena abhinivisitvā, udāhu vipassanāvasena? Tathā kiṃ rūpe abhinivisitvā, udāhu arūpe? Kiṃ vā ajjhattaṃ abhinivisitvā, udāhu bahiddhāti? Kadā te adhigatanti kālapucchā. Pubbaṇhamajjhanhikādīsu katarasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti? Kattha te adhigatanti okāsapucchā. Katarasmiṃ okāse, kiṃ rattiṭṭhāne, divāṭṭhāne, rukkhamūle, maṇḍape, katarasmiṃ vā vihāreti vuttaṃ hoti. Katame te kilesā pahīnāti pahīnakilesapucchā. Kataramaggavajjhā tava kilesā pahīnāti vuttaṃ hoti. Katamesaṃ tvaṃ dhammānaṃ lābhīti paṭiladdhadhammapucchā. Paṭhamamaggādīsu katamesaṃ dhammānaṃ tvaṃ lābhīti vuttaṃ hoti.
因此,如今就算有比丘宣称自己证得了上人法,也不能单凭这一点就对他表示恭敬。要在下面这六个方面追问清楚,才能判断真假。应该问他:“你证得了什么?是哪种禅那?还是解脱等当中的某一种?”因为一个人自己证得的法,对他自己来说是明明白白的。如果他说“我证得了这个”,那就接着问:“你是怎么证得的?”也就是说,要问:“你是以无常相等当中的哪一个为核心来证的?在三十八种所缘里,或者在色、无色、内、外等各类法中,你是以哪种方式深入取著的?”因为一个人对什么有取著,那对他自己来说是清楚的。如果他说“我的取著是这样的,我就是这样证得的”,那就接着问:“你是什么时候证得的?”要问:“是上午,还是正午等某个时间?”因为每个人对自己证得的时间都是清楚的。如果他说“我是在某个时间证得的”,那就接着问:“你是在哪里证得的?”要问:“是在白天的住处,还是在夜间的住处等某个地方?”因为每个人对自己证得的地方都是清楚的。如果他说“我是在某个地方证得的”,那就接着问:“你断了哪些烦恼?”要问:“是初道所断的,还是第二道等所断的?”因为每个人对自己靠所证之道断除了哪些烦恼,都是清楚的。如果他说“我断了这些烦恼”,那就接着问:“你获得了哪些法?”要问:“是入流道的,还是一来道等当中的某一种?”因为每个人对自己所证得的法都是清楚的。如果他说“我获得了这些法”,到这一步,他的话就不能轻信了。因为博学多闻、擅长学习和追问的比丘们,有能力把这六个方面查清楚。巴利
Tasmā idāni cepi koci bhikkhu uttarimanussadhammādhigamaṃ byākareyya, na so ettāvatāva sakkātabbo. Imesu pana chasu ṭhānesu sodhanatthaṃ vattabbo – ‘‘kiṃ te adhigataṃ, kiṃ jhānaṃ, udāhu vimokkhādīsu aññatara’’nti? Yo hi yena adhigato dhammo, so tassa pākaṭo hoti. Sace ‘‘idaṃ nāma me adhigata’’nti vadati, tato ‘‘kinti te adhigata’’nti pucchitabbo, ‘‘aniccalakkhaṇādīsu kiṃ dhuraṃ katvā aṭṭhatiṃsāya vā ārammaṇesu rūpārūpaajjhattabahiddhādibhedesu vā dhammesu kena mukhena abhinivisitvā’’ti yo hi yassābhiniveso, so tassa pākaṭo hoti. Sace ‘‘ayaṃ nāma me abhiniveso evaṃ mayā adhigata’’nti vadati, tato ‘‘kadā te adhigata’’nti pucchitabbo, ‘‘kiṃ pubbaṇhe, udāhu majjhanhikādīsu aññatarasmiṃ kāle’’ti sabbesañhi attanā adhigatakālo pākaṭo hoti. Sace ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma kāle adhigatanti vadati, tato ‘‘kattha te adhigata’’nti pucchitabbo, ‘‘kiṃ divāṭṭhāne, udāhu rattiṭṭhānādīsu aññatarasmiṃ okāse’’ti sabbesañhi attanā adhigatokāso pākaṭo hoti. Sace ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma me okāse adhigata’’nti vadati, tato ‘‘katame te kilesā pahīnā’’ti pucchitabbo, ‘‘kiṃ paṭhamamaggavajjhā, udāhu dutiyādimaggavajjhā’’ti sabbesañhi attanā adhigatamaggena pahīnakilesā pākaṭā honti. Sace ‘‘ime nāma me kilesā pahīnā’’ti vadati, tato ‘‘katamesaṃ tvaṃ dhammānaṃ lābhī’’ti pucchitabbo , ‘‘kiṃ sotāpattimaggassa, udāhu sakadāgāmimaggādīsu aññatarassā’’ti sabbesaṃ hi attanā adhigatadhammā pākaṭā honti. Sace ‘‘imesaṃ nāmāhaṃ dhammānaṃ lābhī’’ti vadati, ettāvatāpissa vacanaṃ na saddhātabbaṃ, bahussutā hi uggahaparipucchākusalā bhikkhū imāni cha ṭhānāni sodhetuṃ sakkonti.
不过,还要先查清这位比丘的来历和修行表现。如果他的来历和修行表现不清净,就该判定他不合格,说:“用这种修行方式,是不可能证得出世间法的。”如果他的来历和修行表现清净,能看出他“长期以来在三学中不放逸,勤修不眠,对四种生活所需不贪著,内心安住如虚空伸手一般”,那么这位比丘的宣称就和他的修行表现对得上。就像经里说的:“好比恒河水和耶牟那河水汇合交融,同样,世尊为弟子们善巧宣说的、通向涅槃的修行之道,与涅槃也是相合相融的。”(《长部》2.296)这里说的正是这个意思。巴利
Imassa pana bhikkhuno āgamanapaṭipadā sodhetabbā. Yadi āgamanapaṭipadā na sujjhati, ‘‘imāya paṭipadāya lokuttaradhammo nāma na labbhatī’’ti apanetabbo. Yadi panassa āgamanapaṭipadā sujjhati, ‘‘dīgharattaṃ tīsu sikkhāsu appamatto jāgariyamanuyutto catūsu paccayesu alaggo ākāse pāṇisamena cetasā viharatī’’ti paññāyati, tassa bhikkhuno byākaraṇaṃ paṭipadāya saddhiṃ saṃsandati. ‘‘Seyyathāpi nāma gaṅgodakaṃ yamunodakena saddhiṃ saṃsandati sameti; evameva supaññattā tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṃ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṃsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā cā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.296) vuttasadisaṃ hoti.
不过,光凭这一点也不该就对他作恭敬供养。为什么呢?因为有些凡夫即使还是凡夫,也可能有和漏尽者相似的行持,所以应当用各种方法让那位比丘感到惊惧。真正的漏尽者,就算雷电劈到头顶,也不会有恐惧、惊惶或汗毛竖立。如果他生起了恐惧、惊惶或汗毛竖立,就该把他赶走,说:“你不是阿罗汉。”如果他无所畏惧、毫不惊惶、毫无怖畏,像狮子一样安坐,那么这位比丘就是具足圆满回答的人,值得接受各方国王、大臣等送来的恭敬供养。巴利
Apica kho na ettakenāpi sakkāro kātabbo. Kasmā? Ekaccassa hi puthujjanassāpi sato khīṇāsavapaṭipattisadisā paṭipadā hoti, tasmā so bhikkhu tehi tehi upāyehi uttāsetabbo. Khīṇāsavassa nāma asaniyāpi matthake patamānāya bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ vā lomahaṃso vā na hoti. Sacassa bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ vā lomahaṃso vā uppajjati, ‘‘na tvaṃ arahā’’ti apanetabbo. Sace pana abhīrū acchambhī anutrāsī hutvā sīho viya nisīdati, ayaṃ bhikkhu sampannaveyyākaraṇo samantā rājarājamahāmattādīhi pesitaṃ sakkāraṃ arahatīti.
恶欲者:就是具备那种恶欲的人。这种恶欲,是依照“在这里,有一类人明明自己是破戒者,却希望众人知道‘我是持戒者’”等等(《分别论》851)这样的方式所说的。被欲所败者:就是被那种恶欲所击败、所压倒,成了波罗夷者。巴利
Pāpicchoti yā sā ‘‘idhekacco dussīlova samāno sīlavāti maṃ jano jānātūti icchatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 851) nayena vuttā pāpicchā tāya samannāgato. Icchāpakatoti tāya pāpikāya icchāya apakato abhibhūto pārājiko hutvā.
“期望清净者”,就是期待、希求、渴望自己得到清净。因为这个人已经犯了波罗夷罪,所以以比丘的身份,不可能证得禅那等成就;他的比丘身份,既是生天的障碍,也是证道的障碍。正如经文说:“错误执持的沙门法,把人拖入地狱。”(《法句经》311)又说:“懈怠的游行者,只会积聚更多尘垢。”(《法句经》313)因此,他的比丘身份不能称为清净。可是,如果成为在家人、近事男、园丁或沙弥,就能通过布施、皈依、持戒等成就生天之道,或通过禅那、解脱等成就解脱之道,所以在家等身份才称为清净。正因为他期望这种清净,所以称为“期望清净者”。也正因如此,在词语分解中说:“或者想成为在家人”等等。巴利
Visuddhāpekkhoti attano visuddhiṃ apekkhamāno icchamāno patthayamāno. Ayañhi yasmā pārājikaṃ āpanno, tasmā bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā abhabbo jhānādīni adhigantuṃ, bhikkhubhāvo hissa saggantarāyo ceva hoti maggantarāyo ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘sāmaññaṃ dupparāmaṭṭhaṃ nirayāyupakaḍḍhatī’’ti (dha. pa. 311). Aparampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘sithilo hi paribbājo, bhiyyo ākirate raja’’nti (dha. pa. 313). Iccassa bhikkhubhāvo visuddhi nāma na hoti . Yasmā pana gihī vā upāsako vā ārāmiko vā sāmaṇero vā hutvā dānasaraṇasīlasaṃvarādīhi saggamaggaṃ vā jhānavimokkhādīhi mokkhamaggaṃ vā ārādhetuṃ bhabbo hoti, tasmāssa gihiādibhāvo visuddhi nāma hoti, tasmā taṃ visuddhiṃ apekkhanato ‘‘visuddhāpekkho’’ti vuccati. Teneva cassa padabhājane ‘‘gihī vā hotukāmo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“应当这样说”,就是应当这样讲。怎样讲呢?就是:“贤友,我并不知道却说自己知道,没有看见却说自己看见。”不过在词语分解里,并没有把“应当这样说”这个短语单独提出来,而是说明:当一个人这样讲的时候,就说他是在讲“贤友,我并不知道却说自己知道,没有看见却说自己看见”。为了显示这种说法方式,所以说了“我并不知道这些法”等等。“我虚妄地说空话”:因为所说的话没有真实含义,所以是空话;因为心里怀着欺骗的意图,所以是妄语;意思就是“我说了”。而在词语分解里,则用另外的字句来显示它的意思,说了“我所说的是空的”等等。巴利
Evaṃ vadeyyāti evaṃ bhaṇeyya. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Ajānamevaṃ āvuso avacaṃ jānāmi, apassaṃ passāmī’’ti. Padabhājane pana ‘‘evaṃ vadeyyā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ anuddharitvāva yathā vadanto ‘‘ajānamevaṃ āvuso avacaṃ jānāmi, apassaṃ passāmī’’ti vadati nāmāti vuccati, taṃ ākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nāhaṃ ete dhamme jānāmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tucchaṃ musā vilapinti ahaṃ vacanatthavirahato tucchaṃ vañcanādhippāyato musā vilapiṃ, abhaṇinti vuttaṃ hoti. Padabhājane panassa aññena padabyañjanena atthamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tucchakaṃ mayā bhaṇita’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
“依前”是指依着前面那三种波罗夷的犯者来说的。其余的内容,因为前面已经说过方式,而且意思也很明白,所以就已经很清楚了。巴利
Purime upādāyāti purimāni tīṇi pārājikāni āpanne puggale upādāya. Sesaṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānatthattā ca pākaṭamevāti.
句分别的注释巴利
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
199 像这样,按照词句顺序逐条解释了所举的学处之后,现在,因为在下方的句分别中,只是以简略的方式显示了上人法,即“禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见……在空屋中喜悦”,并没有详细地安立罪名,所以只是把论母放在那里。然而,对于简略显示的意义,并不是所有人都能按一切方式掌握其方法。因此,为了按一切方式掌握方法,又把同样的句分别作为论母放在那里,详细显示上人法之后,想要显示罪的不同类别,便说“禅那,就是初禅、第二禅”等等。在这里,初禅等、慈心禅等、不净禅等、入出息念定之禅、世间禅以及出世间禅,全都已经被统摄在内。所以应当知道:即使说“我证入初禅……乃至第四禅、慈心禅、舍心禅、不净禅、入出息念定之禅、世间禅、出世间禅”,也是波罗夷。巴利
199. Evaṃ uddiṭṭhasikkhāpadaṃ padānukkamena vibhajitvā idāni yasmā heṭṭhā padabhājanīyamhi ‘‘jhānaṃ vimokkhaṃ samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṃ…pe… suññāgāre abhiratī’’ti evaṃ saṃkhitteneva uttarimanussadhammo dassito, na vitthārena āpattiṃ āropetvā tanti ṭhapitā. Saṅkhepadassite ca atthe na sabbe sabbākārena nayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkonti, tasmā sabbākārena nayaggahaṇatthaṃ puna tadeva padabhājanaṃ mātikāṭhāne ṭhapetvā vitthārato uttarimanussadhammaṃ dassetvā āpattibhedaṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘jhānanti paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ, dutiyaṃ jhāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha paṭhamajjhānādīhi mettājhānādīnipi asubhajjhānādīnipi ānāpānassatisamādhijjhānampi lokiyajjhānampi lokuttarajjhānampi saṅgahitameva. Tasmā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjintipi…pe… catutthaṃ jjhānaṃ, mettājhānaṃ, upekkhājhānaṃ asubhajjhānaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhijjhānaṃ , lokiyajjhānaṃ, lokuttarajjhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntipi bhaṇanto pārājikova hotīti veditabbo.
善解脱,就是从种种烦恼中解脱出来,所以叫解脱。这个解脱因为空于贪、嗔、痴,所以是空解脱;因为没有贪、嗔、痴的相,所以是无相解脱;因为没有贪、嗔、痴的愿求,所以称为无愿解脱。让心平等地安放在所缘上、把心安置于所缘,这就是定。因为是圣者们应当证入的,所以叫等至。这里其余的内容和前面所说的一样。在这里,用三解脱和三定所说明的是圣道,用三等至所说明的则是果等至。在这其中,只要取任何一句而说“我得到了这个”,就是波罗夷。巴利
Suṭṭhu mutto vividhehi vā kilesehi muttoti vimokkho. So panāyaṃ rāgadosamohehi suññattā suññato. Rāgadosamohanimittehi animittattā animitto. Rāgadosamohapaṇidhīnaṃ abhāvato appaṇihitoti vuccati. Cittaṃ samaṃ ādahati ārammaṇe ṭhapetīti samādhi. Ariyehi samāpajjitabbato samāpatti. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Ettha ca vimokkhattikena ca samādhittikena ca ariyamaggova vutto. Samāpattittikena pana phalasamāpatti. Tesu yaṃkiñci ekampi padaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ imassa lābhīmhī’’ti bhaṇanto pārājikova hoti.
三明就是宿命通、天眼通、漏尽通。在这里,只要取其中任何一种明,说“我得到了这种明”,就犯波罗夷。不过《简要注》里说:说“我得到了诸明”的人,或者说“我得到了三明”的人,也犯波罗夷。在道修习的分别里所说的三十七菩提分法,是与道相应的,这里指的只是出世间的那一类。所以《大注》里说:如果说“我得到了出世间的念处、正勤、神足、根、力、觉支、圣八支道”,就犯波罗夷。而《大波阇利》等注书里说:即使按每一个部分来说,比如“我得到了诸念处”,或者按其中每一个法来说,比如“我得到了身随观念处”,这样说的人也犯波罗夷。这也说得通。为什么呢?因为这是针对道刹那生起的那一刹那而说的。对于果的证得,也应当知道,按每一种果来说,同样犯波罗夷。巴利
Tisso vijjāti pubbenivāsānussati, dibbacakkhu, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti. Tattha ekissāpi nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ imissā vijjāya lābhīmhī’’ti bhaṇanto pārājiko hoti. Saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vijjānaṃ lābhīmhī’ti bhaṇantopi ‘tissannaṃ vijjānaṃ lābhīmhī’ti bhaṇantopi pārājiko vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Maggabhāvanāpadabhājane vuttā sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā maggasampayuttā lokuttarāva idhādhippetā. Tasmā lokuttarānaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ iddhipādānaṃ indriyānaṃ balānaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa lābhīmhīti vadato pārājikanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Mahāpaccariyādīsu pana ‘‘satipaṭṭhānānaṃ lābhīmhī’ti evaṃ ekekakoṭṭhāsavasenāpi ‘kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānassa lābhīmhī’ti evaṃ tattha ekekadhammavasenāpi vadato pārājikamevā’’ti vuttaṃ tampi sameti. Kasmā? Maggakkhaṇuppanneyeva sandhāya vuttattā. Phalasacchikiriyāyapi ekekaphalavasena pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在“断贪”等三法中,说的只是断除烦恼。但这种断除,如果没有道就不可能做到,因为欲贪和嗔是通过第三道断除的,痴是通过第四道断除的,所以即使有人说“我的贪已经断了”等,也仍然构成波罗夷。巴利
Rāgassa pahānantiādittike kilesappahānameva vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā maggena vinā natthi, tatiyamaggena hi kāmarāgadosānaṃ pahānaṃ, catutthena mohassa, tasmā ‘‘rāgo me pahīno’’tiādīni vadatopi pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ.
在“心离贪、无盖”等这类三项组合的说法里,说的只是出世间心。因此,即使有人说“我的心离贪、无盖”等,也同样构成波罗夷。巴利
Rāgā cittaṃ vinīvaraṇatātiādittike lokuttaracittameva vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘rāgā me cittaṃ vinīvaraṇa’’ntiādīni vadatopi pārājikameva.
不过在“空屋”这个词的分别里,因为如果不和禅那结合起来,光是说“我乐于在空屋中”,并不构成波罗夷,所以才说“以初禅乐于在空屋中”等等。因此要知道:如果有人和禅那结合起来,说“我以这个禅那乐于在空屋中”,这个人就是犯波罗夷。巴利
Suññāgārapadabhājane pana yasmā jhānena aghaṭetvā ‘‘suññāgāre abhiramāmī’’ti vacanamattena pārājikaṃ nādhippetaṃ, tasmā ‘‘paṭhamena jhānena suññāgāre abhiratī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tasmā yo jhānena ghaṭetvā ‘‘iminā nāma jhānena suññāgāre abhiramāmī’’ti vadati, ayameva pārājiko hotīti veditabbo.
在解释“智”这个词时,像《庵婆咤经》等(长部1.254等)所说的八种明当中,并没有提到观智、意所成神通、神通变化、天耳、他心智这五种明。要知道,在这五种明里,只有观智本身不构成波罗夷事,其余几种则构成。所以,一个人说“我是观智的获得者”或“我是观智之智的获得者”,都不犯波罗夷。不过,普沙提婆长老说:“其余四种明,如果没有和智结合起来,也不构成波罗夷事。所以,说‘我是意所成的获得者、神通变化的获得者、天耳界的获得者、他心的获得者’,也没有波罗夷。”这个说法被他的弟子们驳斥了:“我们的老师不是阿毗达摩论师,连地的差别都不知道。所谓神通,是以第四禅为近依的大法,只有依靠禅那才能成就。所以,无论他说‘我是意所成的获得者’,还是‘我是意所成智的获得者’,不管怎么说,都是波罗夷。”在这里,虽然涅槃没有在圣典正文中出现,但如果说“我已证得涅槃”或“我已作证涅槃”,那仍然是波罗夷。为什么?因为涅槃是所生起的出世间法。同样,说“我已通达四圣谛,四圣谛已被我通达”,也是波罗夷。为什么?因为“谛通达”是道的同义语。另外,因为《分别论》(分别746)中说:“三种无碍解,从欲界善的四个智相应心生起,也从唯作的四个智相应心生起;义无碍解在这些心生起,也在四道四果中生起。”所以,说“我是法无碍解的获得者”,或者说“我是词无碍解……乃至辩无碍解的获得者”,或者说“我是世间义无碍解的获得者”,都没有波罗夷。如果说“我是诸无碍解的获得者”,这还不算越界。但如果说“我是出世间义无碍解的获得者”,那就犯波罗夷。不过,《简要注》里说,不加区分地说“我已证得义无碍解”,也犯波罗夷。《库伦底注》里也说“不得脱免”。而《大注》里则说:“到此为止没有波罗夷,到此为止不算越界,到此为止不犯波罗夷。”既然已经这样详细考察过,就不能再另立标准了。巴利
Yāca ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti imassa padabhājane ambaṭṭhasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 1.254 ādayo) vuttāsu aṭṭhasu vijjāsu vipassanāñāṇamanomayiddhiiddhividhadibbasotacetopariyañāṇabhedā pañca vijjā na āgatā, tāsu ekā vipassanāva pārājikavatthu na hoti, sesā hontīti veditabbā. Tasmā ‘‘vipassanāya lābhīmhī’’tipi ‘‘vipassanāñāṇassa lābhīmhī’’tipi vadato pārājikaṃ natthi. Phussadevatthero pana bhaṇati – ‘‘itarāpi catasso vijjā ñāṇena aghaṭitā pārājikavatthū na honti. Tasmā ‘manomayassa lābhīmhi, iddhividhassa, dibbāya sotadhātuyā, cetopariyassa lābhīmhī’ti vadatopi pārājikaṃ natthī’’ti. Taṃ tassa antevāsikeheva paṭikkhittaṃ – ‘‘ācariyo na ābhidhammiko bhummantaraṃ na jānāti, abhiññā nāma catutthajjhānapādakova mahaggatadhammo, jhāneneva ijjhati. Tasmā manomayassa lābhīmhī’ti vā ‘manomayañāṇassa lābhīmhī’ti vā yathā vā tathā vā vadatu pārājikamevā’’ti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi nibbānaṃ pāḷiyā anāgataṃ, atha kho ‘‘nibbānaṃ me patta’’nti vā ‘‘sacchikata’’nti vā vadato pārājikameva. Kasmā? Nibbānassa nibbattitalokuttarattā. Tathā ‘‘cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhiṃ paṭividdhāni mayā’’ti vadatopi pārājikameva. Kasmā? Saccappaṭivedhoti hi maggassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Yasmā pana ‘‘tisso paṭisambhidā kāmāvacarakusalato catūsu ñāṇasampayuttesu cittuppādesu uppajjanti, kriyato catūsu ñāṇasampayuttesu cittuppādesu uppajjanti, atthapaṭisambhidā etesu ceva uppajjati, catūsu maggesu catūsu phalesu ca uppajjatī’’ti vibhaṅge (vibha. 746) vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘dhammapaṭisambhidāya lābhīmhī’’ti vā, ‘‘nirutti…pe… paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāya lābhīmhī’’ti vā ‘‘lokiyaatthapaṭisambhidāya lābhīmhī’’ti vā vuttepi pārājikaṃ natthi. ‘‘Paṭisambhidānaṃ lābhīmhī’’ti vutte na tāva sīsaṃ otarati. ‘‘Lokuttaraatthapaṭisambhidāya lābhīmhī’’ti vutte pana pārājikaṃ hoti. Saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana atthapaṭisambhidāppattomhīti avisesenāpi vadato pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Kurundiyampi ‘‘na muccatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ettāvatā pārājikaṃ natthi, ettāvatā sīsaṃ na otarati, ettāvatā na pārājika’’nti vicāritattā na sakkā aññaṃ pamāṇaṃ kātunti.
说“我入灭尽定”,或者说“我是获得灭尽定的人”,都没有波罗夷。为什么?因为灭尽定既不属于世间,也不属于出世间。但是,如果他心里这样想:“所谓灭尽定,是不来者或漏已尽的人才能进入的,人们会知道我也是他们当中的一员。”并且这样对人宣称,而对方也确实那样认为,那就犯波罗夷。这是《大筏》和《简要注》里说的。应当考察清楚之后再接受。巴利
‘‘Nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjāmī’’ti vā ‘‘lābhīmhāhaṃ tassā’’ti vā vadatopi pārājikaṃ natthi. Kasmā? Nirodhasamāpattiyā neva lokiyattā na lokuttarattāti. Sace panassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘nirodhaṃ nāma anāgāmī vā khīṇāsavo vā samāpajjati, tesaṃ maṃ aññataroti jānissatī’’ti byākaroti, so ca naṃ tathā jānāti, pārājikanti mahāpaccarisaṅkhepaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Taṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
就算有人说“在过去世迦叶正自觉者那个时候,我是入流者”,也不犯波罗夷。因为执取的是过去诸蕴,所以不构成犯重。不过,《简要注》里说:“说‘过去我是八等至的获得者’不犯波罗夷,因为那是会退转的法;但这里有人说‘因为现在是无退转的法’。”这种说法也在那里被驳斥了:“针对过去自体而说的,不犯波罗夷;只有针对现在自体而说的,才犯波罗夷。”巴利
‘‘Atītabhave kassapasammāsambuddhakāle sotāpannomhī’’ti vadatopi pārājikaṃ natthi. Atītakkhandhānañhi parāmaṭṭhattā sīsaṃ na otaratīti. Saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘atīte aṭṭhasamāpattilābhīmhī’’ti vadato pārājikaṃ natthi, kuppadhammattā idha pana ‘‘atthi akuppadhammattāti keci vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tampi tattheva ‘‘atītattabhāvaṃ sandhāya kathentassa pārājikaṃ na hoti, paccuppannattabhāvaṃ sandhāya kathentasseva hotī’’ti paṭikkhittaṃ.
单纯品解说巴利
Suddhikavārakathāvaṇṇanā
200 200. 这样详细解释了禅那等十个论母条目之后,现在为了说明自称得上人法的人所说的故意妄语,先显示它的构成要素,再按照那同样的详细解释来编排轮转句,为了显示自称的方式和罪过的差别,而说了“以三种方式”等。其中,有单纯品、欲说品、缘相关品这三大品。在它们当中,单纯品里,从初禅开始,一直到“心从痴离盖”这一句,对每一个条目,以“我入、我入、已入、我是获得者、我是自在者、我已作证”这六种表述,各以三种方式、四种、五种、六种、七种方式来组合,这样组合五次,就称为单纯理趣。然后,以“初禅以及二禅”这样,把每一个条目和初禅结合在一起,把所有条目都结合之后,按照同样的详细解释,称为缺轮。因为它没有被再拿回来和初禅等结合,所以叫“缺轮”。然后,以“二禅以及三禅”这样,把每一个条目和二禅结合在一起,再拿回来和初禅连接,按照同样的详细解释,称为全轮。然后,就像和二禅结合那样,也和三禅等结合,把每一个条目结合之后,再拿回来和二禅等连接,按照同样的详细解释,又说了其余二十九个全轮,完成了一根理趣。不过,原文只是简略地显示,不迷惑的人应当依照详细解释来了知。巴利
200. Evaṃ jhānādīni dasa mātikāpadāni vitthāretvā idāni uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapanto yaṃ sampajānamusāvādaṃ bhaṇati, tassa aṅgaṃ dassetvā tasseva vitthārassa vasena cakkapeyyālaṃ bandhanto ullapanākārañca āpattibhedañca dassetuṃ ‘‘tīhākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha suddhikavāro vattukāmavāro paccayapaṭisaṃyuttavāroti tayo mahāvārā. Tesu suddhikavāre paṭhamajjhānaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva mohā cittaṃ vinīvaraṇapadaṃ, tāva ekamekasmiṃ pade samāpajjiṃ, samāpajjāmi, samāpanno, lābhīmhi, vasīmhi, sacchikataṃ mayāti imesu chasu padesu ekamekaṃ padaṃ tīhākārehi, catūhi, pañcahi, chahi, sattahākārehīti evaṃ pañcakkhattuṃ yojetvā suddhikanayo nāma vutto. Tato paṭhamañca jhānaṃ, dutiyañca jhānanti evaṃ paṭhamajjhānena saddhiṃ ekamekaṃ padaṃ ghaṭentena sabbapadāni ghaṭetvā teneva vitthārena khaṇḍacakkaṃ nāma vuttaṃ. Tañhi puna ānetvā paṭhamajjhānādīhi na yojitaṃ, tasmā ‘‘khaṇḍacakka’’nti vuccati. Tato dutiyañca jhānaṃ, tatiyañca jhānanti evaṃ dutiyajjhānena saddhiṃ ekamekaṃ padaṃ ghaṭetvā puna ānetvā paṭhamajjhānena saddhiṃ sambandhitvā teneva vitthārena baddhacakkaṃ nāma vuttaṃ. Tato yathā dutiyajjhānena saddhiṃ, evaṃ tatiyajjhānādīhipi saddhiṃ, ekamekaṃ padaṃ ghaṭetvā puna ānetvā dutiyajjhānādīhi saddhiṃ sambandhitvā teneva vitthārena aññānipi ekūnatiṃsa baddhacakkāni vatvā ekamūlakanayo niṭṭhāpito. Pāṭho pana saṅkhepena dassito, so asammuyhantena vitthārato veditabbo.
就像“一根”的理趣一样,二根等理趣直到“一切根”为终点,在四百之上宣说了三十五种理趣。具体来说:二根的有二十九种,三根的有二十八种,四根的有二十七种;同样,五根等一直到三十根,每一种各递减一,应当这样理解。不过在文本中,把它们的名称也省略了,只标出“这是一切根”这一种三十根的理趣。又因为“空宅句”没有和禅那结合,就触及不到要点,所以没有涉及它,应当知道这里处处都是以“心从痴中脱离盖障”这一句为终点来显示结合的。如此,无论按顺序或逆序,将初禅等与二禅等结合或不结合,若以“我入”等方式自我吹嘘,就没有逃脱的可能,必定犯波罗夷。巴利
Yathā ca ekamūlako, evaṃ dumūlakādayopi sabbamūlakapariyosānā catunnaṃ satānaṃ upari pañcatiṃsa nayā vuttā. Seyyathidaṃ – dvimūlakā ekūnatiṃsa, timūlakā aṭṭhavīsa, catumūlakā sattavīsa; evaṃ pañcamūlakādayopi ekekaṃ ūnaṃ katvā yāva tiṃsamūlakā, tāva veditabbā. Pāṭhe pana tesaṃ nāmampi saṅkhipitvā ‘‘idaṃ sabbamūlaka’’nti tiṃsamūlakanayo eko dassito. Yasmā ca suññāgārapadaṃ jhānena aghaṭitaṃ sīsaṃ na otarati, tasmā taṃ anāmasitvā mohā cittaṃ vinīvaraṇapadapariyosānāyeva sabbattha yojanā dassitāti veditabbā. Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni paṭipāṭiyā vā uppaṭipāṭiyā vā dutiyajjhānādīhi ghaṭetvā vā aghaṭetvā vā samāpajjintiādinā nayena ullapato mokkho natthi, pārājikaṃ āpajjatiyevāti.
为了说明这个道理,在清净大品这部分里,简略的解释是这样的:“以三种方式”——就是指构成正知妄语这件事的三个条件。在说之前就有:就是在说之前,这个人心里就已经这样想:“我要说妄语。”正在说的时候有:就是正在说的时候有。说完了之后有:就是说完之后他有,意思是当该说的话被说出来的时候,他心里有这件事。或者说,“说完了之后”——是指已经说完、话已结束的人有。如果有人在这之前也知道,正在说的时候也知道,说完之后也知道“我说了妄语”,那么当他说“我证得了初禅”的时候,就犯波罗夷罪。这就是这里所显示的意思。虽然已经显示出来了,但这里还有一个差别——有人问:“‘我要说妄语’这个说之前的部分是有的,‘我说了妄语’这个说之后的部分没有,因为有人刚说完就忘了,那他犯波罗夷罪,还是不犯?”这个问题在注疏里是这样解答的:如果在说之前知道“我要说妄语”,正在说的时候也知道“我正在说妄语”,那么说完之后不可能不知道“我说了妄语”。即使不知道,也照样犯波罗夷罪。因为前面那两个条件才是判断标准。如果有人在这之前没有“我要说妄语”这个念头,但正在说的时候知道“我正在说妄语”,说完之后也知道“我说了妄语”,那就不应该对他治罪。因为说之前那个部分才是更重要的标准。如果那个没有,那就只是开玩笑说的,或者随口说的。巴利
Imassa atthassa dassanavasena vutte ca panetasmiṃ suddhikamahāvāre ayaṃ saṅkhepato atthavaṇṇanā – tīhākārehīti sampajānamusāvādassa aṅgabhūtehi tīhi kāraṇehi. Pubbevassa hotīti pubbabhāgeyeva assa puggalassa evaṃ hoti ‘‘musā bhaṇissa’’nti. Bhaṇantassa hotīti bhaṇamānassa hoti. Bhaṇitassa hotīti bhaṇite assa hoti, yaṃ vattabbaṃ tasmiṃ vutte hotīti attho. Atha vā bhaṇitassāti vuttavato niṭṭhitavacanassa hotīti. Yo evaṃ pubbabhāgepi jānāti, bhaṇantopi jānāti, pacchāpi jānāti, ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇita’’nti so ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajji’’nti bhaṇanto pārājikaṃ āpajjatīti ayamettha attho dassito. Kiñcāpi dassito, atha kho ayamettha viseso – pucchā tāva hoti ‘‘‘musā bhaṇissa’nti pubbabhāgo atthi, ‘musā mayā bhaṇita’nti pacchābhāgo natthi, vuttamattameva hi koci pamussati, kiṃ tassa pārājikaṃ hoti, na hotī’’ti? Sā evaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu vissajjitā – pubbabhāge ‘‘musā bhaṇissa’’nti ca bhaṇantassa ‘‘musā bhaṇāmī’’ti ca jānato pacchābhāge ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇita’’nti na sakkā na bhavituṃ. Sacepi na hoti pārājikameva. Purimameva hi aṅgadvayaṃ pamāṇaṃ. Yassāpi pubbabhāge ‘‘musā bhaṇissa’’nti ābhogo natthi, bhaṇanto pana ‘‘musā bhaṇāmī’’ti jānāti, bhaṇitepi ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇita’’nti jānāti, so āpattiyā na kāretabbo. Pubbabhāgo hi pamāṇataro. Tasmiṃ asati davā bhaṇitaṃ vā ravā bhaṇitaṃ vā hotī’’ti.
在这里,必须舍弃“以那心识知”和“心识的聚合”。所谓应舍弃“以那心识知”,意思是:用“我要说假话”这个心去知道,又用同一个心去知道“我正在说假话”以及“我已经说了假话”——这样就是在同一个心的三个刹那里知道。这种“以那心识知”应当舍弃,因为一个心不可能知道它自己,就像一把剑不可能砍断它自己一样。不过,前一个心作为后一个心生起的条件,生起之后就灭去了。因此这样说:巴利
Ettha ca taṃñāṇatā ca ñāṇasamodhānañca pariccajitabbaṃ. Taṃñāṇatā pariccajitabbāti yena cittena ‘‘musā bhaṇissa’’nti jānāti, teneva ‘‘musā bhaṇāmī’’ti ca ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇita’’nti ca jānātīti evaṃ ekacitteneva tīsu khaṇesu jānātīti ayaṃ taṃññaṇatā pariccajitabbā, na hi sakkā teneva cittena taṃ cittaṃ jānituṃ yathā na sakkā teneva asinā so asi chinditunti. Purimaṃ purimaṃ pana cittaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa cittassa tathā uppattiyā paccayo hutvā nirujjhati. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
前分本身就是衡量标准,只要它还在,就不会没有。
“只要有前分,其余两支就不会没有”这种说法是不成立的,所谓“语”是三分量的。巴利
‘‘Pamāṇaṃ pubbabhāgova, tasmiṃ sati na hessati; Sesadvayanti nattheta, miti vācā tivaṅgikā’’ti.
“应当舍弃智的聚合”——这三种心不应该被理解为在同一刹那生起。因为,这个所谓的心——巴利
‘‘Ñāṇasamodhānaṃ pariccajitabba’’nti etāni tīṇi cittāni ekakkhaṇe uppajjantīti na gahetabbāni. Idañhi cittaṃ nāma –
前一个心还没有灭去时,后一个心不会生起。
因为不间断地生起,所以看起来就像只有一个。巴利
Aniruddhamhi paṭhame, na uppajjati pacchimaṃ; Nirantaruppajjanato, ekaṃ viya pakāsati.
从此以后,如果有人明知是假话还说“我入了初禅”,那么因为他持有“我没有初禅”这样的见解,这确实就是他的执见。同样,“我没有初禅”也是他所认可、所喜欢的。他的心性本来就是“我没有初禅”。可是当他想要说假话时,就把那见解,或者连同见解一起的认可,或者连同见解和认可一起的喜好,或者连同见解、认可和喜好一起的状态,统统抛开、放下、掩盖起来,把它当成不存在而说出口。因此,为了说明这些情况中支分的差别,就说了“以四种方式”等话。又因为在《附随》里说到“八支妄语”,与此处所指的想相应,所以在这里还应当结合另一种理路,即“以八种方式”。巴利
Ito paraṃ pana yvāyaṃ ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’nti sampajānamusā bhaṇati, yasmā so ‘‘natthi me paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’nti evaṃdiṭṭhiko hoti, tassa hi atthevāyaṃ laddhi. Tathā ‘‘natthi me paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’nti evamassa khamati ceva ruccati ca. Evaṃsabhāvameva cassa cittaṃ ‘‘natthi me paṭhamaṃ jhāna’’nti. Yadā pana musā vattukāmo hoti, tadā taṃ diṭṭhiṃ vā diṭṭhiyā saha khantiṃ vā diṭṭhikhantīhi saddhiṃ ruciṃ vā, diṭṭhikhantirucīhi saddhiṃ bhāvaṃ vā vinidhāya nikkhipitvā paṭicchādetvā abhūtaṃ katvā bhaṇati, tasmā tesampi vasena aṅgabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūhākārehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parivāre ca ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko musāvādo’’ti (paṭi. 328) vuttattā tattha adhippetāya saññāya saddhiṃ aññopi idha ‘‘aṭṭhahākārehī’’ti eko nayo yojetabbo.
在这里,“排除见”是就强有力的法的排除来说的。“排除容忍”等,则是就比它更弱的法的排除来说的。“排除想”在这里则是一切最弱的法的排除。因为,连想都不排除,却还能有意识地妄语,这是不可能的。然而,由于用“我将证得”等未来时的说法并不构成波罗夷,所以应知“已证得”等过去时和现在时的说法才是这里所提到的。巴利
Ettha ca vinidhāya diṭṭhinti balavadhammavinidhānavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Vinidhāya khantintiādīni tato dubbaladubbalānaṃ vinidhānavasena. Vinidhāya saññanti idaṃ panettha sabbadubbaladhammavinidhānaṃ. Saññāmattampi nāma avinidhāya sampajānamusā bhāsissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Yasmā pana ‘‘samāpajjissāmī’’tiādinā anāgatavacanena pārājikaṃ na hoti, tasmā ‘‘samāpajji’’ntiādīni atītavattamānapadāneva pāṭhe vuttānīti veditabbāni.
207 207. 从这里往后,在这整个清净大品中,一切也都是浅显易懂的。因为在这里,除了在烦恼断除句的逐句解释中,“我的贪已舍、已吐”等词句的含义之外,没有什么是用这种抉择不能了知的。这里说明如下:此处“已舍”是就舍弃自性而说的;“已吐”是就显示不再执取的状态而说的;“已脱”是就脱离相续而说的;“已断”是就显示即使已脱离也随处不住而说的;“已弃”是就显示舍弃先前所执取之物而说的;“已扬弃”是就因圣道令其惊惧、从而显示不再依附而说的——这个含义要从语言学中去探求;“已彻底扬弃”则是就显示善加惊惧之后,连极微细的烦恼也不再依附而说的。巴利
207. Ito paraṃ sabbampi imasmiṃ suddhikamahāvāre uttānatthameva. Na hettha taṃ atthi – yaṃ iminā vinicchayena na sakkā bhaveyya viññātuṃ, ṭhapetvā kilesappahānapadassa padabhājane ‘‘rāgo me catto vanto’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ. Svāyaṃ vuccati – ettha hi cattoti idaṃ sakabhāvapariccajanavasena vuttaṃ. Vantoti idaṃ puna anādiyanabhāvadassanavasena. Muttoti idaṃ santatito vimocanavasena. Pahīnoti idaṃ muttassāpi kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasena. Paṭinissaṭṭhoti idaṃ pubbe ādinnapubbassa paṭinissaggadassanavasena. Ukkheṭitoti idaṃ ariyamaggena uttāsitattā puna anallīyanabhāvadassanavasena. Svāyamattho saddasatthato pariyesitabbo . Samukkheṭitoti idaṃ suṭṭhu uttāsetvā aṇusahagatassāpi puna anallīyanabhāvadassanavasena vuttanti.
215 在“欲说品”这一段里,“以三种方式”等的含义,以及该段中所有省略和分类的差别,都应按照这里所说的方法来理解。这里之所以这样说,只是为了堵住那些恶人找借口的空间——他们想:“我由于说错了,本想说别的事却说了另一个,所以我没有犯戒。”就像在想舍弃学处时,心里想说“我舍弃佛”,口中却说成“我舍弃法”等等,不管他说的是哪个,因为已经落在舍弃学处的范围内,他就是舍弃了学处。同样,在初禅等上人法方面,心里想说其中某一项,口中却说成另一项,不管他说的是哪个,因为已经落在这个范围内,他就是犯波罗夷。如果听他说的人当下就明白这个意思,那么这里“了知”的特征,应当按舍弃学处中已说的方法来理解。巴利
215. Vattukāmavārepi ‘‘tīhākārehī’’tiādīnaṃ attho, vārapeyyālappabhedo ca sabbo idha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Kevalañhi yaṃ ‘‘mayā virajjhitvā aññaṃ vattukāmena aññaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā natthi mayhaṃ āpattī’’ti evaṃ okāsagavesakānaṃ pāpapuggalānaṃ okāsanisedhanatthaṃ vutto. Yatheva hi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattukāmo ‘‘dhammaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādīsu sikkhāpaccakkhānapadesu yaṃ vā taṃ vā vadantopi khette otiṇṇattā sikkhāpaccakkhātakova hoti; evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu uttarimanussadhammapadesu yaṃkiñci ekaṃ vattukāmo tato aññaṃ yaṃ vā taṃ vā vadantopi khette otiṇṇattā pārājikova hoti. Sace yassa vadati, so tamatthaṃ taṅkhaṇaññeva jānāti. Jānanalakkhaṇañcettha sikkhāpaccakkhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
这里有一个区别:舍弃学处不能通过手印成立,而虚妄宣称上人法即使通过手印也能成立。如果有人用手的变化等肢体动作,向一个处于能表达、能理解状态的人宣称虚妄的上人法,而对方也明白这个意思,那就犯波罗夷。但如果听的人不明白,心想“他在说什么”,或者产生疑惑,或者经过长时间追问之后才明白,那就归入“不明白”的情况。对不明白的人说了,犯偷兰遮。如果有人对禅那等既没有自己证得,也不是通过学习、提问等而知道,只是听过“禅那”或“解脱”这个说法而已,当别人说的时候,他只要知道“据说他是在说入禅那”这么一点,就算“知道”。对这样的人说了,就犯波罗夷。至于其余对一人、两人或多人,限定或非限定的各种差别,都应按照舍学处那段里所说的方法来理解。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hatthamuddāya sīsaṃ na otarati. Idaṃ abhūtārocanaṃ hatthamuddāyapi otarati. Yo hi hatthavikārādīhipi aṅgapaccaṅgacopanehi abhūtaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ viññattipathe ṭhitassa puggalassa āroceti, so ca tamatthaṃ jānāti, pārājikova hoti. Atha pana yassa āroceti, so na jānāti ‘‘ki ayaṃ bhaṇatī’’ti, saṃsayaṃ vā āpajjati, ciraṃ vīmaṃsitvā vā pacchā jānāti, appaṭivijānanto icceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Evaṃ appaṭivijānantassa vutte thullaccayaṃ hoti. Yo pana jhānādīni attano adhigamavasena vā uggahaparipucchādivasena vā na jānāti, kevalaṃ jhānanti vā vimokkhoti vā vacanamattameva sutaṃ hoti, sopi tena vutte ‘‘jhānaṃ kira samāpajjinti esa vadatī’’ti yadi ettakamattampi jānāti, jānāticceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tassa vutte pārājikameva. Seso ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā bahūnaṃ vā niyamitāniyamitavasena viseso sabbo sikkhāpaccakkhānakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
与缘相应的段落讨论巴利
Paccayapaṭisaṃyuttavārakathā
220 在“与资具相应”这一节里,也要先按照前面讲过的方法,了解所有省略分类的差别,以及前面已出现词语的含义,然后先这样把握巴利文的顺序。这里说了五种主格句式:“谁住在你的精舍,谁受用你的衣,谁受用你的钵食,谁受用你的坐卧处,谁受用你的病缘医药资具”;五种具格句式:“由谁受用了你的精舍”等;五种宾格句式:“你为了谁而布施精舍”等。依据这些,再结合这里所说的“空屋”一词,就应了解前面所说初禅等一切项目中省略分类的差别。不过,因为是用“谁住在你的精舍”“由谁受用了你的精舍”“你为了谁而布施精舍”这样的不同方式来说,而且没有说出“我”,所以即使是对能辨认的人说,这里也犯偷兰遮;对不能辨认的人说,则犯突吉罗。这就是这里的判定。巴利
220. Paccayapaṭisaṃyuttavārepi – sabbaṃ vārapeyyālabhedaṃ pubbe āgatapadānañca atthaṃ vuttanayeneva ñatvā pāḷikkamo tāva evaṃ jānitabbo. Ettha hi ‘‘yo te vihāre vasi, yo te cīvaraṃ paribhuñji, yo te piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñji, yo te senāsanaṃ paribhuñji, yo te gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṃ paribhuñjī’’ti ime pañca paccattavacanavārā, ‘‘yena te vihāro paribhutto’’tiādayo pañca karaṇavacanavārā, ‘‘yaṃ tvaṃ āgamma vihāraṃ adāsī’’tiādayo pañca upayogavacanavārā vuttā , tesaṃ vasena idha vuttena suññāgārapadena saddhiṃ pubbe vuttesu paṭhamajjhānādīsu sabbapadesu vārapeyyālabhedo veditabbo. ‘‘Yo te vihāre, yena te vihāro, yaṃ tvaṃ āgamma vihāra’’nti evaṃ pariyāyena vuttattā pana ‘‘aha’’nti ca avuttattā paṭivijānantassa vuttepi idha thullaccayaṃ, apaṭivijānantassa dukkaṭanti ayamettha vinicchayo.
无犯的分类讨论巴利
Anāpattibhedakathā
像这样,先按广说的方式展示了犯戒的各种差别,现在要说明什么情况不算犯戒,于是说出“由增上慢而无犯”等话。其中,“由增上慢”是指因为误以为自己已经证得了某种境界而表现出来,这不算犯戒。“没有吹嘘意图”是指:并没有欺骗、邪行的企图,没有想吹嘘自己,只是在同梵行者面前宣说别的法义,这不算犯戒。癫狂者等情况和前面说的一样。但这里指的是最初犯戒的婆求摩河畔的比丘们,他们不算犯戒。巴利
Evaṃ vitthāravasena āpattibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni anāpattiṃ dassento ‘‘anāpatti adhimānenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha adhimānenāti adhigatamānena samudācarantassa anāpatti. Anullapanādhippāyassāti kohaññe icchācāre aṭhatvā anullapanādhippāyassa sabrahmacārīnaṃ santike aññaṃ byākarontassa anāpatti. Ummattakādayo pubbe vuttanayāeva. Idha pana ādikammikā vaggumudātīriyā bhikkhū. Tesaṃ anāpattīti.
在等起等分类中,这条学处有三种等起:用手势示意的人,从身和心生起;用言语表达的人,从语和心生起;两者都用的人,从身、语、心三方面生起。它是造作、有想解脱、有心、世间所呵责、身业、语业、不善心,并且涉及三种受——因为即使笑着说话,也是与喜受相应;即使因为害怕而说话,也是与忧受相应;即使以中舍状态说话,也是与舍受相应。巴利
Samuṭṭhānādīsu idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ – hatthamuddāya ārocentassa kāyacittato, vacībhedena ārocentassa vācācittato, ubhayaṃ karontassa kāyavācācittato samuṭṭhāti. Kiriyaṃ, saññāvimokkhaṃ, sacittakaṃ, lokavajjaṃ, kāyakammaṃ, vacīkammaṃ, akusalacittaṃ, tivedanaṃ hasantopi hi somanassiko ullapati bhāyantopi majjhattopīti.
已调伏事例的注释巴利
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
223 在调伏事缘中,关于增上慢的那一事缘,和随制部分所说的一样。巴利
223. Vinītavatthūsu – adhimānavatthu anupaññattiyaṃ vuttanayameva.
在第二事缘中,“发愿”是指先立下心愿。他心里想:“这样一来,人们就会看重我。”也就是说,人们会因为我住在林野,而认为我证得了阿罗汉果,或至少达到了有学地,因此我会受到世间的恭敬、尊重、敬奉和供养。犯恶作罪:带着这样的愿心,心想“我要住在林野”而迈步走去,每走一步都犯一个恶作罪。同样,在林野里搭小屋、经行、坐下、躺卧、穿下衣、披上衣等一切事情中,每做一个动作都犯恶作罪。所以,不应该以这种方式住在林野。因为这样住的人,不管有没有得到别人的看重,都照样犯恶作罪。但是,如果有人受持了头陀支,心想“我要守护头陀支”;或者心想“我住在村落附近,心会散乱,林野才适合我”;或者心想“我进入林野后,一定能证得三种远离中的某一种”;或者心想“我进入林野后,如果没证到阿罗汉果,就绝不出来”;或者心想“住在林野是世尊所赞叹的,我住在林野的话,很多同梵行者也会离开村落附近,成为林野住者”——像这样,怀着没有过失的意愿想住林野的人,就应该住。巴利
Dutiyavatthusmiṃ – paṇidhāyāti patthanaṃ katvā. Evaṃ maṃ jano sambhāvessatīti evaṃ araññe vasantaṃ maṃ jano arahatte vā sekkhabhūmiyaṃ vā sambhāvessati, tato lokassa sakkato bhavissāmi garukato mānito pūjitoti. Āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ paṇidhāya ‘‘araññe vasissāmī’’ti gacchantassa padavāre padavāre dukkaṭaṃ. Tathā araññe kuṭikaraṇacaṅkamananisīdananivāsanapāvuraṇādīsu sabbakiccesu payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ araññe na vasitabbaṃ. Evaṃ vasanto hi sambhāvanaṃ labhatu vā mā vā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Yo pana samādinnadhutaṅgo ‘‘dhutaṅgaṃ rakkhissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘gāmante me vasato cittaṃ vikkhipati, araññaṃ sappāya’’nti cintetvā vā ‘‘addhā araññe tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ aññataraṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘araññaṃ pavisitvā arahattaṃ apāpuṇitvā na nikkhamissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘araññavāso nāma bhagavatā pasattho, mayi ca araññe vasante bahū sabrahmacārino gāmantaṃ hitvā āraññakā bhavissantī’’ti vā evaṃ anavajjavāsaṃ vasitukāmo hoti, tena vasitabbaṃ.
在第三件事上也是如此:从端正前进等(威仪步态),心想“我把威仪步态整理好之后就去托钵”那一刻开始,一直到吃完饭为止,每一个动作都犯恶作。不管有没有得到别人的认可,都只是恶作。不过,如果是为了圆满犍度义务和应当学义务,或者为了让同梵行者看了生起效仿之心,而以令人信服的进退举止等威仪进村托钵,在智者看来是没有过失的。巴利
Tatiyavatthusmimpi – ‘‘abhikkantādīni saṇṭhapetvā piṇḍāya carissāmī’’ti nivāsanapārupanakiccato pabhuti yāva bhojanapariyosānaṃ tāva payoge payoge dukkaṭaṃ. Sambhāvanaṃ labhatu vā mā vā dukkaṭameva. Khandhakavattasekhiyavattaparipūraṇatthaṃ pana sabrahmacārīnaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanatthaṃ vā pāsādikehi abhikkamapaṭikkamādīhi piṇḍāya pavisanto anupavajjo viññūnanti.
在第四和第五件事里——“那位住在你精舍的人”这里,因为没有说到“我”,所以不构成波罗夷。只有把自己代入进去那样表露,才说是波罗夷。巴利
Catutthapañcamavatthūsu – ‘‘yo te vihāre vasī’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva ‘‘aha’’nti avuttattā pārājikaṃ natthi. Attupanāyikameva hi samudācarantassa pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ.
“决意经行”等说法,和前面所讲的完全一样。巴利
Paṇidhāya caṅkamītiādīni heṭṭhā vuttanayāneva.
在结的章节里,当有人说“结已断”“十结已断”或者“一结已断”时,所传达的就是烦恼的断除,因此犯波罗夷。巴利
Saṃyojanavatthusmiṃ – saṃyojanā pahīnātipi ‘‘dasa saṃyojanā pahīnā’’tipi ‘‘ekaṃ saṃyojanaṃ pahīna’’ntipi vadato kilesappahānameva ārocitaṃ hoti, tasmā pārājikaṃ.
224 在隐秘处的情形:说“我到了隐秘处,我是应供者”,只是嘴上说说,并不是心里真的这样想。所以这里判为恶作。巴利
224. Rahovatthūsu – raho ullapatīti ‘‘rahogato arahā aha’’nti vadati, na manasā cintitameva karoti. Tenettha dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
住处事和看护事也按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Vihāravatthuupaṭṭhānavatthu ca vuttanayameva.
225 225. 在“不难事”这部分:那位比丘有这样的见解——“只有圣者才是世尊的弟子。”因此他说:“那些世尊的弟子应当这样说。”因为他的意图是:“对持戒并且已经开始修观的人来说,要解说其他(果位)并不困难,他有能力证得阿罗汉果。”所以他说:“我的意图是不虚夸。”巴利
225. Na dukkaravatthusmiṃ – tassa bhikkhuno ayaṃ laddhi – ‘‘ariyapuggalāva bhagavato sāvakā’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘ye kho te bhagavato sāvakā te evaṃ vadeyyu’’nti. Yasmā cassa ayamadhippāyo – ‘‘sīlavatā āraddhavipassakena na dukkaraṃ aññaṃ byākātuṃ, paṭibalo so arahattaṃ pāpuṇitu’’nti. Tasmā ‘‘anullapanādhippāyo aha’’nti āha.
在精进这件事上,“应当成就”的意思是:能够成就、能够完成、能够生起。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Vīriyavatthusmiṃ ārādhanīyoti sakkā ārādhetuṃ sampādetuṃ nibbattetunti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在死亡这件事上,那位比丘是出于这样的考虑才说“贤友,我不畏惧死亡”:如果有人生起追悔,那他才该害怕;而我的戒清净,没有值得追悔的地方,我为什么要怕死呢?因此他没有犯戒。巴利
Maccuvatthusmiṃ so bhikkhu ‘‘yassa vippaṭisāro uppajjati, so bhāyeyya. Mayhaṃ pana avippaṭisāravatthukāni parisuddhāni sīlāni, svāhaṃ kiṃ maraṇassa bhāyissāmī’’ti etamatthavasaṃ paṭicca ‘‘nāhaṃ āvuso maccuno bhāyāmī’’ti āha. Tenassa anāpatti.
在追悔事上也是同样的道理。此后那三件事,和精进事完全类似。巴利
Vippaṭisāravatthusmimpi eseva nayo. Tato parāni tīṇi vatthūni vīriyavatthusadisāneva.
在感受所依的第一类里,那位比丘先依靠反复思择的力量,安住在堪忍忍耐中,说道:“贤友,并非任何人都能忍受。”因此他没有犯戒。巴利
Vedanāvatthūsupaṭhamasmiṃ tāva so bhikkhu paṭisaṅkhānabalena adhivāsanakhantiyaṃ ṭhatvā ‘‘nāvuso sakkā yena vā tena vā adhivāsetu’’nti āha. Tenassa anāpatti.
在第二类情况里,因为没有把它当作自身来对照,而是以委婉的方式说“贤友,凡夫做不到”,所以犯的是土喇咤亚罪。巴利
Dutiye pana attupanāyikaṃ akatvā ‘‘nāvuso sakkā puthujjanenā’’ti pariyāyena vuttattā thullaccayaṃ.
226 226. 关于婆罗门的故事。据说那位婆罗门并不只是说“来吧,尊敬的阿拉汉们”。凡是从他口中说出的话,全都跟阿拉汉之说有关,比如“给阿拉汉们铺设座位,奉上洗足水,让阿拉汉们洗脚”。他这番话是因为信仰的习性,是凭自己信心的力量所激发出来的言语。因此世尊说:“比丘们,出于信心的言语,无犯。”不过,当比丘被人这样称呼时,不应该满心欢喜地享用资具,而应该这样用功:“我要圆满能导向阿拉汉的修行之道。”巴利
226.Brāhmaṇavatthūsuso kira brāhmaṇo na kevalaṃ ‘‘āyantu bhonto arahanto’’ti āha. Yaṃ yaṃ panassa vacanaṃ mukhato niggacchati, sabbaṃ ‘‘arahantānaṃ āsanāni paññapetha, pādodakaṃ detha, arahanto pāde dhovantū’’ti arahantavādapaṭisaṃyuttaṃyeva. Taṃ panassa pasādabhaññaṃ saddhācaritattā attano saddhābalena samussāhitassa vacanaṃ. Tasmā bhagavā ‘‘anāpatti, bhikkhave, pasādabhaññe’’ti āha. Evaṃ vuccamānena pana bhikkhunā na haṭṭhatuṭṭheneva paccayā paribhuñjitabbā, ‘‘arahattasampāpikaṃ paṭipadaṃ paripūressāmī’’ti evaṃ yogo karaṇīyoti.
其他解说的事例,和结的事例是一样的。在俗家的事例里,那位比丘因为对在家身份不感兴趣、无所希求,才说:“贤友,像我这样的人确实做不到。”他说这话并不是为了自夸,所以他没有犯戒。巴利
Aññabyākaraṇavatthūnisaṃyojanavatthusadisāneva. Agāravatthusmiṃ so bhikkhu gihibhāve anatthikatāya anapekkhatāya ‘‘abhabbo kho āvuso mādiso’’ti āha, na ullapanādhippāyena. Tenassa anāpatti.
227 227. 在“欲被遮止”这件事上,那位比丘对事欲和烦恼欲,仅以世间层面的过患观察,就无所执著。因此他说:“贤友,我的欲已被遮止。”所以他不犯戒。这里“已被遮止”的意思是已被关闭、已被阻挡、已被拒绝。巴利
227.Āvaṭakāmavatthusmiṃ so bhikkhu vatthukāmesu ca kilesakāmesu ca lokiyeneva ādīnavadassanena nirapekkho. Tasmā ‘‘āvaṭā me āvuso kāmā’’ti āha. Tenassa anāpatti. Ettha ca āvaṭāti āvāritā nivāritā, paṭikkhittāti attho.
那位比丘在欢喜的这件事上,因为对教法没有不满,又在诵习、问询等事上心怀欢喜,所以说:“贤友,我怀着无上的欢喜而欢喜。”他并不是出于自夸的意图。因此他不犯戒。巴利
Abhirativatthusmiṃ so bhikkhu sāsane anukkaṇṭhitabhāvena uddesaparipucchādīsu ca abhiratabhāvena ‘‘abhirato ahaṃ āvuso paramāya abhiratiyā’’ti āha, na ullapanādhippāyena. Tenassa anāpatti.
关于离去之处:如果有人先划定一处住处、一座帐幕、一个界场,或任何地方,并作出约定说“谁最先从这里离开”,而有人为了让人知道“我是阿拉汉”而最先从那个地方离开,就犯波罗夷。但如果有人是为了阿阇梨、和尚的事,或者为了父母的事,或者为了托钵乞食,或者为了诵习、问法,或者为了其他类似的正当事务,而越过那个地方离开,就无犯。即使他这样离开之后,后来生起了这样的欲念:“我现在不去那里了,这样他们就会认为我是阿拉汉”,也无犯。巴利
Pakkamanavatthusmiṃ yo imamhā āvāsā paṭhamaṃ pakkamissatīti evaṃ āvāsaṃ vā maṇḍapaṃ vā sīmaṃ vā yaṃkiñci ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā katāya katikāya yo ‘‘maṃ arahāti jānantū’’ti tamhā ṭhānā paṭhamaṃ pakkamati, pārājiko hoti. Yo pana ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vā kiccena mātāpitūnaṃ vā kenacideva karaṇīyena bhikkhācāratthaṃ vā uddesaparipucchānaṃ vā atthāya aññena vā tādisena karaṇīyena taṃ ṭhānaṃ atikkamitvā gacchati, anāpatti. Sacepissa evaṃ gatassa pacchā icchācāro uppajjati ‘‘na dānāhaṃ tattha gamissāmi evaṃ maṃ arahāti sambhāvessantī’’ti anāpattiyeva.
如果有人因为某种必须办的事来到那个地方,后来因为诵经、作意等而分心,或者被盗贼等追赶,或者看见乌云起来、想进到不下雨的地方去,因而越过那个地方,那就无犯。坐车去或以神通去的人,也不犯波罗夷;只有一步一步用脚走过去才犯。如果和共同立约的那些人一起走,不分谁先谁后,就不犯。因为这样走的时候,大家都会互相守护。假如划定某个地方,比如在帐幕、树下等处,立下约定说“谁在这里坐或经行,我们就知道他是阿拉汉”,或者摆好花之后说“谁拿这些花去供养,我们就知道他是阿拉汉”,用这种方式立约,那么出于自己的欲望而这样做的人,仍然犯波罗夷。假如有居士在路途中建了精舍,或者放好了衣等物品,说“那些阿拉汉请住在这个精舍里,也请拿这些衣等物品”,那么出于自己的欲望而住在那里,或者拿那些衣等物品的人,也仍然犯波罗夷。不过,这是不合法的约定,所以不应该做。其他类似的做法,比如“在这三个月里,所有人都要住林野,或者受持常乞食支等其余头陀支”,或者“所有人都要是漏尽者”,也不应该做。因为比丘们从各处来聚集,其中有些人软弱无力,无法遵守这样的规定,所以这样的规定也不应该做。至于“在这三个月里,所有人都不要教诫,不要问询,不要度人出家,要持禁语,即使住在界外的人,僧团所得的利养也要分给他”等等,就更不应该做了。巴利
Yopi kenacideva karaṇīyena taṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā sajjhāyamanasikārādivasena aññavihito vā hutvā corādīhi vā anubaddho meghaṃ vā uṭṭhitaṃ disvā anovassakaṃ pavisitukāmo taṃ ṭhānaṃ atikkamati, anāpatti. Yānena vā iddhiyā vā gacchantopi pārājikaṃ nāpajjati, padagamaneneva āpajjati. Tampi yehi saha katikā katā, tehi saddhiṃ apubbaṃacarimaṃ gacchanto nāpajjati. Evaṃ gacchantā hi sabbepi aññamaññaṃ rakkhanti. Sacepi maṇḍaparukkhamūlādīsu kiñci ṭhānaṃ paricchinditvā ‘‘yo ettha nisīdati vā caṅkamati vā, taṃ arahāti jānissāma’’ pupphāni vā ṭhapetvā ‘‘yo imāni gahetvā pūjaṃ karissati, taṃ arahāti jānissāmā’’tiādinā nayena katikā katā hoti, tatrāpi icchācāravasena tathā karontassa pārājikameva. Sacepi upāsakena antarāmagge vihāro vā kato hoti, cīvarādīni vā ṭhapitāni honti, ‘‘ye arahanto te imasmiṃ vihāre vasantu, cīvarādīni ca gaṇhantū’’ti. Tatrāpi icchācāravasena vasantassa vā cīvarādīni vā gaṇhantassa pārājikameva . Etaṃ pana adhammikakatikavattaṃ , tasmā na kātabbaṃ, aññaṃ vā evarūpaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ temāsabbhantare sabbeva āraññakā hontu, piṇḍapātikaṅgādiavasesadhutaṅgadharā vā atha vā sabbeva khīṇāsavā hontū’’ti evamādi. Nānāverajjakā hi bhikkhū sannipatanti. Tattha keci dubbalā appathāmā evarūpaṃ vattaṃ anupāletuṃ na sakkonti. Tasmā evarūpampi vattaṃ na kātabbaṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ temāsaṃ sabbeheva na uddisitabbaṃ, na paripucchitabbaṃ, na pabbājetabbaṃ, mūgabbataṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ, bahi sīmaṭṭhassāpi saṅghalābho dātabbo’’ti evamādikaṃ pana na kātabbameva.
228 在《相相应》中,这位被称为“具寿相者”的具寿,就是相长老。应当知道,他是在一千名结发行者当中,以“善来比丘”的方式受具足戒,在《燃烧经》讲完时证得阿罗汉果,是一位大弟子。又因为他具备相好圆满、一切特征具足、如同梵天一般的身体,所以被称为“相者”。而大目犍连长老则在出家后的第七天证得阿罗汉果,是第二位上首弟子。巴利
228.Lakkhaṇasaṃyutte yvāyaṃ āyasmā ca lakkhaṇoti lakkhaṇatthero vutto, esa jaṭilasahassassa abbhantare ehibhikkhūpasampadāya upasampanno ādittapariyāyāvasāne arahattappatto eko mahāsāvakoti veditabbo. Yasmā panesa lakkhaṇasampannena sabbākāraparipūrena brahmasamena attabhāvena samannāgato, tasmā lakkhaṇoti saṅkhaṃ gato. Mahāmoggallānatthero pana pabbajitadivasato sattame divase arahattappatto dutiyo aggasāvako.
“现出微笑”是指露出轻微的 smile,也就是显示、展现的意思。那么,长老是见到了什么才现出微笑的呢?是见到了下文经典中提到的一具骨锁——一个投生在饿鬼界的有情,而且是用天眼看到的,不是用净色眼看到的。因为这类生命体不会出现在净色眼的视野范围内。可见到这样的生命体时,本该生起悲悯,为什么反而现出微笑呢?因为他忆念了自己和佛陀的智慧成就。长老见到那有情后,忆念自己的成就:“像我这样还没见到圣谛的人本该得到的就是这种生命体,而我已经解脱了。我真是有福,我真是善得。”他又忆念佛的智慧成就:“啊,世尊佛陀的智慧成就!他教导说:‘比丘们,业的异熟不可思议,不应思惟。’佛陀是亲自证悟之后才教导的,佛陀善通达法界。”就这样忆念佛的智慧成就,所以现出了微笑。不过,漏尽者不会无缘无故地微笑,所以相长老问他:“朋友目犍连,是什么因由,什么原因让你现出微笑?”但长老因为那些没有亲自见到这种投生情况的人很难相信,所以想以世尊为证人来说明,就说:“朋友,时机还没到。”后来在世尊面前被问到时,才以“朋友,我在这里……”等方式作了说明。巴利
Sitaṃ pātvākāsīti mandahasitaṃ pātuakāsi, pakāsayi dassesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ pana disvā thero sitaṃ pātvākāsīti? Upari pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṃ ekaṃ petaloke nibbattaṃ sattaṃ disvā, tañca kho dibbena cakkhunā, na pasādacakkhunā. Pasādacakkhussa hi ete attabhāvā na āpāthaṃ āgacchanti. Evarūpaṃ pana attabhāvaṃ disvā kāruññe kātabbe kasmā sitaṃ pātvākāsīti? Attano ca buddhañāṇassa ca sampattisamanussaraṇato. Tañhi disvā thero ‘‘adiṭṭhasaccena nāma puggalena paṭilabhitabbā evarūpā attabhāvā mutto ahaṃ, lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me’’ti attano ca sampattiṃ anussaritvā ‘‘aho buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇasampatti, yo ‘kammavipāko, bhikkhave, acinteyyo; na cintetabbo’ti (a. ni. 4.77) desesi, paccakkhaṃ vata katvā buddhā desenti, suppaṭividdhā buddhānaṃ dhammadhātū’’ti evaṃ buddhañāṇasampattiñca saritvā sitaṃ pātvākāsīti. Yasmā pana khīṇāsavā nāma na akāraṇā sitaṃ pātukaronti, tasmā taṃ lakkhaṇatthero pucchi – ‘‘ko nu kho āvuso moggallāna hetu, ko paccayo sitassa pātukammāyā’’ti. Thero pana yasmā yehi ayaṃ upapatti sāmaṃ adiṭṭhā, te dussaddhāpayā honti, tasmā bhagavantaṃ sakkhiṃ katvā byākātukāmatāya ‘‘akālo kho, āvuso’’tiādimāha . Tato bhagavato santike puṭṭho ‘‘idhāhaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā nayena byākāsi.
在这其中,骨锁指的是白色、没有肉也没有血的骨头堆。鹫、鸦、鹰这些,也应该理解为夜叉鹫、夜叉鸦、夜叉鹰。因为普通的鹫等鸟类,这种景象根本不会出现在它们眼前。追随又追随,就是不停地追赶。啄食,就是刺穿之后过去。也有读作vitudenti的,意思是用像剑刃一样锋利的铁喙去刺穿。它发出痛苦的声音:这里的sudaṃ是语助词,意思是那具骨锁发出痛苦、病痛的声音。据说,为了感受不善业的果报,即使长达一由旬的这样的生命体也会投生出来,而且感官极其敏锐,就像熟透的脓疮一样;所以那具骨锁被强烈的痛苦逼迫,发出了那样的声音。这样说完之后,具寿大目犍连又为了显示对众生的悲悯所引发的法悚惧,说:贤友,那时我心里生起了这样的念头:真是稀有啊!巴利
Tattha aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikanti setaṃ nimmaṃsalohitaṃ aṭṭhisaṅghātaṃ. Gijjhāpi kākāpi kulalāpīti etepi yakkhagijjhā ceva yakkhakākā ca yakkhakulalā ca paccetabbā. Pākatikānaṃ pana gijjhādīnaṃ āpāthampi etaṃ rūpaṃ nāgacchati. Anupatitvā anupatitvāti anubandhitvā anubandhitvā. Vituḍentīti vinivijjhitvā gacchanti. Vitudentīti vā pāṭho, asidhārūpamehi tikhiṇehi lohatuṇḍehi vijjhantīti attho. Sā sudaṃ aṭṭassaraṃ karotīti ettha sudanti nipāto, sā aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikā aṭṭassaraṃ āturassaraṃ karotīti attho. Akusalavipākānubhavanatthaṃ kira yojanappamāṇāpi tādisā attabhāvā nibbattanti, pasādussadā ca honti pakkagaṇḍasadisā; tasmā sā aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikā balavavedanāturā tādisaṃ saramakāsīti. Evañca pana vatvā puna āyasmā mahāmoggallāno ‘‘vaṭṭagāmikasattā nāma evarūpā attabhāvā na muccantī’’ti sattesu kāruññaṃ paṭicca uppannaṃ dhammasaṃvegaṃ dassento ‘‘tassa mayhaṃ āvuso etadahosi; acchariyaṃ vata bho’’tiādimāha.
比丘们讥嫌:那些没有亲自证见这个饿鬼投生的人,就在那里讥嫌。世尊为了显示这位长老的威力,说道:“诸比丘,弟子们确实像眼一样活着……”等等。其中,“像眼一样”是说眼在他们当中已经生起、已经产生,也就是拥有了眼、生起了眼,安住在已经生起眼的状态。第二句也是同样的道理。在“yatra hi nāma”这句话里,“yatra”是表示原因的词。这里的义理关联是这样的:正因为弟子也能这样了知、看见或亲自证见,所以我说:“诸比丘,弟子们确实像眼一样活着;诸比丘,弟子们确实像智一样活着。”巴利
Bhikkhū ujjhāyantīti yesaṃ sā petūpapatti appaccakkhā, te ujjhāyanti . Bhagavā pana therassānubhāvaṃ pakāsento ‘‘cakkhubhūtā vata bhikkhave sāvakā viharantī’’tiādimāha. Tattha cakkhu bhūtaṃ jātaṃ uppannaṃ tesanti cakkhubhūtā; bhūtacakkhukā uppannacakkhukā, cakkhuṃ uppādetvā, viharantīti attho. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Yatra hi nāmāti ettha yatrāti kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tatrāyamatthayojanā; yasmā nāma sāvakopi evarūpaṃ ñassati vā dakkhati vā sakkhiṃ vā karissati, tasmā avocumha – ‘‘cakkhubhūtā vata bhikkhave sāvakā viharanti, ñāṇabhūtā vata bhikkhave sāvakā viharantī’’ti.
比丘们,我在菩提树下以证悟一切知智,亲自现量了知了无量的轮围界、无量的众生类、生趣、生处和住处,那时我就已经见到了那个众生,所以说“我先前就已见到那个众生”。巴利
Pubbeva me so bhikkhave satto diṭṭhoti bodhimaṇḍe sabbaññutañāṇappaṭivedhena appamāṇesu cakkavāḷesu appamāṇe sattanikāye bhavagatiyoniṭhitinivāse ca paccakkhaṃ karontena mayā pubbeva so satto diṭṭhoti vadati.
杀牛者,就是靠杀牛、割肉、卖肉来谋生的人。所谓“就是那业的异熟残余”,指的是他由种种思所造作、一次又一次积累起来的业。也就是说,使他投生到地狱的那种思,它的异熟已经耗尽之后,剩下的业或者业相作为所缘,又让他投生到饿鬼等地方去。因此,这种结生,不论是因为和业同类,还是因为和所缘同类,都被称为“就是那业的异熟残余”。而这个众生就是这样投生的,所以说“就是那业的异熟残余”。据说,他从地狱死掉的时候,一堆没有肉的牛骨头成了他的相。他本来想把自己的业藏起来,却像是让有智慧的人看得清清楚楚一样,结果投生成了骨锁饿鬼。巴利
Goghātakoti gāvo vadhitvā vadhitvā aṭṭhito maṃsaṃ mocetvā vikkiṇitvā jīvikakappanakasatto. Tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesenāti tassa nānācetanāhi āyūhitassa aparāpariyakammassa. Tatra hi yāya cetanāya narake paṭisandhi janitā, tassā vipāke parikkhīṇe avasesakammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ katvā puna petādīsu paṭisandhi nibbattati, tasmā sā paṭisandhi kammasabhāgatāya vā ārammaṇasabhāgatāya vā ‘‘tasseva kammassa vipākāvaseso’’ti vuccati. Ayañca satto evaṃ upapanno. Tenāha – ‘‘tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesenā’’ti. Tassa kira narakā cavanakāle nimmaṃsakatānaṃ gunnaṃ aṭṭhirāsi eva nimittaṃ ahosi. So paṭicchannampi taṃ kammaṃ viññūnaṃ pākaṭaṃ viya karonto aṭṭhisaṅkhalikapeto jāto.
229 在《肉片饿鬼事》中,所谓“杀牛者”,就是把牛肉切成肉片,晒干后靠卖干肉来维持生活,过了很多年。因此,当他从地狱死去时,肉片就成了他投生的相,于是他生为肉片饿鬼。巴利
229. Maṃsapesivatthusmiṃ goghātakoti gomaṃsapesiyo katvā sukkhāpetvā vallūravikkayena anekāni vassāni jīvikaṃ kappesi. Tenassa narakā cavanakāle maṃsapesiyeva nimittaṃ ahosi. So maṃsapesipeto jāto.
在《肉块饿鬼事》中,那个捕鸟人抓到鸟之后,在卖的时候把羽毛和皮去掉,只留下肉块来卖,靠这个谋生。因此,当他从地狱死去时,肉块就成了他投生的相,于是他生为肉块饿鬼。巴利
Maṃsapiṇḍavatthusmiṃ so sākuṇiko sakuṇe gahetvā vikkiṇanakāle nippakkhacamme maṃsapiṇḍamatte katvā vikkiṇanto jīvikaṃ kappesi. Tenassa narakā cavanakāle maṃsapiṇḍova nimittaṃ ahosi. So maṃsapiṇḍapeto jāto.
在《无皮羊饿鬼事》里,那个杀羊的人把羊杀死、剥掉皮之后,就靠整具无皮的羊身来维持生活。就像前面说的那样,他临终时,无皮的羊身成了他投生的相,于是他生成了无皮饿鬼。巴利
Nicchavivatthusmiṃ tassa orabbhikassa eḷake vadhitvā niccamme katvā kappitajīvikassa purimanayeneva niccammaṃ eḷakasarīraṃ nimittamahosi. So nicchavipeto jāto.
在剑毛饿鬼这个故事里,那个屠猪的人长年累月用剑宰杀那些被饲料养肥的猪,就靠这个过了一辈子。他举剑杀猪的样子,就成了他临终时现起的相。因此,他死后就投生成了剑毛饿鬼。巴利
Asilomavatthusmiṃ so sūkariko dīgharattaṃ nivāpapuṭṭhe sūkare asinā vadhitvā vadhitvā dīgharattaṃ jīvikaṃ kappesi. Tenassa ukkhittāsikabhāvova nimittaṃ ahosi. Tasmā asilomapeto jāto.
在矛毛饿鬼的故事里,那个猎人到林子里去时,会带上一头鹿和一支矛。每当有野兽靠近那头鹿,他就用矛把它们刺死。他用矛刺杀的这一幕,就成了他临终时现起的相。因此,他死后转生成了矛毛饿鬼。巴利
Sattilomavatthusmiṃ so māgaviko ekaṃ migañca sattiñca gahetvā vanaṃ gantvā tassa migassa samīpaṃ āgatāgate mige sattiyā vijjhitvā māresi, tassa sattiyā vijjhanakabhāvoyeva nimittaṃ ahosi. Tasmā sattilomapeto jāto.
在箭毛饿鬼的故事里,所谓行刑人,就是专门对付国王的罪犯,用各种手段折磨他们,最后用箭把人射死的人。据说他明明知道射中某个部位就会死,还是照样射。他就靠这个谋生,死后堕入地狱;从地狱出来后,凭着剩余业力在这里投生的时候,被箭射中这件事本身就成了投生的征兆。因此,他转生成了箭毛饿鬼。巴利
Usulomavatthusmiṃ kāraṇikoti rājāparādhike anekāhi kāraṇāhi pīḷetvā avasāne kaṇḍena vijjhitvā māraṇakapuriso. So kira asukasmiṃ padese viddho maratīti ñatvāva vijjhati. Tassevaṃ jīvikaṃ kappetvā narake uppannassa tato pakkāvasesena idhūpapattikāle usunā vijjhanabhāvoyeva nimittaṃ ahosi. Tasmā usulomapeto jāto.
在细毛饿鬼的故事里,“驾车者”指的是驯马师。《小义注》里也提到“乔达摩驯马师”。他用刺棒上的尖针刺马,这个行为就成了他投生的相,因此他转生为细毛饿鬼。巴利
Sūcilomavatthusmiṃ sārathīti assadamako. Godamakotipi kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Tassa patodasūciyā vijjhanabhāvoyeva nimittaṃ ahosi. Tasmā sūcilomapeto jāto.
在第二个针毛事中,“告密者”指的是挑拨离间的人。据说,他离间人们,让他们彼此分裂;又在王宫里不断告密,说“这个人有这个东西,那个人做了这件事”,使他们遭遇灾祸和毁灭。因此,就像他当初告密导致人们分裂一样,如今他以针来感受刺穿之苦,以此业作为投生之相,转生为针毛鬼。巴利
Dutiyasūcilomavatthusmiṃ sūcakoti pesuññakārako . So kira manusse aññamaññañca bhindi. Rājakule ca ‘‘imassa imaṃ nāma atthi, iminā idaṃ nāma kata’’nti sūcetvā sūcetvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpesi. Tasmā yathānena sūcetvā manussā bhinnā, tathā sūcīhi bhedanadukkhaṃ paccanubhotuṃ kammameva nimittaṃ katvā sūcilomapeto jāto.
在“睾丸肿大者”这件事里,“村中恶吏”指的是一个裁判官。因为和他的业行相符,他的睾丸变得像水罐、大瓮那么大。他确实是在暗中、隐蔽的地方收受贿赂,靠枉法裁判做出明显的恶行,把有主的东西判成无主的。因此,他原本隐秘的部位就显露了出来。又因为他判罚别人时,把别人难以承受的重担压上去,所以他的隐秘部位就变成了难以承受的重担。又因为在应当站得公正的地方,他却站在那里行不公正,所以他的隐秘部位也出现了不公正的坐姿。巴利
Aṇḍabhāritavatthusmiṃ gāmakūṭoti vinicchayāmacco. Tassa kammasabhāgatāya kumbhamattā mahāghaṭappamāṇā aṇḍā ahesuṃ. So hi yasmā raho paṭicchanna ṭhāne lañjaṃ gahetvā kūṭavinicchayena pākaṭaṃ dosaṃ karonto sāmike assāmike akāsi. Tasmāssa rahassaṃ aṅgaṃ pākaṭaṃ nibbattaṃ. Yasmā daṇḍaṃ paṭṭhapento paresaṃ asayhaṃ bhāraṃ āropesi, tasmāssa rahassaṅgaṃ asayhabhāro hutvā nibbattaṃ. Yasmā yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitena samena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ ṭhatvā visamo ahosi, tasmāssa rahassaṅge visamā nisajjā ahosīti.
在通奸者的事例中,那个众生碰触了别人所保护和守护、有主人的触,以污秽之乐、欲乐让心欢喜,由于业力相应,便碰触粪便之触,投生到那里去承受痛苦。恶婆罗门的事例则是显而易见的。巴利
Pāradārikavatthusmiṃ so satto parassa rakkhitaṃ gopitaṃ sassāmikaṃ phassaṃ phusanto mīḷhasukhena kāmasukhena cittaṃ ramayitvā kammasabhāgatāya gūthaphassaṃ phusanto dukkhamanubhavituṃ tattha nibbatto. Duṭṭhabrāhmaṇavatthu pākaṭameva.
230 在无皮肤女的故事里,女人对自己的触并没有自主权,她却把属于丈夫的触偷走,拿去让别的男人生起爱乐。因此,由于业力相应的缘故,快乐的触被夺走,她转生为无皮肤女,只能感受痛苦的触。巴利
230.Nicchavitthivatthusmiṃ yasmā mātugāmo nāma attano phasse anissaro, sā ca taṃ sāmikassa santakaṃ phassaṃ thenetvā paresaṃ abhiratiṃ uppādesi, tasmā kammasabhāgatāya sukhasamphassā dhaṃsitvā dukkhasamphassaṃ anubhavituṃ nicchavitthī hutvā upapannā.
在“污秽女”这件事里,“污秽”指的是丑陋、难看、令人厌恶。据说她做占卜、做夜叉女奴的工作,对大众说:“只要这样、那样做供养,你们就会得到这样的增长。”她用这种手段骗取大众的香、花等物,让大众执持恶见、邪见。因此,由于业力相应——因为偷了香、花等物,所以变得臭秽;因为让人执持恶见,所以变得丑陋、难看、令人厌恶,就这样投生了。巴利
Maṅgulitthivatthusmiṃ maṅgulinti virūpaṃ duddasikaṃ bībhacchaṃ, sā kira ikkhaṇikākammaṃ yakkhadāsikammaṃ karontī ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca evaṃ balikamme kate ayaṃ nāma tumhākaṃ vaḍḍhi bhavissatī’’ti mahājanassa gandhapupphādīni vañcanāya gahetvā mahājanaṃ duddiṭṭhiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāpesi, tasmā tāya kammasabhāgatāya gandhapupphādīnaṃ thenitattā duggandhā duddassanassa gāhitattā duddasikā virūpā bībhacchā hutvā nibbattā.
在“被烧煮者”这件事里,“被烧煮、被烧湿、被撒炭”的意思是:据说她躺在火葬的炭堆上,挣扎翻滚着被烧,所以叫“被烧煮”——身体被猛火烤熟;又叫“被烧湿”——身体湿淋淋的,一滴滴液体从她身上流下来;又叫“被撒炭”——被炭火撒满全身,因为她下方有像紫矿花颜色的炭火,两侧也有,上方还有炭火落到她身上,所以说“被烧煮、被烧湿、被撒炭”。她因为嫉妒,把炭火撒在情敌身上:据说羯陵伽王有一个舞女,把炭火盆放在身边,一边擦身上的水,一边用手扇风。国王也和她说话,还表现出满意的样子。王后看不下去,心生嫉妒,趁国王刚走,就拿起那个炭火盆,把炭火撒在她身上。她造了这种业,为了感受同样的果报,投生到了饿鬼道。巴利
Okilinivatthusmiṃ uppakkaṃ okiliniṃ okirininti sā kira aṅgāracitake nipannā vipphandamānā viparivattamānā paccati, tasmā uppakkā ceva hoti kharena agginā pakkasarīrā; okilinī ca kilinnasarīrā bindubindūni hissā sarīrato paggharanti. Okirinī ca aṅgārasamparikiṇṇā, tassā hi heṭṭhatopi kiṃsukapupphavaṇṇā aṅgārā, ubhayapassesupi , ākāsatopissā upari aṅgārā patanti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘uppakkaṃ okiliniṃ okirini’’nti. Sā issāpakatā sapattiṃ aṅgārakaṭāhena okirīti tassā kira kaliṅgarañño ekā nāṭakinī aṅgārakaṭāhaṃ samīpe ṭhapetvā gattato udakañca puñchati, pāṇinā ca sedaṃ karoti. Rājāpi tāya saddhiṃ kathañca karoti, parituṭṭhākārañca dasseti. Aggamahesī taṃ asahamānā issāpakatā hutvā acirapakkantassa rañño taṃ aṅgārakaṭāhaṃ gahetvā tassā upari aṅgāre okiri. Sā taṃ kammaṃ katvā tādisaṃyeva vipākaṃ paccanubhavituṃ petaloke nibbattā.
在“杀贼者”这件事里,那个人长期奉国王的命令砍掉盗贼的脑袋,死后投生到饿鬼道,变成了一个没有头的躯干。巴利
Coraghātakavatthusmiṃ so rañño āṇāya dīgharattaṃ corānaṃ sīsāni chinditvā petaloke nibbattanto asīsakaṃ kabandhaṃ hutvā nibbatti.
在“比丘”这件事中,“恶比丘”就是低劣的比丘。据说他享用世间信众布施的四种资具,却不守护身门和语门,以不正当的方式谋生,到处游荡嬉戏。后来,他在地狱中被烧煮了整整一个佛间隔那么长的时间,投生到饿鬼道时,就以和比丘相似的身形投生。在比丘尼、在学尼、沙弥、沙弥尼这几件事中,也是同样的判定。巴利
Bhikkhuvatthusmiṃ pāpabhikkhūti lāmakabhikkhu. So kira lokassa saddhādeyye cattāro paccaye paribhuñjitvā kāyavacīdvārehi asaṃ yato bhinnājīvo cittakeḷiṃ kīḷanto vicari. Tato ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ niraye paccitvā petaloke nibbattanto bhikkhusadiseneva attabhāvena nibbatti. Bhikkhunī-sikkhamānā-sāmaṇera-sāmaṇerīvatthūsupi ayameva vinicchayo.
231 231. 在“温泉”这件事中,“清澈的水”是指清净的水。“冷水”是指清凉的水。“甜水”是指甘甜的水。“白色”是指完全清净,没有苔藓、水草和泥泞。“有良好的码头”是指具备美好的沐浴处。“令人愉悦”是指能让人心生欢喜。“车轮大小”是指像马车车轮那样大。“沸腾而流”是指在那里变得滚烫而流淌。“诸比丘,此水从何处”是指:诸比丘,这水从哪里来。“那湖”就是那个湖。“这水又是从哪里流来的呢?”——据说在毗婆罗山下方,有一个属于地居龙族的龙宫,方圆五百由旬,像天界一样,以宝石铺地,还有园林。龙嬉戏的地方就是那个湖,这股温泉就是从那个湖流出来的。“它从两个大地狱之间流来”:据说王舍城周围有一片大饿鬼界,这股温泉就是从那里两个大铜锅地狱之间流过来的,所以说“沸腾而流”。巴利
231. Tapodāvatthusmiṃ acchodakoti pasannodako. Sītodakoti sītalaudako. Sātodakoti madhurodako. Setakoti parisuddho nissevālapaṇakakaddamo. Suppatitthoti sundarehi titthehi upapanno. Ramaṇīyoti ratijanako. Cakkamattānīti rathacakkappamāṇāni. Kuthitā sandatīti tatrā santattā hutvā sandati. Yatāyaṃ bhikkhaveti yato ayaṃ bhikkhave. So dahoti so rahado. Kuto panāyaṃ sandatīti? Vebhārapabbatassa kira heṭṭhā bhummaṭṭhakanāgānaṃ pañcayojanasatikaṃ nāgabhavanaṃ devalokasadisaṃ maṇimayena talena ārāmuyyānehi ca samannāgataṃ; tattha nāgānaṃ kīḷanaṭṭhāne so udakadaho, tato ayaṃ tapodā sandati. Dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatīti rājagahanagaraṃ kira āviñjetvā mahāpetaloko, tattha dvinnaṃ mahālohakumbhinirayānaṃ antarena ayaṃ tapodā āgacchati, tasmā kuthitā sandatīti.
在战场上生起欢喜,就是指胜利的战鼓四处巡行。长老据说在自己的白天住处和夜间住处坐着,心里思惟:“离车族人训练有素、精通武艺,国王正和他们交战。”他用天眼看见国王战败逃跑。于是他把比丘们叫来,说:“贤友们,你们的护持者国王被离车族人打败了。” “比丘们,目犍连说的是真的。”他在战败的时候加以思惟,说出自己所见到的事,所以说的是真的。巴利
Yuddhavatthusmiṃ nandī caratīti vijayabherī āhiṇḍati. Rājā āvuso licchavīhīti thero kira attano divāṭṭhāne ca rattiṭṭhāne ca nisīditvā ‘‘licchavayo katahatthā katūpāsanā, rājā ca tehi saddhiṃ sampahāraṃ detī’’ti āvajjento dibbena cakkhunā rājānaṃ parājitaṃ palāyamānaṃ addasa. Tato bhikkhū āmantetvā ‘‘rājā āvuso tumhākaṃ upaṭṭhāko licchavīhi pabhaggo’’ti āha. Saccaṃ, bhikkhave, moggallāno āhāti parājikakāle āvajjitvā yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ bhaṇanto saccaṃ āha.
232 232. 在“象入水”这件事中,“萨毗尼迦”就是这样一个名字。“不动之定”是指无动、无摇、远离身语躁动的第四禅定。“诸象”就是象群。“潜入又出”是指潜入、浸入之后又出来。据说它们进入深水,在那里沐浴、饮水,用鼻子吸水后互相喷洒嬉戏着出来,所以说它们“潜入又出”。“作鹤鸣”是指站在河岸边,把鼻子放进嘴里发出鹤鸣声。“听到声音”是指听到了那鹤鸣声。“诸比丘,此定存在,但此定不清净”:目犍连有此定,但此定不清净。据说长老在出家后第七天证得阿罗汉果,在八等至中对五种自在还不熟练,没有好好清净那些障碍禅定的法,只是以作意、入定、决意、出定、观察这些想的概念行事,入第四禅而坐。出定后听到象的声音,便生起“在定中听到了”的想法。因此说:“诸比丘,此定存在,但此定不清净。”巴利
232. Nāgogāhavatthusmiṃ sappinikāyāti evaṃnāmikāya. Āneñjaṃ samādhinti anejaṃ acalaṃ kāyavācāvipphandavirahitaṃ catutthajjhānasamādhiṃ. Nāgānanti hatthīnaṃ. Ogayha uttarantānanti ogayha ogāhetvā puna uttarantānaṃ. Te kira gambhīraṃ udakaṃ otaritvā tattha nhatvā ca pivitvā ca soṇḍāya udakaṃ gahetvā aññamaññaṃ ālolentā uttaranti, tesaṃ evaṃ ogayha uttarantānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Koñcaṃ karontānanti nadītīre ṭhatvā soṇḍaṃ mukhe pakkhipitvā koñcanādaṃ karontānaṃ. Saddaṃ assosinti taṃ koñcanādasaddaṃ assosiṃ. Attheso, bhikkhave, samādhi so ca kho aparisuddhoti atthi eso samādhi moggallānassa, so ca kho parisuddho na hoti. Thero kira pabbajitato sattame divase tadahuarahattappatto aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu pañcahākārehi anāciṇṇavasībhāvo samādhiparipanthake dhamme na suṭṭhu parisodhetvā āvajjanasamāpajjanādhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇānaṃ saññāmattakameva katvā catutthajjhānaṃ appetvā nisinno, jhānaṅgehi vuṭṭhāya nāgānaṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘antosamāpattiyaṃ assosi’’nti evaṃsaññī ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘attheso, bhikkhave, samādhi; so ca kho aparisuddho’’ti.
贤友,在索毗多的事迹中,他说“我忆念五百劫”,意思是“我以一次作意就忆念起来”。如果不是这样,圣弟子们依次以多次作意忆念过去一生一世,这并不稀奇,比丘们也就不会讥嫌了。但因为他说的是一次作意就忆念起来,所以比丘们才讥嫌。诸比丘,索毗多确实有这个能力,但那只限于一生——索毗多说“我忆念一生”,确实是指一生,但那只是紧挨着的前一生,并不是按次第忆念的,这就是他的本意。巴利
Sobhitavatthusmiṃ ahaṃ, āvuso, pañca kappasatāni anussarāmīti ekāvajjanena anussarāmīti āha. Itarathā hi anacchariyaṃ ariyasāvakānaṃ paṭipāṭiyā nānāvajjanena tassa tassa atīte nivāsassa anussaraṇanti na bhikkhū ujjhāyeyyuṃ. Yasmā panesa ‘‘ekāvajjanena anussarāmī’’ti āha, tasmā bhikkhū ujjhāyiṃsu. Atthesā, bhikkhave, sobhitassa, sā ca kho ekāyeva jātīti yaṃ sobhito jātiṃ anussarāmīti āha, atthesā jāti sobhitassa, sā ca kho ekāyeva anantarā na uppaṭipāṭiyā anussaritāti adhippāyo.
那么,他又是怎样忆念这件事的呢?据说,他在五百劫之前,在外道的修行处……巴利
Kathaṃ panāyaṃ etaṃ anussarīti? Ayaṃ kira pañcannaṃ kappasatānaṃ upari titthāyatane
他出家后修成无想定,命终时禅那没有退失,投生到无想有情天。在那里住满寿量后,命终转生到人间,在佛陀的教法中出家,证得三明。他忆念宿住时,看到这一生的结生,再往前看,只看到第三生的死亡心。可是这两生之间的无心之身,他没办法忆念,于是通过推理判断:“我一定是投生到了无想有情天。”他就是靠这样的推理之智,做到了极难做到的事——就像把劈成一百份的马尾毛尖端再穿过另一根尖端,又像在虚空中留下脚印。因此,世尊就在这个事缘中把他列为第一:“比丘们,在我的比丘弟子中,忆念宿住第一的,就是梭毗多。”巴利
Pabbajitvā asaññasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā asaññabhave nibbatti. Tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā avasāne manussaloke uppanno sāsane pabbajitvā tisso vijjā sacchākāsi. So pubbenivāsaṃ anussaramāno imasmiṃ attabhāve paṭisandhiṃ disvā tato paraṃ tatiye attabhāve cutimeva addasa. Atha ubhinnamantarā acittakaṃ attabhāvaṃ anussarituṃ asakkonto nayato sallakkhesi – ‘‘addhāahaṃ asaññabhave nibbatto’’ti. Evaṃ sallakkhentena panānena dukkaraṃ kataṃ, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭi paṭividdhā, ākāse padaṃ dassitaṃ. Tasmā naṃ bhagavā imasmiṃyeva vatthusmiṃ etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantānaṃ yadidaṃ sobhito’’ti (a. ni. 1.219, 227).
233 “诸位尊者,已经诵出了四条波罗夷法。”这句话在这里只是说明已经诵出的波罗夷法。不过,如果把它们归纳起来,就应当知道一共有二十四条波罗夷。
哪二十四条呢?
先说律典里提到的:比丘有四条,比丘尼不共的有四条,加起来是八条。
十一种不能成就的人当中:黄门、畜生、二根人这三种,是根身败坏、无因结生的。他们投生天界不受阻碍,但证道之路受阻,因为根身败坏,不能证得道果。他们的出家也被拒绝,所以这三种也是波罗夷。
贼住者、投靠外道者、杀母者、杀父者、杀阿罗汉者、污比丘尼者、出佛身血者、破僧者,这八种人因为自己的行为而败坏,落到不能成就的地步,所以也是波罗夷。
其中,贼住者、投靠外道者、污比丘尼者这三种,投生天界不受阻碍,但证道之路受阻。其余五种,天界和道果两者都受阻,因为他们是将投生于无间地狱的众生。
这样,这十一种加上前面的八种,一共是十九种。
再加上对在家人的形象生起欢喜、穿着在家衣服的比丘尼,就是二十种。因为她即使没有犯淫行,仅仅这样就已经不是沙门尼了。
以上这二十种就是波罗夷。巴利
233.Uddiṭṭhākho āyasmanto cattāro pārājikā dhammāti idaṃ idha uddiṭṭhapārājikaparidīpanameva. Samodhānetvā pana sabbāneva catuvīsati pārājikāni veditabbāni. Katamāni catuvīsati? Pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni tāva bhikkhūnaṃ cattāri, bhikkhunīnaṃ asādhāraṇāni cattārīti aṭṭha. Ekādasa abhabbapuggalā, tesu paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakā, tayo vatthuvipannā ahetukapaṭisandhikā, tesaṃ saggo avārito maggo pana vārito, abhabbā hi te maggappaṭilābhāya vatthuvipannattāti. Pabbajjāpi nesaṃ paṭikkhittā, tasmā tepi pārājikā. Theyyasaṃvāsako, titthiyapakkantako, mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, bhikkhunīdūsako, lohituppādako, saṅghabhedakoti ime aṭṭha attano kiriyāya vipannattā abhabbaṭṭhānaṃ pattāti pārājikāva. Tesu theyyasaṃvāsako, titthiyapakkantako, bhikkhunīdūsakoti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saggo avārito maggo pana vāritova. Itaresaṃ pañcannaṃ ubhayampi vāritaṃ. Te hi anantarabhave narake nibbattanakasattā. Iti ime ca ekādasa, purimā ca aṭṭhāti ekūnavīsati. Te gihiliṅge ruciṃ uppādetvā gihinivāsananivatthāya bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ vīsati. Sā hi ajjhācāravītikkamaṃ akatvāpi ettāvatāva assamaṇīti imāni tāva vīsati pārājikāni.
另外还有:男根下垂的人、背部柔软的人、用嘴含住他人的男根、坐在他人的男根上面。按这四种情况,就说有四种随顺波罗夷。因为,对双方来说,由于贪欲而做出同类行为,这种做法就称为“淫欲法”。所以,以这种方式,即使没有真正行淫,仅仅是以道入道而犯,也就随顺了淫欲波罗夷,因此称为随顺波罗夷。这样,这四种加上前面的二十种,合起来应当知道共有二十四种波罗夷。巴利
Aparānipi – lambī, mudupiṭṭhiko, parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhāti, parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti imesaṃ catunnaṃ vasena cattāri anulomapārājikānīti vadanti. Etāni hi yasmā ubhinnaṃ rāgavasena sadisabhāvūpagatānaṃ dhammo ‘‘methunadhammo’’ti vuccati. Tasmā etena pariyāyena methunadhammaṃ appaṭisevitvāyeva kevalaṃ maggena maggappavesanavasena āpajjitabbattā methunadhammapārājikassa anulomentīti anulomapārājikānīti vuccanti. Iti imāni ca cattāri purimāni ca vīsatīti samodhānetvā sabbāneva catuvīsati pārājikāni veditabbāni.
他不能和比丘们共住。所谓“不能和比丘们共住”,就是不能和比丘们一起参加布萨、自恣、诵波罗提木叉、僧团羯磨等各类僧团事务。所谓“如先前一样,后来也一样”,意思是:就像他以前在家时、还没受具足戒时那样,后来犯了波罗夷之后,同样也是不共住。他和比丘们之间没有布萨、自恣、诵波罗提木叉、僧团羯磨等各类共住之事,所以就说他不能和比丘们共住。在这里,我请问各位尊者——就是针对这四条波罗夷,我请问各位尊者:“你们在这里是否清净?”“是否在这里”就是“在这里是否”;意思是:在这四条波罗夷上,你们是否清净?或者,“是否在这里清净”意思是:你们是否清净?其余各处,意思都很清楚。巴利
Na labhati bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsanti uposatha-pavāraṇa-pātimokkhuddesa-saṅghakammappabhedaṃ bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ na labhati. Yathā pure tathā pacchāti yathā pubbe gihikāle anupasampannakāle ca pacchā pārājikaṃ āpannopi tatheva asaṃvāso hoti. Natthi tassa bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ uposathapavāraṇapātimokkhuddesasaṅghakammappabhedo saṃvāsoti bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ na labhati. Tatthāyasmante pucchāmīti tesu catūsu pārājikesu āyasmante ‘‘kaccittha parisuddhā’’ti pucchāmi. Kaccitthāti kacci ettha; etesu catūsu pārājikesu kacci parisuddhāti attho. Atha vā kaccittha parisuddhāti kacci parisuddhā attha, bhavathāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.